Complete WordPress & SEO Training Guide - Build Professional WordPress Websites from Scratch

1. Installing WordPress Using BlueHost: in this video will be installing WordPress using Blue Host. In other words, we're going to start setting up our website, so let's get started. So what is Blue host and why do we need them? Well, Blue Host is a Web host. In other words, they're going to allow us to install WordPress and all of the files that come with our website. Right? So WordPress is just a program that we use to customize our website the rest of our website . It's just going to be a bunch of files. And for those funds, we need a Web host who can store those files. And Blue host happened to be great. We have used him in the past. We used them. Now we think they work really well. They have great support and they are, in my experience, the fastest and easiest way to get WordPress installed. So let's go ahead and install word for us using Blue Host. Now all we're gonna do is go ahead and go to blue host dot com, and we're gonna pop up in this side here and we're just going to click on get started now. Next up, we have a bunch of different options or rather, price plans. As you can see, we have basic plus choice, plus and pro, and they all come with different features and different costs. Now, in the basic one, we only get to have one website, a limited amount of storage. We get a free SSL certificate unlimited band with ah lot of good stuff, you know, eventually asked our website growth we're going to want to expand. But for now we're going to go ahead and go with the basic because it's plenty off what we need. And as we grow bigger, we can go ahead and expand this plan. We're gonna go ahead and click on Basic and then selector. So now, in order to create our website, we need to have a Web host, right that is blue host and we need to have word for us installed on that Web host now in order to have our website, we also need a domain name in other words, in name for your website. So you could go ahead and purchase that name on Go Daddy or any other site that offers domain names. Or you could go ahead and write it in here and just buy it from Blue Host, and that's exactly what we're going to be doing. So before you write in your name here, you want to kind of have an idea off why you're choosing your name, right? So if you're going to be selling a certain product or a certain service, you're going to want a good name that reflects your brand that reflects that product, etcetera. Now for me and Jesper, we're just going to go with Robin. And just because that is our brand. So we're going to choose new domain, and we're also going to choose dot com here, and the reason we're choosing dot com is going to be evident later on in the course. But for now, let's just say that out of all off the other extensions is the most effective one. If you're already advanced and have a reason for another one off course, you can go ahead and pick that one. And if you already have a domain name here, write it in here, click on next and then blew host is gonna help you transfer from the and use that domain ing for this website. So we're gonna go ahead and click on next and perfect. The name is available now. If the domain name wasn't available, would have to go back and use another one. But lucky us, it is available. So next stuff, we're going to be feeling out our first name, last name or business name all of this personal stuff in here. And then we come to the package Information rights. The 1st 1 is the account plan. Now, as with most businesses and most price plans, the longer you take your price planet cheaper, it gets. Now we're going to go ahead and use the 12 month price. It is the most expensive, but also it is the least limiting. So we're agreed to go ahead and pick that one. There we go. And then there's a couple of things that we get for free. It's the set up feet. That's great. We get a domain registration that's also great. That's the name that we just picked. And then we get on SS l four free, which is also great. That is this little lock up here, and it makes your website look much more professional and safe. Now there's a couple of additional things in here. That's that you could buy that. You could include for a fee. Now, the 1st 1 is domain privacy protection. Now what this does, is that it? A voice, your name and email and personal information to get out on the web Now, the second that you publish your website. Ah, lot of information about you. Like your name, your like your email, etcetera is going to be public is going to be available because you now have a website and people can search for you and people can find you and your information. But if you choose this domain privacy protection, all of that information is hidden. And, you know, I prefer to keep it like that because I like my privacy. So we're gonna choose this one. And now for site look, Security for code guard for Blue host, a CEO or office email essentials. We're going to be getting all of those things using plug in, so we don't need to pay for them and some of these things we don't even need. So we're gonna go ahead and on, check all of these and just keep the domain privacy protection. You cannot check it if you don't want that. But we're going to keep it in here. Then we're going to scroll down and enter our credit card number and then click on Submit. Awesome. So we just purchased our web hosting. We got a domain name and now we're going to be setting up our WordPress website. In other words, our site. So we're going to go ahead and click on set password, and this is going to be the password so that we can access our blue host accounts. So let's go ahead and write in our password right now and then we're going to click on. I have read and agreed to blue his privacy policy and terms off service and we're gonna click on next. Great. So we just created our password. Now all we're gonna do is log in. So now Blue host is helping us customize our website already, even though we haven't really set up our website were able to choose a theme for it. What we're gonna do is we're gonna scroll down and click. Don't skip this step because we're going to be covering the theme that design and everything later on in the course. So let's skip this step and it's all down. So let's start setting up our website guys. We just set up our web hosting. We got our domain name now. Finally, it's time to get WordPress install so that we can customize the website itself. And remember, this is where we're going to be spending the vast majority of her time on WordPress because that's where we customize the website. So click on start building. Okay, guys, we just set up our website. Awesome. Now this is where we're going to be spending the vast majority off for time on the website itself. So so far, we have gone in a Web host a domain name and just God, our website up now it's not launched it not official. No one can access it but you so far. But now we're able to get started. We have everything set up. Good job. Let's move on to the next lecture 2. Logging In: In this video, you learn how to log into your WordPress website, which is a very handy skill to have. Now, before we go ahead and do anything, I want you to go and check out your mail inside your mail. You're going to have something that looks like this. It's the roux is verification. Now we want to verify our email. Otherwise, then you domain that we just got is going to be de activated and that's no fun. So before you do anything, post this video, go to your mail and verify your email. Okay, you're back. Great. So in order to log in to our WordPress, it's actually super simple, and you're going to be using this method basically all the time. All we're going to do is they were going to make a new tab here, and then we're going to write our website, which for us is Robin and jesper spurt dot com. And then we're going to do a forward slash that looks like that. And then we're going to write WP Dash ad men. Now I've included this in the resource is as well, and then we just press enter and then we get to this little log in screen, and all we're going to do is writing are used her name and then or email address and then our password and click on Logan. Now, in the beginning, when you get your blue host account, you get a word press up. Chances are it's gonna take a couple of days before this method works, simply because Blue host is a little slow so it can take a couple of days before you actually get to log in is going to say invalid email or invalid user name if it's not working, and if you forget your information, that's also in your mail. So in order to log in right now, if this is not working for you, all you need to do is go ahead and go to blue host dot com and then go in the upper right corner and click on Logan. And then here. All we're gonna do is that we're gonna go to the middle the second this is finished working and we're going to click on log into WordPress. And then here we are at our website. Awesome work, guys. So remember the majority off the time you're going to be using your website dot com forward slash WP dash admin. Okay. And then you log in their perfect see in the next lecture. 3. Navigate WordPress: in this video, we're going to be navigating WordPress. That dashboard is different functions, etcetera. So when you first log into your WordPress site, it's going to look like this right is going to say, Welcome toward press and then offer some help and we're gonna cut it can. I don't need help, because that's why I'm here. Right? And I wouldn't have anything to do if we use this. So we're going to click on. I don't need help here. They would go. And then we're gonna go through everything all of the different functions that WordPress has. So suddenly we get a slightly different looking our WordPress, and it looks like this. There's a lot of things going on here right now, but we don't need to concern yourself with this yet. Okay, that's later on. What we're gonna concern herself with is going to the left here. Now, this is the WordPress dashboard, right? And because we have installed WordPress using blue Host, we have certain preinstalled things in here. For example, we have blue host, which is a tab that you Conover over. And if you over over one of these tabs, there's gonna be a sub menu. This is a sub menu. We also have things like WordPress forms inside and often monsters. Now, if you would have installed WordPress with another Web host, then Blue host, some of these plug ins might not exist on your WordPress. So let's get started now. The first thing is the dashboard, right, and the dashboard is always going to be the main thing that pops up when you look into your website and we're going to be customizing this later on. And then we have something called updates. Now updates are super important because your theme, your plug ins, your WordPress itself is going to be needing updates from time to time and whenever one thing up days, for example, your WordPress theme that might get your plug ins out of sync. So whenever we see a number to the right here, we want to go ahead and click on updates, and then wherever you see the need to update whether it is the version of WordPress, it is a plug in or it's a theme. There's gonna be a cheque, books that you can click in and then click on updates so super important, always make sure that you keep everything up to date every single time that you log into WordPress. And then if we go down, we have something called posts in here. And post is basically your articles, your blawg post. Anything that you can post in the right in the written form is basically a post. So when you want to reach other people and write something that's called a post, so if I hold her over, you can check out all the post you have. You can add in new categories, tags, etcetera, down below. We have media, so media is basically in the video and a picture etcetera, that you have added onto your site. You can go ahead and check out your library to view all off them and also add new. But we're going to use another method for adding them in the posts later, and then we have pages now. Pages on your website could be, for example, a contact me page. Or it could be a blawg page or it could be a product page. Basically, when you go into a website, there are different tabs you can go into, like if you want to contact someone you click and contact me. Now that's called a page. So this is where you view all of the pages. And then here you can adding new page, and then we have common. So if anyone is commenting, you can go ahead and administer them from here. And then we have WordPress forms and this is a plug in. We're gonna go through plug ins later on. So we're gonna ignore this for now and then we have a parents now. Appearance is super important. It includes things such as our theme that we currently have. It includes things such as widgets, menus, etcetera. And if half off these things doesn't make sense to you. Never heard these words don't were about it. We're gonna learn all about this later on in the course. But basically, theme is to look off your entire website and you can change all of the appearances in here . And then we have plug ins and plug ins are huge. Basically, if there's a problem, there's a plug in. You can live by that moto. So with plug ins disguised a limit. Whenever you need to back up your site, you need security. You need certain customization or there is something that you want to edit or changed. There is a plug in for it, right? There's a plug in for everything you want to do. A contact form specifically is gonna be a contact form. Plug him and we're going to go through all of the essential and all of the best plug ins later on. But basically, here the sky is the limit, and then we have users and users are gonna be If you want to add someone as an author who writes on your website or you wanna add someone as an admin who has all off the access that do you have a swell or you could add someone who just helps you out and manage your website . Basically, here you can view the users, add them and check out your old user profile, and then we have tools. Now, when you install certain plug ins, they are going to pop up under tools in here. So if you go to tools, you're going to see that plug in name here and then you can access it, and other tools are going to be popping up on the dashboard to the left here and then we have settings and in settings you can change things such as If you want certain comments to be showing if you want comments at all, if you want to change the header your sub header. If you want to customize something on your website, if you want to change one off the core settings of your website basically in here, this is where things really happened. Like in general. You change the head of the stop header and everything. We're going to go through this Maurin debt later on. And then we have insights and we have often monster and these are also plug ins. We're just gonna leave them for now. Okay, now, if we go up, there's something up here that's called Jet Packing. That's a plug in as well. So we're gonna leave it. And then there's Blue Host and we have blue hose because, well, we installed our WordPress with Blue host. They are a web host, so we kind of got this tab when we installed our WordPress. And in here there are things such as the marketplace and in the marketplace. Blue hosts are selling different features different themes, plug ins, etcetera that can help us improve our site. But we're going to be used in free plug in, so we don't need to bother about that. We don't need to pay money for those things. I just want you to know that they exist, OK? And then if we go to the top up here, we first have the WordPress logo. And here you can read about word President. Or you can go to the support forums, all of that good stuff, nothing important. Nothing that you'll be using. And then we have the welcome right. And here we can visit our site and see what it looks like. And we're going to be doing that in a second. And to the right here we can see if we have gotten any new comments and also a quick access to those comments. All we need to do is click here and we can read them and administer them. And then to the right, we have something called New and we could create a new post in the media. A new page in New Yusor, etcetera. It's just a quick access part, and then we have catching if your pages slowing down is gathering up too much in the cash, you can go ahead and purge this. But if you don't know what that means, don't worry about it. We're going to go through this stuff later on. It's not important right now. And then finally we have the coming soon activate, and that's basically launching your site. But we don't want to do that yet, right? We haven't really started building our website yet, but know that it's right there and we can launch it any time we want to. So if you want to check out how our website looks right now, I would do is we hover over it. Welcome. And then we're just gonna open this in a new tab and then have a look at it. And this is what it looks like right now. Pretty plain, if I may say because we haven't chosen any theme, we haven't installed anything. But as you can see, there are still some things going on here right now. So your website exists? It looks like this. We're going to start customizing it. But before we go ahead and do anything, we're going to be using a theme. So let's move on to the next lecture and install our first theme guys see in the next lecture. 4. Install a WordPress Theme: in this video, you learn how to install a theme for your WordPress website. So let's get started. Now Let's start off at the back and off our website and the back end is when you just logged in at your website dot com forward slash WP dash admin. Right. So this is the back end and if we go to welcome here and we visit our site in a new tab, this could be called the front end off our website. Right. And this is where our theme matters. The theme is the look off the entire website. And right now there is a pre install theme that looks, well, very boring. And we're going to change that up and install a much more interesting theme. Okay, so let's go back to the back end here now, in order to change the theme, all we're going to do is go down to appearance and click on themes and before we get started and let's click these messages if you have them as well on yours away because they're just cluttering. There we go. So as you can see, there's already a theme preinstalled on our WORDPRESS website now, there are a couple of other themes as well. And these have been the release theme for WordPress, this one coming from 2017. And this 1 2000 and 16. Now what we want to do is install a new one, right, So we're going to go ahead and click on add new theme. Now, in here, you'll find a bunch of very interesting and completely free themes. So looking at the top here, we can see we're currently browsing featured. Now there are more tabs we can cross popular late this favorites premium. In other words, once you have to pay for and then we can put some filters right? So scrolling down, we can have a look at always there anything we find interesting. And if there is one we find interesting, we can go ahead and click on it to preview how it's going to look. So I just took this club travel by random, and we get a preview how this site looks like unedited. Okay, so let's say that you have a theme for your website. All you would need to do is click on search themes up here and let's search for work out, for example, and then we get a bunch of different themes showing up. So let's just scroll through and see if we find anything interesting. Well, this one looks really nice. So let's click on details and preview here. Okay, looks really cool. So let's say we want to grab this one. This theme all we need to do is click on the install here. You can also click on install right away here. And since these themes are already on your WordPress, all you need to do is click on this install button and then you can activate it right away . Now, if we go back in, click on themes here, you can see that the new Olympic theme shows up in here, and we still have our old old white boring theme in here. And it's not going to be on or activated until we click on Activate here. So let's click on, activate and then go back to the front and and just update this and we can see how our website looks like right now. As you can see, it just updated. Okay, so now we have a new theme installed, so let's go back so you'll find all of your themes in here. You can activate another one. Let's say we want to activate the old one back. All would need to do is go ahead and click on Activate for the 2017 1 in here, okay? And then would have the old one right back. But there are also more ways and different themes that you can be finding. For example, there's something up here called upload, and that is, if you want to upload a theme that it's not directly from wordpress dot org's. We know that is from word protect or because we're in WordPress and we have clicked on themes and search for it internally in here. Okay, so let's say that we want to grab a theme outside off WordPress. Now, the website that I recommend for this is theme forest .net. They have been around for many years. They have a bunch of different themes, like, I don't know how many themes they have available over thousands, and they work great. So go to theme for stop net. It will be in the resource is and then over over at WordPress and in here, you're going to find a bunch off different genres. So let's say that you want to have a theme from corporate. Now, the themes in here are more premium themes. So they are going to cost you. You can scroll down here and look at one of these teams. So you could either go on a site like this and buy a theme. And the benefit with that is that you get a lot of feature with it and have a unique, very unique look to them. Usually you can also google WordPress free themes and find themes in there. So let's say that we find a theme in here that we like. We're going to click on preview, have a look at how it looks like I think it looks really good. Okay, so then all we would need to do is go ahead and purchase it. Okay, so we have already perched a theme. And what's gonna happen next is that you're gonna get on email, and as soon as you have confirmed your email with bought a theme called Restart. As soon as you have confirmed your email, you get to go to the download section off theme forest, then you will click on download here and just download the install a ble wordpress file. There we go. And once it's downloaded, let's head back to the back end of our store and here we are. And what we're gonna do next is they're working like click on upload theme and then I'm going to click on choose file in here and just select this one. Now, if you're not able to choose your file, all that you need to do is go ahead and go to your file and then right click on the file and then click on compress. So what this is gonna do is make it into a sick file. And once it's a CIF file, we're gonna be able to upload it as a WordPress theme. There were goes to now we have the restart dot sip. So let's go back. And then we're gonna once again choose file, and then we're gonna double click on restart dot sip and then click on install now. And once it's done, installing, which might take a couple of minutes, is gonna look like this. You're going to be taken to this page. So now if I go back to themes. We're going to see that the new theme that would just download it is going to show up. And there it is. Here it is. Restart. So all we need to do is now click on, Activate and then it's gonna be activated. Let's go to the front and and have a look and make sure everything worked. I'm gonna update this one. And here it is. Our new theme. Restart. Awesome. So these are the two different ways that you can install a new theme on your WORDPRESS website on. Now, if I want to remove the theme that I just downloaded, all I would need to do is go back to annul theme. Let's say this 2019 the dull one. I'm just gonna activate that one, and then I'm gonna go to restart and then I'm going to click on theme details and then I'm going to click on delete down here and then click on OK and the theme will be deleted. And this way you can keep all of your theme's clean. In other words, you don't have a bunch of themes say that you're not interested in, and you can start filtering between them. Awesome guys. So this is how you install a theme in the two different ways You don't wordpress dot or or you downloaded and use theme forest, for example, Now to follow along in this course, we're going to be using a specific theme. Okay, so let's click on add new theme here, and then we're going to search for theme, and this one is called Ocean WP. Now, this is a great looking theme that is also very easy to work with and has so many different functions to it. So we're gonna use this one, and then we're gonna go ahead and click on Activate and they would go. And now it's activated. And again, if you want to get to the front end of your store to check it out if you don't have the tab open, all you need to do is go to the welcome part here and click on visit site. I prefer to open it in a new tab, so I have both my back in and the front end of my store open. And as you can see here, it is our new theme. It's just installed. Great job guys, so you can, of course, installed anything that you would like. But in order to follow along with this course, I strongly recommend that you installed the Ocean WP theme. And then we're going to continue on to the next lecture and build upon this great job. See in the next lecture. 5. Required Theme Plugins: Now, if you've been following along the course this far, you will just have installed your first WordPress theme. Congratulations. And if you've been following it step by step, you will just have installed the ocean WP theme. Okay. And as you might have noticed on the top pair, there is a warning sign. This theme recommends the following plug ins, so we're going to click on begin installing plug ins Now. The reason that we need this plug ins is because the theme has certain elements to it that needs the plug ins in order to function. If we don't install these plug ins, the theme is not going to be functioning properly. So whenever you get any theme that has recommended plug ins to them, always install those plug ins. So next up, we're just gonna select these two and we're going to click on bulk action, click on install and then apply, and it's gonna take you to this page, and it's telling us that the install was successful and that's great. So now you're going to be taken to these pages, asked you to run and set up elemental one off the plug ins. We're not going to do that? We're not gonna touch this because plug ins are later on in the course. Okay, You will also have noticed that it's added itself to the left side off our dashboard like plug ins often will do. Now, all we're gonna do is go ahead and click on appearance and click on themes, and we're just gonna make sure that it has no more warning. Sign it. As you can see, it doesn't is asking us to set up Google analytics, and we're gonna do all of that later. So we're just installed of required plug ins for our theme. Not everything is gonna have plug ins that are required, but if they do install them it make sure that the theme works properly, and then we move on to the next lecture. 6. Set Your WordPress Title: welcome to the next section off the course. Now it's time to really get down and start building up our website and making it look good . Now in this video, we're going to be changing the title off our website. So let's get right into it now. From here. Let's first have a look at how our website is looking, As you know, before we go here and then I'm gonna open this visit site in a new tab. So this is currently how our website is looking. Not too exciting, Not too impressive yet. But that part is yet to come. So as we can see the title off, our website is currently welcome and as nice it is to be welcome. It is not a great title off a website, right? So we're gonna go ahead and change this title. We're also going to be changing this tagline and this tagline is going to be representing basically what is your website about? OK, so let's go ahead and do that right now. So let's go back from the front and to the back and off our websites. Then we're going to go down two settings and we're going to click on general and in here we have the site title and we have the tagline. So this is where you really want to get creative with your website? What your website is going to be about, how you want to present yourself. Now the site title here is going to be Robin and Esper because it is the name of our company it is the name of for Brand. It is basically how we present ourself and how people recognize us. So we want to go with the site title that is Robin and Jesper Now for the tagline. We want to explain more what the website is about. So since we're going to be selling courses and going to write something like courses to change your life, for example, we're doing courses in business. In marketing, we can help people land a job. We can help people, you know, become self employed can do a lot of thing to change a person's life. So that's how we're going to be presenting ourselves here. So the site title will be Robin and Jesper and the tagline courses to change your life. And I'm going to scroll down and I'm going to click on save changes. Okay, so let's go back and have a look at our site. Remember, this was the old one. Now I'm going to update this. And now this site is named Robin and Jesper and where percent innocent would a tag line that says courses to change your life. All right, so now if you haven't already, it's your turn to go ahead and do this, go into settings and then general, and then find your title. Find your tagline, and then we move on to the next lecture. 7. Set Your Home Page: in this video, we're going to be setting our home page. So what? It's a home page. Well, if we have a look at how our website looks right now at the front off our website, it looks like this. So when we go to Robin and Jesper dots, come the first page that pops up here, that is our home page. That is to go to page. The first page has gone on display. Now, right now we have this a post to the left, and we have a side bar to the right. So basically, we're displaying a blawg. So what we're going to do is that we're going to be changing our home page and build something to represent ourselves, and we're going to move this blawg part to a different section. So let's go ahead and do that. So let's go to the back end off our website in here, and the first thing we're gonna do is click on pages and then we're gonna go ahead and remove these two page that that came with the theme which is going to select them. And then here it bulk action. We're going to click on move to trash and then apply. So now we have no pages, and next up, we're going to click on add new, and then we're going to click down this tutorial because I will be your tutorial. And then we're just gonna write a title. So the 1st 1 is going to be home, okay. And then we want to change the content layout to full with. Now the full with here is going to be removing this sidebars we want to use full with. We're also going to go down and click on title and then where it says display page title, we're going to click on Disable here. Now, what that is going to do is disabled the name. So instead of it saying home here is just not gonna say anything because we don't need to explain that it is a home page is gonna be self evident. So when we have done this, we're gonna go ahead and click on Publish and then click on publish again. They will go and then we're gonna go ahead and click on add New once again. And now we're just gonna call this blogger. It could be article or it could be anything, but it's gonna have the same theme as this one worth displaying your post and is also displaying the sidebar. Okay, so whether there's gonna be articles for blawg posts, that's completely up to you. What you want to create? We're just gonna call it Blawg here, and then we're going to click on Publish and then publish again. Perfect some. Now, when we click on all pages here, we're gonna have to pages created we're gonna have home and we're gonna have blawg. Okay? But still, even if I refresh this page, which is Robin and jesper dot com, it's still going to be showing the same page in here. So what we need to do is set in. You first paid in new homepage. So we're going to go ahead and go down to settings, and then we're going to click on reading. So right now the home page we have is displaying our latest post. We want a static page and a static pages. It's gonna be the same page. It doesn't change. So we're going to click on a static page here, and then we're going to select home as our home page and then for post page. We're going to be selecting Blawg. Okay, so that is where all of the posts are going to end up. Now, if you don't want to have a blogger and the articles or anything, all you need to do is click on selector and you won't have any that's going to solve that problem. But for our intents and purposes, we're gonna have it for this. So we're just gonna select Blawg, and then we're going to scroll down and click on save changes. Okay, Setting saved. So let's go back and then refresh this page, which is Robin and jesper dot com. And now say, Welcome to our new home page. So it's completely blank. It looks dull, which it's supposed to, because we're going to start building something in here. That means that we can put anything we want Teoh represent ourselves the way that we want to. We have also removed the sidebar. So this is our home page Robin and jesper dot com. Now, if I would write forward slash blawg, we're going to be getting to the Blawg part off the site which is here now. I haven't put that out as menu button. Yes, just know that it exists. It exists because it's called blog's. So it's Robin and just don't come forward slash blawg. But right now we don't need it. All that we need is to make sure that we have Robin and jesper dot com We have said our home page. You might also have noticed that the tagline has disappeared from here and that is due to this theme. Now, some themes are going to have the tagline disappears sometimes the title as well. And this theme dust that Now, if you really want to have your tagline showing, I'm going to show you a way to do that because we will be representing ourselves in here with our home page. We can add in that tag line in there. Now, later on, in the course, I'm going to show you other uses for S e o how to properly use to tag link to your advantage. And if you don't know what S CEO is, don't worry about it. We don't need to know it now that's later on. But let me show you how to add the tagline in this theme should you want it. And if you don't want it, you can move on to the next lecture right away. So this is how you do it. You click on customize, and then we're gonna go down to header and general, and then we're going to change the style from minimal to top menu. Now notice this is going to be changing the entire outlook off. Your website is going to be adding a search bar. It's going to be centering your title, and it's going to put the tag line right down below. I think it is a really nice look. And whether you choose to go with this one or the original, which is minimal, that's completely up to you for us. We're going to go with the minimal to continue on in the course. And when you're all done, all you need to do is click on publish. Okay, guys. So we just said our home page. Great job. Let's move on to the next lecture 8. Introduction to Guthenberg: Okay, guys, great job on making it this far in the course. Now, before we move on and start editing our home page, making it look all good, we're going to be learning about the post and pages editor called the Gutenberg editor. So let's dive right into it. Now. All I have done here is that I at the back end off or website have gone to pages and then add in you. So this is the editor. This is the way it looks like. If you are old time WordPress user, you're gonna notice that it looks a little bit different because wordpress completely changed the editor in December 2018. And if you're completely new to WordPress than awesome, because this editor is much more enjoyable, easy, intuitive and more fun to be using. So let's get started now. The first thing we want to do before we go ahead and start adding and learning is to have a look at this ocean WP settings. Now, these settings are unique to our theme, meaning if you don't have this theme, you're not gonna have these settings in here, so we're not going to use them for now, So I'm gonna click up here and just collapse it like that. And then let's go ahead and add a title. Now, this could be in a title for any page. We already made a home page. We could just call this about about me. Page just essay test. Now, the first thing we're gonna go through is we're going to start at the top. Pair up here. We have something called adding a block. Now, the beautiful thing with this editor is that you're going to be working in blocks. A block is basically any type of content. It could be a paragraph on image reverse. It could be a column, A button. It could be a gallery, anything. So we're going to be working with blocks throughout the editor, and we're going to be adding our content within that block, but blocks, we're gonna go through more in depth in the next lecture. We're also not going to be spending a lot of time with this bottom because if we go down here to the block itself, noticed that we also have the same button here to the left. And this is much easier to use because you always know what kind of content that's gonna appear in which blocks. So I always use this block to the left in here, and I I think you're going to be enjoying that as well, then to the right off the add content up here we have the undue which is very handed to have. Basically, if I write hey, I can undo it. And then to the right, I can redo it. A great feature to the having. We also have something called content structure. If I click on it, we get to keep an eye on the world. How many words we have been riding. How many headings, paragraph blocks Really great. Especially if you want to limit the amount off worse that you using in any certain post or article and then to the right there we have something called block navigation. Now, when you started building your articles or posts or pages in here, you're going to be getting to the block navigation and you can instantly access any part of it. So if we have a lot of images on the bottom, we're going to see that in the block. Navigated, weaken, double click on them, and we're gonna access them right away to the right Here. We can also use the elementary editor, which is one of the plug ins that came with the theme. But we're not going to be using that. And let's move on to the right here. We can save the page as a draft. Meaning you can continue working on it without it being published. If you wanna Billy big, nice page article or anything, you can say the draft. Close it down, Come back work, born it. And keep saving the draft. Now, if you want to see what it looks like right now, you can click on the preview here. And when you click on the preview is gonna open in new tab for you. And in this tab, you're gonna have a look at what it's looking light like right now. So this is the current preview. Not too exciting, right? So we're gonna collect that one down, and then to the right, we have published, we click on here and we publish this page. And then we also have these settings. We can choose to turn it on or off in here. Now we're gonna basically having this on all the time. We're going to go through this in just a second to the right. Here. We have even more tools and options, and the first thing we have is the top toolbar. Now, notice if I click in this block now, this is currently a paragraph block and I've write something. Hey, hey, you're gonna notice that we get a tool bar up here, right? It's very easy to access. It looks really nice. But if I go to the options and I click on top toolbar, watch that toolbar and notice that it pops up to the top up here. Some people are going to be preferring having the tool bar up here. But me personally, I prefer to have it where I'm riding. I think it's easier to access. And then we also have the spotlight mode, and basically, the spotlight mode is gonna just like that. Is gonna put a spotlight on wherever it is that you are working. So if I'm working here working here now, this is gonna be in a more focused color, and everything around is gonna turn to gray, right? So if I turn this off, We're gonna notice that it gets to its original color. It's just easier way to be focusing on. And then we have the full screen mode. Now the full screen mode can be really nice because it covers the entire screen. It removes distractions. It allows you to work in a really focused kind of way. And I enjoy using this feature. You might ask Well, and then we have something called a visual editor, which is what we're using right now. But there's also a code editor. So let's add a piece of text here once again, we're just gonna right? Hey, and then I'm gonna turn go from visual editor to a code editor, and look what happens. It turns this entire piece of text that I had into a code. So when we're working with the visual editor, we don't actually see this coat. The code is just doing its work. And like we were talking about earlier, this is a paragraph and that's what showing in the code. We're going to be working with codes at different parts in the course. But don't worry about that, because it's most of the time. Just copy, pasting which is super easy coast are not scary. I promise. I don't work with coding. I just cope it pay certain pieces off code, and that's what we're going to be doing in the course. So let's turn this one back to visual. There we go and remove this sticks and then under tools, we have managed all reusable blocks. So when you started adding pieces off content, you can actually save down those blocks. So if you then click on here, you can go ahead and have a look at all of your say blocks and start reusing them very handy feature. And then we have the keyboard shortcuts. Now, since I'm using a Mac, I'm gonna have these interesting command bottom. But if you're on a PC, it's gonna look a little bit different. Now, these are the short custody, different things you can be doing. For example, duplicating the selective block, removing the selected block whenever you want to go. Really official. You can learn a couple of these shortcuts for the things that you used the most, and then we also have Kobe all contents. All I do is I click on this bottom to copy all of the content that is currently on the page and then we have options down here. Now, the option part is going to be allowing you to show which one off these features that you want to have included. So if we go into the option, you can see, for example, at the panel the document panel were currently showing the Perma link to feature image discussion and page attributes. Rights were also using advanced pounds for the Ocean WP theme settings, which we just collapse that little bar. Now, if you want to go really clean, you're not gonna and you know you're not gonna use this ocean WP set things. We could just remove this one and you see that it disappears. We're not going to bother about custom fields because that is about coding. And also, if you're not going to be using these for a while and you're gonna be writing a big page or a big poster article, you might want to remove this because it makes things so much cleaner. Also, when we start using plug ins, they're gonna take up some space. So this is a way to de clutter whenever you're working on anything, Then on the top here we have the enable tips. So if you want a couple of tips along the way, you can enable this and it's gonna pop up along the way. And then we have the enable pre published checks and what that is It's basically this part over here. So if I click on publish right now, you can say that is asking me, are you ready to publish? And it's also telling me the kind of way that I'm publishing it is gonna visibility is gonna be public, and I'm gonna publish it immediately. So if I go to options and I press this one away, then it's just gonna publish it right away. OK, so that's the pre published checks and then we have two options. We have the blocks and we have the document and we're gonna go over blocks in the next lecture angle, really In depth into those here in document. We have a couple of things that we can change. The first thing would be the visibility. So when I publish this, what is gonna happen? Well, right now we have it set to public, but we can also change it to private meaning. It's only gonna be for the admissions and people with access to the word precise, or we can have it password protected, meaning Onley. Certain people with the password can go ahead and read whatever this that you have written , and then we have the publish. When do you want to publish it? Now you can back data it. You can go back and have it look like it's published in January. For example, if you have any sort of historical articles order, it's a relevancy to having it publishing on earlier date. You can go ahead and set it like that. You can also put it in the future, making sure that is going to be published in, Let's say, a month in a week or in a day and then set the time and everything here and then we have depending review, meaning, if we put this one on is gonna be up for review and you have to allow it before it's published. Okay, and then we can move it to trash. If we would like that and then we have the Perma link and the Perma link is basically the U R l Now, if you remember when we were checking out our website and we wrote Roman and jesper dot com forward slash blawg Now, that took us to the Blawg part off the website. Now here. If I publish this page and it's gonna look like this about and then dash me so then it's gonna be Robin and jesper dot com forward slash about dash me. Then they're going to get directed to this about me page so we could be changing it. We could write, for example, info. So then it would be Robin and just not come forward slash info, and they would get right to this page. And you also get a preview down here. You can access is and check it out. Okay, so I'm just gonna have it like that. And then we have the featured image and a feature image is, for example, if we're making a blood post, then we can set a feature in mixed. It's going to be representing that block post we consider featured image for this page. Maybe a picture off me and Jesper, or maybe a picture off on admin or a picture of me or a picture of Jesper, for example, or a picture off you that's going to be representing this page or this post and then a discussion. We can allow or not allow comments to be made. And then we have page attributes now with a lot off the themes. We have different templates. So, for example, have the elemental cameras elemental, full with, and we can make it into a landing page. If you have a different theme, it's gonna have different templates in here that you can just changed outlook of this, Um, and then we have the parent page. Now a parent page is basically, if you want this to turn into a child's page, So what a parent pages is the top page. Let's say that we are selling a service. Let's say that we're selling coaching. Then the coaching would be the parent page and a child page might be prices for the coaching. Booking for the coaching would also be a child page, dates, location. All of these additional pages that kind off are connected to the coaching would be child's pages. So for about me, it might be things like we could make a child's page For about me. We can also write about Austin. We can make a child's page for an admin for a Web editor for Jesper for me, etcetera. And then all we would need to do is choose which one is going to be the parent page. So if I pick home right now, then this is gonna turn into a child's page, okay? And then we have the order as well. Which number you want it to be in when it comes to being a child's page? So those are all of the settings right now, we have gone through the top right here, and also the document how to preview publish everything. Now, in the next lecture, we're going to go through how to use the blocks. Now the blocks is gonna be the fundamental aspect on how to make your page and your post look really, really good. So let's move on to the next lecture and learn all about blocks and how we can design our pages and posts. See, in the next lecture, guys 9. Pages, Posts Editor & Blocks: Alright, guys, let's continue learning about the pages and Post Editor. And now let's learn more about blocks. OK, so we're back here. We're still at the same test page that we created, and we're going to start going through what blocks are and how to use them. So this is a block and a block is basically going to contain your content. So whatever content it is that you have here, that's going to be putting a block four months, so if I write a piece of text there, for example, piece off takes, then this would be the first block. Okay, Now, if I wanted to add another block, all I would have to do is click on Enter and I would be creating another block down here. Okay, so this is the first block up here, and this is thesis unblock down here. Now, if I want to add a block above, I would just click on the plus here, and it's gonna add a block up above, or I could go and click on this one. It's gonna add a block down below. OK, so what can you do with a block? Well, the first thing you can do is choose what you want your block to contain, what kind of content that you want to be using. So if we click on the plus here, ad block, the first thing we can do is that we can search for any specific block. So, for example, if you want to use a call them I concert for call them, you're gonna have it right there. If I want to have, For example, I want to embed YouTube. I could you serve for you to be gonna get the embed right there. So once you get accustomed to this, you're going to be using the search function a lot because it makes things this quick. It's absolutely awesome. So let's go through the different types of content you can have in your block. So the first category here is the most used. That's a paragraph heading image basically the most common ones where the gallery verse archives, quote button, columns, etcetera, etcetera. Now, we're not gonna be going through all of these because they would be taking forever. But along the course, we're going to be using a lot of them. I recommended to experiment with a lot of these see how they work and function. But we're gonna go through the most common and useful ones and then scrolling down. If I click here, we have something called in line elements. So on in line image could be, For example, if you want some text to the left and an image to the right, we could be using an in line elements in here. Let's collapse this one as well. And then we have the common blocks and most commonly used. And that's gonna be the paragraph two heading the image gallery quote list, audio cover file or video. So, in other words, if I would click on video here, then I'm going to get to add the video and in that particular block is going to be displaying the video that you uploaded. And then we also have formatting and former thing. Could be if you want to write a verse if you want to add a piece of code, and also we have the classic editor and this is for your old time WordPress users. So, like I told you in the earlier lecture, this is a new editor. If for some reason you would like to use the classic one. You can go ahead and click here, and within that block, we're going to be having the classic editor. So if you have an old WordPress with old plug ins that you still want to be using that are not functional with this WordPress, you could go ahead and activate the classic one and then get those plug ins to work. If you're new to WordPress, chances are we're not gonna touch this. We don't need it. We have custom. HTML, which another form off coding that we're not gonna use if we want the same form a thing for everything. Within this block, we would use the pre formatted. We can use a pull quote, which is gonna make the quote within the post frame. There's another one for quote up above. That takes up much bigger space. This one, it's more narrow. This was called a pull quote, and then we have a table and the table could be if you're offering, for example, different prices for a certain product for different functions. Like when we signed up with Blue Host, for example, if we got the basic with the premium package in there were more packages. Basically, by using a table, you could have different package deals with different prices. So there's a lot of very useful things that you can add into your block that makes this so easy and intuitive to use. And then we also have the layout elements. You can addy bottom, for example, he by now bottom several columns. Media takes mawr page breaks separator, spacer basically that it fixed the layout that you can tell. There's a lot of good stuff in here, and then we have widgets. Now a widget performs a specific function within the box. So if I would use a archives widget than the entire book is going to be displaying the archive. And if I used WP form, for example, is going to be displaying the WordPress form, we could, for example, use a contact form widget. Then that entire block would turn into a contact form that we could be using a short code categories or latest comments. So within that block it would always be displaying the latest comments. And then we have latest post, so we just always performs a specific function for that block. It changes the entire block into that specific function. And finally we have embeds. And this makes embedding so easy and so simple. Like here. For example, if I wanted to add a YouTube video, all I would do is click on YouTube here and then add in that link that you to blink and then we would have the YouTube video up and running the same with, for example, Instagram or Facebook. All I need to do is putting, for example, willing to the post. And then the post is going to be displaying within the bloc. Super easy, super fast. And there's a lot of different embeds in here, as you can tell like Ah lot. Okay, so let's go ahead and actually add one. Let's go to common blocks and we're going to add on image in here. So in order to add an image as you can tell, it just changed the entire block in here. All I'm going to do is click on upload, and I'm just gonna choose an image lists. Let's choose this one so there's gotta find a picture off me, and just for that we've got a while ago, so humor me for a second while I'm using this. So as you can tell, we just change this block into an image block. And if we look at the previous one, this would be a paragraph block. Okay, now that's the most basic. If you just ride in the text and you don't change anything, that's a paragraph block. So that is a very easy way to be editing the blocks. Now, if we go to another block down below here and we move on to the right, you can see that there are three different I comes in here Now these icons are dynamic. What that means is that they're going to be displaying the latest used blocks if we have been using. So if I'm adding a lot of pictures and doing a lot of headings, a lot of paragraphs, then they are going to be displaying here. So we get easy access to them, which is a really useful and makes the whole editing a lot faster. I love this system for that. So these three are always delayed, this use content type, and then if I click in on this block, you can see that there are a couple of things that we can do to the block now. The first thing would be we can actually change this block type and we can transform it into a cover into filing to media and text. Now, because we're using an image, we can transform it into similar blocks without ruining the block itself. Now the other things we also can do is that we can, for example, aligning to the right middle left. We can also make it wider like this, and we can watch it in its full with we can add it the image and more. Interestingly, we have more options in here, and the more option is going to be different, depending on what kind of content that you have in your block. So in here, for example, I could be hiding the block settings. I could duplicate it. I could insert a block before then. It's going to be inserting a block up here. Insert a block after is going to be inserting a block after and I can add it as HTML and I can add to reusable blocks and then finally I can remove the block. Now, if you remember this ad to reusable blocks. If we added in there and then we go to the options in the upper writer and then to manage all reusable blocks, then we get access to all of this kind of saved blocks that we went through in the previous lecture. Okay, so I also want to show you another function. Now you'll notice that there's a lot off point and click in here. In other words, it's super simple to choose what you want. Click on it and you have it. But there's also a drag and drop function. So if I click on one of the content blocks like in this picture and we look to the right, we can see that we have something here called Block, and this is going to allow us to edit the block, specifically the one that we have targeted. So for this image, for example, I could be adding in on alternate text on alternate text that is to describe what the pictures for the search engines. More about that later, I could change the image size three thumbnail size to full size or medium. I could change the width and height. I could link it to somewhere, and I can also go into advance for CSS. Now, that's the code, and we're not gonna need that. But my point here is that if I click on a block and I go to the rights here, this is why we always have these settings activated. If I click on a block and go to the right, I can edit the properties off the content off that block. So if I go to the paragraph here, notice how the block changed now in here, I could be changed in the font size. I could be changing more specifically in here. And interestingly, I can also add a drop cap making the first letter really big like that. We can change the color settings and we can also add the code here Should we want that? So in other words, you click on it and you can change it. You can also customize this size like this for the image. Basically, everything is just point and click. Now, there's also a dragon drop function within this. So let me show you how effective that is. Now if I want to add a block in between these, the piece of takes the paragraph, in other words and the image all I would do is I'm gonna click on the plus here, and then I'm gonna add in a heading. And then I'm gonna call this a piece off heading because I'm very creative. As you can tell now the order here doesn't make sense. Right. So we have this paragraph, we have the heading in the middle, and then we have this image down below. So if I want to change the position off, let's say the paragraph here and I want to add it to the bottom. Then all I would need to do is either I hover my mouse over here and I click on the down arrow and it's gonna move this down. So if I just click on it like that, I'm gonna move it all the way down to where I want it now. The second way I can do this is that I can put my mouse to the left here where we have the six dots and then I click and hold, and then I can just drag and drop it where I want it. So let's put it in between here and this is what makes it so intuitive and simple to make pages and to make post with this editor. It's highly improved from the previous version. So let's go ahead and put that one back down here. They would go, so it's super simple to use now if I want to remove a block, all I would need to do is that I click on the block. I go to more options here, and then I click on a remove block. There we go and the same here. Click here and remove block and same here. And then I click on a remove block, and then I have removed all off the blocks rights. So now we know how to use this editor and the many different functions in it, and basically here the sky is the limit on how you use it and how creative you get. But the most important message here is that it's actually super easy to do and very intuitive. Once you learn the function, you can just point and click and drag and drop, and you're going to be making beautiful pages and beautiful post in no time. And it's a lot off fun. OK, guys, let's start using this knowledge that would just learn and start building our home page See in the next lecture. 10. Edit Your Home Page: Okay, guys, it's time to start applying what we have learned and start editing our home page and make it look good. Let's get right into it. So we're going to start off at the back end off our website here, and then we're gonna go ahead and click on pages and go to all pages here. Now, what we can do right away is to hover a mouse over about me and then click on trash because that was just a practice patient we created to check out the editor. Now, what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go ahead and we're going to click on home because that's our home page, and we're gonna make it look awesome. So let's click on home. All right, So to get you up to speed, remember what we did in the previous lectures. When we said our home page, we use the ocean WP settings and we made sure that the content layout has a full with meaning. We remove the right side bar, and we also went down to title and disabled it so that this home isn't being displayed on the page itself. Okay, so that's all we're gonna use the ocean WP set things for. We're just gonna collapse this and then not use it anymore. All right, let's get started. Now, in order to speed up this demonstration a little bit, I have a pre written text here that I'm going to be using. Okay. Now, for your own purposes and intense you can be writing asks you make your design for your home page when it comes to designing a home. Pacers? No. Right or wrong, there are so many ways of doing it. And you can I'm sure make it look much better than me now that you have the tools to do So . So what I'm gonna do is that I'm gonna start up by copying this piece off text they were Go command, see? And then I'm gonna go back. So the first thing I'm gonna do is click on this block hair. Remember? It's already a paragraph block. I'm gonna click here, and I'm just gonna pasted in. Okay, so here we have the first piece off text. Now, before I move on, I would actually like this piece of takes to be a paragraph and I would like this to be a headline. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna click away. I'm gonna put my mouse and then click on the ad block so it adds a block above and then I'm gonna click on heading and then select this piece of the text. I'm gonna cope it and then remove it from here. There we go. And then I'm gonna go back to this block and just paste it in. OK, now I'm also going to center it. So I'm gonna move on to my right. I'm gonna send to it, and I'm gonna make it a heading one. Now they lower the heading number, the bigger detects is going to be OK. And I want this headline to be big, so I'm gonna use a heading one. There we go. So there's no greater joy than watching beautiful testimonies of people achieving their goals and dreams. Awesome. Next up, I want to add in a picture, or rather, two pictures off. Our course is to show off what it is that we have to offer on our website. Now, remember, a home page is meant to be displaying what you're all about. OK, so I really want to show that first off, we're making courses. And also secondly, what kind off course is it is that we're making? I'm gonna put my mouth. I'm gonna heat enter, is going to create a new block down below, and then I'm going to click on the plus their adblock, and then I'm going to search for gallery there ago and add that one in. Okay, so the 1st 1 I'm going to add is a picture off Shopify or Shopify Course Rather. So I'm gonna choose this picture and just double click on it. And then I'm gonna let this one load up. There we go. And then I'm going to click on upload an image again, and I'm going to select the one from digital marketing course. There we go. Awesome. Now notice the order off. This image is the first when I upload gets put first, and then the second picture goes to the right and then the next, and then the next. Should I want more pictures? But I don't. So what I want to do here is that I actually want to make them bigger. I want to make them wider. Gonna go ahead and click on wide with. So they take up more space and then I'm also gonna click on them, and I'm going to write a caption in here, and the capture is going to be something that describes the picture. Okay, so here I'm going to write. First of explain that it's a course on what the course does. Start your online business with show. If I okay, and I'm gonna do the same here with digital marketing when I click on right caption down here and then I'm going to write learn market research, how to attract on audience and how to sell. There we go. So this is what we have created so far. Now, let's have a look in the preview how it looks. Remember that we have already published this page. Their home page is published, so we can't just click on preview. We have to update it first and then preview it. What we could also do is click on switch to draft to be editing it right there instead of just keeping the update. When you update it, it goes live instantly. But we're gonna do this for this course, but we're gonna do that for this demonstration. So I'm just gonna click on updates and then I'm going to click on preview. So this is how it looks like right now. I think it looks really nice. Now what I would like to see is this text being bigger and also this text being centers. I'm gonna go ahead and do that. I'm gonna go back to the editor. I'm gonna click in here, and then I'm gonna change the phone size from normal two medium, okay? And I'm also going to align it to the center. I'm going to click on updates and then I'm gonna click, come preview, and then we're gonna have a look at how it looks right now. There we go. OK, I think it looks really nice. I'm happy with this. Let's continue adding some more material. So I'm going to go back here now, remember, with the design, there's no right or wrong here. This is the way I am designing this home page. You can follow suit and do similar, or you can find your own design is completely fine now that you know how the editor works. So I'm going to go back to the text and I'm going to copy the rest off this text here, Command. See? And then I'm gonna go back here. I'm going to be clicking on this block and just pasting it in. Now. Notice what happens when I paste this in. What happens in here is that they all turn into separate blocks. This is super handy because it means that you can edit them block by block, piece of text by piece of takes. You can also change the order off them Should you want that. Okay, so what we're gonna do is that we're gonna leave it like this for now except that we're gonna align them to the center because I know that I want everything in the center. So all I do is I click on the box and I click on a line to center Click, Aligned to center, click aligned to center. I'm gonna miss say, if I keep saying that And there were click and ally into center. Everything is aligned. Everything is looking nice, I think. Let's stop guessing and instead update it and preview it. Ok, guys, this is actually looking really nice. I'm enjoying this. Look now There's just one thing. I'm missing rights here, and that is something to make this a little bit more personal. And that would be a picture of me and Jesper in the bottom here. And then I'm actually going to be really satisfied with this. So let's go ahead and take care of that right away. Let's go back, scroll down here and then down here, I'm going to click on the plus sign and I'm going to add on image and going to click on upload, find a picture off me and Jesper. There we go. And then I'm going to change the size of this. Now this is way too big. So I'm going to click it and just make it smaller. Actually want this really tiny ever go, and I'm going to be centering this one as well. All right, there we go. And then let's click on Update and then have a look at how it looks like scrolling down. And there we are. Okay, so let's break down What we just did. We have a headline that attracts our audience. We're passionate about teaching so instantly we get into on emotion, passionate, and we get into what we're all about. We're all about teaching. OK, so the question is, what's in it for me? There's no greater joy than watching beautiful testimonies off people achieving their goals and dreams. Oh, well, I have goals and dreams. Someone visiting your site would say, Then we're gonna display The courses were offering starting online business with Shopify and learning market research, how to attract an audience and how to sell when it says digital marketing here also to explain what it's all about and then what? We're offering what's included in the course, and then we're ending with something personal love, Robin and Jesper and a picture of us. Now you can use this template for your own home page using Nice header that explains what you're all about. Then describe it in further detail, something to explain or show what you're doing using one or several pictures than what's included in there and then end up with something personal. Picture off yourself or a logo, for example, off your business. But I recommend something more personal, like a picture off you, or the staff of your company, etcetera. Okay, so this is how you design your home page now, like we spoke about in the beginning. If you haven't written your text already, then just do. So as you're creating this home page in the next lecture, I'm gonna go through how to find great d sign. Resource is, you might have noticed that I already had a picture or for Shopify course or digital marketing course in a picture off me and Jesper. So what if you don't have any pictures at all? For example, these nice pictures. Well, in the next lecture, I'm going to show me where you can find these pictures and for free. And then you can start making your own home page. So don't move on in the course until you have finished your home page. Watch the next lecture, and then make sure that your home page is all set and done, and then you can move on in the course. Okay, guys, See, in the next lecture 11. Design Resources: So in this video you're gonna learn where to find great D sign. Resource is now. If you remember from the previous lecture, I already had a couple of nice images to use. Now, if you don't have that, you want to have a couple of sores where you can find great looking images and use them. The problem with using images is that they need to be royalty free. You need to own them in order to be using them on your website, especially if you plan on making money from that website. Okay, so I'm going to show you three different great resource is, but you can find different images and this signs to be using for your home page for your website overall logo or even just your posts. Okay, so always keep these three in mine. Now, the 1st 1 is picks obey dot com. I'm gonna put that in. The resource is now. This website is absolutely amazing. All of the images in here or royalty free, you can search for anything. Find the image like in downloaded. So let's start for coaching. For example. Let's say that you're selling a coaching service. We can scroll down here. We can see if there's anything that's fit sing with with what you're doing. Look at this, for example. So we have the goal options. Reality will do coaching. So let's say that we like this one. Then all we need to do is have a look at the license. Now this is free for commercial use, no attribution required. Basically, all of these pictures are, but just to make sure, check these ones and then you click on free download and then you pick the resolution want and click on download, and it's all yours. Okay, so that's picks obey, and you can search for anything. You may also want to be using the filters. For example, if you want to have a transparent image or if you want to use Victor graphics, etcetera, etcetera. Now the next page is canvas That come is also gonna be in the resource is. So what's so great with can mother come is that you can edit the images on their website. So let's say that we want to use a nice image for a WordPress for a post, for example, on our website, so I'm gonna first of all choose in design. If you want to see all of the possible decides to just click on, created the sign, you're going to be shown all of these options. Now what you're seeing here are just different sizes or rather different formats. So let's say that we want to use the social media former, which is 800 times 800 and this one usually worked really great. I'm just going to click in here and you're going to get a bunch of different templates that has that size. Okay, so looking to the left a week at a bunch of different templates that we can scroll through until we find something that we really like, and we can also off course, like before, search here. So let's say that we want to have an image off coffee, for example. Let's search for coffee, and then we get a bunch of nice templates here for coffee, and then we can just click on Let's click on that one, and also note that the ones that say free on the bottom here, obviously they are the free once, and we don't need to pay for this. Just stick with the free ones unless you find someone you really like. Of course. So the great thing with Canada here is that you can go ahead and start editing the image right away. So all the idea is that I clicked on this image that I really liked, and then I can start editing different parts. So let's say that I would like to move this. Well, I won't assume in a bit more. There we go. I think that looks a bit nicer. Gonna change that? This piece of text just clicked on it. I'm gonna write Who doesn't love coffee. Let's say that this is an article about coffee right on here. Says it's always coffee time. Top 10 benefits off. Drinking cough. There we go. Now, this could be a featured image. This could just be in your post. This could be basically anywhere. The point is that Canada is so useful because it gives you a bunch of different temples and you can edit them straight away. And then you get a bunch of different tools like the phones the size. If you wanna use, you wanna center spacing, etcetera, etcetera. And then when you're all done, all you need to do is click on download and then download S P N G. You can also use others, but I recommend P and G's because it's the highest resolution size and then click on download and it's all yours. Okay, you do need to sign up for Canada, but it's so well worth it. We use it all the time, and then finally, we have a fiver. Now, fiber isn't freeze the Onley option here that isn't free. But if you want something super specific or you want a logo, for example, or something specifically designed, this is the place to get it. So all you need to do is go to Fiverr. That comet's gonna be in the resource is as well. And then you would search for, for example, graphic this signer, and then he'd search and then go to the writer. It's a sort by and we're gonna change from relevance to best selling. And then we can start wading through the different designers here and pick one. Generally, you don't need to pay more than $5 for a nice design. Okay, so we're just gonna look there. Let's say that this one looks nice we can check through. Well, these one looks really good. Yeah, Liking what I see I can click on on this person. I can see what's being offered with the basic kit. Maybe I want this standard because you get the source file. If you, for any reason, would like that for your own editing if you are a designer and you can go the premium. But for our intents and purposes, we will go with basic click on, continue right to him and explain to him what it is that we want and notice these unlimited revisions, which is awesome. So if you want something super specifically use fiber. And for all other purposes, I would go either with picks a day dot com or with Canada dot com. With these two. Resource is, you'll have an amazing library, both for post pages for your websites for the logo. Basically, for everything that is WordPress and website related. So used. This decided resource is finish your home page before you move on in the course, and when you have designed your home page, then we move on to the next lecture. Awesome. See you there, guys 12. Set Your Custom Menu: Okay, guys. So in this video, we're going to be setting our custom menu. So if we have a look at our page, how it looks like right now we're gonna do is go to the upper left click on visit site and open it in a new tabs. We always can refer to it. Now we also know that we have a blogged, but we can't access it in order to access the blood. We have to write Robin and jesper dot com forward slash blawg. What I would like to do is create a menu in here to gain direct access to the blawg to our home page and then add a couple of extra pages. So let's go ahead and create this menu. Let's go back to the back end off our website and start off by going to pages. We can just click here, and it's gonna display all of our current pages. Now we're gonna go ahead and create a couple of new pages. There are actually three ways to create the new page. You could click add new here, you can click, add new here or the fastest way would be new here and then just click on page and it will you choose to do it. We're gonna add a new page, and we're gonna call this one contact because we're going to want a contact page and then we're gonna publish it, and then we're gonna click on Add New and this will be our about page, and we're gonna publish this one as well. And let's use the third method as well. We're going to create a new page, and this is going to be our courses page right. This is personal for us because we will be selling and advertising for our courses on this website. So for you, if you're doing some sort off coaching, for example, you might want this one to be called coaching or maybe price, or if you're selling products, you want to create a product page, depending on what you're doing and what you have, you're going to want to create pages that are designed and unique for you. So this will be courses, and then I'm going to click on publish. So there we go. Now, if you look on all pages, we should have a couple of extra wants. Yes, indeed, we do have 1234 and five pages. So let's go ahead and create our menu. So all we're gonna do is go to appearance and then click on menus here. And the first thing we want to do is we want to give this menu a name. So let's just call this so main menu and then create menu. So this is only for you to see, so you know which menu this is. Okay, so the first thing we can do is that we can add in the pages. Now, these are the pages that we just created, right? So we want to add in all of the's. So what I have to do that is, click 1234 and five and then click on add to menu. Okay, so now we have all of these pages in the menu, but we haven't decided which menu to use yet. There are a couple of display location with use. We can use the top bar, and the top bar is actually on the very top up here. This is the top bar. Then we have the main, which is gonna be down here, the one we're gonna use. And then we have the foot, sir, which is in the bottom, off the page. And then finally, we have mobile so that we can customize it and make it look better. For people access in this through a mobile device, we're gonna use the main one. So we're just gonna click here and then we're going to click on save menu. Because now when we have saved this, when we have picked our pages and we have picked a display location, we can actually see these menus on our website, and then we're gonna go to the front off the store and we're gonna update this page, and here they are, there are outlined like this. We just created these pages and now we created a menu for them. That's awesome. So let's go through a couple of extra things that we can do here now. We just added pages, right. You could also be adding posts to be showing up there. Right now, we only have Hello world. We haven't freed in any post yet, but it's the same thing you collect, gonna click on add to menu and you put it out. And then we have custom links as well. So, for example, I could be linking to our YouTube channel, right? So I would write YouTube dots, come four slash robin Jesper, which is our YouTube channel. And then we have the link text. We could call it tutorials because we have tutorials on there and then click on add to menu . And now, when I saved this menu and then go to the front of our store and I'm gonna update, this s well, you can see that now. We have tutorials here. So if I rightly can open this in a new tab, this is gonna take us straight to our YouTube channel. And here we are, so we know that it works. Perfect. Now we can also add, for example, categories. It will click on this one. We could add a certain category we haven't created any yet, so we won't be adding any and we can. We also have the menu. I come settings, and these are different styles off icons. And I'm gonna show you just in a second how they work and what we use them for. But here you can decide on which difference does that you want to show up as an option. Okay, so let's go back here to the menu that we just created. Now, First of all, I don't want to have the tutorial, so all I need to do to remove it, it's click on this one, which is going to expand it, and then I'm gonna click on a remove here. Now, I also want to change the position off the many how it's ordered. So all I need to do this is just drag and drop. I'm gonna pick home and I want that one to show first. And then I want to show courses I wanted to show blawg and then about and finally contact. Right then all I need to do is click on save menu and this is going to be the new order. Go to the front of our store, update this and check out the order here and we can see that now It has changed. Perfect. Looking much better. Now there are additional things that we can do with our menu. For example, we could be creating sub menus. In other words, if I would like home to be a main menu and I would like courses to be a sub menu. All I would do is drag and drop it to the slight right underneath that menu. So all I do is I grab it and I move it to the right. Now, if I want the blood want to be sub menu for home s. Well, I'm gonna do the same. Move it to the right. So now, if I save and I go ahead and update and then updates here and have a look, we can see that there's no way Drop down icon on home. And there we confined courses and there we can find blawg. Okay, so this is called a sub menu when you create a drop down menu like this and this is gonna be excellent for us when we have courses in here and we want to be displaying or different courses in a drop down menu, for example. Or if you're selling certain products, you could have different categories in the drop down menu. It's perfect. So let's go back and let's go ahead and put these back in order. So more things you can do. For example, if I click on home here and expand it. The first thing we'll see is a navigation label. What do you want it to be called? And for us? That's home. And that's why we named it home. That's gonna be the navigation label as well. We could change it to another name if we wanted to. And then we have something that's called Disable Link, and the disabled Link simply means that if you click on it, nothing is going to happen. So a good use for disabling the link, for example, would be using a drop down menu. So if I'm on the website right and I have a drop down menu right now, if I click on home is going to be taking me to the home page. But if I click on Disable Link, then nothing is going to happen when I click on home. So you could use this primarily for the drop down menu, and this is just going to show what the menu it's about. It depends on how you want to be using the menus for your own purposes. So let's go back now. We're not gonna disable the link. There's also something here called Mega Menu. There's a pretty fancy name. Now what a mega menu is is basically a really big menu. So a good example of this is Starbucks. Now Starbucks. Here they have a mega menu, and it looks like this. You can see why they call it a mega menu. It's absolutely huge. It covers basically the entire screen here, and you get a lot of different options. Now. The benefit with a mega menu, especially if you're selling products, is that you can have a bunch of different genres or displaying all of your products in a single menu. Okay, so in order to create a mega menu, all you would need to do is click on this one, enable mega menu, and then you would be dragging the courses down below like this. And now you notice that there's a additional option in here. Now you get to create more menus, so this one is right below home and this one these two are right below courses. So now if I go ahead and save the menu and then go to the front of the store and update it , you can see that would just started creating our mega menu. Now we can add in different columns here as well. So they're going to be displaying, for example, over here. And we can even add in a footer like Starbucks did. If we have a look at their many, once again, we can see that they have a footer down here where they also have clickable links in their menu. So let's go back and we're gonna put these back into place, and then we're gonna go into home and we're going to disable mega menu by clicking it off. And then we have mega menu or two with. Now, as you notice, the mega menu right now is huge. But if I go ahead and I click on the mega menu Auto with, it's going to size itself more to the page and become a much narrower menu, okay, and then going down, we can decide on the amount of columns that we want from the mega menu. Having a look at Starbucks. They have plenty to have 123 and four columns and a 50 year where they have added in a widget. And then we can also hide them mega menu heading if you don't want the heading for each label in the mega menu. Okay, now we come to the icons. Remember, we're talking about the menu. I consent things here to the left. Well, you can select. I comes for all of your menu items. So if I click on selector, you can see that we have elusive and simple line icons. So we could choose a picture to go along with the name off the menu or remove the name off the menu and Onley use a picture. So, for example, if I had a log in to my website, I might want to use a symbol like this one, for example, a lock to show that you're gonna log in. Well, let's say that you have a download section on your website. For example, you could be using this sign just to show it that this is the download section with the menu named download or without the menu named Download. This depends on your design and your style, and also, of course, what your website is all about. But we're not going to be using any off these, and then finally we have the original where it's linking to, which means that we could have a different navigation label that's going to show a different name on the site. If I change the name that. So let's close this up. Let's just make sure that everything is saved and then we're gonna go and have a look at it . And then let's go to the front of our website, updated and have a look, and it looks awesome. It's just the way I like it Now, if you want further customization to this, for example, the color off it when you're hovering over, do you want it to do have some effect when you put your mouth over etcetera. There are more customization that you can do so all you need to do is be at the front of your website and click on Customize. This is what I come up here. So let's go ahead and click on it and we're going to end up with this interface. So what we want to do now is click on Header and then we're going to click on Menu and here we get a couple of different options to further customize our menu. And this is live customization ass. Well, which is really nice Now, the 1st 1 is to select any templates. Should you have one, or should one come with your theme and then we can select if you want. In a top level, second level were dropped on top border for the icons or border. We're just gonna have all of these Check. We're not gonna play any with them. And then we have the position off the menu itself. We could center. It looks really nice. We can also put it to the left. But I don't think that looks two nights. We're gonna keep it to the right that we can also add a fixed to the link. So right now, when I over my mouth, you can see that it changes color. You could add a further effect, like we could do a triple dots under, for example, Now the nice thing again, it gets lives. Now, let's try this one out is gonna look like this quite fancy. And you can just go ahead and check out the different effects that there is to choose from here. Now, I'm gonna go with no effect for this, and then we can style it. The first thing we can do is decide on the distance between the ICO's. I'm gonna put it somewhere like this. I think this looks really nice. And then we're gonna go ahead and change the link color, as we can see, right now, it's black. We could change it to read, for example. It's gonna change the color of all of them. When you can decide on any college is gonna fade your theme, your design and your idea for your website. I'm gonna go with the default one here and then we're gonna collapse this and go to link color when you hover over. So right now it goes kind of blue, teal ish in color. I'm going to click on this one, and I can change the color for that as well. We can make it purple, for example, and it changes instantly. I'm going to go with the default once again. Then we have the current menu item. So right now we are at the home page rights and if you want something to be displayed for that, we could be changing the color to say red. So then we know the okay, we are at the home page that one that you have collecting has a different color. I'm gonna once again go with default because I like it's simple and clean, and then we have a link background. Now the link background is going to be the background off the menu names themselves. If I take on red, for example, like this, you can see that the entire background changes caller. Now that looks absolutely awful. So you could change the different color, the fits with your theme. Once again, the fits with your design. And of course, if you have a different theme that fits with the theme itself again, I'm gonna clear this and collapse it. And then we can change the link background when we hover over. So let's say that we want something that is bluish when we hover over like that. So now when I put my mouse over is going to change color like this. As you can see, there's a lot of customization that can be done in here, and then we have the A current menu item, for example, Once again, I am at home, and instead of changing the home, the name itself in color, we can change this entire little box. So if I want to put this in again, let's go with something bluish. There we go that we could be changing that entire box to show that. Okay, this is the one I clicked in effect the concourses. This color's gonna change on courses. And then if we're doing in a drop down, remember, if we have sub items down here, we can be doing the exact same customization down here. OK, so it's all the same. And then when you're done, all you need to do is go ahead and click on Publish, and then you have your men. You all set and all done a great job so far. Guys, you're doing really well. Remember, if you have any questions whatsoever, will be in the Q and a great let's move on to the next lecture. 13. Publish Your Website: Okay, guys, great job on making it this far. It's time to publish our website now. Even though there's not too many exciting things to be doing on the website yet, we can still make it go live and make it accessible to other people. Right now, if you go to your website is going to look something like this, there's going to be these coming soon. Page and I can see this because I'm in a private window right now and I just access Robin and Jesper Dots come. So in order to launch our website, all we're going to do is go to the back end off our website and we're going to go in the upper party which is coming soon active. And then we're gonna have our website alive and then go down and click on launch your site and that would just launched our side. Congratulations, guys. So if we go back to the private window and we go ahead and we update this page, we get directly to our home page, which means that we're now live. People can access us by writing, and robin and jesper dot come, and we're going to start showing up in the search engines like Google Yahoo being etcetera . Now, if you think that it's too early to be releasing your website and going live, that's okay. You don't need to publish your website yet. Just know that it's this simple to do it and then publish it whenever you are ready. Okay, so we have a nice home page. There's not too many exciting things to do at the website yet. Let's move on to the next lecture and make this fun website. Ah, lot more fun seeing the next lecture. 14. Write a Post: in this video, we're going to be writing our first post, so let's have a look at how far we have come. Now we're at the back off our website. Let's ask usual, Go up here and click on visit site in a new tab so that we can have a look at what is happening throughout the changes. So we have our website so far, right. We have a beautiful home page that we have made, and we have also created a menu so we can even access are blawg right now, however, there is nothing interesting in the bloggers on Lee, this sample that says hello world. So it's time for us to make our first post. So what is a post? A post could be on article it tutorial a blawg post. A post is just opposed, and then you can decide what you want to make of it. And it's gonna end up right now in the blog's section, which could also been called Article section or tutorial section, etcetera. So let's go ahead and do this. Let's go to the back of our website and then we're going to click on posts now. The first thing we want to do is just hover over here and then put this hello world to trash because we don't want it to be there, creates. And now when we're rid off the sample post, let's go ahead and create our own. I'm gonna click on Add New here. And as you can see, the Post looks so similar to the page editor because it's using the same editor. It's still using the Gutenberg editor, So let's go ahead and make this post look nice. Now I'm going to be riding a post about the digital marketing system and then adding in a couple of interesting block contents for your own sake, you're off course, going to want to write a post about whatever it is that you're selling maybe a product, maybe about your service. Maybe you want to write an article, etcetera. Just make it about your website and what you are doing. So follow along here and see how I do it, and then you do it yourself. Now the first you will want to do is add a title, and the title for this one is going to be called digital marketing success in four steps, Okay. And before we move on, I'm gonna close down the ocean WP settings. There we go. It's collapsed. So let's start writing the post now. I'm going to start over the paragraph here. I'm not going to be capturing their interest. I'm going to be riding something. Like sometimes digital marketing can be tough along the way problems arise down below. We explain the number one reason why most businesses fail. There we go. So this is going to be the text, and I'm going to want to increase the size off this one. Now, if I just click on this one is going to start office at one. And then I can keep clicking until I get a size, which I think looks good. Let's try this one there ago. So what I want to do now is that I actually want to embed a video in here. So I'm going to press on enter. I'm going to get a new block here, and I'm gonna click on this plus here, and I'm going to search for YouTube. There we go, because I'm going to be embedding a YouTube video in here, so I'm going to click on this one and then is asking me to enter a u R l So I have already prepared a video that I want to add. And it's this one. Digital marketing branding Why most businesses fail within the first year. Now, in order to embed this YouTube video and this is super important to remember, you can't just go ahead and use this link that's not going to work. Is going to be messing up the former thing on your website. Gonna get aware placement or it's gonna look weird. Now what you want to do is click on the share button down here and then you get a link here and where you're going to click on copy and then go back to the website and paste that link in here. There we go and then click on embed. And then we have our video perfect. And it looks really good as well. So if I go ahead and I click on preview, we're going to get a preview on how the website is looking. I'm gonna pull that to the right tab here. So this is how it's looking right now. We have digital marketing success in four steps and then we have the text that I just wrote . And then we have the video in here. So now if I click on the video is going to be playing directly on the website, which is perfect. There's a lot of options in here. They could subscribe instantly from this video. You can add it to watch Lady. You can jump forward backward. You can customize this video all on the website. It's embedded, it's ready and it fits. The format off The post is one of the great things with embedding with the Gutenberg editor . So let's continue. So right now, I have described the digital marketing success in four steps. I have written some text. I have added a video to explain why and now I want to continue. I want to add the solution. So I'm gonna go here and click on Adblock. I'm going to add in a heading in here and I'm going to write something like the four simple steps to souks to success. Okay. And I'm also going to put this in the center. There we go. Now, when you're adding mawr headings, you want to make sure that the following headings are heading to, and the reason for that is because the search engines air going to understand your post better. We're going to talk a lot more about this later on in the course. But for now, just know that it's enough with one h heading one and put the rest to heading two. Okay. And now I want a new block in here. So what I'm gonna do is click on New block here, and then let's say that I want to add an image. I'm going to search for image in here, and then I'm gonna click on image. There we go. And now I could upload an image in here as usual, or I could do something really interesting. I could actually transform this block into something similar that also uses an image. All I need to do is click up it where it says change block type, and I'm going to change this to a media and text. So I'm gonna upload a picture here. First of all, when I use this one and then to the right here, I'm going to be writing the four steps that I've been talking about. Two digital marketing success. Okay, but the same thing applies, Say, as you can see on the upper right in, This is currently a paragraph, and I can click on it and I can start writing. But I can also change this paragraph into a heading, and I can also change it into a list. It's super handle like this. You can customize on the go. It's very fast, very effective and intuitive. So this is why I enjoy this editor so much. But what I'm gonna do is I'm actually going to use a paragraph to right, even though it I'm going to be doing a bullet list. And the reason for that is when you write paragraphs, you're able to change the size of the takes, which you aren't when you're doing bullet lists. So I'm gonna go ahead and write the steps. So step one, find your audience. Step two, attract your audience. Step three, sell it. Step four do mawr off. What works now? Notice that every time that I hit enter I get a new block. If I wanted to continue writing within the same block, all I would do is that I would hold down shift and click on Enter and I can continue writing within the same block. But if I hit editor, I get a new block. So, of course, the benefit of adding more blocks is that they are easier to move around and the benefit off putting everyone into one block is going to be that you can customize them all at the same time. Okay, so we just added in this one, lets have a look at what it looks like so far. So I'm going to hit preview once again, it's gonna take me here and let's have a look. So here we are, and I'm going to scroll down. First we have the text. Sometimes Itamar can be tough along the way. Problems arise, right? And then I have the video that explains the problem. And then we have the four simple steps to success. This is the Digital marketing guide and then the different steps here. Now the first thing that I see is that I want to make the steps bigger, and I want to make the completely star marketing guide picture bigger as well. So I'm going to go ahead and do that now with the picture. It's super easy. All I need to do is click on the picture and drag on this one, and it's gonna make it bigger and for the text itself. It's super simple to remember when we were doing the paragraph. You decide on the text size in here, and I'm gonna try 18. So all I need to do is click on this one and write 18 and this one right? 18 and then this one and write eight seat. There we go now. Had they all been in the same block, I would only have to do that once. So let's hit preview once again and have a look and let's scroll down and we can see that I still want to make these steps bigger. So I would just go ahead and do that, and I would keep customizing until I'm happy. Let's put these 2 22 this to 22 22 and 22. There we go. So now to continue on with this post, all I would do now is adding another block that would adding a paragraph and then I would start writing about the system and explaining this system and then we have our first post, so I would just write something like the way to to implement this system is through and then start writing about the system itself. Now, I'm not going to do this because this is a tutorial on how to write post in the different features and benefits off doing. So we're not gonna focus on this post specifically, but I want you to be focusing on your post. And before you move onto the next lecture, I want you to have at least started your post. Okay, So great job on making it this far. In the next video, we're going to go more in depth about the post, and the first thing we're going to be talking about is further customizing, adding in videos into your post. Then in the further lectures, we're gonna talk more about things such as categories, tags, excerpts, etcetera. And if you don't know what they are perfect. That's for your in this course. So let's move on to the next lecture. Start your post, guys. See you there 15. Customize Video Posts: All right, guys, I hope you're doing well writing your first post. Now, before you do anything further, don't forget to click on save draft. When you're working on you're posted. You always keep it saved. Okay? It doesn't publish it. It just saves it. The publish button is over here. So in this video, I want to talk more about embedding and putting videos in your post rights. And when we put this video into this post, it was really simple. I'm gonna put a video above for comparison. So all the wood did was it was search for the YouTube block right there. And then we pasted the your Ellen here and we had it. And if we look at the video, it's perfectly formatted to the website. We can access it all of the features of work, and we can subscribe. What, you later etcetera, etcetera. Complain it off course, But what if we want to customize it further? And also what if you're embedding a Facebook video, for example, and you get this strange code? Well, there are other ways to add the videos on your post, and that is called embedding, and I'm gonna show you exactly how that works. I'm going to use the same video for comparison. So what I'm gonna do here instead of using YouTube to embed, I'm gonna use something else. I'm going to remove this block and then I'm gonna put another one up here, and all I'm gonna do is search for embed because then we get something that's called custom html. And what a custom HTML is is basically a code a code for how we want the format and also the link to the content itself to appear on our website. So I'm gonna do is I'm gonna click on this custom html and then it's gonna ask me for a code. So let me show you how to get that code and also what the benefits of using this code are. So let's go back to the video. It's right here with me and myself with a little bit off here both on my head and face a little bit. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna click on share once again. But instead of using this link, I'm going to click on embed. So the first thing we get there is all of this code. And this is the code that we're gonna copy paste into our website in order to get the video itself. But the benefit of this is that we can start editing the code before we put the video on our website. Now, we're not gonna go too much into this. We're gonna use the help off you two pair by scrolling down. We get a couple off different options in here now. The 1st 1 is that we can decide when we want the video to start. If there's a reason for you to start in the middle or at the end of a video, you could just go there and then check this one and then copy all of this. And the video is going to start at that point on your website. Now, a couple of more interesting options. Is this one by default. When you're using the link like a shooting in the previous lecture, you're gonna have the controls on the video looking like this down here. We see that these are the controls. You can change the volume. You can click on the play bottom. You have the captions on here. You can go to you to directly etcetera. But what you can do here is that you can turn those player controls off by clicking here and now, if I played the video, you can see that there's no controls. I'm gonna press in the middle of the screen to play, impressing the middle off the screen to pause it. So I've just removed these controls, and this can be great. If you want a cleaner interface on your video, it allows you to customize the video a little bit more. You can also enable something called privacy enhanced mode. And what that is is that it makes sure that YouTube does not put cookies onto the people who watch your video. And a cookie is basically something that you to put into your visitors browser to track them. We're gonna talk much more about cookies later on in the course and the disclaimer for cookies, how to use them and how to make sure that you bear no responsibility for what happens etcetera. In other words, you need permission. We're gonna take care of all of that. But for now know that we can enable privacy enhanced motor if I enable this, then YouTube is not going to be putting the tracking cookies onto the video and hence onto your visitors. There may be a reason for you to use this. Maybe, maybe not. But just know that you're able to use this. So I have enabled private enhance modes and remove the player controls. Now all I'm gonna do is click on copy here, and it's gonna copy all of this and I'm gonna go back to the website and I'm going to paste this in here, OK, this is all of this coat and then I can preview now if we look at the previous here, they look similar, right? They look very similar. But if I look at the preview on our website, how it's going to actually appear, we can see that there are a couple of different resolutions. Now, this is more assumed in, and this is completely often for the website. This is framed perfectly. So the benefit of using the easy technique, if you will in the previous lecture, is that everything fits perfectly while with this technique, you're going to have to put some off your own with and height options in order to fit that yourself. And the way to do that is simply by going into HTML and changing these settings, you can see what's us with. And it says height. So if I look at the video here, I can see that it's been cutting off the height a little bit too much. I'm just gonna go ahead and change that. So I'm going to change the height too. 500 here. And then I'm going to click on a preview and see how it looks different. So as we can see, it's is looking much, much better, much more fitted, and now these two are starting to look more similar. So again, you don't have to use this embed herbal option. But I just want you to know how it works. And if you embedded a video from video from Facebook or from wherever on the Web, just make sure that you add in and change the width and height so that it's gonna fit on your website super important and also, if you want to, they are more customizable options in here. Okay, now I'm gonna go back, and I'm going to go ahead and remove this block And now it's looking the way it did before and, of course, saved the draft. And then we're gonna move on to the next lecture and go more in depth about the different options in the post. See in the next lecture, guys. 16. Categories & Tags: in this video, we're going to be learning about categories and tags what they are and then some best practices for them Now. I know there's still a lot of interesting information in here that we haven't gone through , and we're going to go through that in just a bit. But for this lecture, let's focus on these two the categories and the tags. So first off, what are they? And what's the difference between them? Well, categories and tags. They serve two functions. Number one. They help the search engines. Explain what your site is all about, and number two. It helps your visitors to navigate and find the information on your website that they're looking for. So what is a category? What is a tag? And what's the difference between them? Well, a category is a grouping off your post. A broad grouping off your post. You could see it as the table off contents is going to be grouping very large amounts off data in a large category that's going to be easily accessible. So, for example, for this post, the category could be courses because this post is ultimately going to be referring to one of four courses. So the category for this could be courses or the category for this could be digital marketing. So what? It's a tag now. A tag is a collection off micro information. You could see it as the indexing. If you imagine a book, the category would be the table of contents, and the tags would be the indexing at the end. So Tags is a collection off very tiny bits of information that you could add on to your post so people can search for it and then find that information. So, for example, a tag I could be using for this because in the video I'm talking about branding would be branding. So if they would go to the site here and search for branding, then this post would show up because we have added the tag branding to this post. So how do you use categories and tags effectively? Well, when it comes to categories, you want to be really careful with not making too many right, you want to make the navigation easy for your visitors. So in the beginning, especially the fewer categories, that better So what? I'm going to go ahead and do in here is to create a category that's just called courses. Here we go. I'm just gonna go ahead and write courses because these blawg posts are going to be about our courses in the end, okay? And then I'm going to scroll down. I'm not gonna have a parent category right now. I'm gonna talk more about what that is in a little bit. I'm going to uncheck this on categorize, and I'm gonna click on add new category. There we go. So now this is added to the category courses. So I'm gonna have all of these types of post. It's gonna be about the courses. For example, digital marketing Shopify, etcetera, categorized into courses. So that is E C for our visitors and for the search engines to find. So now let's move down to tags. Now let's move on to tags. So when it comes to tags is actually quite the opposite. You could add as many tags as you want to, basically, if you add more tags, there's more indexing for the search engine, and also your visitors can hit their information. They're searching form or easily. However, even though you can write 10,000 tags. You don't want to go overboard here. What I would recommend is right. A maximum off 10 tags per post. That way you focus on the most important aspect. You make sure you don't go overboard. Okay? So since I have added a very broad category had called courses, I could add a tag here called digital Marketing. And then I'm gonna hit. Enter Now that is address a tag. Now I could also add a tag, for example, called Branding and hit. Enter. I could add another tag such as business, add and keep going until I have 10. Or until you feel that it's enough. You don't have to go overboard with the tags. You don't even have to add the tags, even though I recommend that you do so for the sake of the search engines and your visitors . Okay, so now what? We have added categories and tags. What we're gonna do is actually post this post and have a look. So right now we can see to the right here that in categories there are no categories. OK, but if I go ahead and I publish this post and then go back in and update this site. You can see the to the right. We have our first category courses. Okay, So if they want to know more about our course, that's all they would need to do is click on here and then they would get that information . OK, so let's go back here at the back end of her website. As you noticed, the left it There are actually categories and tags in these sections as well. So let's open them up in new taps. There we go. Now I'm in here in the category section, and as you can see, we have two categories. We have courses and on categorized. You always need to have a minimum off one category, So I would recommend that either you remove the UN categorized or you change its name. I'm actually gonna change this to other, because there's always going to be time when you put some sort of material that doesn't fit in somewhere. So all I'm gonna do is that I'm gonna hit edit the way I did. I'm gonna call this other, and then there's something here called a slug that you can add it now. The slug is basically how it's going to be looking at the euro. So, for example, for people who want to find the other section, it might look something like this Robin and desperate dot com forward slash other. So that is what the slug is all about. It allows you to edit this log that this site what happens in the U. R L Now, if you for the sake of your visitors or for the sake of the search engine and we're gonna talk much more about search engines later on, you would like to name this something different. Like, for example, resource is you could name it into resource is so it would show on the side of other any this log, it will be called Resource is Now. I recommend that you keep these to the same general Daddy Say good idea both for your visitors and for the search engines. So I'm just going to name this s other and you always wanna use the lower case letters there. Now, with categories, there are parent categories that you can use. So, for example, now we have the courses in here. We could decide if you want this to be a child category off the courses. Now the benefit with you sing parent and child categories is that you can have a super broad topic. Like, for example, right now we have courses and then as child categories, we could have business courses. We could have digital marketing courses. And then as we write even more post, we might want to have Shopify courses, social media courses and go even more specific in Twitter courses, Pinterest courses, etcetera, etcetera. But for now, we're going to keep it at none. And then we have the description. If you want to write a description to the category and in some things, the description actually shows on the website, and then it would show around here what the categories actually about. But on this theme, it doesn't show, but we're not gonna write any description. We're just gonna click on update here and then click on back to categories. So in order to add it, any category the way I just did, all you do is hover your mouse over and click on edit. Okay, Now you could also add a new category straight from here. All they would need to do is write the name off the category and then this slug Remember the slug. And then, if you want to have it into a parent category, making a child category or not, and then the description. Now when it comes to categories, remember I told you that Ask your blog's involved. So should your categories, and I think this is the way you should go with your category. Start off with one very broad category and ask you write more posed or articles, etcetera. That's when you start making mawr off the categories. So the more you involved, the more your categories of all. There's no point in making 10 20 or 30 categories that has zero or two or three post. Keep the categories broad and let them evolve with time. That is my recommendation, and then we also have the tags. Now the tags work in a similar way, but they don't have a higher key. There are no parent, all tags and there are no child tags. Now a tag is simply piece off micro information that's gonna help the search engines and people who are using the search function. So let's say that there are 1000 posts on this website and they would search for digital marketing in here now if they would hit, Enter This post would show up because we have tagged it as digital marketing, and he's also going to help the search engines understand what the Post is all about. So let's head back to tags now. They work in a very similar fashion toe, adding new tag, right, the name right, this log and then the description. It doesn't show up on this steam, and you can also go ahead and click on them and then hit, edit or just click on a straightaway. And then you can do the editing in here for those tags that you already created. And if you want to edit the tax or edit two categories, you can do so in bulk like we've gone through before. Just select them. Choose the bulk action like you can delete them than hit apply, and that's gonna delete all off them. So, guys, now you know what a categories. You know what a tag is. It's very important that you keep in mind to be very spare, some with your categories, and it's okay to make more tags so low amounts of categories a maximum off 10 tax per post . Make sure that you nail down the information that is in here, and then we move on to the next lecture. Remember, if you have any questions, guys will be in the Q and A C in the next lecture. 17. Post Settings & Blog Design: Okay, guys, let's go through the final post settings and then a little bit about your blawg de sign designed for your post specifically. So, as you might have noticed in this post here ah, lot off the options they look very similar to when we created a page. And they are. But there are a couple of additional settings, and we're going to go through them now. So the first difference that we're gonna notice here is that we have something called a post format. So there are different forms that you could be posting on. For example, a gallery former, the lean quote, standard video or audio. But the truth is, even though some themes optimize their post for a specific format, most themes don't, and this is quite useless. I believe this theme doesn't have any support for it. And honestly, this Gutenberg editor is so good that we don't need any custom that we don't need any optimization. We can just customize our own post because it is so easy to use. So we are not going to be using any post for months for this. And then we have these options stick to the front page. So if we are using a widget and it is displaying a bunch off post on our website by clicking on this one, we're going to be pinning this post to the top there. So this is a way to pain this post. And then we have something here called Revisions, and we also have revisions. When we create our pages and this is super useful. I'm gonna open this up in a new tab. Now, what a revision is is basically that every time when you make any major changes on your post or on your page, WordPress saves your previous version in case it would crash. In case you would change your mind, you have gone through big changes. Now, you can't really see properly here because it's all displayed in code. But if you know that you like the earlier version better or something went wrong along the way, you need to restore it. All they need to do is check out the date. Maybe you've been working on a post for many days, drag it to that date, and then Klay can restore this revision. Okay? It's a very handy feature to have both for your pages and for your posts. And then we have the Perma lengthen. This is just like before, the way we wanted to look for the u. R L. Now it's Robin and Jesper that can force latest a marketing success in four steps. Now we might want to change this just to digital marketing success, for example, for a nicer You, Earl. It's nicer for the visitors and also much easier for the search engines. And then we have categories and tags. And you know these by now writes that we just went through them. We're going to go through a featured image, an excerpt in just a second, and then we have discussion. And here we can decided one allow comments and also allow ping backs and track backs. And this is great that we have an R. S s feed, for example, or for our social media's. When we're making any updates, aping back in a track back will notify other sources connected to the website that there are changes happening or post being posted etcetera. So I strongly recommend that you leave this one on and then we have the post attributes, which is if we're going to use any templates and we are not. And then finally, another difference that comes with the ocean WP is the image gallery. Now we're gonna talk about Image Gallery later on in the course, but we're not gonna use this functions if you see it, don't stress about it. Let's just leave it there or remove it in the options if you like, like we went through earlier. So those are all of the different settings for all posts. Now, we already posted this one right now if we go ahead to the blog's section off our website and we have a look, this is the way that our blawg entry currently looks like doesn't look too good, doesn't it? I mean, there's a little bit of text here, quite a bland takes going on here, and even the embed is showing in the excerpt here. Now, this is not very impressive. So let's go ahead and this Sign our block a little bit by changing up our post. So let's head back to the back end here and this it will restart using these two features. We have the featured image and the excerpt now the featured image is allowing you to put on image to represent your post. So all we need to do is go ahead and click on featured image, and we're gonna enter our media library. So here in the media library are all of the different pieces of media that we have been uploading. And as you can tell, I've been up loading this same picture several times because I haven't been using the media library. We're going to go through the media library in just a little bit in the course. For now, I'm just gonna go ahead and use one off the pictures. And if I didn't have one a picture here, I wanted to use another one. I would go ahead and click on upload files and just upload one. So I'm gonna go ahead and select this one as the featured image. There we go, and then I'm gonna update this one, and we're gonna see what happens to our post. So let's move on to Blawg and let's go ahead and update this. And as you can see, we now have an image to represent our post. It's looking much, much better already because there's something representing even if the picture maybe isn't the most attractive for the post would do have an image for it. Okay, now scrolling down the next thing that we're going to want to do here. It's changed this excerpt, right? Because we don't want this embed to be showing like this and maybe wanted to sound a little bit more attractive right now. It's just taking the takes that is, in the first piece off the post itself. That is not always the best description. Off a post is not always the best way to get your visitors to read or the search engines to understand what it is about. So what I'm gonna do here is that I'm going to see Is there something here? I like I actually like this piece of text, but I don't like this embed. So what I'm going to do here is that I'm going to go ahead and select this part, and then I'm going to cope it. And then I'm going to go back to the back end here, scroll down, move onto excerpt and I'm going to paste it in here. There we go. So now when it's pasted in here I'm just going to click on updates, and then I'm going to go to the front end off our website, and then I'm going to click on update here. And as you can see, we just cleaned it up. Now we remove the embed we have the peace of takes that we are enjoying. So this is an excerpt, meaning that if I click on continue reading, I'm going to be taken directly to the post. The benefit of this is that we can show a lot off different posts in here, right? So if we don't want to use excerpts in here instead, we want to show the entire post. Then we're gonna move on and click on Customized up here, move down to where it says blawg. And then we're gonna go to Blawg entries, and then we're gonna scroll down until we get to this point. This is excerpt length. Now, if I want the entire post to be showing, I'm just gonna go ahead and put this to 500. And then, as you can see, it's suddenly displaying the entire post instead of just on exert. So this is a way depending on what you want for your blood that you can change it up now. There are more options in here. It's well, if you want an infinity scroll meaning that you can just keep scrolling through your blood post endlessly, you would change this joint Infinity scroll. So in here, you're going to be finding a bunch of different options on how to edit your blawg post. But for our own sake, we're going to stick with the basics. So far, I'm gonna revert this back to default. I'm gonna use standard, and I'm not going to be touching anymore in here now, before we move on this one more feature that I want to show you and that is at the back and off our website here. Now, if you have installed WordPress using blue hosts and you're using the same theme than this is not going to be a problem, But if you're using a different theme or maybe installed your workers with someone else, you might want to check this part. So what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go ahead and move to settings and then click on Perma links now in here By the fault we have already checked in post name meaning that is going to be Robin and jesper dot com forward slash and then the post, for example, forward slash digital marketing success like we were talking about earlier. But when you're using certain host or certain themes, this one might be selected by default. And this is not very good need for your visitors, and especially not for this search engines again, more about the search engines later. But we're gonna want to have the post name selected here. It's going to be helping out. Ah, lots of Just make sure you have this one selected scroll down click on save changes and then, guys, we have just made our first blood posts. It's looking good. We've come quite far already in the course. Let's move on to the next lecture. See you there 18. Sidebar Design: Okay, guys, in this video, we're going to be designing our sidebar. So first, let's go ahead and have a look at how it looks. So we're gonna go ahead to Robin and Jesper up here, and I'm gonna right click an open visit site here in a new tab, basically like we always do. And then I'm gonna navigate to blood. So this is decide Bar. And right now it has a bunch of functions that's really good to have, like having the search having the reason, post. But there's a lot of things in here that doesn't make sense and frankly, that we don't need. For example, we don't need categories right now because we only have one. We don't need a metaphor example. So what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go ahead and redesigned this and set it up in a way that we want to, and that's going to be fitting with our website and our own style. But before we do this, understandably, the question is, but what? It's a good looking the sign. And also what are the functions that I might need on my website? Well, first off, for good looking the sign, I highly recommend that you check out other people's blog's. We're gonna do that in just a second. And secondly, when it comes to useful widgets, these air, all called widgets when it comes to useful widgets, is all about what's on your site, where you want to navigate people. The number one reason for this is to navigate, and also how much can you fit with your dis sign? So before we move on, let's have a look at a couple of different blog's and see how they have designed their sidebar. Now the 1st 1 is a classic in a huge blogger. That's Pat Flynn from smart passive income dot com. Now looking to the right and we can see that he's using a sidebar. First of all, where he's introducing himself, who he is and what he's all about. And as I scroll down, we can also see that he is putting a widget here. There's going to navigate us to the different categories on Hiss site, for example, affiliate marketing, better blogging, email marketing and podcasting, which are the four pillars off his website. They're vastly different categories. So is such a good idea to be putting them up like this. I want to learn, and then you can just navigate to that category right away. Scrolling down. There's also advertising his own advertising for his e book. And what's clever with this also is that by clicking on, get this guy, you're going to be asked to write in your email, and suddenly he is building an email list. If you don't know what that means, don't worry about it yet scrolling down. We also have popular posts here, which is another widget is using so we can check the all time popular post it pats, favorites, podcasts and articles. And remember when you could pin a post to the front page. Well, this is the kind of widget where it will be showing up in the top in. You can also be adding post manually when using these form of widgets. So this is the way Pat Flynn dusted on smart passive income dot com. Now, if we go to simplicity in the south dot com, this woman is doing it a little bit differently. She has a very different style, but she's using similar widgets, so the 1st 1 is still to be using on email list building. So this is called an opt in. Basically, you're asked to ride in your email address. You can subscribe to get news to get updates, and she's going to get your email to Billon e Mai list. And then there's an introduction to her and what this website is all about. And then here she has put in a slide where you can check out the different pictures from her website. And this is perfect, because if we have a look up here, we can see that she is all about do it yourself decor, ideas, etcetera. So it makes sense to put in the right sidebar showcasing different ideas, showcasing different themes or the course. And then we have the dish daily dot com, and interestingly, this is a very minimal this science. You can see there's an opt in here to write in your email, and then this person has added in popular posts nothing more, nothing less. If I scroll down, it just disappears. So there are different ways that you can use your right side bar to, and then finally we have blogged a ghost dot org's and they're not actually using a sidebar at all as we can see if I scroll down here this no side bar to the right, there's no side bar to the left. It just takes going on. And the benefit with this off course is that there's less clutter and it can be more enjoyable to be reading the text. And the down part is that there's less navigation now. They're also using an app it's you can see showcasing how much you progress on the page while you're reading. That's a plug him. We're gonna go through plug ins later. And interestingly, you don't only need sidebars on your right. As we can see, Pat is actually added a left sidebar as well. Where he has shares, he has Twitter. He has Facebook. Basically different Social media's where you can go ahead and share. This post is very clever way to do it. So now maybe have a couple of ideas off your own, so we're gonna go ahead, take those ideas and start implementing them and editing our own sidebar. Okay, so what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go to the back end for website and then we're gonna move down to appearance and then click on widgets. So here we are. And in here there's a bunch of different things you can edit. Like you can edit the left sidebar, the surfers old sidebar and the food er, we're gonna go through these things later. For now, we're gonna end it. The default sidebar, also known as the right sidebar. And as you can see here, everything that is put in here is the exact things that we're having on our blawg page right now. On our blog's sidebar, we have the surge, the reason post recent comments, archives search recent recent post recent comments archive. Now the first thing we're gonna do is that we're going to start removing a couple of things that we don't want and don't need. So to begin a search function can be great to have recent posts also really good to be showcasing when you're adding some new post when you're adding any new material. Recent comments I don't think you should be keeping this in the beginning because there won't be a lot of people commenting, and also it's not that interesting to read, usually again, depending on your website and what you're doing and selling etcetera so I'm gonna do is I'm gonna click on this one. I'm gonna go down to delete Here, click there. And now, suddenly, recent comments are gone. Archives? Well, there's not a lot of material right now, so I'm gonna delete this one as well. Categories. We only have one. So I'm not going to keep this either. I'm gonna delete it, and then we have metta and this is all about Loggins. RSS feeds, etcetera. And if you don't know what half of those mean, don't worry about it. This is just basically a bunch of coast that we don't need access to. Not right now. We're gonna go ahead and click on delete. So what we're left with right now is the search and recent posts. And if I go back to the block here and I update this one, we can see to the right that there's not a lot going on right? And that's perfect. More potential for us. So if we go back in here, if we have a look to our left, we can see all of the available widgets and scrolling down. There is a lot off different. We just going on that you can choose from. So I'm gonna offer a couple of ideas, and then I'm gonna designed this side bar, and then hopefully you'll have your own ideas on what to put on your website. Now, the first thing I want to tell you about is that with the ocean WordPress theme the Ocean WP theme there are a couple off which is included, For example, this widget called about me that's actually been included with the theme. If you have a different theme or you haven't installed in a specific theme, you're using a WordPress original theme. This might not be here, So if you're going through your witches and there's something in here in the course that's not on your theme in your widgets, all they need to do is go to plug ins and search for it. For example, search for about me in the plug ins area and similarly, search for instagram research for Facebook like books, etcetera, and you will find it there again. We're gonna go through plug ins in just a little bit. So, guys, let's start designing now. The first thing that I would like to do is actually add some about me in here. Now, the way that Pat Flynn has it, it was scroll to the top pair where he has some information about himself on what he's all about. I think that's genius. So let's follow suit here. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm going to click on the about me widget here and I'm going to drag. It's to the right A to the default sidebar and put it to the top. And this allows us a couple of different options. And first off, it's too title the widget itself right now. It says about me. And if I go ahead and I scrolled down and I click on save or sexual already been saved and I go to the block and I update this, you're going to see that up here it says about me, but I don't think that looks too good What I would like. It's just a picture here in some info, and then that's it. I don't think this contributes at all. I think the picture and the information is more than enough. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm going to remove this information and just leave it blank. And then what I want is a picture in there, right? Look, quite empty. I'm gonna click on upload picture, and then I'm gonna use this picture off me and Jesper, and I'm gonna click on insert into post scrolling down. We have the name and it's gonna be the name off for website. And of course, it's me and Jesperson. I'm gonna right, Robin and Jesper. And here is a very good idea to be writing. What? The website ISS about Robin and Jesper, our digital marketing and business Start up experts here ready to offer you a device and courses in learning and thing you need to fulfill your marketing and business dreams. They will go just some text off the bat there. You might want to think this through a little bit extra and how you represent yourself. Okay, so now if I scroll down and I click on save, let's go to our blood page again and then I'm gonna click on update. I'm gonna refresh this page and let's have a look here. OK? So it's looking much better than about me is gone. There is a nice looking picture of me and just press a Superman here. I love this picture, says Robin and Jesper Robin, and just produce the marketing and business startup expressed it, said You just heard me read it anyway. So here it is. Here's the takes that's about us and what this website is about. Perfect. I love this widget. I think it's perfect there. So I'm very happy about this one now moving on. There are couple off more options that we can put in here now. The 1st 1 is the social style, the style that we want on the social links that we're going to be adding, Let me show you what I mean. So if I want to add a social media, I come, for example, Facebook. I would just go ahead, and I would write facebook dot com slash Reuben Jesper and this is the link to our Facebook page. So now if I go down and I click on Save and I go to our website and I refresh this, have a look at this section. You can see that there's an icon that popped up there, and if I click on this one is going to be taking us directly to our Facebook page on Dhere . We are so we know that it works. So let's click this one down and go back. Now I'm going to remove the Facebook one because we're gonna add another fun widget in here . However, there are a couple of more options in here. And 1st 1 that I already told you about is the one with style, how we want those I comes to be looking and right now it's looking like this is the colored style with the white after traditional style. And I really enjoy that. You can be changing this one up here and we also have something called social Link target. And right now it is at blank. And that means that if I click here is going to open a new tab like it just did and take us to our Facebook page. Now, if I go back and I changed this one to self, then if I click care, it's going to change our website into the Facebook page. Okay, so what I recommend is that you keep this one blank so that people stay on your website and there will be new task whenever they click on them. So what I'm gonna do here is that I'm gonna add in our instagram That's instagram docked com slash grow been and Jesper And I'm also going to add in are you two which is YouTube? Com slash row Benji Esper And then I'm gonna go ahead and save. I'm gonna go to block. I'm gonna update this and see how it looks. There we go. Now there's two icons. Great. And the reason that I removed the Facebook one is because we're gonna add something that's called a Facebook like box and that is this one. So let's collect this one. We're done with it now. A Facebook like box. You've surely seen it on different websites before. It's basically a little box that's going to be displaying a summarizing your Facebook page , the amount of people who have liked it, and the option for the visitor to be liking it themselves. So all I'm gonna do is I'm gonna click drag, and then I'm gonna put it in. I'm gonna put it below a recent post here. There we go. So there's a Facebook like books. So here is the title if you want a title and I prefer not to have a title because I think it makes the widget more clean. And then the Facebook your l that's facebook dot com slash robin Jesper. And then I'm gonna save just to show you what this looks like originally. So I'm gonna go ahead and update this page scroll down, and here it is. Okay, so this is our page. This is the amount off likes who have gotten. And here's the option to like the page and to learn more. Now, if I want to customize this one, I can remove the show faces that's going to remove all off the people that you can see that have like that. If you have any friends who have liked, it's not gonna display that we can show a stream. Basically, this is going to show your newsfeed in here. So if I click on show, stream saved and I get updates. And now if I scroll down, we can get a direct access to our news feed, and that's me, the banana plantation. And if we don't want that, we just go back. And we pressed this one off and then show border. If we want to show the border around the plug in, and if you want to show, show a wall, then it's going to show a places Patris is great if you have a restaurant, for example. But we're just gonna leave it like this, and then I'm gonna click on Save. So as you can sell, there are are bunch off different plug ins you can use. You can use social icons, drag it in here, put it in the bottom, and then give it a title, putting the links and then you have the social media buttons in here. If you don't like it, you go to the bottom. You click on delete, but you could also do. If you have any new product, you have any new service and a new course, etcetera is that you can go ahead and go to image, gonna grab image, and then I'm gonna put it on the bottom. I could give it a title like new course released, click on Add Image, and then I could add an image off a course like this one and then add widgets. And in here I could be linking to the course itself. It will be you Demi dot com for sledge complete. And then I would just write in the u rail to our course and suddenly on the right side there would be basically your own advertising for a new course for a new product for a new service, etcetera. So when it comes to this, the sky is the limit, and you're also going to have to decide yourself. Do I want a clean looked. I want a lot of information in here and what exactly is important? I strongly recommend that you use different social media feeds different social media sharing. And finally, if you just want to add a little bit off text in here for whatever reason, you can just go down at this text widget, write whatever you want to write, and there you go. You have all that information. And if there's something that you feel that's missing in here, then later on you're gonna be able to go to plug ins, search for whatever that is added in here as a widget. And remember, a widget is basically just a box of information adding that widget and then you're gonna have what you need. So hopefully this has given you a lot of ideas on how to design your sidebar should you choose to use one? So remember the number one purpose of a sidebar is for navigation and also advertising. But those two go hand in hand. And to end this lecture, I want you to know that if you want to edit your right sidebar live, you can go ahead and do so by clicking on this manage with live preview. So this is going to take you directly to your website and is gonna put you in the live more the customization mode. And we have used this before. However, since there's no sidebar in here, you're going to need to click on Blawg, and now we're going to be able to add it. All of these different widgets straight away in here and it works similarly, would just click on default sidebar In here. Here is our widgets. If one add a widget, just click on it in here, added in at the information, changed the order by Dragon drop just like before. And you also have the ability to be clicking on the widgets straight away, and you can be adding them this way. So for a lot of people, this is going to be faster and easier to edit. But you can also do it straight from the back end of your website the way we did it. That's how I prefer to do, because I think it's easy to customize. But you can choose whichever way you want to edit great job guys. I hope there's giving you a lot of ideas on how to edit your own sidebar should you choose to use one see in the next lecture? 19. Change Your Site Icon: in this video, we're going to further personalize our site by creating our own site icon or just adding in one if you have one already. So what is a site? I come also known as a fabric on. Well, if we go to Pat Flynn's website Smart passive income dot com, and we click on the U. R. L here, you can see that there's a tiny little logo here. Now this is called a fabric on or just a site. I come and this icon is representative off Hiss website whenever you right in the u. R l. And if you're not using safari, you're using chrome or using Internet Explorer for windows, for example. This is going to be visible all off the time now on. So far it is not visible. But you want to add this one into further personalize your website. If we look on huffingtonpost, don't come. You can see that they're also using their own site. I come so let's learn how to add in our own site. I can't makers have looked much more professional and make the site even more personal. So what we're gonna do is we're gonna go to the back and offer website. And then we're gonna move down to appearance and then click on Customize. Now we have been in the customization part before and in here we're gonna go ahead and click on site identity, and then we can see that there's something here called site Icon. All we need to do is click on Select Image and add on our own. I come now if this is not visible in your theme shoot. You have chosen a different theme that all you need to do is go to the plug ins and search for Fabrikant. You're gonna find a plug in fourth. There's plug ins for everything ice. So as you can see the recommended psych outs Icon resolution is 512 times 512 pixels. How do we make sure that we can fit in our own picture into the fabric? Um, because it needs to be a dot icon. To be able to use is a file type. A normal fire time might be D j pick or dot PNG, but this is an an icon file type. Well, the first thing we can do is go to a website called Convert aiko dot com. And just the way it sounds is going to take your picture. There's gonna be in a PNG file and converted into on aiko file. So all we need to do is go ahead and click in here to upload it or added from a your L in here, I'm gonna upload it manually and then you're gonna choose a PNG file. Now, if you don't have a PNG file, let's say that you're having a J pig file like these ones. All you need to do is open paint, for example, and re save it in a PNG format. Now, PNG's higher resolutions I always recommended use that one. So we're gonna choose this one click and choose is gonna load a little bit. And then to the writer, you can see it has already been converted into an icon. So all I need to do is click here and then it's gonna be downloaded. And then I can just go ahead to my website, click on Select Image and uploaded, and this is gonna be a new icon. But what if you don't even have a picture that you know that you want to use an icon? Well, there's an option for that as well. We can go to a website called Icons eight dot com. Both of these websites are gonna be in the resource is, and then we can choose our own icon and customize it. Now all of these are free I comes to use. So what you could do, for example, is that we could go to categories down here and let's just go by popular for now and then scroll down. Let's say that is, this looks like a nice style, the iPhone IOS style. And then we're gonna scroll down to a fine something that looks nice. Simple. You don't want to use a Pinterest icon, for example, Scroll down a little bit more, something simple. Listen, let's just use a speech bubble. For example. I'm gonna click on the speech bubble here and then to the left. There are some customization options, which is awesome. And then I'm going to go down and click on text here, and then I can add in my own take. So what I'm gonna add in this r N J, which is symbolic for Robin and Jesper, there we go orange A and then I can change the location where I wanted to be. Like there, for example. I can change the size. Let's make it a little bit smaller. I can also change the overlay. Should I want to add something? But I don't. And I can also change the color. But I like this simple black style. We can add a fix in here as well. Like a stroke effect, A padding effect, A background Should we want the background? A circle, A square, etcetera. But I'm not gonna add in any of those. I'm gonna keep this one super simple like that. It says orange A. It's a in a speech bubble, its square shape. This looking nice. I'm gonna go ahead and hit download here, and then I'm gonna download it as 500 PX is still gonna work. Well, even though it's not 512 and then I'm gonna make sure that I put it into 500 pixels, Even though it's not 512 it's still gonna work perfectly well and I'm gonna keep it as a PNG. And then I'm gonna click on download, and then I'm gonna go back to the comfort. I could not come gonna hit this button in here. I'm gonna find that I can double click on it. And there it is. So I'm gonna have this one converted. It's been converted. I'm gonna download it. There we go. And now let's go back to our website. Here we are. I'm gonna click on select image upload files, select files and then I'm gonna select the dot Aiko right here, double click on it. And then he'd select, and then I could crop it in here by deciding the size and click on crop image while also getting a preview to the right here. This is the way our site icon is gonna look. But I'm just gonna skip cropping click down there and now it's been added. It's up. We're just gonna go ahead and click on publish. And in a second this boring globe I come. That's the default. I come for all website do doesn't have her own Fabrikant is going to be changing to this icon that we just added. So this is the simple and the fast way to change your fabric into anything you would like to Now make sure that you get a design that you enjoy. Make sure that you crop it nicely more nicely than I did in this quick preview. And then you have your own custom fabric on the people going to recognize your site from. It's just a way to look more professional and become even more personal. OK, guys, good job. Let's move on to the next lecture. 20. Customize Your Footer: in this video, we're gonna talk about customizing the footer on your website. But before we do that, let's go ahead and find out where the food or actually it's So we're at the back end of the store. We're gonna go ahead to Robin and Jesper or is going to say your websites name appear going to go to visit site opening a new tab now on your website. If we scroll all the way down, we find the very bottom here. That's the footer hence the name, foot footer. It refers to the bottom here, So as you can see right now, there's nothing in here except this copyright takes by Ocean WP theme by Nick I don't really like that. So we're gonna go ahead and remove these takes and add our own copyright. And then I'm gonna show you how you can design your own footer. So all we're gonna do is click on the customized icon here on your websites. And then we're gonna scroll down to where it says Footer, bottom and we're gonna click here now. In here we have the enable food or bottom, which is the lower part down here. If you want that enabled and then we have the text itself. Okay, so all I'm gonna do is I'm going to remove this text, and then I'm going to write my own copyright notice. Now, when it comes to copyright is kind of a tricky deal. For example, in the United States, basically anything that you create privately is going to automatically be cooperated to you . Now, in other countries, you're gonna have different rules. So I recommend that you go ahead and check out what a copyright means in your country before you go ahead and copyright your own website or your name to your website. So what I'm gonna do here is I'm gonna add in the copyright symbol, and this is gonna be in the description off this lecture, not the resource is but in description. Off this lecture, you can just go ahead and copy, paste the symbol or Google it and then I'm going to write cope. Be right. Robin and Jesper lt d witches are company all rights reserved. Now there are different ways to copyright. For example, I could copyright robin and jesper dot com, or I could just write copyright Robin and Jesper remove the LTTE There are many different ways to copyright in So when we're all happy with this, all I'm gonna do is go ahead and click on published. And as we can see already in the bottom, we have our own copyright than we have removed the previous one. Clean this one up. So let's talk a little bit about food. Er this sign now me personally, I prefer to keep it clean off course depending on what kind of website were creating. But you can add a lot of valuable information in here. And if you want to do that, it's super simple. We're gonna go ahead and go back and we're going to go into widgets and then we're going to click on Footer one here and designing your food er is the very same thing as when you're designing your sidebar is just gonna appear in a different place. So say that I want to add a widget in here. I'm just gonna click on add a widget and then we could add a contact info widget, for example. I'm just going to click on that now if I go ahead and scroll down and Then let's just add some sort of info in here so that it's gonna update. And now, if I scroll down, we can see the way that this widget is going to look in here. You can add your phone number, mobile fax if anyone is still using that, your email website, Skype call and then some info about how to contact you. Then in a foot or two, for example, we could be adding another would jet foot or three and food, or for you can design this the way that you want to design it. It's all about adding in the widgets, adding in the information that you enjoy. And if you want inspiration on what to adhere, go and check out some other people blogging and especially check out other people in your niche and see the way they're doing now. For this style, we're gonna go with a clean look, so I'm just gonna go ahead and remove this. I'm going to scroll down here. I'm going to click on delete, just gonna delete it and then I'm just gonna go back. They will go. Nothing's changed. Except this part. We now have our copyright perfect So go ahead and sit and customize your own footer changing to your own copyright. And then this signed the food. Or if you would like to, and then we move on to the next lecture. See your there, guys. 21. Make Your Website Mobile Friendly: in this video, we're going to talk about making your website mobile friendly. Now, guys today, making your website mobile friendly isn't really optional. It's really mandatory. And the reason for that is two fold number one. The by far biggest reason is because a lot of people are I dare to say most people are surfing on their cell phones whenever there, you know they have any dead time. People go on their cell phones whenever there's a toilet break, people go on their cell phones. People are always surfing. So if your website is not adopted for mobile surfing, then there's gonna be an issue. You need to make it mobile friendly guys. And the second reason is search engines really appreciate websites who are also mobile friendly. So we're gonna go ahead and make sure that our website is mobile friendly. So I have already been at the back end and I've gone to visit my site. We know the drill already, right? I'm gonna go ahead and click on customized up here. Now, if you've been following along this course and you've been taking the similar steps as I have, you've been installing similar themes. You've been going through this similar design. Then you are in luck because with this theme with the Ocean WP theme, there's already a plug in included That makes your website mobile friendly. And we can shake this out simply by going to the bottom here and clicking on the one to the furthers. Right now, this is the mobile version off your website. As you can see right away that the menu just went from big into a crammed up collapsed menu here. So if I click on it, I opened this one up. So this is the way it's gonna look on people cell phones. Now, if you have a different theme and you notice that things aren't looking that good, then don't worry about it, because you're gonna be able to install a plug in to make it mobile friendly. This is so important. But if you have the Ocean WP theme, then it's already gonna be mobile friendly. So what you want to do is make sure that everything in here it looks good because truth to be told, just because it looks good on your PC and it is mobile friendly doesn't mean that things were gonna look good on your mobile. It's still gonna be responsive. You consume mean you consume out. You can click on things, etcetera. So if I go down for example, I can see that the text in here, This isn't looking too good. For example, I have to scroll in here to see what it says. Same with this one. So that would be the first thing that I would want to change. Now the header here, the header, the text going on here. I think it all looks great and scrolling down the picture looks great. It fits. Everything looks good. Now I don't enjoy this part is just a dead part. And then we get to the food er and we have the copyright that we have just set. So it's such a good idea to go ahead and check it out. How it looks on your cell phone now to the left. Here we also have an adaptation that we can see how it's gonna look on someone's tablet, for example, were some with a huge phone, so it's a little bit bigger, but we still have a collapsed menu and we can click on it and check it out. We have this search bar in the bottom here. I think everything looks really good now, as long as it looks good. Perfect. Don't worry about it. But if there is something that you want to change, go ahead and change that right away. Because the more you work on your website, the harder is gonna be to make it mobile friendly or rather, may looking good on a mobile if you don't have that mindset from the beginning. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna go ahead and remove this part right away. And if you don't like this part, either all you need to do is go down to where it says food or widgets. Click there and then disable food or widgets like that. And then this space is going to disappear just like that. And I'm gonna hit published. And to me, this looks much better. Gonna check it out in the cell phone version as well. Scroll down. Looking much better. Much cleaner. And it looks good on the PCs. Well, perfect. It's published. It's all set up. Great job, guys. Now let's move on to the next lecture and continue our journey. See you there 22. Dashboard Cleanup: OK, guys. Now, before we move on to the next section and start going through plug ins, let's talk about cleaning up. As you might have noticed in your dashboard, things are probably looking quite a bit off a mess just like this. Now, if I scroll down here, there's an endless amount off stuff going on, and we don't know what half of it is. And even more importantly, we don't need most of it. So just for now, the dashboard, we haven't been using it. It's just been laying around here being this big pile of miss. What we're gonna do is that we're gonna clean it up and then we're gonna keep it clean so that we can actually use it and have our most preferred stats. And quick access is directly accessible in the dashboard. So how do we do this? Well, in the upper right corner, there is something called screen options, and interestingly, there's a lot of people, even veterans on WordPress that doesn't know about this. But this is such an important feature, because this is going to help you keep your dashboard clean and the clean dashboard Clean mind. Great website. Great content. Great results, right? So as we can see, there's a lot of things in here, and I don't think that we need most of them. Yours might look different if you're using a different theme, for example. But what we're gonna do here is that we're gonna deactivate a bunch of things. Please connect often. Monster. We don't want to show that Ocean WP or review. Nope. Elementary overview. WordPress forms monster insights at a glance. Let's keep activity Quick draft for now and then WordPress events in news and then we can also click away. Welcome. There we go. So now if I minimize the screen options, this is looking quite a bit better now. There are a couple of things we can dismiss Get the most out of open monster plug in. We can just click that one away. It's gone and the same with Jet pack here. Now jetpack is a package is a plug in with a bunch of features and we're not gonna touch in a plug ins right now. And we're not going to be touching and plug ins for now. We can just go to the plug in section so we don't want this in here? Let's click that one away. OK, so I think it's looking a bit cleaner right now. Don't you think? We also have the welcome to Ocean WP. We can skip the set up. It's been staring at us for a while already. In this course, we can just skip setting it up because we're doing it manually together. And then we have the police configure your Google Analytics settings and we're going to be doing this in the plug ins section, so we can't really affect this, but we're just gonna leave it for now. OK, so we're left with these two rights. We have the quick draft and we have the activity. Now, the fun thing we can do here is that we can also drop and drag this so I can drag the quick draft over to here, and then I can move the activity over to here. So what is the quick draft? Well, this is basically if you have anything special on your mind like Oh, yeah, I have this idea about a Let's say, Shopify follow up course. What's on, Mama? So what would be included? More products, research, blah, blah blah, blah, blah, blah. I'm going to click on save draft. You can see I already It's saved a draft her earlier. And now once I save this draft, it's going to be put into post. So if I go to all posts here, I will already have started a post on here it is Shopify follow up course. Okay. And they supposed to draft that? I made this. Not gonna be on yours, that I'm made earlier. So if we're not gonna use this as always, bulk action moved to trash and apply. But it's just a quick and easy access if you have something on your mind that you wanna work on later on. And, of course, if there's something you want to add in, you can just go back to screen options. Everything is still here. We might want to have at a glance how many posts would have how many pages that we have. And if you want to collapse the menu, all you need to do is click it and we're gonna collapse this menu. I'm going to remove that one, and we can have it even this minimally. Now, one of the things you might want to add later on when we go to the plug in section is the analytics part. You always cannon opted how your website is doing. So now we have cleaned up the dashboard. This is awesome. You can keep whatever you want to keep in your dashboard. We can also do the same with posts. So right now, this isn't too big off a mess. But what I can still do is go ahead and click on screen options, and I can start removing a bunch of things like I can remove the author categories, tags, comments and dates. And, as you can see, if you have, for example, hundreds of posts, it's gonna be easier if you're looking for a certain title. Of course, you can search for it, but if you're looking for something specific, is going to remove a lot of the cluttering. Let's add these back. We can also number the items per page, and we can have an excerpt view. If I added an excerpt view and I click and apply, we get to see a small excerpt from the post itself. Now I'm not gonna have this. I'm gonna go and move on to list view, and we can do the same with pages as well, just moving up to screen options. And then we can remove the author comments, date and number the amount of items per page. So why is this important already? Well, because once we start adding more plug ins, these plug ins are going to be a pairing both here when it comes to our pages at our post, but also at our dashboard. And the more clutter there is, the bigger than mess, the less functional that we become. So I recommend that you clean everything up right now, and as we go through the plug in section, make a move and go to the pages and post and dashboard every now and then and just make sure that everything looks that what you wanted to look because trust me, the more plug ins we install and we're gonna install a few them, or they're going to add themselves onto your posts, pages and dashboard. This is how you keep it clean. Let's continue keeping it clean, and then we move on in the course guys see in the next lecture 23. Plugins Introduction: hi guys. And welcome to the plug ins section off the course now plug ins or one of the most important parts off your website. This entire section is going to be about which are the most important ones, how to use them and how to make sure that you get the most important plug ins for your website. But first, before we get ahead of ourselves, let's start from the very beginning, starting off with a plug INS introduction. So, first off, what are plug ins? Well, plug ins are basically APS for WordPress Now. When you have your phone, it has all of the basic functionality, like you can take someone you can call someone, you can do the basic things. But what really makes your smartphone smart or all off the apse in there Now with your website, it's the exact same thing. It's the plug ins that's going to be deciding what your website, actually it's about and how smart it's going to be. In other words, plug ins are APS for your website, and there's an app for everything, just like with your phone. Now, one of the beautiful things with plug ins is that you can create any kind of website with it. When WordPress first started up, they were just a blogging platform. But as things developed and ask plug ins developed suddenly you could turn your WordPress site into anything. Today, you can make your WordPress website into Vicky piteous sight into an e commerce. You can make it into a forum. You could make it into a highly customizable blood. You can make it into a social media platform. You can make it into anything. And all of this is thanks to plug ins because the application off plug ins are endless Now the main purpose off plug ins is to make things easier. A plug in just like an app is basically a piece off code, but chances are you don't know how to code. I don't know how to code, but there are fantastic developers out there who do, and when they do, they take this coast, they make them into plug in so that we don't have to do that. So basically what these plug ins do is that they make everything easier for us. If we wanted to turn our website into an e commerce, which I'm gonna show you later in the course how to do that? We need to know a bunch off coding and we don't. But because someone has developed a plug in for us, all we need to do is installed it plug in and basically we're good to go. We just need to do some basic set ups. That's not very hard to do at all. So we could summarize and say that the basic purpose off plug ins is to make things much easier for, You know, another thing that's very beautiful with plug ins when it comes toward press is that there are limitless installs. Basically, there are tens and thousands off plug ins out there, and you can install as many as you want. There are no limits to this, and basically all off the plug ins are for free. Whatever paid plug, and you can find out there most of the time, you can find it for free as well, which made this so potent because if there's a problem, there is a plug in is basically it's such a common saying on WordPress. There's a plug in for everything, but I also want to conclude with such an important point off steel, keeping it clean now. If you've been following along the previous section, we have already cleaned up our dashboard, and the purpose of cleaning up is to remove the clutter to make your WordPress site faster and also to make yourself more productive because there aren't going to be things everywhere. Tiding up is very effective. For that. I recommended you do the same with plug ins. Now the more plug ins you have doesn't necessarily mean that your website is going to be slower. But it's going to be harder to keep track off all of your plug ins and making sure that they are optimized for your site. So I recommend you to take a more minimalistic approach with plug ins and on Lee installed plug ins. When there is a need for them. Surely there's going to be needs, but make sure that you're not only installing plug ins because you might need one. I would recommend it to focus on the need. Okay, guys, so by now, you probably have a pretty good idea what plug ins are now. In the next lecture, we're going to go through how to install them and set them up. And then we're going to go through the most important plug ins for your websites, Such as how to back up your website, how to secure your website, how to find analytics for your website. I mean, these are things you don't want to be without on your site. Okay, guys. Great job. I'll see you in the next lecture. 24. How to Use Plugins: Now, before we move on, we're going to go through how to find, activate and actually use the plug ins. So if you've already used plug ins in the past, you know how they work. You can skip this lecture, but if you're completely new, let's go through it. So we are at the back end for website, and if we go to the left, we'll have a section called plug Ins. Now, in here we have three parts. We have the install plug ins. That's going to be the plug ins that we have installed. Right now. We're gonna go through this section, we have the add new plug in, and then we have the plugging editor and we're going to move on to add a new plug ins. I can show you how it works. The plug in editor That's the coding parts of we're not going to touch that will ever. We don't need that part. That's why developers do the coding and we're not gonna be poking around in there at all. So I'm going to click on Add new, and this is where you're going to be finding all of your plug ins and basically This is heaven when it comes to problem solving. If there's a problem, there's a plug in this. The mantra. So the first thing we see here is the featured section, and those are the most popular plug ins currently out there. And if we look up the tabs here, we currently have popular, which is gonna be the popular as well. The recommended the favorites and the premium and premium plug ins or the ones you're going to have to pay for. But generally you're not going to need to pay for plug ins ever. There are a couple of plug ins that may be worth paying for, but those air very few, and there's always gonna be free option Now if I moved to the right here, we concert for plug ins and like women's talking about early. Whenever there's a problem, there's a plug in. So I'm just going to search for Let's say I want social media buttons. I'm just gonna search for social media buttons. There we go now, before we move on and pick any plug ins, there are four things we always want to keep in mind before we install any form of plugging whatsoever, and that is going to be number one. The reviews. And this goes with anything. If you're gonna buy something, you install something. You want to know that it's good, and I prefer to go by the rating and the amounts off ratings off course that's gonna matter . And as we can see with this one, it has almost 4.5 1000 installs and five stars. That's amazing. So that's the first thing to look at now. The second thing to look at is the active installation. So something may have a really good rating, but very few active installations. And that's a warning sign. You want to know that it's popular and that is being used. Granted, there are a lot of great plug ins out there that doesn't have a lot of installs, my own preference. I don't like to take the chance with my Web site, and I recommended you don't either. So look for high active installations, preferably 50 to 100,000 plus and then this one last updated. You don't want something that hasn't been updated for a while for two reasons. One is probably not going to be working with your website, and two that's going to be leaving you vulnerable for hackers as WordPress pumps of new version, new updates, the plug ins need to update with them or they're gonna be holes in your website. Four hackers and we're gonna talk a lot about security in an upcoming lecture. And then finally, we have these untested with your version off WordPress assess right here that we always want to make sure that the plug ins were getting is compatible. Okay, now, if there's a new version coming out off WordPress and it's only been, say an hour and it is not compatible and I think that it's fine, just give it some time and it will be updated. But generally we always want to make sure that it is compatible. So I'm not going to be choosing this one now looking at this one instead, it has quite a lot off reviews. It has a lot off active installations. A great rating has been last updated three weeks ago, which is great, and it is compatible with our WordPress version. Okay, so if I want to check this out further, all I'm gonna do is click on it. So in here I get a bunch of more detailed information, right? If you ever wonder, what is this? Well, then they say description, so we can just read through it and see what it actually is. And then we also have installation how to install it. But since we're onward, friends is gonna be super easy. Don't have to worry about that. I'm gonna show you. That's why we're in this lecture. Then we have the frequently asked questions, which is great, especially if you have a plug in that it has some kind of common question. For example, if we're going to be making our website into an e commerce store is going to be a bunch of questions coming with that, a frequently asked question is great. And then a change log, meaning what have the updates been doing? If you're interested in that screenshots, this can be super important. I mean, right now it's important because I am looking at social media bottoms to add for the website or if you would be adding in a form off gallery or something for the design off your website, then the screenshots are going to be important But for some plug ins like and live a firewall and virus or a backup, then screenshot aren't gonna be quite as importance. And then we have the reviews. Now, before I install any plug ins, I always always read the reviews. Like I told you previously, I don't take any chances with my website. I don't think you should either. Always check it out. Make sure that it's working the way it's supposed to, especially looking at the latest reviews. Okay, so this is looking all good. Now I have two options. Either I can click on install now here, or I can just do it right away from this page. Just click on install. Once is installed, all we need to do is click on Activate, and once it's activated, it's already up and running by itself. So if I go to the upper left corner and I click on visit site and open that in a new tab, you're gonna notice that this plug in once we activated it, it's already started working by itself. It is down here now. Of course, this is not an optimal placement. These might not even be optimal. In the sign or anything. But if we go back, there's going to be something here called settings, and very often a plug in is going to show you where it installed itself. So by looking here, I already know that in the settings here, the ad to any plug in which we just installed will be dormant and waiting for us to click on. Now, some plug ins like WP forms and L a mentor. They put themselves into the lift dashboard here, but this plug in it went to settings. So all I need to do is go to settings and click on it, and here I can start changing things up. I can decide where I want the placement to be, how I wanted to be looking, this style, this size, everything and for each plug in there going to be having their own set off options for how you can customize it now in the upcoming lectures were going to be going through the most important plug ins, and I'm also going to be showing you what benefits are with them, what to be looking for in this type of plug ins and off course, how to install and customize them. So you don't need to figure this out on your own, all of the best, The most important plug ins. I'll show you how to use them. And finally, if you want to remove a plug in, all we need to do is go to plug ins, click on install plug ins and before we can remove anything we need to click on De activates here and once has been deactivated, we can click on delete and then okay, and then it's gone. So for the plug ins that you have in here, they might be slightly different for you if you have another theme or if you choose not to install with Blue Host. But anyhow, for now, we're just gonna leave these. And in the upcoming lectures, let's go through all the plug in step. We're going to install the most important and best ones. OK, guys, now you know how plug ins work, how to find, install and activate them. See you in the next lecture 25. Backup Your Website: Okay, guys, let's talk about backing up our website now. Why should you back up your website? Well, the number one reason would be Don't risk your business now, guys, everything you put into your website all of the time, all of the effort potential, all of the money, the business that you build up all off, that could go away in an instant. If something were to happen to your website, there is never a reason to be risking this. The number one plug in The most important thing to do when you have your website up and running is to back it up. Because the truth is mistakes can happen. And I'm not talking about mistakes necessarily from your part. Of course, they also happen. But for example, blue host can make a mistake. Some plug in developer can make a mistake or you could even be hacked. Even though you have a great security on your website, someone could be hacking blue host, for example, And in any one of these scenarios, your website iss at risk. And if your website disappears well, your business is gone and you have to rebuild everything from the bottom. Nothing is worth that. I strongly recommend that you get a backup for your website, especially knowing how easy it is and that it is free. So hopefully by now you'll be convinced to back up your website. It actually is the number one rookie mistake. People who don't back up their website and loose it. They never do that mistake again. So let's not do it at all. So I already have a backup plug in that I'm going to show you exactly how to install it, how to use it, how to back up, how to restore etcetera. But if you want to do your own research, I want to show you what it is that we're looking for in a great backup plug in. Now the number one thing is to have automatic backups. We want to make sure that it is backing up itself in set intervals that you can set depending on how active you are with your website. This is super important to always make sure that it is backed up in it's backed up to date . The second thing is you want to plug in that also can restore, so if you can save your backups. You want the same plugging to be able to restore whatever you have backed up and the third would be cloud options. Now, if there aren't cloud options to this plug in is going to have to save on this server. And if you remember, we choose from our blue host options are server size isn't that big because we're not gonna need it to be that big, but it's going to get filled up quite quickly. Ask your website growth, which also means that your backups are going to grow. But the great thing would having cloud options is that, for example, Google Drive at this time is offering 15 gigabytes off free space. All you need to do is sign up, and I think that's great because then we have a free plug in. We have free storage and we're all set to go. So, guys, let's get started. So we're going to start off the back end off our website and then we're gonna move down to plug ins and click on Add New. Now the plug in that will be installing is called up draft plus, so all you need to do is search for updraft. Plus in here is all tied together snow spaces, and you're going to get this call up. Dr Plus WordPress backup Plug in And, as you can see, remember how I told you how to check for which plug ins that are good from the bad? This one has a ton of reviews. It's extremely highly rated, especially for having this many reviews has over two million active installations. It's recently updated, and it's fully compatible. This is one of the most popular plug ins for WordPress, and for good reason. We're gonna click on Install now and then we're gonna click on Activate, and now it's activated. But we're gonna have to set this up ourselves. So what I want you to do now is go down to settings and then all the way down to updraft plus backups. And then we're going to start off by going to settings in here, and the first thing we're gonna set is our backup schedule. Now you can back up your files and your database or just one off them. I strongly recommend that you back up both because if something were to happen, you want to restore everything you don't want to have your website and off the post and then missing the pictures and all the files to it. So back up everything. Now, the question is, when it comes to the schedule, how often will you be working on your website? So let's say that you're posting something once a week approximately, then perhaps backing this up weekly would be a great option. But if you're using it daily and you're making quite major changes, you might want to go with daily, right? But for now, we're gonna set this to weekly and just assumed if we're going to be posting maybe once or twice a week and we're gonna have the automatic backups weekly Now I'm gonna show you how to back up manually ass. Well, we're gonna set both of these two weekly to the writer. We can see how many off these back after we want to retain. I think two is a good options in case something happens. We always have to to fall back on. We don't really need any more scrolling down. We also can choose our remote storage. Remember, I was talking about cloud options and the beautiful thing with Google Drive. If even if you don't have a Google drive, just go and sign up for one. Just go search for Google Drive and sign up there and then you can store these falls in there instead of the Web server that we have. So all I'm going to do is click on Google Drive here, right. It gives me a couple of options. First we can change the dry folder name. We're gonna have to use the premium version for that. I'm gonna talk a bit more about that later, but we don't really need to change the name anyhow. Updraft pluses. A fine name by me. Now, what you want to include in the files backup. We want to include everything. This has everything and all of the other directories as well. There we go. And then the final thing if you want to get an email whenever it has been backed up, and this can be a great thing to do because you always know the things are in place, that they are being backed up, especially if it's just once a week as well. So we're just gonna go ahead and click air chickens we're not gonna go through the experts settings. There's nothing in it for us there. This is gonna work perfectly fine. And then I'm gonna click on save changes, and then this part is going to pop up and it's going to ask us to authenticate with our Google drive so that it can start backing up there. So I'm just gonna click here, and then I'm gonna go ahead and log in, and then I need to allow updraft plus to see, edit, create and delete all of the Google drive falls. And this just makes sense. This is how it's gonna handle the files the back of first that is putting their I'm gonna go ahead and click on allow. And now to complete this, all we need to do is go down here and click on complete set up. And now we should be back in the back end of for website with this message that says success. You have authenticate your Google drive account with our name and then how much that it is using okay and off course. If you want to use another cloud option, that's perfectly fine. Now know also that some of the cloud options are going to be premium based, but we still have access to Google Drive. Or we could use Dropbox, for example. So just use one of them if the one that you would prefer is in premium value because at any rate, these are free to get in the back up are free to do now, as we can see, just by having installed this backup is already backing itself up. Right? And if it wouldn't be and we wanted to do a back up manually, all we need to do is go ahead and click on this button where it says back up now. And it's going to ask us what we want to include in this backup. And I recommended you include the database definitely the files to send this back up to the remote storage. That is the cloud that we installed and then go ahead. Anchalee, come back up now. Now, this last one we don't need to check. We don't need it to be deleted manually. Just click on back up now and then it's going to start backing up manually. So I recommend that you do these kind of backup whenever you have done any major changes to your website because this is gonna make sure that whatever happens, you always have this version off your website going now, even if you are doing like three posts a week or two posts a week on your website and it would crash or get hacked or something would happen to your website by restoring it in having it at a back of off once a week, you would still only lose maybe one or two post rather than losing your entire business. And that's huge, guys, that's really huge. And then when it's done, we get this message. Okay, so now the next thing I want to talk to you about is if we scroll down, we have something called existing backups down here, and these are the back up that we have done that one happen automatically. And then remember, I did one manually. So these are the ones now, if I wanted to restore this, if something had happened or if I installed a plug in an entire website crash and I just wanted to restore everything, then all I would need to do is go ahead and select the one I want and click on restore its that simple. Now, if you wanted to upload your backup somewhere else, there is a migration service that comes with this that's gonna cost you. You're gonna need to pay to do that. But there is a very easy way to go around this. Now, if you look at this, we have the backup data here. Now all we need to do is click on these and they're going to download to your computer. Okay, so just download these to your computer log in at the back end off the website where you want to upload these to and then click on upload backup files. It's honestly that easy. Okay, so we don't need the migration service. And finally, the thing I want to talk about is the premium version. It quickly come premium slash extensions. Here we can see what's included in the free version and what we're going to get in the premium version. Truth is, we're going to do more than fine using the free version. That's what we use. And that's basically all you need. But if you're not very technical and you start building up your business really, really big. I can recommend it. If you're gonna pay for any plugging guys, this is gonna be it. And the main reason is going to be the support you get. So if you're not for technical of yourself and you really want to protect your business here, you have built up a big, nice business. Then it's worth going Premium. I don't think that it's more between 30 and $90 somewhere. Go premium. Use their help line and support and make sure that you always always have your site backed up. But for now, we're perfectly fine going free. And you're gonna be fine with free for a long time. But once again, if there is something special in here that you really need, go ahead and upgrade. Okay, guys, before we move onto the next lecture, I really recommend that you follow all of these steps. You need to have your website backed up. I cannot emphasize this enough. It's so important. So fall of all of these steps and the next one is basically just as important to have. So guys see in the next lecture 26. 26: Okay, guys, let's talk about securing your website now. When it comes to plug ins, there are two absolutely must have plug ins whenever you have any site up and running and number one is a backup plug in. The second must have is a security plug in for your website. Now, why should you need a security plug in? Well, listen to this crazy statistics per average small business website. There are 44 cyber attacks happening to that website at day, some website or having up towards 16,000 attacks a month. So it goes to say that the bigger that your business grows, the more prone is going to be two attacks now, even though we have a backup and were able to restore the website, should you be hacked, shoot something happen? There is still a very important reason to why we want to make sure that that never ever happens, and that is to protect your website data. So what is website data? Well, that is all of your personal information that might be on the website that is all off the your secure business information and perhaps even more sensitive. There's going to be all of your customers personal information that a hacker can get access to and potentially be releasing. Now, this is a really delicate situation, and the bigger businesses, the more sensitive it becomes. So we want to make sure that this never happens. And that's why we're going to make sure that our website is secure. So I already know a security program that I strongly recommend. I've been using it myself for a long time, has been used by a lot of people. It stood the test of time and it's super effective. But should you want to do your own research? These are the three most important things to be looking at in a great security plug him. Number one is a firewall. Now, a firewall is gonna make sure that no one gets access to your website or to your files so they can do any modifications. If they can't do any modifications to any files they can't implant in the mall where they can't do any hacking, etcetera, you always want to plug in with a great firewall in it. Secondly, you want the security plug and it's gonna be able to block eyepiece. What That means is that if there is any form of attempt off any attack off any planting off Mel, where On your website, then you want the security program to be blocking that I p address in other words, blocking that person from getting access to your site in any way again, I p is a personal address that each person has. This comes to your site. If you block it, they don't get access to your site at all anymore. So anyone who tries an attack will be blocked out. And then finally, the third thing is automated scans. You want the security plugging to be scanning every now and then at intervals that you can set yourself to make sure that there is nothing plant that there's nothing fishy going on, that you are all secure. So once we have installed this security as well, we're gonna have a backup. In case anything happens, you can restore it. And we're also gonna have security so no one can get access to anything. And these are the biggest pillars. The most important pillars, if you will, when it comes to plug ins for your website. So let's get started. So we're gonna go from the back end of our website and we're gonna move down to plug ins and go to add new. And now we're gonna go ahead and search for word fins. So all you need to do to find this plug in and search for the word word fence, it's together. It isnot with a space. And here we have it word from security firewall and malware scam. Now this has over two million active installations. And look at the rating it has received with this many reviews. It's incredible. It's been recently updated and it's completely compatible. I've used it for many years. It stood the test of time, and it has everything we need. So we're just going to click on install now and then we click on Activate. So one of the first things that we're gonna have to do is sign up with their email. And this is perfect because whenever it doesn t scans, finds anything or it even finds outdated plug ins or themes or something that needs an update, it's gonna send you an email. I'm just gonna go ahead and write my email in here. I don't want their newsletter. You might and I agree to their terms and then continue. We don't have a premium key. And honestly, we don't not at these points we're going to go with No thanks. Okay, so now it's installed. And if we look to our left, we can see that it has put itself next to the dashboard inside of the dashboard rather than going into the settings. So we're just gonna go ahead and click on word friends here. So once we get into word fans, it's gonna give us a tutorial. What we have here, how it works and just allow us to set some things up, which is great. We can go ahead and click on next and go through this to see exactly how this works. But in the end, this is still a plug and play plug in meaning. Once you have it in, it's pretty much ready to go. There's just one thing we need to do, and that is to scroll all the way up to the top, and you can see it is going to say to make your site as secure. It's possible. Take a moment to optimize the ward fence. Web application firewall. So we're gonna go ahead and do this right away, so I'm gonna kill it, Care to configure, and then we get a couple of options here. Just go with whatever is recommended. We're going to download the HT access as he backup file, and then we're going to click on Continue. Now the HD accesses a file that allows you to do modifications on your WordPress. So this is only keeping a backup copay shoot something happen and then it's done. It would just really come close. Super easy to do. It's all set up. And now you are secure on your website. Yeah, the back up. You have security. This is as good as it gets, guys. Now, before we move on, there's one thing I really recommend that you do, and that is to scroll down here and go to all options. And then we scroll down until we come to the firewall options and where it says brute force protection. So we're gonna click here and here we have something that says, Look out after how many log in failures. So this is currently set to 20 and I strongly recommend that you set this to something as low as five because you want to remember your password. And you don't need five attempts even to log in. But do you want to make sure that anyone who tries to gain access to your website they are going to be logged out and blocked? If they fail five attempts, right, you don't want to give them off towards 20 attempts to get into your website. So we're gonna choose this. Look out after Khomeini failures to five and then also look out to how many forgot password attempts also to five. They will go and then we're going to click on save changes. Perfect. Now, if we go ahead and click on the dashboard, we can see that there is a lot of options in here. There's a lot of things going on, and we even have statistics for how many total attack that are currently being blocked. And guys, these are not on your website. You're not having 4.5 1,000,000 attacks being blocked right now. Don't worry. This is the total amount of block in 24 hours the board fence is doing. But it goes to show how crazy many hackers there are out there and how many they're trying to or is going to try to, sadly, getting to your website as you grow your business. So security is super important. Now plug ins are going to basically, all the time, be free. But if you ever decide to pay for any plug ins, I strongly recommend that is going to be either the backup plug in and or this security plugging. Because these are your biggest core plug is the most important off them all. This is what keep your business afloat Now there are a lot of different things and options when it comes to word friends. Basically, you could make a course on it and go through it, and it would still take its time. But what you need to know is that everything is being protected right now. This is pretty much plug and play. Once you set it up, you are protected. Once you have this installed and set up. So great job. Finally, if you want to do a manual scan, all you need to do is go to the left here and click on scan is going to give you a nice tutorial is going to do that on everyone that you click on here, which is great. And then just go ahead and click on new start new scan. You might want to do this in the beginning. Once you have this install, then you're all good to go. Guys, you might want to check out the options, but this is already working by itself. Okay, Now we have the most important plug in installed. Let's move on to the next want see in the next lecture. 27. Secure Your Website: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be installing a plug in That's going to allow us to get website analytics. Now, we're going to be using something called Google Analytics. You might have heard of it before. Or maybe it's completely new. So what it is, it's a Web service that allows you to track all off your visitors action on your site. Now, in order to do this, we're going to need a Google Analytics account, and I'm going to be providing the link in. The resource is all they need to do is enter it and sign up. And then I'm gonna show you how to install and get the analytics on your website. It's super easy. You just need to have a Google Analytics account signed up for. So why would you want to have website analytics for your website? Well, you wanted to provide actionable insights, and that's just a fancy way of saying you want to know what your audience likes. You want to see what they're doing, where they're going to what they're thinking, what they're buying, what, where they're going next. Everything. Everything your visitor is doing, you want to know about it. Now, Whether you having a store or a gallery or a blawg, you still want to know which is the most popular product, which is the least popular product, which are their favorite photo, which are the favorite post tutorials because this allows you to create more content that your visitors enjoy. And if you can create more content that your visitors enjoy or sell more products that your visitors enjoy your customers in this case, then you are going to be more successful with your website and with your business. So having an analytics is basically one of the keys off, getting into a relationship with your customers, understanding them and then providing a better service in other words, getting a better business. So I already have a plug in that we're going to be installing. That's by far the easiest. But once again, if you want to do your own research, these are the three things you want to have provided in a great analytics plug in. Now the 1st 1 is an effective dashboard, because when it comes to Google Analytics, you're gonna notice that asked you sign up for it. There is. It's own site with all of the analytics tools. It's very complicated is ah lot of in depth information in there, but the point is a lot of the time you need to go to your Google analytics in order to extract the information. I believe that a great plug and allows you to stay on WordPress. Check out the dashboard and get all of the information from their day to day information week to week, month to month, year to year. The more time you can spend on your website and start doing the things that actual builds up your business on your website, the better you're going to be with your time and energy Now. The second thing is, you want to have multiple track ings. You want to have a plug, and it's going to allow you in your dashboard to show events, tracking to show exactly what they're doing to show e commerce tracking to show the affiliate link track. And should you have that now, a great plug in a great Google analytics plugging is gonna allow you to see all of these things directly in your dashboard again so you don't need to go to the Google Analytics site and dive in there and scratched through all of the information you wanted to be provided to you straight away. And the final thing is that you wanted to be user friendly. Now, perhaps you an advanced user. If so, then this doesn't really matter to You can use it the way you want to, because you understand it. But if you're like me and you don't have any background when it comes to code and when it comes to analyzing in depth data, for example, then you want to have a plug in that simplifies this process for you and gives you all of the important information that you need without any off the hassle. So without further ado, we now know why we need a website analytics and I have a great one that we're going to be using. So let's go ahead and install it. So here I am at the back end off our website. I have gone to plug ins, clicked on add new same deal as before. Now what we're going to be doing is that we're going to search for Google analytics, and as you'll notice there's a bunch of different analytics. And once again, if you've used Google Analytics before, it's all fine. You can basically choose anyone because you know how to use it, but we're going to go with this one now. This is monster insights. Plug in four Google analytics And the great thing with this plug in is that it makes everything oh so simple. There's no need to be touching in the code. There's no complicated set up. There's no needing to go to Google Analytics. Dig down in order to extract the information. Everything is provided to you. Everything is set up for its super user friendly. And that is why I love this. It saves me so much time and energy. Now you'll notice that this is untested with my version of WordPress. And generally death would be a warning sign. But because this is such a big and popular plug in, and I know for a fact that this is working, we're gonna go and install this, And chances are when you're installing your monster insights, it's not going to be saying I'm tested now. If you have an install icon in here, then chances are you haven't been following along in the course from the beginning, which is completely fine. But if you have been following every step, you're gonna notice that it already says active. And that is because when we set everything up, this one was already included. And if we look to the upper left, you're going to see this. Please configure your Google analytics sitting a little notification that has been pestering us for a while. Well, we're finally gonna release him because this is already installed, and all we're gonna do is set up our Google analytics connected to our WordPress. And remember, guys, before you do this, you want to go to the resource and sign up for a Google Analytics account if you haven't already, and if you have one, then just use that. So we're gonna go ahead and click on Google Analytics settings there, which is gonna take us directly to the monster insights plug in, and then we're gonna go down and click on Connect Monster insights, and then we're gonna choose our account and then allow. And then you're gonna pick the profile and the view. And if you haven't used this one before, you're only gonna have one option for that. Now, there are several for us, but I'm gonna choose this one and then just click on complete connection. And there we go. It's connected. It was that fast and that effective. Now, if we go ahead and go to our reports in here, we're going to be getting all of this interesting information so that we can start tracking our visitors. Now, the first thing we have here is decisions. That is the amount of times that they were visiting your website, right? And then we have the page views. Basically, how many page views, How many clicks were getting on the different pages. So there's going to be, ah, lot of very useful information in here that we're going to be able to extract. We're gonna have the sessions. We're going to see the page views, average session, duration, the bounce rate. And if you don't know what that is, you can check out this exclamation mark it. Now, if you are further interested in how Google Analytics works because that is a huge topic, we're gonna have Google Analytics as an additional course that you can go ahead and check out if you want to learn more about it. What kind of information? You can extract, how it works, what it is, etcetera. So there we go. Now we have Google Analytics installed. Super fast, Super easy. We can read out all of the information in here, and of course, we can also go to Google Analytics and read it there. But the entire point of getting on E. C. User friendly plugging like this is so that we have all of the information in here already . Now, if you have any use for experience with Google analytics, you have much more freedom in choosing the plug ins because you can go more in depth in the plug ins and in the information and in the coding. But for us, when we want the user friendliness, simplicity and off the most important features, we're going to stick with this one for now. Okay, guys, let's move on to the next plug and see in the next lecture 28. Speed Up Your Website: So guys, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about speeding up your website now, in today's society, when everything is going so fast, we're used to such a high pace. We need to have a website that loads really quickly. Your visitors are not going to be patient and wait around for it to be loading. So here, we're going to be learning how to make your website faster. Why? If it isn't obvious already and also how it works. So the number one reason is why Well, the 1st 1 is self evident. It is for your visitors. They're not going to be patient. They're not going to be waiting around. Everything happens quickly. Your website need to happen quickly asked. Well, now another thing is actually for S e o search engine optimization. Now, the faster your website loads, the happier this search engines are going to be about it and rank you higher if you don't know what that means. Don't worry. In the next lecture we're going to be talking about a CEO and install a plug in for that. But for now, let's just know that the faster website is the happier visitors will be and the happier the search engines will be. So how do we speed up your website? Well, we're gonna use something called cashing and cashing is basically taking all of your big files on your websites such as the header such as the pictures, maybe possible videos, whatever it might be. There's heavy images way a lot of special. When you have a lot on your website, we're gonna take all of those, compress them into smaller sizes and put them in a so called cash. Basically, you're not gonna have everything load instantly. Instead, you're going to have your visitors save this cash on their computer so that they can pre load right. They don't have to download everything and make it appear. Rather, it will be saved on their computer and they can just appear much faster, which is going to be giving them a better experience. So that is what cashing is. And that is how you speed up your website. Now I already have a cash plugging off course, like always that I use myself. It's super easy, and I strongly recommended we're gonna install it and go through it. But if you decide to do your own research. Here are the top three things to look for. Number one is extra home page shakes Now. A lot of people usually are going to be spending a lot of time on your home page and likely even if you have a navigation and great navigation. People may be returning to your home page, so having a cash plug in that's gonna do extra shakes on your home page is going to be great to make sure that it's not slowly loading. Because if that part on your website is slow, then their experience is gonna be heavily deteriorated. And the next in number two, its content delivery network support. This is called C D and support, and basically it means that when someone visits your website, they're going to be loading the funds from where you have your files. For example, if you're using blue host and you have your fast in the US than wherever they come from, they're going to have to load the files, your images, your articles, the header, the videos, etcetera from the U. S. Now, what the CD and support does is that it takes all of your cash files and it puts it at different servers around the world. So, for example, if you are living in Australia and there is a cdn serving Australia, they will be downloading all off the files encounters of your website from Australia, which is going to load so much faster rather than downloading it from USA. Okay, so that is what the Cdn network is, and it's one of those things to make your website so much faster. I strongly recommend that you find a plug in the Hassett and the third thing is a pre load . Now, first time visitors coming to your website are first going to have to visit the website and then they will be catched. And of course, that means that everyone's first experience might be slow and that's no good. You want to have a plug in that has a pre load setting, meaning you can pre catch everything and then put it to your visitors. Even their first time experience will be great and fast. Remember hype a society or website. Our business need to match this. So now when we understand how to speed up our website and what it does, let's go ahead and do just that. So I am in the ad plug in section at the back end of for website. I'm gonna go to search plug ins and I'm going to search for WordPress super cash and looking to the left. Here it is, has a lot of installations. And even though it is not updated to its untested with the current WordPress, we can trust this one. This one is created by automatic, which is the same bunch of guys who helped create Ward President or and created wordpress dot com. So these are part of the program is for the platform that we're currently using. So this plug in has been around for a long time, and I expected to stay around for a long, long time as well. So we're gonna go ahead and install it and then just click on activate. And there we go. It's installed some now all we're gonna do It's move over to set things, which is where's recites and go to the bottom where it says WP super cash. And then it's pretty straightforward. All they're gonna do is click on catchy on and then update the status and now it will be on and working. So there are a couple of things that we want to set up in here. All you need to do is follow along with me. It's actually super easy. We're just gonna use the recommended settings. So first, let's move on to advanced in here. What we're gonna do is that we're going to remove this one. Don't cash pages for known users, which is great in case you're doing updates for frequent visitors than they and you won't be able to see those updates. So you don't want to catch the page for those known users. And then we have compressed pages so that they served more quickly to visitors, which is also great them or compressed the foster they're gonna load. We're just gonna go with the recommended settings here that just works great scrolling down . We have the super important setting. I was talking about earlier extra home page chicks. I'm gonna check that one s well, scroll down and click on updates status. And then we're gonna move into the Cdn and we're going to be enabling that support, right? And then we're gonna save the changes again and Let's move over to contents and in here you're gonna be able to see everything that's been cash, how heavy they are, how much there is. But there's nothing for us to do here. What we could do is that we could delete the cash, which we can also do from up above here. Should we want to reset it? Because we've done some major updates or just to test the speed, for example, they can all be deleted up here, and then we're gonna move over to pre load and here we're gonna setting So that the refresh preloaded cash fast. For every I like to put 1414 minutes because that's a day. So we're gonna refresh the preloaded cache files every day, right? So this is a standard setting, and I recommend you use it as well. Now we're gonna make sure that we have pre load activated by clicking here, and we're also going to go ahead and pre load tags and categories. Another taxonomists. Now we've gone through tags and categories already, and we will be making sure to be using those. And then we're going to click on save settings and Once we've done this, everything is set up its on and running and it's making your website faster. However, since we just recently started this website, there isn't going to be too much things on it. So you're probably not going to be noticing any improvement right now. But ask, just continue building your website, building your business, then you're going to be having a noticeable effect working in the background. We're just gonna make sure that we set this from the beginning so that your website is always as fast as it possibly can be. Now, if you want to test the speed of your website, what you can do is used. This age old tool is called Ping DM. So I'm gonna put this tool in the resource is as well. And all you do is that you write in your website in here and then you can test it from different places to see how fast it loads. So what you might want to do if you are unsure about this plugging for some reason is go over to plug ins in hair to your installed plug ins. Scroll down to your WP super catch deactivated test the speed off your website and then reactivated. Test the speed of your website and you're gonna see the difference. No, again, you're probably not going to see in the difference. In the beginning, your website doesn't have too many things. But as time goes, it's gonna be a huge difference. It's just one of these things we want to get right from the beginning. All some guys. I'll see you in the next lecture when we're gonna go through S E O, which is such a huge topic. See there. 29. Improve Search Rankings Setup: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about improving the search rankings off your website. In other words, your search engine optimization, which is going to be abbreviated as S e. O. Now I'm going to be talking about this more and more throughout the course, and this topic is so big that there's going to be an entire section dedicated to it. So what is search engine optimization? Well, basically, it is making your website in your content and everything on it as friendly as possible to the search engines. You want to appeal to the search engines so that Yahoo being and especially Google, is going to like your webs that imported high in the ranking? Let me show you an example. So I'm at Google and I'm going to write in my search term in here, also known as my keyword. So I'm going to be searching for complete Digital Marketing guide and then hit, surge. And now, if we have a look at this, the first thing that's popping up in the very top here is the complete digital marketing guy. 17 courses in one which is mine and Jesper is course on you to me. So in other words, we are ranking at the top for this keyword for this search term complete digital marketing guide and the purpose of improving your S e O is so to make sure that you are ranking as high as possible for the kind of keywords that you're using in Google. So, for example, because we have a course and a guide on digital marketing, we want to rank is highest possible for digital marketing guide and using complete because it is a complete guide. And because we're using you to me, which already have great seal and because off our landing page, because of the content in our course everything, our search engine optimization is great enough to be ranking number one. Now, However, if I remove a couple of words from here like complete and guide and I'm only searching for digital marketing, you're going to notice that we're not popping up in the top at all. We're not gonna be anywhere to be found whatsoever because we don't have good and off s CEO to rank for digital marketing. But we're ranking for complete digital marketing and guide. So this is what s CEO is and how it worked. And your mission is going to be to rank as high as possible with your s e o for your keywords. These are the key words this search terms. Let's head back. OK, guys, we're back here, So search engine optimization is such a big topic. We're gonna dedicate an entire section to it, so you don't have to understand everything right now, but you need to understand the basics. And also, we're gonna get a plug in this basically going to do and help you with most of the CEO features. So additional two ranking high. What's the benefit off CEO? Well, having great s e o first and foremost is gonna get you traffic Now, even if you have the greatest website in the world the greatest products, the greatest services, blood, whatever it might be. Unless you have traffic, you're not gonna have anyone that buys anything and you're not gonna have a business. So you need the traffic. So by having great ASIO, you're always going to be having a flow of traffic coming to your site for free. You could advertise off course, but this is free Automated traffic always coming into your website. Now, even if people aren't coming to your website just because you're ranking high for certain keywords, your brand is going to be appearing. So this is also a great and freeway off building brand awareness. So S CEO is one of the most important part when it comes to building your audience, getting awareness and creating your business. So we're going to get a plug in for this, and of course I have one in mind. I'm gonna show it. But if you want to do your own research, these are the three most vital things that you need in a S e o. Plug him. Number one is having a site map. So you want a plug in? That's going to create a site map for your website. A site map is basically when the plug and decodes your website into a map and explains to the search engine what? Your website. It's about which Urals means what where you have your navigations, how often it's updated, how important certain content is. For example, you want your home page to have a higher S CEO because you want people to land there generally or at your blood, etcetera. So it's site map is gonna make it easier for the search engines to understand your side and the better they understand your site them, more likely they are to rank you high. So this is by far the most important feature off all. You need to make sure that the search engines enjoy your site. This second thing you want to plug in to have is the ability to improve your content. Now, there are some plug ins for a CEO that's gonna help you with a site map. But it's not going to be helping you, right? Great content with high S E O value. So you're gonna want a plug in. That's gonna help you with that and make sure that everything you produce is search engine friendly. Remember, we're creating a business here, and since we're having a business, we need to rank high. When we rank high, we get traffic and then the circle is completed. Okay, this is how business works. So you want to have a plug in that helps you improve your content. Unless you're an expert, of course. But I personally want that help and then the third and final is a tool set. Now you want a plug in that's gonna have a multitude off feature. For example, you want a plug in that's gonna make sure that you don't have duplicate Urals because that's going to give you a Google penalty. Meaning they're going to rank you lower because they think you're trying to cheat the search engines You want a plug in that's gonna help you with canonical Urals. That means making authority of you aerials so that the search engine think that you are an authority on your subject and off course authorities needs to be ranked higher. So you want a plug in That's going to do this much S e o value for you as possible. In other words, on entire tool set. Okay, guys. So this is a quick run through off SL. We're gonna go much more in depth in it in a course later on in the course, let's go ahead and install the plug in to improve your search ranking. Improve your s e o. Okay, so here we are at the back end off our website. I've gone to plug ins, add new now I'm gonna search for plug ins. And what you want to search for is used. Why O A S t used. Okay, so this is going to bring up the by far most popular and in my experience, effective plug in. Now, check this out is a super high rating. Super many reviewers. Five million plus active installations compatible. Recently updated. This plug in is huge. I strongly recommend this one is by far the most effective I used. So we're gonna go ahead and install it, and then we're going to click on Activate so there would go. It's installed and it's activated. Now, the first thing we want to do is that we want to configure it so that it's activated properly and effective for your website. Okay, so the first thing we're gonna do is move up to the why up here and click on configuration Wizard. And then we're going to get started and configured the Yost s CEO. So click and configure Yost s CEO, and now we're going to get a couple of questions which is gonna help the plug in optimize it for our site. Now, the 1st 1 is Please specify if your site is under construction or already active. We wanted to be option A my side this life and ready to be indexed next. Because that's gonna make sure that you show up in the Google being any whole search rankings and then is what does decide represent? Now this is going to be representing me and Jesper. So that's a corporation Romania, Jesper LTT, and then we're gonna go next. And of course, you pick the options that fits youth. I'm only here to guide you through what they are and what they mean and how this set up works and we represent a company. And then we're going to write the name of the company, which is Robin and Jesper. Lt d. Now you can also provide an image off it if you want to, but it's not mandatory. It's not going to improve your S CEO if you do so and there were critical next and then for the social profiles, you really want to set all of these up? These are really important for us, you know, for your navigation and when you are hyper linking so that the search engines can recognize between your for example. Facebook Fan page or Facebook company Page and your website. But to save us some time. I'm not gonna do that. I'm gonna go ahead and click on next, but you should set this up, and then it's a surgeon. Invisibility surgeon issued show post in search result es show pages. My templars in my library. Yes. You want to show everything in the search results, right? We want to be as visible as possible them or And the higher we rank, the better to just leave them a guest and click on next. Does your site have multiple authors know Next And now we're gonna go ahead and verify and integrate with the Google Search Council, which is something that's going to show the health off our website. This is really a big boost when it comes to S e o. And it's quick and fast to do So. What we're gonna do is that we are going to go and click on get Google authorization code so we can connect Google with Yost. We're gonna look into our account here, and then we're gonna click on allow, and all we need to do is go ahead and copy this code. Click on this square there and now it's copied. And then we're gonna go back here and we're gonna paste it in. There's a code and click on authenticate. And then we're gonna go ahead and click on next, and then we have in this part the website name. And this is important because the website name is going to be showing what is going to be looking like in Google. So we could have our website name here, for example, and then we could add a title separator. So what we're gonna want to do in here is decide which kind off separator we want to use. And the question is, what is a separator? Well, if you go ahead and you go to Google and you make a search, for example, I have searched for digital marketing article in here. You're gonna notice that there's a bunch off different results and what these results have is that they're showing the name of their blawg post at first here and then they have a separator. This is the separator. And then we have the name off the website and similarly there also using a dash it have the name off the page or off the article a separate and then marketer. And these guys e marketed. They're using a long dash and some are going to be using a wall s. Well, if we scroll down here, we have one. We have 10 reasons. You need digital marketing strategy and then a wall and then smart inside, which is the name off their website in their business. So what we're gonna want to do in here is right. Our website name, which is Robin and Jesper and then decide in our separator. And I really like the wall. I think it's a clean look. We're gonna choose the wall and click on next. And then if you want their newsletter, you can go ahead and sign up. I actually think the newsletters pretty good. They have some decent tips and tricks with Seo, but for now, we're not gonna do that. We're gonna call it coming next, and then they have a bunch of additional features here. They want to sell you something if you want to. Of course, you can go ahead and do that. But you don't need any of this. You only need this free version of the plug in, which is perfect. We're going to scroll down and click on next, and then we're all done and we can go ahead and click on close. The set up is complete. OK, guys, Now it's installed. The plug in is up and running. But if you notice during the install when we authenticate the Google Search Council, we got ain't no profiles warning. So if you check your notification, we have something. This is don't miss your crawl errors Connect with Google Search Council here because we didn't have a profile for that. Now, if you followed along the steps and you did have a profile and you connected with it, great, then you can skip the next lecture. But if you don't have a profile there, either then you're gonna want to go ahead and authenticated and set up your Google Search Council account. So follow me on to the next lecture, if over to have it skip the next lecture and I'll see you in the next next lecture. See you there, guys 30. Google Search Console: Okay, guys, in this video, we're going to be setting up our Google Search Council account and connecting it to used. Now, if you already did that in the previous lecture, you can escape this lecture. But if you didn't have a profile, then we're going to go ahead and set that up now and then connected to Joost. So let's get started. We're gonna go ahead and go to search dot google dot com forward slash search dash council . Don't worry about this. I'm gonna put this link in. The resource is so it's much easier to access. So then you're gonna get to this screen, and we're gonna go ahead and click on Start now, and then we're gonna be prompted to sign into your Google account. So we're gonna do that now and then you're going to get to this page. And then there are two different ways to verify your website. Now, the 1st 1 is through dumaine verification, and that is simply you're gonna verify that you own your domain name. And our domain name is Robin and jesper, jesper dot com. That is the domain name. But you can also verify for a UL prefix, meaning that when people come to your website, they can come through www dot Robyn and and jesper dot com. Or it could also be that they have the https. It could look like that or it could be without the S. And it could also be without the double use. And it could also be the mobile version. So it's gonna look like this. So when you're signing up with the u. R l prefix, that means that you're gonna have to sign up all of these individually. The mobile version http https www without the W's etcetera. Now, if we sign up with the domain instead to show that we own this domain, we're going to get all of those prefixes automatically, and this is going to simplify the job for Joost a lot. Now, the difference is that here, you need to go into your host and very find through the DNS records. While here, you could just add a piece of code on your website, so this is a bit easier, but this is surprisingly easy. Anyhow, I'm gonna show you exactly how this works. So just right in your domain name dot com Nothing further just your domain name and then the dot com. Or if you off course, if you have the CEO that UK or something else you're gonna end of like that and then you click on continue. And now you're going to get a piece off code in here. So all you're gonna go ahead and do is click on Copa here, grab that coat and then you're gonna go to your domain name provider, and for us, that is Blue Host. We're gonna go ahead and log into Blue Host now. So here we are at Blue Host. We're gonna go ahead and log in, and then we're gonna go ahead and click on domains and then we're gonna go to the left here and click on Sewn Editor. So that's gonna take you to this part. Now, if you're not using blue host you're using, for example, you bought your domain name elsewhere. You can go to host gate or you can go to go dad in name cheap, wherever you bought it and just set it up. It's the same way to set this up, regardless for the verification. But if you went with Blue host and followed the course from the beginning. Just follow these steps. It's super easy. And then what we're gonna do is here at host record, where it says add DNS record. We're gonna write in our website name or our domain name Rather's, which is Robin and jesper dot com. We're gonna leave the detail and then type here. We're gonna change that to text and in here, the text value. We are just going to go ahead and click on a paste and then click on add record. And now you have successfully added records. If I scroll down, you're going to see that down here under txt, we have our record put a So you want to see this at sign here, which shows that you put in your domain name and then that this code is put in here. So the next step you want to do is that you want to go back and then click on verify. Now chances are that you're not going to get ownership very fight of right away, because it can take up towards a couple of minutes 10 15 afterwards, 24 hours. I've experienced both, actually, both the 10 minutes and the 24 hours it completely depends, but give it at least 24 hours and then verified, and then you should get to this part. With this ownership verified, which is perfect. All they need to do is click on Done. So now, if I go to the upper left in here and click on search property, we can see that we have our domain property in here. And if you want to find out more, you can just go ahead and click on Started to get a guide. But we're not gonna touch this anymore. We just wanted to verify. We're gonna go ahead and go back to the back in a far website and verify years, So let's go back. And here we are. So what we're gonna do is we're gonna check out this notification, and we're just gonna click on connect with Google Search Council here. So now when we get in here, we can see that we have a profile set up because that is a profile. We set up a Google search console so all that we need to do is go ahead and click on save profile. There were go setting saved. So if we go back to the why up here, there is no longer any notification. Perfect. So if I click on a CEO here and I get back, we can verify there's no notification. Everything is set up. There's no problem. We have set up or Google search consulates up and working. Everything is the way that should be perfect. Now you want to check out that there's no notifications in here, meaning there's no further problems. If there are just ask us in the Q and A and will help you out. But now you should be all set up. So let's move on to the next lecture and learn how to use this to further see in the next lecture. 31. Improve Search Rankings & Posts: Okay, guys. So by now in the general section off Joost, where we are, there should be no special notifications. Google Search Council should be all set up. You should be ready and running. Perfect. Now, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about how to use Yost to improve the search rankings off your posts. Now, the amazing thing with this plug in it, it gives you an additional bunch off features. Let me show you what I mean. So if you go to the lift and we go to post and just click there, we can see that there are a couple of additional things added onto the writer. Now, first off, we have the number of outgoing internal links in the post which gonna be collected for all of your post. And then we have the S e o score for each of your posts, and then we have the readability score for each of your posts. It's gonna show the title meta description and key phrase. Now, if you think this is too much clutter again, these options are adding the screen options. You can just go ahead and turn them off. So what do all of these mean Well, we're gonna go ahead and find out. So Kilic, under posted you have created and let's go into it. So now if we scroll down from the post that we made earlier on our blogger or article or however you wish to use it, we have added in a snippet hairpiece Yost eso directly into our post editor. So the first thing we get here is the snippet preview. So this is the way that is going to be looking when someone is finding you out on Google. So first you have the the title, which is digital marketing success in four steps. And then we got that wall remembered that we customized. And if you haven't, you can go back to Yo's down here and click on search appearance and set that up. And then we got this wall in Dennis's Robin and Jesper. So this is how we're looking in the search engines by now and below. There we have our slug. In other words, this post is that Robin and just adults come forward slash digital dash marketing dash success dash in dash four dash steps and then we have our meta description, which we right now don't have one. So what? We can do it? We can go ahead and customize these. Now, I think this title is perfect already, but I would like to do is edit this snippet. So all I need to do is just click on it here and I get this editor where can edit everything. So the first thing you're going to notice is that there is a bar down below here. Now, if this bar is green, that means that everything is going to be visible for the search engines when it pops up. If it's red, it means that there's too much text and everything isn't going to be visible. So the title looks great. This slug I would like to shorten it down because the worst that I want to rank for its this digital marketing success. And, for example, if I had a key word that I wanted to rank for and that was digital marketing success formula, I would go ahead and add a dash and right formula. Now, this is going to improve. Our S C O score is gonna make the search engines like us more for this search term. So depending on what your key phrases, you're going to want to edit your slug after that, and then we have the meta description. So what we can do here is that we can write our own Texas gonna summarize our post so we could right in here, you'll find the formula for digits on marketing success in just four simples steps. Are you making any off these mistakes? Come in and find out. So what I have done in here He said I have written a snippet so that people who are considering clicking on our link clicking on this post from Google to our side, they're going to get an incentive of what it is and why they should click now. Should I write too much text in here? And I would write blah, blah, blah, blah, blah. You know, this is this one goes or wrench. Know what that means is that if we were Google like this and we had been searching for something, then this takes wouldn't be fitting in here. Do you notice these three dots? That generally means that there are more takes following, and you might not want that You might want to learn the mean with curiosity what comes next . But generally you want to do just like they have done here. You want to finish this snippet, make sure that it gets to the point, making sure that it is attractive and alerts in your visitors or potential visitors. Rather. So let's go back. So I'm going to remove all of the blah, blah, blah. It's green, it's perfect. And now we can click on close snippet. So that's the first thing we have in here. It's the snippet preview, and then we have something here called readability analysis. So if I click on here, it's gonna give me on analysis off how my post looks like. This editor is also added to the pages. You get the exact same thing for pages and posts. Now, the first thing we can see that there are the consecutive sentences. The text contains four consecutive senses, starting with the same word. Try to mix things up. So they're giving us an analysis of what I have written so far and how I can improve with four visitors but also first and foremost for the search engines. You don't want to be too repetitive. You can get a penalty for that. So if there's something here that you don't understand, like transition words, it says none of the scent of the contain transition words. All you need to do is go ahead and click on it and you're gonna be taken to their page, which explains exactly what it is, what it means and why it is important. So not only doesn't analyze everything you do and have, it also teaches you why it's important, why you need and how to get it is such an amazing tool to have in your repertoire. And then we get the good result, which is always great news. The Flesch reading ease past the voice subheading distribution, etcetera. So this is the readability analysis. Now, if I close this if I collected and I could weaken focus key phrase, we haven't freedom anything in here. But if you remember what I spoke about in the first video before we install this plug in, that is about a key phrase. Where do you want to rank now? I search When I showed you this example, I started for digital marketing, Success writes. So if I want to rank for these search phrase for this keyword that is also called, I would write in here digital Maher forgetting success because that would be the word that I wanted to rang for. And then I'm going to get a couple off tips down here in how to improve what I currently have and how to rank better for this keyword. Now the first thing we have this that there's no out bound links to a pair on this page. Outbound links means that there's no links, for example, to some other website to our own social media. There's no internal links, nothing linking to our all their pages, etcetera. And all of these things were going to go more in death in when we get to the S e o section . Remember, get this is a huge, huge topic. So we're gonna be talking much more about this, how to use it effectively and how to do it properly, step by step. But for now, Yost is gonna teach you so much, it's gonna help you greatly along the way. There's something you don't know what it is. Just click on it. And then again, we have what we can improve and then the good results. So the final tip I want to give you here is remember, each time you write a post or you creating new page, go ahead and write in your focus. Kiefer, it's no which focused key phrase that you want to use if you don't know what you're good from bad key phrase right now. Don't worry about that. We're gonna learn about keyword research in the CEO section later on in the course. But for now, use what you want to rank for what you think might be good to rank for. And then make sure that you have this focus key phrase in the title in the slug and also in the meta description in the snippet in here. So use use, use it properly. Go through the analysis, make sure that it's all agreeing. Click on the links off the things you don't understand. And then don't worry too much about this, because again, Guys s CEO is a huge topic and we are going to go through it properly in its own section. But for now, let's continue with the plug ins and move onto the next one. See, in the next lecture guys 32. Block Spam: Okay, guys, in this video we're going to be talking about and learning how to get rid off spam. So them bigger our website gets, the more spam we most likely are going to get. Unfortunately, that is how it looks like on the Web right now. But removing and blocking spam isn't too hard. But before we go ahead and learn that and which the best plugging for this is, let's talk a little bit about the benefits about blocking spam, even though I think a lot of the benefits are obvious already. But one of the benefits that you might not be thinking about is that you want to support engagement for your users. Now, even if you only have a little bit of spam on your website, some Commons here and there that is still going to claw your website and keep people from engaging in your website. Now you always want to support engagement for all of your visitors. Mawr comments, mawr clicking, etcetera, etcetera that more people do this Verrier business gonna be and growth and also it's going to be improving your S e O. Now it's also gonna help you stay out of trouble. Now remember, you're building a business here, And if someone put some spam or some bad link leading to something illegal, some maybe, you know, material that you're not supposed to be seeing that allowed to be seeing etcetera, then that's gonna be connected to your business. Maybe not legally, but in their mind, they're going to get a bad vibe off your business. So you always want to stay out of trouble as much as possible simply by blocking this type of spam. And, of course, I already have a plug in in mind. We're gonna go ahead and install that. But if you want to do your own research, here are the three most important things When it comes to a plug in to block spam, number one is that you want to have no visitor action, preferably at least minimal amount of visitor action on what I mean with that is that you want to have a little off this recapture as possible. You don't want your visitors to need to verify that they are human because it's going to take away from their experience. And if it gets too complicated, they're just not going to be commenting at all, So you want to keep that part as simple as possible while still being effective in blocking the spam itself. Now, the second point is that you want minimal database impact. Now you want a plug in. That's not going to be affecting your website and slowing it down too much. You want a plug in that you know, works, preferably that has stood the test of time that has gotten a lot of great reviews. The worst thing you can do is get great. Block it from spam. But stews lower for websites. Your deteriorating your users experience that way. And finally, we wanted to be effectively automated. In other words, you're gonna need to do as little work as possible. Basically, this plug and it's gonna be like hiring someone who's gonna manage all of the comments for you, the less work unit to put into this. That better. And these are the three things you want to look for when you're looking for a spam blocking plug in. But there is one spam blocking plug in the student test of time. They have great creators, and they have a huge amount of dollars reviews and positive rating. So we're gonna go ahead and download that. I'm using it myself. I've loved it for many years. Let's get started. Alright, guys. So here we are at the back end off our website. We're gonna go ahead and go to plug ins. Now, the funny thing is that with our blue host and with the theme that we haven't with the basic installation Off board press, we already have. The plug in installed is called Akkus Mitt. Anti spam. Now, should you happen to not have this, all they need to do is go to add new search for Akkus Mitt, and it's going to be popping up. This is huge. Now, this is by the same creators, which created wordpress dot com. They're called automatic now. They also created the plug, and we already installed called WordPress super cash. So we know that these creators are great. We know because they're connected to WordPress. They're always gonna be updated. And this is probably the biggest, oldest and right now, most effective plug in when it comes to blocking spam. So all we need to do is go ahead and click on activate. So now when it's activated, we're gonna go up here and set up our Akkus Mitt account Now with this plug and you're going to have to sign up to them in order to get your A P I key. That is the key that you need to end to here to allow this plug in to get access and moderate your comments on your website. Even though there is a sign up, which is a little bit of a downfall, this plugging is well worth. It is the most effective when it comes to blocking spam. So it is a tiny, tiny price to pay. So we're just gonna go ahead and click on get your A P I key and then we're gonna click on activate Akkus mitts and then we're going to scroll down. And here they have three different options and you'll notice the two of these costs and one of these are free. Basically, they're free, but they have the ability to offer a donation should you want to donate. But otherwise you can just get it for free and activated. So we're gonna click on get started with personal, and now this is where we have to create our account, which is gonna be for wordpress dot com just so you can use this plug in. But again, trust me, this is well worth it. Even though other plug ins don't need a sign up, this Blufgan is so good. We're gonna do that anyhow, So click on, create your account unless you have a wordpress dot com account. So let's go ahead and just sign up. And then when you're all done when you either have signed up or logged in, you should be taken to this page and don't worry about it. You're not gonna have to pay for anything. We're gonna go ahead and take this one click on it and drag it to the furthers left. Okay, so if you want to donate, you can, of course, increases in donate, but you don't have to do is a free plug in to use, and then we're just gonna go ahead and fill these out, and then we're gonna call it can continue with personal subscription, and then it says it looks like you're adding a site and they're gonna shake so that it is the right side, and of course it is So we just need to click on, activate this site and then you're all done. So your anti spam has been activated, so it should now be blocking and working in the background. That's the perfect thing with this, we know that it is working already. Now, one of the options you might want to check out is this one down below it says strictness. You can either silently discard the worst and most pervasive spam, so I never see it. This is a great option, the bigger your site gets because you're probably gonna get a lot of Commons, a lot of spam. Or you could go with always put a spam in the Spam folder for review. Now I recommend in the beginning you actually choose this option, because in the beginning you won't be having much comment at all. But as you grow your website, go ahead and ticket to the silence of discard the worst. So you become more strict with blocking the spam and then just go ahead and click on save changes. Another thing you might also want to activate especially fewer within the European region is to display a privacy and notice under your comment forums because this is gonna help you be transparent about using their information and also making sure that they allow it. You might want to accept this or not, depending on where you live and what your status with the privacy regulations. We're gonna talk more about privacy policy GDP or etcetera later on in the course. Now finally, if you want to check out the possible spam comments that has come in, all they need to do is go to the left here, where it says comments and then you can see in depending and in the spam. And either check these out and verify the ones that aren't spam or remove the spam manually again. This is Onley in the beginning, as you grow your website, I strongly recommend you completely automate this and make it more streaks. You never have to touch this, but it happens that regular comments do get marked as spam, but that's just the way it's gonna have to be. Sometimes in order to automate this OK, it's activated its installed great job seeing the next lecture 33. Contact Forms: Okay, guys. So pretty much every plug in that we have installed so far has been mandatory in order to have an effective, safe, fast Web site that shows up in the search engines. Now, this next Blufgan that we're gonna install is going to be for your contact form. Now, you can create contact form without plug ins, but this is going to make it look so much better and be so much easier. So now we're going to start moving towards more effective plug ins That's gonna help us and make everyday use much easier. But these are not as mandatory as the ones we have just gone through. So let's go ahead and set up our contact US page with this new form. So we're in the back end of for website. We're going to go down to plug ins. And if you have been following the course from the beginning making every step as I have, then if you scroll down, you're gonna notice that you already have the WordPress forms light. So this is a contact form plug in, and it came with our theme. So this is gonna make it very easy for us. to make a contact form. And if you don't have this plug in pre installed and all you need to do is go over to add new search for WP forms. Lights, you're gonna find this plug in and just go ahead and download it. And then we're gonna go to the left Here, You see that? It's put itself in the left side of the dashboard in the sidebar, and we're gonna move down to all forms. So this is gonna be the interface for all of your contact forms. Now, in here, you're gonna be able to make multiple forms depending if you have multiple pages, four contact or if you would like to use this form for something else, even though their primal meant for a contact form. So what we're gonna do is go ahead and click on add new, and then we can go ahead and click on simple contact form. And then we're gonna right a name which is gonna be contact form, and then we can go ahead and click on simple contact form here and by clicking there, it's already gonna set up a nice looking easy contact form for us. So as we can see, here it is is already set up. Super easy, super effective. Now should you want to make this yourself? This is all dragon drop. It's super effective. So, for example, for this one for the name if I remove this one, okay? And I want to add a new one where they have to fill in their name. All I need to do is click on this one, drag it to the very top and release it. And then I'm gonna have the name in here. So it's all dragon dropping. These are the standard fields. So if you wanna have some paragraphs of text paragraph like it is here with this comment or message, you can just drag it in there and customized this little headline in here for them to write anything that they want or what you want them to write. And then I just click on the cross here to remove it and click on. OK, Now, all of these are standard fields. There are something here they call fancy fields, which is gonna be if they want to write in their past world for HTML for capture for rating , etcetera. But then you have to pay for the plug in. For our intents and purposes, we're gonna be all fine with standard fields all the way down. Interesting that they even have payment fields. But we're gonna be fine with this. Now, if you want to customize any of these, all they need to do its click on them and then we're gonna move over to field options. So right now it's s name. But for example, if you only wanted the simple version, we're just gonna be on Lee their first name. We could, for example, right first name, then all they would need to do is write in their first name. Now, I like it when they have the first and their last names. I'm just gonna write, name in here and then keep it at first and last. You could even have their middle name in there, and then we could write a description for the fields should we want to do that? But I think this is pretty straightforward with the name. We also have advanced options in here who want to increase a decrease the field size, and then there are some more advanced options that we're not gonna look it because these are all about coding and values and we don't need any of that. So this would be for the name. We also have the required if they have to fill in their name or not. So if I click this away, then they don't have to ride in their name in order to submit the form. But if I click on the required, then they're gonna have to feel this one in. So if I click on email, for example, same thing here, we could change the label. We could write anything we want to. We can also enable email confirmation. And what that means is that they're gonna have to provide their email twice just to confirm it. And then finally, we have common or message down here. Maybe we could just write in comment there for simplicity's sake. They will go comment, and we can also change the name. Right now, it says contact form and this is gonna be the form name that we set up earlier. We can change that and we can also give it a description. These air, the more general settings. So we have moved from field down to settings. Now there are more things we could edit here, for example, to submit bottom takes to submit bottom processing text and then CSS, which we don't really need to worry about. And now here is something interesting. This has something called anti spam Honey pots. Maybe you've heard of it. Maybe not a lot of websites nowadays to use something called capture or recapture, which makes you write in a piece of text or confirm that you are a human by clicking, for example, on pictures. And then you were asked to, for example, click only one picture that has a sign or the has a car. And this is to prevent spamming bots from writing to you on your website into your mail. Now, honey pots works a little bit differently. Honeypot is going to create an invisible field for the boss. What that means is, is going to create a field that we humans can see. But it is a piece off code in here that makes the but I think that that is a form that they're gonna need to fill out as well. So if the but feel that out, which they always do, because there are about then they are going to be regarded as a but and the message will not be submitted. They will be regarded a spam and they will be blocked. So this is quite futuristic at this point for anti spam, and also your visitors don't need to bother with Recapture. For example, people with dyslexia think it's a nightmare, and most people think it's a nightmare, to be honest. So I really recommend that he used his instead of recapture. And then we have dynamic fields population. And that is, if you would like to create a u. R l that would already pre feel some of these values. And I don't think we really need that. So we're gonna leave this from Blank, and then we have notifications, and this can be quite interesting. So, for example, the from name. You want to change that to Robin and Jesper, for example, and we might want to change some more things in here. So this is the notification. How it's gonna look like for them can go ahead and customize this. Finally, we have the confirmation. Now the confirmation is gonna be what happens when they have submitted. Right now it is at message, which means that they're going to get this piece off takes when they have submitted. We might run to write something like these. Thanks for contacting us. Will get back to you in 2 to 3 business days. For example. Maybe it will take your shorter, longer, maybe want to add some other additional information, maybe a picture it center. You could adding anything in here and that would be for message. Now, you could also show them a page to take them directly to one off the pages that we have created. Or we could take them to a specific U R L if we would want to do that. But for now, we're gonna go with message. So when we're all done with this, we're gonna go ahead and click on Save and just to have a look. If we go back to fields, we can see the way that the contact form is currently set up, and I think it looks great. I'm really happy with it. So we have already saved. I'm gonna click on embed here. So what you're gonna do is that you're gonna select all off this texting here. Right Click and then click on copy. Okay, press it down and then we're gonna exit here. Now we're gonna move over two pages, and then we're gonna go to our contact page. And what we're gonna do is that we're going to create a new block in here. We're going to search for short code. There it is and click on it and then just paste this code in here. There we go. Then we're gonna hit updates, and then we're gonna have a look at the preview. So I'm gonna click on the preview, and this is the way it turns out it looks perfect. I'm really happy with this now. There are a couple of things that I want to change. For example, I want to remove this side bar, and I would also like to make this a little more personal. So let's go ahead and do that right away. Now, for The sidebar we need to do is for the ocean. WP if you have it collapsed, just open it up by clicking here and go to content layout here and go to full with rights. And then what? I want to do is I want to add in a picture here off me and Jesper. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna click in here, and then I'm gonna We already have image or would have searched for it. And then I'm gonna click on the media library and use a picture of us that I have used before. There we go and click on Select, and I'm gonna make it smaller center. It there would go. And I'm going to put this block on top like that, and I'm gonna create a piece off text down below for the heading. So I'm going to write something along the lines off. Hi. Please write your comment down in the form below. We look forward to hearing from you. There you go. And then I'm going to click on updates, and then I'm gonna click on preview to see how it looks. So there we go. This is our current contact form. Now, the last change I would like to make is to center this piece a little bit more. But otherwise I'm super happy Now. We have the contact, they can write their name. They're e mailed their comments Hit Submit. We have the anti spam installed. Everything is set up. Great guys. Now, if you have followed along and set everything up just like I have, then I'll see you in the next lecture. If not, rewind the video, follow the steps, set up your contact page and then I'll see in the next lecture. Now, before we move on to the next lecture about the next plug in, I just want to emphasize that in order to receive any of these emails, it is so important that you move on to notifications in here in the settings notifications . And then this part was ascend to email address. You're gonna need to ride in your email address in here, and that is where all of the contact for sign ups and sendings will go into. It's gonna send into this inbox. Now, if you leave it as admin underlying email, then it's gonna use your admin email. But you also need to set up your admin email. And in order to do that, all you need to do is go over to the back end of your websites, move down to settings and then general and then here. You have your email address. Now Notice. This email address is used for admin purposes. This is your admin email address. So you're gonna have to set this one up, and I'm gonna set it up right now and then scroll down and heat save changes. So that means that you can keep this admin underlying Ely like this, and it's gonna send to that email address. But if you want to have a specific email that it's not your admin email, just write that one in there, and it's gonna end up to sending to that inbox for this form only. You need to change this for each and every form. Unless it is Theis standard admin email. Okay, guys, have you been following along? Great job. Fill up and do your form, set it at your contact page, and then we move on to the next lecture 34. Track Shorten Links: Okay, guys, in this lecture, you're gonna learn how to shorten and track your links. Now, the reason you're gonna want to do this is two fold number one. You're gonna want to track your links in order to know what works when you know what works , what your visitors air clicking on you can seem to do more off that material. And also, if you're into affiliate marketing, in other words, you're referring someone to a product or service and then getting a commission for it. You're going to want to track those links Now, the second reason you're going to want to track and short in your links. It's because you look more professional. Now when you are linking something, for example, to YouTube video, you don't want to display that you to blink rather for us. We're going to want it to say, for example, Robin and jesper dot com forward slash digital marketing tutorial rather than going to you to don't come forward slash and then a bunch of numbers. Now you have definitely seen a link shortening before, the most popular being the bit Lee link shortening. Now I have created a bit Lee Lincare for Robin and jesper dot com. So if anyone would go into this link, beat leaders, come forward, slash to UK and then just a code, then they would end up at Robin and jesper dot com. And the reason people are doing this is to cloak their links so they don't know all of the values and information that is in that, For example, if your affiliate marketing and you want to hide it, the problem with this is that a lot of spammers are using Bit Lee. So no one really trust clicking into a bit feeling because you don't know where you're gonna end up me included. So we're gonna sold this simply by using a plug in. There's unplugging for everything, guys. So we're gonna go through back and for a website, and we are going to search for pretty links Now. These are by far the biggest plugging when it comes to link shortening. I use it all the time. I think it's just great. And here it is short links by pretty links. And this is the best word princeling tracking plug in and I'm gonna have to agree. I think they've been around for 67 years already really stood the test of time. So we're going to click on install now and then we're gonna click on Activate. Great. So plug and activated, we can see this hair. Now we're gonna go to the lifter and down below. We're gonna have its own sections for pretty links. I'm just gonna go ahead and click there and in here you're going to see all off the links that you have created. You're going to see the amount of clicks they have if you have grouped them when they've been created and what the link is, And of course, the name you're going to give it. So let me show you how this works and how to use thes properly. So what we're gonna do is we're gonna click on add Pretty link, and the first option we have is the redirection. Now, the re directions. They're just numbers and might seem odd, but they're quite important to know because they affect the search engines. Now the 307 redirection means that you are redirecting people to another you area and that this is temporary. This is super important to know because it's temporary. That means that this search engines are not going to be ranking up that link because if they did and they find out that is temporary, you get a penalty and your ranking is lowered. So if it is temporary, we need to put it as temporary so that we don't get too much juice, if you will, for our S e O. Then we have 302 which is basically the same. There's a slight difference that it may. It's more vague that maybe more permanent, but I never used is I don't think you should care about it either. But the three year one is much more interesting because this means that it is a permanent redirection with permanent redirection. I mean that this link is going to stay like this. This is going to be the new original link. We're not going to reverse it back again. So if you're going to keep it like this and you know that you need to put it as three or one because then you can rank it up. We're gonna keep it a three or want to have the ability to change that length, and I'm going to explain to you why this is important in just a bit. And then we have the targeted you around. So, for example, let's say that I wanted to link to our digital marketing branding video that we made a block post about. Then I would go ahead, go to that video and I would go ahead and copy this your l go back and I'm gonna paste this in. Asked the targeted your l And then I get to decide how I want this link to be displayed. Now, this is the difference between Betley and using a plug in. As you can see, the link is going to be Robin and just dot com forward slash and then we get to decide the name. So we could say, for example, the digital marketing success because this is gonna help our s a o. Remember, that was the focus keyword When we did, the blood post is gonna help with this. S e O is gonna help it looking more professional and be more direct, showing exactly what it is about. So rather than having this when they click on the link or hover over, they're gonna get this instead looking much, much, much better and helping with your CEO. Then we're gonna give the title, and this title is internal. This is for you your eyes on Lee. So we're gonna write, for example, digital marketing, branding YouTube video. And then we could put some notes and the notes especially had. If you are doing any form off affiliate marketing, for example, okay, and then we have some advanced options as well. And now the 1st 1 would be, if you'd want to add them into a group, for example, it might be valuable to have a group for affiliate links. Might be valuable to have a group for YouTube videos, etcetera, etcetera for your own ice. And then we have been no follow, and the no follow is also important. It goes hand in hand with the redirect. The no follow. Make sure that Google and other search engines doesn't follow the link and rank get higher when people click on it, because the more people click on it, the better our CEO is now. If we put this as a permanent link change, then we could go ahead and remove the no follow and then we would have a so called do follow meaning we want the search engines to follow the link and rank it up because this link is going to stay permanent. It's not going to change, but for us we don't have to worry about this. We're gonna keep it simple on temporary and then no follows automatically checked in. We also have something called Para meter forwarding and this is advanced feature. I just want explain to you what it is, but we're not gonna use it. It basically means that if you have values, did you want to add into the link for example, your affiliate marketing? You wanna add in what your affiliate name is? What the affiliate product is the affiliate website and you want to change those values you could add in your own values to the link. No need for us to do that. If you're not an advanced yusor, don't bother with this one and then we have the tracking and we want to have the tracking. There are also pro options, but you're gonna need to buy for these and honestly, I have never used to pro options. I have only used a light version, the free version. And I think it works amazingly well. So there would go and then we're just gonna go ahead and create it. So now we have our first link in here now the beautiful thing. Like I showed you earlier. We get to see the link click if we have a group when it was created and the way that link looks like. Now, the amazing feature with this is that once you started using this link in a bond shop different post, for example, and you notice that, well, all of the links to this certain video I want to update this video. But I don't want to go through, you know, 200 post and change all the links manually. You can go over here where it says edit, click on it and then you can change the targeted U R L, Which means that you will have changed the video for all of those post using this link. And that's an amazing feature. It's gonna say you so much time and hassle. So you get to track your links. The link looks much better, much more professional and trustworthy, and you have the bulk option later on to manage them all at once. If you want to update something now, remember, this could be a YouTube video affiliate. Link on article Could be anything that you, over time want to update in that post, you get to update them all at once. So for us personally, what we would like to do is to go back and create a new pretty link and then add targeted u R L to R, for example, digital marketing course. Now we want the links to be looking like this. That is the targeted euro and then Robin just before we're slash digital dash marketing. It's important that you use a dash here when you're working with the links, not the success. There we go. So we wanted to look like this when they are being linked to our course because we don't want to give out you dimmest links. We want to give out our own links to look much more professional when we are directing and also improve our S e o. So that is for us personally. Now have a look at what you are linking your service your product and download freaky links . Start customizing them so that you later on can use them. Okay, guys, great job. Download this plug and it's super useful. And I see you in the next lecture. 35. Email Opt-In Setup - Business Email: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about email opt ins What they are, how they work. And then we're also going to prepare for them by creating a business email. But first thing is first, what is an email? Often, guys, you've definitely seen them before. Let me show you. So I am a Pat Flynn smart passive income website. And if I just scroll down a little bit, I get this thing that says, Want the inside scoop joined 150,000 plus active members in the SP I community. All you need to do is sign up with your first name and your email address, and then you can subscribe. This is an E mail, often, so he is asking you to often with your email so that he can reach out to you doing email marketing. And you can email market anything. Your latest content, your latest product, your latest, whatever it is newsletter, etcetera, etcetera. And it is an incredibly powerful type off marketing that you do. So I strongly recommend that you put email often on your website, and I'm going to go through why in just a second Now this is an email often form. There are more types as well. If we look at Tim Ferriss, for example, now just going into his website, I get this sort off pop up, and this pop up is an email open as well, and he is giving me an incentive to join here. He's saying five morning rituals that help you win the day and it says no things. I'm not interested or unlock the list. And if I could weaken, unlock the list, he's gonna ask me to subscribe to his email. So I get this morning rituals. He gets my emails. Suddenly I'm on his email list. He can market to me and I get whatever continent interested in from him win win. But it's such a clever way you need a reason to sign up with your email, but this is an email up then. So if I go to his website and I scroll down, you can see that he has more incentives for me to opt into his emails because it's that important here. He's offering his fi bullet Friday, which is his newsletter. If I scroll down just a little bit here, he has another email often in Hiss sidebar. Will you get 11 Simple must use APS and tools, so there are a lot of different ways to use email often on and a lot of different ways to have your visitors opt in. But let's learn a little bit more about email opens, how they work and why you would need them. So the primary usage off on email Upton is to build your email list. Now your email list is basically everything. If you can have all of your customers and visitors in your email list or as many as possible, then you have a possibility to always contact them. Got a new product, will write to them, gutting you some news that you want to share right to them. Build that relationship with your customers. Get into in contact. Do marketing, released new content, offer discount, Do everything you can to improve the relationship with your customers, turned them into long term customers. And you have a very steady and stable business. So you want to build your email is because no matter what happens with your business online offline website, whatever it would be your email list states and you can always reach them with whatever you want. When it comes to marketing when it comes to selling, he's one of the fundamental blocks off building a business. It's huge. Now, in order to create email open forms, we're gonna need to create a business email. And the reason for that is, if you have, for example, Gmail, that you're using right now, then most inboxes is going to consider Gmail as spam. So you're not gonna be able to write to a lot of people and reach out to them with your newsletter with your latest content with your marketing, etcetera, etcetera, because you're using some form of commercial may like Outlook or Gmail. So what we're gonna do in this lecture is go ahead and create a business email. And the reason that a business email works is because they use something called It's Simple Mail transfer protocol. You're probably going to hear this more time. It's called S M T P and basically what it is. It is a team of protocol that removes all of the extra features that could be used to add, for example, malware or some sort of dirty business that could infect people's computers. It goes down to the very basic. And because of these, this spam filters and all of the virus Fielder's really enjoy this simple protocols. This is why it's one off the best to do email marketing and use for email often so you can do your newsletter, your marketing content, release everything through this. So this kind of service is where we're gonna sign up our email with and create or email business for. So what are you gonna use your email is for? Well, we have already touched on it. We're gonna use it for newsletter, maybe once a week, maybe once a month. For example, we're gonna use it to release your latest content, your latest updates, your latest product, whatever it is or just bring out some sort of value. Connect with your customers, your visitors deep in that relationship, and this is how you have happy customers and improve your business. If you can get 1000 people to become long term customers to your business, you're gonna have a very stable long term business to come and earn greatly as well. Do you really want to make your customers long term and improve the relationship. And the great thing with email marketing not only has stood the test of time is one of the most effective forms, together with messenger marketing ways to reach out to people and market. And not only that, it's the type of free marketing as well, because they will be on your email list. So, guys, if you are serious about your business, build your email list. I hope I have convinced you already. One of the biggest rookie's mistake is starting up your business and not having your email list. And now, while there are a lot of different services such as male chimps, which you're gonna hear about later, we are going to get started right away, building our email list and starting off with a news letter. Okay, guys, So let's start off first things first. We're gonna go ahead and create our business email. Okay, So in order to create our business email, we're gonna do that through Blue Host because when we signed up to Blue Host, we actually got the opportunity to receive five free email addresses. If you don't have blue hosts, I'm going to be putting up some other sources where you can sign up front email address for free. That's also going to use the SMTP Protocol. But if you've been following the course from the beginning, we're gonna use Blue Host. So all we're gonna do is go ahead and click on Logan and then we're gonna go down to email and office, and then we're gonna scroll down to where it says basic E mail, right. Set up basic email and connect with your domain. So all you need to do is click on, See Options is gonna take you to the section off your host called the C Panel. Now, the C panel contains a lot off advanced features that we generally don't need. It is also the access to all of your website storage files. But what we're gonna do is go ahead and create our email, and I'm also gonna show you how to access the email there. Now, if you want to log in here quickly and look into the sea panel, all that you need to do is go to the browser and right in your domain name, which is Robin, and just don't come for us. Then make a forward slash and right see panel and then hit. Enter. By doing this, you're going to get access to your seat panel. Now, in order to lug in here, you're gonna need your user name and your password. And if you don't know your use your name, just go to your email and check out the email that Blue Host wrote to you when you signed up for their hosting service. You're gonna have the user name in there, so just go ahead and copy paste that use her name right in here, and then use your password and then Logan. And then once we're in here, all we're gonna go ahead and do is scroll down until we go get to email and then click on email accounts. And in here, we're gonna go ahead and click on create. As you can see, we have five available and zero that's been used. We're gonna click on create, and then we get to choose our own evil, and it's gonna be at Robin and jesper dot com. So we might want to use info at Robin and just be dot com contact at Robin and jesper dot com. Anything you would like for this? We're gonna use contact. There we go. And then I'm just gonna enter my password clearly a strong password. And then I'm going to scroll down and we get a storage space included in this and you don't get to have more than 100 because we have the basic is subscription. So we're just gonna go with 100 megabyte? I mean, that's a lot of space for your email. And as your business grows, we can expand the plan. That's not gonna be a problem. Once you start generating some revenue and then we scroll down and then I'm just gonna go ahead and click on Create. So perfect. Now it's created. Now we have a business email. How awesome is that? If you want to go ahead and check out your email, all you need to do is log into the sea panel, go to email, you're gonna get right in here and then click on check email and in here you're going to get three different options where you want to check your email. All of these air using SMTP you can go in hoard Round Cube or Squirrel Man and honestly, these air just different looks, so it doesn't matter. I just prefer to use round cubes. I'm gonna click on this one. And here we are, Here we are in our new business email. Now I can strongly recommend it. You go ahead and bookmark this page to get an easier access. But, guys, if you want to know how to get all of these business emails as SMTP emails which we need to do our email opens an email marketing. I can show you how to redirect those from this service to your Gmail and then send from Gmail, but still have it transferred from your business mail and ask your business mail. Okay. All you need to do is hook up this server to Gmail and everything will be sand an intake. And by these SMTP Protocol. But it's gonna appear on your Gmail if you're interested in that than stick along and I'm gonna show you how. If not you want to use. This is a business email. You can move on to the next lecture and I'll see you there. So I see that you're still here. Let's go ahead and learn how to do that. So what we are going to do, we're gonna go ahead and move over to our Gmail. Now, whether using outlook or some other email services, these work pretty much the same. And it's an easy thing to do, and all we're gonna do is move over to the writer and click on settings and then go to settings. And then we're gonna click on accounts and imports, and then we're gonna go downward says, add a mail account. So let's go ahead and click there and then I'm gonna add the email address, which is contact at Robin and Jesper Dots. Come and I'm gonna click on next, and then we're gonna go ahead and click on next again. We don't need to connect anything with Gmail. If I were gonna click on next and here, we're just gonna go ahead and log in once again with the Logan that we just created, asked our business email. I'm gonna go ahead and write that and then you get a couple of more options in here and none of these are important. But you might want is to label the incoming message with these contact that we have so I'm gonna press that one in, and then I'm gonna go ahead to add account, and then they're gonna ask me, would you like to also be able to send mail as contact at Robin and desperate? Come And yes, that is basically why we're here to retreat and send from Gmail, but still using it as contact that Robin in jest but outcome. So we're gonna go ahead and click on next and accept that, and then we'll get to enter some information here. We want to be named Robin and Jesper. The email address will be contact at Robin and jesper dot com going to click on next, and then we get to log in once again, It's all about security, right? And don't worry about these extra features. Such a sport in the secure connection, Thiel s just leave them as default and then click on add account. So now they're going to send a verification code to our business. Email Albany to do is go to it and retrieve it. So I'm gonna go back to the web, mail our business mail check themed books, and here we go. Here we have the male. I'm gonna enter it. And then in the very top here we have the confirmation code. I'm just gonna selected right click copy it. Go back and I'm gonna paste it in and click on Verify. Okay, guys. Awesome that we're all done. If we look to our left, we can see that we know Have contact at robin ingested dot com as our own tab to the left in our Jima's. If I click there, I can see all of the emails that's coming to our business email. Now, here we have the Gmail confirmation and I could even go ahead and write a new message in here. So let's compose one, and I can choose where I wanted to be from either contact at Roman Just don't come or our original dear police and at Gmail. So in this way you can keep your business email, which we need with the SMTP Protocol to not be spam filtered. You can also make sure that you have all of your business separate emails in one place for your own mental organization and then reply to them all in one, please, using Gmail rather than having to log in the same thing work for out longer and the other service. Great job guys follow these steps because they are mandatory. In order to start setting up your email, opt ins forms on your website. So do this, and then we move on to the next lecture and start adding the forms to our website. See you there. 36. Email Opt-In Setup: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to go through the set up for email often. So by now we will have created are baseness email, which is awesome. Now we're gonna go ahead and get the plug in itself so that we can start making email open forms on our website. But first things first. Let's start off with installing the plug in and then setting it up. Okay, so I am at the back end of her website. I've gone to plug ins, add new. This is nothing we haven't done before. And now I'm going to search for male poets. Now, this is a plug in. That's free. And it works so well because you can take care of all your email subscribers, you newsletters and all of your content through the WordPress dashboard. And I love that part Now. The other option that you have a swell would be male gym and we do have mail chimp a course on it attached as a bonus course in these course. So if you're interested in that, you want to dive deeper into you can go and check it out. But for now, I love male poet because It's simple. It's straight to the point. And you can do everything from the WordPress dashboard. So we're gonna install it so we can focus on building our website while we're also still building our email list. Okay, guys. So here it is. And this is the one want to go with male poet emails and newsletters. So they have quite recently not only updated it, but released a new version. Officer, we're going to click on install now, and then we're going to click on Activate. Now, when it comes to plug ins for building your email list, there's, ah lot off premium plug ins because email marketing is actually something that people sell as a service outside off WordPress. So this is why a lot of plug ins are going to be premium. But this one is free to use and it works amazingly well. Okay, there would go. It's installed. What we're gonna do now is move over to the left here, Words this male poet and we're going to go down to settings and start off by setting this one up. So here we are. Now, the first thing we're gonna set up is our default sender. Who is this coming from? And where are they replying to? Well, from its very simple in our case is gonna be Robin and Jesper and is gonna be your name or your brand name in your case. And then they also want to reply to Robin and Jesper. There would go. And this one from Remember, we created our business email. Well, we're gonna use it tears. I'm gonna write contact at Robin and jesper dot com. Now, I'm gonna go ahead and select this and then I'm going to cop it because we're going to be writing it a lot, So this just makes things faster. I'm gonna paste it in here as well because we wanted to be replied to to this email as well . Then we have something that says subscribe in comments, right. So if I take this box, then when people make a comment on our website, we're going to go through how the common system works. But when they make a comment on, for example, a block post on our website, they will also have the ability to sign up to our email list. And that is just terrific. So we're gonna go ahead and enable this for now and then I'm gonna talk about how the list work a bit later on in the next lecture, you can see here that we have choose list, and right now we can Onley choose my first list. So for now, we're gonna choose that one. And in the next lecture, you learn what it is and how we can use it. Then we're gonna scroll down. We don't have to care about subscribing registration form, and then we have managed subscription. Now, this is interesting. Whenever they subscribe to your email, they have the ability to manage their subscription, right, So you can choose where you want that to be. For example, you could be creating your own manage subscription page for this, Or you could just use a male poet page. Now, if he'd used to stand or you can click on preview, you're gonna see the way that it will look on right now is going to be looking like this. This is just a demo. First name John Doe, and then their status. They could change to unsubscribe, for example, and then save and they will be unsubscribed. And I prefer to leave it at the mail Poet page because it makes things simpler. And then similarly, we have the unsubscribe page. We can also click preview, check that out. We could make our own page for two, but again, we're gonna leave it as default. And then we have stats, Notification. If you want to get an email after you have sent out in use letter so you can see the stats 24 hours after it's been sent, for example, How successful wants it? How many people clicked on it, viewed, etcetera, etcetera. I prefer to keep this 10 yes, because these to me are interesting stats, and then we're gonna put in you see where I could pace this and then we're gonna put this in again the contact as women and just but come because this is where it's going to be sent to. So a lot of writing or emailing there and that will have new subscribing notification. Enter the email address that should receive notification when someone subscribes in the beginning. This can be quite fun. You know, when you get your first subscribers and you get to have a blast about that but things escalate quickly when you start to get a bunch of subscribers frequently, this is not gonna be fun for very long. You're gonna be completely spammed out in your inbox so I can recommend going on Yes, on this for now. But when you start building that list, guys, honestly, come back and click on No, it's going to save you a lot of in book space and then we go down. We have two things. We have the archive paid, short coat and the display. Total number off subscriber Short code. Now, you probably remember from when we created our contact page and we created a form for that , right? So when we created that form, we used a short code, and similarly, we can just copy paste this just like a showed a using a short code in the Gutenberg editor and you can display it on archive page or a total number off subscribers. But we're not gonna be doing any off that. Okay, Awesome. And then we also are able to be GDP are compliant to have some tips and tricks for that, but we need to be GDP or complaint is huge and you can get a pretty hefty penalty if you are not. So we're gonna take care of that ourselves. Okay, so now we're gonna scroll up and then we're gonna jump over to send with Now. This is where we program in our own business email that we have set after the SMTP, which we did in the previous lecture. So while male poet have their own sending service and of course, it's very handy we don't want to be dependent on male poet. Should you ever decide to move to, for example, mail chimp or just be mobile. So I strongly recommend going with the one that we set up. So we're gonna go ahead and click on Configure down here, and then we're gonna set this one up. Now, the method we're gonna go ahead and juice SMTP This is by far the most effective one and for sending frequency, We're gonna go with the recommended now that's 100 emails every five minutes. This 28,800 emails per day. Remember this a limit for basically everything, so you will not be recognized as spam. This is why we're using an SMTP mail to pass by the spam filters. Now here it gets interesting because we want to connect to our business email. Right? So in order to do that, we're gonna have to log in and all we need to do, just like I showed you before. It's right in Robin and jesper dot com for you. It's gonna be your domain. Of course. And then forward slash and we're gonna write C panel and then hit Enter, and then we're gonna go ahead and look in. And now we're gonna scroll down and we're gonna go to email accounts. And then where we have our business email, we're gonna go to the writer and click on check mail. Now, you will most definitely remember this because this, unless you signed up with demon, will be how you primarily check out your business email. You can use any of these things, but if you scroll down a little bit here, you're gonna have the mail client manual settings we're gonna use to secure one. So all of the information we need to sign up and set this up with male poet is in here. Now. The user name comes as no surprise. We got that one already. And the password? Hopefully. And then what we're looking at is the outgoing server. So it the 1st 1 is very easy. It's just mail dot your domain name dot com. So I'm gonna go ahead and copy that one, and then move back in here and pasted in. There we go. And then for the ports, I'm gonna go back once again and we can see the s and T people is 465 So I'm gonna go ahead and copy this. Go back and paste that in as the port, Okay? And then I'm gonna write my Logan, which is the email. And then, of course, the past for to the business email. Okay. And then we have secure connection. You want to go with S. S. L Here, scroll down. Just leave authentication on. Yes. Don't need to worry about SPF signature, and then we're gonna go ahead and click on. Activate now are settings is saved. What we're gonna do is we're gonna go back to configure. We're gonna scroll down, and we're gonna try out this standing methods. I'm just gonna right contact at Robin and jesper dot com and then click on Send a Test email and now it says the email has been sent. So now we could either go to a Gmail, which we have set it up with an update this one and check it out. Or we could go ahead to our Web mail that we originally set up and use the Round Cube or any off your preferences, since it might take a little longer for to show up on Gmail. And if we go in here, we can see that this is a descending method test. And if I double click on it? Yep, it works. You can start blasting our e mails to the moon so we know that the set up works. Everything is done. So now if we go back, we have said everything up. We know that everything works perfect. Now let's move on to the next lecture, where we're gonna learn how to set up the forms on our website in order to start building email list and host. Learn what email lists are. See in the next lecture guys 37. Email Opt-In Form Emails: Okay, guys, great job making it this far. We have our business email and we have set up mail Poet. Now, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about forms and emails, basically, how you captured those subscribers and how to send the emails to them. Inform off newsletter latest content, etcetera. Before we move on, there are a couple of things I want to show you, and the first thing is stealing the settings. That is the sign up confirmation. Now the sign of confirmation is basically, when they subscribe, they're going to have to go to their email and then click on a link to confirm their subscription. This can be turned off, but the benefit of having this is that you have a more dedicated subscribers list. If you turn this off, it's easier for visitors to subscribe, but it's quite easy to have a full email is that's not gonna do you any good in just waste space and a lot off these services. They start costing money when you reach a critical number. Usually that's not a problem, because when you have a lot of subscribers, you're already making a good revenue. But keeping your email is clean from the beginning is highly recommended. So I just want to make you aware of this, that there east on a sign up confirmation enable I recommend you to keep it enabled. And then just to change the from and reply to here, I'm gonna go with Robin and just for here again. And I actually like this The most obvious, very basic Confirmed your subscription to Robin and Jesper and then the content. Hello. Welcome to a newsletter. For example, if you have a newsletter or if you have something else and then confirmation, but is the male poet page and then just save settings and we have advanced features here as well, but there is nothing in here we need to do so without further ado. Let's start talking about fourth and emails. Now when you have someone who subscribes to you, they are going to be added into a list. Now, if you remember previously when we were at the basics in the basic settings in here and we had this subscribe in comments right and we had that user will be subscribed to the Selous . My first list, that is the basic list and we activated this and we had a guest admit your mail only. So they have the possibility. Well, what we're gonna do in preparation is go over to lists, and then we're gonna change the name off this list, and we are going to call it comments subscribers. The reason that we are doing this is because you want to know where a person subscribed. Right now, we're gonna know that this person subscribed from the common section. We can see how affected the Upton is, meaning that they actually subscribe there. And also we can start separating our subscribers. So I'm gonna make another list here as well. And when we get more in depth in this, I might want to make, for example, a blogger list. I might want to make a digital marketing list, a Shopify list, etcetera, etcetera to be a specific as possible because you don't want to send, for example, digital marketing material for people only interested in Shopify. So this is just getting clever from the beginning and putting segregating your audience into their own interests. You send them the correct content. That's how you keep them as well. And keep them happy. So what we're gonna do, we're gonna go ahead up here and click on add New and we're actually going to call this side bar and then we can have a description here as well. And this is only for our eyes. People who subscribe through the sidebar for what? So what we're gonna do here is that we're actually gonna go ahead and create a form that they will be able to sign up through to be added to this list, and we're gonna make sure that they are added to the sidebar list. So we know where they came from, remember? So we're gonna move over here to the left side and move over to forms. And what you have here in the beginning is a GDP are friendly form, and that's just the basic foreign people can sign up, and they also notify you off how their information is used. If you don't know what GDP or is, it stands for general data protection regulation. And it's a European law that basically says that you have the right to your own information . It doesn't apply for Americans. Obviously, you don't have your own rice here. or information, at least not at this point by law. So when you have European visitors, it's super important that you make them aware off this so that they accept that you will be using their information or you're actually breaking the law. And this is still quite sensitive. But you want to comply with the law always. So this is a basic form. But I want to show you how you make the forms yourself. So all you need to do is go up to forms and click on Add new. And then this is the basic form builder. It's super simple. Now if we go move down where it says Fields, we're gonna be able to add in different fields in here. So, for example, let's say that I want them to add their first name. Then I just click on it and I dragged in here and it's so simple and fast. And then I can click on edit display and I can change the label. For example, I could use right name or police right in your name or anything I want, but I'm gonna keep it simple with first name, and then is this field mandatory. Yes, they will not be able to subscribe without putting the first thing. They also have something that says display label within input. So if you look to the left, you can see that it's his first name on that. Stop here. If you put display label within input as yes and then done This is gonna pope in inside off the label. It can give a pretty clean look, and it's gonna make the whole opt in box smaller. So if you want to edit that for the email one as well, just click on edit display and then display label within input. Yes, and it works the same for all of this. If you want a list selection, you can drag that one in here as well. Let's say that we want a last name to We're gonna put that in the middle. We're gonna go to edit display. We're not gonna make this mandatory, but we're gonna have the label within input done. There we go. And then we have the subscribe button, which we can change as well. We could write like subscribe. Now we're subscribed to us. Anything we want and then I'm gonna click on Done. There we go. Now, if I moved to the top once again, we're going to go through all this and move to settings. We have something. This is this form as to subscribe to these lists. And we already prepared one that said sidebar because we're gonna put this form in our sidebar. So everyone who signs up through this form will be put to our sidebar list. So I'm gonna go ahead and select that, and then you get to choose what happens after they submit. They could either be shown the message, check your inbox or spam folder to confirm your subscription or have them sent to a page. I really like this options. I'm just gonna keep it like that. And then we have the form placements in here, and I'm gonna show you how to add these to decide for. But I want you to know also that if you click on short code here, you get this little piece off code and we already know how to use the short codes, right? You go to the Gutenberg editor, you make this block and you search for short code, and then you cook PM paste this one in here. So that means that you could create a new form that says contact, for example, And put that for in your contact page, All you need to do is create a block and put in this short code super easy, super effective. But we're gonna actually use the widget patient. I'm going to show you that in a second. So before we move on, we're going to give this a name. I'm just gonna call this side bar form and I'm going to click on Save. There we go. So what I'm gonna do now is that I'm gonna go to appearance here in the left, off the dashboard, and I'm gonna move over to widgets. So now if you scroll down here in this widget area, you're gonna find something that says male poet 34 I'm just going to click on it and drag it suit. It's up there and put it wherever I want to. Let's say that I want to put it below recent post. I'm just gonna put it There sits between recent posts and the Facebook like box, and then we can decide on the title right now it's a subscribe to our newsletter or we could write something else, and then we get to decide which form. First we have the GDP or friendly form. We're gonna use the sidebar form and then click on Save. So if I go to the upper left visit site and I opened that in a new tab and then I navigate to Blawg, which actually uses the sidebar and scroll down, we can see that here is our form, so people are now able to sign up. So if I write my name here, Robin, let's say I write my last name, too. And then I'm gonna write like that and that I'm gonna hit. Subscribe. So check your inbox Respectful to confirm your subscription. Awesome. So we would have to go to our email to do that. But what I want to show you with this is that if you go to male poet and you move over to subscribers, you're going to see that we just had someone who subscribe, and that's me and that the status is unconfirmed because I haven't gone into my email you to confirm this. So in the subscribers area, you're gonna find everyone who has subscribed to you, which is very useful. You can click on the person as well, and then you can ride in additional information about the, like the first name last name. There's no reason to do this whatsoever. I never access anyone personally, but here, you're gonna have all of your subscribers. And this is what I love so much with male poet that you can do everything in here. Okay, now, one final thing before we move on. If we go back to forms in here and we check out the GDP are friendly form, we can see the 30 say, texted that says we keep your data private and share your data on Lee with third parties. That makes this service possible. No, What you might want to do is go ahead and copy this text. Right click copy it and then go back to your own form. The sidebar form in here Go in, go to fields and then just at a custom text or HTML put it at the bottom. And then you might want to add in this text in here because of the G d. P R. Regulation. Now we're gonna talk more about GDP or later on, and make sure that your entire website is GDP are safe and confirm. But for now, this is a great thing to do, even though we haven't created our privacy policy page yet, So I'm just gonna remove this reader privacy policy. And when we created, we can go back and edit this and then click on done and save. So our form is working. It's up. It's on our side bar and we have connected a listers. We know where they're coming from. Now let's move over to the e mails, guys. So what we are going to do is go ahead and go to male poet and go to e mails. Of course, this is the beauty off the program. You get subscribers, so you're gonna be able to market to them. Now, in here, you're gonna notice there are three different types who have newsletters welcome emails and post notifications. So if I go ahead and click on add new up here, you get to see that we have newsletters which sends them a newsletter and you get to set a frequency where you want them to receive the newsletter we get to create a welcome male a latest post notification and we could also do for well commerce. But we don't have commerce. We're gonna go through later on in the course. So the beautiful thing with male poet is that it's very easy to use because they help you out a lot. There's a lot of guides in here, but I still want to show you how this works. So if you go over to welcome male, for example, and you click on set up, then the first thing you get to do is choosing. When is this welcome? Email sent, right. And you wanted to be someone so much subscribes to the list and then you want to decide which one is going to get this welcome, male, Because again, if you set up a specific one for digital marketing, you're gonna want to set a different one for Shopify, for example, or for some other business course that we have. It's gonna be the same for your services and products. So you segregate that you make the newsletter there welcome the latest content super specific. And then when it's gonna be sent hours, days, weeks later or immediately. I'm gonna go with immediately and then click on next. Now this is the next thing here that I absolutely love with Male Port is the different templates that's come with it. So in here you can choose any off the templates to begin with, and it's just simple. Dragon dropped to edit them. So let's say that I go ahead with this one. We can click on a preview to check it out, or we could just go ahead and select it and start editing it if we like what we see. So everything here is incredibly intuitive. Dragon drop and we can change everything. So, for example, up here you can put in your own logo, your own brand, your business logo or we could just click on it. We get the settings to the right and click on Select Another Image and let's say that we want to use a picture of me and just burn. We're gonna click on that one select image. Here we are now, this is a tad too big, so I'm gonna change this up. So I'm going to scroll down and then click on this one. Hold it and make it smaller. There we go. So we just added the first part. Now we could add all of the text in here. We could make it into anything we want to. We want to add something specific piece of ticks with click on it would drag it in and we drop it. And you're right. You're texting here. If you want to remove it, all you need to do is click on this and then delete Super intuitive Super easy. Now, for example, in order to get someone's email address, you might want to use something called Elite Magnet. Now it elite magnet is basically when you're offering them something for their email address. So in your form, you might want to write. If you subscribe, just we're gonna offer you our top five tapes for digital marketing success. Well, if they're going to subscribe to us, we're gonna have to offer them that pdf with the marketing success formula that we're offering. So in order to do that, we might want to have this get started here, But, um, and we might want to change the takes to download the success formula. For example, maybe other, the smallest doesn't go that big, but you get the point. And then we would put a link to download a pdf either somewhere else or you put it up on your own website, so it's extremely intuitive. You can just designed this completely by yourself. And if there's something you don't like, you want to make it simpler. You start by removing things, and then finally, this is so important down here. There's something that says your address line. Now you need to ride in your address. This is super important for two reasons. Recent number one. It's actually required by law when you're doing email marketing to provide your business address, right? And if you don't have a business address used to write your own address and number two, If you don't write the address in here, you are going to get caught by spam filters so they say, super important. Don't miss out on this. And finally, here a swell click on these. Just set up your social media, and in no time you're going to be having an awesome welcome mail. Now, before we end this, I want to show you one more thing. So let's say that we were all happy with this. All we would need to do is go up and click on next. And here you get to write the subject line, and this is sensitive. You want to it to be something that's gonna captivate your audience. For example, here is your top five tips. Strategies for these are marketing success or whatever this that you are offering, or just high if you're not offering anything hi and welcome to and then your website, but something to captivate them and then send this welcome email when this is the one we set up before the sender and the reply. Tosia all basic and then we click on Activate Now. The important part is that you set the correct subject, so let's check out the other options as well. So if we go back to email and we click on add New, we can also do something that's called latest post notifications. So if we go ahead and set that up, we can actually send out our latest post to them at a certain frequency. Let's say we want to send them out weekly on, say, a Monday at 12 a.m. We click on next. And then once again, we get to decide one of these beautiful templates. Let's just select this one and you're gonna notice that in here there's something that says today's top story, which is just a basic text, has been added to the template, and it's gonna show the latest post this is super cool. Now, if you would like to add your own latest post, all you would need to do let's just delete this one. For now, that all you would need to do is click on this one. This is automatic latest content and then dragged in here, and then you're going to get the latest content that you have displaying in a super handy feature to have Now, in here, if you click on it and get the settings, you could include MAWR, for example. Let's say that you have six posted you want to show, and now we only have one anyway, so I'm not gonna make a difference. But you could show us many post that you want in here or include certain tax. Remember how we segregated digital marketing people with business people? You could choose one off those in here like business or digital marketing super handed, super useful. Now you could also be adding in selected post by clicking on this one, dragging, eating and then selecting the post. It's gonna display in the line here and selecting the ones that you want to add again. We only have one. But everything in here is extremely intuitive. Play around with these used to template and then set up. First of all, you're welcome. Then set out your latest content and then finally go and check out the newsletter, and then you will have set up and started building your email list. Awesome job, guys. Now let's move on to the next lecture. And don't skip out on this one. Don't just move onto the next one. Follow these steps. It's actually very easy and so important that you get this right from the beginning. Follow these steps and I see in the next lecture 38. Image Optimization & Compression: Okay, guys, in this lecture, you're going to learn how to optimize and compress your images. Now, your first question might be Why would I want to do that? Well, the reason for that is that when you start getting ah, lot of images on your website and you're going to want images for your design over time with your blog's post with your articles or used to design overall, this is going to be slowing down your website. Now, images carry a lot of extra information more than just the picture itself. What we're gonna do is go ahead and grab a plug in. That's going to strip the image off all of that extra information so it takes up less size . Basically, there's gonna be less for your visitors to load when they see the pictures, which is gonna make your website faster. A faster website like would learn with the catch is gonna make for much happier visitor better visitor experience and happy search Indians, right? Google is gonna love this. So without further ado, let's go ahead and get started. Now we're gonna go to the back and off our website like we always do plug ins add new And now we're gonna search for SMUSH. Now this is a huge plug in. It's been around for a long time, and it's very effective is one of those wonderful plug ins that's just plug and play. So we're gonna go ahead and click on Install now and then we're going to activate, and now it's been activated. So let's go ahead and check it out. So let's go to the left and then move down to where we see Smush and we're just gonna click on it now, straight off the bat here. This plug in is already working whenever you're up loading any new pictures now is going toe automatically be compressing those images, making the smaller and optimize them right. So this is just plug and play. It's wonderful. And also, by the click of a single button, we can optimize all of the images that we already have on our website and Intermedia Library. Okay? And they also offer a set up for you here. But you're gonna not gonna need for now because I'm gonna be your set up basically, So I'm gonna skip this, set it up later. So while this is just plug and play. I still want to go through how this works and what it does for your information. Now the first thing we have here is the bulk smushed Now bottom. If I click on this button is going to be compressing and optimizing all of the images that I have right now. And since I have 25 images in the media gallery is going to be optimizing and compressing all of them. Now, since we're using the free version, we can only do 50 at a time and 50 at a time. That's still great. You don't have to pay anything for this plug in. If you use the premium version, you can do a lot more at a time since we're getting started. And since it's going to be optimizing all of the images that we put in, we're not gonna need any premium version. But if you install this on the website that had maybe 10,000 images need optimization, it can be a hassle to go back and optimize them 50 by 50 all the time. So, for our sake, this is more than perfect. Now, if I scroll down, there are a couple of things in the settings. We don't need to do anything. I just want to explain what they do. The first thing is that we have the automatic smush. So basically, it's always going to be optimizing everything, optimizing and compressing them. And what I mean would compressing them. I'm gonna show you in just a second. Scrolling down. We have something says, stripped them off the meta data. And the major data is going to be all this unnecessary information, such as where the picture was taken when the picture was taken. Information about the picture, etcetera. We don't need that kind of information when we upload a picture on our website. So all this extra information is just gonna take up additional space, which the visitors needs to load, and they have no use off since they're not going to have access to that information anyway , So we're gonna have this activated now. We don't want to activate image rece icing for design purposes. We want to resize them and do that ourselves. And then there are a bunch of pro features in here as well. Now we don't have any usage off these pro features There's one thing I want to talk to you about, though, and that is the PNG and JPG now. Earlier on in the course I told you about PNG being a optimal file tie for your website because it has a much better quality. And it does now. With better quality comes bigger size and slower loading times. So Jay Picked does have its place when you are using images. But if you're going to be using, for example, a header, you want to have that header in PNG because you want to display a nice image of the head of that's going to be catched. But if you're going to do blood post and the images are not the most important part of the blood post, you could go with JP to make your website faster. Needless to say, if you're a photographer or having any of these super important images, you're going to want to use P N G. And with the compression, there's gonna be lost less quality. That's one of the feature off the free version. When it's using the compression, there's no loss off the quality off the images whatsoever. In the Pro feature you can make the loss bigger. Meaning you can make the quality off the images. It's like the worst. It also means they're gonna be drastically smaller in size. But we don't really want that. We want to keep the images nice. Good looking. So now we have installed it. We have just much the images. We know how it works, and this is gonna be plug and play. So what this is going to do when you upload an image besides your stripping it of meta data ? Is it going to be changing the resolution off the images? In other words, if you haven't image, this air is, let's say, 2000 times, 1000 pixels. But all you need is 800 times 600 pixels. Then it's still gonna be the same size off that image when you uploaded. But you're not going to be using all of that quality size. So what smart is going to do is optimize it and put it into the quality so that there's no loss of quality. But the size is going to be smaller right now. If this is all Greek to you, don't worry. Just know that this works this is making your website faster and I love it. I've been using it for a while, and I strongly recommend that you just keep this, leave it on so that when you build up your website, this is gonna have a drastic effect over time, constantly optimizing, making sure that your works I never get slow. Great guys, let's move on to the next lecture. See there. 39. Privacy Policy GDPR: Okay, guys. So in this lecture, we're going to be talking about the privacy policy and the G d. P r. Also known as the General Data Protection Regulations. Now, bear with me here because this is a quite heavy video, but it's also so important. Guys, you need to get this right in order to protect your business. If you're serious about your business, follow along and we're gonna break this down together and get through it. Okay? Super important lecture. Now we disclaim here as well. I'm not a lawyer. As your business grows, I can recommend that you contact a lawyer and make sure that everything in your privacy policy it's completely waterproof. Okay, so let's get started. First off, what is the General data protection regulations? The GDP are well, basically, it means that the European Union citizens, three European citizens own their own information. Okay. And because they have the right to their own information on the Web, that means that you as a business owner and who owns your website, you have mandatory transparency. You need to be completely transparent with how you use the European citizens information, how you use, collect and share their personal data. Okay, So because they have the right to their own information, unlike in other parts off the world, that means that even you, if you're in the US or you are anywhere else in the world, this still applies to you because it applies to the European citizens. If you own your website, wherever in the world you are, you need to be compliant with these rules. For the European visitors now, in most parts of the world, you need to be transparent about that. You collect someone's information. But what's different about the GDP are is that you need to be completely transparent with how you use it, why you use it, what you use it for if you share the information and also how they can opt out, how they can remove their own information, everything. This is much more detailed and complex and in the rest of the world, and you need to make sure that you followed it because we're not kidding around here, there is a penalty or 4% off your annual income or 20 millions, whichever is greater now, 4% of your annual income that, in many cases, is enough to wreck an entire business. So don't take any chances or any risks in here. I know this can sound a little bit scary, but we're gonna make sure that your website is completely complying with this law. This is why it's such an important lecture to get through and understand. So then we can set it and forget it. Okay, that is the goal here. So how do we make sure that our website has a great privacy policy and that it is GDP are compliant? Well, we are going to create a privacy policy and add that to a page in order to protect ourselves. Okay, so let's get through what he say. Privacy policy. Now, a privacy policy is where you disclosed the information that you have about your visitors. Okay, you need to disclose what you're collecting and why about anyone who visits and this information and this privacy policy is actually mandatory to have, even if you are in different parts of the world, such as in the U. S. Because you need to disclose the information. But unlike the GDP are you don't need to be asked transparent, but you still need the privacy policy. So where are we getting out of this? Information about our visitors Will were getting it from cookies, for example. Now cook is is when you save a bit off the information about your visitor on their computer . So let's say, for example, we get a visitor to our website named John Smith, and he visits. Are these your marketing course? So what we might do is that we might save down his first and last name, John Smith, and the fact that he likes digital marketing. Okay, so we're gonna save that in something that's called a cookie and then place that cookie in he's computer. So the next time he visits us, we might have a website. They say, Hey, welcome back in John Smith. Here is the latest news on digital marketing. In other words, we have tailored our website according to what we know of him his name and also what he likes digital marketing, and this is what cookies are and how they are used. Okay, we're gonna talk more about cookies and how to make sure that we comply with GDP are here because they need to give their consent. So cookies is one off the way that we gather information that we need to disclose about. We also have comments whenever someone comments and they're giving up their name and their email address, we need to disclose how we're saving and using that information. Same goes with subscriptions, For example. We just put in a form for building our e mail list. We're gonna make sure that this is GDP or compliant. It would do any registrations. Maybe you're gonna have a subscription based website. Well, they're gonna have a Logan, right? Or if you having them subscribe to your email is like we just talked about All of this is gathering information about the visitor. Now, there is something important to remember that a lot of people forget since we had Google Analytics and we're building an email list. That means that we're getting a lot of information about our visitors. So, for example, Google analytics make sure that we know where our visitors air coming from. We're tracking what they're doing when they're leaving. Basically everything, and this is not anonymous information. We get a lot of in depth information about every visitor, and we need to make sure that we disclose this, okay? And again with the email is if they are signing up with the first and last name, maybe even their phone number, their counter, etcetera. We need to disclose this ass well, making sure that we are transparent about that. We're saving their information. That's for a privacy policy. And then for the GDP are compliancy. We need to make sure we tell them what we used them for, how we use it, why we use it on that. If we are sharing this information with 1/3 party, for example, we might want to disclose that. Hey, we promise we're not going to share your email with 1/3 party because most people don't want to sign up to. Your email is on Lee to be sent a bunch of emails from another country, right? We need to disclose and in many cases promise that we're not going to do this or if we are going to do this disclosed, if we will do this. So it's about transparency here, guys. Now this privacy policy is actually required by law in the United States as well. Like we said, it's a little bit different because it's not as hardly regulated as the GDP or but you need to have a privacy policy on your website. There isn't a general law for a privacy policy, but there are more specific such just disclosures off specifics informations like, if you're gonna share the email address, you need to disclose that you need to do that through a privacy policy to get specific. And this is where the law comes in. So again, how we were going to create this privacy policy? Well, we're gonna use a privacy policy generator, and I'm gonna show you how it works and how we are going to do it. But first of all, what needs to be included in a privacy policy page? Because that's what we're going to be using, right? And we're gonna use this generator. But there's still some information that we need to feel in ourselves in order to make this more individual because your website is going to be different from ours. Okay, Everyone has their individual websites, so we need to tailor it. We're not gonna go too much in that, but I'm gonna show you how it works. So a privacy policy page is going to have to include information about the data collection , how it works, why you're doing it. For example, if you're using Google Analytics, you need to disclose how you are gathering their information. And if you're using a email subscription, for example, how you're gathering that information, someone makes a comment that you're saving their name. If you're using cookies, you need to have their consent to use cookies and also how you're going to use that information. And this is where the Y comes in. Not only do you need to have details about the data collection itself, how you collected, but also why and one example of why could be that you're using Google AdSense. AdSense means that you're serving them ads from Google's so called AdSense service. When someone makes as you're gonna have those ads generator on your website, you get a revenue for that. So if you could like cookies on your visitors and then you send those visitors to Google AdSense right, then Google AdSense can make more target. That adds towards those visitors. That means that the ads are going to apply to them more, and chances are there's gonna be more resource. Ah, high chance of off it being clicked. But you need to disclose this, that you're actually gathering their information and what you're using it for a while. We're gonna send it to add sense in order to make more targeted ads. Or we're going to track your I p address so that we can see where you are clicking on the site so that we can improve our content or make more off content that actually works. These are all examples on how we're using the information and what, why and what we're using it for. And another important part is that you need to make sure that they can opt out if they want to opt out. How are they gonna do it? Right. So this those two things want it creates awareness that oh, right, I can actually choose not to be in here like if you subscribe to someone's email is you're actually able to opt out. You need to disclose this. If you're tracking your visitors, I p and you're checking out what they're doing on your website or if you have cookies, they need to make sure that they can opt out and, of course, how they actually do opt out. And finally, perhaps the most important part is here at the end, and that is the contact. Four questions and concerns. Now, if you are a big company, a lot of people have lawyer for this, and they're gonna have, like, law at and then their domain name dot com. But if you are a smaller business, you're gonna want to use your business mail for this. Now, let's be honest here, guys. Most people aren't going to go into the privacy policy, read it through, be confused and send your bunch of e mails. Likely you haven't done this yourself, but you need to be compliant with the Lost with the privacy policy law and especially the G d. P R Law, because we already know off the consequences if we don't comply with this. So if you have any further questions about this, you can ask us in the Q and A and we're gonna help you out. But remember, guys, we are not lawyers, but we need to do our best to protect our websites and be compliant. So in the next lecture, we're gonna go through how to create a privacy policy page and make sure that it is GDP are compliant and then tailor it to your website. And then we're gonna go through a lecture where we actually make the plug ins that we have downloaded so far and make them GDP are compliant so that you are safe. Okay, in the end, this is your own responsibility. But we're going to go through this together. And when you know how to do it, you can always do it. Whatever you download, any plug in or whatever, you expand your business. So great job going through this with me. I know this is heavy stuff, but it's so, so, so important. So let's move on to the next lecture, guys. See you there. 40. Add a Privacy Policy Page: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be creating our privacy policy page and have it posted. And of course, we're gonna make it G d p r. Compliant. Now, guys, I'm gonna show you three different ways to do this in different levels off customization. If you feel overwhelmed in this lecture, don't worry about it. The last way I'm gonna show you it's the easiest. Okay, so bear with me here and stick around till the end because you're gonna like it. Okay, so first off, all wordpress already have their own privacy policy generator, which is great news for us. Now, all we need to do is be at the back end for website and go down to settings and then click on privacy in here. Now, you're going to remember that in the beginning when we created our website, we actually had a privacy policy there which we removed in order to clean things up and start from scratch. Now all you need to do is click on restore current page. And if you don't have this warning, all you need to do is create new page. Basically, it's the same thing, but for our intents and purposes, we're going to restore this page, okay? And then we're gonna go to privacy policy and click on restore. And now let's move over up here. Word says all. And if we go down, we have our privacy policy right here. So let's click on it and shake it out. So here we have it. It's pretty long, and it is GDP are compliant, which is great. You have a lot of texting here. You have a lot of really good disclosures in here. I've read this through already. You should to now the problem with this off course, as you probably can tell already, is that there are some gaps in here. So we have, for example, having to add our own contact information, additional information, how you're doing to protect their data. What data breach procedures that's in place up here. We have the analytics being Google analytics, for example, What we use, how we use it, why we used it. Remember all of the disclosures that we went through in the previous lecture. Now, if you have any experience with law or you have any lawyer, anything you can use this template because it's great. But if you are all fresh, you're completely new on this thesis can probably feel a bit overwhelming, and that is understandable. So I'm going to show you the second way in which you can create a great looking privacy policy. And again, guys, if you're feeling overwhelmed, don't worry. Stick around to the third way. Okay, so the second way is actually using a generator online. I'm gonna post this in. The resource is the great thing with this is that you get to customize it from the beginning. So, for example, where will your privacy polish would be used? What is going to be used on my website? Click on there, click on the next step, and then you get the feeling your business information. What is your website? Your l etcetera. In order to create a privacy policy for you. Here's the problem. Once you go business, which probably and you should be, then it's going to start costing money. So this is gonna cost you a couple of dollars in the end. Now, if you are a corporation already and you're making some revenue than this, should be no problem for you at all. But if you're not making in a revenue, this might feel a little overwhelming already. So you might not want to go with this. But this is actually a great way to get a tailor made, get it professional and have it published right away. Okay? And then you take the final piece that download and either pasted in there where I showed you where we have the privacy policy. Just removed that and paste it in or create a new page the third and final way that we've been waiting for. And that is using a template. And that template is included. OK, it's in The resource is And it looks like this here is a GDP, our privacy policy off. And you can see what says my company. So everything that it's colored like this, that is going to be information that you have to feel in yourself. But this is a complete privacy policy that is G d. P r. Compliant. So I'm gonna put this into resource is, and all you need to do is fill out your information. So a lot of is gonna be filling out the company name, which for us is gonna be Robin and Jesper, and then you need to fill out the company's information and address down here. We have information such as the kind of data that your collecting how we use it. Remember the how and why and also of you sharing it. 1/3 party, the legal basis. You just need to scroll down. Read this through super important. Read it through feeling these this colored. So all we have to do is select from a pair and go all the way down. Select all of this information and we're gonna right click on it, and we're gonna cop it. OK, now, before you do this, fill out the information to save us some time. I'm not gonna do that, but you need to do this, fill out the information, cope it. Then we're gonna go back to our website in here, and we're actually going to be creating a new page. Okay, we're gonna go ahead and click on add new in here because it's simply easier that way. And then we're gonna tightlipped privacy policy for Robin and Jesper and then down here, I'm just gonna go ahead and paste it in. So here we have it. You might want to, for example, make this a little bit bigger if you're interested in that designing it. But honestly Ah, lot of people going to read the privacy policy isn't too into design, right? Most people aren't going to be reading this, but you need to be compliant. So once it is in here, we're just gonna make sure that everything came with it. Perfect. We're gonna go ahead and click on Publish and then publish again, Greats. And now what we're gonna do is go back to settings and go to privacy. And now we're going to change our privacy policy page. We're gonna go ahead and we're gonna change into privacy policy for Robin and Jesper and use this page as our privacy policy page. Okay, so that's WordPress knows if we actually have one. Because if you checked out the previous lecture, you know how important it is to have a privacy policy page. Great. So now it's updated. We're using this page. Let's go ahead and put it out on our website. So what we're gonna do is we're gonna go to appearance and then go to menus, and then we're gonna go ahead and click on Create a new menu, and we're gonna call this menu footer and then click on Create Menu. Perfect. So then we're gonna feel in Footer in here, and then we're gonna go to the left, and we're going to click on privacy policy for Robin and Jesper and click on Add to Menu. Perfect. So there it is. We're gonna click this down, and we're just going to call it privacy policy just like that. Okay, so we're gonna make sure everything fits. We're not going to use him, make a menu. We're not gonna put in any icon or anything. We're gonna go ahead and click on save menu here, and then we're gonna go to the upper lifting visit site, right click and open link in new tab. Right? We've done this procedure before, and then check it out. So we're gonna scroll all the way down to our food er in there it is the privacy policy. So if I click on it, we get to see how it looks like, right? So here is all of the information, and basically, this is what we need to do to have a functional privacy policy right now. The only thing I'm gonna do is that I'm going to remove the right side bar in here because you don't want that together with the privacy policy. Generally again, this is a design purpose not too important for a privacy policy, but for the overall experience off your website. So, guys fill out this template for the privacy policy, put it in the page, make it into your main privacy policy page that put it in the menu and put it in the food. Er you can put it in the menu appears as well, but this is one of the least exciting pages on your side. But most important. Okay, so I'm gonna go back, and then I'm gonna go to pay chess. I'm going to remove the previous privacy policy. You don't have to worry about this if you did not do it, and then I'm gonna go into our privacy policy. Scroll down content layout full with update. Go back, update this page and then Walla it's gone. Okay, so now we have our privacy policy page guys, great job making it this far again. I know it's a heavy subject, but it's so important that we get this right now, you have three different ways in creating a great and secure GDP are compliant privacy policy. So in the next lecture, we're gonna make sure that all off your plug ins, our GDP are compliant as well. And remember, we're doing this to set it and forget it. We're not creating a website to go through all of this legal stuff because it's boring for me as well. We need to nail this part great job making it this far at sea in the next lecture. 41. Make Your Plugins GDPR Compliant: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to make sure that your plug ins, our GDP are compliant. So let's get started now before we do anything. I strongly recommend that, especially if you've been following from the previous lecture, that you go ahead and go to your privacy policy page. You move over to Perma Link and you change the your else so that it's simplified to just privacy. Policy is gonna be great for simplicity for anyone visiting. And when we're going to be using this link, then just click on update, right? And then you're gonna want another tab in here that is at your privacy policy page so you can just go ahead and quickly grab this address. Okay, so let's get started now. The plug is that we're going to want to check out is first and foremost male poet, because with male poet were actually gathering their information. So we need to have a disclosure about that, what we're doing and why, or just a reference to our privacy policy so that they know what they're signing up for. Okay. Same goes with WordPress forms. Now we have the WordPress for at the contact us page, remember? So we need to make sure that they give their consent what they're signing up to, how we're using that information just referencing to our privacy policy page. And then finally we're using incisive. And that is the plug and we're using for Google analytics, right? And Google analytics, like we winter, that means we're gathering their information and using their information. So I'm gonna show you how to make sure that we keep our visitors anonymous so that we are GDP are compliant. First things first, we're gonna move up, go to male poet, and then we're gonna go to forms in here. Now, if you remember from the beginning, there actually was a GDP or friendly forms. It's fantastic the plug ins or following suit here, making life easy for us to keep our business safe. But we made our own form. We called it the sidebar form. We're gonna go into that and makes edits. So this is what our form currently looks like Not what we're gonna do is that we're gonna move down to fields and then we're gonna click on custom takes or HTML and there were gonna drag it to the very bottom, and then I'm going to click on edit display, and I am going to paste in a code in hair and it's going to be looking like this. This code will be in. The resource is you can just download it and use it. And it says we keep your data private and share your data on Lee with third parties that make this service possible, and then we're going to go ahead and enter the address off our privacy policy patient. This is why we brought up this tab. So I'm gonna go ahead and click in here. I'm gonna go and cup it. Go back and here, which says, Enter the address off your privacy policy. I'm gonna go ahead and remove it. And then I'm just gonna go ahead and paste it in their ago, and I'm going to click on done. So now it looks like this we keep your data private, ensure that only with third parties to make this service possible that means that we're completely GDP or compliant. And now we're linking to our privacy policy. So we're gonna go ahead and click on save, so let's go and check it out and see how it went. So we are at our website. I'm gonna go ahead and click on Blawg because that's where we get the sidebar. I'm going to scroll down, and here we have it this little slightly under attractive but also important text. We keep your data prevention on Lee with the third. But to make the service possible and networking, click and read our privacy policy, and this is going to link us to our privacy policy. Great. Now we're all say we're all compliant. They don't need to do any double opt ins because now, when they know this, when they sign up, they know how we're using their information and why we're using their information, how they can opt out if they want to, and also how they can contact us. If there any questions, we have a complete privacy policy, and also we are GDP or compliant. Great. So let's move on to the next plug in. So the next Blufgan is gonna be WP forms. So we're gonna go there and we're gonna check out all of our current forms. So here we have our contact form, right? And currently it looks like this. It's a very basic nice looking for him. The problem is that there is no really consent or any reference through the privacy policy . They don't know how we're going to be using their information or even that were disclosing that we are using their information. So what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go away from this, and then we're gonna move over to settings that dashboard. And then if we scroll down, they have these amazing feature called GDP or enhancements. Okay, I'm just gonna click on this and then I'm gonna click on save settings. Perfect. So now let's go back to all forms and then go back to our contact form. And now look at this. We have our GDP, our agreement, just gonna click on it and drag it down. I'm gonna drag it down below here, let's say and then they have to consent to having this website store my submitted information so that they can respond to my inquiry. How awesome is this? And now if we click on it off course, we can edit any of the information here Should we want to, But we don't want to this is perfect as it is. And as you can see, it's mandatory. They have to feel this in in order to submit. So now this is GDP are compliant. Awesome. So we can save this. And again. Let's go ahead, go to our website and now we're gonna go to contact Scroll down and there we have it. We need to consent before we can send this one in. Absolutely amazing. So let's go back to the back end for website. We're gonna exit this and then we're gonna scroll down to insights, which is theme the two that we are using for our Google analytics. Remember? Now the great thing with the insights plugging is that they are already making our visitors anonymous. Now, if we only had Google analytics connected to our website, that means we would be gathering all of the information. But because we're using this plug in inside, that's gonna make us GDP are compliant already at the time off this recording, if you're unsure, go ahead and Google it read on their website. Make sure that this plug in is still GDP or compliant because, as you can see, there's nothing we can do from here or down in the settings that is going to give them any form off reference, right? We have our privacy policies set up. We have already explained how we're using this information, what we're doing with it. And at the time of this recording monster inside, this plug in is GDP are compliant. But this is the only one I would recommend that you have a quick look. Make sure that it still is. And if you are using another analytics tool, make sure that that one is compliant. Okay, that's all of their own research you need to do then when we're installing all off the future plug ins because you're going to be wanting your own plug ins As you develop your website, make sure that it is GDP or compliant and that you can reference through your privacy policy page. Okay, guys, great. We're almost done with this heavy subject. In the next lecture, you're going to be adding a cookie notice to make sure that they give their consent before you start saving any cookies on their computer right from your website onto their computer . And after that, we can move on from this heavy subject. Great job making it this far. This is what's gonna make sure that you can grow your business securely. And this is what's gonna make you professional. Okay. See, in the next lecture, guys. 42. Cookies Consent: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to make sure that we have their consent before we store cookies on their computer. Now, if you don't remember what cookies are cookies are when we store information about them, for example, there first there last name their preference on our website, the social media off hours that they like, etcetera. We store that information and would save it down as what's called a cookie on their computer so that the next time they visit our website, that's gonna load instantly from their computer towards our website. So we get the first name, their last name, their preferences, the content they've been enjoying etcetera. In order for us to make more personal ads more directed content towards them, we might also use their name in different sections. Maybe we have auto feel on our website, for example. Maybe we have also Logan all of these kind of things or post you might recently have read related post etcetera etcetera. Cookies are extremely powerful like this, but we need to have their consent in order to be GDP are compliant. So let's make sure that we have that. So we're gonna go to the back end of for website plug ins at new, and then we're going to search for cookies. It's that simple. And now we get a couple of options in here and honestly, doesn't matter which one you choose because they all serve a simple function and they all work. Okay, so the one that we're going to be using is this one cookie noticed for G d. P. R. Is created by the factory. Now it says on tested with your version of WordPress. But I know that this one works because it tried it out myself and what you always can do. If you're unsure and it is untested, it's click on it and then move over to the review section like this and see if anyone is complaining about it. Not working, okay. And everyone here is happy. I read them through already, and I've tried this plug and I use it myself. We're gonna go ahead and install it and then click on, Activate, and then we're gonna move over to the left. We're gonna go to settings, and then in here we have the cookie notice, right? We're gonna click there. So there are a couple of things we can do here. We can edit the message rights the text is going to be displaying. We could add the butts and text and change that one. We can also enable a privacy policy link in here. We just click on it, and then we can go to Page and select our privacy policy page. If we want that one to show we can choose Erling Target. In other words, when they click on the link to our privacy policy, it means it's gonna open it in a new tab if it is blank. If it itself, then it's gonna changed in the current tab, the entire site and go to the privacy policy. I recommend you keep it on blank. Then we have refused and revoke cookies, but I don't recommend those because we don't have any customized a code right now. That makes for the plug ins to activate Onley at acceptance. Now. These plug ins were always tracking their always on right now, and I recommend that when the enter your side, just make sure that they know that by visiting the site they accept and consent to the use off cookies so We're not gonna bother about the refused to revoke or script blocking with the red loading or the scroll. We also have the cookie expiry. A month is usually good. We don't have to worry about the placement. The rest is decide if you would like to change that. And then we have this save changes. It's very intuitive. The only real important part are these three, I would say, but we're actually going to change this up a little bit. Okay, so what we're gonna do is that we're gonna change this takes and add another one that I have written in here. And what this is gonna do is that is going to say this website uses cookies to improve your user experience, analyze site traffic and served targeted as in accordance with our and then we're gonna link to our privacy policy page. And then so it says privacy policy and they can click it and they will building to our privacy policy. So then we are explaining what we're doing. Why we're doing it perfect according to GDP are and they have the cookie notice and they will be consenting by simply being here. They can read about what it means, how we use it, etcetera in the privacy policy page. Okay, so once again, we're gonna go over grab the U R L to the privacy policy by coping it, going back and changing this piece here, and then we're just gonna pace that information instead. Which for us it's Roman and just don't come for slash privacy policy. Okay, you could change the button takes from okay to accept, for example. But we're gonna go ahead, go down and click on save changes, because this is the way that I prefer it. And then you also don't need to enable the privacy policy link, which makes it easier and nicer. Look, in my opinion, with the cookie display. So let's have a look at how this looks. To do this, you're gonna need to open a private tab or an incognito tab that is also called and then you're gonna go to your website, right? Because the private one and incognita doesn't store cookie so we can actually check this out. So here we can see this website uses cookies to improve your user experience, analyze side traffic insert targeted as in accordance with our privacy policy. If I click on the privacy policy link, Hair is gonna take me directly to the privacy policy page and then I can click on OK and is going to disappear so they know that they're consenting to all of this simply by visiting our website. And we are in the clear for G d p r awesome job, guys. Now, remember, in the end and this is the disclaimer, I'm not a lawyer, and you need to make sure you don't take This is legal advice. You need to do your research, make sure that you are compliant. But by now, by for our intents and purposes, we should be safe at this point in time with our privacy policy and our GDP are we just need to make sure that in the future we always have a look out making sure there are plug ins, our GDP or compliant, making sure that your website is and that you're linking to this page. Then we can let go off the law jargon and just said and forget and move on with the fun part off designing, reaching out and building our business building a wordpress website. Okay, great job making it this far truly. See you in the next lecture, guys. 43. Add a Terms and Conditions Page: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about the terms and conditions on your website. What? It is what we're gonna use it for. And then we're gonna make sure we put it up on your website. Okay, So what is it? Well, basically, it is a legal notice, and it does several things, One of them to make very clear that everything that is on your website is owned by you. That's your content. Okay, Now, the second thing that it does, that's also very important. It did limit your legal liability. So, for example, if someone would read any advice from you on your web site from a block post you made, they did something. Then they ended up hurting themselves, hurting their business, etcetera. And then they would be trying to hold you responsible for that. Well, the terms and conditions gonna make it very clear that everything that they do from your website, any advice and its service, etcetera. It's gonna be limited liability for you. Meaning you don't bear any responsibility for what happens to other people when they're using your stuff and your advice. Okay. This is gonna limit your legal liability. Now it's also going to be limiting certain activities, for example, is going to make sure that if someone does anything inappropriate on your website, you have the right to ban their account without any notice without didn't need to explaining why. Basically, you own the website. You own this stuff and you are able to remove anyone. Ask you wish okay, because this is your material. Also, you can limit certain activities and liabilities such as if you have a membership website and people are posting their own content such as If you're having a membership website where a subscription website and people can generate their own content and posted on your website, you're gonna make sure that certain things are not allowed to be posted and that you bear no responsibility for what other people are posting. OK, it comes back to the terms and conditions where you limit your own legal liability, and you make sure that everything on your website is owned by you but is used at people's own discretions is their own responsibility. Now it's also worth noticing that this is a child, a low child, as many names as we say is also known as the terms off service. In terms off use it. Sometimes they have their separate when their terms off, using a certain service or or terms off using a certain product, but basically terms and conditions. They all fall under the same category and they all Indian do the same thing. So if you see any of these terms and conditions, terms of service, terms of use, basically it's all the same, making sure you own your own stuff and you limit all the legal liability. Now, the final thing that I want to say with this is that this is actually not required by law. Okay, you need to have a privacy policy by law, but in terms and conditions, that's just going to be to your benefit to your legal benefit, making sure that you're always in declare. But it's not by law. Okay, guys, So what we're gonna do now is if we're actually going to use a template for terms and conditions, I'm gonna show you how to use it. Then we're going to create their terms and conditions page and post it. Okay, so let's go ahead and do that now. First of all I want to show you the terms and conditions template. Now this will be in the resource is. And just like with the privacy policy, all you need to do is check this through and fill in all of the colored parts here with the information last updated. That's gonna be the date when you write this, then you're gonna have to change your company name for your website. If you have any mobile app. Otherwise, just remove this part and then feeling all of these different parts in here And once you have done this once this is all filled in, all you need to do is select everything. No, I use command A or control A to select everything. You can also use your mouth like this, Select everything right, click and cope it. And then we're gonna go to the back and offer a website and create a new page for it. Okay, so we're gonna go to pages and go to add new, and then we're gonna add the title terms and conditions, and we're gonna make sure that the content layout does not have the sidebars. We're gonna check this to fool with and then I'm just gonna click in this box, right click and paste this information in here. Now, remember, it's super important that you make sure that you feel in your information here before you paste it in. OK, and then everything is gonna be in here. It's gonna limit your liability off course, read through and customize it so that it fits you. Remember, I'm not a lawyer, and you should not take this as legal advice. But this is a generic templates gonna cover most of the things that we need, especially now in the beginning. So once this is all done, all we're gonna do is go ahead and click on Publish. And then we're gonna move down to appearance and we're gonna go to menus. And now we are in the Footer menu. All they were going to do is click on terms and Conditions in here and then click on add menu. And then we're just gonna go ahead and click on Save many. You can see it's been added here together with the privacy policy. So footer has been updated. Let's go ahead and check it out. I'm gonna go off to Robin and Jesper and open visit site in a new tab. And here we have a beautiful cookie notice, too, that we created. And then I'm going to scroll down. And here we can see we have a privacy policy and then we have our terms and conditions, so I'm gonna click on it to check it out. And here it is. It looks great. Everything is in here and fits. Great job. Now we have settled with our terms and conditions, and we have our privacy policy as well. Now, one thing to notice it, it's quite important. We can see that I accidentally copied generic terms and conditions template. We might not want to include that. So let's go back to our edit page and just remove this part here, OK? We already know how to do that. We just remove the block. There we go. We updated. And then you make sure that when you copied this template, this template you don't want to cope with this part. You just gonna Kobe from down here change all of this information, create a new page like this, and then save it down. Put it in the food, er, go to your website update this. Check it out to make sure that everything looks good and it does well done, guys. We have covered all of the legal stuff so far. Now, remember, runs again. Disclaimer. I'm not a lawyer. Don't take legal advice from me, But do you need to make sure the as your business grows you are GDP or compliant? You have your cooking notice. You have a solid privacy policy page. Your terms and conditions are up to date. Just make sure everything is covered as you go along, and then you want to pretty much set and forget and just go on building your business and building your website. Right? This kind of stuff is not very exciting, but so important. Okay, great job. See you in the next lecture. 44. Introduction Making Website Professional: welcome to them, Making your website professional section. First of all, great job on making it this far. By now you have created your website. You know most of the features on how wordpress works. You can create your own post, you can customize your website decided and you have all of the most essential and functional plug ins on your website as well. Now, we're gonna go ahead and take the next step in order to make your website even mawr professional. Okay. And with professional, I mean fully functional and doing what it is intended to do. So let's talk a little bit about this section. Now, this intel, your section, it's actually one big preparation section. Okay, so what we're gonna do here is that we are gonna check out. What are the needs for my website? What is it that I lack? What is that I need and we're gonna prepare all of those pages, for example, and functions in this section and then in the next section, we are going to start using elementary. Now, you might remember that I spoke about elemental early on in the course because elemental came with the WP ocean theme, right? So what is L A mentor? Well, elementary, say so called page builder. It allows you to design and customize your pages completely live and completely with the drag and drop tools. So it's a super easy way to design your pages to make them look really good and do so live . And it also includes a bunch off templates. There is one of the easiest and fastest way to make your website look super professional and give it all the functions that you need. So we're gonna prepare everything that we actually need by spying on competitors, for example, seeing what they do within your genre. And then when we have everything prepared, we're gonna move on to the next section where we're gonna learn about elementary and start setting in those functions. Right? So how do you make your website look professional beyond just a solid design? So how do you make your website professional? Well, within marketing, especially social media marketing. There's a old saying that goes, You don't have to be a professional, you just have to look like a professional and were then I used this same kind of saying When it comes to our WordPress website. It is so important. Whatever that it is that you're doing that you look professional. If you're going to be selling any product, you need to have status. You need to have an authority and trust so that people can trust that it's safe to give up their card information and buy from you and know that they're gonna get whatever it is that they're ordering. And similarly, if you're selling a service, you need to have the trust in authorities where people can trust getting the service from you and all of that starts with your website. So how can we know that we're looking professional and that we have and are going to be creating what visitors and future customers are looking for? Well, we need to get into the use of experience, right? So when we enter a new store or a new building, the first thing that happens usually is that we go in and we start looking around and more often than not, we get a little bit overwhelmed because we don't know where to start. It's very similar with a website. You might have a multitude of products, multitude of functions and services. But it is up to us to make sure that that visitor is being held in his hand or her hand and shown exactly what to do From the very beginning. We need to make sure that the user experience is guided and whatever it is that they're looking for, that they can easily navigate to get that and fulfill whatever need that it is that they have. And we're going to do that by simplifying right. Ah, lot of websites today. They have so many function to have so many pages, so many different things to do. You can scroll endlessly and there's things and bottoms everywhere going on. What we need to do is make it simple. Fewer choices means east your choices and then once they start navigating, you can expand on the choices. But you need to make it simple for them from the very, very beginning. Okay, so this is how we take it one step further, making sure that our website, it's super professional, very easy for visitors to understand, to experience and enjoy the experience if they enjoy your website than whatever it is that you have their articles, products services. Whatever it might be, they're gonna be much, much more likely to return and enjoy it. Okay, so what we're gonna do now is that we're going to move on to the next lecture where we're gonna make sure that you get a logo for your website. Now, if you already have a business logo, for example, you can skip the next lecture. But if you don't have a website logo or a brand logo business logo that you can use, then follow along to the next lecture, we're gonna make sure that you create that. It's super easy. And then we're gonna settle in the design so that it looks really professional. Okay, guys, see you in the next lecture. 45. Create Your Logo: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be learning how to create our logo to use in our WordPress website now, Needless to say, if you don't have a logo for your business or for your personal use, you're not gonna look very professional. So this is our website right now, and we're going to be re doing all of this with elementary in the next section. But if we take a look at the upper left corner, we can see it just says Robin and Jesper here right now. You know, it looks OK. It does its function, but it's not professional, right? This is great. If you're having a blogger, you know, if you're if you're doing this on your free time, for example, But if you want to take the next step and look further professional, if you're having a business, you want to have your logo up here. Okay, so if you already have a business and you have a business logo, we have your own brand around and that's settled. You can skip to the end of this lecture where I show you how to set that up. But if you don't have one we're going to create this logo to gather guys. Okay, So follow along here and let's do it. So the first thing that we're gonna do is that we're gonna move over and go to canvass dot com. Remember, from the design. Resource is, we've used this one before. Now, before we do anything, it would be very easy to go in here and right logo, and then you're gonna get a bunch of templates for logos that you can use. But the problem with this is that this is only 500 times, 500 pixels, and we're gonna prefer to have a slightly better quality. Okay, so what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go to the upper right corner here and click on custom dimensions. Okay, so we're gonna write 1000 times 1000 pixels and then click on create new design. Perfect. So now when we're in here, this is where we search from templates and we search for logo. There we go. So in here, when we get a bunch of different templates, a bunch of different logos. Now, if you don't want a generic logo like this or you don't want to create this logo yourself. Don't worry. At the end, I'm gonna show you alternatives, how you can get it completely custom made. Okay, But for now, we're gonna focus on doing it ourselves because it's actually very easy, and it's completely free to do so. All we need to do is find a template here that we really enjoy so that we can customize it ourselves. And there's a lot of different options in here scrolling down. This is actually one that I think it's really cool. Now, if I click on it, it pops up to my right and I can start customizing it. Now. I don't love everything about it. We have to remember that this is gonna fit in on our website, right? So if I go back to our website, we can see that the color theme here, and especially for the menu, is white. So having something black hair is not gonna look good. It's not gonna look professional at all. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm gonna go ahead and actually customize this logo, and I'm gonna show you exactly how to do that. It's very simple. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna just click on it like this, and that gives me the option to customize it. So I'm gonna sell like this with the Sparks motors, and I'm going to turn this into black, OK, I'm going to select the part underneath as well. And I'm gonna turn that into black, too. There we go. And the reason I'm doing this is because now I can click on the background here, go to the upper left where we have the colors to choose from and turn the background into white. There we go. So if I had just turned it into what from the beginning, this takes would have disappeared. And I think this is easier to do now for the template and design you choose. You might not have to mix it with the colors. It's completely up to you. Remember, From now on, it's a lot up to you how you decide to do your dis science guys. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm gonna select this text and I'm just gonna go ahead and write. Robin and Jesper there would go and then down below here, I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to ride are slow gun. Gonna write courses to change your life fits quite perfectly even there we go. So the first thing that I see here is that I don't love these funds. Right? So I'm gonna go ahead and select this, and I'm going to look for a different phone. It's up here in the upper left corner. You can just scroll through here and see if there's anything that you like. I'm gonna go ahead and look around a little bit, see if there's anything that sticks out. Archival, black. You know, it looks OK, but it's not for me. And I'm gonna try this one. Okay, so this barrel bold is one that I actually really like. I think it looks great. I'm gonna go ahead and use it now. I don't love the way that this is positioned right now. I would like this takes to be further along, so it covers one long space there instead. And as you can see, if I grab anything like this, it just moves the entire piece. Just one big piece. Now, I'm just gonna go ahead and undo that by clicking on command and said, And if you're using windows Gonna be control Said so what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna click on all of these, and then I'm gonna click up here. Worse is on group. Okay, so now I have on grouped all of these pieces. I can click on this part and I can pull it out like this. See, now I can customize all of these one by one. So I am enjoying this much, much more. This is barrel bold. I'm gonna go ahead and change this front underneath to that as well, and I'm gonna go ahead and find it. There we go. So I think this looks nice. I think it looks really nice, but I'm not loving this space in between them. Okay, so what I'm gonna do is that I'm gonna click on this one, and then I'm going to drag it a little bit closer here. There we go. And I'm going to click on this one down below s well, and I'm going to drag it up. And in just like that, they would go now. I'm enjoying this a lot more. I actually think this looks really nice. Robin and Jesper courses to change your life. And here we have our logo. Okay, so this is perfect. I'm really happy with this. There's nothing more I want to customize. If I wanted to, I could click on this. I could change the size. There's a bunch of different option if I want. Bold or not, I could be removing that by selecting all of the's and removing the bowl. But I actually really like it the way that it is right now. Okay. And also who looked are left. There are a lot of elements, and all of these features are free, or most of the features are free that we can be using. But again, I'm happy with this. So what I'm gonna do is move up to the upper right corner here where it's there is a download. I can I'm gonna click on it now. Notice that we are not able to make this into a transparent background because that's a premium feature in Canada. But don't worry about it. I'm gonna show you how to bypass this in the next lecture. Because we're gonna use this picture was something else there. And the recommended file type is P N G. and we're gonna use this, especially since we have smashed. Now this automatically going to compress the file for us and save us a lot of space. So I'm gonna take P and G. I'm gonna give this one in name. Let's call it Robin and Jesper logo And then I'm gonna go ahead and click on download and download. They would go perfect. So let's go back to our website. So here we are. Now, all I'm going to do is that I'm going to go up here and click on customers. If you are at the back end of the website, you can go to appearance and then click on Customized is the same thing. And then I'm gonna go to upload files and click a select files and go ahead and download that one that we just created. There we go choose files, and then I'm gonna go ahead and click on select. So now we get to crop it and noticed that when we crop it, we get these kind of long shape that is used beautiful and gonna feet our menu perfectly. So this is exactly what we're looking for. Its high quality. It gets the crop that we want. We can move this upside down as we want, but I'm actually really happy with this Acid is I'm gonna click on crop Image right there. And here it is. Here is to display on how it currently looks. So we've added our logo up here. Clearly, it's way too big now, this could be a design as well, if you like that. But I don't really like this design. So what we're gonna go ahead and do is that we're gonna go down where this Max with and Max Heights, and I'm gonna write in 200 then go to 200 here and check it out. And I think this is a little bit too small, actually. Can't read this properly, So I'm gonna go ahead and make it a little bit larger. Maybe 208 seed times. 280. There we go, actually really happy with this. Look, think it looks really good. Yes, I really like this. And then I'm gonna go ahead and click on Publish. So now has been published. Let's go ahead and look how it looks on the iPad's s. Well, it's gonna look like this. Whoever many and then on a cell phone is gonna look like this. Now, this is not a perfect design for our cell phone, but we're gonna take care of that when we move on to the next section and start going through elementary. That's gonna change the entire design off the website. Okay, so I'm really happy with this. And the way it looks, the logo turned out great. And it's super easy to do now. Notice also, we did not make the background transparent. The benefit of making it transparent, of course, is that no matter what happens in the back here, it's just gonna be the text on the logo. And you can used any caller and the lug is gonna fit with that. But because we're putting this logo together with a menu, we're always going to keep this menu white in this design that is. So having a white background is gonna work perfectly. And similarly, if you're using a another color for your website, maybe yellow, maybe black, you can also just make the background in Canada right here, make it into that color simply by going into the upper left corner and turning it into that very color that you want and make sure that it matches with the menu color. Okay, guys. Perfect. Now keep this one. The can open with your current logo because we're gonna use this part in the next lecture where we're gonna make sure that we change our fabrikant so that it matches our logo right now. Remember, we made a fabric on already. That's this part up here. This is the fabric on four can waits this c and this is the fat become for Robin in jest. But we're gonna make sure that it matches the one we just create. And we're gonna be using these symbols, and I'm gonna show you how to do that in the next lecture. Now, if you're like me and you're not big on designing and neither am I then first of all, thankfully, there are all of these templates and stuff that we can use that makes this process so simple to do. But if you don't want to do this, there is yet another thing you can do. And that is to go to Fiverr Dots. Come now. Fiber dot com is perfect because you concert for anything here and find a freelancer that's gonna make things happen for you. Whether you need video editing, you need a logo. You need a certain the sign. Maybe you need a product to sign. Whatever it might be, you're gonna find that on fiber. So if I just search for logo in here and then I'm gonna click on logo design or business logo, whichever let's go for logo design in here and then I'm gonna change sort by into best selling. Then we're gonna find a lot of different people here for very reasonable prices. These air starting at $15 where you can be creating a beautiful logo that you can be using for many, many, many years ahead. So it's no work on your side. All they need to do is tell them what you want. $15 maybe slightly more. But it's very well spent money. But if you want to sign it yourself like we just did that super simple asked, Well, great job guys, keep the can of a window open and let's move on to the next lecture 46. Match Logo Into Favicon: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be matching our logo that we just created into our fabric. Um, right. So if we look at our fabric on right now, we're using this r and J one that we created earlier on in the course. And that method works perfectly fine. You can create the great fabric comes that way. But when you're aiming from more professional webs that you want to match your logo to your fabric on which is going to constantly remind your visitors off your brand right there is all about brand awareness and building your brand onto your website. Making your business or your blawg or however you choose to use your website, go smoother. So what we're gonna do is match this logo here into our fabric. Um, now, if we go back to Canada, where would just created it? Noticed that this is quite a long logo, right? This works really perfect for our menu. Notice that we have a logo looking here, and then we have a piece of text in here. Now, if we had used a different logo such as this template, for example, which is exo, exo and we had written R NJ, your Robin and Jesper in here. We might have been able to use this entire logo ass or fabric on, but because we have our text out here, this means that this text is not going to feed into the fabric on it's not gonna be readable, and you're not gonna see a logo off it. So similarly, with this one, this is Katie. If you had your text within this logo, you could use it as a fab com. So what we're gonna do is that we are going to be editing are low going here. We're going to be removing the text and enlarging this one so we can create just this piece into our fabric on making your website look even more professional. So the first part is simple. We're just gonna cilic this, remember, we have on grooved it already, and then we're going to remove this and we're gonna go ahead and we're going to remove this . There we go now, because we have the dimensions of 1000 times 1000. That means that if I go ahead and select these two and put them onto the middle like this. There we go. Then this entire white area is going to be counting as our Fabrikant. Right, So there are two things we want to do. One we want to enlarge in the city takes a much more space of this square which we're going to do and to We're going to want to make this part transparent, right? Because in our fabric on, we're not gonna want to have a bunch of white in the background. Would just want these two to be our logo. It's gonna look much, much better. So first things first. What we're gonna do is that I'm gonna click on this one, and I'm simply going to drag it until it is quite big. I'm gonna shoot for, let's say, 800 here, 801 will be perfect. They would go So eight ton one times 379 gonna click on this one. I'm gonna large in this a swell 801. There we go. Now all I need to do is remember how it looked like and make it look that way once again. All I need to do is go back to the website and see how these two were put together. I can see that this one goes in almost into the middle and they're kind of on top off each other. I'm gonna do similar here. Something like this here would go. And I'm gonna put this one up slightly there. Gonna pull them down so that they are more centered even more so down here. And you can see that I'm getting assistance here. Sedona. The pictures are not going outside off the frame. You wanna have a smart space appears down here just in order to center this even though we're going to remove the white in the background. Just gonna pull this lightly more down there we go on their would go. Gonna have a look. See if this space looks similar to this one. I'm gonna narrow it down one step further. Just gonna put this one up here about and there we go. I'm really happy with this one. So what I'm gonna do, Eastern. I'm gonna go ahead and just save this one down, just like before, and then click this one away. Now I'm going to go into a website that's called Luna pic, right. This is one is gonna be in the resource is as well. Now, the amazing thing with Luna pic beyond being a free to is that you can add in your picture and with a single click remove the background off it. Now, it's not super advanced in that way that if you have a more complex picture, it's not gonna be able to pinpoint every part. But for a simple picture like this one removing the background, it works like magic. Okay, so all you're gonna need to do, because I'm gonna put this directly into the remove background part. If you just go to Luna pic that come, you're gonna want to go to edit and then transparent background. I'm gonna go ahead and click on upload here, which is choose your file and then I'm gonna set this one. This is one that I just created There would go and I'm gonna click on Choose and now check this out. All I'm gonna do is call it. Come the white here and it's gone amazing and fantastic. I just love this feature so much makes it so simple. And it's going to save this one down. Okay, so Let's go back to our website in hair there ago, and I'm gonna go into customized and now we're ready to set our fabric. Um, if you remember the last time we did our fabric on, we actually used a converted to make it into a dot I come now that makes the whole process much simpler because you don't need to crop. It doesn't cropping for you. But for this purpose or for this icon that we've made ourselves, we're gonna make the cropping ourself both way. Works perfectly fine. And then we're gonna go into sight identity. And down here, we're going to click on Change Image. We've done this before. Guys gonna go to upload files, click on select files and then I'm gonna go for this one that we have just removed the background on. Now, notice the difference between these ones. This one has the clear wall around here. That means that there's a white background. This one doesn't have any wars because there are no background. I'm gonna click and choose, and then I'm going to click on select. So if we have a look at your writing, we can see the way that is gonna look on our fabric on right now, and this is awesome. And this also ended up being pretty much perfect because we did all of the working can already, and there's no background. So as you can see, there's not gonna be anything around. If it would have been white around off course, that works. But this just looks so much better. Gonna click on crop image, and then we're going to click on Publish. Now, remember how it looks like right now it's our in Jace looking like this. We're just going to compare it, Gonna click on publish, and I was been published. Okay, so let's go to Robin and jesper dot com and check it out. And in order for us to be able to see this fabric on, we're gonna have to remove our cashier so that we can shake it out. Right? So we're going to click on delete cash and then we're going to click up here and we're going to click on updates again. And now if we have a look, we can see the way our Fabrica looks right now we can see that it matches perfectly with our logo right here. And this is creating brand awareness. And honestly, this is gonna make you look so much more professional. Now, if it doesn't show up for you, it can take a little bit of time. And if it still doesn't show up, you might need to go to your settings and clear your history to remove all of the cookies. Right now. That might remove a bit of other information like your Loggins and stuff. But that's what you might need to do because it's been saved in your cash in your cookies already your previous logo, But any rate, this work, it looks great. And now you know how to turn your logo inter fabric and how to match those to just take out the single piece and look so much more professional. Great job, guys. See you in the next lecture. 47. Tailor Your Website: in this lecture. We're going to be tailoring our website to our own needs. Right? So we're gonna look at what is it that we're offering? What is that we need to put in there, such as? Different pages is what we're gonna look at primarily right now. We're going to be learning about what we need by looking at what other people are doing, right? We're gonna look at the masters in our field, see what they're doing. Figure out why they're doing it and what we can learn from it. This is how we grow into a really profitable in good website. So I am equipped with a text editor here to write anything up because I enjoy the digital era. So everything that I will be learning that I'm gonna put into my website here. I'm going to be riding up now. You can grab a pen of paper if you like going that route. Anyhow, let's get started. I have a look at what other people are doing and what we can be learning from it. Now. The first website were going to be looking up is Gary Vaynerchuk. Now, this is a digital marketing master This guy is probably the biggest when it comes to creating content digitally, and he's just grown so big on every social media platform. What's interesting here is that when you go into his website, the first thing that pops out is this big screen. Now, if you ever wonder what you should be doing when you go here, the first thing you can do is basically click on this video and see what he's all about. So this is linking to a YouTube video. There's talking about being on entrepreneur, right? So chances are, if you know, if this guy you're going into his website, you might be or are aspiring to be on entrepreneur. So he's targeting people in capturing people this way. Now he also has something else that's really, really clever. He has something that's his first time here, and if I click on this one that's taking me to another page. What is going to be introducing himself now? This is a genius move because Gary Vaynerchuk himself, he's a brand, and he's a huge brown and clearly what he's looking to do here. It's expand his brand and become even bigger scrolling down. We can see what it's about him were having, Ah, lot of social proof in here, and we get even more info. So let's go back to the first page where we started now in here the pages that he's using this podcast, he's using blawg events, contact and my story. OK, now the podcast doesn't apply to my website that I'm creating because we don't have a podcast. I already have a blawg page, which is perfect. We're not going to be doing events. I won't be needing that contact. It's all said and done. And then we had my story. But my stories only applicable because people are interested in him because he has grown so big. Me and Jesper so far are not too interesting it beyond having an about page. If people want to know more about us rather than our story, right, it's much more interesting what we can offer people at this point scrolling down. We can see that there's a lot of things going on right now. We can see that he is putting in videos of how to build a business we have there has been featured in which is a lot of social proof, his offering content. I mean, this is what it does. He helped people create content and he's offering many more articles in here. If you scroll downwards says, Want to get in touch with me, we can see on the subject line here. If I click here, it says, join our daily digital deep dive, $10,000 per seat. I don't know how many seats this guy takes in, but if he has even shows a couple of people, that's a lot of money. So it makes sense that his entire website is about social proof, building up his brand and his trust even further and making it as personal as possible. Because then this kind of high ticket sales are It's possible. So if you are into digital marketing and creating this form, digital media in helping entrepreneurs would start up. There's a lot to learn from here. You want to make things as personal as possible now. For me to learn from this website is primarily that this is a very simple upper fold. This part is the upper fold. Anything beyond when you scroll down is called the lower fold. So what I'm learning is to keep things simple and let's explore further options. Now here we have. Tim Ferriss team first is a huge blogger and podcaster been following this guy's for many, many years and what he's offering here, the first thing that I see is first off a picture of him, which makes sense because we are a Tim Ferriss blogged, right? You want to keep it personal, and then this huge social proof so already. Right now I can tell that something that is very important to this website is social proof . So I'm gonna go ahead and just write that up right now. Social proof. That is something that I'm gonna want to keep in mind asked. I'm designing the website later on with Elemental. I'm gonna want to make sure that I put in the amount of reviews what people are saying, testimonials, etcetera. And then, if we look at the page itself scrolling down, it makes a lot of sense that the first thing that were being offered is his latest podcast , because podcasting is currently the biggest thing he has. He also has a lot off content in here when it comes to articles and blogging some of them might just be transcript off the podcast. But at any rate, this is what his famous for. So going into his website and getting the podcast and getting the blogging, it's exactly what you'd expect. And what do you want? And this comes back guys to the user experience. Okay, Team Faris is a huge part caster and blogger. You go into his website that exactly what you're going to be wanting, right? So this is perfect set of this is a really smart and clever design scrolling down. We're gonna be continued to be offered and different podcasts, different categories, off articles in here. It's just really, really clever. He knows who his audience is and what they want. And if we scroll up once again and look at his patient, he has home, which is makes a lot of sense home. Start here. He has podcast. He has books because he has written books, TV show newsletter about and contact. Okay, not too much to learn from here because he's also doing something different. We're gonna go through many different types so that you also can get something applicable to your possible business. But when you're doing this, you want to check out people who are more within your niche and genre. Okay. For example, if you're offering services, you want to look, get competitors and people who are offering services primarily see what they are doing. Let's move onto the next one, which is smart passive income dot com with Pat Flynn. Now this is someone who have been following for many, many years as well, and I've seen his website develop trying out a lot of different things. What I love so much about this is how clean it is now, similarly to Gary Vaynerchuk website. When you go in here, there's just this big, big page that guides you instantly into what it's about. Here we have a Texas is. Let me help you build a passive income driven online business, and it Gary Vaynerchuk website. You could click on the video and see what he was all about. So what I'm learning here is that I want to go directly to the point with some form of introduction. I get to see who this guy is, and I get to learn what he is doing. So I'm going to write this up like that. So I've just written direct introduction because those are the things that I really appreciate as well. Now he's introducing. Here's a Hi, I'm Pat Flynn. I made to show you through my own experience exactly how you can stop trading time for money and start building a business. It works for you. So here's something really clever. He has a learn more bottom right up here. He also has a start here. But, um, now if I click on, learn more, he just told me what he's all about. If I want to learn more one is all about, I'm gonna go and click on this one, and I'm going to be taken to another page was going to be continuing building that relationship to me because I'm getting to know him and his content. Now, if you notice if I click on start here, they're gonna notice that it goes to the exact same page. So they learn more button. And the start here is the very same. And it's perfect for beginners because when you go in just like we talked about in the previous lecture, you get confused. So this is great. You get a helping hand, Someone who guides you through it. If you look, there is a lot of possible material. He's simplified it greatly scrolling down. We get a bigger introduction, what he's all about. And this is just a really clever way to introduce himself and build a relationship. Now his Bigham podcasting. And that is what he's offering me here right now. Very, very clever. So I'm gonna go ahead and I'm gonna write up page. Start here because that is something that I'm going to want to create from seeing other people doing it. You want to guide your visitors from the very beginning? Don't let it get overwhelming for them. Show them exactly what to do once they enter your website. Now, this is a little bit more applicable to me because he also has a pay chair called courses. And we are creating a course page right? You might be doing something different, but me, We, as in me and Jesper are creating a course website and containing a courses page. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on that one too. See how he has designed that page. Now I absolutely love the way that he has put this up. So first off, he's explaining exactly what it is that he's teaching. And then he has such a simple and beautiful interface for his course of you can click on any one of them and you can learn more about them. So I'm gonna write this information appears well, and this is the type off research that I strongly recommend that you do as well in order to get a really solid and up to date website is gonna follow along your competitors because what they're doing works. Otherwise they wouldn't be your competitors. Right. So I'm going to write here, introduce what the courses are about. Simple images to show courses with price just like this one. Look at this. We have the course logo course logo. Course logo. There we have the price, and we get a tying a description here. A swell. Now, this is such a valuable information for me because I know how I'm going to be designing this later on. I'm not gonna cope him and do exactly like he does, but I'm gonna use thes s a template for my own designing. Okay, so let's continue our learning here is someone called Kooky Kate at Cookie and kate dot com . Now what's different here is that her primary paid her home page is actually her blawg because what she is primarily doing is offering recipes, right? If you scroll down here, you're going to get a bunch of different recipes and you get to click and show me the recipes. So if you're offering recipes so you're having something similar like a blogger, you're doing articles. This is a pretty nice set up for that, looking to the right, just like me and Jesper currently doing. She has a tiny introduction. Head is a hello. I cook fresh vegetarian recipes. My dog cookie captured, said crumbs quite charming about seek. If I want to learn more now for a blood type of face, this is really nice, because her visitors are going to be expecting content when she comes to this website. They're going to be expecting content in form of recipes, right, because that's what she is known for. Similarly, with Tim Fairies, he's famous for blogging, his famous for podcast. So what? He's doing his giving batteries visitors right away, and her, too. She's giving the recipes right away. This is so clever. So if you are doing something similar to this, have a look at this all the recipes in a menu, and she is using thes type off categories. This is a great template for you if you're doing something similar and check this out. So this is a great way off learning now. It's not too much for me to learn in this one because I'm doing something different from her, right? But this might really apply to you. Let's move onto the next one. So this is born fitness dot com, and they are offering a service. They're offering a coaching service. Now, once again, what I love so much about this is first of all, look how clean it is. We have the logo here, and we have a tiny menu here. Kind of reminds us off this page here right now, except this is a bit cluttered. If you compare with Born fitness who, just like Gary Vaynerchuk, is using a video here Now, people who go to born fitness dot com is going to Baskin for coaching within fitness. They're going to come in and have dietary questions and training questions. Look what they have, reading their answers to your fitness and nutrition questions and then a video. This is genius, because that is the first thing they're visitors are going to want to know about when they enter this website. So they're clearly done the research and they know what they want in their offering it right away. So clever. So if I click on this video, there's an embedded video in here. There's gonna introduce what they're all about. Super clever scrolling down. They're also trying to build an email list expert ass into your faith in nutrition questions delivered once per week. This is a newsletter. So if this is interesting to me, I submit and they're building their email list once again, they're using the social proof as something that we're gonna have to use as well. Now me and just But we haven't been in the newspaper, but we do have students and students who have given us beautiful reviews that we can use as social proof. We always have to work with what we have right scrolling down. There is a further introduction they're linking to their blawg and hear some further social proof. So it's such a simple and clean website, and I really, really appreciate that here. Now, once again, they're also using a start here button, except that it says new here. So if I click here, I'm going to be taken into an introduction. What they're all about, right? And this is just so clever to build a relationship. So if you are new to their website, you don't have to panic. Because first of all, there's a big video that explains everything. Secondly, we have a new here, but, um, and as if that wasn't enough, we even have an about page. So if I go ahead and check out my notes, this is what I've learned so far. We really need social proof. I mean, all of them are using social proof to one degree or another. You're not gonna build a nice looking website. Were trustworthy website without this social proof, we want a direct introduction. Now, in order to really get to know our visitors and customers, we're going to have to do some experimenting and then look at our analytics. Remember, we installed analytics because then we can see what are visitors. Actually are watching and enjoying. But for now we're gonna do a direct introduction off herself what we're all about, and then gently guide them into a start here. Where's Pat? Flynn? Had a learn more button. I love that. And it's a beautiful above fold way to introduce a new visitor and make sure that they are not overwhelmed. Trust me when people go to a website and leave, that's called a bounds. And every time someone bounces, you get a worst search engine optimization that decreases your S E O. So we never want anyone to bounce. So we have this start here, Page. That is something that I'm gonna go ahead and take care off right away. And also, when it comes to our core section, I'm going to be introducing what the courses are all about in Ron. Simple, beautiful sentence. Now that's an art. But that is so important to keep your attention spotting, get directly to the point. And then I'm gonna use simple images to show the courses with a price just like path Flynn did in such a beautiful way. Now there is one more thing that is really worth exploring in here. and that is that some of these websites, if we go back to Pat Flynn, for example, he has a page that's called Resource is now Resource is is a really, really clever page to have because it's showing us The resource is that he is using himself , for example, to host his using Blue Host is using lead patient converted for other purposes using Demio , etcetera, etcetera. And all of these are links. They are affiliate links. In other words, if I click on this one and I buy something from there, he's gonna get a commission. I'm gonna talk more about affiliate links in a little bit. But because he's using tick stuff such as Blue Host and talking about doing digital marketing and using these kind of services, he is able to get affiliate links and make money from that. And that is something that applies perfectly for me and Jesper, because we're also hosting a website, right? We're using Blue Host. We could be affiliate marketing Blue host, and we're using many features to create or courses that we could be affiliate Marketing. In a resource is page things that are helping Austin that can help other people to trace in beautiful win win situation. So what I'm gonna do is know that asked. Well, I'm gonna jump here, and I'm going to write Page Resource is there we go. So I'm gonna go to the website right now and just get those things started. I'm gonna go to Robin and Jesper and go to back and off our websites. So what I'm going to do is that I am going to go to pages here and directly go to add a new and we're gonna call. This resource is right. And then I'm gonna click on Publish and published, and then I'm gonna go back to all pages and down here where it says home, I'm gonna click on quick edits, and I'm going to change this title to start here, right? This is all in preparation for when we're gonna design everything with l. A mentor and I'm going to follow suit the other successful people to show them what we're all about and then take them on a journey towards who we are, what we're doing, what we're offering building that relationship, in the meantime, is going to serve us much more than a home page in this case, and then I'm going to click on updates. And now I'm gonna go down to appearance, go to menus, and then I'm gonna click on foot to here and change to top main menu and click on Select. And I'm gonna go to the left here, and I'm going to find the resource. Is there this? I'm going to select it and click to add to menu, and then I'm just gonna move it so that it comes after blog's. So contact is the last one, and I'm gonna click on save menu. There we go. Perfect. So let's go to the upper left corner here where it says in visit site and open this in a new tab. So we have done a couple of changes. We have transformed our home picture start here and that we've also added a resource page. Now the started doesn't really guide anyone yet, and the resource page is empty. But guys, we did our research with Suker notes. Now I know what to do to follow suit off other people who are successful in this field. So guys for you remember to check out people who are doing the same thing as you, your competitors. Now, if you're doing a website for a restaurant, clearly you need to look at all the restaurants. What are visitors who are look going to a restaurant website are going to be expecting? Most likely, it's the menu, so keeping the menu hide itself and very visible that is going to be profitable for you. Great job, guys. This is how you do your research that we can design our website. Let's move on to the next lecture. 48. Home Page: So let's talk about the homepage and go more in depth about this page. Now the homepage is very important. We know that already, and it's also the first page that your visitors are likely to visit. So the home page has two things going for it. Number one. It creates the first impression, and number two, it is generally the most visited site. So it's a very important page to keep in mind and make sure that this is a really good experience for your visitors. It's a make it or break it. Deal not worth noticing is that not everyone is going to come through your home page, but it's very likely that the majority will, because of the search engines they might end up in different places. Anyhow. Let's go in depth about this wonderful and also important page. The number one question that we need to ask yourself is, Do we want to keep it in the menu or not? Now let's have a look Now. You probably remember that in the previous lecture, we changed our home page and called it the start here page that does that mean that we don't want a homepage It just means that we don't want it in the menu. And there's a good reason for that because if I click away on, for example, blogged or any other patient, our website and I want to get back to the home page, there is a way to do that without the homepage. Here it is by clicking on our logo. So if I click on Robin and Jesper right here, this is gonna work. Asked about some for our home page making the menu peas here redundant. So what we're gonna do is that we're going to create a new home page later on. That's going to serve a different purpose than this patient we have right now. And we're gonna turn this into the start here page. And then once we created that home pitch, we're gonna go to settings reading and then change the home page from start here to that new homepage. But that's gonna be late when we get started in the next section with L. A mentor. So don't worry about that right now. Just to keep this in mind and know what we're doing and why we're doing it now. I have decided not to decide in the home patient the menu right here. And if we look at our other successful website, you're gonna notice that there usually isn't a home page because similarly, if I click on Gary Vaynerchuk here, this is gonna serve as the button to his homepage as well. Now, if you look at Tim Ferriss website, you're gonna notice that he actually has a home page button in his many here, but has also because there is nothing to click around here that drives us back to the home page. So if you have a logo like we have to work is the home page, I strongly recommend it. Do you remove the home page bottom and follow suit the same way that Pat Flynn Dusty you can click on Smart, passive income Cookie and Kate, you can click on her and similarly born of fitness. You can click on their logos while they all work. Asked the home page. Right. So that's the first step in making your homepage and website overall more professional and more clean. So let's go back now. The very first thing that you're going to want to do with your home page. This is Number one is to define its purpose, right? You're gonna want to know why you have that homepage and what you're gonna do with it. In other words, you need to know what your users like. So take me and Jesper, for example, we just created a homepage called Robin and jesper dot com. Right. You've been following along in the course. Now we have a YouTube channel where we have been traveling and doing blogging and stuff, and people are interested in our blogging and us. We also have a lot of followers and students on you to me where people are interested in our courses. So the question is, should we design our home page to be about us, like people like it on YouTube? Where should we have a home paste? It's gonna be more about our courses, which is what people like on you to me, Right? So depending on the use of preference, we're going to design our homepage after that. So how do we know what our users like? Well, so that is why we installed analytics guys. Right? So if we go to the back end off our website and we go down to insights down here, which is the Google Analytics. Plug in the we install and then we scroll down. We can see here the page views, decisions, bounce rate, everything new versus returning visitor. But even more interestingly, the top posts and pages. And as you can see, we have a vast majority going to home right now. And the interesting thing here is gonna be important. Once we start growing, our website is to see where our people ending up right, which are the post people are reading. Where are people clicking? Is there a lot of people going to the about Page? Is the majority reading our articles or do they head straight into the courses page? Now, if we, for example, see that everyone or the vast majority are going to courses, that we are going to put courses on our home page because that is gonna be the main purpose for the visitors who come to our website. Now we want to make the user experience as greatest possible for visitors. So we need to know, why are they visiting our side and make sure that we serve their purpose and need straight away from the very beginning. Okay? And if you don't have the analytical data like we don't have right now, this is way too early. And a lot of these visits are ourselves or similar friends or visiting. Then you need to think, What am I doing right now? What am I serving my visitors on other sites, for example, on you, to me, we're having our courses. So we know that we have a lot of students from you to me, and we have a lot of viewers on YouTube. So what we're gonna want to do with our home page is making introduction about ourselves and then guide them into the learn more or start here button from the beginning because we're not quite sure what people are going to be interested in. So we're going to want to send them further down the line of who we are and what you can do on the website. Then they can decide for themselves and asked. This page grows more and more. That is when we're going to start seeing water. People preferring what are people most interested in? And we're gonna decide our home page after that. So this is super important to keep in mind about your home page. Now, another super important thing about the homepage is that less it's more. It's an old saying, and when it comes to the signs and website, it is so true and the best way that I can show you exactly what I mean is by providing you a couple of good examples. So check these out now. Here we are at Airbnb dot com and Airbnb themselves. They know why people are coming to their website. They want to host their rental space or they want to rent someone else's place. Right? So look at this home page. This is absolutely beautiful in here. You can go ahead and start searching for somewhere to rent between your dates. It's super simple to do. It gets straight to the point. And if you want to host well, look up here. You can host a home or host on experience. There's any help. If you would need that, you can sign up. You can log in is extremely clean, very simple, but so effective because this covers everything that Airbnb is about and this is called above the fold. Information because if we scroll down is gonna be much more things going on. For example, they're introducing something called Airbnb Plus so we can click here and start exploring what that is all about. Similarly, we can go into homes, experience restaurants. They have some stuff recommended for me, etcetera. And this is all great if you want a final people to different parts of your website. But this is where the money is that this is the beautiful thing because discovers everything as to why people are coming to their websites so clean, less is definitely more. Now look at this, for example. Now this website is absolutely dreadful. I mean, my blood pressure is increasing and my heart rate is going up just by looking at this, it's I don't even know where to start. So this I believe it's a buy and sell page, but they have hidden the also needed search indexing up here, right? It's so hidden. And there's one million things going on. And I mean, my monkey brain is just going okay, Where to start, what to do? What am I doing? Where do I What is this? Heavily confusing and hear more is definitely definitely lists. So what we want to do is go for a clean design. Less is more, more. It's less okay, this beautiful simple, this extremely confusing. So once we have defined the purpose of our home page and we have designed that so that less is more, it's very clean. Get straight to the point as to why people are visiting your website. You're gonna have very happy visitors with low bounce rates. Remember, a bounce rate is when a person goes to your website and then leaves wanna have as low off a bounce rate as possible. Now with any home page, it serves two main purposes. Number one to deliver content. Have a look at these. For example, if we look at Tim Ferriss website, we can see that he gets straight on with the minute you enter his home pitch. Right Here he goes and he serves you his podcast right here. He serves you his blood content. And if you scroll down, there is just more of that. There's more pub costing. There's more blood content. He knows why you're here, right? What he does is that he writes blood content. He does podcasting. And of course, he has his newsletter, which is prompting you to sign up. But he knows why you are at his website and he serves you that right away. This is more blogging website than anything. And similarly, Cookie and Kate is doing the very same thing here. Now, if you're going to cooking Kate for recipes, which is the absolutely biggest chance as to why you're here now that the second you coming to this website you are served with recipes you scroll down, there's gonna be more recipe hair, 20 simple vegetarian dinners in one blood post. So she knows why you're visiting her side. And she is giving you what you want to have right away. And this is really clever and that it's one off. The main purpose is off having a home page that is to deliver the content. Now the second thing is to navigate to a content page, right? So if we have a look at Pat Flynn, for example, we can see that above the fold right here. But he's doing is that he's introducing himself, and then he has thes learn more button, which is his start here. But um if I click on learn more, he is guiding me into more content. Now, if I scroll down here, this is all content now he's already got me. I'm reading his blawg post and then he's gonna send me into a video. So I'm building a relationship with him with his website and its content. And eventually chances are I might be listening to this podcast and maybe I'm even buying his book of his course or whatever it might be. But the main thing is, if we go back to his home page, you're going to see that he is sending me over to his content page, which is the second way to use a home page four. And similarly, if I go to Gary Vaynerchuk, we can see that the first thing I'm getting here is content delivered to me. So this is such a great thing to do. If there are multiple things on your website, right? You need to understand the purpose off your website and this purpose and you're off course your visitors purpose off your website, which is your purpose off The website is going to change over time as you grow more data. You grow more with your analytics, but you need to start somewhere. You need to go into your mind and think, What am I doing at this moment? If you're at a clean slate, you got pretty free hands. But if you have some business on this side, what am I doing at this moment? What is it that my visitors wants? And if you don't have anything, what is it that I'm offering and that my visitors are going to want straight away? Okay, because a home pish can be in news. It can annoy people if the navigation is too harsh or if it's too hard to find what they want. They just want to go straight to the goods to the money, right? If you're interested in a smart, passive income, well, I want to know what it is and how it works. And I get to learn all of that in here. This guy's a genius, and then he has multiple offerings. You can go read more. His blawg, his book, his course, etcetera. So, guys, if we have a look once again for a quick run through at the home page, number one decide if it should be on the menu or not. In most cases, I'm gonna recommend against it because you will already have that bottom number to define its purpose. This is so important. If you have data already, use that data. If you have a business, understand and use that business as a tool to understand who your visitors are and then used that experience to build your home page. Three less is more. Keep it clean to sign no one thing your visitors or assume one thing your visitors were gonna want and then build your home fish according to that, and then decide am I gonna deliver content right away? Or will I navigate them to a content page, depending on if you have multiple things to offer? If they need an introduction, or if you can go straight to the money like, for example, a blogger dust like Tim Frick or Kate Or like Airbnb, would you just want to search for the things or you can't navigate the content page like Pat flee and dust because you have more to introduce So, guys, this is more in depth about the homepage and know that can be a lot of information in here , but keep this simple one thing that your visitors are in your website for and to sign your home page for that. If you have any questions, we will be in the Q and A just go there and ask us, Let's move on to the next lecture. 49. Start Here Page: Okay, guys, let's talk about the start here, Page. Now, we've seen several examples off other professional people using the start here page and how they're using it. Right. So let's go through more in depth. What it is what you're gonna use it for end, then a three step method to creating our own great start here page. Now, the first thing is, what is the purpose off a start here, page. And I would say that the purpose of the start here page is to define what your website is about, what you have to offer and to avoid any form of confusion which is gonna lead to bouncing. Right. So balancing is basically when someone goes to your website and then leaves pretty much immediately. And when that happens, the search engine doesn't like your website as much. You don't. Frank is high, and then you don't get as many visitors. So let's have a look at how some of the professionals we've been looking at tackle this problem. Now again, Pat Flynn does this so well because if you have a first glance at his website, there are so many things going on. I mean, there's affiliate marketing. There's better blogging, email, marketing, podcasting, power or podcasting speaking Resource is as pat podcast blood. I mean, let's say that I'm a first time visitor here. There's too many things going on. I don't know where to start. I don't know what to do. And by the way, this website, it's called smart passive income dot com. Why is there so many other things going on? So he has made things very clear Here, let me help you build a passive income driven online business is religion about himself, what he's doing and then we go to the Learn more, which is the same Mr Start here page, right? So if we go down, he's gonna make clear let's explore what passive income is all about. So he's making very clear what passive income is, what he has to offer and what he's going to be doing right. And here he has some social proof what he has done since 2000 and eight, and this is such a clever way to go straight to the point, being very clear with what is doing on avoiding any form of confusion that I had to wonder where to start what to do. He's gonna break everything down in this long, long start here, page offering everything he has to offer. And we're gonna break this page down one by one or bit by bit in just a second. So we want to avoid any confusion and therefore avoid any bouncing. Okay, Now, before we move on talking about start here, page. There is a very common question that a lot of people have that I want to clarify right now . And that is the about US page. Now, some people think that the start here page is a substitute for the about us or about me Page. But I would argue that it is not now the about us or about me. Page is gonna be about you, your business. What you're doing This start here. Page is gonna have a lot more offerings to what you're about and also how you can help them . As I'm gonna show with these three steps in just a second. But the main part two remembers. If you want to, you can substitute your about us for it started, but I don't recommend it. It's not an effective start here. Page So, guys, let's go through the three steps in order to make a really great start here page. So Step one is to make a clear statement off what you're all about, right? You want to make very clear from the beginning what your website is about and what do you have to offer them? And this is to avoid any form of confusion. Now, there are two ways of doing that. One. You could just say straight off what you have to offer, what you will be doing on this website or two. You could actually be sympathizing with your visitor sharing a common problem that you might have with your visitors. Right? So, for example, if you're selling a product to keep flowers alive, you might be sharing their sympathy off. You always buy this pretty pretty flowers, but they keep dying. But you have a product to solve that, right? Or you could go the other route and just be very straight up with what you're offering. I'm gonna help you create a passive income. Sort of like Pat Flynn is doing so. These air two different voice but both ways makes a clear statement off what you're all about on your website. Now let's have a look at how Pat does this. So going back here to his start here page, he has let's explore what passive income is all about, right? And this is gonna be the text of makes everything clear. He says I'm path fully and I'm here to help you make more money, saved more time and help more people to do you imagine when a new business or even a new full time Mrs could do for you. That's what I'm here to help you achieve. Now this is really clever because he has the keyword passive income he's talking about. Let's explore what a passive income is and basically most likely the reason why we're even here is because we search for passive income that he's clarifying. And I'm gonna help you make more money, saved more time and help more people to. That is basically what a passive income is all about summarized and then also adding in the help more people to. So he's adding in this extra. But I don't want to be lazy because I have a passive income always gonna show me how I can help other people. It's a very clever way of connecting with your audience and being very clear what you're all about and what you will be offering. Now let's move on to step number two, which is to give them your best content. In other words, you don't just want to give them your latest material. You want to give them the content that has stood the test of time, so called every green content. You want to give them really good material that you have read and podcasters you have had, maybe offers for a product that really stands out from the rest, etcetera. There's gonna be as valid now asked three years from now. So what I mean with Daddy's that you want to give them something that really has an impact ? Let me show you what I mean. So if we check out Gary Vaynerchuk, for example, we aren't his first time here. Page, what is basically his start here? Page now scrolling down he has is introducing himself here, but what's even more interesting is that he is offering his best content right away. Now, notice. This one is a key note from 2000 and 15. So this is valid then and now and probably three years from now, because this is one of those legacy contents. One of those things that's going to stand the test of time because the information is so valuable. Now, if we scroll down and we look at that, what should you read first? Now noticed the dates of many of these articles. These aren't at random. He has placed them here because these are evergreen content, right? These are things that are so valuable that they're gonna have an impact on their visitors. You always want to give them your best stuff in the beginning. Make that great impression. This is from 2017. This is more recent. It's also more Reason 2017 17 17 and noticed that none off these are trending. My content is a mindset how to taste wine, how to tell a story on social media, my life and legacy. These are all things is gonna be is valid now as three years from now. Super important guys, give them your best stuff. So number one statement number two giving them your best stuff. If we go back to Pat, you're gonna notice that if we scroll down after he has been giving you this content about what it's all about having this long introduction and hooking you, he's gonna do the same thing. Look here, how to make a passive income is going to start bringing you his best stuff, and it's gonna bring his best podcast what to expect. And I can tell you, because I've been following it for a while that these have been standing over quite a few years and scrolling down. You're going to see that he's gonna show you his offers here as well how to build your brand sign up for free, a website with a block, and then he's gonna go and show you the material that he's using. He's giving you things, giving and giving and giving. And it's so important to build that relationship and make this warm feeling for the visitor because you want them to stay. You want them to devour your things, get a great feeling and devour more things. So let's move on to step number three, which is to turn them into a subscriber. In other words, you want to build that email list now We've already spoken about the email, often after plug in section. So by now you should be having your email open and started building your e mail list. Right? And this is so important, because if we look at this step number one, we're very clear about who we are and what we're doing. And chances are your visitor is going to be connecting with this because they ended up on your website for searching for something and relevance. Step number two you want to give them your best content is going to give them a nice, warm feeling is gonna make them all happy and off course, make them hungry form. Or that's what it's all about. Number three. You're gonna turn them into a subscriber by offering more. But turning them into subscriber also means creating a win win situation doesn't have to be just signed up for my newsletter, which chances are they're gonna enjoy if they've enjoyed your stuff so far. But it can also be clean care for my pdf on how to be successful in digital marketing or click here, for example, for a 30% discount on this product of 15% discount on your first by it could be anything that actually gives them something. And then it kind of goes back and you combine step two and three, you turn them into a subscriber while also giving them something at the same time. Now, let's have a look at Gary. Now, you're gonna notice that if I scroll down here, he has opted to have hiss often. He subscribed boats on on his footer. Remember? This is the footer. So I when I scroll to the end of the page, I'll be able to subscribe to him if I want and join. His email is now. If we look at Pat, you're going to notice that if I scroll down, he's gonna use a similar tactic. We have this subscribe now, rightist. We can join in the very same way also putting it in the food, er, But even before that, he's offering you something. My free exclusive email content. Right now, this is just getting on his email list, but he makes it sound like you're gonna get so much more when you do. And of course, this stuff is really great. I mean, he just offered me this huge page with free material, content, explanations, everything. I'm grateful. I want more. Okay, click here to get started. I'm going to do that. And there we go. I'm gonna go ahead and sign up. So on the right here also lets me know what I'm going to be getting from there. Which is free stuff, For example, his e book. Remember? You want to give them something? It could be a discount. It could be a e Books on formula Som. Pdf Could be anything really content Taylor for you. Over time, I'll get to learn more about you and deliver content that actually matters, which is interesting because he has this way of building. His email is, but that is beyond the scope off this course. But this is something that he's offering. So it's very clever to make sure that he includes it here and then no high, just real content. That's meant to make a difference. So he's really clever in his approach to this in that no one wants to give away their email , right, Because that's quite sensitive stuff. Probably your inbox is quite over field already with stuff that you're not reading. He knows this. Every marketer and every successful website owner knows there's but you still want to build your email list. So make sure that either one you have given us so much great content in the beginning that they just want more or to you make sure that you offer them something with this email open when they're signing up. Okay, that's how you're gonna grab their email and build that email list. So, guys, to summarize the start here page, we want to avoid any form of confusion. So we're gonna avoid the bouncing meaning. We don't want people to enter and leave. We want people to enter and stay. It is not done about a substitute. It can be, but I don't recommend it. I don't think that that is effective. Three steps to making an effective start here, Page one. Make a clear statement what you're all about the super clear. Either connect with them their problem or to just say straight out what you're doing, what you're going to be offering. Step number two. Give them your best content. The evergreen stuff is gonna be as valid today. Acid is three years from now. And step three turned them into a subscriber. Make sure that it is worthwhile for them to give up their email address to get on your email list, either by some sort of offer. Like we saw Pat Flynn, he had the book. He had a tailored content, etcetera, or by giving them so much free stuff beforehand, right? You want to give them so much great content. Maybe a couple of offerings like he had a branding course going on there. So they just want more. And your email list will be that way to get more great guys. Once again, if you have any questions, will be in the Q and A. Let's move on to the next lecture. 50. Resources Page: So let's talk about the resource is page now. The first thing you're going to want to ask yourself is, Am I going to want a resource page? Now? If you're going to be doing any blogging and writing any article on your subject, chances are that you're using some sort of resource is to make that happen. And using some sort of resource is within your niche within your genre off what you're doing. But for example, if you're doing something like a website for a restaurant, you might not have the same. Used off. A resource is Paige, because the number one use offer resource is page is, in the end, to provide value for your visitors. Right there needs to be something in there for them to be value that's gonna help them and propel them forward. Everyone who comes to your website, it's basically looking for a solution you want. This resource is page to be your quick guide to different types of solutions that you are using and that you can recommend now one of the greatest things with a resource is patient . Besides providing value and deepening the relationship with your customers, is that you can start doing something that's called affiliate marketing, and we're gonna talk more about affiliate marketing in the next lecture. But basically it allows you to recommend some sort of product or service, and because you're recommending it, you get a commission because you are in their affiliate program, right, they get a sale, you get a commission and the buyer gets a solution. It's a win win win situation. That's where affiliate marketing is so great. And a resource is Page is the perfect place to be putting out affiliate links. Now when it comes to affiliate marketing, as you're gonna notice when we start looking through a couple of great examples, it's all about keeping it very simple. So, for example, if you are doing a website about blogging or about hosting websites, for example, and you're going to be offering a link to a host, in your resource is Page. You don't want to offer a list off five different host all being affiliate links, right? You want to make it easy for your visitors and offer one single host so that they know that this is the one I'm using, or this is the one that I'm recommending, because off whatever the reason may be is for beginners. Maybe the East is tool to use whatever it might be, but you just want to give them one option to make it easier for them. They have a problem there here, looking for a solution. Give them the solution, not multiple options. Unless off course, there is a paid in a free version, for example, which also brings me to my next point, which is also important about being able to offer freebies. Now, if you have any form of freebies, maybe it's form your email. Often you're offering a pdf formula. Maybe have reading an e book that you're offering. Maybe it's some sort of discount, whatever it might be. Or it could even just be links to, for example, can va or some research that you're using the dust and cost you anything, and that's not an affiliate link. Use those. In the end, everything comes down to the first point, which is providing value to make it easier and better for your customers and deepen that relationship. So remember, when you're creating your resource is Paige choose carefully what to decide to put in their choose carefully watered is that you are offering now it doesn't matter what it is that you're doing. Basically, you will probably be using some sort of tools. And resource is sometimes the resource is page is called a tools page as well. Now, for example, if you are escaped border, you might want to be recommending some former grift, eight different brands of skateboards. Maybe you're even recommending different merged that goes in with the typical skateboarding outfit. If you're doing a website, you're gonna want to recommend maybe a host. Maybe a place to buy a domain name may be different plug ins. That could be, Or maybe not his premium. Now, if you're doing a makeup website, you could recommend different brands of makeup. I mean, the list is endless. If you are a big blogger or if you are a big name or your business is a big name using certain tools, then people want to know what it is that you are using and why. So provide them with that help, which is off a lot of value to them and, if possible, give them affiliate lings, and suddenly you have created a win win situation and chances are this could be one of the most profitable pages on your website is going to drive revenue if done right again. We're gonna talk more about affiliate marketing in the next lecture. But first, let's look through a couple of really successful resource is pays really well done. Resource is page off people doing different things. OK, now the 1st 1 is the true and tried pat flee. And here's an example in many things we've gone through because he does this so incredibly well. And, of course, here we have his resource is Page. So let's go through and see what it is that he's offering. We already know that this website is called smart passive income, and it's all about creating a passive income. So the question is, what kind of tools would he be offering in order to create the passive income? Now, First is making an introduction in here, which is really clever, and in this introduction he's going to be talking about that in order to make a passive income, you need a website somewhere to start somewhere to grow, you know, visitors to start selling things, whatever it is that you're doing? You're gonna want a website for it. And in order to have a website, you need a host. And guess what? Here we have it. He is offering Blue Host as the host that he's using himself because they are so simple. This is why we're using them as well. And the beautiful thing is that this isn't a feel it ling. So this is gonna solve someone's problem. Who wants to walk in the same footsteps as him, creating a passive income. And to do that, they need a website and then they need a host and here we have it. So a win win situation now scrolling down. We have a lot of things going on, like lead pages convert kid de meal etcetera. And he has also added up things in different Jonah's. For example, this is for building your blog's website or course, and he's offering different things in here now this for starting your email marketing analyst building. And we have the different things in here is we're starting your pub cost etcetera, and this is really clever because remember, he has a lot of things going on on his website so there's going to be a lot of people having different goals. So this is why he is dividing them up in different categories. These are the resource and tools that I'm using for this categories. When I started podcast, I used these. When I started website, I used these A really clever way off. Using the resource is Page, and of course he started out this an affiliate marketing. And that is where he drove the majority off his revenue, at least back in the years when I was watching him. I have no idea what he's driving revenue from today, but affiliate marketing can be really profitable if done right and off course, very valuable for his visitors. The main point. And here's another website pro blogger. Now there's no secret about this website is about. It's about blogging and helping people to belong. You're gonna notice that he as well has a resource is Page. So let's check out what he's offering because he is primarily into offering blogging advice , right? But in order to block, you're gonna need a platform, and in order to have a platform you're gonna need hosting, So this is what's so great. So he's helping so many people to get started here. These are the resource and you're gonna need if you want to get started with blogging, and then he's going in depth with the blogged. This sign themes tool for graphic design tool for services for email, marketing, etcetera. Social media Management is really, really clever, and something we're gonna talk about in next lecture as well is going to be the disclaimer off the affiliate links. But there's nothing wrong with putting out affiliate links because it's not gonna cost your visitors anything. And as long as you make that clear, that's not gonna be a problem. Remember, the main point off the resource is Page is to help your visitors. It just so happens that a lot of the links you put in here to guide people to the resource is can be made into affiliate links, and you could make some revenue from it. So here's yet another website in a completely different genre. This is engineering dot com, and this is a website for engineers. Now, the first thing I'm not really a big fan off the whole unpaid chair, the kind of look of this. I think it's quite you know, I think it's a little bit confusing. It could really use a start here page. But anyhow, they have a resource is Page. And the thing that they're doing different here is that here that they are offering a lot of their own material. You're gonna notice that they have webinars e books and my papers, tutorials, audio and videos. And this comes back to the whole thing about freebies. Now, if I go into tutorials in here, for example, you're gonna notice that they have a lot of different tutorials on things that I have no idea what they even are. But these are free tutorials. Now, if I click on this one, I'm gonna get a complete tutorial on exploring grading techniques, which I don't know what it is, but it is a tutorial, and it's completely free. And it is in the resource is so me as a visitor's. I'm really glad over this, right, because if I'm into engineering and I need to solve this problem, here is my solution. Whether that's an affiliate link or not, this is my solution. It's not gonna be any different for me. And here we have yet another page. This is makeup Savage, that CEO that UK and this is kind of a mix website. It's about giving blogging tips. It's about beauty, and it's about e bay finds. Now check this out. This is so clever. If we go to the resource is page in here, you're gonna notice that this person is able to put in ah, lot off different resource is right, because in order to start blogging like we've seen before, you're gonna need a platform. You're gonna need a host, you're gonna need a domain name and you can put out affiliate links for all off this. So again, I know I'm nagging about this, but you get to help your visitors and you get to drive revenue while doing it. It's such a perfect win win situation. Now if we look down something that she does a little bit differently is that she's explaining type of cameras. She's using the other essentials like an SD card shutter release, acrylic sheets, everything. And some of these are going to be affiliate link. So if I click on their Nikon d 3300 for example, which is a camera. We're going to see that it's gonna take us to a Amazon Web page, right? And this because we can see that this is refering here is without a single doubt on affiliate link. So if I would make it purchase from this camera, she would definitely be earning a commission. And I would have my problem sold by going to her. Resource is Paige. So guys to summarize about the resource is page number one about the research pace is always to provide value, right. So have a look at in your genre. If you want to use a resource page or not on your website, it always comes down to providing value for your visitors. And then we're gonna go through in the next lecture about affiliate marketing. How you can use that If that is available to you, chances are it is. And then remember, keep it simple. You want to give them one option? What kind of brand is that you're using and why? I recommend that what kind of hosting or using and why recommend that keep it simple and straight to the point There, there with a problem, and they just want a solution. Offer freebies if you have it. Free links, No problem. Free programs, No problem. You have a pdf that you're giving out. Then give it for free. In the resource is Paige, And finally choose carefully. Don't just put a lot of stuff and I don't stuff that place with a bunch of links. That's not gonna help them. Put your best material in here. Your very, very best tools that either you use yourself you can deeply recommend, right? Your reputation is on the line here as well, So don't recommend them. Anything you wouldn't use yourself. Awesome guys. Now we know what a resource is paged, even though we knew that already. But now we know more in depth what it is and how to use it properly. Later on, we're gonna design our resource is page with L a mentor. Let's move on to the next lecture and start talking about affiliate marketing. See you there 51. Affiliate Marketing: Okay, guys, let's talk about affiliate marketing. What it is, how to use it. Best practices, the legal matter, etcetera, the whole shebang. Okay, so first off, what is affiliate marketing, And why should you care? Well, basically affiliate marketing it is when you get a commission for referrals. And if you've been following along from the previous lecture, you'll know just how many referrals you're gonna be able to get through properly. Utilising a resource is page right? People are gonna have problems you're gonna offer the solution through your resource is page those air gonna be referrals. And for each refer when they buy or just click the link, you are gonna get a commission for that right, which creates a win win win situation. The visitor gets their problem solved, you get revenue. And of course, the company that you are feeling linking for they get a sale win win win. Now a commission could be anything from basically $1.50 all the way to thousands off dollars. Of course, depending on if you're selling a dog collar or a TV or a car basically depends completely on what you are. Affiliate marketing and this works out by you signing up for an affiliate marketing program , which is gonna give you a unique and traceable link. This link you're gonna use on your resource is pages maybe sometimes in your block post or if allowed, you could use it. Any newsletters as well, Which is gonna make sure that whenever people buy from having clicked on your link, you get the commission and also you get to trace to see how many have clicked and how many have actually bought from the links that I have linked. Okay, so the bigger your website, the more referrals you're gonna have them or commission you're gonna get from this. This can be a huge business opportunity, depending off course. On your knees, your genre, your visitors, etcetera, etcetera. So once you have your unique trackable link and a visitor clicks on that link, they're going to get something called a 60 day cookie period. Now, this could be shorter. This could be 30 or 15 days or longer. It could be 90 days, but generally it's gonna be around 60 days. And if you remember what cookies are, that's when you place a bit of information saved on the person's computer. So basically, if we have an affiliate link to a product on Amazon, for example, that visitor clicks on the Amazon link and then within 60 days they buy something from Amazon. It doesn't even have to be that product. They buy anything from Amazon. You are going to get a commission from that. There are a lot of crazy stores about this. Some people, you know giving out the field is linked to Children's toys for just a couple of dollars. And that person ended up buying a Rolex for $20,000 they got a huge commission. Of course, these are the exceptions, not the rules, but it does happen. But it's also worth knowing that within the 60 days, if they should click on someone else's affiliate link, yours will be erased and their affiliate link will be the latest. Okay, now, the next thing that I want you to know in this is super important is toe. Always read the terms off service for whoever you are. Affiliate link. Getting four. Now there are big platforms, is gonna have a bunch of different programs like acute and marketing like Click Bank etcetera. But then there's also gonna beat science when you want to go specific for a company like Blue Host, like we saw previously. Already, a lot of people are a feeling lingering for Blue Host because it's so effective. And I'm gonna show you also how much commission you get from that and how it works. But the important part about reading the terms and service is that sometimes you are allowed to put affiliate links in your newsletter in your email marketing. And if you can do that and you have an email list of, say, 10,000 people, well, chances are there's gonna be money in the bank quite easily for you. But not all companies are going to allow you to affiliate market in that way. Also, sometimes you can even do ads with affiliate links. But again, not all companies were gonna allow that. Always, always read the terms of service, also known as a T. O. S. Okay. And my final tip for you is to be transparent. Guys, this is so, so, so important. You always always want to be open about the fact that you are using affiliate links and the reason is simple. The reason that you're even linking to this place that you're linking two is to bring the customer value and you need to be very open about You're gonna get a commission for this, But it's not gonna be from the visitor is gonna be from the retailer is gonna pay you a commission, right? So always be open and make sure that you have the open communication with the visitor. You tell them exactly what you're doing and why you are doing it so they don't feel misused by you. And they don't feel like there's in a deception going on because remember, building relationships and openness with your visitors. That's everything you're doing. This resource is paid for your blog's poster newsletters, etcetera to bring value. And if you're gonna be going behind their back, that is not bringing value is actually the reverse. You're gonna be deteriorating. Those relationships that said, there are no lost with you having to be transparent. Back in the days, a lot of people did affiliate marketing, and they did it without actually saying that they were the Boston norm. Lately, things have changed, and honestly, those people who are being open about it like Pat Fling, for example. They're doing much, much better because of it. It's a very effective way and also again builds trust with your visitors all about bringing value, building that relationship. So in the resource that I have linked you to a bunch of big platform that has so many different programs and things that you can affiliate market for, remember, don't put a bunch of random things. It needs to connect with your website with the services you're doing with the product that you're selling etcetera but used those platforms or go to a specific company and become affiliated. I'm gonna show you how this works. So follow along here. So, for example, I'm a click bank right now, one of the many affiliate platform. So let's say that I am doing a website about dog training, right? Maybe I'm selling dog training products like whistles and collars. Or maybe I'm just blogging about it. In either case, I want to affiliate, market a certain product and maybe even have a product in mind. But I'm gonna search for dog training in here. Then I'm gonna hit search, and here I'm going to get a bunch off different products. Now this one is telling me the average amount off money that you'll be earning per sales. This might be quite interesting. So the way this works is first I can click on this website so I can see what it is that I actually will be advertising what the website looks like that I'm gonna be sending them to and also what the product is that they will be selling. So I might want to scroll through this water is to check out the videos, read about it etcetera. OK, this looks really good. I conjoined with this, maybe even want to try this out yourself. Remember, you have to put trust in whatever it is that your affiliate marketing for So you don't want to go with random, just grab something affiliate marketed. No, never do it like that. Always trust the product. Your reputation is on the line. But for this example, let's say that you had a lot of trust in this. You want to market this, but you're going to go ahead and do is click on promote. And of course, you're gonna need an account in here. But As you can see, you're going to get some information in here. You're gonna get a 15% commission for every customer you refer to this product, which usually means who buys this product. And then you need to log in. You're gonna get your unique link. You're gonna link that somewhere, and then a cookie will be placed in their computer and you're all set for affiliate marketing. If they buy it, you get a commission. Okay, This is how it works. And because we know also that there is a 50% commission here and we can see that the average sale goes for $24. We know that this is gonna cost around $50 give and take a couple of more dollars because of taxes, but about $50 per sale. So this is how it works on these big platforms. Now, let's remove these ones. Another thing. I want to show you that we have been checking out before already. East Blue Host. Right. We've seen a lot of people who are feeling marketing for Blue Host. Generally, when you go to a company like this, like blue host or could be weeks, it could be. Basically anything could be Shopify, Any platform, anything you want. Affiliate market. You aren't usually not gonna find the affiliate link in the top. Generally what you have to do. It's scroll all the way to the bottom and usually one of these generally more boring links . You're gonna find something like this here. It says, affiliates, you're gonna go ahead and click there and then you have to sign up off course, create an affiliate account. Even though we have a blue host account, We don't have an affiliate accounts. We're gonna take a sign up. But for us, we have an old accounts are gonna click on log in. So in here will be able to see all of the stats. How much that we have earned from this date. How many clicks we have? How many sign ups we have? We get to see it in a pie chart. We get a lot of information how our affiliate marketing is doing now. Should I go ahead and click on links here, for example? You're going to see that here we have a bunch of different links. Now this is the track Yngling. Basically, if someone clicks on this. They're going to get the cookie placed on their computer. This is definitely it Link. Now it says free from scratch because that's an old website of we used to monitor and use. But we're not using that anymore. This is an old account. Had we signed up with this new it would say, blue house dot com forward slash track forward slash Robin and Jesper cases. This is because this is an old affiliate account. So the options that we have here is we could either use this link or we could be using banners. Remember, we've been using the short coast throughout this course already, so that is perfect. We know how to use them. But I'm gonna show you how to be using this a link. So all I would do is I would go ahead and copy this link. There we go. And then I would go to the dashboard in here. And this is where we get to have Yusof are pretty link because if we look at this link, it doesn't look too good. Look at this blue host of come forward slash track free from scratch. So instead, I'm just gonna go ahead and call this Robin and Jesper don't come forward, slash blue host. And then I click on create. And suddenly we have an affiliate link that's completely hidden with Robin and just don't come forward slash blue Host. It looks so much better again. We want to be open about this being in a feel it ling. But we still wanted to look good and trustworthy. Now it can be worthwhile to click on edit right here and make sure that it gets a better name than 403 forbidden. Let's call it, for example, Blue Host and then notes. This is for ourselves on Lee. We can check this out if we have any questions and I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to write Affiliate Link and then click on updates. Perfect. So if I open a new tab right now, when I go to Robin and jesper dot com forward slash blue host, I'm going to be directed straight to blue hose and it's going to be placed in the cookie in my computer. Right? And should I be the customer right now? And I would buy anything from a blue host right here. Then I would be getting a commission, and the commission here is quite kind. They offer you $65 per sale, which is quite amazing, to be honest. That's what so many people besides them being, in my opinion, simplest and best hosting platform. They are very, very kind with their affiliate marketing in their commission. Okay, so we have the link already. Know what we could do? For example, we could go into posts. And let's just use this post for us an example. But of course you want the link to make sense. Maybe you're doing a post about hosting or about how to get started with blogging, so we would have something written in here. The way to implement this system is through, and we strongly Rick men that you use Blue Host. Let's pretend that this was the text. All I would do is that I would select it like this, and I would click on this link right here, and then I would just write Robin and jesper dot com forward slash blue host. There we go. Spelling. It's not on point today. Hit, enter and suddenly guys, we are affiliate marketing. It's really that simple. We have hitting the links. That looks much better, much more trustworthy. It's an affiliate link. We know that if someone clicks on this, we can just go ahead and go to our dashboard in here. Scroll down and we can see how it is doing. And of course, we can click on our stats. We can see how much we're getting per sign up all of the information. How many uniquely in clicks would have etcetera is gonna be unique for each company that you sign up for. But this is how affiliate marketing works, okay? And similarly, if it's this easy to put it in a post, you know, already it's the same. It's so easy to put it on a page just well, in a resource is Page, which is what we will be creating with L. A mentor. Now the final thing I want to end this whip is remember, you need to be on the rights out of the law. You need to be along with GDP, are with the privacy policy, and you are installing cookies on someone else's platform. You need to be protected from all of the lost disclaiming etcetera. And look at this part. Links to other websites. Our servicemen contain links to third party websites or services that are not owned or controlled by. And here it should say, your company for us, Robin and Jesper, my company has no control and assumes no responsibility for the content private, suppose or practice any third party websites or services. This means that if there's anything going on or anything would go wrong or whatever happens , you have no liability. This removes our own liability, and thankfully, we can affiliate. Market in peace. Some people decide to do on extra page for affiliate marketing policies, but generally this is going to be good enough to protect you again. I'm not a lawyer. Don't take legal advice from me. But remember, guys, check through this. Make sure that it is on point. Make sure that it protects your affiliate marketing. Okay, so let's summarize. Affiliate marketing is when you get a Commission four referring visitors to a certain site . You're going to get a unique trackable affiliate link that you can put on your page, your post or s a banner. Wherever you decide to do that, there is gonna be a cookie installed on the visitor's computer. That's gonna be for a 60 day period, more or less. And if they buy something within that period, you are going to get a commission for that bite. Of course, how much you get is unique for every affiliate marketing website. You need to check that out beforehand. Always, always, always read the terms off service. Don't break in a lot and put it in the newsletter. Unless you're allowed to, don't do any ads on it unless you're allowed to and again be transparent. Put the disclaimer. Be open the Dieser affiliate links. You're going to get a commission if they buy from there, but the commission will not be from them. It will be from the retailer, And I also prefer to explain why, because it's a win win win situation that makes it so open. Just be transparent. Guys are some job guys following along this far. I'll see you in the next lecture. Remember, if you have questions will be in the Q and A seeing the next lecture 52. Commenting System: All right, guys. So in this lecture, you're going to be learning about the comments system on your WORDPRESS website, how they look, how you can configure them and how the entire system looks like. But before we go into comments, the first thing you want to ask yourself is, Do you? I want to allow comments on my website or not. Now, the reason why you might want to do that, speaking more specifically about your blog's side is gonna be to allow for more user engagement and allow for better S E O. Now, the more people can engage with your material with your website and allow for ping backs, we're gonna go through what that is in a bit, that better and the more your site is gonna perform and grow. But if you are writing about sensitive material or if you're doing tutorials, for example, you might want to disable comments. And if you want to disable comments, I'm gonna show you how to do that. And then you can skip this lecture. But if you want to learn more about comments, stick around, we're going to go through that. So let's get started now. If you want to disable comments on your website? All you need to do is go to the back end off your website, moved down to settings, click on discussion here, and then you get in here. Then we have this setting. This is allow people to post comments on new articles. All you're gonna do is on check it, go down, click on save changes, and then people will not be able to comment on your newly posted post and articles in tutorials, whatever they may be. But they are counted as post Now, if you already have posts out there, that means that you're gonna have to go into those posts and disabled the comments manually . And if you have thousands of posts, chances are you don't? Not yet. But if you have thousands of post, you can go ahead to the plug in section, download a plug in. That's called disable comments, and it's gonna help you disable all the comments at once writes, There's a plugging for everything. But if you want to learn more about comments and keep them on your website, which I generally really recommend, stick around and we're gonna go through how that works. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna check this again and let's have a look at how the comments look at our website right now. So if I go to the website in a private mo incognito mode, we can see that it looks something like this. Now I have posted a posed as a demo demo son, which is quite a clever name, if I may say and what's interesting with this is that the comment is awaiting moderation. So this is something in the settings that we can choose to if you won't allow the post up here right away, or if you want to allow them to be moderated before they show up. Now for anyone to post a comment, it's pretty straightforward. You feel in the comment. The name is required. The email is required. They can write in their website if they have one, and then if they check this, they will be added to your email list, right? Very straightforward. And we also have a avatar in here. Now I'm gonna go through a little bit on how all this works and how you can set up and optimize your commenting system. Okay, So if we go back to dissect things in here, the first thing you're gonna notice is the to the left. We have a comments section and all these three comments are written by me to show you a couple of different examples. So if I click in here, you're going to see that we have three different comments going on. We have the test testers own and Testa and then demo demo, some with their different comments being displayed. Now, Right now, what I need to do if I want to allow them is click on author, clickable caption. Go to approve and then click on. Apply right. Then these will all be replied. We can go ahead and make sure that the post appears instantly, and I'm gonna show you how that works in just a little bit. But what I want to show you here, that's interesting to note is here we have a picture off me and Jesper, right? And in here, there's a picture off me and my significant other. And in here there's no picture at all. And the reason for that is you're gonna notice this when people are posting comments on your website is because these are gravitate ours. Now. If you have a wordpress dot com account connected to your Gmail, for example, then this is going to show up because we're using Diet Police now at Gmail here. Then this is going to be showing up because we have used this. I can't ask. A Gravatt are now similarly for my own personal email address. I have also used a wordpress dot com website. Suit has his own Gravitt are I come, but with the other one demo demo, some amusing contact at Roman and jesper dot com, and we don't have any Gravitt are or anything connected to wordpress dot com. So what is a Gravatt are now? A gravity Are is something that you automatically sign up for if you go to wordpress dot com. But you can also sign up with it here. So you're gonna be using the same avatar on all different websites when you are writing in the comments, that is where the gravity or isn't. That is how you're going to see different people writing in your comments, having a certain picture, and you might even have one as well. So if you're wondering about that? This is where it comes from. Now going back in here, let's head back to the settings and go into discussion and look at the different thing we can optimize our comment system with. Now the first thing we have here is to attempt to notify any blocks linked from the article . Now, that means that if you are riding something in a post and you put in the link that to another article than that website, that article will be pinned. Meaning you may show up as a comment or simply the website may be notified that you have reading something in there that's called a back ling. And what can be good about this is that website is notified about you connecting to the Web site. And also the search engine is gonna say, Hey, there's someone linking to this website which is gonna allow that website to grow. So that's called back. Linking and back linking is something we're gonna talk more in depth about in the S e o section later on. Now, similarly, down here allowed link notification from other blog's. Those are called ping backs and track backs, and that is also linked building for us should someone linked to our site. Right? So we want to allow this to allow for unimproved S e O. This is very important. Once again, we're going to go through this more in depth in the S e o section of the course, and then we have have the allow people to post comments on new articles. Now, if we remove this one and then we have the allow people to post comments on new articles now notice It says these settings may be overridden for individual articles, and the way to do that is very simple. All you need to do is go to post and then go to that specific post that is in here. And then you go to discussion that is on the side here, and then you're gonna shake, allow comments so that it's completely check making sure that this post allows for comments . Similarly, if you want to make exceptions and not allow comments for starting ones, you can click this one away. And similarly four ping backs no ping backs. They're gonna show up in the comments section. I still recommend them for seo purposes, right? you're gonna click this one back and then we have further settings in here like the comment order must fill out the name and email, which is mandatory. We have uses must register and be logged into comment. That is not mandatory, and we don't have a subscription or a logging system in here. I don't recommend we use this that we have automatically close comments on articles older than 28 days. I recommend you put this one off because you want to allow people to comment on the articles you write, especially if you're planning on writing more timeless and evergreen pieces. Now, if you're riding a blogged about your life, for example, it might make more sense to keep this one on. But if you're doing articles for a program for a coaching service for lifestyle, whatever it might be, that information is not going to be out dating in 28 days. You may want to allow people to comment on those I recommend generally, that you allow people to comment, and then we have show common cookies often check box Now what this does if I check this one and I go down and click on save changes and then I go to the website in here and I updated . We're gonna have another box added in here looking like this. It's a save my name, email and website in this browser for the next time. I common now this is GDP. You're compliant. Also, because we have read in the privacy policy, we have the terms of conditions. But there's going to make it easier for visitors to comment on your website, which is great. And here we're getting their consent, which we need for the GDP are. So I strongly recommend that we keep this box checked. You really need to have the consent guys when you're saving information. If you haven't strongly recommend you go through the legal section off the course, it's a little bit heavy, but it's also important. And then we have enabled thread that nested comments, and that means that if people are replying to each other, how far down will you allow them to go? And five levels deep is the general. That is the default mode. I generally like to leave it on like this usually doesn't make a big difference anyhow, because people don't tend to go deeper than five levels in my experience, off course, depending on this subject and what you're doing about. And then we have break comments into pages with 20 top level Commons per page. This is highly personal. You decide. Do you want to display the older comments or the new work comments on top of each page? I recommend you go with newer. You always want to make your article Lucas updated as possible is my recommendation. You might have another reason, and then email me whenever anyone posts a comment or a comet is held for moderation. This is up to you again if you want to be notified. Once you have a lot of visitors, a lot of commenters you're gonna want to press these away or you're gonna go crazy or your inbox is just gonna be completely over field. And then we have before a comment appears Now. Comment must be manual approved that is not checked in but comment. Author must have previously approved comment, right. So that is why the current commented we have reading in here is not being displayed because we have never allowed it. So if we allow this person once That means that they're gonna be able to comment freely. And this may make sense in the beginning if you don't have a lot of common. But if you've been following the course, they have been setting the right on this bam and everything a kiss meant You might want to try checking this on making it easier and free year for people to comment. If you notice along the way, this isn't working. You can just check this box again. But I prefer to least start in new website with this off, OK, depending on the website off course. And then we have the common moderation. How many links you want them to have before it is going to be held in Cuba? Because a lot of boats commenting are gonna have it least two or more links, a lot of links in their spam messages. This can be a really great way to make sure you're not getting a bunch of spam on your website again. There's up to I prefer to keep it on default. We have a comment blacklists if you want to ride in any, for example, somewhere worse, derogatory words were anything that you don't want people to be able to say before you blacklist them. So this may also be a starting email. A certain u R L etcetera, etcetera. Generally, this is a lot of micromanagement. So for now, I would just go ahead and leave this and scrolling down. We have avatars. Now, remember, we went through What? A avatar Ease. Or rather, eight Gravatt er why certain people have an avatar and why some Dawson? And that has to do if you're signed up to wordpress dot com or simply have gone to grab it started. Come and sign up there or you have commented on someone's website and signed up through that. Now I'm gonna put a link in. The resource is to gravitate towards. You can check that out if you want to. It's not mandatory. It's just information. Okay, now, if you want to, you can show a gravity just like we're doing here. Now this is an empty I come. You can decide how you want that I come to look down here. If you wanted to be blank, want to be a gravity or I can I identical Haven't turned the punch of funny names. And of course, if they have their own, they're gonna be showing their own. My personal preference is to remove the avatar because it makes it easier to comment, in my opinion, and it displaced the comments more in neatly. So I prefer to keep these off. Now that we've gone through all of these settings, just click on save changes and we're all done. So that is the common system in WordPress how to moderate it and how to use it. Now remember, in the end, you might want to moderate certain articles to allow comments and certain articles not to have commas, depending on its material. At any rate, you want people to engage. You want people to allow for back links meaning allow people to link to your website in the comments, etcetera. So, guys, I'll see you in the next lecture. 53. Introduction Designing with Elementor: hi and welcome to the designing with elementary section. Now, if you've been following along the course, you'll have learned how to set up a fully functional WORDPRESS website, installed all of the essential plug ins and also understood the psychology behind creating professional pages on your website. Now it's time to learn about l. A mentor. So what is L a mentor? L. A mentor is the most professional designer tools out there to make us go from Rukia designers to complete professionals. Let me show you what I mean. Now here are a couple of examples of people using elemental for their the sign along with the ocean WP WordPress theme. Right. So have a look at this beautiful site. Now the first thing we're gonna notice is that there is one big, wonderful picture around this whole area. Now we learned that this is called above the fold. We have the person's name here and then their slogan scrolling down. We're going to get a bunch more information about the website about the person. But the point here is that this is an elementary design. This is using the elementary tool and this is extremely professional looking because it is so clean. Now most designers a Web designers rather do use elemental for the designing because it is so easy. It is so fast, and you can create a fully functional, beautiful website in just a couple of hours. It's amazing no coding needed. So if we look at this website, we noticed that the theme is pretty much the same. We have one big, wonderful picture. There is a title here. There is a slogan here or rather, description. In this case, scrolling down would get a bunch off information. This could be anything that would be a sale stakes showcasing your product. Putting your email often it said Ra, and you'll remember that Pat Flynn did something similar with his design. Now this is so affected because you'll notice that there are section. We have one full screen section here, scrolling down. We have another section, another and then another, some being full screen but most covering the entire screen. Very professional. Now, if we have a look at this website, which is also using elemental with the ocean WP all of these examples are you'll notice that they are using a video in the background here. Now they're clearly conveying what they're all about. And then there is a call to action bottom called to action. Meaning you want people to click, care to get an email, Opt in to get your products to buy something. Whatever it is, the priority off your home page, Remember? Always set the priority would start here, the home pitch everything. Now these are my favorite type of home fish because they are so clean, their straight to the point. And this is what we're gonna aim for as well. When it comes to our decide scrolling down, you get to putting further information, still being very clean. Either using this sort of half screen or whole screen the sign right? And finally, this page having a similar design going on there, covering the entire screen right here. We craft starting the sign from Branson organizations stepped Creative Digital studio. Now, if I could weaken, get started. Remember, this is the start here. Button were actually being scrolled down here, so he's put all of this valuable information on the first page in one big long scroll, as you'll notice most people have. And then, of course, some social proof going on showcasing the clients. Now, this is just to show you that anyone can create these beautiful websites thanks to a tool such as L A mentor. So let's go more in depth to what elementary is now. L. A mentor is what is called a page builder. In other words, it helps you build pages like would you saw? And what does your website consist off? Well, basically different pages now. In the past, you needed coding skills in order to be able to create websites. Now WordPress simplified it. Ah, lot of plug ins came after that. Too simplified. And now we have l. A mentor to design to make it look beautiful. If you are like me, you'll know that I'm not a designer at all. I don't have a good eye for this time, but thanks to L. A mentor, everything becomes super easy. It's a very intuitive tool to use, and they also have another feature that really helps off. That is the ability to be able to design lime. Now you'll notice. In the previous lectures, when we were creating our pages that we created the page and then we went to the preview to see how it turned out. Now, with L. A mentor, you get to build the entire page alive. You get to see ask you, putting the different functions, different part different witches and see how it turns out. Live is an incredible feature, and it saves so much time and help through the intuitive designing now again. Because I am not a designer, I really appreciate that this elementary is filled with page templates. I really need them, and it makes my life so much Easter. I wouldn't design a logo, but still we have a great looking logo, and similarly, I wouldn't go ahead and design a page. But thanks to the templates, we can get really, really good looking pages and hence really good looking website, thanks to this tool. So in other words, if we learn to master these tools not only will be really proficient when it comes to building websites, but also designing those websites, whether that's for your business, being a freelancer, helping someone out building your own business could be anything as long as you need to build a website decided to look professional. Elementary is the tool now There's also a feature in elementary called Elementary Can Va. Basically, what it does is that it allows you to remove everything that is on this certain page, meaning the sidebar The Footer. If you would want to the logo than menu everything and just make it completely clean a Canada so that you're able to put, for example, a movie there or you could be putting a big picture there and then we could start the signing. But some may be a menu in the top, your logo, etcetera. But this feature makes it so easy, because if you can start from a clean slate with the elementary Canada, designing becomes so much easier. And here's the final crazy thing. It's actually free. There is a pro version, actually, I think there are two pro version. If you want to use it for several website that cost you, I believe $99 or $199 for one year off updates currently, but 90% of this is completely free, and 19% is gonna be more than we need for our purpose, right? And if you should, ever by any tools or any plug ins and In my opinion, if you're ever gonna buy a plug in is either gonna be for the protection of your website for the restoration and back up off your website on the elemental plugging to decide like a pro. But once again, you're gonna notice that we have basically everything in this page builder. And if you should ever need more, you have the budget for it. It's easy to upgrade and use those features for woo commercial. For example, if you want to create into a e commerce website, we're gonna talk more about that later, and I'll show you how to build an e commerce using comers. Okay, So if you are as excited as I am to start building up those pages that we have already prepared being our homepage being our start here page and of course being our resource is page, then let's get started going through elemental from the very beginning, all the way to getting the finished product. The finished thing, right? Let's get started seeing the next lecture 54. Settings: All right, guys, we're gonna learn everything about elementary, but to do that, it's a good idea to start from the very beginning. So let's start from the back end of our website and move over to Elemental here. Now, as with most plug ins, they're gonna be a couple off settings and different options that comes with it. So before we get started and start using it, we're gonna go ahead and shake through what all these means. And if we need to change anything, we're gonna go ahead and do that. Okay, So let's start off in settings in here now. The first thing we have in settings is where you want elementary to be applied, right? So right now we have it to the post types off post pages, and that's it. But we could also apply elementary to the male poet page or my library. But that's nothing they really need to think about now. I just want you to know that these options are in here. Should you want to customize the male poet page later on, for example, remember, you could create different pages there. The man is subscription page, etcetera. Then we also have disabled default colors. Now, this is if you wanna use the colors that comes with your themes primarily. Then you could check these to disable the elementaries default collars and use those instead and the same with the phones. You can disable the funds off elementary to use those from your theme. However, in the upcoming lectures, when we start designing our home page, we're actually gonna go through which collars and which funds to use for your business, depending on what you are doing with your website, what it is about and what feeling that you want to deliver the psychology off phones and collars. Really excited. I think you're gonna love that lecture, but for now, we're not gonna touch these, right? We're going to customize those later on. Then we also have the improve elementos setting, meaning if you want to help elementary by allowing them to track your usage. Now, this is an animus data that they collect to improve their plug in. And if you want to do that, you can doesn't really do much. I tend not to, because I don't want to have the load of myself. In other words, it might slow down things slightly. And I'm not really into doing that, even if it is for a good cause there. And then we move over to style. And in here we have the generic form style. We have the content with basically the style off your pages, this style I was gonna look how it's gonna fit with the spaces in between etcetera. Now, we don't really need to touch this right now because we're actually gonna mixture with this when we're in l. A mentor itself and in advance, we have things like CSS print method and for us mortal who are not into coding. We don't really have to bother about this at all. Switch to editor Loader mode. We're not gonna touch this either, because this is for troubleshooting and we're not gonna go into doing those sort of things . This is for advanced users. That is nothing that I do either using this plug him, and then we have something that's called editing handles, and this is actually a decently recent feature. Now, what this does is that it changes the editing blocks Now, I know we haven't started with elementary yet, but I just want to show you what this does. If we keep this on hide, that means that in order to customize a block we've been working with blocking Gutenberg. So it's gonna be familiar for you In order to customize a block, we get to right click on that block. Now, if we keep this to show, it's gonna use handle this standoff right clicking. And it looks like this. You go ahead, you activate this to show, and then, as you can see in the block, you get this kind of fold out where you can copy, you can edit, you can close it, etcetera. Now that is completely up to you, how you want to do it. But generally, whichever you start what you're gonna be comfortable with, I think that this feature is primarily because a lot of people who used elemental for a while they got uncomfortable with the right click option. But if you're just starting out with elemental, you're gonna be comfortable, most likely with which ever I actually like the right clicks. I'm gonna keep this to hide. So let's go down to roll manager now, just like it says Roll Manager is if you want to allow people to do certain editing in L. A mentor. Now, for example, if you want your editor to not have access to L. A mentor, you would go ahead and Kallick in here. Now. The different roles on your Web site is gonna be much more important to you Once your website starts to grow right and you can start the signing different roles to different people. You can have several authors if you have a blogger. For example, if you have contributors someone who takes here if you're a CEO, etcetera. Now, if you want to give access to certain content, you need to go pro. But what you can do is that you can limit people's access to what people can add it in L. A mentor, and you do that through Roll Manager. So let's move on to tools. Now in here is actually something you might come to use a couple of times, and that's the regenerate CSS Now, even though we don't really work much with CIA, says this is actually something that is said in the style, and this style is gonna be the will of your page. Maybe the fund the collars, etcetera. So whenever we are updating that and we noticed that the updates aren't actually taking place, then chances are that there is something wrong with the wrist bones. For example, Between elementary and the theme that we have, we have ocean WP. So if something is lagging or something is missing or were present doing some missed with L . A mentor, all we need to do is go back and click on regenerate files, and then we're gonna make sure that they sink and basically 99% of the time, that just makes it work, right? So whatever style change you have made, this gonna start working by them. Chances are we're gonna use these a couple of times as we build our website using L. A mentor, and then we have sink library, and the library is gonna be much more useful later on in the elementary section when we start using templates. So, for example, if you download a certain template or you save your own and you notice that that is not visible in your saved templates, all they need to do is go to elementary tools and click on sink library and most of the times that is gonna solve that problem, and then we have safe mode and the safe motives. If you want to troubleshoot any issues or anything special in elementary, this is an advanced feature. We're not going to use this so we don't really have to care about this. This is basically for the nerds. And even though I consider myself a huge nerd, I'm not knowledgeable enough to go into the coding and bits off the safe mode. So we're not gonna use that. We also have the debug bar now the debug. It's similar if you want to look for problems that said, we're not going to be using this either. So these are all advanced features that we don't need to build fantastic websites. So moving on to replace you or L. Now, if you've been following the course all along, first of all, that is awesome. Good job. Secondly, you'll remember when we downloaded a plug in to back up our website. When we backed up our website were able to migrate our website somewhere else, right? And what we can do then is that we can migrate that away and then also migrant our entire element or set up using this replace U R L Wright is gonna hold true as well. If you are changing the domain name to a new domain name, you're gonna have to replace this u R l two but again, just like it says there. You really should back up your database before you do anything like this, and thankfully, would do have our backup. And we know how to do the back up manually. So if you need to replace your old your el or your migrating, then go ahead and back up first and then use this right in your old your l and then you knew and click on replace euro, and then we move on to version control. So should they launch any new update with L A mentor, for example, and you notice that Hey, wait, These actually broke my website. That's very rare, But as with all plug ins, it could happen. But it's very, very rare. But you can do is go ahead and reinstall the old version that we know actually works. And of course, we have our website backed up, said it was gonna be any loss But this is where we go to the rollback version, the previous version to install the ones that has actually worked. So we can continue editing our website and continued progress in with our business, and we also have if you want to become a better tester, if you enable this one, then you'll have the opportunity to test new versions before they are released. If you're into that, that's absolutely not necessary adult at him to keep this on disabled. Then we have maintenance mode. So if you're upgrading your website or in this certain page, what you can do is that you can go and use a coming soon pace, for example, or a maintenance page. So people coming to your website there going to be seeing it coming soon, or a maintenance page allowing you to do what you need to do in your website. Okay, before you get everything published. So this could be great for any maintenance updates or just for this sign up days. If you just wanna put it down, update your website in peace and then release it with its new beautiful design. Okay, then we have who can access your website well, people logged in. Or if you want to set this as a custom, so only people with certain roles can actually logging. Once this system coming soon or maintenance, I prefer to just keep this in logged in. And then we have the templates. If you have created an uncertain template for when your website is down, you can use that. If you don't have one creative, we can create one right here. Now I tend to not do that either. If I ever put the website down, which I basically never, ever do, I would go ahead and use the maintenance part. Then we have system info. And in here there's just a bunch of technical jargon. It doesn't help us at all. It just looks like this. There's nothing off information that we can be using here, So we're not gonna spend any time here. We have a getting started tab here. A swell. That's really great, because L A mentor is basically unlimited in its potential for beautiful the science. And there's a lot of tips and tricks that you can be using from here. Now, you're not gonna need this too much because I'm actually gonna be your editorial, right? That's why you're here in this course to make beautiful the science and wonderful website. But to learn a lot of tips and tricks, they have some really handed tutorials in here. Can check this out and then get the full article. Now, if you need any help, you can click on, gets help here. They have great support to have a frequently asked questions in here can go ahead and check that out. There are tutorials, etcetera, really, really great. And then we have custom founds. Now this is a pro feature you need to bite in order to add your customer funds and custom funds means if there's any phone that you have downloaded or maybe even created yourself that you want to use to make your website even more unique. But there's a lot of fun, like a lot of phones in here already that we can use. And in the upcoming lecture in the psychology on, the different funds were gonna choose one that's gonna fit your business perfectly is we don't need to worry about this, and then we have the GoPro butts. And if you want to buy the upgraded version off elementary and off course. This can be a benefit if you use this for a while and you have multiple websites and you wanna used additional witches and use it across multiple platforms. But like I said in the previous lecture, this is not needed. You get basically everything for free zone open source, and we're gonna make Kick Ass website using the free version, right? You're most of the kids. You're not gonna need the pro version. But if there's anything you should by pro for a plug in, it's gonna be the anti virus or the backup or elemental probe, in my opinion. And then we have templates down here. Now we have our say that templates. So, for example, should I decide to make different pages for different courses, I might want to have the similar kind off page build. So what I could do is making certain page built and save that as he template and use it over and over is going to save a lot of time. And, of course, when we start downloading templates, which we're gonna go through later, that's gonna be put in here as well. The theme builder is a pro feature, so we don't have access to that. But it allows you to go into the integrated, for example, to edit your ah, header your food er in the l a mentor. But again, there's nothing that we need to do because we already know how to do that outside. And I'm gonna show you how to use the different features to make your website awesome. Without that, we have pop ups and pop ups we all know about. The pope's up on your screen. You want to do an email open, for example, or if there's something that you want to announce on your website, that's a pro feature. But honestly, this is quite sensitive. They can be used correctly, but they can also be very annoying. But that's nothing we need here. We can great new templates, and here we can put templates into categories, right? So those are the different settings in elementary, so we have gone through settings role managed to system in for all these important stuff and Sam plates, which we're going to go through Maurin death later on. What I want you to remember primarily is that if you go to L. A mentor and tools. We have the regenerate CSS. So if there is something that's not updating on your website, go tell a mentor tools and click on regenerate files. Most of the time, this is gonna solve the issue off your theme, not updating your style, not working as they should. Right now. Let's move on to the next lecture and start using elemental. This is really exciting, guys see in the next lecture. 55. Home Page Pre-Design: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and pre design our home page. Now, if you've been following along the course from the beginning and you've been following the same steps as me, you will just like me not have a home page right now because previously we turned our home page into a start here page. So what we're gonna do is go ahead and go to pages here and click on add New and actually create a home page that we can be using. So I'm just going to call this home, and then I'm going to click on publish and then publish, And then I'm going to go back to all pages. And if you scroll down right now, you'll see that the start here is our front patient on the front page and home page, those air kind of synonyms. So what you want to do is click on quick edit because this slug you remember what the slug is? That is what appears after your domain name. So the slug here is Robin and jesper dot com. Forward slash home. But this is very confusing for the search engines because we want to turn this into start here right now. The start here page should have start here. Acid slug makes a lot more sense for the search and ears and humans alike. Now, whenever you're writing slugs, you always want to use lower case letters, and you always want to use a dash when you're doing any space. So then we're gonna go ahead and click on update. And now let's have a look at our home. If weekly going quick edit, you're going to see that this leg is called home and then dashed you We just want this to be called home, and then we're gonna click on update. There we go. And now we're gonna go to settings and go to reading. And now we're gonna turn our homepage from start here into home and now click on save changes. So the home page is not set out currently in our menu, and that's exactly how we wanted. We want the home page to be the first page. They see that the editor, but you don't want it to be in the menu because we already have it in the logo. So what we're gonna do is make this into her home page Pre design it by removing all of the fluff that we don't need, and then we're gonna move on and make this really professional and beautiful using L a mentor. I mean, that's why we are in this section, right? So now we're gonna go up towards pages and click there and then we're gonna go to Hope, which is now a front page. Home is our home page. That's awesome. And now, guys, finally we get to click on this big blue button that has been staring us in the eyes for a while. That's is added with elemental. Okay, now, the second I click on this, that is gonna turn our home page into an elementary edited page, right and is also going to be opening the entire page from Gutenberg that we've been using before into the elementary editor. So this is how the elementary editor looks. You'll recognize a lot of the dragon drop features from Gutenberg, but also with this beautiful life edit. Now, don't worry about all of this. We're going to go through the dashboard in the next lecture. But now to continue with our pre the sign of the home page. What we're gonna do is go down here to settings, and that's going to bring up a couple of general settings for the home page, such as they want to change the title they want to change the status to. I want to add a featured image. We're not gonna do that right now, and then we can also hide the titles. Now if we look at the title right now, it says home and most of our pages has titled such course. Assistant title, of course, is about about blawg blood, etcetera for are designed to take the next level and looking really clean and really professional. We don't want to use titles anymore, right? I want to make the website as clean and straight to the point as possible, so we don't need to declare to the world that this is a home page. We just want to deliver the purpose off our website, the purpose off our home page and we spoke about earlier. So what we're gonna do is that we're actually going to go ahead, click back on settings here and we are going to click on Hide title now if this doesn't hide the title for you, then chances are that the theme that we're using it's not completely synchronizing with elemental right now. And that is because sometimes they have the different name in the codes. We don't need to know about that. We just need to know how to fix it. So if you click on here and it doesn't actually hide it, remember, this is a live preview. Then let me show you how to work around this and hide all all four titles because this is not working Ocean WP right now. So let's go ahead and hide all of our titles on all of our pages because we're not gonna use those anymore. So what we want to do is right. Click on our logo here and click on Open Link in New Tab. And then we're gonna go here and we're gonna go ahead and click on Customized. If you're at the back end of your website, you just go to appearance and then customize. And now we're gonna go ahead and go down to general options and page title. And here where it says style, we're actually going to go ahead and click from default to hidden. So what that is going to do once you click publisher is that is gonna hide the titles off all of your current and future pages. It's gonna save us a lot of trouble. So it's been published. All of the titles are gone with just slightly cleaned up our design. Awesome. So now we compress this one down and go back into L a mentor. Now all we need to do is go ahead and update this page. Click on leave, Paige, that's completely fine. And then the home title is gone. All of her titles are gone. Awesome. Now, if we go ahead and we go back into settings here now, this is the really important and interesting part. Right now we have something here that says page layout. Okay. And were they using this before? We've been using the elemental full with to remove the sidebar. And if you have been following along the course with us, I strongly recommend that you go ahead and you click on the l aumentar full with and we're gonna use. This is a pretty design before we start designing our home page. The reason for that is because I love this menu. I love that we have the logo here, and it's also the food er that's contained in here with our privacy policy in terms of conditions. Now, if you have just jump start the course and gone straight into L. A mentor, you have a website. But you don't have all of these features or you don't actually care about this feature. Whenever do everything you can use something called elementary canvas, and this is a feature that on a lot of website, I love to use this, especially to start with because look at this. It's a completely clean canvas, and we can start building up anything that we want in here. So depending on your design in your purpose, you can go ahead and choose if you want to use the elementary canvas with the elemental full with. But if you've been following along from the beginning, I recommend that you used to elemental full with. That's what I'm going to use, and that's what's gonna be the basis to start this signing our home page. So there we go. I'm just gonna go ahead and click on updates, and now we're all done who have pre designed or home page seeing the next lecture. Guys 56. Dashboard Function: All right, so let's learn a little bit more about elementary by going through the dashboard. But first things first. How do we get to L. A mentor from our WordPress from the back and off our website. Now, there are two ways to really enter the elementary editor here. The 1st 1 would be to start a from your dashboard, go to screen options and then activate the elemental or review. Now, remember, we click this away in a very much earlier lecture of the course. Now, from here, you're gonna be able to create new pages by just clicking here from here. You're going to notice that the patient we've been editing our home page, he actually says elementary down below here. And all we need to do is go ahead and click edit with L. A mentor, and we're gonna jump straight into l a mentor starting to edit that page. Okay, so here we are. Now, let's go through this dashboard over here, all of the different features. Now, if you've been following along from the beginning off these cores, then that's really awesome. Because then you will have learned how to use the Gutenberg Editor which also has to drag and drop function. You're going to recognize a lot of those features in here because if we look at these, we have the basic elements in here, which is the things like heading takes, editor image, video button, etcetera that you can just go ahead and click, drag it over here and drop, and we have a heading more about that in a little bit. But its various is everything. Here's Dragon drop. So what? We have all the basic elements going on here. And if we scroll down or just collapsed, this basic one, we have the general ones as well, which is things like Image Gallery. You can have a star rating image care so I can list alert short code Soundcloud sidebar. Read Mother's. There's a tone off functions in here is such an awesome tool. And if we collapse this one as well, we also have the WordPress widgets that we've been going through from the witches area earlier on. We can also just click, drag and drop like this very, very easy to build pages this way. Now, the next thing that we can do in here what you're going to notice is that if I open up the basic one and for example, I want to add a text editor in here, then all I'm gonna do is drag the text editor in here, and I'm going to get a piece of Texas just like the Gutenberg editor. And when this happens, that's gonna open the text editor right here. So and it takes someone to write and can just write that in here. I can go ahead and change the style, the alignment and everything. It's super similar to Gutenberg, and then we have advanced functions as well, which we're gonna go through later on. But everything is gonna work the same that when you pull it in here, you drag and drop it. You're gonna go into an editor where you can edit it's different functions. Now, if I want to go ahead and add more things, all I'm gonna do is click up here in the upper right corner with all of these squares, and I'm going to go right back in here. So let's say I wanted to add something else. Let's say I want to add this image. I'm just going to click on it and move it up and you can have recognized this. You can put it above, or you can put it below just like this. Now, if I put below is gonna end up right here, and if I want to delete this I'm gonna do is right. Click and click on delete. Now, remember, when we're in the settings earlier than the addict function would have been up over here if we added on the handlebar. But now we're gonna use the right click for this and just delete it so we can add on anything in here. And this is one square off itself where you can add a bunch of things. Bunch of videos, buttons, anything. You're gonna notice that we can drag on different witches or elements. They're basically synonyms in here. So in this way you can keep on different sections with different features. Right? So let's say that I wanted to add my own header in here. I can pull the things that I want to pull from here, dragged in here and create a header or un above the fold home pace. You remember what above the fold means which is everything. That's gonna be on your screen when you open the page. Then I could make this and next square down here. That could be the things where I put, for example below the full, the first screen below the fold, and we could do another and another. All of that is gonna make a lot more sense in a little bit. Now, if I want to collapse on entire square, all I need to do is go ahead and click on the delete up here. Boom! It's all gone now. The next thing that it's so amazing and so beautiful with this editor is this function. Notice the plus in here. If I click on this is gonna add in an entire new section, it's so easy to read it. So let's say that I would add in this we have four different sections going on in here. 1234 And then you can edit thes that within between them. For example, the height two column. Get the overflowing. Even the tag, which is really cool, because that means you could create your own header. And the search engines are gonna recognize it as a hitter because you changed html to header. In other words, Header is for search engines. S e o even more about that in the S e o section. Okay, so if we go back in here where we have all of our widgets, I could add in a heading into this one. Really good. Let's go back. I could add in a video into this one. Let's go back. I could add in a Google Maps into this one. The possibilities off editing are endless in here, and that is what makes it so amazing. That is why I love this. You can make such professional website easily. I mean in hours, once you learn this. So let's remove the entire square like that. There we go. Now, the next thing you can do is go ahead and click on here. And this is the next mind blowing thing here. We're going to get a bunch off templates. Now look at these. These are page templates, right? If you scroll down here and let's say Well, this one looks really good, all you need to do is click on it and you can expect inspected, See how it looks like scroll down with sea we have this nice, beautiful scenery, video scenery. They have this woman popping up. We have the box that takes and the button going on. Very simple, clean and beautiful scrolling down. We have these little fold in here where we can call. We have the number scrolling down below the fold going on. We have all of the features off the service, some pictures and then some more information. I really like it. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on insert and then we get this entire page. Look, it's so easy. I could just go ahead and write. Robin and Jesper start at editing tiny things, adding in our numbers, adding in our feature and honest in a couple of hours, I would be having a kick ass website. This is all thanks to elementary so easy to use. Now, let's just collapse all of this by clicking on the delete section here. We're just gonna delete everything inside this square or rather, in this case, it was just the video. And in this square, for example, they have divided it up, So this phone number is gonna be collapsed here. And if I hold her over I can see that this entire feature square it's gonna be deleted from this square. This divided up this on this. So it all depends on how you want to divide up all of your different witches and your own design, right? So everything I'm showing you here, we're going to go into more details about as we go through and build up our homepage. This is just to run through the dashboard and its many functions off How elemental works. Okay, so if we go down, we have some additional features like settings. Now, we touched on settings just earlier on in the lecture when we were doing our home patients setting or elementary full with in here, we can also change the style, meaning we can go ahead and click on background and add an image meaning we would be adding an image to this background going on in here. We can also use the Grady in meaning we can use colors and make a certain callers in this background. And the possibilities off editing are endless in here. And now if I go down, we also have navigator. Now, Navigator is gonna be something that, for example, Let's say I click up here, go back to witches and I add in the heading in here. Now we get to see the heading in our navigator. If I go back into the elements and I add in a butts and s well, let's put it down below. Here we can see that in the same column we have the heading and the bottom. Now, if I go back here and I add a video in a natter square, then we're going to see that this video is actually in a new section. Each of these squares are known as sections, right? So if I want quick access to them, I can just click on them and I can see the martyr. Similarly, if I click up in the upper left corner like this is gonna be marked in the navigator, and then let's just collapse each square, square or section doesn't matter what you call them and collapse this one as well and then going down. We also have history now histories of really useful feature, because it's gonna show was everything that we have been doing. So, for example, we just added the video. So if I click here. We get everything back from when we have the video. So if you're doing any mistakes along the way you're worried about Oh, how is this gonna look? Oh, did I go too far? Can I undo this? Yeah, you can. And that is the beautiful thing about this. Everything is saved in here, which is really Austin. We even have our template when we added that one in here. And of course, if you want to go to the latest, we just click on the top one and we come back. We also have revisions. Now, revisions is when we have been doing this Big changes that's been ought to say I have a one minute ago 13 minutes ago. I've been playing around a little with this and from the previews lecture that was filmed. So we also have those saving here can click on that I could apply and reload them. So there's never any worry about something going lost in the editing process because everything is saved down here. Going down. We also have responsive mode. This is really useful because as your editing live, which is amazing itself, you can go ahead and check out How is this gonna look in the tablet? How is this gonna look on the mobile? So you always get direct feedback. And we know that the majority of people on the Internet today are using their cell phone. So we need to make sure that everything is adapted to cell phones, right? If not, we're gonna meets out in a bunch of important traffic. So we're gonna make sure that we always keep an eye on these ones when we're doing our design and then we have preview changes. So whenever I do anything, let's go back to witches up here. And then let's add in. Let's set in this video, for example. Here it is. Now, if I want to see how this looks like, I could just click on preview changes, is gonna open up in new tab. We've seen this happen before, and it's gonna show me how it looks like right now. Okay, so this is how it looks like with the video. Now, if I want to further edit this section, I can just move my mouse overhead with this edit section and you're going to get another editing mode in here. And the beautiful thing with this is you can decide You wanna have the section boxed You wanna have it full with Do you wanna have any call in gaps? There's gonna be very important. We have different Call them Contin position, overflow html tag, structure everything. You can change the style, everything and that is off the section. If you want to add a section above, for example, just click on the plus and you're gonna add a section here that I recommend when we're doing the design and you're gonna notice us, we go that we keep each section for each content. So, for example, the first thing that we're gonna want to do it said the main purpose for our home page That's gonna be in one section That's gonna be the above the fooled section now down below . We might, for example, when I had an email, opt in my want to add a phone number or anything, maybe testimonials. Whatever it might be, there's gonna be below the full. The first thing that pops up when you scroll down that's gonna be in a new section in the new square. Okay. And to delete these All we need to do is click on the X here. It's gon gonna click on the X here. That one is gone as well and that covers all of these functions and all of the witches. Now we also have something called Global. Now, this is a pro features which would make your which is global. It's not important Just wanted to show you what this part is, but we're not going to use because it is a pro feature going down. Whenever you have done anything you're proud of, you can click on update and that is gonna update. We also have the same option. You could save it as a template which we were talking about earlier can go to template and then load that if you wanna have a certain template for certain pages and also just save draft and finally going up, we know we're going to get to the witches if we click here right, But if we click in here, we get a different pair off options going on. We get to set our default colors are default funds are default color picker, and then we have global settings, which is gonna be things like the default generic fund, the content with the widget space etcetera. Also, we have light box light. Booked is if you add a picture you click on the picture is gonna pop out so you can view the pictures more full screen. It's an amazing feature they have added in here Click here to go back. We have the dashboard settings, which is just this part that we have gone through earlier. We have the about elementary is gonna take you to their home page. We have the finder, which is really cool. If there's something certain that you want to find in this page, you can just search for it and then we can view the page or exit to dash. But which is the back end of your website? OK, guys, now in the next lecture, we're actually going to go ahead and decide the theme off our website, or rather, the feeling that we want to express. And we're gonna start off by deciding which default funds that we want to use for our headers for our sub headers. For the generic, you have riding the text. It said to decide on the feeling and to understand that if you're not a designer like I'm not a designer, chances are you are not. But there are designers out there who understands the psychology off the funds. So we have to match the psychology off the phone with the feeling that you want to deliver to your vistors. And I'm gonna show you exactly how to do that, because there's a lot of templates out there that the sites on which phone that expresses, which feeling So we're gonna look at what service do we have? What feeling do want express? So what phoned? Can we decide to express that feeling and which funds are gonna match with that? Then we're gonna go ahead and do the same for the colder theme off our website. There's a super exciting, such an integral on important part off designing your Web sites, etc. In the next lecture, guys 57. Set Global Values - Fonts: in this lecture, we're going to talk about setting global values. So what that is is basically setting certain values that l a mentor is going to be using over and over whenever you are designing any page. Okay, so we're going to start off with setting the global values for our funds. So while we are in elementary here, what we're gonna do is go to the opera left corner here, click there and then moved to default funds. We're gonna go through funds before colors because funds are so important when it comes to the expression itself off your business off the website for your restaurant, for your design or your blood, whatever it might be that you are creating right now. So we're gonna click on default fonts in here. So as you can see, we have four different types. We have a primary headline, secondary headline, a body text and accent takes. The first thing we're gonna do is that I'm going to put out four different examples here that's going to represent all of these four different types of text. Then I'm going to show you the psychology behind them and how you can find an expression that's going to fit your business and then also tools for finding proper pairings to each phone. Now, funds are actually quite on art. But for us who just want to have a really good representation off our website in business, we're gonna take the short cut and go for the templates. There's definitely the most effective thing we can do here. So primary headlines, second headline body takes accent takes We're gonna go ahead and go to which is not gonna put this out just to show you their differences. So this is going to be the heading, and this is going to be the secondary headline and this is going to be the body text gonna put it right below there. And I'm just going to go ahead and write. This is the body text hit a low. I'm gonna go ahead and center these as well, so they're easier to see. And then we're going to add the accent. Takes is gonna put that in the bottom right here. So there we go, and then we're gonna go back in here and go to default funds. This is where we set up our global values all I'm gonna do is open up these menus. There we go. And this is where it gets both tricky and interesting, because here is where we decide on our phones and like we're talking about, earlier funds are actually on art. So what we're gonna do is that we're going to use a guide from can vote dot com. Now, in this guy, they have a bunch off different templates. They have put up a list with different fund pairings that you can go ahead and see whatever John your business and your into check that out, look at their phone parents and just follow suit. And if everything doesn't exist on elementary, I'm gonna show you how to find alternative. Or if you just want to find your own alternatives anyway. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna scroll through this until I find something that I like in here and here. I have found this front page. Now we're designing our home page, front page, home page, that pretty much the same thing. And looking at this, I think it looks really nice. I'm really enjoying the open sensing here. If I scroll down a little bit. I get an explanation off how it works and then also a practical example. And I really, really enjoy this. So actually, I'm gonna go ahead and use this set up, OK, so first off we have the primary headline and that is the open Sounds extra bold. So I'm gonna go back and I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to write open sounds now, notice they don't have the open sounds extra bold, but what I can do is change the weight because the weight is another word for bold. So I'm gonna go from 600 to 800 we can see how that changes that entire your headline right here. And it's starting to look a lot more like this one, and I'm really enjoying this Looks. So we're gonna keep this. Let's head back here. Default funds. So now we have said or primary headline. And what is a primary headline? Well, the primary headline is going to be when we go to our elements or widgets, and we use these sword off headings. If I click on this heading here, you can see that it can have the tag h one to age six Dave Span or P. Now it doesn't really matter which one you use. It's gonna matter more, won't get to the S e o section. What's important here is that it is the heading is going to be heading for whatever section that you are editing for whatever met such that you want to drive home, right? And if we go back in here and we go to the full phones, the secondary headline actually doesn't exist that much in L. A mentor. The second headline. It's primarily going to be on certain, Which is which is why I'm using this counter witches as an example. Because all of the different headlines in here, whether this h 2345 or six those are all counted its primary headlines. So the second headline, It's actually going to be used very, very rarely. It's just a good thing to know about, Okay, But now we could not find the Cooper Hewitt. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm going to go ahead and search for open sounds and try to match that by going to phone peridot. Si o no. All of this is going to be in the resource is so in here. What I'm gonna do is search for open sons just like that and then hit, enter and then down below, we can see a couple of different pairings going on. And the cool thing here is that you can just click on this takes and right in your own as well, just to see how it looks like. And then we just scroll down until we see something that we like. Okay, Now, I actually think that this one is really cool. Deliberate Baskerville. I'm really enjoying that one. So the liber bathroom, I'm actually gonna use that one. So we're gonna go back. I'm going to check it out here and search for lead Breath, Bhaskar! And there we go. There we have it. Liberate Baskerville. And then we have the headline. I extra think it looks really, really nice. Now, if we go to the body text, this is going to be most of the text that we ride on our website. They're gonna be global value. So whenever you're doing in a headline, you're going to get these values off these thick open sons that we have selected in here And whenever you're writing and it takes, you're gonna get this body take. So I want to choose really carefully and make sure that we do our pairings. Well, now let's go back to the can of a guide here they are recommending that we use PT sounds in here, so and I think it looks really good as well. It looks really great here, too. So I'm just gonna go ahead and search for P T sons. And there it is. We have it. So we're just going to see how these transforms. There we go. Might look like a minor difference. But when you start adding a lot of text, this is going to really add up. This is going to be basically 90% of the design off your website in the end, especially if you are blogging. Takes this everything sponsor really everything. So I'm really enjoying this part, and then I'm going to have an accent. Takes us well enough for the accent takes that is going to be on things such as the buttons such as different parts of your sidebar, etcetera. No, they don't actually have a recommendation for accent text in here So what we're gonna go ahead and do is go to fund pair again, and we're just going to continue scrolling until we find something that matches well with open sons. Because that is the headline that we are using. So let's move on the sea breeze Serif. I'm actually really enjoying especially ass. A button takes, like in this case. So breathe Serif. I'm gonna check that out and see how it looks like here. Freeze! There we go. I'm gonna click Kim, and they would go. Okay, I'm really enjoying this set up. So all I need to do now is quick and apply. And suddenly we have said our global values for our funds and this is going to completely decide how we express ourselves. Now, remember, in here you can go through and see what kind of funds did you want to have for technology, for example, what kind of feelings you wanna have for an art gallery for invitation and events? I mean, all of these phones, they're expressing different feelings. So it's social good idea to go with the phone parents that are recommended by professional designers. They're people doing research and studies in this. I recommend that we do what works. So we have set up our phones. If you want to check them out, Maurin Death, we can click on them. And then we can go, for example, to size and put this to large. We can even put it to XXL and see how it looks like. And I really enjoy this. Killeen. Look, I'm super happy about this choice. I think you should do the same. Check out the resource is go and find your genre Jordan ish. Find your pairings and then go to the upper lift in here. Go to default. Font was gonna be your global values. So these are always gonna be applied and then set these up. Hit, apply. And then we're gonna move on to the next lecture where we're going to do the same thing for the colors off Our website colors are also super important, as we can see this color, right? It is just not gonna do see in the next lecture. Guys, 58. Match Your Menu & Footer Fonts: All right, guys, before we go ahead and we decide in our color palette for our website, depending on which needs your in John and what service you're offering, etcetera, we're gonna go ahead and match the funds that we have just picked together with our menu and our food. Er Now, if you have opted for the elementary can va and you currently don't have a menu or a footer and you don't plan on using either one, you can go ahead and skip this lecture. But if you are, which I recommend that you do using the menu in the food or stick around and we're gonna go ahead and do this. Okay, So the first things that we want to check out is the names off these funds that we decided for the primary headlined The second Headline Body takes an accent text. Now, what we're going to want to match is the secondary headline that formed family to the top menu here. The main menu. Okay. And then we're gonna go ahead and match the body takes to the copyright text and also to the food our links for the privacy policy and terms and conditions Okay, So what we need to remember here is the second er headline and the body text. Okay, so for me, that's labour Baskerville, MPT Sands. So we're going to keep those in mind. What we can also do is go ahead and remove. All of these were going to remove this entire square, also known as a section. By clicking here, they would go gun. And whenever you do any change, just remember to click on update. There we go. So we're going to click on the upper left corner here and then click on Exit to Dashboard and this is gonna take us to the back end for website, and we're gonna go to appearance down here and click on Customize. And then we're gonna go to typography on the left dashboard, hear clicking there into that tab, and then we're gonna go ahead and click on main menu. That's the 1st 1 we're going to start with. They would go and then we're going to click on the phone family. Now, the main menu is this one. We're gonna click on the phone family, and I'm gonna search for lead brah. And they're this liberate Baskerville. So if you have a look at the main menu right here and look at when I'm clicking on the labour basketball, we can see the change that it makes. And I'm already a fan off this. I'm liking this big time, actually. So that changes our main menu. Now, if we can, we can also change the size like this. If you want to have it slightly bigger, we could make it even into 16. There we go. There. We have 16 actually really like it into Ford. Seen like that, you can also play with the letter spacing. But honestly, I wouldn't because that's gonna mess up the front itself. And then we're gonna go ahead and click on the back, and we're gonna go down to do where it says food or copyright. Okay, And the copyright this Actually this copyright takes that we wrote right here, and I'm going to search for P T. Sands. All indeed. Waas click on PT on my keyboard and he's gonna jump down to P T here and they would have PT Sands. So if you keep on eye on this piece of text and we can look at it, change and there we go. So not a major different, but it's gonna fit much better with the overall designing for Web site, especially as we start adding content to it. So what we also want to do here, it's play a little bit with this size, right? This is really small. Now, we might want to do this slightly bigger. I actually really enjoy Ford seeing here. There we go. Maybe 30. Yeah, Let's keep it a 13 looks really good. So 13 and size. I really like this design. And then we're gonna go ahead and go back and we're gonna change these ass. Well, so we just change the food or copyrights. We're gonna go back, scroll down to food or menu, and we're gonna change the phone. Family also to P T Sands. Okay, Now, have a look at this. Once again, we can see the difference. And there we go. Now, some people might offer to match their top menu, their main main new here with their footer. And you can absolutely do that. There's nothing wrong with that, but me personally, I prefer to match the copyright text together with the food or takes over all. I just think it makes for a nicer and cleaner design. And then I'm gonna change this size there. So it's going that 12. Let's see. Third scene 14. 14. Looks pretty good. We're gonna go yet. 13. I think it's really good. And then I'm gonna click on Publish, and that's gonna publish this one for the main menu, the corporate takes and the food or menu. So it's been published. It's been changed. Awesome guys, not with him. Match the phone on our website. We have set the global values, which means that when we start creating content, we start adding headers, bottoms, riding, takes that is all going to match with the phones that we have already chosen. So what, we're gonna go ahead and do next? It's going for the colors. Check out which color should is going to represent my business. What color palette is gonna fit with that? And that's at the global value for the colors, just like we did with the funds. See, in the next lecture, guys 59. Set Global Values - Colors: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about the colors. What they mean how to use them properly to represent your business and then off course, set our global values. Now, just like with the funds, we can make this as easy or s advanced that as we enjoy doing it right now, I opted for four phones. You will be fine with just two. If you don't want to go too deep into it and colors are similar, you don't have to go too deep into it. But I want to show you where you can find all of the resource is to make the exploration as deep as you would like to, because I find this to be a lot of fun. Now, the first thing we can have a look at is the meaning and symbolism off color. This is a great tutorial from Canada. I'm gonna put it in. The resource is now in here. They're gonna talk about what each color symbolizes. So what you might want to do is think about the colors you've been thinking about for your design. Check out what they symbolize. Have a look through editorial and see if this goes in line with your thoughts and ideas off your business. Now, for example, you might not want to have a company that sales make up, for example, and use primarily black and red as colors. Because these air really aggressive colors, You might want to go with softer colors in there. This is not set in stone. Now, remember this there are no right or wrong in here, but there are guidelines off what generally works better. Okay. And for me, I prefer to go by these guidelines, set it from the beginning so everything is put in place and then keep it simple throughout the design. Right now, the next thing we can do is to actually go ahead and generate our own color palette using canvas color palette generator. And that's what we're gonna go ahead and do. But first off, let's have a look at our current color palette. So if we go into elemental writer, I have set these back so that we can check out the different colors. Asked. They changed. You can do this too, if you want to, but this is not mandatory. This is just to show you what the difference is gonna make. So if we go to the menu button up here and then we move over to default colors, you're gonna notice that in here there are already default palettes. So if you just want to get right on with it, you can click on one of the palace here and you're gonna go ahead and get those palace right? You can see everything changes instantly, pick any palate you would like. Now I'm gonna click on discard here to go back to the original. That is currently set. So we have primary, secondary text and accent that we're gonna change the color off now. The first thing that I am going to do because I'm going to be basing the colors of this website off off the logo colors right is a really clever way off matching the design of your website. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is use canvas Kohler generator that I just spoke about click on upload image, and then I'm going to scroll down and actually use this logo that we have created uploaded , and then I'm gonna get a color palette from that uploading which is going to look like this . Now all I need to do is scroll down. And as you can see in here, I'm gonna get this beautiful color palette based off of the logo that is in here. Okay, so what I'm gonna do is decide which one of these I want to use and where. And here are a couple of tips and tricks for the future design. Now, if we go back in here, you're gonna notice that the primary caller is going to be off things such as the header. It's also in the number Counter is going to be in the number itself, which is the primary symbol off that widget. So all of the big stuff, like headers like, for example, numbers in certain testimonials, etcetera. That's gonna be using this color. Similarly, that is going to be using that fund. We decided for the primary now secondary. Same as with the fund here. We have a secondary color that is being shown below the number in here. And the second er isn't very common when it comes to L. A mentor, but it still exists, right? Takes, That's gonna be the takes that we write in an accent that's gonna be on accessories stuff such as buttons and certainly East, and certainly just that comes with it. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually set the primary into black. And the reason for this is because of that this science that we are going to make are going to contain Back cross. There's going to be a single color or a big picture. And for this, the easiest thing to do is to keep your headings and big takes in either white or black. So those are the two primary colors that I'm going to be using in the design for the headers. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm going to go back to the color palette and I'm going to click on copy right here because it's going to be coping the pitch black from the logo that we're using. Had I had a different shade of black, it would've picked that, and I would have used that instead to match with the logo. I'm gonna go back, click on primary here. I'm gonna remove this and then I'm just going to go ahead and paste that in and then I'm going to click it away like that and you can see it turns into pitch black along with the number. Now, I prefer to keep the colors really simple. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna go back and I'm gonna cook this great in here. I'm going to go back in here and I'm gonna keep the same gray for secondary like that and for the text just like that, because I don't want to play around with too many colors. Similarly with funds, I went for four. You can go with two. You can go with three. I prefer to keep a couple of more there, but it's completely up to you. I prefer to go simpler with the design colors. And then finally, the accent, We're just gonna be the button and those sort of widgets. I'm going to be using this sort of tomato color that it's taken straight from our logo because that's going to be a beautiful match throughout our website. So I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to click on Accent here, remove this, paste it in, and there we go. I'm gonna click on apply. And now I'm going to click on update and we have chosen our colors. Super easy, Super nice. Now, later on, you can also notice that there are certain callers like the blue still popping up when I over my mouse over at the menu here. So that is what we're gonna take care of in the next lecture. Now, if you had any problems extracting a decent color palette from Canada's generator, what you can do is use these Kohler extractor in here is also in the resource is. All you need to do is upload the file scroll down, find it There we go like this, and then you hover your mouse over. And let's say I want extract this color. You can see the Suman to the right here. Wherever I hold my mouth, I'm gonna click on it and is going to give me the color code. I copy it. I pasted inherit elementary and you have it Super simple. Now, if you really enjoy this, you want to dive deeper into colors. I'm also going to go ahead and add these to the resource is no. This is a dove zone color palette. So what? You can do here is find your own collar that do you enjoy? For example, let's say, did you really enjoy this red? So what you're going to notice is that a lot of these they are moving in unison when you are moving this. So that means if you have a certain pastoral, all of the other ones, they're gonna become pastel ass. Well, so asked, you find a nice color that you like, for example, this red. The other colors are going to be matching up together with them. So if you really enjoy this and you want to go, the more advanced route you can go ahead and do this, find your own color palette. Then just copy paste the callers from down below here and finally, for your inspiration. This is also the resource is here. We're gonna have a couple of example websites of how they are using different collars in order to design their website. You can see a lot of people really bold with the callers in here mixing matching a lot. It's really exciting because this sign is so personal. You can design it the way you want to. I prefer to go a little bit more simplistic with the colors, but in the end, these aren't set in stone. Neither is the front. We can always go back, change the collars and change the global values any time we want throughout our design, right as we see fit. Now in the next lecture, guys, we're gonna move on and we're going to be changed in the colors off when we hover are mouse over here at the menu because they're still blue, and I want them to be in the same red as this one. So now in the next lecture, what we're gonna go ahead and do is change the color off. When we hover our mouths over at the menu here, you can see that it turns into a blue. I wanted to turn into the same red that we have in our logo and that we have set for our accent caller, right? The same goes with the further down here. You can see that turns into blue. I want to turn it into that red. So keep your website open or wherever that you have extracted your colors from so that we can use that color code. Of course, If you have your own course or different color codes, just go ahead and use those and this sign freely. This is how I do. It is supposed to be a step by step to help you, but you always have free hands in the end. That's what's so much fun with the design. As long as we're doing the important elements together, right, So seeing the next lecture, guys. 60. Match Your Menu & Footer Colors: Okay, guys. So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and match the color palette that we just did created or just copied into our main menu into our links and into our food. Er, right, Because you want to match everything. Right now, we have the color palette from the logo rights here. But when I hover my mouse over at the main menu, he turns into light blue. And this doesn't really match. We wanted to match the other colors like the button color, for example to give it a nicer overall decided way, way more professional. So what I'm gonna do first and foremost Eastern, I'm gonna click here, and I'm going to hyperlink this body so I can show you what the hover effect is and what the color is going to be If you don't know what a hover effect is, I'm gonna show you that in a second. I'm just gonna go ahead and click on insert link and write Google dots. Come. There we go. So now when I click on this is gonna take me to Google, but noticed that when I hover my mouse over at this link, it turns into a bluish color. This is called hover effect. When something changes the color or size, for example, when you hover over it, So we're gonna change that color as well. What we want to do now is that we want to go to the upper left corner, click your distant menu button and then click on default colors. And we just want to leave this up here so that we have quick access to the different colors . Then we're gonna click on this logo here, right click and click Gone open link in New tab. And from here, we're gonna go ahead and click on Customize, and then we're gonna go to general Options and left here. And then we're going to click on general styling to the left here. So this is where we style our colors. And in the first column up here, where we have primary hover primary and main border colors, this is where we can change this area. So the first thing we're gonna do is click on Primary Caller and go ahead and change this collar. Now, remember I told you about the over effect, so it makes sense to change the harbor effect color. You're gonna change this caller variety here, but for some reason, In Ocean WP, the primary color is going to be the Harvard color. So this encompasses both off these. I have no idea why they have done this in the design, but currently, this is how it works. So we're gonna follow those rules. So what we want to do is change this color this light, bluish color into this red collar. OK, so I'm going to click on this collar here, and then I'm gonna go back to elementary in the previous tab. I'm going to click on this red, hear the accent color, and then I'm just gonna go ahead and select this code. I'm going to cop it and then go back in here. I'm going to remove this code, and I'm going to paste this code in. Okay, So now look at what happens when I hover my mouse over at the menu, right? It changes into that very caller that we're using as a theme that is in our color palette. Now, if this doesn't change color instantly, just click it down like this, and then you can click it up again. This will usually set the caller, so this looks really good. But if we go down to the body color right here, we can see that this turns red as well, which is really nice. But it has a darker color because it is hyperlinked, right. We can also see the down here where it says what we have our cookie notice. This is gonna turn red. But the main color dates natural color is so dark that we can't even read this cookie notice. Similarly, we have weiter and this turns into red as well. So we can change all of these. Ask. We wish. Now what I'm going to want to change is actually this caller that it changes into because I don't want the hyperlinks to be in this sort of grayish color. So you hardly can tell that it is a hyperlink. I actually wanted to be in red. So what I'm gonna do, it's click this one down and then I'm gonna go down. We're gonna go through this in a second. Don't worry. I'm gonna go down. I'm gonna skip site background because we're gonna do that in l a mentor and I'm gonna go down to link color, right? So the first thing is, the caller itself is gonna be the natural color off. The link is going to go for all hyperlinks, including this That goes to our privacy policy. And what I like to do here is actually to go to color and use the very same color combination that I use for the logo, the accent collar, etcetera. And so I'm just gonna go ahead and remove it, paste it in, and there we have this nice red color. But the thing is, now when I hover my mouse over, nothing happens. Right then we kind of wanna have that pop effect like this one looks really nice that something happens when you hover over. It's very professional. So what I'm gonna do is go down to caller hover right here, and I'm going to insert the same caller here as well. But now I'm going to go down slightly in this so it gets a lighter shade off red and click it away like that. So look at this. Now you see how it sort of pops a little bit when I hover my mouse over, and that just means that when you hover your mouse over a link, something happens. And that is a very professional feeling to have similarly privacy policy. Put your mouse over. It lightens up. It's such a nice thing you're gonna notices. Hover Think is on most places on our website. So look at this. Okay. But, Tom, for example, if I hover my mouse over noticed it gets darker over a mouse over the privacy policy, it gets lighter. We get the feeling that something happens. Right then we have the privacy policy and the terms and conditions, and all we need to do is keep these asset is because, honestly, I think this looks really good. So this is now our primary color. I'm really happy about this. So what I'm gonna do is go ahead and click on Publish. Now, there's also something here called Main Border Caller. Now the main border call if it's actually this little line that separates the top menu itself. So if I would go into the main border color and I actually press this into white look in here. What happens? So I click on white and you can see that the border disappears and Now this melts into the website and this can be a nice advantage if it fits your design, right. You want to put a menu on your background, But if you want to keep you menu separate, you can go ahead and click it back by clicking on default here and you get this tiny little line that separates everything. Now, off course, I could go ahead and change this and get it into a red line as well. But in my opinion, this doesn't look as nice. I actually prefer like this gets a nice separation. What we also want to notice is that four our top menu that would not have pretty much edited completely as we want. There is something up here that says, Place your content here. Because of these, we get another main border caller up here. So what we're gonna do is actually go ahead and remove this so called top menu. This is called the top menu part so that this border color doesn't even exist. We're only gonna have the lower one right. Then we're gonna have this really nice effect when we actually scroll on our home page. Because right now, when we are white towards white, we have the white in the menu and we have white in the background. It still separates this border color, separates the menu from the background. We remove it, it doesn't separate. And I really like that. Look off the separation for the menu. So let's go ahead and remove this top menu space that we can make an even nicer fit for the menu here. Top menu, regular menu. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on publishers. Make sure that you always publish and save everything you do. And then I'm gonna click on back here, and then I'm gonna click on back once again, we're going to go down to where it says top bar, right? And then we're gonna go to general and then I'm gonna disabled this Hope bar, and you're gonna notice that this actually disappear. Some people call it the top menu. Some people call it the top bar, but it any rate you click in here to customization top are uncheck it, click on publish, and we have a much nicer look on our website and Onley one main border color. So we have the menu we have the top many or the Tope are all gone Guys. Great job. Let's move onto the next lecture. We have fitted everything. See there. 61. Anatomy of Sections: Okay, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be learning about sections what they are and how to use them. So this part in L. A mentor is called a section, and I have previously been referring to these squares. So these squares are known as sections, and a section allows you to add a bunch off different columns in them so that you are able to design pretty much anything you want. So to break it down, the first thing we have that is the section part right that we can drag anything into. Now, inside of that section, we can create a column, and it's inside off this column that we are going to add in our element. If you remember on Element, it could be on image. It could be a header. It could be a video. It could be a text, basically a counter. Anything. It could be anything that is called on element. It could also be a widget off any sort, right to be anything. So in this example, I've added in a picture and notice, because I have one element. That picture is most likely going to cover up the entire column. If you wanted to. They're sizing is completely up to you, but the element covers that call him now. Columns are completely customizable. So if you wanted to, you could also be splitting that call him up into. So that means if you could completely change the output in what you are creating, for example, you are able to add in two elements instead. So rather than having one big picture, you could be putting one picture to the left. And then you could be adding a piece of text to the rights. Okay, so now we have a product to the left and we can have a description off the product to the right. And because of these columns, it's so easy to center them and make sure that everything is in the right place on our website. So if you wanted to add in something additional in here, we could make a call them inside off this column. I guess they call that column exception. Joking aside, it called him inside a column. So that would just mean that we add in another piece like this. Okay, so, to the right column, we have added in another call in where we can add one additional element and that could, for example, be a by now bottom. It could be anything we want to add in there. So whenever you're doing anything on your website inside of your section, you wanna have an idea off? How many columns am I going to need here? What is the outlook? What is to decide that I am going for Because pretty much the sky is the limit here, guys, because you might as well have had four columns. And inside of all of these columns, we could be adding reviews. For example, we could be adding in testimonials or a bunch of products because all of these columns are gonna hold elements. And what that elements is is completely up to you, which is why elemental is so easy to use. And once you understand the sections that call them somewhat elements to add, all of these really professional looking websites are suddenly very easy to recreate. Now, if we wanted to, all of these reviews or testimonials or products could go from 4 to 6 and were able to add elements into each off these and now suddenly we could be having a product display. Instead, the sky is the limited. Just know that inside off each section there's going to be columns. One called him several columns doesn't matter. But that's gonna be decided by how you want to be placing your elements. If you have a gallery, for example, you could have one column and just one big gallery, or you could have several columns and add in the picture manually. Let me show you a practical example. So if we have a look at Pat Flynn's website smart, passive income, we can see that he very similar to us Or rather, we very similarly to him have our menu up here, right? Same goes for us. We have our menu up here. Then he is an additional menu. But we're not gonna need that down below. Here he has his first section right. This is where we are going to be designing our home page for the first section, dragging everything in here now how big you want to make your sections? That's gonna be completely up to you. But in my opinion, the most practical solution and the way I'm going to be designing the whole page is going to be by dividing up the section, depending on what we're adding in. So for example, here we have the so called above the fold. If you remember, that's because this is the top layer that you're seeing on your screen. So in here he has added, obviously a background picture off himself that's completely white. There's a picture of him and his signature here to the right and to the left. In here he has added in a header. And brilliant, let me help you build a passive income driven online business down below. This is an additional header is just a smaller one. Maybe on H three over on h four. We're gonna go more in depth into what they are and what they mean later on in the course. But basically H one is the biggest. H six is the smallest. Hendrawan headed to head or three header for etcetera. And then he has added in a learn more button in here that has a hover over effect. And all of this now when we look at it, is actually very simple. But it's so effective and it is so beautiful. And this is his above the fold design. Okay, so I would put all of this into one section and then we could add in the columns, for example. We could have divided. They called him in to here where, as we have one background picture of him and then one white called him, or we could be having one big column where this is actually just one big picture. It all depends on the practicality on the picture, on the material, how you want to decide. It's Sarah. There's not really any right or wrong in here. We work with what we have, right, But then we want to add in a header, another head or any bottom so we can see that Perhaps in here we wanna have one big column . And here we wanna have three columns and we're gonna go more in depth into how this works in an upcoming lecture, because we're going to be designing our own homepage, and we're gonna have a similar look to this with a description with a nice big background picture and a button, because I absolutely love this. The sign So this could be one section scrolling down. We have the ass feature in the social proof and it says the New York Times, Forbes Lifehacker Inc. Pro blogger. And this is really nice because all you need to do is have this part as one section create a black background, and then you could add in a text or a very tiny Hedren here and right as featured in. And then you would just adding a picture here, a picture here, here, here and here and these could be columns. It's that simple. So that would be 12345 and six columns. It's that simple. And then just add them in along each other on a role like this. So there's a lot of different customer stations you can do. Or it could be one big section with one big calling with just a picture added into it. Scrolling down. We have the email often. Same thing. This could be one section in here, and then we have a header added down below. We have a smaller header and then we have the email open and then the bottom added, and this is all super simple by design. But the lovely thing is how professionally clean it looks now, if you wanted to, you could have this and this and this inside off the same section. In my opinion, that's not practical, but you can do it so there's not so much right or wrong in here. It's more about practicality and how you want to divide the different columns and the different elements that you work with. But now that we're starting to learn about the section about the columns about the elements , and we know that everything is just drag and drop and we have done the framework with the pre designed with the global values, things aren't really looking so difficult anymore, are they? So what we're gonna do is if we're gonna move on, continue learning and then start designing our own home page looking forward, today's guys follow along my step, and you're also going to be having an awesome home page in no time seeing the next lecture 62. Background Part 1: Alright, guys. So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and start designing the background for our home page. Now, before we go ahead and do that, we're gonna want to go to menu in here in l a mentor and check out our color picker. Now, the color picker is gonna be the default colors that you can choose from when you are designing. So we have already said our global values, which means that these are gonna be the primary values when we're, for example, adding in a headline war. When we're adding in a text, for example, a certain fund You remember that lecture, right? But here's a color picker. So when we are designing thes, they're gonna be the primary color for us to choose from. Now, what I want to do is actually add in some of our color palace in here, for example, I want to have the reddish instead of perhaps the blue, and I also want the lighter version off. Great. So I'm just gonna go back and go to default colors. Go to the grey in here. I'm gonna cope with this, and then I'm gonna go back, go to color picker and then replace one of these gray with that code in here like that. Okay, I'm gonna do the same for next. And I really recommend that you do the same as well to make sure that you have the color palette. Ask your default choice because you're going to notice us. We go, it's gonna be a lot of different. Possible customization is for us, and I'm going to remove this kind of bluish color we have here like that and paste it in and there we go. So now when I check out the color picker, I have added the pallets that I really wanna have in there. Okay, Might be more might be less for you. So let's get started editing our background for our home page. Now, before we get started, there are a couple of things that I want you to know about that's gonna decide which sort of background pictures that we will be using especially for you, since you're gonna have your own website with your own goals in your own genre, niches, products, etcetera. So that is if we look get Pat Flynn's website Smart passive income, which we have done a lot of times because it is that good. You're gonna notice that he has something that is called a fool with design. So that means that his image, his background image that happens to be white. Here it goes all the way out to the ends. If we scroll down, here's another widget down here using a black background color that goes all the way to the end. Now the content itself is box. You can see that this header is in line with this smaller header is in line with this button that is in line with this as featured in etcetera, etcetera that's called box content. But the background, the images here they are full with. Now, if we look at WP beginner dot com, for example, you're gonna notice that they have everything super boxed in here and they are not using the full with feature. So this is a completely different design. So that means that for our purpose, as we're gonna add in a big and nice background picture in here, we're gonna want it to be more Horace Santel in order to have this sort of full with look. And if we had on a look like this, for example, we might want to use something that is a bit more vertical. So this is the first thing that we want to know before we go ahead with our design. So these air both great examples as websites. Now, in order to find our background image unless you have your own, we're gonna go ahead and use picks obey because there's a bunch of beautiful, high resolution pictures in here that you can use free of charge, no attribution required. Of course, if you have your own, you can use that. And if you can't find what you're looking for, you can use shatter stock dot com. I'm gonna add that into resource is as well. But before we move on again, there a couple of things to think about here. We want to know about the focal point off our image. Okay, so if you are using a picture off yourself, you want to know that that picture off you is going to be slightly more centered, right? And the reason for that is when we start making it mobile and table responsive. Ah, lot of these sides are going to be disappearing from the picture. So if it is important that you are in the picture, you want to make sure that you have a clear focal point in that picture. Similar. If you have a product or something, or someone you representing Now I'm gonna go ahead and search for an image that is going to give a great feeling when they come to our website to the focal point will not be that important. But I say I'm gonna show you how to do the adapted and responsive versions. Okay, so the first thing I'm gonna do is search on image. Now, the key word here can be anything that fits me and Jesper. We're doing courses focusing on business and marketing. But really what they are doing, the benefits of those courses is actually to create freedom to give result and to inspire people. So I'm gonna use one of two key words here. There's gonna be freedom. I was gonna be inspiration that I want the feeling to be when they enter our website. So let's years inspiration here. I'm gonna write inspiration, and I'm just gonna go ahead and search there and then I'm gonna click on orientation and choose horizontal because we're going to use the full with option. And now, personally, for me, the pictures that I prefer and I look for, it's the kind of nature pictures they will go, nature and landscape gonna choose that. And then I'm just gonna go ahead and scroll down until I find something. Now, there are a couple of good options in here, but what I really actually like is this one, okay? And the reason that I like this one so much is because I can already see the outline that I'll be using so I could use a header here. I could use a text description here and a button somewhere around here. And because we often read from the left to the right, depending on where you are in the world, I prefer to put the content on the left. You could put it on the right or in the middle, for example. But with this guy to the right and the feeling this preacher produces, I really want to put it in this area. So I'm gonna go ahead and download it. You always want to make sure the license. Okay? No, attribution Great free for commercial use. Great, because this is commercial use. We're gonna go ahead and click on free download and make sure that you're not downloading the huge version. Because in a dream world, we don't want our website itself to be bigger than a couple of megabytes movement 345 megabytes. Because the bigger our website is, the more there is to load this loader loading time. Worst sdo worst user experience. So we're gonna go for this size rather than this size because look at the size difference that is huge. So and there's gonna be no loss of quality using this. So we're going to go for this quality and we're still gonna have Smush You've been following the course to help us. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on download right there and then I'm gonna go back. So in here, I'm gonna go to the elements. Now the first thing to notice is that there's nothing going on here. In order for me to get a section to work on, I actually need to use a digital elements and pull it out. Drop it. And now suddenly I have a section that goes around here. I have a column in here and inside. It's called him. I have the element and that is this text. No, we're not going to be working on the title in this lecture. That will be for upcoming lecture. Now, in order to get started. What we're gonna do is go to the middle here where it says and it's section and we're going to click on that one. And now we're able to edit this entire section. So the first thing that we're gonna want to do is move over to style. There's a lot of options in here. We're gonna go through them, but let's fill our purpose. First, we're gonna go to style and then background and then click on Normal because hover, remember this when you put your mouse over So we're gonna go to normal background type and we're going to click on Classic, and then I'm gonna click the plus there, and I'm just gonna go to upload files and I'm gonna select that file and upload it and there would go, It's uploaded. I'm gonna select it and click on insert media. So, looking to the left here, we can see that this is the image is really cool. I love the feeling it produces. But as you can tell, it's not really giving the results we're looking for, right? So the section right now it's just way too small. If I head down and I click on preview changes, we can see that pretty much two footer And these well are supposed background image are the same size. I don't think this would be fair to Well, I wouldn't be a proud website designer with this result. So what we're gonna do is that we're gonna head back to lay out, and we're gonna increase the size of the section so we can have This is a background image . In other words, the above the fold background, this sign. OK, so we're gonna go to height here where it lay out and then go to hide. And then we're gonna change from the fault to minimum height like that. And the benefit with this is that you get to choose the height yourself, OK? So as you can see, the more I scrolled the bigger or rather than more height we get now, the image still isn't sized but we're getting more height for the image to be in inside off this section. So I'm gonna go with now. I think there's a little big I'm gonna go with 700. Usually it's a good one. We can just go ahead and click on preview changes to see how it looks. We can see that it covers everything. Oh, so nicely, really loving this. Now we can tell that the resolution isn't the way it's supposed to be. So we're gonna go back and we're gonna change the resolution off it. We're gonna move over back to style in here, and then we're gonna go down to size, okay? And we're gonna go from default to cover, so see the difference that this one makes now The cover means that is gonna cover The image is going to cover the entire section right now. If we were using something else like contain, then the image would be containing itself, meaning it would keep its size. And perhaps it wouldn't be faded as well. It's like this. If I use it like that, you can see that it has is doubling itself down below head here because it's having a different for solution. So basically, whenever I add a background image, I always go with cover. Always, always. And we get a really nice look like that. I can move over down to preview changes, and we can see the things are really looking beautiful. I am loving this. Okay, so we actually have a nice beginning going on here. Now we're gonna move through a couple of different options. I'm gonna tell you what they are, and then we're gonna add some additional things to make this look even better. 63. Background Part 2: So if we started layout, there's a couple of options in here. We're gonna go through most of them because we're gonna use so many ask, we go anyway. And then this lecture would be 50 minutes instead of keeping it a little lower. Much lower. Hopefully. So the 1st 1 is a stretch section. Now, I don't keep this on because I prefer to set it myself. And why I'm gonna show you in a little bit moving down. We have the content with how we want the content to be. Either we could have it box. We could have it full with now. Remember I told you that both Pat Flynn and WP beginner they have their content box, meaning they leave a little space on the side. If we look at the preview, you can see that there is a space going on on this side right here. Right? So if I change this to fool with instead and I click can preview, you're going to see that this text is gonna jump all the weights. You the left here because it's no longer boxed. So what I prefer to do is use full sized background images but box my content. So I'm gonna keep this box to keep everything more in line and more professional. It is also gonna transfer much more for the responsiveness off tablets and cell phones. And then we have the call them gap. Wanna have any gaps in our columns? We might come to use this as we add in mawr columns and more elements. We also have the minimum height. We could have feet to screen. We could have the fault. Now the feet to screen usually doesn't work that well because it doesn't match. So I prefer to use the minimum height said it myself and then we can also click in here, right? So now I can also move down to the tablet version and see how the background is going to look. And this is why focal point is so important that I told you about because if, for example, this guy too right here was unimportant or an integral part of this design, then I would be quite disappointed to learn that he is not even included in the tablet version. So it's so important that you make sure that you know your focal point and make sure that you can center it more so we can adapt to the tablet version and to the cell phone version . But what we can also do here is make these more responsive by customizing them ourselves. Right now, you can see that if you want the full image, we don't get to cover the entire screen. So that's gonna be your own decision. How you want to design that? Maybe that's not important, but I actually prefer to cover the screen more. So I'm gonna go something like that. So it still looks better than the previous because they have almost far more assumed in. But it doesn't show everything, but with this one since the focal point, or the image is an important beyond the feeling that is completely okay. Now, we also have the cell phone going on here. You can see the tolerance. See, it's a is an air balloon. Not very impressive, honest reselling able in this right. But the image actually looks really beautiful, but I still want to change this up a little bit now. If I go ahead and I do it like this, you can see that the air balloon has a much less central role right now. You get this whole view and everything, you still get the feeling. So it's so important to make sure that everything looks good on the the tablet and on the cell phone. And we're gonna go and have a couple of these run throughs asked. We go right is such an important part of the design. So we have these and then we also have the column position. Now, remember, this is the column. This is the text. Let's move back to this stuff. There we go. So right now it's in the middle and we're gonna keep it there because we're not gonna be playing around with the title yet, But we can move it to the top is gonna bump right up there. We could move it to the bottom. We're gonna keep it in the middle now. We also have the content position right where we wanted to be. If this should be assumed in, for example, if you wanted to focus on the top middle bottom, etcetera to make sure that we set which are the priority, I generally leave this on fault. And then we have overflow and generally you're not going to be using the overflow. Now, the overflow is gonna be if you fix any using its so called fixed or absolute values. In other words, if you're gonna set, for example, a butts in here that's going to stay with you all the time, no matter how you move the screen or which platform you are on now, the problem with that is sometimes it kind of breaks the theme or the display. When any task is to call overflow, it can move outside of the content box, for example. So if you put this to hidden, there's usually gonna take care of that. But that is such an advanced feature that we're not gonna use this. I actually don't think generally contributes that much, Right. So then we're gonna go through style up here, and we already set our background. Now there are more types of background weekends we can use a greedy impact from. We could be playing around with the colors use ingredient colors, meaning that we use different colors to fade into each other and also interesting guys. We can add a background video like we saw in some off the templates earlier. Now it's super easy. Either we can go ahead and add in a video link or we go to our media library and we just grab the link from there. It really doesn't matter. And it works the exact same way as when we use the background picture, the difference being that we're gonna set a start time and on end time. And we can also have a background fall back. And as you can see, discovering which will replace the back from video on mobile and tablet devices generally because they can't handle the video, it's gonna language not gonna look good because the resolution doesn't feed in. You already saw what happened to the image, right? So it's gonna be a so called background fall back, and then we have the hover option is something interesting is gonna happen as we put our mouths over. So if you know how to add a background image is to really the same with a background video , you have to set the minimum height. You have to make sure that everything is contained. Everything looks good really the same and then grabbed a link from YouTube or from your media library. Okay? And that is the background. We're gonna go back to our classic in here, scrolling down. We have the position, right? We can decide. We want the position to be. When it comes to this, the section we could have its center center, center, bottom center. We can have it to the top rights, etcetera, etcetera. And this is gonna be important when it comes to your product display. When it comes to your, for example, person that you're representing here. Remember? I was talking about that earlier. So if you have, for example, a person here in the middle and you want that person to be in focus and when I had a little bit of text over what you could do is check out the mobile version. Just click on here, go in there. And then we could change this default display. Maybe go to this center center and you see, we get a completely different look, right? We could say that this one, it's looking much, much better already. We could have the bottom right, and then we get that guy or we could have the bottom left. The important part is we want to know our focal point. Okay? Because the focal point is gonna be where we set this position so that the product is always in focus regardless off the size of discreet. What device? They're using a tablet on their desktop on their cell phone. You know, maybe under oclock in the future. I don't know what it is, but we want to make sure that what we're aiming to show here is going to be showing okay. And if it doesn't matter, like in our case, we can keep it on default. But otherwise you really need to change these and match them in. And then we have the attachment. If you wanna have a scroll, we wanna have it fixed like it's gonna be still all the time. This is this is not gonna move like right. So if I scroll here, you see that we're actually scrolling inside of this image. But if I have it on scroll like this, you can see that we are the images being with the scroll, so to speak. And then we have a repeat version and we're not gonna have any use Self. We're gonna leave it on the fault. We have the size that we decided on the cover. We can also use it on contain or custom or order or default. But really, if you want to have a background image that covers everything, we're gonna go with cover and then we have the background Overly. This is such an amazing and interesting feature. Now, what we can do here is actually put on overlay over this entire background. So in other words, we can make sure that we are, for example, making a picture darker. We could make a picture lighter. We could even combine pictures. So we get this nice, fading effect or like we're going to do in this case, we're gonna put on overlay there's gonna match with our color palette from our logo. So check this out. We're going to go ahead with background type, and we're gonna go with classic and I'm not gonna add an image. I'm just gonna go with color here, and then I'm gonna select that Red witch is ours. And as you can tell, it makes the entire image red. But check this out. Now, if I move it all the way down, that means that nothing is added from please capacity. But if I add on a little bit, we can see that currently, the theme is quite blue. But if I add on a little bit like this, you can see the things were starting to turn a little bit more red. And that is such an amazing thing, because that is gonna fit with our theme. Right? So have a look at this. It looks so natural to meet list. And if I remove this filter now, this background overly, we can tell how dark and blew it is like black and blue. So all we need to do is just adding a slight capacity like that looks supernatural. And suddenly the website become so much more professional because we are matching it with our color palette is where the color pick it comes in handy as well, because we can just instantly go and grab our color that we picked from the logo. So this is really perfect. And that is the background overlay. You can also do with the hover if you want to, and there are more things you can do. You can use something that's called CSS Filters. We're not gonna use those kind off features in here. You can use a blend mode, which is gonna be like templates for different blends. We're not gonna use those either. Like, there's a lot of options in here. We have the borders and the borders is basically gonna be the borders around the section itself. So if I add a so called solid border like that and then I adding the with for 50 now these are all chained together. You can see I get this board or all around here and what I could do with that is I could change the color off. The border, for example, has put it in this blue. Now, this doesn't look very good. Maybe if you want to add some wallpaper effect some picture effect or something, But you just so you know that you can play around with this. You can also use the hover effects so that when you put your mouse over, you get this small. This tiny border kind of creates this three D effect, but we're gonna go through that later, so don't worry about it. We're not gonna really be using this. I just want you to know what they are, so you don't stress about them as we go. So we're not gonna be stressing about this one. I'm gonna remove this for rapacity. They would go and I'm gonna put this to none. There we go. We don't want any border going on. And with the border, we also have a shadow that we cannot. We're gonna close this one now that we have something that's called a shape divider. Now, the shape dividers really interesting because as we go, you're gonna notice that this can make your website really look professional and put a beautiful design. Ask you transition from one section from the above, the full to something below the fold. So, for example, we can go ahead and we could use clouds. And now we're using the top parts. As you can see, this many is melting into the clouds is melting into this section. It creates a really nice and beautiful Well, they call it a divider, and there's a lot of different things we can do with it. We can customize it like this. How much we want much want to sue, may not it. It's a lot of things we can do. We can change, too. Certain triangles, waves. There's a lot of different effects. We can add a certain color height. We can put in a flip on it, right? Invert, bring to front. It's a lot of things we can do, and similarly, we can do the same on the bottom. And if you don't want any, all you need to do is click unknown and you won't have any. Sometimes with L. A mentor. For some reason, the shape divider gets looked up like this. Now all you need to do is click on update to make sure that you have all of your changes saved, and then you update the page and you're going to see that this divider that you removed is actually gonna be gone. So there it is. It's completely gone. So I'm going to do is click in here and go up and ended the section up here so continuing in the style we have gone through the shape divide. And finally we have the typography and we don't need to touch the typography because we already set our global values for those right, so does nothing. We need to do in here. And finally we have the advanced features you can do a lot of things like you can add in certain emotion affects you can add in responsiveness to hide on certain platforms like you can hide certain things on your cell phones, how certain things with a tablet in order to make the design look better. But we're gonna go through those ass. We go closer in the advanced section. So right now I'm super happy about the background. I think it looks really nice, clean and professional. And if we go down and we click on preview changes right there, we can see that this is currently what we have added to our website, and I'm really happy about that. This is gonna be phenomenal and noticed this reddish overlay going on to really liking this . So let's move on to the next lecture and start editing our headline. Right. Which is gonna be this one? See your there, guys 64. Title: All right, guys, saying this lecture, We're gonna go and set the heading off for website order. Rather the title that we want to beat showing here. So if we look at our logo, it says Robin and Jesper courses to change your life so that we don't want to use that courses to change your life. Slogan again. Rather, we want to be more descriptive off. What the courses is about. What we are offering that issue, Nique. So let me show you an example here. Now, if we go to Pat Flee and his work is that a smart passive income dot com? We can see that he writes. Let me help you build a passive income driven online business. So that is what he is offering. He is offering to help. You lost me to build a passive income driven online business straight to the punch. We know what we're getting here. That's the sort of description that we're looking for in our heading, right? If you go to wordpress beginner as well, it says Beginner's Guide for WordPress. Start your WordPress Blawg in minutes. This is really impressive. And this is really good, because I know what I'm getting. I know what the website is about. There's no confusion. So this is exactly what we're looking for. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do here, and I think you should follow suit with your website and with your own title is to click on this header here. And then we're gonna change the takes and I'm gonna write something like business made Easy . Let us show you how. And now we can see that everything here is written in a row, right? Because we only have one column and they call them. It's really wise. Everything. All of the text goes out long like this. But I'm actually going to separate this so that we get this piece of text down below if it looks good. But at least for now, that's what I want to do. But that takes itself. Is business made easy letters show you how so? What we are promising here is that we want to make sure the business the business that we're offering here is easy Business made easy. Let us show you house. We're offering to help them making business easy. And I think a lot of people out there kind of feel like business is tricky. Business is hard and we pride ourselves asked teachers to making complex things simple. And I really hope you guys feel the same. So we have our slogan which says Courses to change your life rights. We already know it's about courses Robin and Jesper. And then we have business made easy letters show you how, which is a really cool the title or description off what we're doing. Trying to summarize that all in one. So let's start editing this a little bit, right? So the first thing that I'm gonna want to do is make this bigger. So I'm gonna clicking on the fold and I'm gonna click on X l to make this way. Way bigger. There we go. This is looking much better already. And then when it comes to HTML tag, I'm gonna keep this on age two. And the reason for that is if you keep it on H one, which is naturally bigger, that's gonna mess up the search engine because the search engine is looking for a description off your website from H one. That's why I want to keep most of the content on age to okay, we're going to go through this morning s CEO section. So you want to keep it to age two to age six? I'm gonna leave this on age two and I'm gonna have the alignment to the left for now. This might change as we go. There's no preparation here in how I'm gonna make this title. This is the signing ass we go, which is probably what you're gonna do with your website as well or with more website that may come your way. So this is very educational. And then we might paste in a link here if we want to link to something. But we're not gonna do that. We just wanted to be descriptive. Let's move over to style up here Now appear in style. We're gonna do something important. We're gonna change the takes color now, As you can see, we have a rather dark background, okay? And we also have these red back front overlay, which is beautiful, but the black takes just isn't working out. And this is why I'm so happy that we selected are color palette. Because what I'm gonna do is go ahead and click here and then I'm gonna select white. Now, check this out. This pope's guys, this is looking so much better. And this is why the global values are great and we they're gonna come in really handy when we're editing. But we're going to be changing things along the way as well. So as we can see, this white takes it looks beautiful in and make things pop big time. I'm really liking this. If we go to typography in here, we're not gonna change the phone. That, I mean, that is that it's set already. But we can't further change the size like this if we would want to. I'm gonna go with something like this. I wanted rather big, right? The weight. That's gonna be the boldness we've already set that I'm not gonna use it. But the transform is actually really important, at least in this case, because I want to use this in upper case letters. So look at this title and asa use upper case letters. You can see that this pope's much more. This is much more off a title right now off a proper header. You could also be using something as like lower case or capitalized normal default. But I really enjoy using it with the upper case. We have style. If you want to use it in italic, for example, you want to use in an oblique There's a lot of different options we can use in the normal. I just keep it on the phone because the default is general is the normal. I don't want to do anything with this. I like this rather stable style going on right here. Then we can decorate it with a line. But we're not going to do that. We're not gonna make it fluffy, right? I like it clean. We can go ahead and change the line length here. As you can see, we're affecting the call them going on. I'm just gonna hit common set to reset it around, do it and then we can play with the letter spacing. But honestly, that usually destroys the font or we're not gonna play with that either. I'm gonna click on command and said for undue There goes I'm gonna press this one down. I'm really liking this so far. And then we can also add in a shadow shoot. We want to do that now. I'm generally not a big fan off playing with shadows and playing with this sort of effects . If I like what I see, which I do right now. So I'm actually not gonna do anything with this. If you want to play with Shadow, you can go ahead and add a color can be a darker color. Could be a color palette. And then just go ahead and play with the blurred, the horizontal, the vertical. And you're gonna notice the change just that it makes in the background right here. You can see it going on and said it as you want. I'm going to click on back to default because I don't want to use it at all that we have the blend mode and the blend mode is gonna be like templates and we're not gonna be using in the temple is going on because we have already said or on color, right. If I you scream, for example, that's gonna add a certain effect for use difference, that's gonna add a certain effect, I'm going to keep it on normal, and then we can move on to advanced in him. This is where things start to get a little bit interesting because in here we can change the margins, as we saw earlier as well. So if I said the margins to 50 I get to expand this entire column. So you get a bit more options, not only off how and where you are putting the takes, but also for the other columns are around. So we're going to be playing with this one. We're finishing these homepage up a little bit more towards the end. How we wanted to look like and then we have the padding is that we can change as well, which has a similar effect. We also have the said index CSS CSS class and this is all for the coding. We're not going to be using any of these. And in here we have things such as motion effects and motion effects. They can be handed, as you can see, if I could weaken, fade in here, for example, we're going to get a certain effect on this sticks. So if I click on fading down, we're gonna get a certain effects. If I go down and previewed, we can see what's gonna happen when the site loads. So this is the previous and this is where we are right now. And this is how the text pops in. Now, what I don't like with this is that it kind of takes away from the user experience. In my opinion, if it fits with your design, absolutely use it. I mean, you can make some really impressive stuff with this, but I prefer them or clean. Look, you want to go into the website, you wanna grab the information you're looking for? You wanna have a nice experience and then move on with your life generally, And most of the time, these effects are gonna take up space. So I'm not gonna play with them here because I'm liking this clean look and I don't feel like they're gonna contribute. Don't limit yourself. Play with them as much as you want. You're gonna have an eye for this. Most definitely. So I'm gonna click down motion to fix that. We also have background. And remember, now we're working with this column. So any background, for example, background color that I'm adding. There's gonna be inside of this column. So this is the section This section is really big right now. We made it huge. And inside the section, we have the background image and insight off these section. We have the call them. We have gone through this before and inside of this column. I can change the color. So look at this, for example. Now I made the color the background color off the calling Black looks terrible. I'm gonna click on clear, and I'm not going to use that. But I want to show you that you can. So the Harbury effect. It's also very interesting because if I use the harbor effect, for example, and I go in and I add a color, let's say that I'm gonna add a grayish color like that, something like this. So now what? I hover my mouse over. You can see that we get these effect going on, and this doesn't look two nights right now, but you can actually make things look really nice. Especially later on in the courts. When we start adding in into the courses section and you hover your mouse over, you wanna have this hover effect because it makes everything look so much more professional . But we're not gonna use it for the home page on this section on this place. So I'm gonna click, unclear, gonna click this one down and I'm gonna collapse the background that we have Border and borders just like before. You can change the borders by first selecting one like this solid we can add in a number and then you get a border around the column. Where's before? We got a border around the section because we were editing in the section, but we're not going to be using that one here. I'm gonna press this one into non s Well, but the border is very similar like that. Then we have custom positioning, and right now we're using default, right? We could do something like full with, like, I've shown you the difference with full with. It's gonna take up much more space and make things very different. But we can also use the positioning, right? So the position could be something called absolute. Now, if I used, it is as absolute. I'm able to actually drag it and drop it around like this, and that means that it's going to be staying there on the screen. The problem with these would playing with this kind of absolute and fixed that is that these are usually not gonna be very responsive. So I prefer to just keep it at the fault and not play with the custom positioning because it messed this up. The responsiveness for the tablet, for cell phone and for your website at times. But there's also with the overflow function is going to keep this from messing up too much . Generally, I recommend to keep it simple and allow elemental and allow your theme to make it good inside of the borders. That is so we're gonna collapse custom position and then we have responsive and responsive part is really interesting because if we look right now and we know that we are editing this column right with this element. So if I click for example on hide on laptop here and I click this to hide and now I preview the changes, you're going to see that this text is going to disappear, right? So it doesn't actually superior in the editor, but it disappears for the final change in the preview mode, and I can do the same on the tablets. So if I use a tablet and I go down to responsible and I go to tablet. This isn't going to be showing for those with a tablet, but is going to show for those with a mobile. You don't see this in elemental, but that's gonna be the effect when people are entering the website from the cell phone or tablet like we did in a preview. Now, the interesting thing, the really good thing with this is that you can edit things for a much cleaner display, right? So if I don't like this takes, I don't want this takes to show on the cell phone. I could just click on hide on Mobile and then this is not going to show for people who enter the website on their cell phone. But if you enter it on the tablet or if you entered on the desktop, it will show the really, really bad part with this, though, is that this is still going to load, right? And the problem with that is, is that instead of making some customization to make it look good, we just remove it. Overall, it's just gonna hide it loaded, but not show it, which means that it is going to slow your website down if you use this function a lot. So if you add in a huge nice image, for example, for desktop on Lee and then you click on Heightened Tablet and Mobile, that means that they will still load on the Talbot and on the mobile. And that's going to slow the loading time down even though it's not showing. So use these really sparingly, okay? And then finally, we have the custom. See, it says, but that is a pro feature, and we're not gonna be using that anyhow. So if we go back to content, have we go back to desktop mode, we can see that this is what it looks like right now. So if I want to have this jump down, I just need to click in here and it jumps down by itself. So if I want this takes to jump down, I just need to click in here and hit enter, right. So if I hit enter, you can see that I'm able to make spaces like this. But I don't want to have this little space that I actually made in here. So we're gonna do that once again and I'm gonna hit in Enter here and now we get a much nicer look. So you don't want to hit enter in here the way I did. That's a rookie mistake from typing too fast. You want to go ahead and hit enter inside the box to make it jump down one part. So this is looking really good. I'm liking this now. I don't like the ideal position for this. If you go ahead and we could come preview changes, for example, we can see that is going to be displaying somewhere in the middle Business made easy. Let us show you how I wanted to be higher up. I wanted to be somewhere around here. But in order to get that, we have to do one off the following things. We need to go to elements and we could use something like a spacer. If I add a space or down below here, I can change the size of that spacer and I can pope it up into the position that I want. But the thing is that we're going to be adding more things in there. We're going to be adding things like we might want to use a subheading, we might We're gonna want to use a description, and we're gonna want to use a so called call to action bottom. And all of these things are going to be changed in the positions off these, for example, off this heading off the description off the subheading, etcetera. So I'm gonna leave this here for now. And then as we go along, I'm gonna continue switching the positions and adding in elements such asked the spacer to make them into this place that I want them to be. But once again, guys, this is how it looks like right now, all of the customization that we really needed to make here was to make the text white is to make a space in the text and then make sure that there is a good takes going on in here because I'm gonna put this up into up here something, and then I'm gonna have the description and I'm gonna have a call to action bottom. And I might even increase the size of this. We will see as we go, how it fits with the rest off the design. But this is what I've settled for so far. I hope you know how to create the title nicely by now. And as always, if you have any questions, go ahead and talk with us. Will be in the Q and A and one final reminder. Don't do the way I did and hit space in here. You want to click here and you want to hit space in here, right? That's how you jump down properly. Sorry about that. So, guys, I'll see you in the next lecture. 65. Description: Okay, guys. So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and set our description. Now, a description is gonna be the piece of text that is underneath the title or the header. You can use those interchangeably. What do you call it? A heading or a title. Now, if we go and check up Pat Flynn once again, we can see this. His description here is introducing himself, and he's telling us exactly what he's going to be doing. I made to show you through my own experiments. Exactly what could stop trading time for money and start building a based in that works for you. I'm here to show you how it works. Now. This fits so well. Also that he says Hi, I'm Pat Flynn because he does have a picture off himself. Now what we want to do is explain more in depth, what we're about and what we're doing. But at the same time, we have a limited amount of space. He's already using quite a bit of space or quite a bit of text. And we don't expect everyone to be reading this because of the attention spot. So I recommended we short in this down slightly and then we'll leave a little bit to be discovered. For example, he's writing. I'm here to show you how it works. That makes me want to press the button that says learn more, right. In the next lecture, we're gonna create our own button with a call to action. See, ta. Now the learn more. Here is the call to action because you inspired, but it takes You want to learn more. So what we're gonna go ahead and do is go to our website that we're creating and just have a quick look right now it looks like this, and we're gonna put the text down below here. Now, as we keep building and adding more things we're gonna add about tennis. Well, this is going to change position, which is perfect, because I want this slightly higher. But we're gonna do some adjustments, ask for go, and I'll show you how that works. So we're gonna go in here and I'm gonna click and drag the text editor and then you can see where the blue line is That showed where it's going to be put. So I'm gonna put it right below down here. Okay, so now we have this piece of text going on. Now, I have actually pre written something here. So all I'm gonna do is right. Click and click on paste and I have Britain. Are you looking to build or expand your business but don't know where to start? And letters show you how literally. And the point here is that the sort, of course, is that we're doing This sort of tutorials that we are offering are going to be on screen and we show everyone what we're doing step by step exactly the way we're doing right now. So this is so much easier to learn and understand because you see what I'm doing and I'm showing you how it works. And hopefully you also feel that this is really simple to learn from. At least this is how I learned the best. So this text, it's pretty riddle because otherwise they'd be here all day. I'm not that spontaneously creative, and we're gonna use it, but we're gonna change it up now. The first thing we're looking at here is that we're using our default color, which is great and does a fine caller, but not on this background. So I'm gonna go ahead and go to style right away. I'm gonna go to text Color, and I'm gonna change it up to whites. I'm just gonna click on white here and there we go already. It's starting to pope so much more Now, I'm also gonna go down to typography to start changing things up like this size and everything. So what I'm gonna do is pull on the size here and just make it big. You're not that big. Make it bigger. Maybe something like around four They were going to start at 40. 38 they would go. And I also want some spaces in between here. So I'm gonna have these put up in sentences. I'm gonna click care and hit, Enter and he's gonna jump down, and I'm going to remove this space. They would go, and I'm going to be doing the same thing here. I'm gonna click enter there and then I'm going to remove that little space. Okay, so right now it looks like this. Now, this is a bit too big for my taste. I'm gonna decrease the size. Let's go to maybe something like that. I think 23. I think that looks really good, but I am not appreciating the space in between here, right? I wanted to be much more collective, so I'm going to go down to the line height and I'm just gonna start playing around with these and I'm gonna have it something. Mawr. There we go. I think that looks really good and natural. Right. So I'm gonna click this down, and then I'm gonna hate preview changes, and we're going to see what's happening here. So they're ago. I think it looks much better already. However, I think it's a little bit too small. So I'm gonna go ahead and change that up. I'm gonna go in here going to typography, and I'm going to be increasing the size maybe 28. 27. Okay, I'm gonna hit preview changes once again. OK, so it's looking quite good. Now, I enjoy this because it is readable, which is really important. However, I would like actually a little bit more space. And I would like to make the size off this title bigger in comparison. So I'm gonna go ahead, go back going to typography and increase the line height Okay? Something like that. There we go. There we go. I think that looks really nice. I'm going to go ahead and click on the title here, and then I'm gonna move to style typography. And I'm going to slightly increase this to, let's say, 45. There we go. Gonna click back on this one. And now I'm gonna heat preview changes to let you see what happens. Business made easy. Let us show you. How are you looking to build or expand your business, but don't know where to start? Let us show you. Literally perfect. Really liking this. I'm gonna do one more decrease in size in here there and then finally preview against. So this is the designing process. It's gonna be this little tweaks in the little tweaks there until you're happy with what you're seeing. So I'm really enjoying this. Actually, I think this got quite perfect. Now, what I'm not enjoying is how the title is going straight into the moon right here. Okay. So what we can do is actually changed up the positioning off the background. Now, remember, we're gonna add another thing down here. That is the call to action bottom, right? We were gonna write something, like, learn more or start here, something like that. But we're gonna link that bottom to the start here, page, which we're gonna build out later. You're following along. Right? So we're explaining up here. Business made easy letters. Show you how, Right. So how are they gonna show us? We're explaining that we're all about making business into something easy. And we want to show you how we do that and that. Are you looking to build or expand your business? Well, if you are you at the right place, right? That's pretty much the underlying saying. But dont know where to start. Let us show you how literally. Really good. It's an incentive is targeting the right people. And then we're gonna have the learn more. But for the background right now, even though we might have to microchips, I want to show you how you can along the way. Micra. Just these things. They look really good. So what I'm gonna do is go to L. A mentor home here, and I'm gonna go back and click on the edit section. And then where we have style, I'm going to go down to position, You see where it is? Default. And I'm just gonna try on Let's try center center and see what happens. You're going to see that The background, the picture itself. It changes a little bit because it's changing the focal point in the background image. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on preview changes and look at the easy part there and see how it moves. And now we have the moon that has moved upright business made easy. Let us show you. How are you looking to Bill to expand your business? I don't know where to start. Let us show you how literally. So I am loving this. I'm absolutely loving it. We're fitting all of the text inside off the air balloon and under the moon, and this is gonna pop up again. But then we're just gonna micro at just the background to make everything look nice. So in the next lecture, guys, we're gonna build that will start here or learn more butts in depending on what you are interested in. But this is how I build out the title, the description and then a call to action about it. And then we have this background right? There are more options. We can play within here when it comes to the style off the description. But personally, I think that when you nail the size and when you nail the letter spacing and we're not gonna play around in a decoration weight or anything, then you're all good to go right. It looks perfect. No need to make it more complicated than it needs to be. Let's move on to the next lecture. Great job. 66. CTA Button: All right, so in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and create our call to action Bottom. So in other words, we know if we have done so far, we have set the title business made easy. Let us show you how. Then we have made a description that goes, Are you ready to build or expand your business but don't know where to start? Let us show you how literally. Now we want to allow them to take some sort of action right now for this takes a an action button that says, for example, learn more would make the most sense for your service. Perhaps you're offering a free consulting, It might say claim the offer. Word might say contact us, or it might say subscribe. Now they call to action is going to depend on first and foremost your service. But also, of course, what you are writing about the service, What you're offering on your front page. Now, the idea here is to explain what we're all about, what we do, what we have to offer and then create this call to action button that is gonna take them to start here now. We might as well have called this start here, but I want them to have the ability to learn more, which offer something different than the start here. Even though it is the same thing, right? Because they're interested and they want to learn more. Start here. That means more of a taking on action. They're starting something, but learn more. That's still just out of interest in curiosity. So it's easier for them to press that bottom generally. So we're gonna go ahead and create the button, and it couldn't be simpler. Guys, all you need to do is go ahead and click your words his button, and we're gonna drag it and put it down below. Here and now we have our bottom. So let's start editing this so it looks good and it fits the theme. Now it already does, because it has the accent color that we have set for it, which goes perfectly with our theme, so that's really handy. But I still want to change this one up right now. The first option we have up here is the type. Now we don't have to concern ourselves with that because we have already set the colors and matched it and everything. But in here we do have some interesting templates, if you will. That's gonna allow you for, for example, the green for success. Warning these air juice, you know, recommended callers for that sort of feeling or danger, which is the darker form off red. Now we're gonna go with default, which is the color that we send our color palette with our global values because it fits the themes really nicely. So we're not gonna play around with this, But the text, Of course we are gonna play around with We're not gonna have a text that says click care. Now I'm gonna use learn more for these takes. But once again, the text you choose is going to depend on what you are riding. Generally, I prefer to write Learn more rather than start here, especially if I have a start here. Bottom up here because I find that it's generally easier for people to click on, learn more rather than start here. Okay, Now, the next thing we have this link off course, we want the button to do something. So the idea is that for them to learn more, we're gonna go ahead and funnel them into our start here. Page. Okay, so what we're gonna do is that we're going to go up here to start here, right? Click and then select copy link. And then we're just gonna click here, remove this sign right, click and paste it in. OK, so now if I go ahead and I could weaken preview changes and then I go to learn more and I click there is gonna take me to the start here site you can see. I mean already. If you are comparing this design with what we're doing now, it's a whole new level, thanks to l a mentor. But anyway, this is where we're gonna funnel them. And, of course, we're going to change. This s well, we're going to redesign this using elementary. But now we have set the purpose for our buttons. So let's click back here. So now we know that if they could weaken, learn more, they're gonna be taken to the start here page, which is different from this home page that we have. And we've gone through what they do, how they work. It said, I hope you remember. So the next thing we can do is change the alignment. I actually prefer to have it in line like this. So if you see we have the title, that's perfectly in line with the description. That's perfectly in line with the button, and I prefer to keep it like this. I really like this clean in line look. So for now, we're gonna keep that, and then we can change this size and I prefer to go with a medium size because I just think that it Popes a little bit more. If we see the difference from here to here. I just think it has a nicer looking. I prefer a little more sites. It just fits him better. And then we're gonna go down. We have something. We're that's cool. I can We can change the icon to anything. We can have the address book look, we can have the Let's say they have muscle logo. If you would like to this hilarious that the Amazon loggers in here, I mean, basically anything apple. Even there's a lot of I comes in here to choose from, but honestly, not for this sort of button. I really don't recommend it if you're selling something on Amazon. Of course, it might be cool to add that sort of button for purchasing that. And then you could have an affiliate link, etcetera. But not for this. I don't recommend that. And then we have about an I D. But we're not gonna give it any idea. We don't need to do that. Going over to style a couple of things that I want to change with this. And the first isn't typography, and we can see that it says learn more. I want this to be in all capital, and I want to make that takes a little bit thicker, a little bit fatter. So I'm gonna go down. And the first thing we have here is family. And remember, we already center global values. We already have our fun. I'm super happy with that. I think it looks great. And then we have size, and we already said it to medium. But if you want to have a more in depth look and be more precise, you can just set it in here. But medium is about third scene 14 summers. I'm gonna set it to 14 like that. Now, the wait is the thickness off the text. I'm gonna set it too bold and you can see that it gets a little bit thicker. And I really like that. And then I'm gonna click on Transform, and I'm gonna use the upper case letters. And basically, I always use upper case letters on all off my buttons. I just think it looks so much better. I think it Popes much more, and I really like that. I'm not gonna do anything in the style. I'm not gonna do anything in the decoration, and then we have the line height. I'm not gonna touch that. As you can see, it is going to change the box like this a little bit, but we're not gonna be messing around with that. We're gonna change it in different ways using the margins, and that's in a little bit. Then we have the letter spacing and again be careful with this because it messes up the front. I'm not gonna touch it. So there we go. I'm really happy about that. What we also can do now and this is exciting. I really love this is to use the harbor effect, because if we preview the changes that would just have done. We can see that it actually looks really nice. I'm enjoying this. Look big time, Okay? But nothing is happening when I'm hovering my mouse over. And for me, when there's something going on when I hover my mouse over that actually implies a lot of quality and professionalism and also his highlights satisfying. It means something can happen when I click there. Therefore, I'm much more likely to click. Kind of symbolizes, Hey, click me really effective way to get people to click on it And also for the design. I think it looks great. So we're gonna go back, and we're gonna make sure that when you hover over it, something happens. So the first thing you want to do is look on, hover and then we're gonna go down to words Is hover animation right in here? There's a bunch of different animations. And if you click on it, for example, Bob and I hover my mouse over, You can see what it does, right? You can see what the animation is. Skew. I click on it or I'm sorry. I hover my mouse over it. You can see what happens Now, when it comes to buttons, there's only one Onley, one animation that I every use and that is the grow animation. And it looks like this and I really enjoy this. I think it gives it such a professional pop effect. And to be honest, I don't think any off these effects. Look that good, unless you have a really nice team that goes hand in hand with it. I mean, all of these effects are subject to how you use it in your design. But generally I only go with the grow effect. Now, this looks really nice. If we go ahead and we preview these changes and I hover my mouse over like this, it gets this really nice pop effect. I love that, actually. So this is awesome. I'm liking this big big time Now. I actually would like something else to happen to you. So when I hover my mouse over, I would like it to pop and also looked like I am selecting something. You probably know what I mean. Like like when you're selecting something, you can see that it changes color like this or this or this, or if you are working with any files or any maps. If you click on it, it gets selected. So I want to kind of give that selected ethic when I hover my mouse over here. And the way that I'm going to do that is go ahead and change the background color so that it gets a little bit lighter when I hover. My mouse over is a subtle change, but it does a big impact. It packs a punch. Definitely. So what we're gonna do is click on background color, and here is where we can make it a little lighter. Now you can see that the color that we're using, it's not actually in here. So what we're gonna do is go to the upper left here and we're gonna go to default colors. And I'm going to click on this, read that I'm enjoying so much and I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to copy this color code . And then I'm just gonna go down and click on this button. There we go. And now I get right back in here. I'm gonna click on hover once again, and then I'm going to click on background color. Okay, so all I need to do now is click in here, paste it in hit center, and there we go. So what I'm gonna do is just pull this down slightly. Nothing too crazy. And I wanted to go, you know, super light and, you know, flash my entire computer screen or go white or anything. I just wanted to have a slightly lighter color. So, like that. So if I hover my mouse over, it looks like this. I'm really liking that. So let's check it out in the preview. So I'm gonna hover my mouse over, and we can see that it gets a nice light color. Now, to me, that's actually a little bit too light still. So I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to just increase this a little bit. They would go. I'm gonna click come preview once again and hover my mouse over. And, yeah, I'm liking this. So as you can see, the effect is quite subtle, but still packs a punch. It really feels like I'm selecting this right now, so I'm really enjoying this effect. Okay, so I'm gonna keep that You don't have to if you don't like it, but this is how I like to decide. I like to have the growth effects on the buttons and also have this increase in lightness. So it looks like I'm selecting. I think it looks really good. Okay, so we have that. Now we're over here at the border. Okay, So there are two things that I want to do with this. Bottom number one is that I want to round out these edges a little bit more, and I also want to give it a more wide look. And in order to give it a wider look, I'm going to decrease the space on the top and on the bottom and keep this kind of thickness on this side. Okay, so the first thing I'm gonna do is go down to border. So if I increase this, this is going to be increasing the borders around his, so it rounds out the edges. Check this. If I click on these, you can see that the borders are changing around this widget. Okay, around this element is getting really round. I think this is very excessive for for this design. I'm going for something saddle like, and then I keep just five Let's go ahead. And Previ that this is before and this is after a subtly thick. But I think it looks really nice. You can see that there is a rounding in the corner, so I really enjoy that. So the next thing I'm gonna do is give it that bit off a wider feel. OK, so I'm gonna go ahead and increase this. So if I'm playing around with this, you can tell that it's for right now it's changing the entire elements, right? All the entire padding around the text right here and they're all synchronized. The left, the right, the up and the bottom. Now what I'm going to need to do is click on this that says link values together. So then I can on link them and I'm going to change the top 2 15 right? And I'm going to change the bottom two 15 as well. So I'm gonna go ahead and preview these changes and see where we get on. You can see that the books changes size. We have shrunk a bit here, but even more so here and here. So I'm really liking this more saddle look, but still wider. Look off the button. And if I hover over, you get this nice popping effect. I'm really liking this. So by going down to 20 on these, we also decrease the padding. But I really like that effect. Now, if you want to have the button that looks similarly and this is decently universal. A lot of people like to have a button is about this size. And with approximately this patting, all they need to do is go ahead and keep the padding for the top and the bottom at 15 right and left at 20. I really enjoy those values. OK, so we're not gonna play with the border type. Nothing we need to do there in the advanced section this is going to be playing with the entire section, okay? And there's nothing that we really want to do in there Now, for example, if I start increasing this, you can see that I'm increasing the section size and similarly, if I go down to background and I give it a color in here, for example, I click on color. That's gonna be the color off this section, and we're not gonna want to play with that. We're just gonna want to fix the but and make it pope like this. Make it look good. And we're not gonna adding any effects for it either. Okay, so let's hit preview changes one more time and check it out. And here we are. If I hover my mouse over, look at this button. And if I click on it, I'm going to be taken to the start here. Page, I'm really happy about this. Guys, I think it's starting to look really awesome. To be honest, I'm proud of this. So what I could also do now is have a little look around. For example, do I like that The why goes into the moon so much? It's all off the text. Readable. For example, Are you looking to build or expand your business find? Because white goes well in this background, this part goes well too. And this part goes well too. But if this would have been a little lower and getting to this yellow over here, this would not be quite as readable. Okay, So for example, if I wanted to change around, if I wanted to move around this text bit a little bit Well, I would need to do is go to elements in here and add something called a spacer. Now, check this out. If I add the spacer in here, this is just gonna take up space. That's all it does. It takes up space in the section and it pushes this down. So check this out. Them to preview. We have it here and now it gets pushed down here. You can see that this is looking quite nice as well, but I like to have that takes a little bit higher up. So I might Houston's. But I might do something like real micromanagement. Something like four, for example, So that the why slightly lower from the moon. I'm gonna just preview these changes there. It looks like they're looks really good, but we can see that the literally here right now, it's not as readable. We might do this ridiculous micromanagement, and I just a one again. This is the sign purposes. This is what do you prefer we're gonna check it out on. Actually, it's still a little bit low, so I'm just gonna go ahead, right, click on it and click on delete. There we go. I'm going to preview the changes. And yes, this is looking really good. So I'm not gonna be using a spacer here, But you might want to do that in order to fit your design in order to make sure that all of this looks good towards your background. Right? So, guys, if I could I would high five you. I will. Anyway, great job. We made it this far. I'm really happy about this. We can actually leave. This asset is right now and move on to the next section. We just finished editing the above the fold section. Really good job. Now, if you have any questions whatsoever police ask them in the Q and A. We will answer them within 24 hours. Let's move on to the next lecture. Great job. See, there 67. Social Proof: All right. So have finished editing the above the fold section on our home page. How exciting is that? Now we're gonna go ahead and proceed with adding content for our below the fold sections on our home page right now if you've been following along the course from earlier on, there was a lecture when we were checking out other successful website checking out their home page and taking notes. Right. You still have those notes? Well, I do whether there are on paper for you or digitally like I wrote it. I mean, this looks terrible, but it's very effective and one thing that I wrote in here was So show proved right. They need for social proof so that visitors can trust you and know that what you have to offer is off value is the same thing. When it comes to Facebook pages that more likes, the more likely we are to trust them or instagram or any platform websites. They function similarly. It's just that you don't really see how many visitors they have. We're gonna need to add this form off social proof so people can trust us, OK? And of course, you get away with more. If you have a really big name, are really big brand. But we don't not big enough. You need to have a huge and even then still want the proof. So what we're gonna do is actually go ahead and add in a testimonial right below the fold here. So what we will have done by now is shown on what we are about and guided them to further content on a website which we are going to edit in the They were in the start here section , but we want to introduce them to even more things on our website and build its social proof . Eventually we're going to do things like Adam E. Mail open, etcetera, etcetera. So let's start adding the social proof, inform off a testimonial, and that's actually super easy to do. All we need to do is scroll down here to the lift, find the testimonial. We're gonna go ahead and grab it and then release it and they will have a beautiful testimonial templates set up already. I mean, honestly, it's ridiculous how simple it is with elementary. I love this program. So we're going to start setting this up bit by bit, and we're gonna do it together. Now. The first part is the text itself and the text. I'm gonna use a review from one off our students, right. So I've already took in the liberty of going ahead and cope it that takes from are you dima course? So I'm just gonna go and paste that in. And the wonderful thing is that this is actually a really review. This is not faked in any way. And it has some really beautiful and kind of words that says this is the best and most complete online course on how to grow your online business with drop shipping. I made over $1200 within the first week off sales. All thanks to open Jeffers Monster class. Now, this is social proof, if anything, right. So this is really good material to be working with, and this is gonna be so much trust for our website for our courses, which we're going to introduce them to etcetera. This is a wonderful review to use. So what, we're gonna go ahead and do now is once we have added in the content in here, we're gonna go down and choose the image and the image is gonna be off the reviewer. Now, I've already spoken with this student and I'm allowed to use his picture. He actually sent me a picture, so I'm gonna go ahead and grab that and set that one up. So I'm gonna go to upload files. I'm gonna go to select files and then I'm gonna click rights here. There we go. Now you'll notice that this file is actually quite big. It's one megabyte and you can see that the pixels are huge is over 3000 by over 2300 we're only gonna use this for really, really small sites. So adding in this huge picture that has this big loading time, that just doesn't make sense, even though it's a really cool picture. So what we're gonna go ahead and do is actually change the image size to thumbnail on. What that is gonna do is that the loading time is going to be severely decreased. The size of the picture is going to be serial decreased. And yet there's gonna be no loss of quote because we're using such a small picture, right? So that is all set up. What we're gonna go ahead and do now is just check it out, check it out in the preview and see how it looks right now. So we're going to scroll down and we can see. Okay, here we have the text. Here we have the picture. I think it looks really nice. And his name isn't John. Don't is not a designer, but we're gonna go ahead and change that. But so far, everything, Lou, should these loading superfast And we are really looking for that. So we're gonna set up his name. You work Emeric, son. And the title. And what I'm gonna do here is right, Founder gonna do a comma mark, and then I'm gonna write his website, which is key video store dot com. Okay, He's the founder off this wonderful store selling bohemian items, But I'm not gonna write the w w w took make it into a link. And I'm also not going to write his link in here, even if you could. The problem is that if people click on this link, they're going to be detracted from your website. Now you could add in the link as an outbound ling. So you help other with there s CEO, but I don't recommend it. I recommend your low people to focus on your website. But should you decide to add this link, go to options and click on open in new window. This is very, very important to make sure that they will still be on your website. But we're not going to add in the Lincoln here. We're just gonna add in the title right founder and then add in the website so that we are still referring there. But we're not linking there, okay? And then scrolling down. We have the image position, which is aside. It could also be on top. So we get it like this. But I don't really like that. I like that. It's safe space when it's on the side like this. And I think it looks really professional. So that is it for the content right now we're gonna move over to style. There's a couple of things that I really want to change her now. The first thing I want to talk about is the current outlook here. Now we can see that here we're having a darker background with white text. Okay, so the kind of style that I'm going for here, it's a contrast. Now I'm gonna prefer to have a white background and then have a darker text. And I really like the signing, the sort of styles on website when you have a certain callers on the top, and then you contrast with the first next section on the bottom with the below the fold. So we're gonna go ahead and do that right now to now for the content. I actually want to change things up a little bit. First of all, I don't like this takes color. I'm gonna go in here and I'm just gonna select. There we go. A darker gray. I think that takes Popes out a lot more. Then we're gonna go to typography. I'm not gonna play around with the front. I think the font is perfect. I will, however, play around a little with the size. Gonna make it a little bit bigger. There we go. Let's go with 21. I think this is looking really good, so it pops a little bit more. I think that looks really nice now. The weight. I'm not gonna play with. I'm pretty sure that 500 is to default. If I click on it, nothing happens. Right? But 600 is just gonna make it too thick. We see it almost becomes the ball like this. So we're not gonna play with this. We're also not going to transform into an upper case or anything like that. But we are gonna make it italic because look at this. That really changes the entire outlook off the text. Now, whenever I'm adding in testimonies, I always always put them in italic. I just think it's such an important part of the design kind of makes that takes Pope. And also, people generally expect this sort of italic when it comes to someone else's words, right, because it makes it takes pope in on other ways. We have our own design, and then there's this sudden italic coming from someone else. Think it looks really, really nice. We're not gonna do any decoration. We're not gonna play with the line height or letter spacing. We're gonna press this down like this. Then we're gonna move over to the image Now the image size, I think looks really good, but we could be playing around with it a little bit if we wanted to. I'm gonna put it at 50. I think 50. It's a really good size. We're not gonna have any border. And you will know that the border rages, even though it doesn't show her it's already set him. Because if I said this to zero, you're gonna notice that it becomes a square just like the original picture is. But if I put this to 50 he's gonna have this beautiful round because it changes the border . Now we're gonna talk more about the borders in a little bit. Okay? So we're gonna collapse image, then we're gonna go to name. Now. I want to change this up a little bit, too. When it comes to the name, I actually like it. I'm gonna put it to pitch black, even though this doesn't make any difference there. I see. So I'm actually really happy with that for now. But this underneath there, I'm not really digging that. I think it's two lights. I'm gonna go with text color. I'm gonna go ahead and make that darker. And there we go. Think it looks so much better already. So now we have matched the cooler for this text underneath and this one. So let's go ahead and check it out in the preview mode. So there we go. So far, so good dry. Think it looks really nice. Now there's one thing that I'm really not digging in here, and this is gonna be such an important aspect when it comes to designing your Web site, and that is the space between the sections. Now you can see that already. From here. There's a little bit of white popping in down below that there's hardly any space between the white and the text, so there's not really much of an outlook. It's like you have this beautiful image here, the beautiful background that takes the message, and then it gets directly into this. This is so condensed now, I wanted to be more spacious. I want to create more space between these ones and for the coming sections, so we're gonna talk a little bit more about how to do that. So, in order to do this, what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go ahead and click on Edit Section for this part right there and then we're not going to change anything here. We still want the content of the box. We don't have to stretch the section because the section is actually already stretched out here by default on the theme. If we had a theme that we're boxing itself like this, we could stretch it all the way. But as you can see, it already does. So we don't need to use the stretch section. So what we're gonna do is we're gonna move over to advance, and I'm gonna show you the difference between margin and padding what they are, how to use them and what they mean. Now, in order to display this much easier, I'm gonna go ahead and make the background off this section Black. This is only for demonstration purposes. That this time we're gonna use is gonna be white. But I'm gonna go to style background classic changed the color to pitch black. There we go. And then I'm gonna go to advanced. Okay, So let's start talking about margins and padding. So with margins, But we're looking for here is that by increased in the margin, we are increasing the space between this section and this section. I remember in this section we have a column. You can see that light blue here. That is the column and the other dotted line up here. That is the section. And then inside the column we have the element, right? We've gone through this before in the anatomy lecture. Now, if I put 50 on this, you're gonna notice that we're actually moving this section away from this section and in between him, we get white, we get pure white. So if I go ahead and I preview the changes here, we're having this sort of space in between. And while I want this space, I still wanted to be in the same sword off color, right? And this is why I changed it to black, because if I changed it to what, you were gonna notice this difference. So what we're actually looking to do is move the elements the content away from this section. We're not actually looking to move the section away from the section and the way to do that , it's actually by going back, we're going to reset these and increasing the padding. So what padding does is that it increases the space between the column and this section. Right? So if I put 15 here, you're gonna notice that here we still have the section The section is still connected to the previous section. Nothing has happened, but the column, this is the column around here, they call them, has moved away from this section. And because we have Joe someone collar for our entire section, that means that we get to keep that caller. So now if I go ahead and preview the changes, we can see that the caller is actually the same. These sections are still connected. But now we have this nice, beautiful space in between here that we are looking for. So I'm really appreciating this design and this is gonna be so important when we are working with this kind of different colors in the section. So once again, just to recap by increasing the margin, you increase the distance between the different sections. OK, By increasing the padding, you are increasing the distance between the column and this section. And that's gonna be the column or columns that you are currently editing. Remember, we're clicked on edit section, so I hope this is really clear and makes a lot of sense. Margin is for section and section padding is for called him and sexual rights. So let's go ahead and go to style and remove this collar because we're not going to be using that one. And we're gonna go ahead and make it into why. There we go. It's a really nice luke, too. So let's go ahead and preview these changes. So there we go. I think this is starting to look much better already. I'm really liking this space in between. Also notice right now it's gonna be different depending on the resolution on your screen, of course. But for me, I have a little bit off a white stripe down here. And even if I scroll down a little, it's still white. And then comes this wonderful text and then we have the picture. We have the name and we have the information going on in here. This is just one section and there's gonna be more, more. So we have, like, this scrolling home page. But this space there is oh so important. So what we're gonna go ahead and do next is actually to leave it like this now I'm happy with the editing of the section. There's nothing more that I want to change here. But what I want to do is actually change this up and emphasize some of these words. I think they fall a little bit flat. So I'm gonna go ahead and click in here to get back into the editing off the elements off the text. I'm gonna move to content. And now, guys is gonna be the first time that we actually write our own cone. That don't panic. It's super easy. And this is pretty much as far as we're gonna go with coding. So what I'm gonna do in here is actually make some off the words bold, right? So what I'm gonna do is choose a couple of words. Let's see if we go back to the website in here and scroll down. We can see. Here we go. We have the $1200 within the first week off sales. I'm gonna make this part bold. It also looks so nice because it starts on the first line here right on the second line. But I'm also gonna go ahead and do ease bold in this 100% satisfaction guaranteed. I mean, honestly, this guy, he is promoting our course so well with these wonderful words. So we're gonna go ahead and emphasize the most important words Say, which is also gonna make this section stick out more. So let's start in here. I'm gonna click here with my mouth. So I am selected there. Then I'm gonna go ahead and make this sign, OK? Now, if you don't know what this sign is, it looks like this this sort of sign it is the sign that is right below a on the key word and to the left off said, OK, so we're gonna make this kind of sign and then I'm gonna write a B. There we go. And then I'm gonna hold shift, and then I'm gonna click on that sign again. So it's almost like we're putting a wall inside of this sign. I noticed that everything is getting bold right now. Everything after this is getting bold. So what we're gonna do is find a place to stop the bold within the first week off sales. There we go. So I'm going to stop the bolt here so all I'm gonna do is create this sign again, do a forward slash and then write a B and then shift and click on that sign against. So that stops the bolding. So now we can see we have this sort of bold on Lee on this part where it says $1200 within the first week off sales, and then we're gonna go ahead and do the same at 100% satisfaction guaranteed. There we go. I'm gonna write B on. As you can see, everything is getting bold, but I'm gonna end it right here for slash beat. There we go. So this is looking really nice right now. It's popping a little bit more. We're gonna go ahead and preview these changes. And if you think that that is complicated don't worry. I'm gonna go ahead and set the code out in. The resource is you can just go ahead and grab a copy pasted, and I'm gonna show you where to write your text. You can use that any time. Okay, Scrolling down. It currently looks like this. This is the best and most complete online course about how to growing online business with drop shipping. Really nice. I mean, over $1200 within the first week off sales we got this. Bolding looks really nice. All thanks to Robyn Ingest Spurs monster classes The practical step as step by step court And it's very easy to follow. Anyone can do this. Bold earning 100% satisfaction guaranteed. You're Kim Erickson, founder kid, you store dot com Awesome. Awesome. Awesome. I'm loving this section. So so far, I'm happy about everything with it. And I am gonna be satisfied with this now as we go along and we continue to be louder side with my two cent weeks here in their own different things. But right now I am loving this. And, as always, don't forget that when you are done, when you're happy with it, click on update. Make sure that you are always saving your work and that you're always keeping things up to date. Even if you are only saving the draft right. Always keep things safe. So that is how you create a testimonial on your home page. Now, if this is the plan for yours as well, go ahead and follow suit. Otherwise we're gonna continue on the course and you design your website the way that's gonna apply to you. See in the next lecture, guys. 68. Email Opt-In Version 1: All right, So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and create an e mail, often section and off course. There are countless amounts of the science you could do for your email open section. However, I'm going to be showing you two different versions. And in this lecture, we're gonna go through the first, and this version is going to be the full cover version, just like we did up above. In the above, the full design we're covering pretty much the entire screen were offering. It takes an explanation and then a bottom. Now we're gonna do a similar design here for the email Upton, where we're gonna use pretty much the entire screen, and then we're going to offer them something and then have a call to action and then adder our email hoped Inform. Okay, so let's go ahead and start this design. So the first thing that I'm gonna do is go ahead and click on the plus here because for this design, I'm going to add two columns and the reason for that is because in here I am actually going to be adding the elements and the way that I'm going to be doing that is by using first a header, I'm going to be describing the offer that I have, which in this case, is going to be digital marketing hacks. Course. So we're going to be offering a free coupon so that they can get our took 10 digital marketing hack scores four free. If they sign up to our email list now, you always want to have something to offer to give them a reason to sign up, Right? So that's gonna be the first thing now down below. There is going to be a text, writes a text that explains what is in here and what they're going to be getting and down below. There is going to be the email often, and we're gonna go ahead and use male poet for this right? But before we go ahead and add male poet, I know there's a lot of things going on, but it will all make sense in a second now before we go ahead and add are male poet in here ? We're gonna go ahead and create a male poet form. If you've been following along the courts. You know that this is an essential part designing the four making it look good. Okay, so let's go ahead and do that. So now the first thing we're gonna go ahead and do is go down to male poet and then go to list. Now, remember, we have different lists in male port for different reasons. For example, we have the common subscribers list. We have the sidebar list, and now we're gonna go ahead and do a home page. Digital mark getting hacks list. There we go. And the point of this is so that when people sign up here, we can go ahead and make it sequence to make sure that they get the code and the link to our digital marketing hacks course. Right. So when they sign up here, they get added to this list that we can automate that process. And if you haven't, go ahead and check out the mail poet lecture later up in the course. Because we go through how to do all of that in there, and then I'm just gonna write. Include did so Mark getting hacks, course plus link. And this is just for my own. I so I can remember what's included in him what I'm going to be doing. And then I'm gonna click on Save. And now I'm going to go up two forms up here, and then I'm gonna click on Add new, and I'm going to be calling this home page page. Digital marketing hacks. There we go. And I'm going to select the list, which is going to be the home pages of marketing hacks list just like that. Okay, so now we're gonna go ahead and this sign this one, and the first thing I'm gonna do is go to Fields and I'm going to add in first name and put it up above there. I want this to be really simple, right? So I'm going to click on edit display, and I'm going to have the display label put inside to save space. And I also think it's a much nicer design. So instead of having first name appear, it's going to appear inside here, and the first name is not going to be mandatory. So look at that looks really nice. And then the email I'm going to have the label put inside. And, of course, email is always mandatory, but the first name is not. And then I'm gonna go ahead and edit the label for the subscribe button. I'm gonna write something like send me the hacks, something like that, and click on Done. There we go. And now I'm gonna go ahead and click on Save, so it's saved. So let's go back to L. A mentor in here. Now, what I'm gonna do is go ahead and click on this one and drag it in down below. There we go. So now I have added the three different elements and this is not the form gonna be using. I'm gonna change, too. Home pistons don't marketing hacks form looks a little bit different. It much cleaner has a lot less stuff on it. There we go. They would have sent me the hacks about. That looks really nice. And I'm going to remove the title, actually, and the reason for that is all of the text that we're gonna add in here we are going to be doing ourselves because it looks much nicer that way. So here we are. Now it's time to start this signing this. Okay, But before we start designing this, we're going to go ahead and add in our background picture. So just like above here, Remember, we went ahead and we found this picture. We made this section really big, and then we added in the different elements and would designed them together so that they look really nice and clean now. Similarly, because this has this sort of display and we're gonna have it alongside. Hey, we're gonna have want a focal point off something in the middle here, right? Because we're going to be spending all off our content to the left. This is why I have created two columns to keep all of this to the left. And then I'm gonna have a nice background picture with something is going on, too in the middle and slightly to the right. And the other email often is going have a slightly different disciple follow along here is gonna look really, really nice. So, guys, do you remember how to do this? Right? I'm gonna go ahead and go to edit section and I'm gonna go to style in here and now it's time to actually find a background image. So picks obey our good old friend. We're gonna go ahead and find a really nice background image that we can use. So this time, remember, previously I had two words I was thinking about. The net was inspiration and freedom. And I'm actually going to go ahead and search for freedom this time because that's such a powerful word of such a powerful feeling you want to give away and then I'm gonna change things up a little and going to there we go orientation. I'm gonna put it on horizontal. And then I'm also gonna make sure that the size is at least 1900 times 1000 because he wanted to make sure that it gets really wide, right. I mean, the demands air high when we're having this sort of full picture so that it fits properly, and then I'm also gonna change the category, and I'm going to put it to people because they actually want the person in here to make it a little bit more interesting. So we see a couple of different pictures in here, and there's a lot of different things you can do. So here, for example, what I could do is used this picture and then put all of the content in here right you see , there's this nice open space and then there's something going on to the left because we have two columns and we're only gonna feel one column. I could do something similar in here. Something is similar in here, though. It's a little crowded and something similar here. And here you get the point. But what really stands out for me is this one, because she is placed to the middle slightly to the right. There's a lot of space in here for the text and honestly, this to me this is a really nice freedom picture. So I'm really loving this. I'm gonna go ahead and download it. So I'm gonna click on free download here, and I'm gonna go with this one. You always want to make sure that the pictures below one megabyte this different place and I'm gonna click on download and look at this Free for commercial use no attribution required. It's perfect. And then I'm gonna go back to L. A. Mentzer. I'm gonna click in here. I'm gonna go ahead and select the file. Here it is, and I'm gonna click on Choose And here we have it and it's been optimized already, So that is really nice. And I'm going to click on insert media rights. So, like we can see, there is not a lot going on right now. There's a couple of things we're going to want to do. Number one is that we are going to want to expand this whole area. Right? So we're gonna go on layout, we're gonna set it to minimum heights, and then I'm gonna go ahead and write in 700 because I remember that that is a really good number. So there we go. It's covering a big part of the screen looking nice, but the image isn't really fitting, is it? So we're gonna go to style, and then we're gonna go to size, and we're gonna go to cover. So there we go. This looks really nice. Actually, this is perfect. This is just what I wanted. We can see that she's taking up this space, and in here we can be putting our content and all of our stuff, so that is really, really nice. So I'm loving this so far. There's a couple of things I want to do because, as we can see, there's a lot of dark going on here. There's a lot of red. This is white. I love the contrast, but this is still a little bride sticking out. So I'm gonna go to background overlay. I'm gonna go ahead and go to the Classic in here, and I'm going to click on color and then I'm just gonna pick a color. So I get the red. This doesn't have to be exact. You could adding the color code in here, but this doesn't have to be that precise. I just wanted to be they would go a little bit more red, and then I'm gonna change the capacity so we can see that the picture is turning slightly more red. There we go on really liking this. So check out the difference between this is a super light, and this this is a little bit more red going on, giving it more contrast. I am loving this. This is fitting perfectly with our reddish theme. Thank you. So this is perfect. Let's check it out and see how it looks like right now, I'm gonna go ahead and click on preview changes. So scrolling down, we can see that this is actually really nice, but she's not really fitting in here the way that I would like her to. So I'm gonna go back in here and I'm gonna be its style. And then I'm gonna go down to position, and I'm gonna try out some different positions for her. So the 1st 1 I'm gonna try is center center, Okay? And then I'm gonna kill you. Can preview changes and see how that changes things up. Scrolling down. Okay, Much, much better. Super happy with that. To be honest, this is looking really nice. It's cutting off for food here a little bit, but actually, I think I can live with that. We could just go ahead and change the layout a little bit. Maybe increased the high tears. So we get a little bit more off for maybe go to 750 in this case. Go ahead and click. Comm preview changes scroll down and here we go. Yes, definitely. I am loving this. This is super super nice 69. Email Opt-In Version 1 (part 2): Okay, so let's start editing the other elements. I'm gonna go ahead and start with the header. I'm gonna click here, and then I'm gonna write get digital marketing hacks for free like that because this is what we are offering for our call to action. Right? So if they sign up, they're gonna get our digital marketing hacks course for free, and we're gonna be getting their email address, So I want to change this up a little bit. I'm not super happy with this right now. I'm gonna go ahead and go to style. I'm gonna go to typography, and first thing I'm gonna do is play around a little with size, so I'm not gonna be shy here. Let's do something like that. Get digital marketing hacks for free. I think it's looking good, but I actually want to remove this exclamation mark. There we go. I was looking much better, and then I'm going to go ahead and transformed them to upper case. I almost always do upper case. When it comes to these sort of headlines, get digital marketing hacks for free. Let's go ahead and preview the changes. So this is looking really good right, Get digital marketing hacks for free. However, I would like to pop the four down here so that they are together. And there is actually quite easy way to do that. We could just go ahead and pull this in ever so slightly and frankly, comm preview changes and chances are that in this size, it's going to be have jumped down, and it has, Right, So there's a bit less space going towards her. She covers more off the screen, but we can have this pop even more so I'm really liking this now. I'm gonna settle with this because I'm super happy, but I think it looks really good. I'm gonna move on to this one. And I have to say that so far, this light gray color hasn't really worked out that well. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm gonna go to the menu back here. I'm going to go to default colors and I'm going to go to the text color and I'm gonna make it into this darker takes color like that and click on. Apply right. Because we have already used the darker takes color as well in here. So it's not gonna be changing anything up, so I'm liking this much, much more. And then I'm gonna go ahead and click here and start editing. Now, I have already pre reading a text. I'm just gonna go ahead and paste that in here because, guys, I'm not that created that I can write this on the spot, but here we have the text it says Get the latest hacks for digital marketing. Facebook, YouTube, instagram, AdWords, LinkedIn, Quora and S e O plus the content creation machine. $99 of value for free. Sign up, down below, and we'll have it sent to you. Really nice. So let's play around a little bit with this style. The first thing that I want to do is, of course, increased the size. There we go. You wanna have it readable rights. So let's try this out and hit preview, and then we're gonna scroll down and check it out. Get the latest hack producer market of Facebook YouTube in stem. There we go. It's looking quite nice. Now, I would actually like this to pop a little bit more. So what I'm gonna do is increase the size even more so so I'm gonna go back to typography, and it's currently 22. Let's go with 24 see what happens and preview the changes. So here we have it. It's looking much better already. Now we can see that because of this collar here, this is actually melting in a little bit too much for my taste. So I'm gonna go ahead and pope that color a little bit more. Now, I'm gonna go to text color, and I'm going to be clicking on this default. Greater we have and just make it slightly more gray. Right? I'm gonna even move this more towards the black area. You can see they're starting to pop a little bit more. There we go. So I'm gonna go ahead and hit preview once again, scroll down. And this is much easier to read, isn't it? I'm really liking this big big fan off it. So here we have it right now. And here you write the first name here, you write the email and then they hit. Send me the hacks and it's going to be sent. Actually, I think this is looking really nice. I am super happy with this now. I do want to show you something that you can add in. Additionally, if you would like to now I'm actually happy with this. The way it's looking, I think it looks nice having them in a row like this. But what you could do is first and foremost, you could put this emails that it comes to the right here. You could also go ahead and make the background into these inputs white. Okay, so I'm gonna go ahead and show you how to do that. And to do that, we need to go to male poet in here. Okay? We're going to go down to words this styles and there's a big bunch of code here. Don't worry about it. I'm going to guide you through this. It's actually super easy. And in here and this is gonna be in the resource is I do have a piece of code that we're going to be using. So as you can see a part of this, I have underlined, and this underlying code, that is the code that I want you to copy. Okay. So I'm gonna go ahead and copy this entire part the rest of this part that is just to show you that this already exists. This already exists, and this already exist. Now, what I want you to do is add in the underlying part inside off this already. Okay, so we're gonna go ahead and search for male poet. Underlined paragraph. And then where it says line dash height 20 PX. We're gonna be pasting this piece of code in underneath there, So let's go ahead and do that Now. We're gonna go ahead and serve from male poet Underlying paragraph. Here it is. In the vertes up, you could see it says line Dash high 20 PX. Okay, so what I'm gonna do is click here to the end. I'm going to hit enter. So we get a new line in here and I'm going to paste this code in right on. Also going to just click there and make sure that these are in line. There we go. So what we have added now is a piece of code. We have changed the background color and also the display, right? So if I go ahead and I click on save here right now and then we go back to our website and we update it and scrolling down, we can see that now. First of all, the input boxes have changed positions. So we have the first name here we have the email to the right. We have the butts and underneath, and they have also turned white, right? So if this does not feeding with your background, having the transparent as they are, you can add in this piece of code. Also add in this piece of code in order to move them like this. And there are additional things that you can do Coding is actually surprisingly simple. So, for example, we see the male poet text area here it says, with 200 pixels. If I would go ahead and remove those and write 250 hit save and then we go back and I update this page, we're going to see that they are now longer. So there are a lot of things you can do even without understanding code, right? But the main thing is just to go ahead and use this code, cope with this piece and put it in under dash paragraph and then below line dash high 20 pixels, just the way I did. And you're gonna get this beautiful. Nice display, right? People can sign up, and then it's gonna be off course after you to go to male poet, set up the sequence and make sure that whatever it is that you are offering, they are going to be getting okay, So I am super happy with this. I think it looks really, really nice. And as we can see right now, the sections air really melting in. Well, we have this sword off contrast going on. So here we have a red theme. We have this nice white going straight to the point going down, we have the contrast off white background, a darker text. And then comes this beautiful part. I'm really enjoying our design guys. Now, in the next lecture, I'm gonna go ahead and show you another email, often the sign that it's super popular today. Okay, So in order to do that, I'm actually going to want to save this down, but I'm going to remove it for demonstration purposes. So what I'm gonna do is right. Click in here and then go ahead and click on Save as Template. And then I'm going to write email up in full section so I know what it is. And then I'm gonna hit save. So now it's saved in here. I can click this one down, and without getting a heart attack, I can actually go ahead and click this one away. Now I want to make you aware of a couple of things before we move on. And the 1st 1 is that if you decide to adding any text in here, which we can do by going to fields and using an accustomed takes just like we did when we had the G d. P R label, right, it's not mandatory now because we have the cookies in the privacy policy. But if you are going to go ahead and adding in your own texting here, it's going to be turning completely white and mess with the design because of the code. We added, If you want adding in a g d. P r tex, I strongly recommend that you go ahead and you use a text editor element. Put it in down below and write it like that instead. That's not gonna miss with it. Now, Elementary actually has a super easy to use form widget, but that is for the pro version. But as you might have noticed elementary superstrong, it might be worthwhile to invest in it if you aren't that interested in it. But for now, we're going to go ahead and use this because it's more than enough. Let's move on and do the next version. Guys, I'm gonna click this one away. They would go see you in the next lecture. 70. Email Opt-In Version 2: So in this lecture, I'm going to show you another version that you can do for your email. Often design. Now, again, there are countless off the science out there, but the previous design was a more full section design. This one is going to be a smaller section. Designed is gonna be more straight to the point. And these kind of opens have become really popular lately. This kind of opening the science that is. So let me show you exactly how these looking how I do them. And then you can decide if you want to use version one or version two for your own home page building. Right? So we're gonna get started here, and I'm going to start with pulling down a heading down here. There we go. And then I'm going to write, get the soap. 10 digital marketing hacks like that. I'm gonna go ahead and center it, and then I'm gonna move over to style because I want this both in uppercase letter. But also Biggers, I'm gonna transform a to upper case like that and then we're gonna increase the size. I'm not gonna be shy with this. They go something like that. Okay, so we have this part. I'm really happy with this. And now we're gonna go ahead and put in the email. Upton. Right. So we're gonna scroll down until we find wordpress. I'm gonna open this one up, and here we have mail Poet 34 Can I grab it? And I'm gonna put it right down below here, down below the header. Okay. And then I'm gonna change to the one we used in the previous lecture. So we have this kind of longer version off it, like that looking really nice. Now, the thing is, there's not a lot of options going on in here with the male poet widget right now. If you were using the pro version off L a mentor, you could just be using the elemental form. You could be adding these manually. You could be adding the butts on manually. It would be much quicker and simpler, and you would just hook it up to male gym. But because we're not using the pro version, we're gonna work around that. So if we have a look at how this looks right now, I'm gonna preview the changes and I'm going to scroll down. We can see that it's all to the left right here. Now, if I want this more center, there are a couple of ways we can do this on. No. One of the ways would be, for example, that I could go to advanced for this column and I could change the margin, right? So that would be the margin from the left. I'm gonna on link. And I could write, for example, 50 or apartment more like 200 there ago. And then I could preview the changes and scroll down, and it would be much more center. So this is actually looking really nice, right? That's one off the ways to do it. Now, the problem with that is gonna be when we look at the Responsive Motor, we go to the tablet version. We can see that we have this really odd looking space here, right? If you go to the mobile version, well, he's just chaos, to be honest. But we could also just go ahead and start adapting and customizing it for mobile and for tablet. Specifically, we're gonna have to do that anyway. But I'm gonna offer you on additional and very effective way to center your content. So check this out. That all I'm gonna do is I'm gonna keep it a desktop rights here, and I'm actually going to go ahead and remove this section. I'm just going to right click and go down to delete. Right? So I'm gonna go to inner section, right? And I'm gonna pull that right below the header. So what the inner section does is that it allows you to add more columns, right? And it allows you to add more columns inside off this section right here. Otherwise you'd have to make a new section. But we want to keep everything in one section so we can make a nice background image for that entire section. Makes us so we have two columns right now. I'm gonna right click, and I'm going to click on Add New Column and guess what we're gonna put in the middle here . You guessed that we're gonna put in the oped, informs I'm gonna go to elements. Scroll down, male poet. 34 And I'm just gonna go ahead and add that one in the middle. Right there. There we go. So it's looking like this now and we're gonna go to our own so we can see how it really looks like. There we go. Now, remember, we have the long version and we want to keep the long version. So that just means that this is too crammed up now. It's so customizable and so easy in elementary because you can go to the wall right here and then you can just move it to the left like this Very, very easy to design like this. And I'm gonna go on a limb, period, say that maybe want to go with 15%. Let's do it like that. 15%. And I'm gonna hit 15% here too. Let's go Here, There we go. There we go. 15. 15. And now I'm gonna go ahead and preview the changes, see how it looks and scroll down. And it's completely centered. I love that now. I don't love this, so we're gonna go ahead and remove it, but I love how centered it is. So we're gonna go back and I'm gonna remove that like that they would go. And now if you go ahead and look at the responsible and look at the tablet version for example, we can see that this is perfectly center. It's looking really good. And if we look at the mobile, well, might be a little bit work to be done here Still, but it still looks really, really nice. I am appreciating this design, so I'm happy about that. This is looking really good. Now, what we're gonna do is go ahead and add a background in here. We have done this before. This is nothing new. So we're gonna go to edit section here, and then we're gonna go to style, and we're gonna go to background type, click on Classic, and here we're gonna add an image. So to do that, we need to find an image, right? So picks obey our good old friend. We're gonna find something in here. And because this section is more straight to the point, I'm going to go with a more abstract picture, right, because it's just a row. You don't want to picture to matter that much, necessarily. At least not with this design. So I'm gonna go ahead and write digital in here, and then I'm gonna set the orientation for horizontal, and then I'm just going to start scrolling down here and see what we can find. And, you know, the thing that pops out to me immediately is actually this one, because this is just such an abstract nonsense bill, and that's gonna work perfectly as a background. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on this one, and I'm gonna download. It's really small, too. That's nice. So we're gonna download and try this one out, head back to L. A mentor, Click on the plus their own image. And then I'm gonna head to upload files and then select files. And there it is. I'm gonna click on choose and then insert media and here we go. OK, so not that exciting right now. And the first thing we're gonna do as we always do is we're gonna choose the cover option, and I mean, it's quite cramped up, and that makes sense that it is because we haven't really changed the padding is yet. So we're gonna go ahead over to advanced, and then we're gonna go to padding right here, and we're gonna set it to 50 looking much better. Let's even go with 17 this time. There we go. And then we're gonna go ahead and preview the changes. Just see how it looks like right now scrolling down. Okay, This is actually looking really, really nice. Now, there's a couple of things that I actually want to do. I want to make the background a little darker. I think the color should too aggressive. I want to change the color off the header. Actually, whites I can see looks for the nice hair, and we're gonna take it from there. I'm gonna start with that. So I'm going to go over to the editing the section again, and then I'm gonna go to style, and then I'm gonna go to background overlay, okay? And then I'm gonna click on classic and now color. And I'm gonna use black like this because they wanted to give a darker colors. I'm just gonna go ahead and make it darker like this. There's something like that. Old is a bit dark, isn't it? Something like that. Oh, that's really nice. I'm liking that. Okay, so it's much, much darker. And now I'm gonna go to the header by just clicking on it. Click on text color here, and let's make it white. OK, really appreciating this design, and then we're gonna preview the changes. So from this into this, Okay, I like this. Now there's a bit too much air and too much space is I'm gonna change the position off the background image in here, so let's go ahead and do that right away. So I'm gonna go to editing the section once again, and I'm gonna go to lay out, and I'm gonna go to style in here and then the position I'm going to try Center center. It usually goes really well with the center center one, and I'm gonna eat preview changes. Oh, I'm really loving this. So this is exactly what I'm talking about with this kind of abstract background that doesn't really mean anything, doesn't grabbed attention. But it gives a nice feeling because this is the important part, right? Get the top 10 digital marketing hacks. First name email, send me the hacks. It straight to the point shows what you want to and has a beautiful design. And this design also goes hand in hand with what we're offering here, which is hacks, right? So I'm really appreciating this. The kind of contrast in red white and having the complete clean white going on with the black text and then over into this one. So really, really nice. I love this design, but I actually think that a full section is gonna fit much better off to this one. So what I'm gonna do, because I really love this one. He said, I'm going to go ahead and right click in here. I'm gonna click on save as templates and I'm gonna write email, opt in smaller sections like that, and I'm gonna click on Save. There we go. So it is saved. I can click this one down, and I can remove this one right now without getting a heart attack. Okay. And now I'm gonna go ahead and click on Addie templates. I'm gonna go to my template, and I'm gonna add in the email open full section by clicking on inserts. Yes, when I import everything and then we get this one back. I really appreciate this design. Oh, and sometimes while importing the templates, we get the sidebar back. I don't know why that is, but all we need to do is go down to set things down here and then go down to page layout and go with the elemental full with. If you were using canvas off course, you go with canvas, but we're using full with. So we're just gonna select that one and everything changes back just like that. So let's hit the preview and make sure that everything is looking nice and beautiful scrolling down. And there we are. I am loving this. So what we're gonna do is actually used the second version off the email off thing that we just created for another page, Most likely the star tear Patron. Gonna want to put in another email often. So I'm really, really happy about these guys. Great job. If you've been following along and then decide which sort of decide you're gonna want for your website And you can, of course, have both because you're gonna want to have this email often more than once. But most of the time, you don't want to have the same design repeated over and over. So if you have any questions, will be in the Q and A. See you in the next lecture 71. Showcase Section Part 1: All right, so in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and create our showcase section. And what a showcase section is is basically gonna be a section where you showcase some offers that you have on your website. Now for us, that's going to be a couple off our best selling courses right now. For you, that could be a certain offered that you have with your service. It could be certain products, etcetera, etcetera. Now we're gonna go more in depth on how to sell products in the Wu calmer section where we're gonna learn how to make your website into an e commerce site. But for now, we're gonna create our showcase section, and I'm gonna show you how I am going to create this one. So the idea is that the first thing I want to do is to create a heading. So I'm just gonna drag and drop that one in here, and then I'm gonna write in the heading best selling courses like that. I'm gonna center it and then I'm gonna move over to style and I'm going to increase the size. Let's go with Yeah, let's say let's go with 50. I think that looks good. And then I'm gonna go ahead and make these into uppercase letters. That looks much better already. Okay, so this is the basics looking really good. Now what I want to do is show cased three off our best selling courses in there. So what I'm gonna need are three columns, right? But I'm also going to want to have a nice background or a single color. We'll see as we go on with the designing here what I'm gonna choose. But that means that I'm going to have to use one of these intersections instead off clicking here. Because if I click here, I'm going to get a new section, and then it's gonna be harder to use the same background or the same caller. Remember, we've gone through these earlier, so I'm gonna go ahead and drag in the inner section and put it down below under best selling courses just like that. So now we get to columns and I want 1/3. So all I'm gonna do is right. Click and then add new column. And there we go. Ok, so for this, the element that I'm going to be using is actually a new one and it is called on image box . Okay. And the reason for that is simple. You're going to see exactly why I'll be using it now. If I drag it and drop it in here, you're going to see that this has the perfect design to be showcasing a product offer service, whatever it might be because you get to add in a picture off it in here, write a heading and then a description I love this set of. I think it's absolutely awesome. So I'm gonna go ahead and start editing this, But before I do that, I'm actually gonna drag into more. So let's do one more here and then go ahead and do one more here. There we go. Let's start designing. So the 1st 1 in here, we're gonna go ahead and add in our image, right? So I'm gonna click in here, and I have taken the liberty off, adding I course picture in here beforehand already. I had to search to find that one, but the 1st 1 is actually gonna be our digital marketing course. So I'm going to be inserting that one in here. There we go. And then I'm going to write complete digital marketing, Okay? And then I'm going to be adding in a texting here, a descriptions. I'm gonna write something like, Are you looking to x expand your business with art? Complete digital marketing course. You get over 40 hours off quality teaching something like that. Now, this is just something that I'm writing on imports. You're gonna want to take a little bit more time making a little bit more effective in relating to your customer and really get the message across. But for this demonstration, we're gonna keep that. I'm actually quite happy with that. And the next thing that we can do is go ahead and a link it in here to whatever it is that we are offering now, would it be some certain product in here? For example, what I could do is go ahead and move up to courses in here. I could right click copy this link, and then I could just add it in here, right? Pace that link in there. So when they click here, they are going to be taken to the courses section. Or we could go ahead for our own case for example and link it directly to our you do meet course. Right? So then we're going to be following people, too. Are you to me Course where we're actually selling it. So that's gonna be where we put the link, and then we have the image position. We can change this up when a different display. But I really like the top, the middle position, like this. Okay, so let's move over to style now, something that I'm really a fan off is actually increasing the size like this. So I wanted to really be popping out like this. I think it looks really nice. And I'm not going to be playing with the spacing. Like, I think it looks good at 15 by default. We also have our hover animation. We could use grow for this, but I'm actually not going to be using that because I have a different design right now, at least in mind, and we'll see how this turns out. Okay? And then we could also add in the hover effects. Now, before we do that, I actually want to extend and put all of these out just so I can get a glimpse of how this is going to look. So I'm gonna go ahead and click in here. I'm going to be choosing my image. And in here I'm gonna put the Shopify logo. There we go. And in here, I'm going to do the same thing. But I'm gonna put the Amazon logo. Cities are all different courses like this. Now, this is something really, really cool, guys. And keep this in mind when you are designing, because it's gonna save a lot a lot of time. So I have already done some designing in there. For example, I've increased it with off the image. Now, if I want to copy all of these styles in here to these all I need to do is right. Click here and click on Coping. And then I go in here and I right click and I click on paced style over here and you see that they are going to adapt to that coping style right away. It's such a timesaver. I love that function. Okay? And then we would go ahead and we would edit these as well. Shopify, drop ship being this, write it like that on here. We're gonna write Amazon f B a. There we go. Now, of course, we're gonna want a description as well. But I'm just gonna save that for now, is to save a little bit of time. So let's see what we have right now. I'm gonna preview the changes. Okay, so this is how it's looking right now. No one really important aspect when it comes to this signing and when you're doing columns like this is to make sure that you have the equal amount off text in your lines. So if you have your head or you wanted to be in a single row, similar and similar and down below we have the description on three rows. 123 And we want to keep it like that because if we have a four rows while the others have three, this entire row is going to be displaced, so this is gonna be a little bit lower or higher than the rest, and it's just going to mess up the entire design. So that's a strong tip to keep these in line when you are designing columns and rows like this. Okay, so I'm quite happy about this now. I want to go ahead and make a little bit more space. Now, you remember we spoke about this earlier. For example, we have some space in between this and this section. We have some space in between these sections, and I want to do the same thing here as well. So I'm gonna go in up here and edit this section. I'm gonna go to advanced. So I'm gonna go ahead and go into margin, and I'm gonna put this, let's say at 70 and see how this turns out. So we get a little bit more space here. We also have a little bit of more space down below. Okay, I think it looks quite nice right now. There's a lot of space going on in between here. There we go. Now, I also want some space in between these columns, that is the courses and the header itself. So what I'm gonna do is go ahead and click up here to edit this certain call him this one column, and I'm gonna go to advanced up here, and then I'm gonna sit departing to let's say 50 right? And I'm gonna do the same for this column. I'm gonna click up here, go to advanced. Set the padding to 50 similar here, click up their advanced and set the padding to 50. So now we can see that there's a bit more space overall there, some padding him between the header. And there's also some padding in between the courses themselves. So let's check them out, and then we scroll down and this is already starting to look much, much better. I am appreciating this nice clean look right now we can also see that there are more Rose going on in here that's gonna messed up the design a little bit. I'm gonna want to add some additional texting here. I'm gonna go ahead and do that for now, even though this is a demonstration. So I'm gonna click on here, and I'm going to go to content and I'm gonna write Take your business to the next level, and then let's go ahead and preview the changes and see how it looks gonna scroll down. And there we go. So there's 444 There we go. Looks much better already. Okay, so the next thing that I want to do here is actually to add buttons on here. Okay, So if I would have said a link, for example, the link that I cooked it earlier like this, we can see that the image gets clickable and the header, but the text does not get clickable. And the good news is that there's a lot of space to click in here, especially since we made the image larger. But we also want to be super duper clear here, and that's why we want to put buttons down below, right? So we're gonna go ahead and do that. And there's actually a really nice thing you can do when we have come this far in the course, right? And that is that we can scroll all the way up and use this nice button that we already spend time to end the sign we can cope it, and then we can scroll down. We can click in here, and we can actually go ahead and paste it in. And that is incredible. Now realize that is gonna have all of the settings off the button that we use before. That means that is gonna say, learn more is gonna have this link, etcetera, etcetera. But we're just gonna go ahead and remove that link. We're gonna go ahead and set in this link here as well, right? And then we're gonna go to link options and we're gonna click on open in new Window, because when you click here, you don't want people to actually leave this page, right? You want them to stay here while going to your courses? So then you can have mawr good stuff while they're scrolling down. So we're gonna have this open in new window, okay? And we're gonna have the same for this one so that when they click in here, you go to options. This is gonna be open in New Window asked. Well, so we're gonna go ahead and set these ones up as well with the no following gonna go to link options. They can open in new window there, click on open in New Window. And there we go. Now you probably notice that there's a lot of things just popping up as I go with the designing. And this is just the way the signing looks like. You get the ideas, you cover those things, you get new ideas, you add them, you try things out This is very intuitive, This science. I don't know how this is gonna end up, but I have a really good feeling because I have a basic outline with this going on, I have a header. I want to have these three columns with the courses and then I want the bottoms. Okay, so there will go. No, I also want to send to this so it looks much, much better. And then I'm quite happy with this. What I'm gonna do is I'm going to cover this and I'm gonna put it here as well. I'm gonna pace that one in, and I'm going to paste that one in looks really, really nice. So so far, I'm actually really happy about this. Now I want to do one more thing, and that is actually to add a not another butts and down below here. And this is gonna be a view. All courses bottom. So I want them to have the ability to see that these are our best selling courses that we're offering. You can learn more about them and then also view all of course, it down here to see more courses we have over 20 now realize that this doesn't have to be learned more. This could be, for example, contact me. This could be by now. This could be anything. No matter how you choose to showcase it. Now for me, I'm gonna use to learn more because we're gonna have this sent later on to you. To me, right? So I'm gonna go ahead and grab the link on you to me and juice connect them in here. And that way they get to go into the landing page of you to me and learn more there. Now, if you have everything on your side, you could have a by now, they could buy the product, or you could send them to another page. So here we have this, but, um, I'm gonna go ahead and center it like that, and I'm gonna go ahead and make it large. I wanted to be bigger than the others, okay? And I also want the text to be view all courses they would go, and I'm gonna go to style, and then I'm gonna go to typography because I wanted to be an upper case. Just like that. Looks really nice on. I wanted to have the hover effects. I'm gonna go ahead and copper this one, and I'm going to paste the style. Okay, so now it actually got the same size as well, But we can go ahead and go back to style, go to typography and just increase the style like this. We also made it a little bit longer because we grabbed all of the style of the previous one . But actually, I really enjoyed that look. So we're gonna keep that look. Now, one thing that I do want to do is make this a little bit rounder. Okay? So I'm gonna go with the border and actually set up these borders to, like, let's say, 20 and the borders. As you can see, that's gonna make the edges rounder. I'm gonna go with 30. There we go. Let's have a look at our current design. You probably noticing. Asked ago that you are recognizing more and more options and as long as you know the basic options and functions, the this sign options are endless. It's really nice. So let's scroll down and check it out. I'm really enjoying this now. I would like a little bit more space in between here. So we're gonna go ahead and take care of that. I'm gonna go down. I'm gonna click care, go to advance, and then I'm gonna put some padding in here. So let's put like, it's between C or something. Maybe even third. You know, living on the edge. 30. Let's let's try that one out. Single likely comm preview again. Scroll down. And yes, I'm liking this much, much more. Okay, guys. So this is looking really good. Now, there's a couple off more things that I would like to do in here, right? And the first thing would be that I would like something to happen when I move my mouse over here. So right now it's quite playing is quite boring. There's some actions on the bottoms. We can see that right now. I would like more things to be happening. So what I'm gonna do is that I'm going to go to l. A mentor like this, and I'm going to start adding editing the backgrounds for these columns because I don't want the pope. I want all of these two have on action when you hover your mouse over. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do next is make sure that there is some action going on when I hover my mouse over like this make the whole website a little bit more interesting and a bit more satisfying to hover the mouse over. So what I'm gonna do is actually click on the column up here. So we start editing this one column, remember? We have 123 different columns going on here. I'm gonna go to advanced, and then I'm gonna go to style, right? And in style, we have backgrounds. I'm gonna move over to hover and end this hover. We're gonna go to classic and then color. Now, here we get to play around a little bit with the color. So if I just choose these great and I check it out Well, this looks quite dreadful. To be honest, I'm not enjoying this at all. I don't like this. So if we put on Green, what is looking a bit nicer? We could do this. It's looking okay, you know, we can do the light degree now. This is actually looking pretty good. I am enjoying the effects of this. So this is quite nice. Now, if I go ahead and I choose this and would just preview the changes to see how it looks. And then we scroll down. We get this nice green effect when we are hovering over hand that is actually looking quite good. I am enjoying this. So what I'm gonna do is actually go ahead and keep this nice green color going on because it's looking really, really nice with these effects. Now we could use our classical red as well. I don't have the color combination here, but usually when you have so much red, you can see that it's gonna mess up the great color off the description. And also, it's not very inviting when you're offering a product and you're putting this big rid behind their now, Red looks much better at the buttons like this generally. So this light green that is so much more inviting. So that's exactly what we're going to be going for really enjoying this design. So all I need to do here is go ahead and click on copy and then right click and paste style , right click and paste style. And look at this now there Is that some effects going on. We go ahead and weekly come preview changes scroll down and we can see that there is some stuff going on right here. I am really enjoying this. Really, Really good. So, guys, this waas part one Now in the next lecture, part two, we're actually gonna go ahead and change the color, the background, hated three color or to a background. We're gonna try some different options out and see where we land. And then I'm gonna go ahead and make sure that the buttons fit with the color theme that we choose. And we're going to complete this and make the entire section look really, really good. Okay, guys, see you in the next lecture for part two. 72. Showcaste Section Part 2: All right, guys. Welcome back. So we're gonna go ahead and continue with this design. It's very intuitive. It's very exciting. We're going to see where this lands up. Okay, so what I want to do right now, it's start to play around a little bit with the background right here, right? So in order to do that, we're gonna go ahead and actually choose a background on picks a day that is going to be white, right? Because we can see right now that white actually works really, really well right now I'm really enjoying this white back from, but we're gonna go ahead and use some sort of background picture just to see how it works. Now, remember earlier on, we actually set the margins with the editing here when we edited the section. That's gonna be a problem if we said a background color, a certain color or a background image, right? Because it's only going to be covering this section area. This is going to be left whites. That doesn't look very good. So we're gonna go back here in preparation for using a background image. We're going to click on edit section. We're gonna go and remove the margin because we can't really have the margin then and then we're gonna put some padding. And here we have two options. Either we could go and set some padding like this, and that's gonna make these even longer and more narrow this way. Or we could go ahead and un shamed them and Onley put 70 on the top. So we get this space that we originally had right now what? I'm gonna go ahead and use actual link these together so that they all get shamed like this and we get a big padding effect because we're patting the section were patted, the columns, etcetera. So let's go ahead and see what that looks like, because that's gonna make these longer when we're showcasing the products themselves so scrolling down, we can see that they look quite a bit different by now. And I'm really appreciating this design. It's looking much more solid, much more narrow. I think it looks really good. I'm going to keep this. I'm really enjoying it. There's more space to the size, but that just gives a longer, more elegant to me effect. So let's go ahead and find a background picture now because we know that the background is gonna be quite large, right? And we also know that the white color is something that fits really good. We're gonna go ahead and use some sort of inspiring picture we're gonna use toward freedom again because I find that that gives some really good results. But we're also going to go and change the orientation to horizontal. We're gonna set the size so that it is at least 1900 to 1000 right? So that it's gonna be big, A nice, good quality and everything. And if it is to small, this usually gonna be blurry and not fit, and it just doesn't look good. And this is the interesting next option. We can go to color in here and click on white. Right? So if we do that in clicking what? We're only going to get this nice picture with a white background. So let's think of our focal point right now. So, with our turn to sign, we have these three columns going on. So we look at our website, they are actually covering the middle off the image right there, very center. They're very much in the middle. And that means that we can't have stuff going on in the middle because then everything is just gonna look chaotic. So what we need to do is look for something that has an open, nice image. So this, for example, would not work. This one wouldn't work, and not even this one would work because they would be covering up the bird. We're gonna look for something that has more space. This would be a nice picture of you put stuff to the right. You can see the potential in this sort of pictures. Now, here's actually something where we're really talking. Guys, look at this beautiful picture. The Onley thing going on is this. I think it's a kid swinging on the swing down to the right, and that is beautiful because we can put especially with all the padding we have done, we can put everything so centered in here if we get to put our material here and this is not gonna cover anything, so I'm gonna try this subject. Likely going free download, remember? Well, under one megabytes, this checks out, we're gonna download it, and then we're gonna go back and we are going to go and edit the section here. That is no optimized. There's no margins in between here, and we're going to go over to style. We're gonna go to background, keep it normal, Quicken Classic, and then click on Image. Now we're gonna upload that file select file. And here it is. I'm just going to click on choose and then click on insert media. Okay, so this is what we are getting right now, So there's not that it doesn't really look that good. Well, it looks decent, the nice, but we only have these clouds in the background. And that is not why we got this picture. So what I'm gonna do, it's click on size. We always do this and then click uncover. So this is looking much, much, much better. I am appreciating this Now. We're gonna go ahead and click on the preview to make sure that nothing really collapses with the kid so that things doesn't that they don't collapse into each other, cover some text or something like that scrolling down. We can see that this is actually looking perfect. Wow, look at this. Guys is looking really really nice. So I'm really, really liking this design. So for now, the thing that I actually want to go ahead and change is that there is red bottoms going on here right now, and that's really good, but because we're using the green like this, I would like to also put this green into the view All the courses, okay, because that's going to give it a different effect. That's gonna also make it stand out from the order buttons. So we're gonna go ahead and do that. I'm gonna click on this button right here. They would go and then I'm gonna go over to style. I'm gonna go to background color and I'm gonna set the background color to this darker green right here. There we go. Gonna be happy with that. And then I'm gonna click on Hover because now when I hover my mouse over, it still turns like threat. And that's not really nice. So I'm gonna change the hover click on this and taken into delight Green. There we go. So now when I hover, my mouse over it pops up like this and it also gets a little bit lighter. Really, really nice. So let's go ahead and preview the changes scrolling down. Okay, this is looking nice, guys. Now, there's actually one more thing that I would like to do here, and that is to make these pope out a little bit more. Now, I really enjoyed the look. I love this fact that we have the kid down here and everything is just feeding so nice, to be honest, but I would still like to change this up a little bit by making them pop. And the way that we're gonna do it is is to actually make the background off these images white. So let's go back to the drawing table. Click here, and I'm going to click on the column. Editor writes here, and then I'm gonna go to style, right? I'm gonna go to background type, and I'm gonna select the caller and click on white. There we go. So what I'm gonna do is actually you do the same thing for this. Call them. I'm gonna click their go to style background type color said it to white. Similarly, here click on this one. There we go up there. Click on this one. Go to style set the background type of classic color and white. All right, there we go. And then I'm gonna click, um, preview changes, and we're going to see how this turns out. Scrolling down. Okay, So what I am loving is the white Okay, the white looks, super duper NYSE. What I am not loving right now is the fact that these are all pieced together. I would like some space in between these, so we're gonna go ahead and take care of that. So to do that, I am going to go ahead and click on this column and edit it. I'm going to go to advanced, and we can see that it already has the padding. Right? But if I put some margin on here like, let's say 25 we can see that it starts to pop out a little bit. We can even go, you know, go a bit while let's put it to 30. There we go on and we can do the same here as well. Let's go to this one. Go to advanced. Go to margin. Put it to 30. Go to this one. But you call them Advanced Margin 30. Now it gets even longer. And I love that nice long display. So we're gonna check it out right now scrolling down And there we go. Guys, I think this looks actually super nice. Now we see the despair insee also with the difference in text Ling So you're gonna have to be really wary off making sure that the text are asked long. Now, that's a little bit off on art, but it is Oh, so important. Now we do have a couple of new problems, if you will going on right here, the number one would be We have to change this text. So that's the first thing we're gonna do. But I also look, the kid is covered. That's not nice, But let's first go ahead and change this text back. So I'm gonna click in here. That's gonna and then go to content. I'm just gonna go ahead and remove these and see if this works out. Scroll down and there we go Now they're actually pretty much yet they're completely, even awesome. Now there's also a problem, of course, because these header is a little bit long, but right now they're decently. Even we can make this nicer once I start working and actually putting a proper description on these as well. So, as you can see, what we have here right now is that we have designed our showcase page where we have our best selling courses and that for you could be anything. It could be your services. It could be certain products could be certain offerings. Whatever that do you have that you want to showcase. And we are displaying our courses. We have this nice hovering effect of green. When I hover over, we have this nice pope effect that the bottom off, all of them. And we also have this big, nice view, all the courses. But I'm going on right here now. The only thing that would be left for me to edit here right now would be to edit the description off these ones to go ahead and grab the links and just click on this one and set the link down here with those links. Set that link, then go ahead to the learn more button and set that link as well, right? And then I would set the link to view all courses to the course section. So guys This is how you can showcase something on your website, especially using multiple columns. Right? So great job in making it this far. Remember, when it comes to this sign, it is endless. And one final thing to remember that when you are making space up here, you can use margins. If you're using a white background and you want to keep it white than all this, fine. But you need to use the padding when you're keeping a background like this or if you're changing the color off the background. Otherwise you're gonna get this space in between like this. And that just doesn't look nice at also, remember, that margin is on Lee to make space. And it's not good if you're gonna keep back running there. So I'm super happy about this, guys. See you in the next lecture. 73. Scrolling Menu: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to make our menu sticky. In other words, we're gonna make our menu stick to the screen even though we're scrolling on our website. So if we look at how it looks like right now, if I scroll down, the menu disappears. Right, because it's on Lee up here right now. And if I scroll down, gone like magic now, what we want to do is that we want to make this stick, right. So when we're scrolling, it's still gonna be up here. They're still gonna have access to the start here to the course of section. Everything is gonna help with the navigation. Looks very professional. So what we are going to do is that we are gonna go back, go to the menu here, and then we're gonna go exit to dashboard. This is actually not something that we're gonna be doing an elementary, but it's gonna be part of for elementary d sign that we have created so far. So we're gonna go ahead and go straight into plug ins here and click on add New. We are gonna use a plug in for this and It's a really light with plugging asked. Well, and then we're gonna search for sticky menu like that. And then you're gonna get every sold down here that says my sticky menu. You can search for this right away, too. It's all one word, my sticky menu. So even though it's untested with this version, I know that it works. It's quite a simple plug in lightweight, but it does the job really well. So I love this one. I'm gonna go ahead and click on Install now and then I'm gonna click on Activate. All right, so it's installed. It's ready to go, but we're still going to go down and go into the settings right down here. So for some of you, this is actually going to start working right away. But for some other of us, we're gonna have to do a little bit more editing before we get it to work. And that is because of this so called stick it class. Now we have a menu or header element, usually called the Nab Bardem Navigational bar. But not everything has to this names. If you're using a theme like we are, for example, that has a different name. This isn't going to be working by default, but if you're using another theme, it just might. So what we can do is actually go ahead and go in here and update this website and just see if it works. I'm gonna go ahead and scroll down and we can see nothing happens. So it's not working. So what we need to do is change this sticky class, right? We want the I. D. Name off this section. So this once we get the name off this one, we're gonna put the name in here, and then that is going to be sticking on the screen as we scroll. So in order to get that, all we need to do is right. Click in here and click on Inspect Element. Now, if you don't have this inspect element and you're using a Mac, all you need to do is go up here in safari and then go to preferences and then move over to advanced and cliquish says show, develop menu in menu bar, and I believe for windows it's very similar. You just go to your preferences or settings, you go to advance that you should have a similar. I think you might be able to use if 12 as well. But otherwise it should be in the options section like this. And once you have this all activated, all you need to do is right. Click here and click on inspect elements. So this is where we have it. Dave, underline i d equals site header Inner. So this is actually the name that we are going to be inserted in there. So it's site, dash, header, dash inner. We're gonna go back, and then we're gonna do a hashtag mark site, dash, header, dash inner. They would go, and I'm going to click on save changes just to see that this is actually working. Otherwise, this is gonna be a terrible lecture, right? And then I'm gonna go back here and I can click this one down. I'm gonna update the sites, and now I'm gonna try scrolling down, and there it is. So it works. It works clearly, but as we can see, there's a couple of issues. First of all, it looks horrible. And there to reason for that one is the opacity we can see through it. We're not gonna want that with this design, of course, you might want another design, and also we can see that there's a different color on the logo. So what we're gonna do is that we're going to go back in here, and then we are gonna head over to style, right? And the first thing we're gonna do is change the opacity here. 200. That means there's gonna be no see through. And then we're gonna go to selects color, and we're just going to click on whites. It's just gonna be completely white. There we go. And then we're gonna scroll down and click on save changes and let's go back here and update this site and see what happens and scroll down and we can see it looks much, much better, doesn't it? So I'm really enjoying this design now. There's actually one problem with this one, and that is, as you can see, there is no border in between here, so this is completely white, and we also have a completely white background on what I mean Would a border between the menu and the content here is that there is no line going here. So, as an example, If we go to mail chimp, for example, we can see that they are using a menu. Appears well and this is completely white and this backgrounds completely white. But there is a border here that separates the menu from the content from the background. And I really appreciate this border. It really shows that here's the menu, and here is what you are checking out and reading. So I'm gonna want to use that border as well. And now, in order to make both my life and of course, your life much easier, especially your life guys, I've actually gone ahead and grab a code for that. And that code, in my opinion, does look a bit cooler than this border because this is a simple border, and I prefer to have actually a shadow border. So it looks like the menu is on top off the website. I'm gonna show you what I mean with this. So we're gonna go back to style and in here we have some CSS, and we don't have to worry about coding ourselves, but we can use other people's code who are much better at this, and I'm not a programmer and chances are you might not be. The other people are, and we can learn from them. So this code in here this is gonna be in the resource is you can just go ahead and grab that one. All you need to do is select all of these. Right click, click on copy. Then we're gonna go back. We're gonna go in and I'm gonna hit Enter. So I go down below and I'm going to just paste this information right in here, okay? Just like that. And then I'm gonna go ahead and click on save changes like that. And as we can see right now, there's no border in between here in between the white. So when I update this, there should be a nice shadow behind a look at that. This is looking really nice. Now. I really love this. Look, it honestly looks like the menu is on top off the website. It's an awesome look, in my opinion. So now when I have this white against white, we can see that there is a clear separation, a very clear border like this, right? So if there are additional things that you want to edit in here There are more things that we can do. For example, rather than using a slight effect, we can use a fade effect. Now, the slide effect works like this, that when I scroll down from here, you see that it disappears. But then it pops up right back when we have scrolled down far enough. Now, if we don't want to use the slide, we can actually use a fade like this. I can go ahead and save those changes and I can show you how the fate looks and I'm gonna update this as well. So now, scrolling down, we can see that there is a fade that happens. But the fate, it's actually so fast right here. So we're not getting much of an effect. Doesn't look that good at all. We're gonna have to go ahead and go to style and then stick it. Transition time. We can go ahead and move that up to let's put it to two seconds and then click on save changes. Go back, update this site. And now when I scroll down, you can see that there is a fade happening. But you might also notice something else writes here this logo is really sticking out. Right? So now when I scroll down to the white, we can see that there is a beautiful border here off the shadow. But there is something here that's not quite right, right? The border is being broken. And that is because when we made our logo, we actually used a completely white background. And because of this, this white background is interfering with the border. So what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go ahead and remove the white on the bottom off our logo here and make sure that this border looks fine. Now, if you don't have a hint of o c d like I apparently do, you might define with this. But in my opinion, this is what separates you and gives you a really professional decide when everything is just spot on and flawless. And here we can see a minor flaw. And that adds up guys. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do. It's actually changed back to the slide, and I'm gonna go and change back to the transition time off 0.3. Now, as you can tell, there's a lot of things that you can change in here and you can just play around with these options yourself, for example. You can disable it small screens and large screens. You can also decide when you want it to be visible. For example, you wanted to be invisible when you scroll down and Onley pop up when you scroll up. There's a lot of different options in here. Also, if you go to advanced, you can decide to disable this at certain pages. But once again, we're gonna hit back here and we are gonna make sure that this broken border is repairs. There is a completely beautiful borderline here that it looks flawless and 15 with our design. So what we're gonna go ahead and do is go to a website called Luna Pic. Now, Luna pic, It's really great because they allow you to make your certain pictures transparent. And this website is gonna be in the resource is as well. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do. It's actually upload the logo that we have There we are, and I'm gonna click on Choose. And here is our logo now, honestly, because the link the U. R L in the resource is is already set up for a transparent background. All you need to do is upload your logo the way that I did and then click on the background like this, and then it's all gonna disappear. Now you can see that there's a little white in here, a little white there in the bees in these, but it doesn't matter. Honestly, The Onley part that we really needed to remove and make transparent was this part right, Because we're gonna use to design with the white menu and eight white logo, so it's completely find that there is some whites still left in here. So what we're gonna do is actually scroll down and click on save here, and then we're gonna go back in here, and then we are going to go to appearance that we are, and we're gonna creek on customize like that. And in order for you to see the difference, I'm gonna go ahead and scroll down to the white again. Here we are. We can see this little breakage in here, so all I'm gonna do is click up here on this. But, um, we're going to get to the customization hitter part, and I'm gonna click on change logo. I'm gonna go to upload files, and I'm going to select that file. They were is usually called image. Edit something and then click on shoes and then select. And there we are. This is a perfect crop in my opinion. And then click on crop image. And already, now we can see the difference in here, right? So we can see that there is no line that is breaking here. We have a perfect shadow border going on, and it looks absolutely flawless. Now, if we go ahead and we compared to this we conceded here, there's still the breakage, right? We haven't updated this site. There's still the breakage compared to this. There is no break it. So this might look like a minor detail, but honestly does so, so, so much. So I'm gonna go ahead and click. Come published. Now, guys, remember when we actually did the logo earlier? You have the option to, for example, sign up m bist off at Canada. If you register there, you can download transparent logos. And if you're gonna take your website and your best into the next level, that might just be worth it. You can also go to fiber and ask someone to design you a really nice looking logo. And then you're gonna get that logo in a transparent background as well, so you can use it anywhere. But if you are going to go with the same route that we have, you need to make sure that the design here, for example, if we were going with black or purple or whatever that it was the same color in the logo that we were using on Canada, all you need to do is actually match the hex codes like we have done throughout this design . So here we are, guys, I'm really, really appreciating this home page right now. And there's still a 1,000,000 things that you could add Shoot you want to. But right now I believe that you understand how to create a nice looking home page, knowing the next lecture we're gonna go through and make sure that we have completed the mission off for home page so that we have nailed the psychology behind it and the reason to even have it to see in the next lecture. Guys 74. Home Page Design Analysis: All right, guys, we have done a beautiful job on the home page so far. Now, you might remember from on earlier section that we went through the purpose, the psychology and basically the reasoning behind the home page. Now, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and make sure that we are walking the talk, right. We're gonna make sure that everything fits in and that we have followed all of the steps. So So if you remember, there was a lot of different points, right? If we had men, you're not defining its purpose. That less is more delivering content and navigating to the content page. Let's go through them one by one and make sure that we have nailed them. The 1st 1 Do we want the homepage on the menu or not? Now, in our design, we decided not to opt for that. Right, Because we already have the homepage on the logo. So we're not gonna set any home in here, even though there might be some visitor that don't actually know that you can click on this , But still, the home page is not the main patron that most important pages are actually the start here Page and the course page, right? Because to start here, page is what's gonna warm them up towards everything that's going to make sure that they understand what we're all about and basically showed them that they're here with a problem and we are the solution. Then we can offer them. The course is that we have and help them out. They get their problems. So and of course we get a sale. That's a win win situation. So basically, to make it a timeline here, first we have the home page, which sends them to the start here that most likely eventually is going to send them to the courses. Right. So there's gonna be no need to put the home page in the menu, at very least, not in this design. So we decided not to use a menus, a weakened mark that out. Now the next point was to define its purpose. Now our purpose with the homepage is to introduce them to our concept, show them what we're all about, and then offer a learn more or start here button. They're basically the same thing for us so that we can make them go from. I wonder how they can help me to Ah, hot. This is my solution. That is the main purpose off our homepage. And of course, some people are still going to go ahead and scroll down. So the first thing that we have added in here is social proof, and this is huge. Now they understand that this is no joke, right? You could even add in more testimonies if you'd like to. But I think this is so thorough that I'm more than happy with this one. And then we've gone through, were actually offering them something here, Right? So if there scrolling down, they're still not sure if they're going to stay. If they're gonna leave, then there is something actually for them in here. Especially when you see that there's a $99 value and they can get it for free and off course chance to start because they're here. They're interested in digital marketing. They have an issue with it. And here you can get the latest hacks for to pull your forward, get you ahead of competition. It's a really clever design. And then finally, when they are warmed up enough, we have our best selling courses right here. So there is a higher kidder. It's a thought behind how we are doing this. So in other words, we have defined the purpose very well that we want to explain what we're doing and then send them to the started to make the audience even warmer. That was the purpose. Here wasn't a restaurant. Maybe you wanted to display the menu and have them order something. If it was a gallery website, for example, for a photo shoot. Maybe you're a model and you want to showcase than the purpose would be to show instantly showcase what you have to offer. That was not our purpose. So we can mark this one out as well, and then we have less. It's more which was to design that we were going for, because it's very popular and super affected to remove all of the clutter. And in my opinion, this is the definition. Off less is more. We have a beautiful background giving a feeling we have a header here that goes straight to the point Business made easy. Let us show you how and then we're connecting. Are you looking to build or expand your business but don't know where to start. Let us show you how literally. And then they learn more. So we're telling them to hate. You have an issue with the business. You want to start your business, we make it easy. Let us show you how we make it easy and we can help you. Super clean scrolling down here is a social proof very clean. Here we have an email. Often we have all of this free space. We have this offering here. This the first name, There's an email. Send me the hacks. It's all also clean. And then we have our courses. Just three. Check out one of these three. You can click, come to learn more or view. All of the course is awesome. In my opinion, this is a very clean the sign. And I'm very happy about this one. So yes, less is more. And I think in this case we did less and we got more from it. So let's mark this one out as well. And then next up, we have to deliver content and indeed delivering content. We are right. So the idea for the learn more so actually send them through her and deliver content for them to make them into a warmer audience. When I introduced what we're all about and how we consoled their problem and the only way to really solve their problem is by delivering the content, delivering solutions or suggestions to solutions that's gonna sold the problems that they have scrolling down off course. We're also delivering a completely free course with the email office. We are taking full advantage off the home page and further down were even delivering these courses or rather showcasing these courses that Hey, this is actually what we have got here. Now, if you're looking to really get into digital marketing, check this South or viewing to Shopify. Drop shipping, Amazon FB, etcetera, etcetera. We are delivering content guys, so definitely check on that and then finally navigate to content page. And this is what I've been talking about all the time, right? So we have the learn more here that's going to navigate to the start here patient. That's where we're gonna have a bunch of different content and scrolling all the way down all of these air going to deliver to content page now, currently I have these set ups. These actually take them straight to you to me, right? If they click here or here, they're gonna be taken to Are you timid? Page, where we have our complete digital marketing course similar with Shopify an Amazon and then with the view, all courses This is going to go ahead and be linked to our courses. Page right, so that they can see all of our courses going on there, and those courses is going to be linked to you to me. So we are most definitely navigating them to the content pages. So let's check mark this one as well. Now, guys, really good job again. There's an endless amount of things that you can do on your home pitch. We've been showcasing different things that you can do to manually customize your home page using different backgrounds, different features using different widgets elements, etcetera. Now, in the next section, we're gonna go ahead and make sure that our website is optimized before we move on. In other words, we want to make sure that it loads quickly because trust me, if your website is loading slower than in two seconds, I think the statistics say there's like 30 or 40% of the people are gonna leave and that is huge guys 30 or 40% of the people. And I think if it's even slower, that's gonna be even mawr who leaves. So even if you have the most beautiful website in the world, what's the point? If no one is going to stick around to check it out? So in the next section, we're going to make sure that everything is optimized. Everything is loading quickly. Everything is still looking really good. And then we're gonna continue by doing and designing our courses page or start here page about page, etcetera, etcetera. And I'm gonna show you how to effectively used the templates that are already in elementary because now you know how to actually use the different features off L. A mentor. So we can just go ahead and edit and customize the templates that are already in here. Great job, if you have any questions, will be in the Q and A, as always see in the next lecture and in the next section 75. Introduction - UI vs UX vs CX: hi and welcome to the optimization section off the course. Now, this is a super important section where we're gonna talk about things such as page loading speed. Now, if your page loading speed is too slow, your visitors aren't even going to stick around to experience your website. So it doesn't matter how well you have decided. And now, similarly, if you have a really fast loading speed But you have a terrible design, visitors aren't going to be staying anyhow. So the important part is to optimize everything and find that wonderful balance to make sure that everything works. So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and go through some really important acronyms, what they are, how to use them and how to relate to these expressions and keep them in mind while you are designing your website overall, right, So so far we have done the home page. Now we're gonna optimize it and these optimize stations, we're going to keep in mind throughout the rest of the course. So we always know what's important and what to focus on. So let's get started now, One expression that you're gonna hear ah, lot as you do your research and as you continue to develop your website and your website editing and designing skills is something called you. I also known as user interface. So user interface is basically what we have been doing. It's the designing. So if we have a look at our website right now, a part of the user interface is all of this that we are looking at, such as the background in here, for example, such as the font that reusing the colors that were using the fact that we made these sticky menu and gave it a shadow. The colors on here, the fact that we've been thought about having this dark having this light and then doing this Ah, little bit dark. You're doing this a little bit lighter. This is all a part of the design, how it's gonna look and how it is experienced with the different colors. And that is a part off the user interface. So we could summarize the user interface as a part off the aesthetics. Right? How the website looks. But then there's also something else. There's something that's called used, experienced as usual acronym that you x right. We can see those in the bold. So the user experience is basically how your website operates, right? So a part of the user experience is, for example, what happens when they come to the home page. What is the next step? That they're gonna do the subject that we have to learn more button that's gonna take them to the start here, page the order off these pages, the fact that we have a sticky menu. So whenever they are scrolling down, they can instantly access these pages. That is all a part of the used to experience, how the website operates and how they can access different things. Basically, how the website feels, and also part of the user experience is does your website fill Aggie? Does it load slowly? For example, if I scroll up, do things get blurry? Doesn't take too long for this color to appear. All of these is a part of their experience. Now, if this feels clunk it, for example, or Laghi that's really gonna downplay the experience off the website, right? If we have a slow loading speed that's gonna downplay a big part of the user experience off this website so we could summarize the user experience as how the website operates, how the pages are laid out, why they are laid out that way. The search function, the way they were put the sections, why we have put the sections that way. So we realized that user interface and user experience they kind of blend together, but they're not the same. So where's user interfaces about the design itself? User experience also has a part of the design, but it's more about how it also operates so that it operates quickly, effortlessly and in a thought out manner, for example, that we have the learn mawr bottom that it takes them to the start here page that we have a sticking menu, etcetera. That is all a part of how the website operates and therefore a part of the user experience . And then we also have something that is acronym S C X, also known as customer experience, and the customer experience that is much more about your business, how people are perceiving your business, right? So, for example, if you have such things, such as you have on email, open or you have a lead generation, or perhaps you're offering free things on your website. They're getting a really good feeling from the whole experience on your website from your business that Issa part off the customer experience. Now, we could summarize this as being the some off the user interface, the user experience together with your business. Right. So if you have a really good looking website, you have a great user experience on that website and your business is offering a great solution to their problem. Then you are gonna have a very high customer experience, right? So we could summarize that as the overall business experience that your customers that your visitors are having off your business and that your business is of course represented by your website. Now we're gonna go ahead and focus on the user interface and the user experience because this is a WordPress masterclass course, right? The customer experience is gonna come naturally as your start developing your business because different business is gonna have different tools, different needs. But we're gonna make sure that the website fulfills everything with the design and everything with the user experience, the way that we just have and will continue to do so now. The result of optimizing everything will be, for example, that we're gonna have improved S E o. So when our pages are loading quicker, that also means that the search engines are gonna be happy you're gonna rank higher. It also means that customers are going to stay on your website. Now that is called retention. And when you have a high retention in other words, customer sustained for a long time on your website, search engines are gonna like you even more. And that means you are going to rank higher and rank higher in rank. How you're you're going to get more and more and more visitors, and that is what this is all about. And finally, once you have a great user interface, great user experience and finally the custom experience really peaks. Then you are gonna have conversions now, conversions. That is just a word that literally means change. So a conversion for a block could be that you have a visitor turn into a reader. Now, if you have an e commerce, that could mean that you have a visitor turn into a buyer or you could have, for example, a visitor turn into a lead, etcetera etcetera, Depending on what you want them to change into convert into that is gonna be the result, right? That is what we've been talking about. The purpose off the website of the home page and everything. And because we are doing courses, we wanna have people come to our website, get accustomed to us, get warm and by our courses. So when someone buys one off our courses, that is gonna be a conversion for us. And in order to get that, we need to nail the user interface. You I, the user experience ux and the customer experience the c X. So, guys, not when we know this we're gonna move on to the next lecture. And because we've been doing so much user interface to designing In other words, we're going to start off by improving the user experience and looking at how our website is performing with the loading speed, for example. So this is super important. See you in the next lecture, where we're gonna optimize the U X and then go deeper into do you. I see you there 76. Speed Test Your Website: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and learn how to speed test our website. Now, this is very important because the loading speed off your website determines how your visitors experience your website, remember? Used to experience. Now there is some pretty crazy statistics that show that if your website takes five seconds or longer to load, then up towards 70% off your visitors will leave. And similarly, if your website takes two seconds to load, then up towards 34% off your visitors will leave that, guys, that's one two seconds that people are not willing to wait for it to load. That's insane. So we need to keep up making sure that our website loads quickly. Otherwise, if we're gonna lose all the traffic, they are not going to experience all this beautiful design. Right? So we're gonna go ahead and use a tool called up time, and this will off course be in. The resource is you can just go ahead and access it. They're and we're gonna go ahead and see how long it takes for a website to load and see what is delaying it. If it's taking long Now what I'm gonna do here is actually used to Tab. So I'm gonna use one for the website that I have created, right, And then another tab with the same up time where you can go ahead and check your competitors loading time or simply someone who you have based your design off because that's going to give you a good hint off what you are missing out when it comes to loading times when it comes to often mice ations. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is go ahead and grab our u R l like that. I'm gonna cope it, and then I'm gonna go ahead, remove this and just paste it in. There we go, and I'm gonna click on start testing. I'm gonna leave that random location, start testing, and I'm gonna go to Pat Flynn's website were actually gonna use his website because we've been shaking him out so much and based in a lot of for the science on his website, I'm gonna go and grab his Ural. Copy it. Go back here, remove this, paste it in, and then click on. Start testing. I'm gonna leave this on random to That's not completely fair, but it isn't. Anyway, we just want a comparison chart. Chances are here, some much higher budget and people working for him to optimize his website to the next level. Now, we probably don't have that. We still want something to compare to. All right, guys. So the results are in, and honestly, it's not looking too good. So looking at this, we can see that are loading time based off of Sidney, Australia now, But anyhow, are loading time is over four seconds. Now, this is milliseconds, So that means that every 1000 is a second. So the loading time for a website is 4.2 seconds. Now, remember how much traffic we lost at two seconds? Can you imagine how much we're gonna lose the three? And now, even four. We're almost at five seconds. Which means we're probably touching that 70% off lost traffic. This is a massive deal breaker, and we're gonna need to optimize this. We see that we have a lot of requests, requests being that there certain things that needs to load between the CSS and JavaScript . We don't need to go in detail on this. Just that there's a lot of things going on on our website. There's probably not helping with the loading time and the total size for our website is 2.7 megabytes. Guys, that is too big now. Honestly, the goal is to get below one megabyte for your site. Okay, so 2.7 that is just too big. And we're gonna have to fix that. If you make it really professional, you might even manage to go on the under 500 kilobytes. Now that 0.5 megabytes, we can see that we have a low performance grade for the four out of 100 based on the previous statistics. But our mobile use ability is really high, and that is thanks to the Ocean WP theme and off course elemental, which is already making it mobile responsive for us. So thank you for that. And then we see where this test is based. So let's go ahead and shake out Pat Flynn's website. Now we can see that he has such a much faster loading from a much, much, much faster loading time right, so he's loading time is 0.3 seconds, almost 0.4 seconds, but anyway, it's below one second. It is also worth noting that he is loading from the US while we are loading from Australia . So there is some difference, but still the difference is massive. He is a lot less requested that also helped. But look at this. This is vital. The total size of his website is 630 kilobytes. Now that 0.6 megabytes. So we need to drastically lower decisive our website to speed it up. Looking at his performance grade, we can see that he doesn't top the scales here either. He doesn't have 100 out of 100 guys you don't want necessarily to top the performance scale because the higher your performance is, usually the more your design has to suffer, right, because the more high quality pictures your using, the more interactive featured, you're using all of these things that take time to load. So what do you want to do is find a balance between user experience and the user interface . So 73 might actually be a really, really good number because we know that his website is beautifully the sign and there's a lot of wonderful features going on here. So the fact that he can have all of this wonderful descendants the load so quickly that is amazing. Remember this when you're doing the test, you don't want to go too much in the performance and make the design suffer. It's all about the balance. Here. Mobile usability is going ranking really high as well. So let's go back to our own website here now. The interesting thing is that if we scroll down, we can actually see what is the problem on our website. Right. So what we see here is that we have an issue with optimizing our images. They're not optimized. In other words, we have something called render blocking JavaScript and CSS in the above the fold content, remember, above the fold, that is gonna be all of this. And everything here is down below the fold. And then we have reduced server response time and leverage, browse or cashing What? We're gonna go ahead and do guys in the upcoming lectures there is to go through all of these and correct them and make sure that our website loads much, much faster and optimize everything Okay, because this is gonna make our user experience suffer a lot. Is going to make our S CEO suffer a lot. Basically, you're not gonna be able to have a sustainable business with this sort of slow website. Okay, so we need to correct this. And honestly, it's quite exciting to do. This is a vital step. Don't miss out this section in the course. See you in the next lecture, guys. 77. Image Loading Speed: All right, my friends, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and do some problem solving together like we have for a while. Now, we're gonna go ahead and optimize our image loading speed because we are not looking so impressive right now. By the test, we just did. So, as you can see, if you scroll down below, we get some a couple of recommendations going on here we have in the performance section. We have the optimizing images, eliminating render blocking, reduced service bones, time leverage, browser cashing, and then one at mobile usability size tap targets appropriately. Now we're going to go through them, but we're gonna do it step by step. So let's start with this one. Optimizing images. So if I click here, it's actually gonna tell me about approximately how much space I could say if I was just a tad bit smarter. And also which of the images they are actually costing problems so we can see. For example, we have the these are marketing 17 courses in one image is actually it could be reduced by 97%. That's huge. And also we have the Amazon. It could be reduced by 97%. We have the Shopify image 97% And these are all these images that we have just put up right now they're taking a huge amount of space in needlessly Now. We also have other images like it says they're sky people and person, and these are actually the background images that I just decided not to name. But I remember the names off them. So these are the background images that could be optimized just as well. And then finally, we have the cropped image edit, and this is actually the name of our logo. But as you can see, this is only going to say it was 4.9 kilobytes. So I'm not going to bother with optimizing this one. But everything above here we're gonna go ahead and optimize each and every one of them and then run a new test and get this size down right, because these his way to be wanna be under one megabyte and definitely below two seconds for the loading time. So let's go ahead and go to our home page. And if you are here and you want to start editing with L a mentor or we need to do is click on edit with L. A mentor. So what we're gonna do now is that we're gonna start optimizing all of these images were using. And we're talking this background picture, this background, all of these three and this background image, right? And we are gonna do that by putting them all into a folder so that we know where we have them. And then we're going to go to this website called image compressor dot com. Also known as often my sil, How I love that name. So this is, of course, in the resource is now all we're gonna go ahead and do here is click on upload files like this, and then we are gonna go to all of our images, select them and click on shoes. So it's actually a really handed process, and now it's gonna start compressing the images for us in this second. But the beautiful thing here is actually that we can customize our own compression, right? So, for example, we have Amazon right now that's selected in here. And if I scroll down, I can see the way the original looks and the way it looks while it is compressed. I can also see how many percent I'm saving what the new sizes. But here is the interesting thing here. I can see the amount of colors being used right now and also notice that there's not a lot of cultures going on right now. So what I'm gonna do is actually pull this down to say, Let's do 80 collars and we can tell that there is no difference whatsoever in the images. But there is a difference in this size, so I'm gonna continue. Let's move down to 70 right? And there's still no noticeable equality. Really, That's changing here. So I'm gonna go down even further. Let's go down to say 55. I'm pushing the limits lightly here. Let's do 53 it's still looking fine. Gonna go even further. Let's do 40. Okay, so I have actually compressed this big time right now. Even if I assume in there still no noticeable loss of quality, I'm gonna go really crazy, actually, and go with 20 and it's still looking. OK, but if I assume in there yeah, as we can see, the white is actually starting to suffer a little bit. So I'm gonna move up to say 40 and we get a nice or white there. So I'm going to stick with this one with the four to college because this is just gonna be a thumbnail size anyhow, so I'm gonna click on apply. So we're just gone from 68 to 76% compression. Really Good. Now, this is just a thumbnail, so you can get away with MAWR quality suffering here. But this one is a super important image because this is our background image. So we need to be a little bit more careful here. So we have the quality right now and just to show you what happens if you go too far, if I would pull this down to say, you know, let's go with 35 you can see that there's quite a decently noticeable lack of quality going on in here now, especially if I sue mean it gets more prevalent and because this is a bit more sensitive off a case, because there's gonna be a big background image. We don't want to go too far here. Like you can see, it's all blurry in the background here Let's try out 60 and see what happens. So six is looking pretty good. I'm gonna sue. Meaning you can see that there's definitely a little bit of loss of quality if assume in like this. But I am actually going to go and increase it to 65. I think this is looking really nice. So what you want to do? You can also see there's a little bit off the caller's fading else. I'm gonna go to 70 here. So what you want to do here is just keep on eye on the quality. Make sure that the loss isn't too big rights, especially on this important images. We're gonna go ahead and apply them, and we're gonna do this for all of the images. And then we're gonna make sure we're gonna upload them on our home page and have a look so that there is no noticeable suffer off quality. Of course, we don't want to sacrifice actual image quality, noticeable quality in order to get better loading speed. There's gonna be this nice balance, but we want to get under one megabytes in size, so I'm gonna continue optimizing these images. Let's pull this down to about, let's say 65 then soon in, we can see that there is a definitely a change of qualities. I'm gonna go with 70 on these ones, and then I'm gonna apply, and we're gonna see what kind of results these yields. Now you can, for example, see, we've gone from 252 kilobytes to 71 kilobytes. There's a huge, huge, huge difference. So we're saving a sawn off size. And now, if we would ever go too far, which we're gonna notice when we're uploading, all we need to really do is go back your upload, their original, and then be kinder on the compression itself. So I'm gonna go down to 70 on this one s. Well, there would go. I'm gonna hit. Apply. This is a thumbnails. I don't have to be quite a sensitive Let's go with and check out, say, 59. You can see that there's some quality suffering right there. But once again, this is going to be a thumbnails. I believe this will be fine. I'm going to go ahead and use this from 501 kilobyte to 116. That's huge. And finally I'm gonna do Don't Shopify. And this is also a very simple image, even though there's more going on in the background. So I'm going to scroll down. Let's do 60. There we go, and I'm gonna just hit apply here. So now when I am all done, I have applied it on everyone and we can see that there's no real noticeable quality loss. Nothing big. I'm gonna download all of these by simply clicking on download all. And then I'm gonna go ahead and extract them. So here are all of the images right now that I just used. And here is the image compressor. It is a sip file. I'm just gonna double click on it. And here I get the new fouls. It's just in this folder called Image Compressor. Right, So this is really, really good. Now we're gonna go ahead and go to the website. We're gonna re upload all of these, and then we're gonna run a new test and see the results. Okay, so let's start with the background picture here. I'm gonna click up here. We're gonna edit this section, move over to style, and then we have the image right here. I'm going to move over to upload file. I'm gonna go to select image compressor. It's right in here. And then we're gonna use this sky image again and we can see that the size is now 134. And remember, we still have smashed that is compressing the files for us so as to upload is in section 131. It applies this life compression to that. But look at this comparison. We have 131 kilobytes here and the previous, even with smushed compressed was 422 is a huge difference, guys. And that is because we're using the lossy compression right? With smart, we can Onley use lossless compression unless we buy that plug in. And of course, if you want to make your life a little bit faster and easier, you can buy smush the premium. But honestly, it's not that big of a bother to use this tool. I think it works Superb. So this looks really nice and gonna go ahead and click on insert media and here we have it . So let me go ahead and click on preview changes here and here we have it. And as you can see, there's no big difference in quality. So if I just to show you the difference between them, I'm gonna go ahead and compare them side by side. So if I open these two up, this is the original image, right? This is the one that was 422 kilobytes, and then this one is the one that is almost four times smaller in size as you can sell. If we look at the shadow down here while I'm jumping in between them, there is a slight difference in color on ever so slight difference in color. And you can notice these asked, Well, when you are looking at the background right, but there is no big deal going on it. This is well worth saving all of the size, saving all of the loading time. So, basically, even though we're using lossy, it's basically no loss off actual quality. So let's continue optimizing. I'm gonna go ahead. I'm going to scroll down to here, click on editing this section, move over to style, going to go down to image here, click on the image, and I am going to upload files, Select. And then I'm gonna click on the image with the girls sitting here. Now, this is 76 kilobytes. And if you have a look on the previews, this is 293. So this is a huge, huge, huge difference. Now, my math is too bad to give you a proper calculation. How much better it is, But there's a big, big difference going on. Right? So from 293 to 74 in Ghana, could it can insert media here and there we have it. There is no noticeable loss off quality going on here either. Now, I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to upload them all. And then we're gonna check the page out, right? So I'm gonna do the same. Appear, go to section, go to style. I'm gonna click on the image here, upload files, select images, click on shoes. So this is 71 kilobyte. The previous was 252. Huge difference. Click on insert media. There we go. Now I'm gonna go ahead and change these ones. That's what I'm just gonna Kulick here and I'm going to click on this image and then upload select files and then I'm going to upload the correct one and shoes and the insert media. I'm going to continue doing this on all of them, all right? So I have just changed all of these three as well. Now there's one more thing that's super important for you to know about that I did not do when I was using these images earlier. And that is, if you click on the immature, you can see that I am using the full image size. There's no reason to do that whatsoever, because we are compressing it to such a small size. So when we were looking at the test and it said that you can save afterwards and have a 97% reduction, what it meant by that is that I can actually, instead of using a full image, it takes a lot off size and space. I can just go ahead and click on medium, for example, and there is no loss off quality whatsoever because I'm actually having this small size. But it is cropping itself by using this feature so it automatically gets even smaller Now you're gonna notice if you go too far. Because if I used the thumbnail here, for example, you can see that That just ruin the image. Right? But if I used the medium 300 times, 300 or medium large or I used a large, you can tell that the only real difference is the loading time, because the quality is pretty much the same. So I'm gonna go with medium 300 times, 300 because that is all that we need. Same here. Medium 300. Same here. Medium. 300 times, 300. And now we've updated everything. I'm gonna go ahead and click on update right here and now I'm gonna go down and click on preview changes, and we're going to see how the website looks and as you can see, did you see that loading time? That was a big, big difference. Guys like we just ended up here like that and I'm loving this, and if you scroll down, you can see that there's no real lost off quality. Actually, this image might be having a little bit lots of quality, but not too bad, in my opinion, scrolling down this is no noticeable loss off qualities. So the only thing that you might want to do would be to increase the quality off this image , because here it is a bit more noticeable. But this one has no noticeable loss of quality. What so ever going on? So I am super happy with the results of this. But what we're gonna go ahead and do now is run a new speed test and compare the results. So I'm gonna open in new tab, go to up time that come free tools, speed test. And now I'm just gonna ride in our website and then start testing. All right, guys. So the results are in. And as we can see, there is quite a difference in the results right now. So the previous results, we were looking something like this. We're looking at a loading time at 4.2 seconds. Now we're looking at a loading time at 2.3 seconds. That is almost half still too much, but drastically different right now, if we're looking at the total size, it's actually 1.1 megabyte. That is a massive difference from 2.7 now, in my opinion, 1.1 megabyte is still a bit too much because I want to be below one megabytes. So what I am going to do is actually put these through the compression. A couple of them, for example. I'm gonna compress this further while also compressing this a little bit further while actually maybe increasing the quality off this one, and then I'm going to run a test again and make sure that I am below one megabyte. Okay, but this is how you optimize your images. Make sure that your website loads much faster, but there's still more issues going on, right? So if we look down, we can see that we have the eliminate render blocking that is up next, and we're going to go through that in the next lecture. So if I now go ahead and go down to optimize images, we're gonna be able to see what the issue is, because apparently we can save a lot of space stealing. If we're saving this much, we're gonna go down quite drastically on the total size. So as we can see, we could still have a huge reduction in the digital marketing, the Amazon logo and the Shopify logo, right? We're not going to bother about this from because it's safe, so little. But here we could actually save over 100 over 100 over 200. So what I am noticing here is that these are actual P and G's. Right? So what, I'm gonna go ahead and do before we move on to eliminate Render blocking is that I am going to go ahead and show you in the next lecture how you can turn PNG images to J pig in order to save ah lot of size and we're going to go well below the one megabytes. Okay, so if you already know how to do this and you're fun with the image of the my station, you can move on to the next lecture. But if you do have P and G false and you need to resize down even further to get below this than join me and follow me in the next lecture, and we're gonna take care of this size problem, Casey, in the next lecture, guys 78. PNG to JPG Conversion: all right. In this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and convert our PNG files into J pig. Now, if we scroll down, we noticed at the optimized images here that there is ah lot off size to be reduced still. Now, we're not gonna earn in this much reduction because we are not using the full size off these thumbnails, right? Remember these air full scale when they're uploaded, but at the way that we are using them for our products or for our courses, we actually make them 300 by 300. But needless to say, there's still a lot of space that we can save. So we're gonna go ahead and turn our PNG files, which are these three files into J pack. Because usually that can even make the size about half. So we really need that at this point because we want to go under one megabytes. So I'm gonna go ahead and go to the PNG to j pig dot com site. This is in the resource is off course, and I'm gonna click on upload files, and then I'm gonna choose my file, which is the Amazon, the digital and the Shopify ones. click on shoes and then I'm just gonna go ahead and click on download. All OK, so I have added in the sip file and just gonna double click on it like that, they would go. And now I can remove the sick file, and I'm gonna go ahead and grab these images, put it in the same folder down below here, going to remove this folder, and I am actually going to go ahead and remove these PNG images right now because we don't need them. Here we have our new J pig. And if you have a look at them for example, this one and this one, I'm just gonna open them up. You can see that there is literally no loss off quality. What so ever Now the only thing I'm noticing is actually, there's some sort of difference. If you look super closely at the gold on the chip back, there seems like something is going on when I'm changing. So this is an extreme minor, especially considering we're gonna use this is 300 by 300 so we don't need them. We're gonna go ahead and remove the PNG ones Amazon and there we go. They're gone now. I'm actually gonna put these through the compression once again because with the J peg would notice if we compress them down even further insights We're gonna go ahead and do that right now. So I'm gonna go back to the image compressor or optimize Cilla as it also known as I love that name. And I could I can upload files right here. And then I'm gonna choose these, which are now in J pig there. And then the Shopify one okay and lengthy can choose. I'm going to scroll down, and now we can lower the quality quite a bit already. So I'm gonna just try it out. Maybe clicking on 25. We can see that they clearly is a loss off quality. But we have to remember, this is gonna be 300 by 300 so there's gonna be a very, very little change to this. So I am a 25. You can see the original turned down to 52 which is a huge difference. I believe the previous will sit around 100 so have really lowered the size by making this into a J peg and quality 25. Now, again, you can actually see that there is a lost off quality going on. There's no doubt about that. But we're gonna use this as a thumbnail, so I believe that this will be just fine. I'm actually going to use this 25 quick and apply. Gonna do the same thing here. We're gonna move it down to 25 see what happens. Yes, there's a loss of quality here as well. But I'm gonna apply this because they will be so small. Same thing here. Click on apply. And if it's just too bad, if it's not working out, then he's pulling the original once again and redo the process. Not gonna click on download all. Here's the sip file. I'm gonna double click on this sip file right here. And then we have the image compression, right. Gonna remove this one. I'm gonna pull these ones out and put them in. Let's put it down below here. And I don't want to mix these up, so I'm just going to give them a new name quickly. All right, so now they all have a new name. That's really nice. I'm gonna go ahead and go back to the website. I'm gonna go to our home here, and I'm gonna click on edit with L. A mentor. Now should also let you know that I took the liberty to use the previous background pictures and actually compressed them a little bit further. I believe that I used in the beginning 70 or 75. Now I went down and compressed them to 60 and still comparing the original with the compress, which you can always do. There's still no loss of quality in anyone off the pictures. Not even actually this background that I thought had a loss. It did not. So that's great news. So we're gonna go ahead and I'm gonna click on this one in here and then click here, click on upload files, select files. Gonna be a little bit easier to find now because it has a new name, right? So now this one is actually 26 kilobyte. That's super tiny, and we can see that compressed with smarts, which happens automatically. It becomes 25 kilobytes and we can see the previous one. I had 116 right, because it was a PNG. So we've saved a lot off size by doing these guys a lot of size. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on insert Media. And as you can tell, there's no loss of quality because it is so tiny. I'm gonna do the very same thing here, click on it, upload file, select file. I'm going to go to the shop if I j pig compressed. Now, this one is 12. It might become 11. Nope, it's still 12 and the previous one was 82. So huge difference in size going on here, and I'm gonna do the same one with this Amazon, which is the last one upload Find the J pig compress, which is 14 might become 13 is like a gamble, you know, just guessing like this. No, it's still 14. The previous one was 75. Huge size difference. Now 14 75. They're not big amount, but this kind of managing on a lot of images that's going to save you a lot of space. If you think 14 to 75 on my math is not that impressive. But I think that saving, like four times or five times decisive, is a huge difference. in that sense. So as we can see, there's no actually visible loss of quality because they are so small. I'm gonna go ahead and click on updates. So this was our results the first time we did the test. Then we redid the test. We had 1.1 megabyte. Now we're going to do the test one more time and compare it to the last one when we have optimized the P and G T J pig. I'm gonna go to up time, click of free tools, go to speed test, and I'm gonna write in our website, then start testing. And remember, we remain looking at this size right now and check this out. Guys, really, really good news. This size is absolutely incredible. So we have now gone down to 465 kilobytes while in before we were actually at 1.1 megabytes . So we did have a big reduction after all, from turning them from P and G to J peg, even with the compression and everything going on. So this saved us up a lot off space, and we have optimized our entire front page right now and look at the loading speed were actually the loading at one second. That is half off the two second rule. Now, there's still a lot of good stuff to be done. For example, we still want to eliminate the render blocking JavaScript, which we're gonna do in the next lecture. But even if we Onley did this right now, we had a loading speed of one second and a total site off below 0.5 megabyte. Then that would be incredible. Once again, looking at Pat fully and he's bigger. But there is also more stuff on its website. But this this is beyond incredible. So even though he has a bigger size is still loading faster and that is because he s less request and he has taken good care of his website and we are doing the same thing. So we're gonna continue and further optimize our website. But we managed to get the total size down by optimizing our images and by looking at your own right now, you might still have this one. Words has optimized images because there's still some work. Should we want you to be done, for example, we still have the logo that we could compress them. Interestingly, it's still saying that we could be saving some space on these images right on the people images, even though it is so small, it says, we could be saving space on the digital on the Amazon and on the Shopify, and that may be true. We could probably compressed it further and further and further. But honestly, this is a really, really good size. Like I told you earlier on, if you could get it 0.5 megabytes, that is gonna be incredible. This might be hard to keep if you continue to expand and add more things your home page, but it's still a really, really good size. You want to be below one megabyte. If you can go to Syria 10.5 megabytes, that is incredible, and you don't want to go crazy on this, either. Remember, it's all about the balance between the user interface and the use of experience, and I think right now we have compressed them more than enough, and I'm super happy. So two things to remember one. Turn your P and G's to J pick and to compress them all. If you have smashed this is gonna be easy smushed the premium version, that is. But if you don't, you might as well just use the tools. And the resource is just takes a little bit more time, but it is completely free. So let's move on. Install the next problem, see in the next lecture guys. 79. Eliminate Rendering Blocking JavaScript CSS: Alright, guys. So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and move onto the next issue we have with our website in order to make it perform better and load faster. Now, the next thing for us to move on to its under the performance tab and it is this one and it says eliminate render blocking JavaScript and CSS in above default content. Okay, so let's break that down. Water this now JavaScript is a computer. Language is the language that the computer and the web browser understands. And JavaScript is basically what executes the many off the effects on our website that this sign off our website, right? See, Assessor, the coach we've been using to do different changes on a website like we've been using a certain code for our mail poet form. We've been using a code for a sticky menu, etcetera those r C s s codes which are codes. Now. The problem with this is that they are rendered blocking. So what does render blocking me? It means that these need to execute before the website can load properly, right? And they take their time to execute. And because it takes a while it increases the loading speed. So what we want to do is eliminate the render blocking JavaScript and CSS in above the fold content. And the reason we only want to eliminate it in above the full content is because when you load a website doesn't really matter how long it takes for all of this to be loading or any of this because the only thing that you'll be seeing on your website or on your mobile if you're loading the website there on your screen is gonna be the above the full content. So everything here you want to load as quickly as possible. So let's go ahead and eliminate those JavaScript is and those see assesses. So what we're gonna do is move over to our dashboard because we're gonna use plug ins for this, and then we're gonna keep testing to make sure we get the responses that we want. Now we're gonna move down to plug ins and click on add new plug in, and we are going to search for auto team mice. It sounds kind of like out to optimize, but it only has a single Oh, so it's hoped auto optimize kind of a mouthful. So here it is. It has over 900,000 active installations, and it's going to be helping us with the the JavaScript and CSS. So we're gonna go ahead and install it, and then I'm gonna click on Activate. And now we're gonna move over to settings. And this is where we start activating the different functions. So we're also able to to optimize the HTML even though we don't have any issues with that optimize stations, General attempt to be good. So you can decide for yourself if you want to activate this or not. Now then we have the JavaScript options and the CIA says options. So I'm gonna go ahead and click this one in, and I'm gonna go ahead and click this one in as well so that they get optimized. Then I'm gonna click on save changes. Now, if we look back and we look at our test results right here and I click down here, we can see that there are four JavaScript, their booking and 18 CSS. Resource is now because there are so many seasons. Resource is the auto optimized generally isn't enough on its own to take care of all of them. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do as well. It's move over once again to plug ins and click on Add new. And now I'm gonna search for auto theme eyes again. I mean, I that word, it's really hard to say. And now I'm gonna use their older plugging called critical CSS. Now, what this is going to do is take care of even more CSS and even more specifically the above the fold CSS. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on Install now and then I'm gonna click on Activate Perfect . It is installed. Now, in order to get to it, all we need to do is go to auto, optimize in here and click on settings again because it's the same company who's been doing it is gonna be added in. You can see here it says critical CSS. But it will also be added in the main and this is where we have the main features. So now we are in here and we have the critical CSS added and it will be added in the main. If you don't see these changes, all you need to do is click on the refresh button up here and it will solve itself. Now, there is one thing specifically want to doing here, and that is to scroll down. And we're going to see that there is something here. This is in line above the fold CSS while loading main off to my C says Onley after page load. So we want, specifically the above the fold, content to have their CSS optimized and the way that a lot of plug ins does this, even though this is a bit of extra information, is that they prefer to put the CSS in the footer. And we know that the photo is all the way down, right? So that means it's gonna load later. But it doesn't matter because what is important is that the above the fold section loads as quickly as possible because the second that lows that second, your website becomes available and visitors can start using, and that's gonna take a couple of seconds, and by then the rest of the website will already have been loading itself and functioning. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do here, actually, in order to get the CSS from above the fold. It's used a website called Side Low City. And I'm gonna put this Of course, in the resource is so you can easily just grab it. Now all we need to do here is right, our website like that. And then click on generate critical path. See assessed. And this is going to give us all a for above the fold CSS. Which is that is gold. Honestly, And now we just scroll down and we're gonna have it all in here. You just need to click on this one's It's all gonna select itself, right? Click, And I'm gonna cope with this. Okay, Now, I'm gonna go back to auto Optimize in here, and I am going to paste it in. There we go. And now I'm going to scroll all the way down and click on save changes. Settings has been saved. So what do you want to do now? Well, off course, we want to do a new test to make sure that it is loading properly and that we have less request and we can see that these issues are disappearing. I'm just gonna write in our website here and then click on start testing And as we can see , there's a lot of really nice improvements going on. Look at this. We request have gone down to 31. Do we see the previous one now? The previous one had 60 requests going on, and now this one is having 31. Now the total size will see has gone down as well, but I've noticing that this is loading slightly different sizes. What's important to know is that it is under one megabyte, right, and it's quite well below one megabytes and the loading speed has improved as well, which is amazing, and it's loading from London UK. Incredible, absolutely incredible stats. Right now, our performance great is up from 56 to 63. But most importantly, let's go down and check this out. We can see that the only issue right now is that we have one blocking JavaScript and that is the G choir. It dot gs, and actually this one generally is the themes JavaScript. So the theme wants to be loading itself before we actually execute and show the website, and there are ways around this. But honestly, in my experience, this is not a problem. If you have a theme that really wants to use this JavaScript and not defer it. We can use this one. So I'm gonna leave this, and I am actually super happy with these stats. Now, guys, if you've installed these plug ins and you are still having javascript, which are issue right here, there is one more thing that you can do. Now. If you don't have that issue, you can move on to the next lecture. But if you do, stay around and I will show you. So we're gonna go back in here and we're gonna move over and installed yet another plug in . I mean, if there's a problem, there's a blogging, right? So we're gonna click on add new, and now we're gonna search for a sink. JavaScript. And here we go. And we are going to click on install. Now. We don't actually need this. This is for demonstration purposes, right? And then I'm gonna click on activate, and then we're gonna move over to settings, and then all you need to really do is go ahead and click on enable facing javascript and then scrolled down and save settings. Okay, Now, before we move on there's a couple of things that I want to show you. There are two different ways off using the racing JavaScript. Either you queued a sink or you could defer the JavaScript and the differences with the casing that is going to allow the JavaScript to execute a soon as they have loaded. In other words, whenever there is something on your website loading, you're just gonna let that show up on the screen before everything else is done right? The problem with that is that if the wrong things air loading too quickly, your theme is gonna breaks. You're going to see, like, this really ugly version off your website for about maybe half a second, and then all of the effects under the science and everything is gonna be applied. And that is not a great thing. So for some people and some themes and website, the A think it's not gonna work. Well, that's when you can use to defer and the deferment that means that you're gonna collect all off these loadings together. And when all of the most important ones for the great looks are all done, then they will execute. You get this greater look on your website now. The problem with that is that sometimes that is a little bit slower, but you never want to break your theme on the loading. So how do you know which one to use as quite simple, actually, because we already have this up Time to do the testing first off so we can check these out here and all you really need to do is go ahead and grab a private tab and shake out your website. Go to your website. If the A sink isn't working, then go with the differ. Just do what works, right. You're going to see if your website, if your theme is breaking. If it is, it's not working right. So, guys, that is it. This is how we solve the problem off the render blocking JavaScript and CIA says in above the fold content. So our website is getting better and better, faster and faster. Let's move on to the next lecture, okay? And if you have any questions off course, and, as always, will be in the Q and A C in the next lecture 80. Reduce Server Response Time: All right, guys, Welcome back Now, we've come quite far already. By now we have taken the time to optimize all of our images to save the plenty off size. We've also gone ahead and eliminated our render blocking JavaScript and CSS for the above the fold content. Now, next up, as you can see, it's reducing the server response time. Now, these Air Putin higher Kim. Meaning they want this on top, further to the left. That's the one with the biggest priority. The biggest issue, if you will. So currently, we're not having a very good server response time. If we click on it, we can see that it is at 0.78. And of course, this is also going to depend on where you are trying it from right now. We're trying it from London, and if we go back and we tried the earlier one and we check out this is our very first test , a lot has happened from since then. We can see that it took up towards 1.1 seconds. Now that's a long time to wait to even get your server going, or rather, to have a response from the server. So let's go more in depth to what this actually means, what we can do about it. So let's get started. So why do you say server response time? Well, in order to know what it is, we need to know how. What? It's measured now it's server response. Time is measured by something called titi FB. Time to first bite, right? So whenever your user is coming to your website, it's gonna measure how long it takes before they receive their first bite. The first information, right then you know, it goes from by kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, etcetera. So when they received their first bite, that is when the server has considered giving a response. And for us, right now it's 0.8 seconds and we've had up towards 1.1 2nd before the user even gets any response to get to download anything. And that's a long time, guys. So let's go through why this is and what we can do about it. So the most common issued, if we see in the easiest way to resolve it, is by having a look at the host server. Resource is right, so a host is gonna have several different servers from where you put all of the stuff from your website on. And the more space you have on that server, the more you can be using, for example, demanding plug ins. Adding mawr off your items, etcetera, etcetera, and that is gonna dictate how long the response time is. Now we're using blue host, right? And if we have a look at their website, we can see that a pair who go to hosting there are three different sections going on now. We are using shared hosting right now, and I'm going to explain the difference between these three and why they matter. And I'm gonna explain in a way that I learned and I think it's really, really handing. So shared hosting is basically like having on apartment right now. The more people that there is in the apartment, the less space you get because you're all sharing that same space. Shared hosting is the same way. So you basically have a server and they're just gonna put a bunch of people into that server and less people. There is the more space stories for you and your website. The more people there is the less pastries for you and the slower the response time is going to be, and then we have the VPs. Now, VPs is like living in a dorm. You're gonna have your own room, your own space, and it's up to you how much you decide to use that space. But you're always gonna have a certain amount of space available. Now, this is very similar with VPs because you have a server and you're gonna have a certain amount of CPU, a certain amount of ram, and it's gonna be up to you how much the use of it. Then there's gonna be a limit, but you're not dependent on someone else using it. So it doesn't matter how many people actually in the house, because you still have your own space. And finally we have the dedicated hosting, and that is basically like owning the entire house yourself, right? It's all you. There's no one else that you get all the space, you get all the availability for yourself. But as you can imagine, that's what Anyhow, there's mortgages. There's rent, etcetera, etcetera, and similarly, when you own the entire server, there's gonna be more costs So there is a higher keep for how much these three costs and shared hosting off course being the cheapest because you're all sharing VPs being more expensive and dedicated hosting being the by far most expensive. Now these are usually only needed the VPs and dedicate er, if you have a lot of traffic going on and dedicated, it's mostly if you have an extreme amount of traffic going on. Imagine these huge e commerce website. They might need the dedicated hosting. And also, if we're going to the shared hosting, which we have right now, we can see that there are upgrades. Now, even with the pro upgrade, we get a high performance going on, meaning if we have over over here, it says lower servant densities. So your website has more resource is available, and that's really what it's about. The available resource is for you and your website that's gonna dictate the server speed. Okay, so this is what Madison most when it comes to your server response time. But of course, we're not only limited to the horses, plenty of things we can go through, but let me go through and go deeper into why this is and also what we can do about it now. The reason this is the way it is is because Blue Host is a part of something called the E. I G. Endurance International Group. And basically, that's a big, big, big company that owns a lot of hosting company like host Gator, etcetera, etcetera. You have a look at their, Wikipedia said. You can see that they own. I think it was like 83 different hosting companies right now, and that is huge. But it also means that there's, ah, lot off people that is being packed into quite small servers, which is what they are doing. But we have to know that there are huge benefits to Blue Host. I'm gonna show you how to optimize the blue host servers further with what we have, and then you're going to get to see what the other benefits off blue hosts are now. I love Blue Host have been using Blue House for a while, even Pat Flynn, which we've been mimicking so far I've been learning from He's using blue host and that is because they have so many more advantages. Not all about the speed guys. So the other thing, we also can go ahead and do, which we already have done is optimized stations such as fixing our catch. Meaning we're putting all of our stuff into a catch. And then putting it to the user's computer so that they don't have to download, for example are header are images are bottoms or decides etcetera. Each time rather is gonna be on their computer, so the loading speed is increased. Also making the images smaller compressions, etcetera. Just making your website more lightweight. Okay. But perhaps the biggest thing and most important thing that we can do to speed up the response time of our server is to move our server closer to the Yusor. And we're going to do that through something called CD and content delivery network. Now, for the content delivery network, you might know about this already, but they are so also important. And there are three major ones that I want you to know about. Now, if you're using blue host like we are, you're gonna have something called site looks cdn already available to you in the blue host panels. I'm gonna show you how to activate that What on SSL is How is the cell works, etcetera in the next lecture. But there is one thing that you were going to show you how to activate now perhaps the biggest one when it comes to a free CD M is Cloudflare. So in the upcoming election, I'm gonna show you how to use Cloudflare as well. If you want to use that service which you're probably going to want to and I'm going to explain why in a little bit and then finally we have Max Cdn, which might be the most popular cdn off the mall ability. They have the most dedicated servers around, but they also cost. But I want you to know that if you're planning on spending money on this, I recommend Max Cdn. So, in other words, by having this different content delivery networks, we're gonna put our website into different servers around the world. So if you have someone who is from a certain part of Asia, for example going into your website, then they're gonna load your website from that Asian server which is going to be so much faster than loading it from. For example, Utah, I believe blue hostess situated in Utah in America. And this is how we're going to speed up our website by using all of these different servers . So it goes without saying that the more dedicated service they are, the higher the content delivery networks, the better it usually is. Cloudflare has by far the most when it comes to a free cdn, and Max Cdn has by far the most I believe just and end of the story. But they also cost. So we're gonna go ahead and set that up in the upcoming lectures, and that is severely gonna improve our server response time. Now there's one more thing that we're gonna go ahead and check out that it's so important and often overlooked. And that is our home and side. You are l And what I mean with that specifically it's how we ride it out. So, for example, we might have our http And then we have the colon forward slash forward slash robin and jesper dot com. But if we are using on SSL, which we will because it's so so important for S CEO and also for security, it's gonna look like this is gonna look like https Colin Colin forward slash forward slash robin and jesper dot com. But that also means that if someone goes to the regular http side, they first need to be redirected to the H T. T. P s site. Right? And this redirection is going to cost us valuable server response time, and we don't want that. So whenever we are riding out their website and putting it on the web, we need to make sure that we're putting out the proper u R l. Okay. And what 80 DP is an 82 P s we're going to go more into in the next lecture. But https, I can say I can talk a little bit about because that is gonna be about the security off your website. You need that security for a CEO for obvious security reasons, and it stands for the S actually stands for security and come from the SSL More about that in the upcoming lecture. But we also have more things such as If you are using w w w dot Robyn and jesper dot com, or it's gonna be www dot your website dot com, But you have actually set your website to just simply robin and jesper dot com. It's the same thing here. That means that if someone goes into your website using the double use, they first need to be directed to the u. R L without the W's and that it's also gonna cost a server response time. So to reduce this, what we need to do is make sure that we are giving out the correct your l. For example, if we're linking from our Facebook, if we're linking our content or different websites, etcetera, and make sure that we are ranking with the correct your else, and we're gonna go through how to do this in upcoming lecture. So in the next lecture, I'm gonna show you how to get the https, which you probably have already. But if nothing gonna show you how to get it and also how to activate this site, look, C d m. Okay. So see, in the next lecture, guys, 81. SSL SiteLock CDN: All right. Welcome back in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and make sure that you have your ssl activated and also how to deactivated should you want that. And also, I'm going to show you how to activate this site. Look, cdn. Now, if you are not using blue hosts as your host, you can go ahead and skip this lecture and move onto the next one because this is Onley gonna apply to the blue Host users. Okay, So skip to the next one, we're gonna go through SSL and CD and more in depth and then find an alternative solution. So we're going to start off E at blue Host that come here and then we're gonna click on a log in because we're gonna go and check out to see the S S. L So here we are. And now we're gonna go to market place, and then we're going to click on Adams and down below here, you're going to see something that's called SSL certificates. Now, if I click on here, I'm going to get into this site and you can see that it says also SSL is on. That means that we have our SSL activated again. If you're still confused with SSL is don't worry about it. We're going to talk more about that in the next lecture, but know that it's super important for security s sale and basically to rank and be safe. So I know that this is on. And that should also mean that if I go to Robin and jesper dot come, I'm gonna get this little pad look going on here And if and that also means that I am secured because the padlock is the cell means that I have on Http its websites. If I click here, you can see that it says h T T P s. Now, if I didn't have this, it would either just say, http or it might just look like this and there would be no padlock. Now, let me show you an example. Now, there is a website here called white Trainer. If I go in, the first thing you're going to notice is that there is no pad look going on. And if I click kid, there's no http s. So they are not using a SSL certificate, which means that it's not gonna be safe and it's not going to rank properly as well as it could. We're gonna go more in depth into these in the next lecture and show you why and how it works. So that is for the S s L. Now let me show you also help to activate the site. Look, see them Because that's one of the wonderful features that comes with Blue Host First would get the free SSL, which is awesome. It's really, really good. And we also get a free cdn. So what we want to do is actually be at our home rights here. And then we're gonna go ahead and go to the dashboard. And now we're gonna move up to Blue Host and we're going to click on performance. And then we're gonna move to C. D. M. Now. Since I've been playing around with this before, it says we're setting up your cdn. This is not true. I've actually deactivated it. But for you, it's actually going to say acted on our affair, activated, deactivated things going to stay on and off. But this is super important for you to know. Unless you have actually bought on SSL, you cannot activate this And the reason for that is that the SSL that we have here, the free SSL is Onley gonna work for your website through Blue Host. Okay, so because we're using the blue host server, we can use on SSL certificate. But if we're using a CDN, that means we're going to be using someone else's servers. And if we're using someone else's servers, we are no longer using blue host servers And if we're no longer using blue host servers, we do not get the free SSL certificate. OK, so that means that if you click this on, you're gonna lose to SL. You're no longer going to be https and that is not worth it, guys. But this is perfect. If you have actually been in the game before and you already have an active SSL, then you can go ahead. You can activate this because the site look cdn. It's actually very powerful and very secure. But for the rest of us mortals who are still using this one, the free SSL, we're not gonna activate this site. Look, Cdn, what we're gonna go ahead and do is actually used a another cdn that's called Cloudflare now the Cloudflare Cdn is amazing because with them you get accompanied has CD ins all over the world. They are free, free forever. It's called a free forever plan, which means that they are free and they're going to stay free. And also, amazingly enough, they're also going to give us a free SSL. So that is going to solve our problem because, well, we also get to see the end from Cloudflare. And because that is a free SSL, we need to use the Cloudflare servers and because for using their CD and we're going to be using their servers, I hope this makes sense, guys. But what I'm trying to say is that cloud for is going to solve all of this is going to give us the SSL and it's also going to give us the C. D. M. But before we move on on how to do that, I actually want to go more in depth into SSL and see the end, why they are so great, their culpability and then let's move on to set this up. It cost guys, this is make it or break into understanding the value of your website and security, how it works and how you're protecting your customers to see in the next lecture 82. SSL CDN Compability: Welcome back, guys. In this lecture, we're going to talk about SSL What it is, what we use it for, how it works. Also about Cdn and wide SSL. CD and comp ability is so important now. First off, what is SSL and what makes it so important that people are willing to pay for it? Well, let's start by defining what SSL means now. SSL means secure sockets layer and basically that's a fancy name for saying that it is a security protection between the client and the server. Right? There's going to be protecting the client and the server transfers. Now, the best way to really explain this in depth is to actually show you what I mean. So let's say that we have our client in the client. Could be your users using your website. It could be you using a website. You looking into your own website, etcetera, etcetera. So let's say that you have a long game. People have their password and they're used your name and everything. So what they're gonna do is that they're gonna log in and therefore send their user name and their password, and it's going to be sent from them from their computer to the servers, right? And then the server's gonna fetch it, and it's gonna lock them in. Now here's the problem. You see that when Mr Hacker pops up in the picture, which unfortunately has become a commonplace today, he's gonna be able to assume in on that thing, is gonna be able to sue me in on the transfer itself between the client and between your website. See your user name and password and suddenly you or that client has been hacked and that is terrible. Now you don't want this to happen, especially not when you having some form of e commerce. Or if you're handling sensitive information or just for your own, log into your own website that can break your entire website. Now, of course, thankfully, we have backup in everything. But this is not something that you want to happen, especially not knowing that people might be sharing valuable information of their private information with you with their log in credit card information, etcetera, etcetera. So here is the solution. Guys, encryption and encryption is exactly what SSL offers. So now when we're using SSL, it looks like this Since that we have our clients who is staying going to be logging into your website, right? It's gonna have his user name and it's passed forward, but not when it's sending the information towards the server. It's actually going to go through on encryption, right? This is the SSL encryption, So that means that when the transfer's happening between the climb and the server, it's no longer going to say used to 123 You pass for 123 right is not going to say the user name and the actual password. Instead, it's gonna look something like this. It's just gonna be random digits and numbers impossible to know what it actually says and what it actually means. So then it's going to be received by the server with this really strange information. But thanks to the SSL, that means that when the server gets this information is gonna be decrypted. And that means that the server can get the real information and use it and log that client in safely. So now should Mr Hacker appear, apparently there's only one hacker in the world in this story. Should the hackers appear, that means that they're gonna assume in on that encryption, right? And if they go ahead and grab the encryption, they have no idea what it means that they can't do anything valuable with it. And this is why SSL is so important. And it is so valuable for security for yourself, for everyone who uses it, you need to have your website SSL secured. Okay, so then let's move on to see the end. Now, the thing with the SSL encryption is that the encryption is going through the blue Host service because we're using Blue Host and we're getting a free SSL is only gonna work through the blue host servers. But with Cdn, you're going to be using a bunch off different servers. And unless you're paying for your SSL certificate, you won't be able to apply that into the other service that you're using. Because of all of these different servers, they're gonna be all around in the world, right? So that means that your website in your continent, material that people be visiting on your website, they will be uploaded in different parts of the world. So, for example, if someone is seen Norway in the Europe or someone is in Australia or New Zealand, etcetera, etcetera. Then there's gonna be a closer server. Most likely then we're blue hostess and they're gonna be a faster page load. They're going to get the content much faster. You're gonna have a much better use through experience. But we needed to be encrypted still. And the free SSL does not offer that with the CD him. But here is the solution. And this is why this is so perfect. And that is Cloudflare. Now, Cloudflare has this really amazing offer. They have well for being a free cdn. They are by far the widest. And I would say best Cdn offers out there right now. Now, of course, if you're using Max Cdn or something like that, you can get more about the amazing thing with Club for is that it's completely free and free is always in the budget, right? But they're not on Lee offering amazing CD and they're also offering a free SSL certificate . So what that means is, and because we're getting an SSL from Cloudflare, that means that we get to have on SSL a secure encryption, secure transfers while also using C. D. M. And it's not going to cost us a thing. So that is the amazing thing here. So in this distance story would get a beautiful solution to the whole problem. So what, we're gonna go ahead and do right now is in the next lecture. We are going to set up our Cloudflare Cdn works. We're gonna set up our Cloudflare SSL, get this party started and then make sure that our loading times are improving in our server response time is improving. Okay, so see in the next lecture, guys. 83. Cloudflare CDN: All right, my friends, there's nothing to but to do it. Let's set up the Cloudflare CD, and okay, now, before we do this, we're gonna do a couple of preparation steps. And the 1st 1 is that if you do have a cash installer like we do WP super cash and it has CD and support, we're gonna go ahead and de activate that. There's gonna be in seedy in here, and then we're gonna turn this one officer that we don't have to CD and supports. That's kind off collides together, and we already know that this one isn't working very well. We could see it on a loading speed. And we're not getting any support from the other sea and CD ends on the Urals. So we're gonna deactivate this and install a more powerful one. I'm gonna click on save changes. They would go. And now we're also going to go over to Blue Host that come, we're gonna click on Logan, can just follow my steps there, and we're gonna go over to marketplace and then Adams and scroll down until we have SSL certificates. And now we are going to disable our SSL now doesn't feel very good since looking at the previous election are does it? But don't worry, We're gonna installed a new one and things were going to be even more secure in just a couple of minutes. So we're gonna go ahead and disable this one. There we go. So now we're ready to get started with Cloudflare, right? Were removed. RSL We've also removed any form of other cdn supported might collide with this one. So we're gonna move over to Cloudflare dot com. I'm gonna put this in. The resource is off course, and all you're gonna need to do is go ahead and click on Sign up here. But for me, who already have an account, I'm gonna click on log in. And once you've signed up, we're gonna end up in the same place anyway, and we're just gonna go ahead and add our site and I'm gonna write the site in which will be Robin and jesper dot Come like that, I'm gonna click on add site, and then now we're gonna change your DNS records. In other words, we are going to change so that the DNs In other words, the information is going to be sent through their service and not blue host on because they're sent through their servers, we get to connect with their see Dan, which is gonna be all across the world. Okay, I'm gonna click on next year. I'm gonna choose the free plan. As you can see, we have the global seed in, which is amazing and also the free SSL certificates. I'm gonna click care and we can confirm plan and we get to do this for one free website which is more than good enough for us. And then we're gonna confirm So we're going to get to this page here and there's nothing that we need to think about because this is all happening Automatic. It even says automatic here, which is perfect. And what is happening is that they are changing their I, p or rather R i p to point towards their servers. So now all off our information that will be sending rather than going through blue hosts are going to go through Cloudflare. And that is what's being set up right here. So we're just gonna leave this be acid is and click on next. Now, this is where we have to get our hands a little bit dirty. But this is actually super simple. We need to change our name servers. So what we're gonna do is change or blue host name servers into the Cloudflare name servers . So the 1st 1 here, we're just going to click on copy so it gets covered, and then we're gonna go to blue Host. I'm gonna create a new tab here and log into blue hosts and then click on Logan. And then I'm gonna move over to do mains down here, and you can see it's his Robin and Jesper, and this hurts a little bit in the heart Doesn't know SSL. We're gonna fix that in a minute, and I'm gonna click on Manage, and then we're gonna go to name servers and here are the names service. You can see this the end, this one dark blue host dot com. And it's the in this one, the blue house that come the day you're asking us to change, so they want to have the end, this one into this one that we already copied, Right? So we're just gonna go here and we are going to click on use custom name servers and we're gonna change this one into this. There we go. And we're gonna do the same with this one. We're gonna cop it, go back, change the 2nd 1 and pay sitting just like that. And when we are done, we're gonna hit save, which is awfully far out to the right. My face is in the way, but it's down here in the in the right. I'm just gonna hit, save like that. So now it's been saved successfully. Really, really nice. We are going to go ahead and go back and click on continue. And now we're actually all done. All we need to do Well, it's not just already, do you? But we actually need to wait afterwards 24 hours before this change takes place. Now, in my experience, this can take as little as half on our John our But it can also take much longer. So we're just gonna have to wait and see the changes. Now, before we move on and do that, we're going to change and get our SSL right. So we're gonna move to crypto. That's right here. All of this is already set up we're gonna move to Crypto now. The first thing we have to change within the crypt of option is our SSL, and thankfully, we're gonna get our SSL back. Or rather we have already. So it is from the beginning, set to full and there are four different ones going on. The 1st 1 is off, which probably doesn't need an explanation. You turn it off, then we have flexible and flexible. This one is quite problematic because this means that there will be no security between your server and the Cloudflare. But there will be security between Cloudflare on your visitors, right? So they're still gonna be a security gap in between her meaning, you can get away with much less restrictions as the seller, wise and security wise. But the visitors is still going to see your website as secure. So it's kind of a fake SSL, if you will, and I don't recommend it for obvious reasons. It's not that secure, at least not from your and it's much more secure than than it is off. But it's not secure enough, then the next one we have is full and that it's actually full on its secure from your end to cloud flare and from cloud for it to the user. And this is the way you wanted to. You want all the way to be secured now? We also have full strict And what strict means is that you need some sort of certificate. So, for example, because blue Host is using a service called Let's Encrypt, we already have a certificate on our servers. Our servers are considered secure on because we're using Blue Host. We have the let's encrypt, and then we have the certificate and we can use to full strictness. So I strongly recommend that we go ahead and use this full strict because it is the safest . But if you are not using blue hosts, chances are you might only be able to use one off the other. Maybe even just flexible, then flexible is still gonna be better. But I still recommend that you check with your host your servers and make sure that you can go ahead and get on SSL certificate because it is so valuable. We learned that from the previous lecture, right, So we're going to keep it a full streak because we can, and we're thankful that we can. Then we're gonna scroll down and we wanna check some things out. And the first thing is always used https. And that's a part of it being strict, right? So if someone is coming in with http, you always want to redirect them to http, as we always want to use this secure encryption. Remember, the S actually stands for secure, and here we have automatic https rewrites. Basically, it changes all of the content researchers and links. It said on the site from Http to https. And we want that to be armed. That's great. Want everything to be encrypted and secure, and that is it for that. So next up, no one, everything is set up. We have our SSL and we have also set up Cloudflare for the Cdn justice. Or this is gonna take a world might take up towards, well, a couple of hours. But I'm going to cut to that so you don't have to see all the boring part. Then I'm gonna show you how you can see that it is actually working and functioning. All right, so it's been about two hours and it's been up and running for that time. Now what we're gonna go ahead and do is go to this website called What's my deena's dot net ? It's in The resource is and we're gonna write in our website. We're gonna right then, Robin and jesper dot com. And then we're gonna change this A and we're gonna go to end this, which is name server, and that we're going to click on Search because this is gonna allow us to see how far we have come. And we can see that we actually have some servers that has turned to the Cloudflare servers like the one in Ashburn. We also have the one in Cambridge, in Brazil, in Amerigo, Paris, etcetera. But we also have a couple that doesn't and not yet like in London, for example. We can see that because these are the ones that we put in manually and these sort of ones from Blue Host, which figures? Because they say blue host right now, in order to check or SSL and everything as well. And to get more information, we can use this check for Cloudflare dot celestic dot com. This is also in the resource is we're gonna go ahead and write in our website, which is http s column forward slash forward slash Always https. From now on, guys Robin and jesper dot com and then click on Scam. And here we can see that it has checked eight global locations and we have found Cloudflare in four the before England, Denmark, Russia, us not found in China, Germany, Spain and Netherlands. So it's still going to need a little bit more time. But the great news is that it is actually working. It also says that were used in the clothes lower cdn, which is fantastic news. It means it's working clearly. And it also says that we are using the clerk layer SSL, which means that that is also working, which is amazing news. So everything is working. Guys, we can really be really happy about this. We're gonna give it a couple of more hours and then we're gonna move on to the next lecture , check one more thing out, and then we're gonna do a new test that up time and check out the server response time. Okay, great job making it this far. See, in the next lecture 84. Home Site URL Corrections: All right. So before we move on and we do the up time test to check the server response time, I want to show you something that's actually really important in the long run. And that is about the site and home your l Right. So if you go to your home page for us, that's Robin and jesper dot com here, and you click. You're gonna notice that we have https off course, always Asian to PS. And then we have Robin and jesper dot com. Now, notice that it does not say w w w dot Robyn and jesper dot com. Should I go in there? I'm just gonna be straight thrown back into this robin and jesper dot com without the double used and you might choose to use that you might choose not to use step. But at least I'm gonna give you the options off which to choose. And then we're gonna talk about the advantages and disadvantages. So what we're gonna do is we're gonna go to the back Jennifer website. We're gonna go to the dashboard here, and then we're gonna go down two sittings, and we're going to click on General and then we can see that we have board. Press address your l and site address, Ural. And if you would like to have your website as www dot your domain name dot com, this would be the place to changes settings and general. And here we have it. OK, now, there is no particular benefit of using the W's or using without. There are many major sites that use without, and many major size did use with. Okay, so it doesn't really matter which one you use. That's gonna be up for you to decide. But I want you to think off two things that's important, one that when you're writing whatever cited you choose, always make sure that you use that one. So, for example, if you are using the one that were used in without the W's, then when you are writing to people and linking it when you're putting it on your social media, when you're doing your digital marketing, for example, you want to make sure that you are not using that doubled using here because that's going to do a another redirecting. That's just gonna make the page loading speed slower, and we don't want that, okay, And that might sound like a minor. But in the long run, that's gonna become a major. So we want to make sure that we're always using the same. And the second thing would always using the same is that if you use this one for a while and then you decide to go with W w w like that, then the problem might be that Google sees that. Okay, here comes another side doesn't recognize your original site. And the problem with that is, if it ceased to identical sites, you're probably gonna be banned from Google search engines. And that means very little or no traffic. So we don't want that to happen. But in the early run, like we are right now, it's completely fine to go ahead and go in and change it. Right now, there's no benefit to using one over another. Just make sure that you pick one and you stick with it. I actually prefer this one. But the benefit off using the W's can, of course, be that a lot of people when they speak and they reference someone they used to double use , but it any rate as you start ranking in the Google search engine Cosco improves. This is gonna be your original. Cited Improved anyway, So they're gonna land here right away. The more important parties for your social media for a digital marketing. If you're doing any ads or anything like that, you want to make sure that you are always using the correct address. And if you want to change is this is probably the time now early on to changes and make sure that you change both off them. If you only change one of these, your website might break. And that's no fun, really isn't. So just change one off these. So then we're gonna go ahead and move onto the next lecture and do the speed test and then move on to the next issue and sold off one as well. And then I'm gonna show you what you can do if your site breaks. I know we have our backups and everything, but there's more things that you can actually do if it would break to see in the next lecture. Guys 85. Leverage Browser Caching: All right, guys, welcome back. Now, if you've been following me from the previous lecture, you will also have set up your cloud for see the end by now. If not, go ahead and do that. If that is what you're looking to do to optimize in this section. Now, before we go ahead and do a speed test in a loading page test, I want to talk about the next issue we're facing. What it is, what we can do about it. And then we're gonna go ahead and test our new Cloudflare Cdn for the server response time and also check out how to affect the leverage browser cashing. Okay, So what is Leverage browser cashing? Well, basically, it is the cash we know what a cash is already, right. It's about leveraging a browser cache, meaning we catch a lot of the things such as to see you, says javascript. Ah, lot of for images or backgrounds, etcetera to the browse or to the user to their computers. Everything will load much quicker now, the issue that we have right, and it's a small issue because you can see that it's actually in the lowest part in the priority list right here is that if you scroll down, there is no expiration dates or expiration time. Rather, it specified. And this is usually not really that big off a problem, because we're gonna go ahead and set up a match anyway, so that's gonna take care of this problem. But what it means is that it does not have a date or a time for when is gonna expire. So if you're updating your side, it does not automatically remove itself from the cash. And for some, a lot of people use different times for the cash, depending what kind of website, depending on how they wanna leverage etcetera. But what is important to know is that you're still going to get the updated side if you take care off the cash on your website. Now, if we have a look at Pat Flynn here on his website smart, passive income. This is the first test that we did earlier on in the section. You're going to see that he ought also has this leverage browser catching as an error. If you click on it, he actually has the same thing. Is we the expiration not specified on a lot of the things in here, but anyway, his website east performing very well and is loading super quickly and it's a small size now, the most important of all this off course, the loading time itself. And we're not here to get hung up on all the numbers, getting everything perfect. We want to have a great loading time for the user experience and for the S e o. Right. But what I want you to do is actually go to your cash plug in. And if you've been following along, you should be having the WP super cash. And if you don't, that's fine, too. There are a lot of cash it plug ins out there and I wanted to go down to this one in the advanced section. So you go to set things WP Super Cash advance and then go to this one is at 304 not modified. Browse or cashing indicate when a page has not been modified since it was last requested. So what this is going to do is that it's always when they're entering our website, they're gonna check their catch towards the current cash on the website to see if they are matching just to shake. Okay. Is there anything that is updated that needs to be updating Or if it is the same, if it is the same that nothing needs to be done. If something is up there is gonna update us. It's just something that's really worthwhile to have activated. So we're gonna click it in. We're gonna go down and click on updates. Status. And now, with this tiny difference that we have made with this tiny update, we're gonna go ahead and we're gonna do a new speed test to our website. Now, off course, There are a lot of more things that we could be doing in here. You could actually go into your HD excess files and sit certain expiration times for each off these files, and I'm gonna show you how to do that as well. Now, you could also go ahead and go to your HD access file and write in a certain code to set an expiration date. But that file is very sensitive. If something goes wrong, it's gonna break your website. I've been using it before, but I have not really seen any difference in performance in my websites be so I don't really bother doing that anymore, So we're not going to be touching that. It's just unnecessary work and also slightly risky work. We're gonna go ahead and we're gonna do another speed test, so I'm gonna click on start testing. All right, So the numbers are in, and as we can see, there's a really nice improvement going on. The loading time is improved. The requests are lowered. This size now just is a disclaimer. None of these is an exact science. If you run multiple tests, you might have noticed it goes a little haywire, also, depending on where the test is coming from. But it gives you a very good estimate that, as we can see in the previous tests, are loading. Time was hovering at 80.8 2nd and close to 0.9, and now it's hovering at 0.6. This is incredible. The requests are lowered. We can see 31 to 18. The size is likely increase. But again, these this might not. This is not pitch perfect. This is not pitch perfect. None of this is. But a total score has gone up to 71 from 63 on. This is just really, really great guys. Now, if we scroll down, you're going to notice that the leverage browser catching it's still a problem going on here. But it's gonna be until we set on expire time. And in my opinion, looking at these fantastic scores, I don't think we need to. And I don't think you should worry too much about perfecting these either. Now, this one is off course. Super interesting. Look at this. Now we're still getting a reduced server response time warning. But before that one was actually in the top off, the higher kit was the biggest current problem. Now it's at the bottom, even lower than leveraging browser cashing. So if I click on this one, we can see that the server has responded in 0.3 seconds and this is fantastic. Where is before? It was responding in 0.78 seconds. Right? And if we look all the way from the beginning, when our speed was loaning at 4.2 seconds, almost 4.3, remember, this was from Sydney, Australia. We also had a server response time of 1.1 2nd So almost over its second. We had to wait before the server responded and anything happened. And that was the time to first bite. Remember that. So right now, guys, we actually have a fantastic website going on. And if we compare ourselves with Pat Flynn, you're gonna notice that his loading speed is off course faster. And chances are that he is using expert to properly utilize his website, minimizing the image sizes even further off course maybe is using dedicated servers or VPN hosting while we were using the shared hosting in the most basic plan. And to be honest, we're doing really great even for that he has a zero point almost 0.4 and we are at 0.6 and the point is to be under two seconds. So we're doing really fantastic. Total size now our performances at 71 he is at 73 again, these are just abstract estimates from this side up time that come and nothing here is perfect. No need to go all crazy to perfect this. He also has these things going on. But one of his problem is not serve a response time. You can see he says green, and you're gonna get green if you serve. Response time is better than 0.2 and we're gonna have to upgrade either go from blue Host to, for example, site ground, which really fast host or improve our hosting at blue host to maybe a VPN or pro plan, or just be really happy that we're paying very little money for a fantastic service. And our website is working perfectly fine, guys, but as always, the actual proof is in the potting. Right? So if we go ahead and we were gonna load Robin and jesper dot com like this, we're gonna notice that it loads really quickly off course. But if you know what is that smart, passive income it past planes website it lows faster. But these two, while there is a difference, the difference is not huge. Both websites are loading really, really quickly and this is fantastic. If you're on the two seconds, you can have a fantastic website. Fantastic s you happy visitors. You have a great you i user interface and great, you X Now in the next lecture guys. What? We're gonna go ahead and do is actually look at all of these other estimates going on in here right now for me right now. And chances are for you to they might be green, but they may not be. So let's talk about what all of these other things are. And if they would have this warning sign what to do about them now? One last thing. I want to tell you about that. As always, this sort of tests are not perfect. And different tests give different results. We have the we have a test from Google and we also have the Ping dum test, and those are going to give you different suggestions. Different results. But as always, guys don't go crazy on this. The main point is to have a good score, a beautiful user interface, beautiful user experience, and then you are all good to go. We don't need to have perfect scores in everything. Look at Pat Flynn. He has an amazing website, amazing business going on, and he's doing 73 out of 100 not 100 out of 100. So let's talk about these other things, and then we're gonna move on. Okay? See, in the next lecture, guys, 86. Further Optimization: All right, guys, welcome back. Now let's do some further trouble shooting for when your speed testing your website. So we've gone through a couple of issues already in the performance tab, right? We have done the first eliminating the render blocking JavaScript and CSS in the above the fold content. Now that's a mouthful we have optimized or images have gone through leveraging browser cashing, which we know is more often expiration time than actual cashing time. And we have also looked at how to reduce the server response time. And we have reduced the response time and gone through some options for further reducing it . Should we want to do that? Now let's look at the other couples here. Now there's more. That's green for us. And the reason that they're green is because a lot of these we have gotten four free. As we've been building up our website. Now, the 1st 1 is called me unifying html, and you're going to notice that we have magnifies Gmail men. If I and CIA says on down here magnifying javascript. So what is meant if I ng well, basically men, if I ng is when you are shortening the code, right? Because HTML, CSS and JavaScript are all different types off codes on what men, if eyeing the code does is that it saves up space by making it unreadable for humans but still completely readable for computers. So all of the spaces that the making the codes for humans like us to understand and be able to program they removed that So they remove size and they remove all off the white. The unnecessary space compress it. Basically, it is a compression, but the computers were still able to use it. But I assume it's it just looks like a big mess. So let me show you what I mean. So here we have a very simple code for changes in the color position on off the input feels when you are doing a form for male port, for example. So this is how a normal coat looks like when you mean if I it, we're gonna remove all off this space All of this wasted space over here. So what we would be doing then, while magnifying is going on and going in like this going in like this and going in like this and this so if you are doing any form of coding or programming and you get a bunch of code and it would be looking like this and let's say that there is a lot of code and eventually is going to be looking like this, but with a bunch of different inputs, that is just gonna be one big mess, right, because there's no spaces. But with the magnifying dust is that it does save the space by using it all in one line, says Quicker to execute. And the file itself is smaller and it works much better, or at least much faster for the computers. But a human is not going to be able to code. But you don't need to co this because you just need to execute it. So that is what magnifying is. And the men, if I ng we get from our plugging from our cash plug, it's right and the cash plug ins you could basically be using any. But we are using down in the setting say we are using the WP super cash plug in which Dustin unifying for us. But the WP super cash not only magnifies, but it also cashes it into a static file, so it puts all of those files all of them unified falls in the cash and then services. So it is one step further from unifying. So it makes all of the files very tired and very much compressed, puts it in a cash and then puts it in the user's computers. It loads faster. OK, now, if you don't have a catch, all you need to do is go to plug ins, add new and search for cash, and there are a lot of really wonderful cash plug ins Now, honestly, I've used to W W three the fastest cash, super cash, or to optimize, and they all work. I'm sure this one works as well. They all really work. But the one that I find most effective and easiest that I prefer is the WP super cash, which is why we are using it. We get a lot for free, like them unifying here Now. The next thing is to enable compression and decompression is basically when you have a file and you make it smaller. So men, if I ng is a form of compression for the HTML for the CIA, says for the JavaScript. But most importantly, what is the heaviest on our website are the images, right? So we've been spending our time optimizing our images big time by going for P and G to J peg and also by compressing them into a lower resolution file. So we save a lot, a lot off space and increase or loading time, and that is compression. And we have it enable also through plug ins like Smush, for example. So whenever we upload any form of image to our media libraries, much automatically compresses it. Then we also have the avoid landing page. Redirect. So if you have an issue with the compression, what you can do is go ahead and download a plug in like smushed. It's gonna compress. And also make sure that you do compress your images and actually use a cash plug into men. If I your files, for example, and cash all of your files to improve the loading speed and used as much compression as possible on all the fast, it can be compressed Now. Next up is avoid landing page Redirect. Now a redirect is when you get sent from one page to another So, for example, let's say that you were going into http Roman and jesper dot com. But then this page actually redirects you to the h t T. P s version off the page. Right? So that would be one redirect. But now this page also redirects you to the W W part off the page and then these spaces to really directs. And then this one re directors to the forward slash home. So now we would be having three unnecessary redirects that's going on on our website, but we could use to be sent from the first to the last without all of these middle redirects. Right? So this can sometimes happen when we get an issues with our SSL. Remember the SSL. So we go from http to https, But then maybe there's something wrong with https is going to send you back to http etcetera or any form off loop issue going on. Or maybe the page has just been set up in such a way that there are a lot of free directs. But if you're having this issue or there's something broken or you've been changing the URL , all you need to do is go ahead and go to the plug ins and go to plug ins, Add new and search for something called Redirect. Now, in here, there's gonna be this plugging called redirection. You can just install it and start using it right away. It's super simple to use is gonna ask you for the input. So when a person writes this your l they will be sent to this euro. So you just right into your l that you want people to use and then where you want them to be sent super easy. They will be redirected where you want them so you don't need any mid middle hand redirects , if you will. So super easy to use. And then we also have prioritized visible content on what this means is that we are prioritising loading and rendering the above the fold content. Okay, so when our pages being downloaded, what it's gonna be downloaded first and foremost is going to be the from the above the fold section on our page, this section you see how fast that loaded now everything down below, most likely loaded after all of this has been loaded already. And that is because when people come to our website so that this page gets loaded right away, right? So that is prioritizing in these content to be unloading first now everything that is below where most likely will have loaded slower. But that doesn't matter, because when people visit our site, we want to make sure that they are seeing all of this right away. And then everything down below can take its time to be loading. And that is what they mean with prioritising visible content. So So if you're having an issue with this, most likely the problem is going to be with your cash plug in or rather, lack of cash plug in because the cash plug in is going to make sure that you prioritise automatically loading off the most important files in the abduct, the fold section and everything that it's not important will be loading lower down because it takes longer, but they don't need to be loaded. So if we scroll down, we also have mobile usability, and we're getting ah lot for free here for two reasons. One, we're using the Ocean WP theme, which is already mobile, friendly and mobile adapted, but also because everything you do in L. A mentor is also very mobile friendly, so it's extremely giving and you get a lot for free by using these tools. Now we actually do have an error here that says size tap targets appropriately. If I click on it, it says the Taft or your privacy policy is close to one other tap targets final. And most likely it means that in the footer our privacy policy and terms and conditions links or to close on the mobile version. But that is fine because we haven't gone going ahead and adapted our website to the mobile responsiveness and to the tablet responsiveness. Yet right or website is responsive for tablet and for mobile, but we haven't redesigned them specifically for them yet. We're gonna do that in an upcoming lecture, so this will be taken care of itself soon. And then we have used legible font sizes, and this is more fun opinion off up time, which they are asking you to uses certain fun size and certain amount off words per column . So the general your site will look good and we do fill up this criteria. But this is more an opinion than anything. Then we have this ice content to view port, right? And this one. Make sure that you don't have to soon in on your cell phone when you're using it in order to read the content because that takes away from the user experience big big time. So when you enter a website on your cell phone, you want to make sure that you can just go ahead and scroll. Everything will be served readable, accessible, and it looked really good. But if there is no content that it's been size to the View port, you're gonna have to soon in on your screen all the time. And that kills user experience. So this just mean that it is sized appropriately and once again, Ocean WP and off course elementary. Thank you. And here that you need to configure the View port. How far out, or how far in you wanted to be soon and then this one, to be honest, is quite random. It says Avoid plug ins. Now, if I go ahead and click on this, it takes me to a developer at Google that comes site that doesn't even seem to exist. I'm not sure why you would want to avoid plug ins. I think this one is very, very random. But if we do look at Pat Flynn here and we scroll down, he actually has a small error here, and that is his media player that he has, or rather is a flash player. But this one, honestly, you don't need to be concerned about right unless there is some plugging it is taking a huge amount of space or that is crashing your Web site. But generally this one, it's not gonna matter. This nothing you need to do about it. But guys, if you are not using Ocean WP and you're not using elemental ER, which you should, in my opinion than what you can do to make your website more mobile responsive, it's actually to go here and go to your dashboard plug ins and then click on add New and then just search for a MP. Now a MP stands for accelerated mobile pages was gonna make it much faster on your phone and also gonna make it mobile friendly. Now, honestly, I haven't used this one or this one because I basically always use elementaries. I don't need to use this because elemental makes it mobile friendly as it is. But if you don't want to use elementary for some reason and you're also using a theme which is not mobile friendly by default, you can use one of these to plug ins is gonna make it mobile friendly for you. OK, so these are all of the possible errors now, as you're using other tests such as Google's Page Speed Inside and Ping DM, for example, which are other tools to be measuring your website performance loading speed, etcetera. You're gonna notice that you're probably going to get different results first and foremost , and also you're going to get different recommendations again. I recommend that you don't go too deep into this because you want to make sure that your website is fast. It is effective. It is a high user experience, high user interface. But don't go overboard aiming for the perfect score because in the end, the sort of obsession tends to just hurt the website. Focus on what's important and don't major in the minors, right? Look at the big problems, fix them, make it better, get the seed and get the cash, etcetera and then move on. This is my recommendation, guys. Now let's move on to the next lecture in the course. And of course, if you have any questions, will be in the Q and A, but we're gonna address something very important in the next lecture as well. So see you there. 87. Support: All right, guys, in this lecture, I want to talk about something really, really important. And this is primarily gonna be for those of you who are using Blue Host, right? If you're not using blue Host, chances are this isn't gonna apply to you can move on to the next lecture. But if you are using Blue host, I want to talk about supports. Now we've been talking about blue hosts not being the fastest host with the fastest servers . Right. And this is definitely true. And if you're aiming for pure speed, you can go for site ground, for example, which we know are faster than blue host. But one of the most amazing things, which is the primary reason why we love Blue Host so much is there support? There are more reasons, of course, like their SSL, and they're listening krypton certificate. But the support you get from Blue host for paying just a couple of bucks a month is absolutely incredible. Now I cannot begin to tell you how many times I have broken a website on blue host servers on Lee to go to the support to have some guy spend sometimes hours with me help me regain this. I tell me what I did wrong and then fix the errors for me and guys. I'm taking up hours and hours off someone else's time by paying a couple off bucks a month . Do you know how much it's gonna cost? If you're gonna have one on one support with someone and you're gonna pay from our that can be, like 70 or 80 bucks on our and here you're paying a couple off box a month and you can have basically as many hours as you want. So I strongly recommend when there's any issue with your website, go to the blue host support. Now, if you have any questions for your business, how to take it to the next step for this sign Or, you know, going moving forward than off course will be in the Q and A and you have the 24 hour rule were always going to reply to within 24 hours. But for these technical matters, I can so strong the recommended blue host support and it's also very easy. All you do is your clickable again. You go ahead and log in and then you click on the question mark up here and then you move over to chat. You can call, of course, but I like to shut. And then you write in your name, your domain and the domain name here. Next, you get to describe your issue, and then you will be put to the shot with someone might take a couple of minutes. Depends on how many people are using the service, and this might seem like a no brainer. But honestly, ah, lot of people get this service, but they don't use the support properly. And once again, I spent so many hours in the support it has helped me so much with issues learning, understanding. I cannot recommend this enough. And this is why I strongly recommend not only to use blue host but also used their support . Okay, so don't panic if you have any problems with your website. If there's something that you're not understanding, it's not working. Go ahead and use the blue host support. Now, Blue Host can only speak for the Blue Host services. If there's plug ins, etcetera, etcetera, you're gonna want to talk to us in the Q and A instead because they can't be responsible for all those things. But what I'm trying to say is you have a lot of support. Your blue hose, which are really experts for the technical matters. Everything. Blue hose. And then you have us in the Q and A for everything about the plug ins for the business sign , etcetera, etcetera. So take away message guys used to blue host support you bought If you bought Blue Hose, you got it included. Make good use of it. You will not regret it. Okay, See him the next lecture. 88. Mobile Design UX: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about the mobile designed for user experience. Now we already know what the user experience is right? That is how people are going to be perceiving our website. And this time we're going to be focusing on the mobile design. So right now, for example, our website, it's looking like this on a cell phone and we can see that there are a couple of errors, even though we have gotten a lot for free from Elemental right, because now you can access the website and it actually works, and you can do all the things you want to do. And it if it wasn't for L. A mentor, you'd have to assume in and out, and it would be a mess, so we can thank Elementary for that and Ocean WP theme. Now there's still a couple of issues in here that we're going to want to correct. The first thing that's pretty clear is that we can see that the menu is huge, right? It's really, really big. We have the logo ones up. We have the menu to the right, and then we just have a bunch of white. They're doing no good at all. And when we are in our cell phone, space becomes really precious, like really, really pressures. So what we're gonna want to do here is move our menu up towards and put it next to the logo . But that is going to do is that that is gonna make a lot off extra space. Four people, cell phones to be displaying more off our content that is severely going to be improving the user experience for our visitors. Right? And as you can see this quite a chunk that's gonna disappearing. That's going to be displaying our website instead. So this is really smart, designed for improving user experience. Now there are more things there for us to fix. For example, looking down, we can see that the text is quite crammed up and we're gonna want to have their experience as good as possible. So we're going to go ahead and move over inter website and fix all of these little details in the upcoming lecture. Now, in this lecture, we're going to be focusing more on the user experience before we move over solidly to the user interface, right the design itself. First of all, why should you be caring about the mobile user experience? Well, the reason is this over 50% off traffic on the Web is actually from the mobile. That is insane statistics That's been all the way back since 2000 and 15. So since 2000 and 15 more than half of all the traffic is actually from people cell phones . That is insane. And it is estimated that in the upcoming years, there's gonna be a smudges up towards 75 80% of all traffic will be mobile. So, guys, if you don't adapt your website to be mobile friendly, you are missing out. And don't think that you can Onley make your upset mobile friendly too, because studies show that 83% of everyone who prefers to use their mobile still want to be able to used their desktop to browse websites. Okay, so we're really going to need both here now. Next up is that mobile friendliness is actually super important for s CEO. Now, if your website is not mobile friendly, the search engines are actually going to demote you. And as we know, Google is the biggest search engine off all. And Google sort of becomes like the parent. We always want to have their approval. Right. So what we can do is check if our website is mobile friendly, approved from Google. Because otherwise we're gonna miss out on issue and they're going to D Motors. So what we're gonna do here is we're gonna do a little test from Google to check our mobile friendliness. So this so this test will be in the resource is and all. We're gonna go ahead and do is enter or you're a which is for us. Https four slash four slash Robin and Jess Productive. Come. We know this already, right? And then we're gonna call it contest. You are l. And as we can see here, pages mobile friendly. And this is really good news. Not surprising, because up time gave us almost full score on mobile friendliness. But you still want to be doing this Check to make sure that everything is in order on our website. Right? We always want approval off Google, the big parent off search engines. Right now, the next thing we're going to want to do is learn how to prioritize, because when it comes to cell phones and the used to experiencing user interface, we have less space. That's just the way it is. Cell phones are smaller than a desktop, so we're gonna have less space to be showing our content to be using our call to action buttons to be using our opt informs our menu everything. So we need to learn to prioritize. For example, what is the most important that I want to be showing them on this site in this section, and you want to be displaying Onley that then remove all off the clutter. So, for example, if you're having an email open and you're asking for their first name, last name, phone number, email, middle name, grandparent's names, all of this information, you want to make that shorter. You want to make that for more simple, because otherwise there's going to be too much being picked up on the display, and it's not going to be looking good, and you're going to be ruining your own conversions here, so we're gonna have to learn to prioritize. Look, what is it that's most important for me to show on the home page on the start here page in this section in the next section, etcetera, etcetera. Now, the next thing we're gonna talk about is the thumb design and what the thumb design is actually based on a lot of studies that show that 67% and above actually prefer to use their cell phone with one hand and scroll and use and navigate with their thumb looking something like this. So what this means is that they're going to be certain areas that's going to be easier to navigate than others. Most people by the were also right handed. So if we look at this chart, for example, we can see that there are some limits to using your thumb. We can see that this space there to the lower left comes more natural to the thumb because it's easier to be reaching that space. If you have a cell phone near you, which most people do, you can actually grab your own phone and try this out. Now, this is also going to be depending on what kind of model you had. The resolution on your screen, etcetera, etcetera. There are big phones to our small phones, so this isn't set in stone, but it is a very good estimate that this area, the green area, will basically always be easy to reach for everyone preferring to use one handing use their thumb, which is the majority. And then we also have the orange part where you're gonna need to stretch your thumbs in order to reach those areas. And then we have the red part where you usually gonna have to flip around your phone or use the other hand or do some awkward movement in order to reach their. So what this means is that we want to be putting our most important material. Or rather, we need them to do an action in the green Zone. So with this in mind navigation, East key, we always want to keep navigation in mind. When we are designing, there's gonna be a huge part of the user experience. So if we take our own website right now, it's an example. We can see that we have to learn more bottom that's being put in the lower left in the Green Zone. This is Gould. This is exactly how we want our design because we want them to be pressing that button to get them to the start here page. But we're going to be introducing them to our concept, your product, and then have them by something. But in order to do that, they need to click on that button. The learn more button and the easier it is for them to click on that button. The higher are the chances that they will actually click and you will have a conversion. So if you're not adapting your website four Mobil's Overall, you are missing out. And if you are not using the proper navigations, you will be losing conversion guys. But the great news is, it's not that hard reduced. Need to keep this in mind when we move over to the next lecture and we start this signing for the mobile user interface, right? So we're gonna move over to the next lecture, do some designing and make our website even more mobile friendly than it already is. Make sure that it is easy to click on the bottoms. It is easy to see all of the content and clean some things up. So guys see in the next lecture 89. Mobile Design UI: All right, my friends, let's go ahead and make the user interface Absolutely beautiful for all of the people visiting our website on their mobile. Okay, so the first thing that we're gonna go ahead and do it's changed the size off our logo because we remember from previously that it was just too big. We're getting two rows when it came to the menu and the logo. So what I'm gonna do is click on customized up here, and then I'm gonna click up here, which is gonna take me to header and then logo. There we go. And now I'm gonna go ahead and see how the website looks on our cell phone writes I click here down here below, and we can see that we're having this issue, right? So the logo is just too big. The menu get put on the row underneath and we get all of this wasted space and all of the space is absolutely pressures when it comes to everything, but even more. Some cell phones, because the screens are so small. So as you can see on the desktop, this size is actually 280. And if I move over here to cell phone. You can also go down there. This is also gonna be on 280. But that is gonna be too big for us. So we're gonna go ahead and change this up a little bit. You can see that if I am a 280 like before is just too big. We're gonna go down. We're gonna go. There we go. So let's go with, say, 200. Now we can see that we have are our logo and our menu side by side. And we're saving so much space. Now, look, look at this once again. If I increase we get all this wasted space, go back down to 200 looking much better. So I'm super happy with this. I'm just gonna go ahead and click on Publish. There we go. Now let's head back into L a mentor. Alright, guys, who are back in l. A Mansour. And the first thing I'm gonna go ahead and do is go down to the bottom again, click a responsive mode and change it to mobile mode. There we go. And I am super happy with this right now with the logo and the menu looks perfect. We can even click on the menu. Let's see how this looks. Looks really nice. To be honest, I'm loving that. So we're gonna go ahead and do some changes here, like we can see right now that I think that this text right here needs a little bit more space. I'm gonna go ahead and change that up. So I'm gonna click here, and then I'm gonna move over to style, and we're gonna move over to typography, and then we're gonna move down to line height right here, and we're just gonna go ahead and expand this a little bit. Something like this. There we go. You can see that it's growing. They're exchanging the entire interface. Maybe that's a bit much. There we go. So we still want to keep in mind these things that we have the learn more button that is easily accessible, which is really, really nice and oh, so important. At the same time, the menu has become a little bit harder to reach because, remember, the thumb doesn't as easily go up there. But here, you have to make the choice. You're gonna have the menu easy to reach, and that's gonna be costing like, 15% of the screen. In my opinion, that's absolutely not worth it. So it's much better to put the menu a little bit higher and give them more off the content . Right? So there we go. Now there's some more space in between here. I am liking that, maybe even a little bit less. Actually, the line height may be a bit more. They there is our sweet spot. There we go. So I'm going to scroll down and see if there's anything else that I am not a big fan off. So we can see here, for example, that this text is getting quite crammed upright, but it's still very important information. So what I would like to do is change the look on this entire section. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on on the edit section here, and I'm gonna go ahead and remove some off the padding because you can see there's a lot of wasted space here. It's a lot of wasted space here, and that looked really good on the desktop, but that doesn't look quite as nice on the cell phone. That is just wasting pressure space. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is check out how much of the padding is actually on top here right now so that we can keep this padding the space in between the the different sections, but then removed the padding to the sides. Okay, So in order to do that, I'm gonna click on the padding and then go to desktop and we can see that it is said to 50 . And what that means is that these even though there's no numbers, these are also automatically set to 50. That is how the Automatic Mobile Responsive Mode works. It just sets the same numbers. Now, the website is beautiful, even on a cell phone, but it nuts completely optimized. So what I'm gonna do is unlinked these values and then I'm gonna leave the top on 50 like that. So we still have the same amount of space going on going to remove that Syria like that. And then I'm just going to click on and write one one in here and one in here, one in here. Now, this is already looking much better, but I still think that the padding is a bit too much here for the cell phone. So I'm gonna go ahead and decrease that to let's say 25 might look a little bit better. So if we go down and we look at the top, we can see that this is the best. Actually, pops up here on the top, and I am liking this. So you get into this entire screen, right, and we get this text down below. Now, there are two things we can do. Either We can leave this the way that it is and we can get. This is the best and most takes on our phone. Or we can actually increase the size off this background now scrolling down. I'm actually really happy with this. You can see that there's much less space wasted here, and we still have this wonderful quote still here. Now, I'm still gonna want to cover this entire above the fold section with this background, So I'm gonna move over here, click on the section and then move over to the minimum height, right? And I'm going to be increasing it a little bit just like that. There we go. So now we can see that it's covering the entire first partier. Now, this is affecting the rest of the decides. Now we might want to go back here to this takes, go to typography and change the line height a little bit. There we go, looking better and maybe a bit more spacing in between these columns. Right? So let's move over to style up here and let's move over to typography and play a little bit with the line heights. There we go. Something like this. So this is starting to look really good right now. I might want to use even bit off more. There we go. Business made easy letters show you how. Okay, now, if we look at the background, we can see that the moon is actually covering up. That takes a little bit. What we could be doing is changing the position off the background as well to see if we get a better look. But I'm actually quite happy about this. So we're gonna go ahead and scroll down and we can see that the quote hair still looking really good. Now we're removed the space in between. Actually, we added a bit much here maybe, but I think it's good. It's also going to depend on the resolution on the cell phone. So we're going to scroll down. It says, get digital marketing hacks for free, right? Get the lazy marketing hacks. And this is actually looking really good already. Now, there are a couple of things that you might want to change. Now, just clicking here kind of updated this part. There are changes happening because we are moving around the different bits. And I am liking this big time that we have this full $99 value right here. Sign up down below, and we'll have it sent to you. Okay. Looking really good. Super happy about this. What I might want to do, because now we have her back, which is quite dark, set up against our dark takes, which works really well up here. But not so good down here. For example, we might want to actually make this part bold. Right? So I'm just gonna go in here, I'm gonna select this, and I'm gonna make it bold. So now it's a little bit easier to read and to see, and I am digging this design there. We go, and this form is looking super nice. We know that it's actually side by side on the desktop on on the mobile version there down below, where we know also that the thumb will easily reach to click on my first night on email and also easily reach to click. Send me the hack. So this is actually really good design? Yes. We're gonna go ahead and scroll down and these air looking absolutely dreadful. This is This is not good. And this is because of the padding that we're using in the padding. They make a lot of sense on the desktop. They look beautiful on the desktop, but they don't translate well to the cell phone version. So what I'm gonna do here is start editing these a little bit. So I'm going to start by clicking on the editing, the section up here, and start playing around a little bit with the patty. I'm gonna move over to advanced. And now we are in the cell phone mode. And first we need to shake what the padding currently is on the desktop and we can see that it's set to 70. Right? Okay. It's set to 17. Now, let's move over. Back to cell phone. 70 might be a little excessive here, so I am going to only these once again because I do want the padding on the top. And I'm gonna set that to 50. Or let's go with 20. Let's go with Let's go with 40 this time. Okay, so we're gonna set this before. They were also gonna change this size a little bit, so it looks better now for these ones. We might want to set them to one. We could see that they change themselves when we are linked. So these are actually started to correct themselves a little bit. If we scroll down, we can see that we're getting one course covering the entire screen at a time. And honestly, guys, this is looking quite nice. This is quite solid. So all I really needed to do and with this butts and as well. So all I really needed to do was to on link this and that changed the padding for the cell phone version and everything is looking much better already. So I am definitely digging this now. What we could do is or should do, even is changed. The headline here The Header because he's looking absolutely dreadful and what we're gonna start off by changing is the size because they're not looking good in this size right now. So let's go ahead and play around a little with this. Do you wanted to have a one row or two Now? I wanted to be on to, like that best selling courses. So now it's gonna make a lot more sense, right, because you can read it and there's less space in between these, and that looks much better. I prefer to go with 50 or 70 in the padding when it comes to desktop around 22 14. When it comes to Mobile completely depends on the design, but here I think it looks really good like this. So we have the best selling courses, and then we're gonna have the course is rolling in like this. The buttons or there is one course at a time. We have a little space on the sides, but this is just a good part off. The design is looking magnificence scroll down. We have the view, all courses that is covering pretty much the entire screen and then down below had the privacy policy in terms and conditions. So, guys, right now I'm actually really happy with this design, right? This is looking really good. Really nice. We have mainly changed the spacing between the letters and the padding. So when it comes to breaking your design, it's usually gonna be the padding. And this is gonna be very individual for your website. What do you think? Looks nice, etcetera. Now I'm doing this very intuitively, meaning there's no plan behind what I'm doing. Or rather, there's no preparation to what I'm doing. I'm just deciding to what I think looks nice and asked, I go and I continue to signing the website. I may come back and do some changes, but right now I actually think this looks really good. We have the free on its own row, which I think looks quite nice. But what we could also do it's changed this header, go to style typography and play around a little with the size, for example, is gonna look good if they are on three roast. What about two rose, two roses too small, three rows Looks OK, but actually I think this might be a little bit better. So I'm going to keep them on three rows like that. They would go, and I'm really liking this. So, guys, this is how you do it. All you need to do is first of all, if you have a problem with the menu, do like we did in the beginning of the course, then move over to L. A mentor, go down to responsive mode and change to mobile. And then the primary things you're gonna want to change our want, the letter spacing, spacing in between the letters like we did in the beginning here is gonna be to this size off the takes, the headers, etcetera, and three the padding. Now the padding is a big breaker off beautiful designs. So when you link the padding is just gonna change up the entire decide big time. So I'm really happy with this guy's. And now, don't worry, this is not going to be affecting your desktop design whatsoever. What happens in cell phone mode stays in cell phone mode. OK, mobile motives for mobile mode and desktop is for desktop, right? So nothing has changed in here. We still have this nice beautiful. This sign. What we're gonna go ahead and do now is move over to the next lecture. We're gonna talk about the tablet design. Okay? Which is also very important thing to do. But by far, primary ones are desktop and cell phone, with an extra emphasis on cell phone. Because more than half of your traffic will be coming from there. If you have any questions, will be in the Q and A so see in the next lecture, guys. 90. Tablet Design UX: Alright, guys, let's talk about the tablet designed for user experience. Then in the next lecture, we're gonna go ahead and focus on the tablet designed for the use or interface. But first thing is first. What's so special about a tablet to sign? Well, as we know it, Tablet looks like this about now. They do common varying screen size that we can have really small tablets. We can have really big tablets. We can have vertical, and we can have horizontal tablets. What is interesting to know, though, unlike the other devices such as Mobile is generally and desktop is that they have two very common modes off using them. Now. The 1st 1 is actually called the portrait orientation, and that is when you're keeping it in this kind of vertical mode like we see in the picture . Right now, the second way that you can also be using it is putting it to the side like this, and this is called the landscape orientation. And this is also very important to know about, because depending on how they are using their tablet, that's gonna affect the design off your website. Now it's worth knowing that when it comes to mobile users. About 90 think it's 93% of all users actually use it in the portrait mode, meaning they keep the phone upright with their one hand like this. Now, when it comes to the tablets, the scores are a little bit different. First of all, the smaller the tablet is, the more likely it is to be used in a portrait mode, right, so the bigger the screen gets then, more commented, is that people use it in a landscape orientation. Now there are two common manufacturers. That's android, right? The android versions of the tablets and then we have Apple and apples tend to be much bigger generally than Androids. So Apple users are the only users who actually use more landscape than they do the portrait . But here's the caveat, guys that most by far the most habit being solder actually android tablets. So that means also that the most common mode off using their tablet is the portrait mode. So we're going to keep this in mind for our design now. On Lee, 4% off the traffic to a website comes from the tablet is worth knowing that when people calculate their mobile traffic. They generally include the tablet traffic in the mobile survey, right? So the previous lecture we went through with the mobile traffic that's usually gonna have the tablet included. But the tablet traffic is general is so small that it doesn't make a big difference is still over half of all the traffic. It's using mobile, meaning your cell phone rather than just the tablets or the desktop. But I've never seen a study that ever shown that more than 10% of the traffic worth tablets . So we know that a very tiny portion off the traffic to your website general come from the tablet. But here's where it gets very interesting because they have the double retention time on tablets compared to the Mobil's right. And that makes sense because people who go to a website on their cell phones they're much more inclined to be searching for something scrolling through and then going back. So the bounce rates are much higher on mobile than on tablets, generally on tablets. People are actually looking for entertainment or they want to read something. They are more settled. Which brings me to the next point as well, which is that 60% of all of the people who use a tablet they actually mount their tablet right? That means that they put their tablet on something so that they can use both of their hands on the other 40%. They're still going to beholding the tablet and then using their older hand to be using the Talbot and scrolling through and clicking etcetera. So that means that about 100% of all tablet users used both their hands. And that makes a lot of sense considering the size off these things. But this is good for us to know, because that means that unlike on cell phones, people are gonna have an easier time to reach all of the places on the screen where it's on a cell phone. There's gonna be easier and harder places to reach on. This doesn't mean that you have completely free range with the designs. They're still gonna be more unless accessible. This signs where you put your call to action buttons where you put your important information, etcetera in order to optimize your website for conversion on cell phones, on tablets and on desktop, they're all three different devices and interfaces and, of course, user experiences. Now, with a tablet, unlike a cell phone, you actually have much more space, right? But the one thing to keep in common here that it's a very common mistake when it comes to user experience. This sign for tablet it's the people put too much junk on their website. For this design, less is still more. Now You have to be really careful when you are focusing on user experience and user interface for a cell phone, because you don't have that much base here. The stories differently actually have a bit more space, but it is easy to put too much junk in the screen, getting a content and information overload. Keep it clean, keep it really nice and clean and think of it like a more accessible part off a cell phone . But you still need to make it look different and look good, But don't clutter it. Don't clutter it. Don't put too much unnecessary stuff. Keep it clean, keep it accessible and prioritize your content. And finally, even though the majority off the uses are used in the portrait orientation, meaning they keep it vertical on their tablets when they're using it, you still need to make sure that do you account for the landscape orientation? And what I mean with that is that, for example, you might think that creating a list like this is a good idea because it looks really nice . You can you scroll through the list with your content and it does look nice. Now, the problem with this list is that when you go from a portrait mode into landscape mode, it just doesn't look that nice anymore. We can see that there is a lot of waste of space to the right that is either gonna be a filled with nothing or B is gonna be filled with a bunch of content that's just gonna be content overload. So this kind of list, the sign is just not going to work now. If we use another design a classic block design, for example, where you have your big content in the front and then you have smaller pieces down below with, for example, your recent posts with your articles with tutorials or your products, whatever it is to you offering, there's gonna look really good in a landscape mode right, because we can see it looking really good there on the screen as well. And if you flip it over to portrait, it's still gonna look really good. It's just gonna look a bit different. It's just gonna general, if it a bit more and be a bit smaller, but it's still gonna look really good, and you might want to change the sign. There s well. So instead of having six different products pop up, maybe only when I show six, because you want to make them bigger, etcetera. But the point is, you need to make sure that you account for the landscape mode asked. Well, so don't use the list design. Now let's move on to the next lecture, and we're gonna adapt our website for tablets, even though it's just 4% of traffic, 4% when you're having thousands and thousands off visitors, that's going to get big, especially when we know that we have doubled the retention on the website. For those users, and retention we know means how long people are staying and interestingly mobile users. They prefer to stay for about four minutes on average, while tablet users there happens to stay two up towards eight minutes and above very interesting statistics. So let's move on to the next lecture and start designing for tablets. 91. Tablet Design UI: All right, guys. So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and focus on the user design on our home page and website for tablets . Okay, so you know the drill. We're gonna use elementary. We're gonna go ahead and go down to responsive mode and click on Tablet. And here we are Now, I'm not gonna go crazy on this one. I'm gonna be very intuitive. And actually not mixture too much if it doesn't need to. Because remember, we're gonna have a lot of pages to be optimizing and to be designing, especially for desktop and very much especially for mobile and tablet off course. You want to make it look good, but still 4% off your traffic, right? So make it look good, but don't go crazy here for the design. Don't major in the minors is my opinion. So let's go ahead and check this out. Now, I am actually quite happy with this one. I do enjoy the design. We're getting straight to the point. In the beginning, we have to learn more. We have the next section popping in. There's nothing that I intuitively really want to change. So I'm going to scroll down and check out the wrist. I think this looks really good and nice to now this one. I'm not as big off a fan of. We can see that there's a lot of space going on in here. We can see that There's a lot of space going on in here, so to me, doesn't make too much space. What I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually listen the size off this background image. Now, I think it's really nice and beautiful because it is covering the entire screen like this. But I still think that there is a bit too much space in between the sections. So I'm gonna go ahead and click up here, and then I'm gonna move over to style. There we go. And then I'm gonna go ahead and move over to lay after stay at layout, Rather, and I'm going to start playing around with the minimum height. Right. So I'm gonna go ahead and see what looks good, Something like that. There we go. So now when we're scrolling through this, we can see that it's not covering the entire screen like it did before, which is really beautiful. A special on desktop and on mobile, in my opinion. But we also have to account for the if we're using the portrait or the landscape mode Now, I want to be a little bit more straight to the point here. So as we scroll down, we actually move over. We have the email open that we move or to the best selling courses. So maybe a little bit bigger. There we go. So we don't have this same crazy amount of space, but it's there we go. OK, that's the sweet spot. So not doing anything to create to hear the text is looking good. Everything is looking the way it should. Really happy about that. Now what? We could also go ahead and do like we did in the mobile version is make this part bold. Right? So we're just gonna go in here and click on the B, make this part bold because we're on towards her back in here. So this suddenly is easier to read. Really digging this so scrolling down? Would you have our courses right here? Well, it's looking quite nice, to be honest. Now, I think there is a bit too much white going on around these. So I'm gonna go ahead and remove the padding for the white ones, which is appearing in the columns. So what I'm gonna do is click a pair for the edit and edit this column, and then I'm gonna move over to advance in here. And now, in order to properly edit this, what I need to do is know what the original sizes organically come desktop here and we can see that the padding is 50 right? Patting his 50. So let's go back to tablet. If I write 50 nothing is really going to happen because that's the original. It just doesn't show up here. Now, I'm probably gonna want to use about half, so I'm gonna write 25 something like that. So it doesn't take quite as much space they were go. I'm liking that design, so I'm just going to click on this one. Go to advance, move over to padding and write 25 here. Swell. Do the same here. Over here. Advanced padding 25. There we go. A bit more clean. I'm digging this look much more much. Nice. Straight to the point. Now I would prefer there to be a little bit more space in between these courses. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually increased the margin between the courses and the easiest way to really do that. To be honest, is click here to edit the middle column. I'm gonna go to advance, and then I'm gonna check out their regional. That margin is 30. Okay, I know that's gonna go back. Make sure I'm still here. And now I'm going to write something like safe 50 50. Might be good. Okay, maybe even 70. There we go. So I think 70. Well, maybe that's over doing it a little bit. I'm gonna do 50 like that. I'm I think this looks quite nice. So there's a bit more space going on. And also, this box is getting a bit smaller, so I'm gonna apply that to all of the columns. They're go Gonna right margin 50. And I'm going to write the margin in here as well. Fifties, I'm hitting two birds with one stone. This terrible expression, by the way. And I am making a bit more space in between while also making this smaller. So I am digging this. I think this looks really nice. I think there needs straight to the point. I'm a big fan of this. Looks very nice to be honest and proud to see it. So this has been my tablet designed for the user interface. Now it's gonna be up to you how you decide to do your decide. It's a completely individual. Just keep the user experience in mind, right, Because they're gonna flip this over. It's gonna look different, but we're not using list. For example, this is still gonna look fine. This is still gonna look fine with mice. Have them on the same row. We'll see. But anyway, nothing is gonna look too crazy because we have kept the design in mind. Now, the final thing I want to show you is that if you move over to a tablet to sign, or maybe even to a mobile design, what might happen sometimes is that the if you're using multiple columns would in a section they might switch places. Now, there's nothing actually in sight off this column, right, Because if you remember, when we were at the disc abortion, we were actually using a an extra call them in here in order to put this more to the left. So this columnist empty and that is perfect for desktop. If you go to tablet, it just puts down below here. Okay, Now, because we're using a tablet and were used in cell phone responsiveness. Is these stack? Right? We can see they stack because this is on the top. This is on the bottom. So if we had any content in here, I'm just gonna just for show here, let's say that we had this texting here, but they were stacking in the wrong order, right? We did not like this. All we would need to do to stack this properly is go to edit section a pair and then over to advanced and then down at responsive here. And there's something that says reverse columns for the tablet this time. So if you would be feeling these ones out, then they would be reversing for the tablet and for the mobile. Right? So now we can see that this one is actually on top. This one is below, and all we would need to do it's just reverse these and put these often they're gonna change back to their original position. And again, this is because the responsiveness is going to stack a lot of your content, which looks beautiful, to be honest, very fluid design. It helps us a lot, but they don't always stacked the way we want to. Great job guys. Now we know about the user experience and user interface for desktop, for Mobil's and for tablets. It's time to move on and start editing and designing more pages on our website. And now we're going to start using templates and explore how we can customize these to create pages easier, faster and off course and make them look absolutely stunning. So see in the next lecture, guys. 92. Design - Start Here Page - Template Editing Template: All right, my friends, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and start editing and designing our start here page. Now, as we know the start here, page is gonna be really important because gonna be a part of our funnel. In other words, we have our home page. What? We have set up the learn more button. We're just gonna take them over to the start here, page where we are gonna warm them up to who we are, what we do, what we have to offer, etcetera, etcetera. So without further ado, let's get started. So we're going to start at the back end for website, and we're gonna move over two pages and then all pages and then at the very bottom here we have the start here, page. I'm just gonna go ahead and click there, and then I'm gonna go ahead and click on edit with elemental er. So here we are. And here is all of our hard work that we did earlier. Now, this is gonna break my heart, at least, but I'm just going to click that away. Poof! It's gone. Lost forever, for we don't need it. Now. The interesting thing is that when you transform any page to start editing with L. A mentor, they all get put into the same section two also makes it very easy to remove. Now, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and start working a bit with templates, right? So I'm gonna show you how we can make a really nice start here page using templates and then adding on some mawr functions and the science from what we have learned earlier. So I'm just gonna go ahead and click on this button right here, and then I'm gonna instantly get to the pages templates. Now, we have different block templates as well. But for now, I'm going to start off with the pages templates. And there is a lot of different templates in here. Now you're gonna notice that some of them has to pro logo up here. Obviously, that means that you need to have the pro version of elementary to use them. But other ones that doesn't we can just go ahead and use them. And there are at sawn off different templates. I mean, there's so many different templates now, I'm just gonna go ahead and use this one it even says home page business page in here, which I think is really nice. We could also search for business if it was like that. So I'm gonna click care and check it out. And I think it looks really nice. I'm gonna click on insert and then yes. So they were going. Now, here we have our new site, or rather, a new start here Page. Now, if we scroll down, we can see that we have gone in a couple of things for free. We have got in this nice design with the two columns. One picture, we have the header. We have some takes. We have a butts on scrolling down. We have these nice affects. We have this part as well. A nice counter here, scrolling down, and then we have some info about our team. Now I'm going to start from the top, and then we're gonna work our way down. Right? So the first thing that I'm gonna do is actually to go ahead and remove this button. I'm gonna right click and click on delete because I don't want to use a button here. We used a button on the home page in order to get people to to start here, page. But we want people to be scrolling down on this page because we're going to be introducing what we do and putting some good content in hand. Then get him into our email list. Okay, So what, we're gonna go ahead and do now is start editing this text right here. For simplicity's sake, I'm going to keep this image because I think it looks really nice. If you don't like it, you can, of course, just go to pick Sabei, fund another picture, click on this one, click here and insert that image that you would like Super easy. Now, I'm not a creative genius. I have done some preparation with a piece of texting here that I'm going to be using different parts off and we'll see how in which parts I'll be using as we go the Sinus decently intuitive. I've done some preparations. It's going to be a lot of intuitive designing as we go. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually copy this text right here, because I'm going to want to use it. They would go copy and I'm going to go back and then I'm gonna change this title here. The header and I'm going to write The future is online, so I'm going to be talking about how the future is going to be about building your business online and doing your marketing online. Even if we're having a local business, you still want to be seen online not only locally, but also globally to build your brand even if it is local. So they're ago. The future is online. I am liking that. I'm gonna change the style a little bit. I'm gonna go in here. First off, I'm gonna be increasing the size a little bit more like that. Actually want to make it a little bit bolder. There we go, liking that big time. Then I'm gonna go in here, remove this text like that, and then I'm gonna paste in what I just copied. Pasting. Okay, so there we go. Think it's looking quite nice, but I also want to increase the size of this. I'm gonna move over to style typography and then start playing around a little bit with this ice. There we go. Something like that. Now, I don't think this is so easy to read. So I'm gonna go ahead and make some different paragraphs and doing paragraphs is very easy . Now I'm gonna do is find where I want the paragraphs. Trading time for money is outdated. Over three billion people are using the Internet and looking for solutions to their problems. Offer the solution and you've got a business. Now, I might want to do something like this, right? Training time from honest, outdated Bubba Blam! Offer the solution and you've got a business. So this could be one paragraph and just gonna jump this part down like that, reach a lot of people, and you get a big business. Whether you're starting from scratch, you're looking to expand. We've got you covered. I'm liking that. I'm gonna put this down now. I might actually even want to do it like this. Put that one down and then I'm going to reconnect these ones there ago. So we have three different paragraphs in here, and I think this looks really nice, actually, and I am going to slightly decrease the size off this image. I'm going to go there and I can play around with the with like this Okay, We have the full having just gonna make it ever so smaller. There we go. Something like that. Now that's micromanagement. But it still please this my eye. So the future is online, and then we have the We have the header here, which I think looks really nice. We have the piece of text going on in here, so let's check out the preview. So this is how it looks like right now, The futures online that we have, the Texan, you can see the above the full section. To me, it's really beautiful. I'm really liking this now as a scroll down noticed that our men, you just pop straight out off into the abyss or something. Outer space. Now, this is just a bug in the preview mode. It's not gonna be like this when we save everything down to a website. So don't worry. So I'm liking this part. I'm really happy with the above the fold section right now. See how easy that was by the way off course is easy because I prepared some text. But thanks to the templates, editing is really quick and nice. Now they have done something really nice and notice We have four different parts going on. And if I hover my mouse over like this, they get this nice hovering blue effect. Now, if you would like to do something like this yourself or add in your own icons all you need to do, let's move over and scroll down to the I come box. If you put your I come box in here, you're gonna be able to choose your own icon in here. So let's use a star. It's an example like that, and all you need to do to get the kind of wonderful hover effect that they have is go to style, go to hover and then choose a color for that. So let's go with some type of blue like they're using snow. If I hover over, we get this same blue that they're also using. So it's a really easy thing to do if you're not happy with the current logos going on in here, and I'm gonna delete that one now, Interestingly, I'm actually really happy about this, so I am going to keep them, and I'm going to add in some more techs that I have, so here we are. We're showing what we're offering with our courses. Right? First off, it's practical courses. Hands on teaching. I'm gonna copy that. And finally, enough. Actually, we have a hand going on here, and then we have these growth. So I think that's just so wonderfully symbolic, don't you think So Some. I'm loving this part. There will go practical course of hands on teaching for real world results. I'm gonna do the same for this one. Gonna cook with this over here, and I'm going to paste it in. So I'm just gonna go ahead and do that for these ones, too. All right, so they will go now. I have copied pasted them all in here we have the practical courses, unlimited premium support, unlimited access to all future updates and 30 day money back guarantee. Now, the important part of the design here is that we're using to rose for the text. So let's go ahead and preview the changes and make sure that is actually looking like this on the screen here as well. So let's scroll down. Now we can see that there is still some. There's only one road off textures that we're gonna have to add in some text in order to keep the design. Otherwise, we see that this one sinks down a little bit. But we wanted up pace. We're getting nice even row going on. So let's go ahead and add in some text here. All right? So I just added in a piece of text in here I just added in this little the long dash and then wrote forever, and as you can see, that puts it in line with the wrist. I'm really digging this and I'm loving. This is the effect that we got with the template as well. So let's move on. Now. We have digital solutions. Boost your success, right? I'm really liking that. But I am going to write something different, and I'm going to go ahead and edit this, which has boost your success. And I'm gonna change that to from beginner to expert like that. And I'm really enjoying the digital solutions that we actually got for free here as well. Now I could be writing digital courses off course, anything. But I really like the digital solutions because what we're offering our solutions to problems, right? Just like we were pointing to in this text. So I'm really digging that that I'm gonna change this text as well. I'm gonna go and steal a piece of the takes that I've been writing here. A little template. Let's add in. This s well, just gonna copy this. And I am going to remove this and pasted in. So not really digging the sights right now. I'm gonna move over to style typography, and I'm gonna increase the size like that. There we go. Now. I'm really digging this, to be honest. So digital solutions from beginner to expert If you're interested in learn digital marketing Amazon, FB or Shopify drop shipping were at your service really, really nice. I'm super happy about that. Now, I am not digging this button. And I'm also not digging the color head because it's really not appropriate with the collar theme that we've been using. It doesn't look too bad. It's actually nice. Grady int If you don't know what a Grady int is, I'm gonna show you that right now. So what we can do in order to change the background? Hayes, go to edit section up here moved to style and then you can see that rather than using the classic, which we have been using throughout pretty much the entire designing, they're using radiant ingredient meaning they're using two colors. They're kind of fading into each other, and I'm kind of digging it, but it doesn't really work with our theme. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually move over up here and moved to the menu default colors and accent and grab this hex code for red that we've been using for quite some time already. And then I'm gonna click here and move back to editing the section. And then let's start playing around a little bit with the colors. So instead of having this pink, I'm going to see how it looks like If I just add in this color, we get this kind of nice reddish color going instead, which, actually, I'm digging this. I think it looks really nice. So I think I'm going to keep this now. We could be playing with the other colors. Well, we have the blue going on here right now. We could be deciding the fate fade. Actually, this is looking quite nice, not so aggressive. They would go. And we can also be deciding the location off the fade. Noticed that there is this line going on here. If I put it to 100 the line is gonna cover everything. If I lower it, I'm I get to decide for how long it goes like that. And also the location Meaning How long is it going to fade? We have the line for how long out will it be? Fading. Okay, I'm just gonna pull it back a little bit, and I'm gonna go from quite far location because I enjoy this sort of look, So I actually really dig this. I think this turned out really nice. So we're gonna go ahead and keep this and check the previews and see what we just got. So let's scroll down. So we have this sort of box going on, and I'm kind of digging this now with a lot of this time, we have actually been going out to the edges, and I really dig that. But I also really like this design, this sort of box design. Now what I'm gonna go ahead and do is change the button because I wanted to go more hand in hand with our red theme, right? So I'm just going to right click here and click on delete. Then I'm gonna move over here to the elements, go and grab the bottom, and I'm going to be placing it down below like this. Let's put it to medium size. I'm gonna center it and then let's read the take. If you're interested in learning to use the market, the Amazon, we're at your service, so it would be appropriate to write. Learn more Here, for example, I'm gonna head over to style, and then I'm gonna head over to typography, and I want to make these into uppercase letters. There we go, and I also want to add some sort of effect on them. So let's go back to style and let's go to hover. And then we're gonna go for hover animation and grow. It's one of my favorite animations just like this. And then let's also add in the satellite change off color when we hover. So I'm gonna go with the background color. I'm going to paste in our red like that and we can see I'm just gonna lighten it up a little bit. there we go. And you can see that it gets it ever so slight. Fate when I hover my mouse over, which I think looks really good. I really enjoyed that. So loving this part. I'm going to keep this. Let's hit the preview and see what it looks like. Scrolling down. Okay, I am really liking this. Think it looks super nice. Learn more usual solutions from beginner to expert a few inches and learned his remarketing ship If I were at your service, This is really good. Okay, so one thing that I noticed a pair The future is online loving this text, but I want to make it into uppercase letters. And I think this is so nice for you to follow along here as well, because when I am designing, I usually like to take a couple of hours on Miss. I'd do something. Then I go back and I do something more than I go back. And it's just the way I designed, at least So I'm going to click on here, and then I'm gonna go to typography, and then I'm gonna move over to transform and go to upper case like that. Now we can see it jumped to Rose. But it doesn't mean that it does actually jump to two rows in the preview. And it's unfortunately does. I'm just gonna minimize this a little bit. I'm gonna move over here and go to topography, and just down size is a little like that. And let's check the preview once again. Okay? So is looking much better. I am digging this and really enjoy the upper case letters scrolling down. We have this part which I'm also really digging, and then we're gonna change these ones now for here. This is a sort of counter, and we can decide both what is going to say and also what is going to count up to. So I'm gonna start with the themes right here now for the themes I might want to write something like courses. Right. And now we have 21 courses currently, so I'm going to increase this to 21 here it says, users, Now we're actually going to change these two students, and then we have the amount of students and I believe that it is 14,301 which is absolutely , insanely incredible. so thank you so much for that. I am so grateful for it. And I promise you, Jesper is just as grateful. So we're gonna keep it like that. And then we also have acted, installs. And for that we could write, for example, reviews. I'm gonna write that reviews and then the ending number we're gonna write. I believe it is 4556 right now, something like that. So many reviews this. I think it's so incredible. So they were going. Now, if I click on the preview changes, let's have a look at how it looks right now. Let's scroll down and then we can see council to 21 courses, 40,301 students and 4556 reviews. Now, that is incredible. These are amazing numbers, and I am loving this and then we have the our team section. Now, I'm not really digging the our team sections. I'm actually going to go ahead and remove this section. And now what we're gonna go ahead and do is just make sure that everything here looks good . I am liking this. I'm liking these ones now. I'm actually gonna change the Grady and a little bit here. Let's just go back a little bit there. So I wanted to be less red. There we go. Something like that. Okay, so I'm liking this much more. It's much less invasive. Ennis is not so powerful because the rest of the design is going to be very powerful. So I am liking this. Okay, So what we have done right now is that we have edited all of the things that came with the template right now, what we're gonna go ahead and doing the next lecture is used to skills that we have learned previously and start adding in extra material in here, such as adding in our own headers, adding in our own content, to be displaying than putting him but sons etcetera. But you're always gonna have to remember when doing the designing or two things. Remember to keep saving now, whether that IHS saving s a draft or updating what you have this one thing super important to remember. The second thing is that when you're putting up things such as buttons like this, remember to click on those buttons, go to content, and actually link them. We can't have buttons that don't do any good. Right? So for me, it would be a perfect thing here to be linking to our courses section. So I would just right click here and then click uncoupling go in here, remove this sign, and I would paste it in. And now it's gonna link to In there. There goes to remember those two things. Keep on saving and always link all of your buttons and material is so guys seeing the next lecture for part two. 93. Design - Start Here Page - Adding Content: All right, guys, welcome back. Now let's continue on with the design. So this is what we currently have. We have our headline. We have our text, we have this picture. And then we are having these nice icons with what we're offering what they're getting from the courses. And also we have these these resolutions from beginner to expert, where they can learn more than descent. Two courses and also this part. Now, I am really enjoying this box. D sign. However, for the upcoming customization is what we're gonna go ahead and do is actually changed the entire page to a more full with design. Because I am going to be an offering some content and also writing about summer for courses . The 1st 1 being Shopify. And I'm going to want to Shopify caller front anti your role now. Right now, that is not possible because we're having the default. Look to the fold, WordPress. Look, and I'm gonna need a full with look for that. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is change to display off this entire page, and all I need to do is move over to set things down here and Then I'm gonna go ahead and click on the page layout and change it to Elemental full with right now. If I want to keep the box content, we can use margins and just put it back. It's super simple to do, but I am going to go with the elemental full with and check out how the content looks. And if I like it, I'm gonna keep it like that. All right, so let's scroll down on. What we can see is that this has gone from my box. Look to a full with look off course, because everything is gonna be affected. Now I am liking this. I think this does have a nice look. And because I love this one much, much more. And I think that having this one box and having this one full with is gonna be a poor designing. We're gonna go with the full with look all the way through. Okay, so we're gonna keep this so we can keep on the signing with the full with now. Should I want to change that and go back to the books? All I would need to do is edit this section, go to advance and then work with the pad ings. And I could work some with the margins as well. So we could actually be boxing it in once again. But we're not going to do that because I am loving this one so much the counter. But I can't have the counter full within this one box, because that's just gonna look terrible. So, guys, this is where we start using our newfound skills, okay? And adding in our own content. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is go to the elements. I'm gonna choose one of the headings and just pull it down right here, okay? And then I'm gonna go in here, and I am going to ride Master Shopify drop shipping because that is what this is going to be about. I'm gonna make this section here, and I'm going to be offering some content and juice, really attracting them with what we have to offer and showing them what we have to offer. So I'm going to write a master ship if I drop shipping just like that, Okay, I'm gonna center it moved to style and typography, and I'm going to be increasing its size. Okay, I think this one is actually looking quite nice. There we go. Now, the next thing I'm gonna want to do is move over to advanced. I'm gonna put some padding around. We're gonna go with a classic 70 padding thing is very classic. It looks really good. Just like that. Okay. So because we're going to be doing it about a Shopify drop shipping Shopify does have its certain color. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually make the background color into the Shopify color, and that's very easy to do. Now, all I need to do is be at editing the section here, go to style. And now, normal. I'm gonna go to the classic background. Remember, we were working with ingredient before. I'm gonna go with classic and then I'm gonna change the color. So, in order to know about the Shopify color, all we need to do is actually just open a new tab and then we're gonna write in Shopify hex color and this is gonna pop up in the top like this. I'm just gonna go ahead and copy this like that and I close this tab, go back here and I am going to paste it in just like that. I'm gonna need the hashtag s. Well, there we go. So now we're getting this this nice, beautiful green color like that. So it's that simple. Whenever you're looking for a certain hex color because you want to make make some some other company, for example, maybe you're doing your own courses. Or maybe you're offering certain services. Are you being a daughter company? Whatever. You can just google the name and then hex color, and it will most of the time pop up. So there we go. I'm really happy about this one. Now what? I'm gonna go ahead and do it start off by adding some content down here in the first piece of content that I'm gonna want to add is on image. So in order not to confuse the background colors, I'm actually going to go ahead and drag this image and put it down here, right? I'm not putting it down below there. If I waas, I would have dragged it down below here, but I didn't put it in its own section in order to keep this color and then we can keep a white background for the image and I'm gonna show you why just now. So we're gonna do is click here and go to choose image. And also guys, I did some preparation that I've uploaded a couple of images that I know I want to use to save all sometimes otherwise will be it for a long, long, long time. So I'm going to move over to the 1st 1 with his Shopify drop shipping business model. I'm gonna click on insert. So there we go. And you can probably already tell that I am focusing on a color theme right here. Now we're using the Shopify callers here. We're also using a lot of white in the image itself and also black. And this is what we're doing here, too. Now, the previous section was close to white, little grayish that takes his black hair. And then we're using Shopify colors in the background. So this I am digging. I'm digging this big town. Let's check it out in the preview and I'm going to scroll down and then we can see here we have Master Shopify drop shipping and then we get this section popping up so I think this looks really nice and really solid. I am happy about that. Okay, So what I'm gonna continue doing now is add in some more material. Now, in order for this not to look so dollar look so boring. Rather, I'm gonna go ahead and change things up a little bit. I'm gonna click on this button, and I'm going to make two columns because now I'm going to move over to elements and use one heading to the left. And I'm going to be using one image to the right. And basically, what I'm going to be doing is showcasing. Offering some sort of content to the writer and making a description to the left. Very short, Very much to the point, not consuming anyone's time, just showing what we're all about and what we have to offer. Clearly, there's already ah, lot off information flowing to the users here. We can see exactly how the shop, if I drop shipping business model works here. It's a very simple, very effective model. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do it starts with the image. I'm gonna click in here, and I am going to choose the scale or stop image just like that. There we go. So now I have the scaler stop image looking really nice fitting with the collars and everything. And I'm gonna write in the text writer and I'm going to write Dr Targets. Ah, traffic. Okay. And I also want to add more off a punch to this. I'm gonna move over to style typography and gonna go over to transform and make this into upper case there would go drive targeted traffic. I'm really digging this and I'm going to increase the size something like this. Okay, so let's check this out. Let's preview the changes shall way, and I'm going to scroll down. And here we have Master Shopify drop shipping. I might actually make this a little bit smaller and scrolling down. We have the shop if I drop shipping Business model looking really nice, okay? And then we have Dr targeted traffic and we have this scale or stop going on right here. As we can see, there are a little bit close into each other. But that's okay. We're gonna fix that in a little bit now. Before we do that, I'm actually going to go ahead and click up here. This is interesting. That's going to save us a lot of time, and then I'm gonna click on copy because then I can move down to this empty space and click on paste. Obviously, I'm going to get the exact cookie. And what is so nice about that is that this is gonna have the correct size, is gonna have the uppercase letter. It's gonna have the right call of everything. We're just copping this entire double calling with the content. So all I need to do now is click on this image, delete it, clicker at the next one, they would go insert media, and then I just go ahead and change this ticks. So I'm gonna write something like triple your sales. There we go. Drive targeted traffic, triple your sales, and now this. Preview it. I'm going to scroll down, and we can see that there is actually a lot of good stuff going on right now. I am digging this, so let's make some more space so that this makes more sense right now. It's so crammed up, I'm nothing. That so I'm going to start off by making some space in between here. Okay, So I am going to click on this section and they're gonna go to advance. And now I'm gonna play with the top margin at the top margin on Lee because it's gonna make some space in between here. So let's put 50. For example, we get some nice base going, and then I'm gonna move over to the middle one now. Noticed this one column here writes the big image. There are two column said, but we can count. This is one section here and then we have one section here. Now, what I'm gonna do is choose the middle section, go to advanced, and then I'm going to ride in, Let's say 70 in the top and bots on margin right here. And the reason for that is, then we're going to get some space to this one, and we're going to get some space to this one. So let's go ahead and preview these changes and scrolling down and we can see we have the masters. Shopify drop shipping and we get a big, nice display of to show before drop shipping business model. We have the target, the traffic, which all of this is still way, way too close. So I'm gonna need to exaggerate these a little bit. I'm actually going to go ahead and make this space the margin. I'm gonna put it to 70 and then I'm gonna make the margins for the middle section into something like, Let's go crazy to my Let's go with 150 There we go. So let's preview the changes scrolling down once again. It's a lot of scrolling on. We have a bit more space in here. I'm really liking this. And then we have this drive targeted traffic. Okay, I'm really digging this now. Notice how there's like, you're able to breathe now when you're scrolling down, right? There's just one thing at a time hoping up. I'm digging this way, way, way more. Actually, I'm gonna increase it even more because I'm digging it that much. You're gonna move over and I'm gonna put the margins to 200 then I'm gonna do another preview and scrolling down. Absolutely. Yes. I am loving this to so much more space there so much easier to focus on what's actually here. Definitely digging this now. There is one thing that I am going to want to change about this, though, and that is that I would like to make these images a bit bigger because I don't think they're visible enough. So I'm gonna go back here and I am going to be changing the columns, right. So I'm gonna move this one over to the left and let's see, Let's Let's not be shy. Let's go with 37 I'm gonna try 37 here as well. There we go. OK, and I'm gonna preview it once again. Oh, is looking so much better drive targeted traffic that it jumps down. Absolutely. No problem. I'm loving it. This is much easier to view. They will have the sales funnel, which is much easier to read now. To me, with the design. If there is one road to rope because they are not on the same lying on the same road, that doesn't really matter. So I am absolutely digging this now. There's gonna be one more thing I want to do to this or two more rather that's gonna be decreasing the size off this. I think it's a little bit too big. I think I went a bit too crazy here. I'm gonna start their moved to style typography. And just put this one down. Let's go with you know, 50. Let's go with 50 and uneven, Not his number. There we go. Now I'm gonna want to add a button in here. So now you have got in a taste of what we have to offer. Maybe you know what it is. Maybe you don't, but it definitely is enticing. Right? So we're actually offering content writing. I was showing them the business model. We're even showing them what we're using it to drive traffic, whether you understand it or not is still good content. And then we're showing them the sales funnel. Now, the question in their mind is, of course. Okay, this looks really good, but I want to learn this. Well, this is why we're gonna go to elements were going to go to. But son, and then we're gonna add it in right here, and then go ahead and put it to the center and making learn more button. Now, if we want to make a life even easier for self, we're gonna scroll up. We're gonna click on this button. Coupet scrolled down and we could just go ahead and remove this right click here, paste it in and look at that. Incredible. And I'm also gonna go ahead and make this into a large button because that's gonna fit in more with this this time because this is a quite large design going on right now. So let's preview this, okay? I am loving this right now. We can see we have everything the way I really wanted to be. Dr. Targeted traffic. OK, here comes the next one, and then we have the learn more button. Okay, Now we're gonna want a little bit in space in between there. Nothing crazy. I'm gonna just go down, and then I'm gonna click on this one to edit this section, go to advance, and then put a top margin. Nothing too crazy. Let's go with 30 or something. They were going. Let's sit preview one more time. All right. And here we have it. I think I overdid it. I'm gonna go back, and I'm go ahead and put it to 15. There we go. So, so far, so good. I'm actually loving this design now. This is gonna bid for this lecture. In the next lecture, I'm gonna show you how you can use the same template as to what you have already created to really speed up creating the upcoming sections. OK, so we're going to continue our design in the upcoming lecture. So see you there, guys. 94. Design - Start Here Page - Templating Your Content: Welcome back, guys. Let's continue on with our design. Quick recap. This is what we have created scrolling down. We have made all of this beauty right now, some from a template, some from our own doing like this party's their own doing. We put some nice spaces going on right here. And then we just added the learn more button with a space that I am happy with. What we're gonna go ahead and do right now is actually to create similar sections like this one. Now, this is a section This is a section, etcetera, etcetera. But we could say that this is one big shop ified section right here. Okay, we're just gonna call it like that. It's not like that in elementary, but let's call it like that right now. But we're gonna go ahead and do now is to create another section for digital marketing and then another section for Amazon F B A. But because we've already done out off the hard work, there is quite a shortcut we can be using for our future designing for those courses. And I'm gonna show you how to do that. So let's go back in here Now, the first thing we're gonna want to do is to create another header. Right? But all I need to do is click here, click on copy, go down and then paste it in here. Ok, now, this isn't really what we're looking for when I cannot do another ship if I drop shipping. But we have the padding already. We have started some form of coloring, so we just need to go ahead and edit. It takes, I'm gonna write master digital marketing like that, and then I'm gonna move over to style, and then I'm gonna go over and edit this section up here, move over to style, and I'm gonna change the background color. Now, of course, the question is, what is the color going to be that I will be using? Well, in this case, I'm actually going to be using the callers from WordPress. So I'm gonna search for WordPress hex color like that. And here we're going to get it right away. I'm gonna grab it. And the reason I'm gonna grab it is because one I think it's a lovely color. It fits in with the rest. And also because a big, big part of the digital marketing courses creating your own website using WordPress. So it's also very symbolic. So let's go back here. I'm gonna clear this one, and I'm gonna paste it in. There we go. So I am loving this color, to be honest. So this is already said and done. You see how quick this is? The only thing we really need to do is actually put the margin to that button. Let's put it to 70 or something. So we get some proper spacing. We could probably even do like 100 and 20 maybe 100. Let's not go too crazy. And then I'm going to scroll up, and we know that there is just one big picture going on here, so there's nothing we need to do that's too crazy. We know if we click on the section here that the margin is 70 between these two. So I'm going to scroll down. I'm gonna move over to elements, grab one of those images, put it down there because we don't want to put it inside, remember? And then I'm gonna click on image, and now I will be using an image for digital marketing there's gonna be a little bit different. I'm going to be showcasing just how successful we have been with our digital marketing displaying having millions off views and millions off watch time. And this is also really good for social proof. Clearly, because we're showing really clear results in here. So this is looking great. I'm gonna keep this image. Now I'm going to scroll up and remember their two columns who actually put these 2 37 with Mix them up. So I'm gonna go ahead and click there copy and then go down and I'm going to paste this in and I'm gonna paste another one in just like that. There we go. And now all I need to do is edit them. I'm gonna click on this one, remove this picture and adding a new one is going to be for digital marketing. We're gonna use this one and here I'm going to write monster Facebook ads like that and down here, I'm going to remove this picture. Click on delete, click on this one, and I'm going to add in this image, which I think is absolutely lovely. I love this design and I'm gonna click it change This takes and I'm going to write over 40 hours off Matt cereal, displaying what is included in the course. They don't think that is gonna be on Lee Facebook ads, clearly showing that there is a lot of digital marketing platforms and they're going to see the two because we're off course going to be adding in the learn more. But on Tuesday, I'm gonna copy that. Go down here and I'm going to paste it in just like that. Okay? I am loving this. This is a really nice and lovely design. Now, there's a bit much padding in here. Remember, we're using the middle section. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do is click on edit in this section, go to advanced and not keep 200 there at the bottom. Let's keep 15 or something like that. I'm going to keep this like that for now. And then we're gonna preview the changes and see what we have created. So I'm going to scroll down Shopify apart. I'm super happy about We have to learn more button. We have the master digital marketing. Okay, we're showcasing this and then we have the master Facebook ads scale it at over 40 hours of material. And then I learned more. But now this is way, way, way too close. I am not digging that. We can see that there's a lot of more space going on in here, so I'm gonna put the to about 50. Let's do a padding in there. So I'm gonna go back. I'm gonna click in here too, Advanced. And then let's do a padding for 50. Say, there we go. And then preview the changes. Scrolling down once again is a lot of scrolling going on. Okay, looking much better. Yes, off course. Because there's so much whiter. There's a different perception off the placement off the button. But there is still a lot of space going on, and I am happy about this. Okay? So that is how quickly that we created the monster digital marketing section because we did it off the hard work earlier, we got the framework to work on it. Now I'm gonna go ahead and do the one of the final sections, which is going to be the Amazon section. So very similarly, I am going to go up here, and I'm going to click on copy. We're gonna scroll all the way down. I'm gonna paste this in going to change these texts, and I'm going to write Master Amazon FB A like that. Gonna move over to the section style, changed the color and once again, gonna using the magical or the magic nets off Google. I'm not going to write and Masson Hicks color like that. And here it is gonna copy this. Gonna go back, clear this one out, paste it in, hits enter and look at that beauty off a color. So I'm really happy about this. I'm gonna keep this, okay? I'm really digging this Now, let's continue on. I'm just gonna go ahead and pull in another image. There we are. Pull it in here and then I'm going to click and choose your image. Now we're gonna have the showcasing off how Amazon FDA works. I'm gonna insert that as media. We're gonna get a complete business model here, which looks super nice. We can see how it melts in with the white background and it's at this sign that I love. It's so clean, So nice. No, I'm gonna do it a little different from last time. Okay, I'm actually going to go and start by coping this one scrolling down and I'm going to paste it in like that, and then I'm going to go up, and I am going to copy the middle one like that and I'm copping the middle one because remember, it already has the margin set. It's just gonna be saving a little bit off time and effort by doing that. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on Paste. There we go. I am definitely digging that. So this is looking nice. Now I'm gonna want some more padding in between here as well. I go to the section, we can see that it's 200. I want some padding in here to we're going to want to use or rather margin. Sorry. 8 200 top margin already used in 200 for the bottom. There's I am going to remove it. Otherwise there will be even 200 here, so it will be 200 plus 200 which is just too much. So there we go. Super easy design. So what, we're gonna go ahead and do now is scroll up right? And I am going to be coping in this one right here. And I'm going to be copying first of all, the middle one because it already has margin for the top. And it also has margin for the bottom, right? I'm going to go down and pasted in, which is perfect. Now, I can also go ahead and cope with the butts and one because it on Lee has the margin here automatically said in a lower margin for the learn more bottom. So it's just clever to do to copying rather than pasting into in a row. But both works off course. This is just gonna be a little bit faster. Based on our design, I'm gonna paste this in as well. And there we go looking beautiful, looking awesome. And let's change things up. So I'm gonna click here. I'm gonna delete this image, click on the plus and I'm going to add the first explanatory image. And then let's change the ticks and I'm gonna write something like build your own brand or let's just right build your brand. There we go. I think is more clean into the point. And there's private labeling how it works. What you do, etcetera, Etcetera. OK, and then we're gonna do the same with this one. I'm going to remove this image, click on the image and put this one in here and then change the text. And I am going to write outsmart competitive source. There we go. And now we're gonna scroll up. I'm going to copy this button. Copy. Scroll down. I'm going to paste it in. OK? And this is looking nice. Let's have a preview and see what we have created. So I'm just gonna scroll all the way down because there's a lot of scrolling to be done. Nice basis going on here. We have the digital marketing section. Okay, Social prove. It's looking good. It's It's looking really good. We have to learn mawr, Amazon. FB A Okay, this is explaining what it is, how it works. Have to build your own brand and how to outsmart competitors. Now, I Honestly, guys, I'm really loving this design. I'm a big fan of this. So what I want to do is again change a little bit off the space in between him because this is quite crammed. While there is a bit more at least perceived space in between is we're gonna go ahead and put a padding around it. Now I believe there's there's quite a bit of space, Yes, the perceived space because of the white. So I'm going to go all the way down over here we are and I'm gonna click on the section, go to advance, and I'm just gonna put Let's go with 15 pattern we're using 70 before let's go with 50. They would go. I can just scroll up and see what pad and we're using. We're using 15 the padding here. So it makes a lot of sounds that we want to use 50 in the padding here. Okay, As perfect. That's all good and getting Now, guys, I'm actually super happy about this design and noticed in what, short off a time if we have created on Amazing the sign. Now, granted, I had prepared some images and I had prepared some text. But really, when it came to the designing, this was really quick and to the point. It's one more thing that I'm gonna want to add. And if you've been following in the course, you're gonna love this because it's like you know, saving the goodie bag. Now, remember, we're talking about the different steps when it comes to start here, you want to warm them up. You want to introduce what you have to offer when I give them your best content, of course. And also, you want to get them too often to your email list. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do here is click on this button. I'm gonna get me to the templates and I'm gonna click on my templates. And you might just remember that we have done an email often template earlier. It's smaller one. So all I'm gonna go ahead and do is click on insert and then yes. And now we are going to be getting these beauty off a designed of we created earlier. Now, for some reason, when you import templates, they often pull the sidebar with them. I don't know why, but it's easy to fix. Just go to set things down here, and then you can see the page layout is going back to default. Just go to elementary full with, and this is gonna change itself and go all the way out to decides. There we go. look at this beauty. I am absolutely adoring this. I'm gonna go ahead and preview the changes. I'm going to scroll all the way down and we can see that. Yes, indeed. This is looking so nice. I am loving how it goes and faiths out from this nice, clean white to the boom. Get the top 10 digital marketing hacks you can sign up, etcetera. Now, this is so cool, because we have really warmed them up with what we have to offer. Ah, lot of social proof. A lot of knowledge. Honestly, a lot of great free content going on right there with the information. Straight to the point. Now, chances start. They've already built a relationship to us. The most likely trust us. And they're probably going to want to get our top 10 digital marketing hacks or whatever else that we have to offer. So chances are really big if we're gonna have someone signed up to our email list. So this was our start here Page. I hope you have taken a lot of inspiration and knowledge from this lecture. Now, remember, with the template are endless decides there are so many things we can do off course if I wanted to. I could use change this image. But I am loving everything about this right now. So what we're gonna go ahead and do is move onto the next lecture. Now, remember, if you need to have your mind refreshed on how to have your mindset for these sort of pages , you can go back to earlier when we were doing the power point presentation to what to think about for the different pages. And here we wanted to really warm the my funnel them in. We wanted to offer our best content and we wanted to get into her email list. Are some awesome guys see you in the next lecture? 95. Design - Courses Page - Part One -ATF: Hello, my friends. And welcome. Now we're gonna go ahead and design our courses, Page. So by now, we have designed and don are home page, right? So people who visit our site, they know what we're about. We've also done are start here page so that we will have taken visitors to go from a cold audience that called visitor and customer into a warmer customer. Because now they know what we're offering. What we're about, etcetera. Now we're gonna move on to the next step, which is showing them what we actually have to offer. Wanna push them into the final step of actually purchasing something from us. Right, So let's dive right into it and start designing our courses. Page. All right, so we're going to start here at the back end off our website, and we're gonna move down two pages and then click on all pages, and now we're gonna go to courses and just then click on edit, and then we're going to click on edit with Elemental. We've done this before, and then we're going to go down to set things down here, and we're gonna change the page layout from default to L A mentor full with. All right, my friends, let the deciding commence. So what I'm gonna want to do here is because they have gone through so many things already . Home pay. Start here, Page. We want to get kind of straight to the point with Okay, they want to see our courses. Then we're gonna give them our courses. This is not the place to be putting on email open or, you know, some some other offer that doesn't have to do with the courses. They want to see your courses. So we're gonna show them the courses. There's just one more thing that we're gonna want to introduce them further with because of the specific, the sign. And that is me and Jesper personally. So what I want to do here is actually to add in a picture of me and Jesper and then write a little text to the right. That looks like it's a letter from us. Right? Because we want to give them a relationship to us, an emotional attachment, make them feel safe and give them a face for the creators off the course, this might be the final push against him into actually feeling safe enough to buy something from us to really want to make this personal and then head straight to all of her course offers. So in order to do that and make sure they're gonna go ahead and use a 10 place, I'm gonna click care on ad template. And we've already used page templates, right? This is honestly, such an honor to have all these pages and just get to pick one. But we also have different blocks Now, blocks are pretty much different sections that we can add. We can edit them ourselves, etcetera. Now, what I'm gonna look for here is actually a block. That's white, because I'm gonna go with a white theme here, and I want to have one that has a picture on it. Kind of like this, But that's not a testimony. Bigger picture exactly like this, actually, so this is absolutely perfect. We can add in a picture of me and Jesper here, and then we can have the message from me. And just for to the right. Perfect. Perfect. I'm gonna go ahead and click on insert here. There we go. Now. I'm just gonna go ahead and added this a little bit, so I'm gonna click on the picture, and then I'm gonna remove this one and click here. And I've already taken the liberty off uploading a big bunch off images here. Now I've transformed all of the P and G's to J pick, and I've also compressed all of the J picks or they're all very tiny file sizes. Now, we have done basing on earlier lecture, So I strongly recommend that you do this for all of your pages and then just keep making sure that your website is up to speed and everything. Now, I'm gonna go ahead and use this picture of me and Jasper and then I'm gonna click on insert media. There we go. Now it's a little bit big for my likings. I'm gonna move over to style here, and I'm gonna play a little bit with the max whipped, right? So I'm just gonna make it a little smaller. Maybe something like that. Okay, so let's leave it at 85. For now, it looks nice. Also low. How there is probably the first picture ever, Jesper without a beard. So I'm really loving this picture. It's really personal Now we're also gonna add in some text is gonna be from me and just burn. I've done some preparation here already also, and pre written. It takes in order for this to be faster for our lectures and tutorials. Now, for you, you might not have a text. You just write. It asked you go. Or you might actually already have a takes. And that's perfect. Just go ahead and grab it and then add it in. Now, I'm also gonna had and written how I want the sections to look like I'm gonna want the business section. And then I'm gonna add in these courses two and two and they're gonna have the complete digital section. It's gonna have a section of two courses and then we're gonna go 333 and three. Okay, so let's go back. I'm just going to click on this text. I'm going to remove all off this like that. Then I'm going to right click and paste it in. There we go. Now let's hit preview and see what it looks like. All right, so I actually think that it looks really nice. Now there's a couple of things that I want to do. First up, I want to make this a little bit smaller, and I also want to make this slightly more narrow. And if I make this more narrow, it's also gonna look more like a letter. And then, of course, I'm gonna want to change these pieces of text as well. So I'm gonna go ahead and do that. So in order to make it all a bit more narrow, I'm gonna go ahead and click up here to edit this column. Then I'm gonna move over to advanced, and I'm just gonna add in a little bit of padding. Let's link them also, they all get third there would go and like that, and then we get to see how it looks like. So let's click comm preview changes. So this is looking really nice. I really love how we got some more narrowness to the text here. Still gonna make this image smaller. But also, I want to decrease this space in between here. So gonna go ahead and do that right now I'm going to click on this image, gonna move the Maxwell down a little bit to 80 there with percent. Now we can also be playing with this one. Gonna put it to ah, 100 right now So we can play with this one as well. So 80 I think we'll be a little bit better. Maybe even go with 77 now. I also did not like the space in between here so much. I'm gonna go back to this column, right, gonna on link these, and then I'm going to remove this space in between by removing the left padding. So I'm gonna do it like that. Police zero on there. And now let's go ahead and check out the changes preview. All right, So I am liking. This is starting to look really nice. Now, there's a couple of more things I want to do. Now. I want this entire image area to take up a bit more space. You can see that even though we made it more narrow with the padding, it still taking up a lot of space. And I want the image to take up a bit more. So I'm gonna move back here and I'm gonna drag this one and make it. No, Let's try 53 47. Let's try that one out And then let's see preview again. All right, so this is looking really nice. I'm starting to get super happy with this design. Looking super personal. It's like a letter from me and just we're going on here. Really, really awesome. Now, let's start editing these ones as well. Now, our name is not Mike Stewart, especially since it is two people. So we're gonna go ahead and click on here, and then we're gonna right robbing and Jesper, And then we're also gonna edit where it's his head off sales, and we're gonna right, see those at Robin and Jesper. Lt d. Now, as you write, C E O's as in plural CEO, but to CEOs, you actually want to make the CEO big and the small, but because we're using uppercase letter here, we're seeing the s s big, and it really doesn't look that nice. We're going to move over to style typography and then changed uppercase to default. There would go looking much nicer. And then I'm also gonna want to go ahead and click here, and I want to make this italic. There we go. So kind of looks like we have signed it there And now let's go ahead and preview these changes. So I'm really liking this. This is super personal and super nice. I'm a big fan off this, really happy about it. So we're gonna keep it like that now, What I'm gonna want to do also is actually to just put some padding around these ones to compress them further, because now it's a complete above the full, which I am enjoying. But I would also like it to just be a little bit more compressed. Just give it a bit more personal looked and simply taking up all of this space around here . So I'm gonna go back here and I'm gonna click on edit the section, gonna move over to advance, and right now we can see that we have, Ah, padding here going on, we have 100. It's up 100 at the bottom. Now we could also be playing around. Let's say that we put 50 to the right and 50 to the left, and then let's heat preview changes and see what we get. So as you can see, we're getting a slightly more compressed look going on, and I am really digging this To be honest, I think this pretty much exactly looks like a letter. Though I'm not enjoying the big space on the top writers. I'm gonna go to advance and you are gonna change the top two. Let's say 50. So we get some space in the bottom here as well. Maybe even, you know, that's pushing it 40. Let's go with four. Dan, that Leslie Comm preview changes. All right, so this to me is much, much, much better. There's some space going on down here. It looks like or Well, it is a picture of me and Jesper and it is a letter from Austria, right? And it says, Welcome Robin and Jesper here introducing it. Hey, it's from me and just But we're making this personal. We're happy to help you with all of your business and digital marketing needs. With over 2700 reviews rated five stars, it said etcetera. So we're introducing again who we are increasing some social proof and just making this personal like it's written from us. And this is all we're gonna do when it comes to adding extra zing here. We're gonna make it personal, introduce ourselves that Hey, Robin and Jesper here. We're offering some good stuff. A lot of people are liking our stuff. Enjoy. This is gonna be the basic message. And now let's go ahead and had strayed into adding the course is Okay, so to add the course says I'm going to start off with a header. Right? So if we look here, I have, like, I was talking about early. I've done a little bit of an outline. I first want to have a header for business, and I'm gonna add a Shopify an Amazon F B A course. And then I'm gonna do a new header for the complete digital marketing courses and add the Complete Digital Marketing Guide and also our social media marketing masterclass because these air two huge courses So there's gonna be a design off to this is also gonna be at the sign of two, and then we're gonna add in all of our additional digital marketing courses in the signs off three. So let's get started right away. Now let's start with heading. And when I grab this heading and I'm just gonna put it straight in here, There we go. And now I'm gonna put this. Now, let's leave it to the left for now. And I'm going to write business courses. I'm gonna move over to style typography, and I'm gonna transform this to upper case letters. Looking really nice. Also gonna increase the size. Let's not go too wild here. Let's go with 40. Think for they might really nice. There we go. I'm also going to give this some padding right away because I know I'm gonna enjoy that This sign like this, maybe even 70. No, actually, things we're gonna go with 50 50 is looking nice. There we go. And now we're going to give it a background color. So this is where we actually start adding in a bit more off our style. And remember, our style has always been this kind of iconic red that we have in here. Now, I'm also gonna add in some padding here, so I'm gonna move up and edit this section right here. Go to advance, and then I'm gonna add in a padding off 50. Just like that. Looking really nice. Now, I also want to have a background color here, and this is where we start to become a little bit more iconic and adding in our iconic color, this kind of really nice red that we have going on. So I'm going to click on style up here and then background Normal classic. And then we're gonna add in that color And what is the caller? Well, if you don't remember the code like high tend to not do, we're gonna just move that, care to the menu. We're gonna go to default colors, go to the accent color, and then we just copay this code, right? It's that simple. And then we moved back by clicking here, go to edit section. We're gonna go back to the color where it's style normal, classic color. Clear this paste in the code And there we go. This is really nice, actually, but I'm going to want to change this colors. I am gonna change this color by clicking here. I'm gonna go to takes color and I'm gonna make this white perfect. I'm loving that. And I'm also going to decrease the size sexual. Let's move this one down to let's try third, something like that. And now let's just preview the changes and see what we've got and let's scroll down and we can see that we have business courses going on. It would have put it to the left. And now we're gonna go ahead and add in our courses. Really nice guys. I am super happy with this now, in order to start adding in our courses, what we can do is actually use a previous template. Remember, we've been playing around with our courses before. We're gonna go ahead and grab that ass a template and then start eating that and then start adding in our courses. Right. So we're gonna go ahead and start adding in the courses in the next lecture, guys. Okay. So I'll see you in the next lecture. That's gonna be part to see there. 96. Design - Courses Page - Part 2 - Column Design: Welcome back, guys. Let's go ahead and grab the template for our courses and then start editing it. So what we're gonna do is actually go ahead and we're going to save this draft. There were goes and I would know it saved and safe. Now we're gonna click up here and we're gonna exit to dashboard. We're gonna go to all pages and then move down to home and click on edit with L a mentor. And here we are brings back memories, doesn't it? That we're going to scroll all the way down till we get to this section. Remember? Now we're gonna use this as our basic templates. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do It's actually right Click up here and I'm gonna click on save asked templates, and I'm going to call this three call call courses. Tim plate, there we go, and I'm gonna click on safe. So here we have it, along with our email opens that we've done earlier. And I'm gonna press this one away, gonna go to the menu and then exit to dashboard, and now we're just gonna head back and we are back. All right, so let's scroll down here and down here, we're going to click on add simply to the right here at the bottom. Now we're gonna go to my templates in the upper, right, And then we have the three column courses. Template. We're just gonna go ahead and click on insert, and then we're gonna click on yes, and asked, you know, for some reason, when we insert, they're gonna want to adding that right sidebar. So we're just gonna go to settings right away here, and then we're gonna go to the page layout and put it to elementary full with All right. So let's start editing this now. The first thing that work and I want to do is to actually remove the background. We're gonna go with a clean and nice white design. So I'm gonna click up here to edit the section I'm gonna go to style, and then I'm just gonna delete this background so we get this nice white defect. Okay? Now, the next thing I'm gonna do is actually remember I wanted this to be a business section for business courses. So and I also only have two business courses here, so I'm gonna go ahead and remove this one. So all I'm gonna do is click up here and then click on delete. So now we only have two courses, and I'm also gonna go ahead and remove this header. Because remember, we set this business courses up here, so I'm going to right click and delete this one. Okay, so this is started to look really nice already. Now, what I'm not actually enjoying is this green effect, because they're so big. I'm not real digging this going on right now. And besides, we kind of have this effect template in the home section. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually click it and it the column and then move over to style and then hover. And then I'm just gonna remove this green by setting this all the way down. So it has full a pass ity, meaning there will be no effect when I hover over just like this. There we go. And this was still gonna have the popping effect, which looks great. So we're gonna go ahead and keep this one now as to remember, if I want to do the same here, all I need to do is go ahead and right click, click on copy, and then go in here and then paste style. And it's gone. I love that. If anything, it's really great. Okay, so now we're gonna want to style these up a little bit if we go ahead. And we looked at the preview changes right now, just a preview and then scroll down. We can see. Actually, I'm loving this. We can see that we have our two courses going on here. Maybe a bit excessive amount of space here, and we're going to remove this, but this is looking a little bit playing, in my opinion. Well, actually, it's not too bad a little bit plane, so we're gonna go ahead and change this up a little bit. We're gonna go back and start up by removing this bottom because we are at courses, right? There's no all of you all courses to be clicking because they're going to get off the course is here. There we go. And what I am going to want to do is actually to add a shadow effect to these boxes. Because if we look right now, we can see that they're melting in here, which actually looks OK, but I want them to pope more. I want them to stand out and before we have the harbor effect. But now we're gonna add in boxes. So in order to do that, all I need to do is go ahead and click here to end the column. And then I'm gonna go down at style to border, and I'm going to click on box shadowing. You just need to click on this and you're automatically going to get a certain color here. That's gonna be the shadow. And you can see that we're getting this nice effect, which we also have on our sticky bar up here. I love this kind of shadow effect. So this makes the whole thing pope a little bit more. So if I preview these changes, we can see that there's quite a difference between these two, right? Quite a difference. This one stands out much more. And this one not so much. So I'm really enjoying this sort of design, and we're going to stick with it. So I'm gonna go ahead and go back and you know the drill. I'm going to cop it and Then I'm going to paste the style and poof it pops up. I love that effect Now. There's a bit excessive space up here, in my opinion. So we're gonna go ahead to the editor section, move over to advanced, and we can see we have a lot of padding and everything that's all nice. But we're gonna go and remove the top patting just lowered. So let's remove the link values. And let's lower this to say, Let's go with 50. I think 50 is gonna look much nicer. You can see there's a bit less space going on right now and now I'm also going to want to make this a bit more oval because if we go ahead and we look at the preview, they are quite thick boxes, aren't they? I would actually like some less padding on the size and make them a little bit off a longer decided. So that's what we're gonna go ahead and do. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do now is actually to make this a little bit more cell ender because, as we can see, there's still a bit of padding to the size, which I think looks nice, but I'm just gonna change it up a little bit now. I'm gonna go ahead. And could it come end it? Call him up here and then we can see that there is some margins going on, which is really nice, because their space in between here some space to the sites, everything. But we're gonna dealing the values off the padding and we're going to increase the right and left padding is to say, Let's do 70. Let's do it like that. There we go. 70 and I'm gonna do the same. I'm gonna dealing and I go with 70. I'm gonna go with 70 and then let's hit preview changes. So I'm really happy about this now. Clearly, I'm going to want to be adding a bit more takes to make them or even. But for now, I'm actually just gonna go ahead and add in the next section, which is going to be the complete digital marketing courses. So in order to do that, it's actually really simple. Right now, all I need to do is click up here and I'm going to click on copy because we've already done all of the hard work Now I'm gonna go down, and I'm going to paste this in here. We can see we're getting all of these for free because we've been doing this work and then I'm going to write complete digital marketing courses like that, Okay? And then I'm also gonna go ahead and go up here and I'm going to be coping this one. This section copy and I'm going to go down, and I'm going to paste it in. Now we're getting these courses for free, right? But all I need to do right now is actually to change this picture to the digital marketing picture, which, remember, I've already done the preparation work here, and I'm going to let see gonna find it. There it is. And I'm gonna click on insert media. There it is. Okay. And then I'm going to also insert the social media low going here and then click on insert media. And there we go. It's really hand like this, isn't it? And as you can see, this one is having a slightly different this scientific. But that is because this image in itself it actually has a border down at the at the bottom . Here and these image doesn't have that bottom border. Now, for aesthetic reasons, for the design reasons, I'm actually going to go ahead and change this one. Latest would has a border here as well. But for this tutorial, I'm gonna keep this one and show you what this is going to be looking like as we continue designing. Now all I'm gonna need to do is change these upright. So if I go ahead and click here, I'll be writing complete digital market sing. Um, guide. There we go. And here, I'm going to writing social media, Mark getting monster class. There we go. So I think this one is actually looking really nicely, both looking really nice. Now, as I go ahead and preview the changes, I'm going to want to make sure that this one has much takes. This this one we can see right now that it has three rows, this one has to row. So the buttons, Aaron, even And also this image does not have the bottoms border, and this one does. And also it is a bit site in between all of these courses. Right? So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do It's actually increase the margins for the headers right here. Okay, so with the header section, I'm going to get some more margins were going to get more space overall, so I'm just gonna head back right here, and then I'm gonna click here to edit this section, go to advance, and now let's start increasing the margins. Let's go with maybe 50. Or, you know, we could probably go a little bit more crazy. Let's go with 100 just to see what it looks like and scrolling down. We can see that there is a lot more space going on. There's time to breathe. Now this becomes its own section. You can tell that when I moved down, we have business courses in the top, scrolling down and then comes the next section. So this is actually looking really nice now, so I might feel there's a bit excessive amount of a space here, but I do really enjoy the space in between here that leads to a new section. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is go back here Now we have 100 on both. I'm gonna dealing them and set the boat sums value for 80. Or maybe let's go with 70. And now let's go ahead and preview the changes and scrolling down. We get the business course says and this is looking really nice. Okay, I am appreciating this. I'm just gonna go ahead and do the same for this one. The complete digital marketing. I'm gonna edit this section. I'm gonna go to advance. But I said the margin for 100 dealing, and then the bottom is gonna be 70. And now we're gonna have a similar value here. So next up, I'm just gonna go ahead and make sure that the text is equally long and I'm also going to be replacing this image of one has to border down below her, and I'm gonna show you how this decide will look like Alright, guys. So this is what we created so far, we have this wonderful introduction here in the above the fold section. Right? This picture of me and Jesper, we have these letter from us introducing who we are, What we're about its are just making it more personal. Robin and Jesper CEO said running just frailty scrolling down. We've created our first section here, which is a really nice a color theme and everything included are typical color theme scrolling down. We can see that these air, even these are the 1st 2 courses reintroducing. We have the next section coming here, which will also have made these even writes everything is actually looking really nice so far. Now what? We're gonna go ahead and do it start to prepare for the upcoming courses. Right? So all I'm gonna do here is I'm gonna click here, and I'm going to copy this section scroll all the way down. I'm gonna paste this in here, and I am just going to call this digital mark at seeing courses. Now we're going to be adding in the rest off our courses. But remember, guys, now we're not gonna have all of the complete courses. We're gonna have all of the let's call them axillary courses. Smaller courses coming up and smaller can still be like 10 hours plus, but still smaller than the complete one. So now we're going to go with a design with a three column this science. We're gonna change things up a little bit. So, without further ado, let's move on to part three. We're adding all of the additional courses with the three column design seeing the next lecture guys 97. Design - Courses Page - Part 3 - Column Design: Hey, guys, Welcome to part three. Let's dive right in. So we've come for in our courses Page already, right? We have done the above the fold section were not created, the business courses and also our complete digital marketing courses. And we have done this in a two column set up right it to calling the sign. Now what we're gonna go ahead and do is adding a couple of extra courses. Now, this is the basic outline that I said in the beginning. And as we can see in the beginning, we were you seeing Dob two columns. Rather. So we're doing two columns for business to for complete. Now we're gonna move over to do three. Okay, so we're gonna have 123 four rows of three columns, and then we're gonna end it all with two rows off two columns again. So 123 and four, Let's go ahead and create those. So this is gonna be surprisingly fast and simple because we have done all off the hard work already. So what, I'm gonna go ahead and do is go ahead and click here to add template. I'm gonna go to my templates and I am going to putting the three column courses template and just inserted. Frankly, yes. And of course, we're just gonna go ahead and go to settings and change the page layout to Elemental full with. All right, so here it is. It's down below here at digital marketing courses. And then we have the good old background here, the oldest sign and everything. But because we have done all the hard work over there, all we need to really do Let's go ahead and right click here, cope it. I'm going to go down to this section and just paste style. There we go. So now we have a white background. Now, I'm gonna do the same for the columns. So I'm just going to right click Coupet and then click here and I'm going to paste style and I'm going to paste style, and then I'm going to paste style. There we go. And then I'm going to remove this button. I'm gonna right click click on delete like that. And I'm also going to remove this header because we already did our own up here. I'm gonna delete that one like that. Okay, so let's just have a look at this design right now and see what we have got scrolling down and we can see that this is actually looking really, really nice. So this would be the first row. Now we're gonna have four rows off these three column set up, right? So we're having the two column set up here, and this is the three column set up super fast and super easy to do. Now it's going to be even easier, because all we need to do is go ahead and click here on Copious. We're gonna cope with these intel, your section go down, pay sitting. So that's two pasted in. That's three pasted in and that is four rights. And then we're also going to go ahead and we're gonna have to rose off two columns, right? So that we're gonna cope in this section now scroll all the way down and we're going to paste it in, and we're going to pay saving. So there we go. So now we have the basic outline off how we wanted to look, We have 1234 and then we have one and two off too. So let's just double check that. 123 and four off the three. Right can see the courses here and then one and two. Perfect. Now all I need to really do is go ahead and change these upright. I just need to go ahead and change the image that I already pre uploaded. I'm gonna change the title, and I am going to be changing the description and off course, also changing the buttons that they actually linked to the course themselves. So I'm gonna go ahead and do this now and then I'm gonna show you the result because we already know how to do this, right? All right, my friends, I just added, in all of the extra information to the courses, meaning I have been changing the pictures, the header and the description, and then spend some time matching the descriptions and matching the headers and everything to make sure that they all look evenly like this. And trust me, this would have been dreadfully boring to watch, but thankfully, you already know how to do this. So now we're gonna look at the results. So here's the digital marketing courses section. Right. So here we have one rope here is the next row now noticed that this takes wants a bit longer. But thankfully, just by adding one extra row in the description they even out perfect this you can get away with that. You just want to make sure that everything is symmetrical like this with the bottoms, right? So everything here is looking really, really nice and clean. So I'm loving this display and as you can notice what I'm scrolling down, there are never three rows shown at once. Either you have one hair and then you have the next row, meaning we have 12 rows being displayed at the same time here. But as you scroll down, this road disappears. And then comes the next one. So we never showed three rows at once. I want to have enough space for that. And then we have the two here and then the two here. So, guys, I am super happy with this aside, it's just one more thing that I am going to go ahead and add. And that is all the way down here at the bottom. I'm gonna go ahead and click on our template once again and I'm going to add in the email often with this smaller section, and I'm gonna click on Yes, and as always, we'd go to settings. We moved to page layout and then l a mentor full with off course. If you use in something like canvas, you're gonna go with cameras, But we're gonna change it back, right? We're not gonna use the sidebar. So perfect. Here we have it. It looks great already, and we know what doesn't. What's so wonderful about this is that we're offering all of the courses here, and then we get to the bottom. With some luck, we're gonna have them sign up to our courses, have them buy something and sign up here. And if they are nervous about buying one of the courses here, they're actually going to be getting one of the courses for free. So that means they get a great introduction that might get a taste for more. It's just a really nice way to build your email list and introduced your visitors tomb or off your products. Right? So I'm really happy about this. All I need to do now, finally, it's just go ahead and make sure that the learn more buttons are linked correctly, right? I want to make sure that they're linked where they're supposed to and off course on the link options. I want to make sure that they open in a new window super important. Otherwise, people are going to be disappearing from your website and from your page, and you want them to go to the core says which in our case is actually on you demand So you wanted to go to uni, but still stay here. Now, if you are selling your products on your own website, you might want to change to learn more to by now, for example. But for us, since we're having our courses and you to me, they actually get to learn by my ending up on the you dummy landing page. So it is a way to learn more, get to the landing page, previews and video, and then perhaps they will buy our material. So, guys, great job as you notice. This was super easy to do except changing the pictures and doing the headers and descriptions that took a while. But this sign was actually super quick and super easy to do, because all we needed to do was used to template and then cope. It pays the style off what we had done before. So now you know how to use the same style across an entire page or across different pages. Super fast, Super quick. Let's move on and start this signing the next page. See you in the next lecture, guys. 98. Design - About Page: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and start designing our about page. So let's just get started. So we know the drill already with the back end for website, we're gonna go to pages all pages. Then we're gonna find our about page that we have created before then I'm just gonna click on edit and then added with L a mentor. And as always, we're going to go down to settings we're gonna go to There is page layout and then elemental er full with awesome. So let's get started now, guys, in my opinion, because we have done such a good job at our home page and at her start here, patient even been talking about herself and what would you on our courses page? We wouldn't necessarily need an about page at this point because we've been introducing ourselves and what we're about. So Well, however, I'm gonna show you how you can make a quick but still very effective about page. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is click on the templates here and then at pages I'm going to search for AB about because, of course, is going to be pre made templates for about pages, and then we can just look through, find anyone That looks nice. And I'm drawn to this one because it's it is a very simple this sign, so I'm gonna check it out. So it's a very simple design going on, and we can redirect them to show off for other channels, like a YouTube Twitter. We don't really you step would do use instagram so we could add Instagram here and then Facebook, right? And then there's some additional things in here that we could edit. So let's go ahead and use this. I'm gonna click on insert. All right, so here we are. First of all, let's decide what we actually want to use in here. Now we have the about us. We have a nice background. I'm actually liking this and it kind of placing with our theme already and with our color theme, right. Even though this is likely more orange, I really like it. I'm gonna change this takes. But there's nothing in the design that I want to change here. Then, of course, we're gonna change through that. There isn't he Twitter logo that says Facebook right? we're gonna change it to Instagram. And then we have our story, which I think looks really nice. I'm going to go ahead and actually remove this heart even though we love hearts. That's lovely. Excuse the pun. I I don't think it fits with the design here. At least not the one that I have in mind. So I'm going to remove that one, and I'm going to go down, and I'm actually gonna go ahead and remove the video and this part too. And I'm also going to remove these ones because we're not going to be using in the image carousel. So this is called an image carousel. You can see that they've added in several ones here, there's gonna be a scrolling by if you are actual visiting the page, I'm gonna go ahead and just remove that. I'm gonna go ahead and remove this as well. So right now you're seeing a quite simple in clean this sign, right? So let's start from the top pair. Now we have about us, which I think can be there because that's the way our about page, right? And then we're just gonna go ahead and edit this takes, I'm gonna click care and I'm gonna change. This takes. So this takes right here. I'm going to be editing in a little bit. But I'm going to do however its focus a bit more on the design. Right. So we do have a Facebook, so this is really great, but we do not use or have to Witter. And also it says Facebook down here for some reason. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do sexually change this to Instagram. If I click on this, we can see that up here. Now, this is say on I come box we used these before. Now what I'm gonna go ahead and do is remove the Twitter one like that and I'm gonna search for Instagram. There we go like that and then down below here, I'm just gonna write instagram. Okay, now, off course I want to change the colors as well because we're using the Facebook blue here, the YouTube red here. But this is some kind of strange bluish color for instagram right now. Instagram It's tricky because they are using Grady and colors meaning a lot of different ones. But the most prominent color for Instagram is the kind of reddish or purplish color that they have. So I'm gonna go ahead and just google it. And in here, I'm just going to search for Instagram Hex Caller Red. There we go. So the first thing, normally you can just go ahead and copy this code, but I know that this is the blue color code. And again, the Instagram logo is a lot of colors are usually there's not gonna be this sort of problem . So we're just gonna go down and check this out. What color is the Instagram logo? Here we go. And then we have the red Violet hex. Okay, This is the code that I am looking for. So I'm gonna go ahead and grab this copy, and then I'm gonna go back. I'm gonna go in, hear clicking here, move over to style, and first change the color off the icon, right? And when I click in here, clear this pasted in and their aid ISS is a really nice and defining color. I am loving that. I'm gonna do this scene with contest. I'm just going to click on content here. We can see it still has this blue color. I'm gonna clear it. Put it in there. And there we go, looking much, much nicer. And then we're gonna add some text in here as well. But I'm going to be doing that often. The design, first of all, I want to nail the design here. And then we have our story right in our story, actually, really like that part now our story is gonna be about how we built this business, why we're doing what we're doing. We want to strengthen the emotional connection. But there's one more thing that I do want to add in here that's super important, and that is some sort of funnel. Now look down here. You can see that there's nothing going on when they come here and they start learning a little bit about those were funneling them toe other websites which we are going to make sure that they will be sent with a in a new window, right, so that we don't lose them as a visitor on our website. But what we also want to do when they come down is give them on incentives to go somewhere else. This is like the architecture offer a website. What happens when they scroll all the way down to the bottom? We still have this menu, but we want to send them somewhere. And what is the best place to send them to? That is going to be the star tear. To start here is all about following them, warming them after who we are, what we're about to then send them to our courses. So simply I'm gonna go here with the elements I'm gonna move over to, but some and I'm going to put it down below There. We're gonna make this really simple. I'm gonna center it. I'm going to write. Start here. Now, this button and the incentive or rather the call to action to click on it is gonna make much more sense when I have read and nail this text, right? But I'm just gonna design everything right now. And I was gonna listen to space between the bottom here and the text as well. So we're gonna keep it small front. Well, let's go with medium. Actually, yeah, that looks nicer. I'm gonna move over to style, and then I'm going to go to the typography because I want to transform it to upper case. I think that looks much better. Great. And then we're gonna go to the hover effect because I love this How perfect We're gonna use grow. So we get this nice effect going, okay? And then we're gonna start editing this section in here. So I'm just gonna click up here, move over to advance that we can see that the bottom there is some padding going on, which makes a lot of sense. That's how we get this nice look. But we want the button to be closer up. So I'm just gonna go ahead and play around with I list to 15. I think 15 looks quite good. At least let's see. Let's preview the changes and see how it looks. So this is what we're having right now. Let's scroll down. We have our story, and then we have this start here, but so this is super clean and super simple. To be honest, all we have done is removed a couple of things. And now we're just gonna edit this takes. I'm gonna set the links in here. We can also see that they have a hover shadow effect. Looking really nice. And then I'm gonna link this starts here to this start here, Page. But first of all, let me right in some description so I can show you what I have read. Um, Why I have written it and I'll show you how it looks like when it's all done and finished is gonna be dreadfully boring to look at. So I'm just going to see you in one second. All right, So this is how it looks and what we've got So far, I have really piece up, period. It says Robin. And just for LTD's a company. This started his journey 2016 with a single question in mind. How do you start making money online from scratch? Now, this is a beautiful of wonderful introduction, especially leaving them with a question. How did it all start? Right. People are here at the about US section to learn about us, so we're giving them the story now in this template, we're following them directly into Facebook. Have also reading that they can visit Facebook to learn about the latest trends in digital marketing Instagram to learn or if they're just interested in our everyday life and then you to to see where it all began. This is what we started. Our journey is if they really want to get to know us who we are, what we're about. We have a lot of tutorials on YouTube and we also have our very beginning on YouTube from when we were doing videos in Swedish and everything and working up the company. Right? So there's a lot of good stuff in here, and there's also a lot of social proof for how much and how big we have grown on this platform. For example, on YouTube, we have ah, believe it is there on 15 million views right now, which is huge. And then I have reading our story and just describe how it all started, right? And then I'm ending the note with this Web site, and business is the result off that, and now we want to share it with you. Start here. So now you might not have read all of this, but I'm basically giving them the story. How it all started, how we learned what worked, and I want to share this that we have learned clearly that works because there's so much social proof on this website already. It's beyond a shadow of a doubt that this system that we have works, they can learn more about it here by just clicking on the start. Here, Page right, So so far so good. Now, the only thing that I really want to change is that I would like to actually change the outlook or that the sign of this part, as you can see, everything is turning or drawing to the right like we have. There's only one road here, and it's put to the right. Makes sense because then you don't need the space in between the columns. But it looks quite terrible. For example, this part, in my opinion. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually go back here. I'm gonna go ahead and cope with this and click care and simply paste style. And then let's go and preview the changes. So it's already looking much better. What I do want, however, is a little bit more space in between these. So I'm gonna go ahead and go back. I'm gonna click on to call him here, move over to advanced, and then I'm going to set some margin to the lift. Let's dealing these and let's set 10 I think will be fine. We can also go ahead and choose to call them here off. This one moved to advance in a D link it. And then we're gonna set 10 to the right here. Okay, so let's go ahead and look and preview the changes and see what we've got scrolling down. Okay, so there's a bit more space in between here, and I'm really liking the look off this. I'm super happy and stoked about this, and it's looking really, really nice. Now you don't need to have an about us page an about me page, but it can be a good idea, especially if you haven't actually included a lot of information about yourself. If you're going for a minimalistic this sign on your website now, we actually have a lot of information who we are, what we're about etcetera in the home page into start here and in the course is page. But we're still doing the about us page in order to learn how quickly and how simply you can create this kind off page. Right? This was done in basically no time at all, and it looks really, really nice. So what? I'm going to go ahead and do now, guys, is that we are going to move over and start this signing. The resource is page. The resource is page is super important. This is where we can have a lot of fun with our affiliate links where we can give and bring a lot of value to our visitors as well, just showing them what we're using, what we recommend and what work. So let's head over to the next lecture and go through and start to signing. A resource is Page. See you there, guys. 99. Design - Resources Page: All right, guys. Welcome back. Let's go ahead and start designing. Our resource is Page. You know the drill. We start at the back and for website pages. All pages we're gonna go to resource is we're going to click on edit and then ended with elements are down. Two settings change the page layout to full with, and there we go. Honestly, it's almost like we have done this before, so let's get started now. In order to start properly here, I actually want to show you something interesting. Now, if you go ahead and you click on templates right here, you'll already know that if you want to use a certain block, we have the block section here. You can just scroll through them, pick a block, start editing it, use it, etcetera. And there are Tom's off blocks for you to use. But there's another thing you can do that Not a lot of people, I think really utilize properly. And that is to go to pages and actually find a page here. That looks really nice. Take that block from the pasted you want to use and then skip the rest. So if we look at this one, for example. We can see that we actually have a pretty nice bloke. A You're not gonna find this in the block section, but this block itself is a part of the page. So what we could do is that we could insert this entire page and then remove all off the risk that is there and just used this block. So we're gonna go ahead and do that right now. We're gonna click on insert, and here we are now scrolling down. We're just going to remove all of these things one by one. There it is. That one is gone. This one has gone. And you know, interestingly, this is actually really nice page if you wanted to use. This is a resource is page you could you conduced riding whatever resource that it is you want to write about here adding a picture off it Here, do the same. Here, Here, This is like this some was made for resource is I can strongly recommend this one, but I want to show you and decided I really like and that you can copy if you want to. You can make your own design, but I want you to know how to do this. So let's continue removing in a couple that we don't want. And there we are. Okay, so let's start doing some editing. First of all, I want to change this and then I'm going to write something like the resource is we use something like that, right, Because we're only gonna recommend things that we use and companies that we actually can't get behind. Now, remember, if you doing a resource is pager your affiliate with some sort of company. If that's a bad company and you are recommending it, it is not gonna look good on you. So what we do is that we only recommend the companies that we used ourselves that we trust and that we enjoy. Of course, if they offer a great service, we're going to recommend them. So I'm gonna write. The resource is we use. And actually, I'm digging this, so I'm gonna leave this for now, and then I'm gonna change this text, and I'm going to write something like here is a collection off. All our most valuable resource is that we see use and warmly rec command. And now I'm gonna do something super important. And we have spoken about this before, right? I'm gonna do this. I'm gonna click here. I'm gonna hit Enter so that we actually, you see, it jumps down like that and I'm going to write disclaimer. Some links will be affiliate links. There we go. And now what you to do depending on who you are, what your relationship is to to your visitors, etcetera. You could actually be writing something extra down below with the corn is something like using affiliate links means or you could even add in an additional run entire page about water affiliate links are and why you use them. Because when people find out that affiliate links is actually when you the owner off the website, get a cut for recommending it and that they usually get a much better deal because of this , then usually visitors are quite happy to be clicking on affiliate link. Otherwise, it just sounds like people, or you are recommending the company for a quick buck. But that's not what it is about. At off you can explain the model off, the company gets a sale, you get a cut and they get a better deal. They'll know that it's a win win win situation. And generally we want to be really open that we use affiliate links and it's really it's a good thing it's a really, really good thing. OK, but for now, we're going to keep this simple. So next up, we're gonna go ahead and start doing a design, and I want to show you what kind of decide if we will be using. I'm gonna click on the plus here, and I'm going to be using it to call them design. So the way that we're going to be doing this is that we are going to move to elements here , and I'm going to be using a there. It is on image to the left. Okay. And I'm going to be using a heading to the right. Okay, so what I'm gonna do is actually put a pretty big padding around this. So what I mean with that is that even though we have layer this across the entire site like this, like the above the fold section, we're gonna make a pretty big padding because we wanna have this sword off box design here , right? So we don't want to use too much takes We don't want to use to big images. So we're gonna make this really narrow. And in this sort of narrow design, we're going to use on image off the company. We're going to describe the company in here, and then we're also going to go ahead and add some text about the company and potentially the deal. So the companies and the resource is that we will be recommended would be blue host. I mean, we love these guys. Elementary, obviously, elementary is great. You don't need to have it, but it is great if you want to go with the full off, fail for creating amazing videos at Instagram Feed back with which is makes life really great when you're doing Amazon FDA off course you to meet and skill share. So these are the tools that we are using and can warmly recommend. Okay, so the 1st 1 is gonna be blue host. So what I'm gonna do here is that I'm going to click on here and I'm going to write blue hosts like that. Okay, now I'm gonna move into elements, and I'm gonna add a text down below Like this. There we go. OK, so we have blue host. I'm gonna click here, and I'm going to be adding the blue host logo. And I've already taken the liberty of going ahead and uploading the images I have turned into J pic. I have compressed them, you know the deal. And if you find your media library looking like this, this is because you're getting a bunch off pictures when you're actually using a template, a page template or even a block template. So don't freak out. If it looks like this, you can just go ahead and click on them. Use more if you will, but click on them and then delete permanently and they're gone. Okay, I'm going to scroll down, and we're going to be using this one. Okay, that is the logo for Blue Host. Gonna click on insert media so you can see that it's really big. You can see that this isn't a good design. If we go ahead and preview changes right now and I scroll down, you can see that I mean, nothing too impressive, right? Not really loving this right now. So what? I mean, when I'm talking about them more boxed in. The sign is that I'm gonna go ahead and click here, right? I'm gonna edit this section. I'm gonna go to Advanced, and then I'm gonna add a big amount of padding looks. Let's start with 200. Let's go crazy. Let's go with 300 like that. Okay. And then I'm gonna dealing this because I don't want so much padding on the top. We could do. Maybe with does not do something to crazy, let's do with two 100 batting on the top for now. And now let's to preview these changes scrolling down here. We can see that there's a lot of space to the life. There's a lot of space to the right, and that is how I want to keep it. For this to sign. I want to showcase the researchers that we have a wannabe straight to the point, and I want to offer them something right. I want to offer them a deal or if there's no deal like you don't have to use affiliate link . If there are no affiliate, for example, you're just offer them the link so they can grab it and start using it. This is all about bringing value to the visitors, right? Never forget that is about bringing value. So what I'm seeing here is this is just way too big way we wait to be and I want more space for the text. So I'm gonna go back, and I'm gonna change the rays show here. So we're gonna do something like, let's move this to 28. 72. Maybe this is pushing it a little bit. Lister 35 65 and I'm gonna preview changes and see what we have. So still too big. In my opinion, I'm gonna move back here and I'm gonna move it down. Let's move it to 28. I'm gonna preview the changes again. All right? So, actually, now we're talking a bit more, right? I'm going to go ahead and increase this padding even more because I really want to talk this one in. So let's go with 400 for now and see what we get. Okay. And then 400 here, and then I'm gonna click. Um, preview changes. Okay, so this is pretty much exactly what I am looking for. I am super happy with this now. There's just one more thing that I want to do with this one, and that is to put it in a literal books, Okay. And the way to do this is super simple. Now what we're gonna go ahead and do is first start off with this column. Now, I'm gonna click here to edit the column. I'm going to move over to style, and then down here, we have Border King. Now all I need to do is set the border type to Saul It I'm going to solve border type, and then we have its upright bottom and lift. If I click on one like this, it actually gets a border. You can see that, right? And then I'm gonna go ahead and I do the same. My click on editing this column and I go to style and I go to border and I just change you too solid, and I click on one. So now this one is getting a border asked. Well, so if I go ahead and I could come preview changes, we can see that these are actually having borders around them right now. And this is looking really nice. It's just one little thing. And that is that this line in between here that actually doesn't look too nice does because this separates them and I want them to be in one big, nice books. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is I'm gonna go back here and I'm going to start with editing this column. I'm gonna move over here, and then I'm gonna d link these values because we want to remove the right borders. I'm gonna click this 20 gonna move to this column, and then I'm gonna style the border, and then I'm gonna dealing, and I'm going to remove the left one. I'm gonna click this 1 to 0. And now let's just preview these changes scrolling down. And isn't this looking so much nicer already? Big, big fan off. This really happy about this now? What I want to do next up to is actually to adding some padding because I just think it's a bit crammed up in there. It's just too tight. So I'm gonna go ahead and go to editing the column just like that. And now I'm gonna move over to advanced in here, and I'm gonna sit a padding. And let's try something like San. We have to remember that these air quite signing now already. So I'm gonna do the same for this column, right? I'm gonna go with Paddington and then click on previous changes and just see what we're getting. All right. So nothing too crazy. I think we can actually up this quite a bit. So let's push the limit a little bit. We're gonna go with 30 going to do the same thing here. I'm gonna press this one up to 30 and then we're gonna preview the changes again. There's a lot of previewing This is how designing works, you know? So this is starting to look more and more lovely. I am digging this. Okay? Really, really nice. So what I would like to do is actually increase the size a little bit here. I'm gonna go ahead and do this. You can see that it doesn't look too good here. Right? And yet when we go here, it's looking quite nice. So I'm gonna click here, and then I'm just gonna go ahead and increase this to let's go to 29. 30.2. That's gonna be fine. And I'm also gonna go in here and I'm going to add a bottom down below here. And we're going to write something like try now on this bottom just like that. And of course, I'm gonna want to style this. We've done this so many times before, right? I'm gonna transform it into upper case letters like that. I'm gonna keep it small size, most definitely. And then I'm also gonna go ahead and move it into hover and hover animation and then grow like that. So let's preview these changes. So this is looking pretty nice. And next thing I'm going to want to do is actually to remove the space in between here because this is having too much space in between and I want to send to the image. Let's go ahead and do those two things. I'm gonna click on this image. I'm gonna center it just like that And we can also way, way, way down size. This one is go with medium it. You can see when it loses too much quality 100. Design - Resources Page (part 2): And then I'm gonna go ahead and click on this column right here. I'm gonna move to advanced, and we have the padding, right? We're gonna dealing the padding and then departing to the lift. We're going to remove that. Just keep it at zero. And now this. Preview the changes again. All right, so this is looking so much nicer with this space going on right here. Now what I'm gonna want to try next. Since we're not seeing too much movement on the image right here, which probably has to do with the image size, I'm going to go ahead and start playing around with the buttons. So let's go back. Let's click on this button and let's try centering it and then click on preview changes. All right, so now we got some results. We can see that this body is right down below here. Now, clearly, this image, in my opinion, is a tad bit too small because even the small button is bigger. So I wanna have this crammed up. Nice looking to sign, but I don't want to have this big buttons. So let's go ahead and make it even smaller and check it out. So this is looking really nice, guys. Okay, so the button is still a bit bigger, but because of the height, I'm actually digging this. This is more straight to the point. So all that I really need to do next is go ahead and click on this section right here, and I'm gonna go ahead and click on copy, and then I'm gonna go down below here and I'm going to paste it in. OK, now, off course, there's a couple of things that we're gonna need to change in this one. We're gonna go to advance, and then we're gonna set the top patting. We want to remove it like that. They would go. And then for this one, this upper one want to go to advance if we want to remove the bottom patting. OK, so now we can see that they are actually connecting. So now if I go out and preview the changes and scroll down, we can see that they are connecting. And that is looking really, really nice. I am digging that now you can see that this line is actually extra strong. And that is because there are two lines that are cutting in and cutting through here. So all we need to really go ahead and do is go back and then click on one of these were going to go with this one for now. And then we're going to click on the right column and we're gonna go to Style Border, and then we're gonna find the top border. We're going to click zero. We're gonna do the same with this one border style border, and then we're gonna could get too serious. So let's go out and preview the changes. Okay, so it's starting to look much nicer already, isn't it? So if we go ahead and look at how many resource is we will be using is going to be 12345 and six Resource is. And right now we have to. So let's just go ahead and prepare that right? So what I'm going to do is prepare this a little bit. I'm gonna click on editing this section and then I'm going to remove the bottom padding just like this. Okay, this is looking really nice. Now, remember, I have already gone ahead and I have removed the top border for these. So now when I go ahead and I could be this entire section, I can just paste it in here and it's gonna work. That's three in total four, five and then six. So let's go ahead and preview these changes so fantastic, we have added in all of these ones. Now all I'm gonna go ahead and do is to start editing them and then add in the information that I want to add in and when I've done when I've added in the images, when I have read in the headers and I've read in the descriptions which you already know how to do right and, of course, linked. But some and everything. Then I'm going to show you the final results. So I'll see you in just about one second. Alright, guys. So here we have the results. I think it looks quite nice already. I've been a very simple but good looking job off writing the the header and the descriptions for all of these courses. Now there are a couple of more things that I want to do in here and the 1st 1 being that I want to increase the size of the header and I also want to increase the size of the description. And then I want to center these section in this column. You can see that the Texas going here, but this one the try now button and the logo is actually a bit far up in this column. So one thing in a time, right? So what we're gonna go ahead and do is I'm going to start by clicking on Blue Host, go to style typography, and I'm going to be playing a little with the site. So let's try something like, you know, to win c five. Let's go with 25 just see how that looks. So it's looking much better, in my opinion. So I am digging 25. I'm just gonna straight on a stick with it. Usually I go back and forth and try different, but I am very happy with this. Then I'm gonna go towards the description here, gonna move to style and then typography, and I'm going to be playing around a little bit with this as well. So let's go ahead and try 70 and see what we get right. And I'm gonna preview these changes all right. So I am digging these big, big times. You can see that there is a lot of more space sort of being created in here as well, which I'm really enjoying now. You might also notice that for some reason, we still have the top layer off the border here. So I'm gonna go ahead and take care of that right now, too. So I'm gonna go back. I'm going to go in here to this column is gonna be style border. And for some reason, the top one is on. I'm just going to remove that just like this. OK, so this one, the size is looking great. Decisive. The description is great. Now I want to send through these two, so I'm gonna go ahead and edit the call them right here. Okay? It is in this column and then here at layout, we have the vertical line. Okay, So vertical align. I'm gonna put to middle just like that. And now I'm gonna go ahead and preview these changes so you can see that this gets put in the middle just like this. And I am digging that big time. I think it's looking really nice I'm super happy with this. Now, one more thing that I actually want to do and that is to increase the padding off this one just to give it a little bit more space all around. Okay, so I'm gonna go ahead and go back, and then I'm gonna go here. We have the padding. I'm gonna increase it to 40 like this. Four day and Ford. And then with goes without saying we need to do the very same thing in this one. Advanced. I'm gonna do Fordice straight on, just like that. Anomalous preview these changes. All right, so this is looking really, really nice. Now, let's just go ahead and copy. Paste this to all of the rest, right? It's super easy to do. All I'm gonna do is I'm gonna start one of the column. Doesn't matter which one. Let's start with the left one. I like a gun Copy, and then I'm going to paste style and I'm going to paste style and pace style. There we are. I'm gonna pay style, and I will pace the style as well. And now let's do the very same thing for this column. Just gonna go ahead and copy paste style paste The style all right to the style has been pasting for everyone. Now we're gonna go ahead and do the same with the hitters. I'm just gonna go ahead and copy the header here, and then I'm gonna move in here and just paste style. And finally, let's do it with the description, okay? Just gonna copy. Go down here and I'm gonna pay style guys. It doesn't get more exciting than this, does it? You're gonna continue pasting this style. And now let's go ahead and check out the previews. This is the previous, and now we're having quite a big change, aren't we? So we have more padding in between these ones, right? And we're also seeing that there is that these air centered The header is bigger. The description is bigger. It's just looks really nice, don't you think? I just think it looks really nice and really clean. Now they they have the ability to go ahead and try it out. We have the description for it and everything. So I'm just really happy with this design. Overall, there's just one more thing that I want to add and that is just a perfectionist in me, and that is that we see that these are thicker. So all I'm gonna go ahead and do is go back. I'm going to be choosing this column. I'm gonna go to style border and then the top when I'm actually gonna make a little bit thicker. And I'm going to do the same here. I'm gonna click here, go to style, click on Border, and then make the top a little bit thicker. Preview these changes and check the top. Now we see that it's just a bit thicker and it fits in with the rest off the design. OK, so this one we got for free this we have created ourselves looks really nice. Now, this is how you go ahead and you create your resource is page. Now, guys, don't forget you have Pretty Ling's. So go and grab your affiliate links were for the ones that you have affiliate links for, and then put affiliate Ling into your pretty links to which is gonna help you with s e O and also give you trackable and nice looking links. Then you put that link into the button right here, right? So they have something to click. And if you manage to connect in a company, if you talk to them and gets a special offer Fantastic. A lot of companies will give you something to your visitor for being an affiliate. So we are gonna move on to the next lecture, and we're gonna start editing and designing our contact page. So see you guys in the next lecture. 101. Design - Contact Page: Alright, guys. So let's move on and start designing our final page. The contact US page. Let's get started. So we know the drill already, right? We're gonna be at the back end of our website. Go the pages, All pages. Then we're gonna find the contact page and then click on edit Colligan aided with Elementary. This is what we did before, remember? And then here we are. So we know already that the previous stuff that we have done is still gonna be in this section right there. Just gonna put everything into one section and we can do what we want with it now. One thing with the contact page, whether it's just contact, contact me, contact us, doesn't matter what we call it. One thing that's really important about this is that when people click on the contact page , they want to contact you, right? I mean, it's obvious makes sense, but my point here is that they want to go directly into the contacting the contact form they want to write to you. This is not the place to be putting a bunch of opt ins. A bunch of extra information, etcetera, etcetera. So I make sure going to keep this super duper simple. Just like this. We've done all the heavy lifting already. We have everything nice and tidy, but I'm gonna show you how you can add a nice background picture to just, you know, living it up a little bit and give it a slightly nicer design. But I want to keep this super simplistic this sign just straight to the point. With the contact form itself, I think it's perfect. So what we're gonna do is move over to settings and then change the page layout. Now you'll notice that there's no sidebar. However, the section itself is affected by this default layer. You can see that the section does not go all the way to the sides. Right? But if I change it from default to full with now, we can see that the section actually moves all the way to the site. And don't worry about this. This code still works. If I click here, you can see that the in the visual form is just a piece of code. But if I click on the text is gonna transfer just like this. So don't worry. If you get this kind of short code notices, it's still going to work in the final version. Okay, Now what I'm gonna do is just add a nice background picture to this. That's really all I'm gonna do. And I've already taken the liberty of finding a background picture on picks a day that I enjoy. We know how to do this already, and then I have compressed it. So it has a nice size and already so all I'm gonna do it's actually click up here, Ted. It the section I'm gonna go to style and then background and then classic and add. Now, I'm just gonna go ahead and choose this bird and click on insert media, OK, And next up on just going to see how it looks like, you know, with the default settings, I'm going to click on preview changes. Okay, so not the most impressive thing in the world, right? They're a couple of things I want to change, and that is to actually make this one fit a little bit better. This is quite soon in already. And then I want to play a little bit with the colors. Okay, so let's go ahead and do that right now. I'm gonna go in here. I'm gonna be its style. And then we're gonna move down to size. I'm gonna change it to cover. There we go. And now I'm just gonna could come preview changes to see what we're getting. Okay, so I already think this looks much nicer, actually. Like how it kind of goes into both the picture of me and Jesper and into this form right here. Now, what I am not liking about this, though, is the very strong colors going on in here, so I'm not a big fan of that. So what I'm gonna do is actually just melted in a little bit, right? A lot of the field has been off course. Besides, are nice red color that we've been using also White. We've been using a lot of white, and this is kind of breaking up the white a little bit because of the quite strong gray, blue ish theme going on. So what I'm gonna do is go back. They're gonna be its style, and then I'm gonna go to background overlay. Okay? So I'm gonna go to background overlay, gonna be at normal, and then I'm gonna click on classic here and add a color, right? I'm gonna add a color overly off white just so it melts in a little bit more with all of the rest of the white. For example, the white in the forms, the white in our menu, even a little bit of widening a picture. It's a black and white picture. So I'm gonna change the colder here. I'm going to click on White just like that, and you can already see how it melts in. Right? So this is how it was before. Look how it's just stands out pops a lot, which could be nice, but not for this design. And the more a pass ity that I give it, the more just fades into the background. So I'm really digging this. So let's preview these changes, and there we go. Now I am loving that. So that literally makes it a background picture, which is exactly what I'm aiming for. It's just a background picture. Students stand out in any way. The important part is the form. Right. Okay, so that's it. Guys, this is the design. Super quick, Super easy. I mean, it's all we need all the deed. Waas went over to pick Sabei, grabbing nice background picture and then put a white overlay to to make it more into the background. And that's it. So you'll notice that you can make a design from scratch like we have done for the home page for the start here page, etcetera. You can also use templates, and it's changed them, as you wish were just used to template straight on. And you can do something as simple as just put a background picture even when you have been using the Gutenberg editor. Okay, so there's a lot of good stuff in here, a lot of ways to do it. But name point is, now you know how to design and how to design. Really, really? Well, okay, so that's it for the designing off. The pages were not going to go through the blog's because a block it's gonna be a blood. We're gonna be focusing on the content there, so we're not going to be going through to design so guys, by now you should have a really nice grasp on the designing itself, right? And if you've got any questions, will, of course, be in the Q and A. Just remember to be creative, used the templates and use what you have learned and then make your own decisions and have a lot of fun. This signing is fun, guys. Now, before we move on to the next section, we're gonna move on to the next lecture. We're gonna talk about what to think about now, when we have designed these pages. And there are a couple of things that I think you should really know about that super important to know now that we have designed these and what to think about for the future, when you've done the design itself and how you move on from here. So see in the next lecture, guys. 102. After Designing: All right, guys. So you have done the designing off your pages. First off, all great job, amazing job making it this far and creating your own design. Now the question, of course, is what do I do next? Well, there's more content coming up, but I did want to talk about a couple of things with you that's going to be super important . And the first thing that I want to talk about is to continue optimizing. Now, guys, the first thing that we did in the optimization section waas to optimize our home page. Right? So the https Roman and jesper dot com that is our home page. It is optimized, but what we also need to do is go ahead and run the Ping dum, too. The up time, whatever it is that you choose to use to speed, test your website and run that optimization test on the start here page on the other pages such as the courses paid and of course, the rest of the patients as well they about the resource is to contact it said etcetera. Now all of these are individual pages, so we're gonna need to do the speed test on them to make sure that there's nothing in there that's too big. This taking up too much space, for example, when you use a certain template within L. A mentor, sometimes those images can be really, really large. So you might want to go ahead and compress those images to make sure that your website is loading faster. But still, we want to make sure that we continue optimizing every page that we are doing. And whenever you're doing any updates, make sure that everything is looking good right now. Next up is also the same about all of the pages that we created to make sure that we're adapting it for mobile and tablet user experience and user interface. Now we did this for Robin and just a dot com. That is our home page. But we have not done this with start ear courses about Resource is contact those pages, so we want to go ahead and do that. Ask well, right. Just make sure that everything is looking good, that it is sensible where the things are placed. Remember the thumb zone and everything, so make sure that whenever you're doing in a page, make sure that it's always tablet and mobile adapted. Give it a nice UX and you I experience because this makes a huge difference. Now remember the way our website looked in the beginning was looking something like this. And then we spoke about the user experience, and we designed it differently in order to make it nicer for the mobile and look at the difference. I mean, it is like night and day. We changed up the thing, first of all with the menu. So it's has a much higher user experience because it's not covering such a big part of the screen for no reason. And then we took care of the design where the words were just coming together and being too crammed up, right. So make sure that we're always focusing on user experience and user interface for the mobile and tablet one we're done designing for the desktop. Now, the next thing I want to talk about is to search engine optimized your website. And don't panic because you actually haven't gone through that section yet. Unless you've been skipping section, which is OK, but we don't expect you to know about this yet. Now, in an upcoming section we're going to be talking about S E right search engine optimization . So what you'll be learning in there about keywords, keyword research and how to properly utilized them in headers entitles in your post in a different parts of your pages, etcetera. Take that information. Take all those things you will learn in there and apply it to the pages that we just created. Right? Do you want to go ahead and search engine optimized the pages that we just created and designed Now the next thing I want you to keep an eye on is the bounce rates. Right now, the bounce rate is basically when someone goes to your website and then exits the website just about as quickly asked, they entreated. Now that's known as a bounds. And usually this scene us that there's something wrong. Maybe they didn't get what they were looking for. Maybe something is broken on the website, but you want to keep on eye on this, and if you go to the back end off your website down, it incites because you've been following since the plug in section. You'll know that we have installed monster insight. We've installed Google analytics and everything. So it's all set up and we go to reports down here, you're going to see something that's known, asked the bounce rate right. And a average bounce rate is gonna be for about 40 to 55%. This is general known as an average bounce rate. Anything lower than that is gonna be really, really good. But depending on what kind of website you're running, you could have it slightly higher as well. But what? You're mainly looking for our changes. So, for example, if you notice that a certain page has a super high bounce rate and it doesn't make sense why you might want to check that out. So, for example, if you have a certain product page, you know, it's what this is a really high bounce rate. You want to go in and see if there's something here that's not working. Is this something here that's broken? That's often my turning them off. Somehow. It's just a big warning signal, and it's just gonna hint you towards improvement. Now, if you scroll down here, you're going to get something that says here ago. View full posts and pages report now if I click here is gonna take us directly to our Google analytics. And the great thing with this is that we can see exactly what kind of bounce rate we have at which pages. So if we scroll down, we could see that the 1st 1 is just has the forward slash share. This is our home page, right? Because this is just Robin and desperate that come with nothing extra tude. We can go to the right than we can see. Our bounce rate for this page is $79.84 percent for this date, which is huge. And it also makes sense because we've been building the site, but it's still been alive. We're gonna expect this to be better in the upcoming time. Now, if we scroll down, we can see the bounce rate for the courses page for the start Here, page about page blood, etcetera, etcetera. And you want to keep on eye on this overtime to make sure that hey, used to some special patient as a high bounce rate than any other, for example and some pages Oh, just gonna make more sense to have high your bounce rates on right. So, for example, if you have some certain download page, they just go in, they grab the download and they leave is gonna make sense that the bouncer it will be sky high. So just keep that in mind that the percent adjusted 40% to 55% which is generally quite average and and, ah, good bounce rate. That doesn't apply for every page. Just try to make sense of what kind of page am I having and doesn't make sense that people leave this quickly. For example, it products page, you don't want to have a high bounce rate on at all. Okay, and then, finally, I just want to say guys update freely. Whenever you're adding in, for example, in new product or a new update or just some use in your company, don't be afraid to go in and actually put that in the front of your website because elementary is a drag and drop to its super fast. It's super easy. You get to see the preview when you're editing, so don't don't be afraid to do updates and change your design over time, because this is a lot of fun right now, you can make a design kind of said it. Then forget and move on with your life. You know, if you want to just focus on the business but don't be afraid to keep the signing because it is so simple. Takes no time. And it can have a huge impact on your visitors on your customers, etcetera, etcetera. So I just want to say, Amazing job making it this far. Let's move on into the next section and start learning about woo comers. Okay, seeing the next lecture, guys. 103. Introduction WooCommerce: hi guys, and welcome to the Wu Coomer section off the course. Now, if you're looking to learn how to sell items on your website and turn your website into an online shop, well, then you are at the right section. So let's dive deeper into this. All right, so let's talk about who Coomer's, what it is, what the benefits are with it, how we're going to be using it. It said. It said Robert, let's start from the beginning. What is woo gamers? Well, woo comers is just a word for us. Plug in. We've gone through WordPress plug ins before, right, and this plugging is going to allow you to sell different items on your website by installing all of the necessary features such as a shop page such as adding payment gateways. Such is adding the add to cart function, it said, etcetera. It's gonna make sure that you'll be able to sell items adding items your customers can go in, they can pay you and you can send them whatever they said they are buying and welcome. Er's makes this process so simple. So when we're adding our products, it's going to be looking something like this and you can see it's a very nice and very clean display off whatever product they're might be. You're also going to be able to customize what you want to show, for example, the name, for example, the rating, even the location if you would like to, and you're also be able to sort by location by price by whatever it might be. And when you click on any certain products, it's going to look something like this where you'll be able to add a description about the product and really make sure that you sell the benefits off the product itself and not the features. This is a cooperating thing. You sell the benefits and not the features. Okay, so this is how Woo comers looks in its simplicity, and it is also effective. In fact, it's so effective that currently 40% or more off all current e commerce is are using who commercial and on e commerce is basically just another name for an online shop. Now these numbers probably not set in stone. I've seen some studies show how your usage and some show a lower usage, but the point is still that Ah lot off people, and a lot of businesses are using woo comers and for good reasons. Now, probably the primary reason would be that it's actually super easy. It's so accessible to me, to you, to anyone around, because you install it and, well, you're not really good to go. But it's so easy to learn to learn how to set up your product to set up your payment. And then you can start making money from your website. It's absolutely incredible how powerful the feature it's, and with it you'll be able to sell anything. Now you can add in simple product, like if you want to sell a sofa, get out in the sofa. You can also sell variable products. So, for example, if you're selling a T shirt, you can sell it in a multitude of colors. You can sell it in different sizes. This is called a variable product because it has a different variables to it. You'll be able to sell group products. You'll be able to sell services. Maybe you're offering coaching to someone, or you're a personal trainer or whatever it might be. You'll also be able to sell. Digital products may be on E book. It could be a course and even etcetera, etcetera. Basically, the sky is the limit when it comes to what you're able to sell in here. It's an extremely versatile plug in that allows you to basically sell anything on the website that you now already have created. And the final thing about why I love woo comers so so so much is because it is a complete solution. And what I mean, what a complete solution is that it's super easy to use to set up. It has over 100 different payment gateways, meaning there's a lot of different ways that people will be able to pay on. They have development teams working for this because over 40% of online stores are actually run on wu comers. So there's a lot of developers making sure that this is completely up to date, and this is running the way that it should be. And also woo commerce is incredibly safe. They're using all of the latest and most important safety measures, and if you have been following along in the course from earlier from the WordPress course, you will know just how important safety is for your website. So if it wasn't understood already, me and desperate love woo comers is a super powerful and useful tool. And now we're gonna learn more in depth, how to use it so that you'll be able to sell anything that you'd like to on your website. So see in the next lecture, guys. 104. Basic Setup: Alright, guys. So in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and start with the basic set up for Woo commers where we're gonna install it, we're gonna set the basic settings and then we're gonna make sure that we actually have the shop I can in our menu. Right? So let's get started. I am at the back end of her website. I've gone to plug ins, add new, and now I'm just gonna go ahead and search for woo commerce. And here we have it with over four million active installations. It's crazy and it's by automatic, and we already know that the automatic is a part of the wordpress dot com team. So this plug in is going to get a lot of love. So we're going to click on install now and then activate. So the first thing that's most likely gonna happen is that is going to be throwing you into the set up wizard, and this one is very useful. It's very handy, however, because they want to go through the plugging more thoroughly with you. I'm gonna go ahead and go down to not right now. And I recommend that you do the same because it's gonna be easier for me to teach you about this plugging ass we go rather than said everything up right here and right now. So we're not gonna go ahead and run the set up. We start instead, we're going to get started manually. And we're going to do that by going down to woo comers, which we now have added to the side here. And then we're gonna go to status. And then we're gonna go up here where it says tools and we're going to click on the tools and then we're gonna scroll down until we say something that says, Let's see here ago, create the default woo comers pages And this is gonna be the shop page, the add to cart, the all of the necessary pages in order for us to have our shop. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on create pages, Perfect. All missing newcomers, pages successfully installed. So now if I go to page is up here and I click on all pages, we'll see that we have added a cart page. We have a check out page and we have a my account page, and we also have a shop page. So we have all of the necessary pages in order for us to have our woo commerce and now also recognised to some here since elementary. Others. Dustin, if you want to be editing your wu comers with L. A mentor, that is a pro feature, and it really doesn't make life easier, but it is not necessary. But if it is interesting, will help you out with that at the end off the course at the bonus lecture. But for now, let's move on. Now, the next thing that we're gonna want to do is go down here to woo commerce and then move over to set things were going to set up some basic settings before we get started and creating our first product. Right? So the first thing we have here is that we want to write in the address, and this is gonna be the address off your shop, right? And this isn't very important for woo comers to calculate the taxes, to calculate the distance, the possible shipping, etcetera, etcetera. So the first thing that you're gonna want to do it's adding the address, add in your country in here and make sure that everything is set up right? For privacy, reasons are not going to set that up right now. And then we also have the general options. Where will you be selling will be selling to all of the countries in the world or just to specific countries. You can go ahead and just add those in that you will be selling to. But for now, we're gonna set to all countries and then we have shipping locations. Where will you be shipping to? Will you be shipping toe all of the countries you sell to or Onley to specific countries? Now, you might be selling to the entire world because you hav e products, right? You have, for example, a digital e book. But you might also physical product that you only sell to certain parts of the world because of shipping because of profitability, etcetera, etcetera. You can set that up here and then we have the default customer location. In other words, how we want to calculate and see where the customer is from so that they will have some basic setting set up for them for, for example, the shipping time to the more certain shipping costs that we could use the shop based address in here. No location or geo locate. And Geo locate generally is going to use their i p address to figure out where they are coming from. And then there are more settings in here, for example, taxes and coupons. But we're going to go through all of that later on in the course. So we're not gonna be setting up all of these right now. Only the basic wants. Okay, so we're going to scroll down to the currency options, and then we have the currency, and this is gonna be the currency that will be displayed at your web shop, right? So if you're selling to, for example, primarily an American audience based, you're gonna want to use dollars. Now, if you're selling primarily in Europe, you're gonna want to use euro, for example. Now we're gonna go ahead and search for United States and used us dollar For this, we're also going to use the lift occurrence of position that's the most common and most comfortable usually and then we can do these minor details. 2000 separate the decimal separator and number off decimals. But when all of this is set, we're gonna click on Save it changes and then we're going to scroll up and we're going to click on products and there's a lot of fun stuff to be setting up in here, but we're not gonna go through all of that now, But we are gonna go through the weight itself now if we're going to be selling to primarily on, American audience would probably wanna use pounds right now. If we're going to be more international, we're gonna want to use kilos. And also it's the same is true with the dimensions we're gonna want to use, the one that's basically most comfortable for our customers, just knowing from the analytics where our customers are coming from now. You don't want to, for example, use pounds and then use the dimensions in centimeters because it doesn't really make sense . You want to be consistent. Today, views killers use centimeters or if you're using pounds, then go ahead and use the inches or yards etcetera. They're used in other countries, and when you're done with that, we're gonna go ahead and click on save changes. So the final thing we will do now is to go ahead and add the shop part the shop in the menu so that people can actually access your shop, right, Because we have the pages, but we don't have them set out anywhere yet, So we're gonna go ahead and go down to appearance, and then we're gonna go to menus and then to the left. Here, we're going to click on shop like that and then click on add to menu. And now we just place it where we want to be placing. And now I'm gonna place it right after blood. Not like that, because then it gets on under section of the blood. They would go just like this and then click on save menu. So top made many has been updated. Now we're gonna go ahead up here, which is Robin and Jesper and click on visit sites. Notice that we now also have this It's store and here we are and you'll notice that Look at this. Now we have the A product card, which is really exciting rights. So we have a Cardiff for when our customers and where we are actually adding in products. But more importantly, we actually added the shop part that is right here. So if I go ahead and likely gonna shop right now, we're going to be taken to the Shope part off our website, right? And it doesn't look that impressive right now. First of all, the sidebar is on the left. That, for me is extremely uncomfortable. And also, this is completely empty. So in the upcoming lectures, I'm gonna show you how to add products, how to customize the sidebar, the looks and everything. But once again, if you have grown comfortable with using elemental er, this is a pro feature in elementary that you'll be able to use design and play with Wu commerce. If you know elementary, you'll know how to use will comers with it. You can go ahead and check out the bonus section to learn more about that. But if not, we're going to go through all of that in the upcoming lectures on how to do it without elementaries. So let's move on to the next lecture and add in our first product, Casey of their guys 105. Create a Simple Product: all right. In this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and add our first product, which is going to be a simple product. Now I'm gonna show you exactly what I mean with a simple product. So let's get started. All right. So this is how our shop is looking right now. Not very impressive, right? There is nothing here. And don't worry about the sidebar. In the next lecture, we're gonna go through what we can do with this side bar. Okay? How we can remove it. Now what we're gonna go ahead and do is at our first product, which is going to be a gaming mouse. Right? So if you don't have any products off your own that you're wanting to add that I am going to put some pictures in the resource is so you can go ahead. If you want to do some practicing yourself for adding products. Now, I'm going to keep the shop open so I can show you the changes asked. I go and I'm also gonna have a tab open here for the back end of our website now, but I'm gonna go ahead and do is right below here, which is root commerce. We're gonna go to products and then I'm gonna click on add new and in here I'm going to write the product name which we're gonna call Gaming Mouse. Right? And now I'm just gonna go ahead and click on Publish. There we go. So now if I goto our shop right here and I update this page, we can see that we have just added our first product. Isn't that exciting? So here's our first product. It's a gaming mouse, were able to read Mawr and click on this. Obviously, there's no bite button right now, So this is our first product. It's not looking too exciting right now. And if I click in on it, we get to this point right. We can see the category test. We can see the reviews, but there's really nothing mawr going on here right now. So this is what we're about to be customizing now. If we go back to the back end of for a website where basically love the magic is happening , the first thing we can do is write a product description and there's gonna be a long product description. And in here, you basically want to write. Every single thing about the product is going to be important. And I'm just gonna go ahead and grab some piece of takes just to use as an example for this . All right, so I just grab some piece of text. Now you want to write your own product description? Off course is just as an example. I'm gonna go ahead and click on update. And now let's go ahead and shake it out the way it looks on our shop on a product page. So this is the description I'm talking about. Now, this is ending up in this piece of the description. You can call this the long description now, before we only had reviews. Now we have a description in here as well. If we go back, there are a multitude of other things that we can be playing around with. We're not going to use the ocean WP settings nor the U. S s CEO, So I'm gonna collapse thes ones and below here we have something known as product data, and this is what I was talking about early about a simple product. Now a simple product is basically a product that's not going to have any additional variations, too. So a variable product, for example, which is here, which we're going to go through in a couple of lectures. That's gonna be if you're having, for example, you're selling a T shirt and it has different sizes. Or if we were selling a gaming mouse that had different colors, for example, now that would be a variable product because that same product would have multiple variables. But we're gonna use a simple product for this lecture. Meaning you see, what you get is what you see. There's not gonna be in a variations and sizes or colors or anything, so we have a couple of options right here. We have the virtual and downloadable, and we're gonna go through them in upcoming lectures. So I'm going to show you the primary settings for simple product, and then we're gonna add in more set things as we go. So if there's something along the way that we're missing, don't where we will be going through it. So the first thing we have is the regular price, right? What is the price we want to set? We could set, say, 24 99 as an example, but we could also put this up for sale at, say, 2199 right now. So if I go ahead and I update this right now and of course, update this page, we get to see the price here to the right than now. Since we also set a price, we also had have the add to CART possibility and the quantity possibility here as well. Now, there are a lot of options in here for us to edit. And the next thing we could be editing would be the sale itself. Now, right now, we have set a sale. We haven't said in a particular date for it or anything, but we could schedule it. Meaning we want to sail to start from, you know, whenever. And we wanted to end whenever. So let's say that we started it from the 27th today. We could put it to the 30th. There would be a three day sale. So that means that you don't have to keep an eye out for this. The sale is gonna end after a certain period. You could have a flash sale for 24 hours. You could have a week sale a month, whatever you would like to. But it's very handy to be able to schedule it like this. I'm just going to click on cancel their and next up we have the inventory. And the first thing you're going to see is the SK Year, which means stock keeping units. And this is gonna be a unique i d for the product. And this unique idea is gonna be internal meaning that is on Lee for your own logistics is just gonna make sure that all of your products has a unique I. D. Ok, it's not universal, It's not international. None of that is only for you. But there are a couple of really good practices you could be using here. So let's say, for example, that this was the mouse we were selling, right? If we went down and we checked out there s key, you know, remember, this is their own personal sk you. We could go ahead and copy this and actually added into our own sq. The benefit of this would be that certain customers who are going to be wanting to buy this gaming mouse from them assuming was selling the same product here. If they are searching for the product by the sq in Google, for example, this means that our product is going to be popping up as well. And if we are competitive in our prices looking, for example, a general was settling for 29 99 they are selling for 22 87. That means that most likely there actually going to come to our website to buy this product on Lee because we were clever enough to use to escape you that other sellers are using as well for the same product, meaning there's a higher chance that they're gonna come to us instead. Now you don't have to use SK you, but I strongly, strongly strongly recommend that you do, because as time goes and you start getting more and more items, you're gonna want to keep on eye on them and want to have a unique i d. For them. With that said, If you're not copying someone else's or you're selling completely your own product like a digital product, for example, or a service, you might want to give it a unique esque, even all you need to do is type it in, but there are some best practices for this as well. For example, always start with a one. The number one don't start with zeroes. That's just confusing, because once we start using variables, let's say for this mouse were using M o M o you and I would write 10 one. Is this sk you? They would mean that this could signal that it is a mouse and the one that it is product number one for mouth and also that it would be a variable number one shoot. We'd be using variables. So if we had another color, we would just go ahead and add that other color to to the next color to three four. Or if it was another size or whatever. It's just some best practices now. So other things you might also want to think about is the using certain numbers or letters . So if you're using an oh, that's very easily confused with a zero, so you might only want to go with em. You won a one like that because there's going to be less confusion and list risk for mixing up, especially if you're starting to mix up, you know, numbers and letters as you go. So there's some best practices for the SK. You and I strongly recommended you use them even though you don't have to. But for variable, you will need to, but for simple you don't. But I still recommend that you do. And then we can manage our stock. How many do we actually have in stock that we can be selling now? You don't need to manage your stock. If it would be a digital download, for example, because with digital products there's an endless supply. But if you're selling something physical like a gaming most if we are right now, we're probably gonna want to regulate our stock. So let's say that we have 10 mouses or mice. They will want to sell right now. And we would just write 10 in stock quantity right here. Then we have the option for back orders and back orders. Basically means are you gonna allow your customers too place an order even though they are not in stock? We can either do not allow like that. And if I put it to this and I updated and then update this page as Well, you're going to see that Now we know that we have 10 off these products. If I go ahead and I go to 11 like that and I try to click on add to cart is gonna say value must be lesser equal to 10 because there just aren't that many, right? Just gonna be a warning. You're not gonna be able to buy all of those products. But now if we go back, for example sorry and we go back to inventory and we would change this to allow about notify customers, then they will get a notification that you can order, But they're not in stock. And that's just implying that Hey, it's gonna take longer, right? You don't always know when you will be getting back in stock. So if I go with this settings and I click on update and then updates here, a swell, we can see that it says 10 in stock can be back. Order right. But we can also going back to inventory. We can also just click on allow. And this is a little bit risky because if you could, can allowing you get a lot of orders, for example, and you are out of stock. That's just means that your customer is going to be expecting a quick delivery, but you won't be able to live up to that. But you need to make sure that if you are using these settings, you really need to stuck up as quick as possible. Right? And then we have the low stock threshold. When are you gonna get an email and warning off? Hey, we're low on stock. So, for example, if you were selling 100 of these, you might want to get a warning. When you are on about list your like that 20 or something. So you know that Hey, it's time to stock up again, right? We're gonna put this back to 10 and we're gonna keep this a two right now. So about 20%. But this is highly individual and then also sold individually enabled is to only allow one of the items to be bought in a single order you could be using is if you're having some certain sales, for example, some promotional sales. You want to spread this out to a lot of people, but otherwise this is just gonna limit sale so I personally wouldn't be using this, Okay? And then we moved down to shipping, and here we have the weight to be adding it. So let's say that this mouse ways 0.4 now, maybe that's very heavy from mouths. I actually don't really know how much they wait. Let's assume that it 0.2 right and they have certain that manager. But I'm just gonna use to wait for now. So if I go ahead and update this and update this, we can see that we now have descriptions and this newly additional information here and also reviews. And remember, from the beginning, we only had the reviews. Now we have the description that we added, and we have the additional information's where we have put in the weight. We would also have the measurements had we added those in there. Okay, so let's scroll back down. Let's go back to shipping right here and let's move on. To linked products now for link products is going to be the possibility to do up cells and cross cells which are highly effective techniques in order to get more sales, and we're not going to go through that here. We're going to go through the later on in the course, But this is a very effective technique to really increase all of your sales pretty much. Then we're gonna move down to act tributes, and we're going to go through this as well later on in the course we have advanced. And now this is a purchase note and a purchase notice gonna be when they complete an order , it's gonna be a small section there. This is purchase note. And here you could be adding in anything like thank you from buying from us Will be sending out your delivery tomorrow. Or if you're using a digital product, for example, you could be putting in the download link in the purchase note for your customers in here, which is a very effective practice. Then we also have the menu order and the menu order is how you want the items to be arranged. So it's gonna be displaying the lowest numbers on top. So if I would write one for this than this would be placed in the top among all of your items came and then reviews, it won't enable them or not. Now, if I click this off? It goes without saying an update that by updating this s well, this review section down here is going to disappear. So you're not gonna be able to put any reviews your customers not gonna be able to put into reviews for your products. And generally, Social proof really, really helps you increase your sales. So I can strongly recommend that you use reviews. With that being said, some certain products that might be controversial, that might be highly need. For example, some people might love it. Others might not love it so much. They are some best practices for removing your reviews as well. But generally it's a very, very good idea to keep your reviews activated in in check like this. Okay, now scrolling down even further. We do have a product short description. So if I just go ahead and I add in a short description here, I'm just gonna pace one in that I have copied from elsewhere again. You really want to write these yourself and highlight the benefits of what you're selling. If I go ahead and I add in the short description in here, scroll up, click and update and updates here as well. You're going to see that the short description actually turns up right up here. Right? So this is really the chance to be selling the product to be explaining exactly what it is and why your customers are going to need it are are going to want it. So this is an amazing cell opportunity for the to use the short description for. So this is where the short description ends up in this section over here, and the long description is going to be ending up down here. Okay, so here, basically here, you wanna put in all of benefits, and here you might want to put in some more features, features being the practical things. Like the DP I of the mouse decides the weight off the mouse, the practicability off the mouth. And here you might want to add the benefits, for example, is great for gamers. Makes the experience much smoother, much more fun. It said Rex etcetera. So the benefits are much more emotional, and the features are much more practical. Okay, so we have added in a lot of stuff. We even have the sq here, but we still have it on categorized, right? So it's not putting in a category right now. So if we go ahead and we go back and go to the right, we have our product categories right here. So if I click on adding new, I might want to add in. For example, let's say we're doing a gaming section, I might add in gaming like that, and I pressed Enter. So here we have the gaming. That means that I can remove the on categorized like that. And let's say that I want to add in a subcategory to this. I would hadn't Mouse's, for example, and I would put that as a child category that's called at meaning that the game is going to be the parent categories. If I add this in right now, we can see that it gets underneath the gaming category. So the game and categories going to be the main and this the mouse is gonna be an extension off the game in category. It's a great way to keep the navigation so much easier on your website and in your shop now scrolling down. We also have the product tags that sex itself. We're going to be a little more in depth. So here, for example, we might want to write in things like seven D. I'm gonna do a coma to add in more ergonomic 2000 DP I etcetera, etcetera. And then I hit enter and all of these were going to be different tags. So if someone is searching for ergonomic, for example, this is gonna put up someone search for seven D is gonna pop up 2000 dp I than that is gonna pop up, Okay. And then, of course, we have our product image. Now, this is such an important part. You really need to make sure that you're using high quality images. Otherwise, people are going to be turned off now, images of one of the biggest selling points when ever your selling products, even if it is digital products. So we're gonna go ahead and click on set product image, and I have already taken the liberty to upload a couple of images and all of these images I'm gonna put in the resource is asked, Well, so you can play around with them and set up your own practice items. If you don't currently have your own to be setting up right now. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on this one. I set it up and you want to set your title properly, So if you have a certain name for it, you're gonna want to set it, okay? And then I'm gonna click on sit product image like that. So now if I scroll up and I click on update and then I update the shop itself, the product page, we get the image off the product itself. This is starting to look really, really good, isn't it? So I'm already loving this now again, if you're it is liking this. Don't worry about it. I'm just liking it. You're gonna take care of it in the next lecture, but I'm really, really loving this right now, so it looks so nice and so professional. Now, what you also might want to do is adding a gallery off your images. So, in their words, says they Prada gallery, you can click there, and you can add in multiple pictures like this This this, this and this. Right? So all you need to do if you're on a Mac, you hold down command and I believe if you're on a piece, you just hold down shift and you click the meaning. You want to give them sensible names, like instead of gaming mouse to you might want to say gaming mouse back, for example. And this one, you might write gaming, mouse Side like that. And also make sure to put these in the alternate takes like that because the alternate Texas also gonna be showing up in for the product itself. So we're gonna go ahead and add all of these to the gallery. Right now. I'm not gonna be adding in all of the all takes because this is a display. But for you, that's gonna be important, right? So I'm gonna click on, add to gallery and then click on updates and then go to our product page update this and we can see that we're getting a bunch of different images. Writers. If I click on it, we can see these showing up. And if I click on this enlargement glass here, you can see that the text that we wrote in the gaming mouse back it's being displayed in the very bottom here. Right? So this is why it's so important to set the title not only because it's going to be displayed here the title on the all text, but also for Seo purposes. But it is not being displayed when it comes to these pictures like this. Okay, so I am super happy about this. This is our simple products set up. And I think it looks really, really nice again. If you don't have your own product to set up right now, I'm gonna add all of these images that I'm using here in the resource is so you can play around in practice with this ass. Well, in the next lecture, we're gonna go ahead and talk about the sidebar, but you can do about it, remove it. And also in the next lecture from that, we're going to start setting up or variable products. So see, in the next lecture, guys 106. Remove the Sidebar: Alright, guys. So let's talk about the sidebar, right? So we have this sidebar right here and chances are we might not want to. Now there are many benefits with having a sidebar because it's gonna help you with navigation. But there's also many benefits to not having a sidebar because it allows more space for your products and even more importantly, for your product images. So this is all going to come down to the design that you choose to use. But me personally, I generally prefer to go without these sidebar itself. So currently on our shop, we are at our website. We have gone to show them we have just set this beautiful product up now. I also changed it to gaming mice, right? Because deplorable mouse isn't mouses mice, my bad. And now we have a couple of options off removing the sidebar here because there's one sidebar for this page. The shop page. If I click in on this product here, there is this sidebar for the product patient. There's also a sign bar for the cart page right here, and you can see this sideboards even to the right. For some reason now, the question is, where do you want if any of the sidebar to be so I'm gonna show you three different methods that you can be playing around with sidebars on. Now, the first thing that you can go ahead and do is in the shop and the product page itself. And that is to actually remove these cyber for only the product pace. Because even if you are utilising a sidebar for navigation and for simplicity sake because there are many benefits to it, you might not want to have decide by when you're displaying the product because it's going to look so much cleaner when you're not having the cyber and the product image description , everything gets to take up much more space. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do here. It's just click on customized up here and then in here you're gonna notice it to the left. We have something called Wu Comer to the left has been added in, So I'm gonna click there, and then I'm gonna go to single product here and here. We get to change the layout off the sidebar, right? We have it to the left right now. We could also click here to change the layout to the right. But more importantly, we could go ahead and use a full with like this. Meaning is going to be 100% full with taking up all off these space. So this is generally what I recommend for the product page itself. Even though you prefer to have a sidebar because you get to display the product, you get to talk much more about the benefits of the products and nicer display overall, in my opinion, again, it's personal based on this sign. So I'm gonna go ahead and click on Publish for this one. All right, So I'm really liking this. There is a lot more space here to be playing around with right now, so I really like this. This is taking up a lot more space looking really nice. Now, if you don't like this very full with going all the way to decide, you still wanna have more of the box to sign what you can go ahead and do is go back to customize and go to newcomers and go to single product again and then use the 100% full with writing because the 100% full with is still going to box in the ICT is going to give a boxing for the description to this side and to the image site. So now if I go ahead and click on Publish So now we have removed the side bar to the left here on the product page. That means that if I go to shop, for example, we still have the sidebar here. So there are two ways to go from here. One, you could remove all of the sidebars from the entire page. That means that the card page the product pasted would just wear it. And even the blawg page are going to have the sidebar removed. So the question is, what do you do if you still want to have the sidebar on the block page, but not on these shop pages? What? You can go ahead and do you? If you're using the Ocean WP theme is, go ahead and go to the back end of your website. We're gonna go to dashboard here and then we're gonna scroll down and go to pages, click on all pages and from here you can decide to go in manually to car to check out to my account to the shop, etcetera. So all I would need to do for this page it is Just go ahead and click on them. And then here with this content layout, we're just gonna change the default to go with full with like that and then I'm going to click on updates. So now if I go back and I go to visit sites and then we go into shop, it's going to have the sidebar removes is going to give us the possibility to displaying our product much wider, much more beautifully with our images. And this is the design that I prefer. Now, if you want to go ahead and remove all of the sidebars on the entire website or if you just simply don't use Ocean WP, you can go ahead and go to the dashboard and then scroll down until you get to your appearance. Then we're gonna go to widgets and from here, you see that we have the default sidebar. Now all you need to do is open these up one by one, scroll down and click on delete. Delete this one. This one this one, This one, this one. And when all of them are deleted when the default sidebar here is completely empty widgets , there will be no sidebar any more. So that's the three different ways that you can be handling the sidebar, depending on if you only want to remove it for the product page. If you only want to remove it for the shop or if you want to remove it altogether throughout your entire website. Okay, Now what? I'm gonna go ahead and do. It's actually keep the sidebar for the blogged for now and remove it manually from the pages through Ocean WP for the shop pages. All right, so I'm gonna go ahead and do that, and then we're gonna move on to the next lecture and set up our variable products. So see, in the next likes you guys 107. Create a Variable Product: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to create a variable product and add that to our shop. Now, a variable product is a product is gonna have multiple variables. For example, it might be a T shirt that has multiple sizes. Now, those air multiple variables, right? It could be a T shirt that has multiple colors. That's another variable. But we're gonna go ahead and add a product that has multiple variables to it. So let's go ahead and get started. All right. So here we are at our website writes, the thing is looking really neat. We have are a shop here. We have the car tear. Everything is looking really good and cool. And we know by now that in order to write a new product would go to the back and offer website dashboard the product and add new. But we could also take the short cut here and just go to new and then go down to word says products. So this is really the shortcut to be creating a new product like this when you are at the front end off your website. All right, so here we are, and for this example, we're gonna go ahead and add in a dog color or rather, dog colors, because they will becoming in a multitude off sizes on colors. Okay, so for the product name, I'm just going to write Ah, flashing dog collar like that. Okay. And like you showed, you're gonna want to add in a description here and everything, but we're gonna look at the more interesting aspect the different aspect right now, which is going to be at the changes off the settings when we go from simple product to a variable products. If you have a look on the left right now, you're going to see them. When I click on variable, we get some different attributes and we get some different settings to be setting up. So the first thing we have in our inventory is that we can write in s key you if you want to manage stock or if it's gonna be sold individually. So we're not gonna touch those for now and we're not gonna move into shipping or linked products is gonna be for a later lecture. We're gonna go down two attributes, however, because the attributes is going to be the different values. So what do I mean with different values? Let me show you. Now, the first thing you have here, there's this custom product attributes. So we're gonna go ahead and click on add. All right, so this is where you add in the attributes in a different value. So, for example, the first attribute that we're going to be adding in for these dog color product is going to be the color. Okay, so I'm just going to write color like that because that's going to be the attributes. And then we get to add in the values to different colors that is going to be available, and for this example, we're gonna use two different colors, is gonna be read, and it's gonna be green. And when you are adding different values, you're gonna want to put a wall or a pipe in between them as it's called. And it looks like this, let's say that we started with red, Okay, Then I'm gonna hit space, and then I'm gonna hit option. And seventh, if I click on Option and seven on the on a Mac computer, that's going to create this so called wall also known as a pipe. Looks like this. And then I'm gonna write green. Okay, so the different values are separated by this pipes. I write green, make a space, make this wall or pipe space, and then the next value. Now, if you are on a PC, you're using windows. I do believe that this but, um, that is right next to said on the keyboard, this button, I think you click control Ault, and then click down this bottom and you're gonna be able to make a pipe. But for simplicity's sake, in the resource is I will have added in this document and all it contains is this science. You can just go ahead and select it. You can cope it, we can go down, and then you can just paste this one in like that, and then you're gonna have the wall. It's gonna work perfectly. OK, that's all you're gonna need to do. So this is how we separate the values with the wall. So this is gonna be the first attributes. It's gonna be caller, and we're gonna use thesis variations, right? It's a varied product. So before I go ahead and say this I'm actually going to click on add custom product attributes again because it's not only the different colors you wanna add in as a variation , but also sizes. Okay, So for this one, I'm gonna write size, and here we're gonna adding some different sizes. Now, the different attributes could be anything it could be. For example, if you're selling beds or mattresses could be soft or hard, it could be thick or thing. I mean, the at the attributes and the values were completely up to you to add Ian off course, depending on the product. So in here, I'm gonna write small. I'm gonna create this wall on medium, and then they would go and then create this wall and large. Now, you could also ride it like this. Should do you want to again? This is completely up to you. You could write s at this m at the scene ill because these are gonna be the different values for them to be selecting an SML or small, medium large. These air universal coats either way is going to work. And then we're gonna check, use for variations and then click on save attributes. Okay, so the attributes are saved by now, but they're not yet used as variations. In order to actually add them as a variation for this product, we need to go ahead and go to variations here. And then we're going to click on add variation and we're going to click on create variations from all attributes. Right. So this is gonna be creating the different variations possible, and you're able to create 50 different variations at a time. Right? And in our case, we're actually going to be creating six because we have three different sizes, right? And we have two different colors. That's three times two is gonna equal six variations. So I'm going to click on go here and then yes, against the max 50 per gram. That's okay, were well below that. And here we have it. Six variations added and you click on close. OK, so here we are. Okay. These are all the different variations. So we have three different read is the small medium large, and then we have three different green ones that small, medium large as well. So in total six different variations now, in order for us to start playing around with them the first thing we can do is click on, expand here to the right that's gonna expand all of them, and we're going to be wanting to add in the product pictures. Okay, so the 1st 1 we know it's a red one is too small. So I'm gonna click on upload image, and I've already taken deliberately to upload of images and then I'm going to click on the red one and then I'm gonna click on set variation image now for the different sizes. We don't need different images, but we do need different images for the different colors. Oh, and by the way, these images will be in the resource is See, you can also play around with this if you don't have your own variable product to be playing around with. So I'm gonna add in. These is gonna be another Red is I'm gonna add this one in scroll down. This another red gonna add this one in. Now when we scroll down, we have the first green One is the small one. Okay, so I'm just gonna add this warning and all I need to do is add in the same image because it doesn't matter with the size. So there we go. All of the images are added in just like that. Now, before we actually go ahead and update this and check it out, we're gonna want to go to the right and add a product image as well is going to be displaying on the product page. So I'm gonna click on set product image. And for this, I'm going to be using the red one. Okay, So set product image and then for product gallery. I'm just gonna add in the variation off the green one and quick to add to gather it. Okay, I'm going to scroll up and click on Publish perfects, and now it is published. And now, when we published this product, we also get the option appear that says view products. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is right click an open link in New tab because if I click on, it is going to change this one. And I want to have two tabs for this. So this is how it looks like right now. Okay. Now it says the product is currently out of stock and on available, and that is because we haven't actually putting the SK you number. So because there are variables and there are no s key you number, the system doesn't recognize them as individuals. So what we're gonna have to do right now is to give them different sk you numbers. Remember, we spoke about that earlier. This is for your internal logistics, but they are super important, especially when we are using variations. So we're going to go back here, and then we're going to scroll down and we're gonna go to variations right here and now we're going to click on expand, and we're going to give them all a different SK you. So this is a color. So I'm going to write cll here as just gonna be an observation for color. And I'm not gonna use the oh like c o or C O. L. Because the O can easily be mistaken for a number, though if you always keep the rule that first you have, for example, letters and the numbers this isn't gonna be a mistake is gonna happen easily. But for simplicity's sake, I'm going to do this and then I'm going to start with the one I always start with the one. I never start with a cereal because it gets confusing. Which one is zero? So how they calculate the total amount of products, etcetera, etcetera. So I'm gonna write 1000 and one. Okay, that's gonna be the first sq number for the red Small. Now, what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna cook big these ones, except the last one. And the reason for that is because now when I have cooked with this, I can scroll down to the next one in here I can paste it in. And then I can just right, too. And I can do that again. I can paste it in, right. Three can do that again. I can write for now. You don't need a different to change any number letter. Anything up is the same product. Just different variations. Or just give them a different number through that simple of five, and then finally down here and gonna pace that in so sorry and then Right, Six. Right. So we have five there. Six, they're perfect. So that's all now, before we kill, it can't save changes. There's one more thing I want to do and that it's actually to set a price for all of these . Now, off course. As you can see, they're all open. We can set individual prices. But what I'm gonna go ahead and do is click here with his add variation and I'm going to go down to word says set regular prices. And then I'm gonna go ahead and click on Go. So here I get to enter regular prices for all of the product. I'm not going to use a saline just gonna adding a regular price. So let's say 17 99 for this one. I click OK, and then, like like Okay, so now this is gonna set 17 99 for all off the products for all of these variations. So there we go. Now, I'm gonna go ahead and click on updates. And now I'm gonna go back to the website here, and I'm just gonna update this page. And as you can see, it's now possible to be buying this. Okay, so we have a couple of options. If you wanna have a red or green right, that's gonna be the cooler. And then we also have this size. If you wanna have a small medium or large. So let's say you wanna have a large right. But let's say that you don't want to go with a red one. You want to go with the green one, so you just go ahead and click on green, and it's gonna change the picture, which is extremely handy. So depending on which caller you're choosing, that's going to change up the picture. But changing the size is gonna change the picture because you don't need different pictures for different sizes. But you could if you wanted to, like we were just looking at, okay. And then you're able to add in as many as you want. Let's say, did you want 10? You click on add to cart, you go ahead and check out the card is gonna be 100 79 $19. Okay, so let's just remove those. So we know that everything here is working right now we have the s key you number, but we don't have a category yet, so we're gonna want to go ahead and add that one in. So let's go back here. We're gonna go down is currently an uncanny arise, and you don't wanna have anything called M categorized. So I'm gonna add any new one. Let's call this pits, right. I'm gonna add that in s a new category was gonna be pits, and then I'm gonna write dog collars like that and Pits is going to be the parent category , and I'm gonna click on add new category. So there we go. Now, I can go ahead and click on update, and this is gonna be updated with the new category. And as we can see, the categories has now changed to dog collars and pits, right? And we have the additional information down here and the possible reviews that you can be adding in as well. So this is how you create the variable products. And just like before, you're gonna want to add in a nice description, you're gonna want to go all the way down and adding a nice product, short description as well, and then set your product tags and then you're all ready to go. Now the final thing I want to show you that might be obvious already, but I just want to be extra clear on this. Is that if you go to variations and you expand all of these, you can go into any one of these and just do micromanagement. So let's say that the green one, the green large one. We want this one to be a little bit more expensive than the others. So let's set this one too. 1999 just like this. Then we could go ahead and do that, go all the way up and click on updates. Update this page as well. And now you'll notice that we have all of the different price points on the top right here . So how much do the flashing dog color codes will Anything between 17 99 and 1999 you're gonna know what it is. This one is 17 99. But if I go to the large, one is going to be 1999. So all of these variations, you're able to manage them manually. And because we aren't managing our stock manually, remember managing stock. It's gonna be a variation expand. And then we have managed talk. Then you're gonna be able to sit in how many there's gonna be like, there's 10 left. There's 15 left, etcetera. But because we are in managing, stuck there, just able to, you know, adding whatever quantity they want and just order it, which is perfect if you're doing something like drop shipping. And if you don't know what drop shipping is this basically, when you are the middle hand, so you find a customer that buy something from you store, but you are not actually stalking. The product is going to be directly ordered from a warehouse or from another seller, and you will be the middle hand. So then it might be a good idea to not manage your own stuff because you aren't managing your own stock. Okay, so this is how you add in a variable product. And now we're gonna move on to the next lecture where we're gonna learn how to sell a service product. So, seeing the next lecture, guys 108. 108: All right, my friends, in these lecture, we're gonna go ahead and learn how to create a service product and then add that to our shop. So let's get started. So here we are at a beautiful shop. We're just gonna head straight up here with says new and then go down to create a new product. So for this example, we're going to be offering a coaching service, a 60 minute coaching service. So for the product name, I'm going to write coaching 60 men like that, Okay. And then we're going to want to have a description in here as well. But you guys already know how to write a description, right? And, by the way, when it comes to selling a service doesn't have to be coaching. It could be anything it could be. For example, it's Skype called to show someone on screen how to do a certain thing. It could be offering a certain service for maybe doing analytics for someone it could be offering to improve someone's health through life, coaching us well, etcetera, etcetera, as service could be any service that you are providing. So let's move on down now for the product data. The first thing we're gonna learn is how to create a simple product. Now, one of the beauties off selling a service or a downloadable product is that there's no shipping. Right? So when I click on virtual right here, we're going to see the shipping section disappears. I'm gonna click on this booth is gonna be gone, and now we're gonna go ahead and set a price. So let's say that for this 60 minute session, the price is gonna be something like, you know, let's do $199. But it's on sale for 149. 99 something like that. And then we're gonna move down to inventory, and we're gonna want to write in the sq. So let's write C 11 like that. And just as another pointer, if you are too worried about writing the correct sq number, don't be. You're overthinking is just such a good idea to actually be writing the s key you. Now, a lot of people prefer to juice, right? You know, one series 01 and then add to one seriously or 21 seriously or three for each product that they add in. You're not gonna get this wrong. Do it whichever way you would like to. Okay, as long as you write two sq, it's such a good idea and then going down, we have managed stock. Now one of the beauties off having a off selling his service or a digital product is that you don't need to worry about stock, right? They don't go out. That's the beauty off any digital products or services. Now, of course, your schedule might be full, but we're gonna talk about that in a little bit. For now, we know that there's no stock. There's no limit to what we're selling. You're never gonna run out of stock for your service or for your digital product, for example, and then stock status. We're gonna keep in stock, and we're gonna talk about selling it individually in a little bit. So linked products and attributes were not going to go through right now. Finally, we have advanced and we could adding a purchase note that's gonna show up when they have completed the order. We could also change the order off the item, but we're not going to go through that and we're gonna leave reviews on. Okay, So what we want to do now is set a product image right here. So I have already taken the liberty to actually adding in a image. And when you're offering some sort off service, it might be a good idea, depending on the service off course. But if it's like coaching or something personal like that, you might want to add in a picture off yourself. Now, for this example, we're actually using it. Picture off me and Jess Bird, that someone I drew, it's a cartoon. So we're gonna use this one. Just as for this example, and then we're also gonna want to set the product categories, so we're going to click on add new category and we're gonna write services and then click on add new category. Now, when it comes to the other categories, like gaming, we might want to sell more things within gaming. So right now we have one for mice. Now we might want to sell, for example, gaming, keyboard, gaming, headset, gaming screens, etcetera. So it would be a great idea to have more under categories for gaming and same with pets. Right now we're selling dog colors. Maybe you want to sell, you know, cat colors. Maybe you want to sell lizard toys. You know, Sky's the limit in this pretty much. But for service says, we're pretty much is going to be selling services, so we don't need to have an under category for this one. We're just gonna keep this a cold parent category and not create a child category. So what, we're gonna go ahead and do now is click on Publish. And then we're gonna go to the upper corner here with this view product, and we're gonna open this in a new tab. All right, so here we have our product, right? So it's coaching 60 minutes. There's the picture here. It's currently on sale for 149 99 which is great. Now, here's one thing I really recommend to all of her student when it comes to selling services that's gonna take up your time. That is that right now people are able to add as many of these as they wants. If if someone has in 20 does, then thereby in 20 hours of your time. And that's really great, right? There's a lot off. That's good business. There's a lot of money in for you now. The problem with this is that when business blossoms too much, if you understand me, then there's not gonna be time in your schedule, and it's going to be outside of your control and there's gonna be unhappy customers. So what I recommend that you do is that you actually set a limit so that the first session is going to be set to just being able to buy one. Then you and that customer can set up additional times together because that's gonna be able to fit into your schedule. And when your schedule dust Blust someone you have just you know too much. You need to increase the price right and make space and make it a more high end product because obviously it's very much in demand. So the way to do this is to go back, go to inventory and then click on this one. Words is sold individually. Okay, so now if I click this one in and then I scroll up in, click on updates and then update this one, we can see that there's no ability to add in quantities. So if I add this one to cart right now, then I'm gonna have won in court. But if I tried to click on add two cars one more time, I'm gonna get on air like this. You cannot add another coaching 60 minutes to your car. So there's this one is currently limited to just one by right. We're gonna go ahead and remove this one. So this is a really great way to keeping on eye on your schedule when you're offering a service. Now, if you're offering a downloadable product, obviously you don't need to do this. And also, when you're doing this, this is not going to be limiting the other products that you are selling Onley gonna be for this product. So another thing that we can also do is make this into a variable product, right? So if we go down and we change this from simple proud of right now and we turn it into a variable product, we're gonna be able to offer different times. So, for example, right now we're offering 60 minutes. But if we just call this one for coaching, we're gonna be able to sit up variables for Maybe, you know, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 1920 minutes so that they can choose themselves. So you probably notice right now that the virtual option disappeared. Don't were about that is gonna pop up again very soon, so we don't have to worry about the shipping part here. So we're gonna go down two attributes and we're going to click on add. So the attribute is going to be length. Okay, You're going to be used for variation. And here we're gonna decide on the links that we want to be offering. So let's say they were gonna do 30 minutes and then let's make a pipe 60 minutes, make a pipe, 90 minutes pipe, and 120 minutes for the truly dedicated students, right? And now we're gonna click on save attributes, and then we're gonna go down to variations, and here we're gonna change to create variations from all attributes. So we're gonna go ahead and click on Go and remember, we can do Max 50 but right now we're on. Lee added in force were well below that limit. Okay, so four variations have been added, so this is perfect and we have done this before. Right now, the differences because we're selling his service. If I could care and expand them all but we're gonna want to do here is turned all of these into virtual right? So they hold shipping and wait, It's going to be disappearing just like that. So we're gonna turn all of these into virtual products just like that, they will go and then we're gonna sit the rest up. So let's say that for 30 minutes we're going to do something like, you know, let's say that it's 100 and $50 we're gonna have this esque EU see 102 rights and it's not gonna be on sale is gonna be on stock, and we're not gonna add in in a specific description, even though we can. So 30 minutes we could write a perfect introduction to learn about the next steps in your digital marketing and business. For example, scrolling down. We have the 60 minutes that's gonna be well, you guessed it. See 103 just like that. And the price that we were speaking about is gonna be 200. But this one is actually forced sale 149 99. The description could be the recommended time to improve your business and digits. All market saying, Let's do business with a big be here as well so you could add in descriptions for each product. Now we're gonna go down some 90 minutes. Let's do this. One for $250 right? Ski 104 That's correct. Yes. And then, finally, this is gonna be a little G between 99 99 105 and then we're going to click on save changes . So then we scroll up in weekly update, and then we're gonna update this page as well. So here we are now, please choose a product option, and we have our different times that we can choose Weaken, do the 30 minutes we can see. That's $150 right? We can do the 60 minutes, which currently put down from 200 to 149 99. You can also see that the text pops up for each option that I choose the recommended trying to improve your business in digital marketing while if I go to 30 there's a different Texas . That's gonna be for the description. Okay? And then we have the additional information and the reviews. So this is how you do variables for offering certain services and noticed that they can't add a quantity to cart here either. Now, one thing that I can recommend is that you see, we have the police choose product options, right, Because it's gonna be default on shoes on option just like this. If you want to change that default, all you need to do is go back to where we are variations. And then we have the default form values appear. So let's set it to 60 just like that. And then we're gonna click on updates and update this page. So now when we get in here, the length is going to be automatically set to 60 minutes. Asked the default. And this is a really good idea because a lot of people forget that you actually have different options here, and even more so, if there's a recommendation like 60 minute might be a really good introduction, you can set that one asset default and get that and then you just click on add to cart for your customers. Then they're gonna have your product just like that, Right? And they're not gonna be able to add in anymore. So this is how you set the default value. And this is how you create a service product for your shop. So really good job, guys. Now, I just want to tell you also don't forget, especially if you're doing a simple product. Don't forget the product. Short description. Don't forget to add in your product tags as well. So just keep an eye on this and get everything right while you're going. And we're going to be going through the additional information here. Asked. We go. So we're gonna do it one step at a time. If you're wondering. Well, how does the shipping work? You know, what are the other options Gonna go through them, so just follow along, start to understand the system. And now we move on to the next lecture. See? There 109. Create a Digital Product: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to create and sell a digital product. So let's jump straight into it. So here we are at our shop, we're gonna go ahead and go off to new and click on product. And a digital product can really be anything. It could be an e book. What could be selling one of four courses we could be selling? Maybe a template we could be selling. Well, basically anything that iss a e product, you know, a game, An MP three file. You know, the sky's the limit, but for this example, we're going to be selling on E book, and we're gonna call it E Boo. Mr Adachi Book Monster, Digital marketing like that. Okay. And then we're gonna scroll down, and now we're gonna go ahead and click in the downloadable section. Writers that's gonna pop up a couple of extra options now realize that just because the product is downloadable doesn't necessarily mean that it's purely virtual. So, for example, you could be selling a certain product, maybe a book. But you're also handing out an e book version off that book. So they're going to beginning a physical copy but also a backup it. So then that product would be doubt both virtual and physical, in other words, downloadable and also sent physically, meaning you would need to do some shipping. But in this case, because it is an e book is going to be completely virtual. We're going to click there and remove the shipping part. So let's say that for this product, the product is going to be, you know, 14. 99. We're not going to set a sale for this one and then four downloadable files. All I need to do is go ahead and click on add file and then the file name Master Digital Marketing E Book there ago. And now we have two different options in here. Either we could go ahead and add in a u R L writes. So if you're using maybe on up loading service like upload of Iot or some other uploading services, you could be linking to their. Or maybe you're linking directly to you know your Google drive or however you choose to solve it. Or you can go ahead and click on choose file, and then you're gonna choose it from your media libraries. I'm gonna click, go to upload files in click on select File And here is the E Books. All I'm gonna do is double click on it, and then I'm gonna click on insert file. You are. L like that. So this creates a filed your L to your own website because it's coming from your media library, Right? So you're hosting this yourself, And if you're selling something like an e book in or maybe MP three files, you know, your own song, someone else's songs, whichever, then this is not gonna be a problem, because that's not gonna take so much space. But if you are selling a big course, for example, that might be many, many, many gigabytes. You're probably going to want to use it uploading service, okay, or maybe have them downloaded from your Google drive, for example. But that's an up loading service in itself. So we have chosen our file like that. Then we have two options here we have the download limits and we have the download expiring now for the download limit. I don't recommend that you actually set a limit because chances are that some people are gonna want to download it multiple time, for whatever reason, and if they are not able to download it again, they're gonna go ahead and e mail you and ask for a new link. And that's just a waste of your time to be honest. Similarly, with the download expiring, if someone's link expires and they want to download it again, chances are they're gonna come to you and ask you for a new link. And that's just a waste of your or one of your employees this time. Now, if you're going to use one of these, I recommended download expiring more than a download limit. But if you're worried about piracy than honestly, you know, as soon as someone buys your digital product, you are a to risk for piracy. And that's just the reality of digital product. But that does not take away from how amazing it is to have an unlimited amount that you can sell. This never, ever runs out of stock. We use it for our courses, and it's an amazing way to do business so all of this is set up as usual. You want to set up your SK you so we're going to call this, for example, E 101 like that. We're not going to go through the others. Wanna have a short product description? Learn how to master digital marketing with this brand new e book, something like that. And then we're gonna set a product image like this, and then we're just gonna go ahead and cope with this title and put it to the other sections as well. And then set product image Scroll up. We're also gonna set it into a category, right? So right now, it's not in any category whatsoever, and we might want to add in a new category. So we're gonna go ahead and click on add new category, and we're gonna write something like digital products and then click on add new category. It's gonna be set there, and now we're just gonna go ahead and publish this. So let's move over to view product, right? Collect their an open link in new tab. And here is our product. Now, this isn't a real product right now. This is just something that I grabbed from picks. Obey for this example Now, a lot of you might be wondering why we're using a physical book in order to sell on e product. That's because when you're displaying a physical book, it gives a nicer feeling for the customers. So whatever product that you're selling, whatever cover that you're using, you can go to Fiverr dot com. Pay someone $5 they will make it into on a physical book version. Off your e book is just gonna be a much nicer display to have it like this, then just having a flat picture, for example, like we have a flat picture for a coaching. We could also be having that as a product display just because it gives a nice or feeling. But this is how simple it is to add in a digital product. Not one thing that you might want to consider is that, for example, right now, you can add multiple to cart like this. You might want to go down, go to in mentor and enable Onley one, because the truth is that when they download it, they can multiply it as much as they want. But, you know, for ethical reasons, some people are gonna want to give this away, and ethically, they want a supporting and what you do so they might actually buy multiple, just to support what you do right. But in my experience, that's quite where most people are gonna download it, copay and share it. And that's just the nature of digital products. So I'm gonna leave it completely up to you if you leave it for multiple quantity or just a one click download. I actually prefer to leave it like this, you know, just to keep it open. So this is how you create the digital products. Super easy. Super Simple Again. Don't forget about the product description, the long ones and using the product tax. Now let's move on to the next lecture. 110. Create an Affiliate Product: All right, my friends, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to create an affiliate product and add that into our shop. Let's get started. All right. So you know the drill. We're gonna go up here to New we're going to click on a product, and we could call this something like premium hosting. So for this example, we're gonna use an affiliate link for Blue Host as an example. Now, off course, the affiliate could be to anything. So if you're having a specific website for a product of for a service, it's gonna make a lot of sense to perhaps have an affiliate link towards that product or service as well. So if you are a Web designer, perhaps you want to use it on a feeling maybe two elementary, if you're using that, its head etcetera. So for this, we're gonna use premium hosting called that name the product to that, and we're going to be using Blue host. So, as usual, you're gonna want to add in a description on everything, but let's go down to the interesting settings. So that's gonna be we're gonna change this to external slash affiliate product just like this And the first thing that we're gonna want to do is add in the product. You are l Now that's gonna be your affiliate link. OK, so for us here, we're already logged into our affiliate account on Blue Host, and we're gonna just go ahead and grab this affiliate link that we have right here. Okay, so I'm gonna go ahead and I'm gonna copy this link like this, and then I'm gonna go in here, and I'm just gonna paste it in. It's really that simple. And then you get to change the text off the bottom. So maybe you want to say something like, get it's now or try it now or you could even right, learn more. I mean, you could write anything about this, but as soon as they click on it, they will be going through your affiliate link. Right? Meaning you get a discount if they buy something, and then we get to set the regular price and don't make something up here. I mean, makes sense off this price. So, for example, if it's to 75 a month or if it's a total off, let's say I'm just gonna make something up here. I'm just going to say it's It's $90 for this example and you write $90 in here. And, as usual, you want to go ahead and add in new categories. So we're going to call this, for example, hosting we could be calling it. If we're going to be adding additional like that, and then go ahead and click on Add New category. I'm going to be checking that category. And then I strongly recommended, either in the short description or in the long description that you use a disclaimer and tell them, Hey, this is an affiliate link. In other words, if you buy something from this affiliate link, I get compensated for it Right doesn't come from your pocket, but it comes from the company's pocket. Because I am recommending this. This is just such a great way to build openness and trust with your visitors and customers . So I always, when it comes to affiliate links, recommend that you add in a disclaimer, either in the short description or in the long description that's completely up to you, probably want added in the long, because you're gonna have more sensible things more interesting things to say here in the short description. Okay. And then where we go to things such as inventory, you're still gonna want to give it on SK you number. So let's call it B. L you want a one? Something like that. And then it advance. You're just gonna have the menu order and enabled reviews to pick from Its gonna be completely up to you. We're gonna go ahead and set a product image, and we're gonna go ahead and pick the blue host image and just gonna change this name so that the title makes more sense in this case. And we're just going to call it Blue Host hosting right. Then we're gonna add it in like this and then set product image. So now if I go ahead and I click on publish, go up to view product open in new tab, we can see that here is our products. So right now, we don't have in a description or anything right now, but if I go ahead and I could come, for example, learn more, we're going to be taken to their website right here. You can go ahead and click on get started you can go ahead and click on their cedar. Different hosting Zehr, different offers, etcetera, etcetera. But if you check out the link, you can see that the U. T. M on the line source is from Robin and jesper dot com, and the medium is affiliate. So they are from the fillets link right now. So would we be buying something from this? Then we would be getting a discount or we can't buy something on our own affiliate link. That's very legal. But if this was someone else doing this, we would beginning a discount from their purchase. So this is how simple it is to adding affiliate products to your shop. Now you can decide if you want to do that manually, for example, with L. A mentor. Or if you want to use Woo Coomer's Either way works and they work really, really good. All right, guys. See in the next lecture 111. Create a Grouped Product: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to create grouped products. Now, a group product is when we have a single product page with several options to add on for that product, I'm going to show you exactly what I mean with this. Let's get started. All right. So here we are at our shop. You know the drill. We're gonna go ahead and go up to new here, we're gonna go to new product, and now we're going to be adding in our product. So for this example, I will be using on external hard drive as an option. And what I'm gonna do with this being a group product is that I'm going to allow them to add in one off three different sizes or two off those three different sizes or five or 10 etcetera. But what I want is a single product page with the three different options that they can decide the quantity and then just simply click on add to cart, right? So if you're selling something to company, for example, is gonna be an excellent way to sell a lot off the same product, but maybe in different sizes. So let me show you more practically how this works. So we have external hard drive here. That's gonna be the name off the product itself. We can have a long description. We're not going to go through that. And then here, I'm gonna set this to grouped product. Just like that. We're going to give it on sq. I'm going to write aged HD 101 just like that. And this is where we start using these kind of interesting functions such as linked products. That's what will be using here, but not right now in a second. And then there's nothing more we need to do right here. We could go down, give it a short description, choose your hard drives, for example. Choose your hard drives. Came simple in clean, right. And then we add in in our product categories. I don't think any of these fits right now, so let's create a new one. Let's call this hard where they would go at new category and then we could give it a product taxes center. But we're not going to do that for now. We're gonna, however, give it a product image. So here it is, right to external hard drive. I'm just gonna click on set product image just like that. And now I'm going to scroll up and I'm going to click on Publish. So now if I go ahead and I click on view product and I'm gonna do it in a new tab, we can see that we have our external hard drive here, right? But we have no price. We have no option. We have basically nothing for this. And this is pretty much the point, because what we're gonna do now, which is what makes this a group product, is that we're gonna create three separate products, three separate external hard drives with different sizes on them. And those three are going to be showing up on this single product page so you can decide how many you want off each of those. So let's go ahead and get started with that. So the first thing we can do is that we can just cope with this name, right? We can just go ahead and click on Cope external hard drive. Then we go up to new and then we go to product. So then we can write, for example, one terabyte, and then I just right click and I paste this in. So this is gonna be one terabyte, external hard drive. Okay, that's gonna be the first. We also want to scroll down, and we want to set a price. Let's say that this is $50 right? And we're gonna want to set the product image because this product image is going to show up when they are added to cart, even though we only have a single product page. So we're just gonna go ahead and use the same product? Immature, just like that. And before we published, this is the important part. We're going to go over here to catalog visibility, and we're going to change this to hidden. And the reason we're doing this is because we don't want this to be showing up as an option in our shop, right? This might be confusing now, but I'm gonna show you exactly why we don't want it to show up in our shop. So just follow along hand. Then I'm gonna show you practically why we don't want that. So everything is setting. I'm gonna click on publish. That's the 1st 1 Then we go up. I'm gonna create two more. I'm gonna go to new product, and I'm gonna have this one before terabyte. And then I'm just gonna paste this in four terabytes. External hard drive, just like that and we can go in. Let's say that this season, $150 right? And then we're gonna set the same product image just like that said product image. Then we're gonna move up to catalog visibility. We're going to click on Hidden, okay, and then publish. And now let's do our final. We're gonna go ahead and click on new. We're gonna go to product. Let's say that this one is 10 terabyte. We're gonna pace this one in. We're gonna set. Let's say the price is $300 for this one. We're gonna set the product image. There we go. Said product image. Now, there's no need to be setting your product categories here. And the reason for that is because these aren't going to be showing up in the search or in the shop. I'm gonna show you what I mean, practically in just a second. And then we go ahead and we go to catalog disability click on Hidden. Okay. And now we're gonna publish this. All right, guys. So right now what we have if we go ahead and we go to the shop is that we go back here to the front off our shop and we go to shop itself. So what we have is that we have the external hard drive right here, OK? And if I click on it, we don't have the prices yet. This is where our three options comes in. So we're gonna have these three options with these three different price points coming up on this external hard drive. But because we want to keep them all in here, that's the reason we don't need to put them in any category because they will never be visible here. This is why we have hidden them from the search from the shop because we want all of those options to be connected in this external hard drive in here. So let's go ahead and do that connection, and this is really where the magic happens. We're gonna go back to the back end, offer websites we're going to click on all products, and now we're going to go back to our external hard drive were just going to click on that one, and we're going to scroll down, right? We're gonna go to are linked products, and this is where we group them. Okay, so the 1st 1 is gonna be that one with one terabytes. So I'm just gonna write that in, and here we haven't one terabyte, external hard drives. I'm gonna add that. Then we had four terabytes, and I'm gonna add that. Then we have 10 terabytes, and I'm gonna go ahead and add that one in s. Well, now, if you want to change, the order is just simple. Dragon Drop like this. But here we go. These are D group products. This is what is known as linking different products. We're gonna go ahead and click on updates. And now let's go ahead and update this one as well. And here we go. So this is what I mean with adding in the three different sizes to three different options in a single product page. So what we have here right now is on the option to buy an external hard drive. You click on that product and you get to decide the different sizes. Right here we have a one terabyte external hard drive, four terabyte and 10 terabyte. So what you could do, For example, let's say that a company comes to your website or a private person, whoever and they want, You know, when I have three of these wanna have two of those, and so we're gonna be needing a lot of space. So we're actually gonna have five of these, right? And then they just click on add to cart and all of this in total, 10 will be added to the cart. Ride a pair. That's a nice I'm right. So this is what's known as grouping products. So if we go back to shop here, we don't want to have the one terabyte before terabyte and the 10 terabyte as separate products. We want them all to be grouped into one single product in her shop, which is right here. As you can see, we have the external hard drive, will have the price 50 to $300 I click in. And here are the different options, right. Amazing way. And also, if you're selling, for example, a laptop and you're gonna have the different options. You can decide on the size of the Ram. You can decide on the CPU, maybe the storage, the size of this storage, the hard drive, etcetera. You could have a computer, make that into one big group product and then just have a different a bunch of choices where they can add in and customize their own computer. For example, this can be done with any products, a super handy way off, selling more right. And also, if we go in here and we go to our cart, I'm just gonna click here. Then we can see that they all have images, right? And these are the featured images that we were adding for these product pages separately. So if we hadn't added an image for the, for example, one terabyte, four terabytes, then there would be no image. And had we added different images, there would be different images showing up on this one. For a group, product like this off course is strongly recommended, used to same image. But if you're doing, for example, you want to sell a customized computer, a customized laptop and you're adding Ingraham, for example, you're adding in hard drives You probably want to use different images for those when they're showing up in the cart. Alright, guys. So this is how you add in grooved products. Let's move on in the course. 112. Customize Shop Page: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to customise our shop page. Right? So this is the show page that we have right it with all of our wonderful products that we have added. Now, there's a couple of fun things that we can do here already. Now, if we look at the display off the products these air currently placed in what's called a grid view, meaning their place, like a grid like this will have three here we have three here. We could also change that to at least we can see here that this is the great view we can change it to. A list view is going to be looking like this A list. Now there are more fun things we can do here. We can also sort them the way that we want to, for example, by popularity by average rating, etcetera, etcetera. And we can also have them in Mawr pages. Off course, meaning you're gonna have to have more products for this to be relevant. But as you can see, we currently have a certain amount of products their right to have three products in each agreed and also someone has decided that we're gonna have 12 products per page here. Now we can go ahead and we can customize these to our own liking, and I'm gonna show you how to do that. Now all we need to do is go up here and go to customize. And then we're gonna go down until we find Luke Somers. We're gonna click there and then we're going to click on archives because this are shopping . Page is regarded as on Archives Page. We're going to click on archives here. Now, here's where things get interesting where we can do some customer stations. So the 1st 1 is the shop page display. Right now, we currently have show products which makes sense, hence the shopping page. But what we could also do is that we could be showing categories instead. So if we would be showing categories instead, we have all of these categories that we have earlier set. For example, we have digital products will have gaming. We have pits hosting hardware, etcetera. Now, we're also gonna want to set images for all off these category. Should we be using this function? But we're not going to we're going to set it to show products, which is the setting that I recommend us Well, generally. And then we also have the category display. Choose what to display in product category pages similarly, but for your categories. So if I click care that's gonna take us to the category page, then we have the default product sorting. Now we consorted as we wish we could sort it from popularity from average rating by most recent, etcetera that we can also change the layout right now we can change from the left or right or no sidebar. Now, we have already removed the sidebar, remember? Would did that earlier. But what we're gonna do here right now is that we're actually gonna click on the right side bar here. Now, that's not gonna make it appear suddenly. But we are going to bring it back because I'm gonna show you how to use the Wu commerce sidebar. Now, the Wu commerce sidebar has some different functions, and I think that it's very useful during the right circumstances. So for now, I wanted to be on the rights. I'm gonna click on right side bar, and if you haven't removed the sidebar like Wood didn't on earlier lecture. Then chances are it's going to be showing to the right for you, but we're gonna come to that in a second. Scrolling down. We have more options here, for example, the mobile sidebar order. We could be changing that. Also, we have the show post per page, which is going to be this one. Remember, we're talking about that earlier. Someone has decided that there's going to be 12 per page now. It could be more. It could be less. We can also decide on the amount of columns, right? We could have five. We could have to. We could have six, placing them all in the same if we're going to keep them to three. Now there's a bunch of more options in here that you can go through and check out, but nothing that's going to make or break your design. But in here you can customize your shop page as much as you would like to. And then when you're all done with this, we're gonna go ahead and click on Publish, and then I will exit up here. All right, so let's bring back the sidebar. Even if just temporary because we're going to be using it a little bit differently. So what I'm gonna go ahead and do is go to the back end off our Web store off our website, and then I'm gonna go down two pages and I'm going to go down until I find a shop. I'm gonna click there and then I'm gonna change the content layout that's going that full with, and I'm going to change it to default and then update. Now, if you haven't done this, this isn't something that you need to do, but we're gonna have to have the sidebar activated in order to be using the Wu calmer sidebar. So now if I go back to the front of for website and I update this, we get the sidebar right back, right. But there's a reason we remove this one, but let's change it up a little. So what? I'm gonna go ahead and do is actually go down here until I hit appearance to the left of the back end of her website and I'm going to go to widgets. So if we look to the writer, we have the Wu calmer sidebar, and this is exactly what we're going to be using. We're not going to be using the default sidebar now. There are a lot of included Woo Coomer's we just as a lot of fun to use, but the 1st 1 is going to be off, most important, the most interesting. And that's the cart widget. Now the court widget its rights here. Now there are two ways to be adding this. I could either grab it like this and drag it in, or if I wouldn't want to do it like that. I could also go down to card Kulik on it and then click on the Wu Comers sidebar and then add widget. Either way works now. The point is, this is going to be the cart bar, and I can use this function that says, Hide if cart is empty and this is the amazing thing. Now if I check this one, high def card is empty, likely can save, and then we go back. Now, if I update our page right here, we can see that the sidebar actually disappears, and this is quite handy because now suddenly we do have our product. We have the sidebar, but it's not visible until we actually add something in there. Remember, this is a card sidebar. So, for example, let's say that I wanted to add in this e book so I would go ahead and click on Add to cart and then having a look to the right. This is going to be added in here. So this is our card, and we always have it on the show page. And right now this show page on Lee. So meaning if I go into a product just like this for the marketing product, this is still going to be one big product page. But if I go back to shop, we're still going to be have it in the car just like this, allowing us to add in more products, and we see them to the right with the total sum. So I love this function on a shop, and I think that if you're going to be using a sidebar, I would be using this form of Wu comers. Sidebar With the card. Now there are more options to do, combating in more widgets rather than actually really handy. So let's remove these for a second and then go back now the 1st 1 that I want to show you is actually a filter widget, and it's a filter by price widget. So if we go down, there's going to be one here that says Filter products by Price. So if I click on this one and I go down and I check newcomers sidebar and I click on Add Widgets and then we go here and we update this page. We're going to get this really cool filter by price widget, and now you can see that the lowest price is $10 in the highest price is $300 which is also our most expensive product, right, this right here. So what we could be doing now is that we could be filtering and say, I don't want to spend more than $150 then click on Filter and then we only see these product. Now this is something that's usually really, really popular among customers because it's easier for them to find what they are looking for. So say we do this and then we go ahead and we add this one to cart. I want to add this one to card as well, and they're still going to be showing up to the right here at a top position. Now, if you always want to filter by price to be at the top, all they would need to do is go ahead and grab this fielder product by Price and put it to the top just like this. Right? And then we go back and we update this page and this filter by price is going to be jumping up to the top just like this. So this is a really handy widget to use as well. Now there's another widget that I really recommend that you can use if you're going to be using a sidebar on your website. The welcome er sidebar, that is. And that is the product sidebar. So if we scroll down, there's going to be a widget that's called Products. So I'm just gonna go ahead and grab this and I'm going to put it at the bottom just like that, and we're just gonna call it products like this, and then you can decide the amount of products that you want to be showing in here. So let's show for, you know, let's let's show three. Just so we want to show three products in here. Now, this is where it gets interesting. What kind of products do you want to show now? We could be showing on sale products. This is a really popular and useful feature to be using, but we can also show featured products if there are in the progress. You really, really want to make sure to be selling or, for example, if there is some sort of service going on right now, this kind of you know, limited. And you really want a feature, This one. So this is for the featured products for whichever product that you decide. So let's say that we go by feature products, you can order them by, you know, whichever way did you like to, we're gonna keep it a date for now and then order for descending or ascending hide free products show hidden product. We can choose the options for these, but right now, we're just gonna go ahead and click on Save now. Right now. When this is safe and we have selected to show featured products, nothing is really going to be happening. If I update this page and the reason for that is because we haven't added any featured products. So let's go ahead and do that right now. Now all we need to do is go to the left here and go to products and click there. So we get to see all products and in order to select your featured products, all you need to do guys is click on these stars. So let's say that the feature product is going to be the e book, the coaching and the gaming mouth. So I'm gonna click these three and we can see that they're filled ups. And now if we go back and I update this page here we have our featured products. Amazing looks really, really nice, right? So this is another way of using the products rigid in a really smart right. Now, if we go back, we can also go ahead and remove the feature function, update this page and they will be gone. So it's a really easy way to keep an eye on the product that you want to feature for whatever reason, that might be. Now if we go back, we go down to appearance and go to widgets. And then let's expand the Ruegamer sidebar and then expand products. There are more ways you can, for example, be using all products like this, and you can order them by random, for example, So there's going to be popping up random products on their sidebar whenever they enter your site. And that can also be handy feature for whenever you want to increase your conversion. And Google analytics are going to be telling you if this is working or not. But generally I recommend going for on sale products or featured products for this one to really make them pop. So, guys, this is how you customize your shop page on your website. Now, once again, if you actually want to be using a sidebar or not, that's going to be completely up to you. But in my opinion, especially with the cart, this is an amazing feature to use because it's so much easier to actually be shopping and keeping an eye on your own shopping and what you're adding, what you're looking for with the widget and being recommended. Additional products, especially hand if you have a lot of products on your website now again, if you want to make sure that the sidebar it's really empty. You go ahead with the card and you click on this hide if card is empty, which hides everything. Alright, guys. Well done. I'll see you in the next lecture. 113. WooCommerce Settings: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and go through the hoop calmer settings in order to optimize our web shop. Now, in order to get there is very simple. We start off at the back end for website, we go down to newcomers and then we click on settings, and here we are. Now, we're going to go through all of these, except shipment and payments, because these air heavier subject So we're going to keep our own lectures on those. Okay, so let's get started. We're going to start here at general, so the first thing that we want to do is actually ride in their address. And this is super important because all of the shipping will be calculated from here. So you want to write in your address ing? You know, if you have a business is gonna be the business address for any individual is going to be your address. So we're gonna go ahead and do that. I'm gonna leave this blank for the lecture, and I'm gonna feel this scene afterwards for privacy reasons. And then we're gonna go down to general options. And now we've gone through and touched on some of these before and that is the first. That is the cell indication. Where are you going to be selling? There's going to be important in order to calculate all of the taxes and all of the shipping availabilities. Now, there are customers stations you could select all the countries, except for and then you could add in those countries, it could also set on Lee specific countries that you want to sell to. So, for example, if you're only planning on selling to an American audience, you could set that as a specific country in here. Now we're gonna go to all countries and then also shipping locations. So you might have services and digital products that you sell all over the world. But you might only be able to ship to certain parts of the world. You could go ahead and set those in here, and then we have the default customer location. Now, like we spoke about earlier, the most popular and in my opinion, the most effective option is going to be geo locate. Now, Geo locate is going to recognize where a person is from by their i p address. When the enter your website. And the awesome thing with that is that, for example, if someone is from, say, Fromm's and you have certain products that doesn't ship to Franz than those products aren't going to be showing up to that customers? That's an awesome feature that's included here. And then we have enabled taxes. Enable tax rate, own calculations. We're gonna check this one, and we're going to go through this Maurin another lecture at most Pacific, the taxes and then enable coupons. We're gonna talk about Cooper's in upcoming lecture ass. Well, we're going to keep this one checked, and then we have calculate coupon discounts sequentially. So calculating coupon discounts sequentially basically means that say that you are selling a product for $100 also at the $100 mark, the customer gets free shipping right, so a customer comes to your website and they buy something. They buy that product for $100 now they have free shipping. But they bought that product at $100 product with a coupon code. It's M percent coupon code. So now they're actually Onley paying $90 for that product, right? Because they got 10% off. So the question is, are you going to allow the coupon discounts to apply sequentially, Meaning that first they're going to get the free shipping because they actually added in something for $100 then the 10% discount code will be applied. If you check this one, this is going to be the case. If you remove this one, that means they're not going to be getting any free shipping because now there are only buying sounding for $90. Okay, I hope I broke that down. So it's clear. So going down. We also want to think about our currency option to want to know where audience where we're selling to. You know, if we're going to be selling in the U. S. When I have dollars. If we're gonna be selling Europe, wanna use euro etcetera? I'm not going to be touching this. I want to currency precision to be left, not going to be touching the separators, etcetera. So I'm gonna hit, save changes and now we're gonna head over to products. So the first thing we have is to set up the show page. Now we'll commerce it over the down this for us. We have a shop page that's just called shop, so there's nothing that we need to do here, right? If you were creating your own shopping page, you would just go ahead and add that page in here. And then that would be recognized by Wu Khmers as the shop page. And then we have redirect to the cart page after successful addition. Now, you don't want that because if they are at our website, if they go to Robin and Jesper and they are at our shop page so that would mean that whenever they click on add to cart here, they would instantly be ending up at the card page for every product that they add. Now, this is quite annoying. And honestly, this keeps people from shopping more. So I prefer not to redirect them to the card page. And then we have enabled I X add to cart bottles on archives and you want to keep this one on because that is what allows you to click on the add to cart here, which is gonna add it right to the side. That is the I X options. We were just gonna leave that one on. And then we have the placeholder image, which we don't need to be touching. Going down. We have measurements now. We spoke about this earlier as well. You can change them from killers. You can use grams, pounds, ounces. You can change the dimensions. And you want to make sure that you know if you have ah, us based audience that you're going to do something that a place to make sense to us audience. If you have a wider audience, you're probably gonna want to do your market research and see where most of the people coming from and adapted to them. Don't adapted to yourself. Adapted to your customers scrolling down. We can enable product reviews. We wanna have them So we're gonna keep these show verified Owner label on customer reviews . This can be a good thing to do to know which one have actually bought the products and then we have reviews. Can Onley be left by verified owners? Now I like to actually check these to make sure that people aren't just coming on to the website and writing a review and leaving, and that can bring down products and businesses quite quickly enable star rating on reviews . I like that and star rating should be required, not optional. So if you keep this one on the need to set a star rating, if you remove this, they don't have to set a star rating. So I'm gonna go ahead and just allow them to leave a rating with or without a star and then click on save changes. And then we move on to inventory, which is just right next to General. Here and here. We can enable our own stock management, which we have, so we're going to keep this one check and then we have the hold stock. Now hold stock means that if let's say that we have 100 of those gaming mice that we just added into the shop, right? So let's say that someone comes in and they add 50 in the quantity off those gaming mouse. That means that we only have 50 left Now. The holding stock means that on the stock on the website, it's going to say right away that hey, there's Onley 50 left in stock for 60 minutes after those 60 minutes. If the customers haven't actually bought those 50 it's going to be returning toe 100 again . So the whole stuck is for how long that is going to be allowed to be removed in the stock on the product page while they are in someone's cart and haven't been bought. And then notifications enabled low stock notifications. Yes, we want that enable out of stock notification. We want that and also notification recipient. Whenever something is low on stock who want to get notified, right? They were going on a set, that one low threshold. We can keep it a two out of stock threshold. We keep it at zero, which would mean that is going to go to out of stock status when it reaches this number. Now there's no reason to go for the out of stock status unless you have promised away some form of products to someone personally. But I always keep This is a zero and then out of stock visibility. Now, if you check this one, it's going to be hiding the actual number off the stock off the items. So let's go ahead and we check out the gaming mouse that we have here. We can see that we have 10 in stock right here, Right? And then we have hide out of stock items from the catalogue. If you check this one, it's not going to be showing up in the product catalog. Now, I don't recommend that you do this for the simple reason off. If they see something they like, they might come back later to check it out. But they aren't going to be able to order unless you have enabled that. So we're not going to be hiding it. And then we have this talk display formats. Now there are different formers. This one always shows the stock quantity, right? So that means that if we go to the shop and I click on the gaming mouse here, we can see that there's 10 in stock there right now. If I go back and I change this one to the 1st 1 on Lee, show quantity remaining in stock when low. Now, if I change to this, one likely can save changes, and I update this page. We can see that the 10 in stock here, it's just gonna change to in stock, right? There's not going to be quantity number now if we go back. There's yet another option, and that option is the never show quantity remaining in stock. Which basically means that no matter how many or how few you have, it's never going to show. But with this option is going to be showing when that it's low. For example, on Lee five left in stock, only two left in stock at cetera. So you decide which one. A lot of people like to be transparent with how many they have other. They don't like to be talking about the quantity. This is completely personal. I'm just gonna go ahead and go with the transparent option and click on save changes. And then we have downloadable products. We're going to click on this one, and we have some options. The 1st 1 is forced download. That means that whenever they buy a product, a downloadable product that down that is going to start right away, and that is an option that I like to have. So we're gonna keep this one to force download and then downloads require log in. Now, this could be a good thing. If you really want to make sure that your guests are signing up and using their account so we can check this one and then grant access to downloadable products after payment. Now, this is a no brainer, right? As soon as they have paid for something, you want to give them complete access to the products, we're going to keep this one, and we're going to save changes. All right, so we're not going to go through tax. We're not gonna go through shipping. And we're also not going to go through the payments section because all of these are heavy sections, right? We're gonna jump to accounts and privacy. So in here, we have allow customers to place orders without on account, and this can be great, but it still means that they're gonna have to sign up when they check out. Right? I enjoy having it like this. And then we have allow customers to log into existing account during check out. Now, this can be a great feature to have asked. Well, again, it comes down to how you like to treat and design your own story. We're gonna check this one and then account creation. Allow customers to create an account during check out. Also a great option to have. If you really want to promote people, signing up to your website right can be a really great option. Have allowed customers to create an account on the my account page. Now, I don't like to have this option because I wanted to be on the other places, all the down my account page. So I want them to be checking out in order to sign up, or I want them to actually go and sign up manually from the log in button. So I'm going to keep this one off when creating an account, automatically generate a use inning for the customers email address. Perfect. So they're gonna log in with your email address is the simplest way, and then when they create an account, automatically generate an account password, you can check this one, and they're also in their mail, going to be able to go back and going to the website and change the password to whatever they want. And then we have removed personal data from orders on request. Now, we're not actually going to check this because we will be saving the customer's data, and that is all in our privacy policy in our terms and conditions. But if someone actually want this removed, they can contact us, and we can go ahead and remove it ourselves. All of their information and all of their orders, Of course, but we're not gonna have them removed from the orders by their own requests, right? We're gonna collect all of the information that we can, which is going to be a part of the check out as well as for your e mail is building and for them for the upcoming future Should they want to front Easier check out. But the point is that you need a privacy policy and also in the terms and condition that protects you from this which hopefully you've gone through in the course already. And if you have gone through that section awesome, awesome. So going down, we have the personal data removal. Allow a personal day to be removed in book from orders. Now, we're not going to be checking. These were not going to be handling and working too much with personal data. So we're not going to be checking this one s well. We're going to be protecting ourselves through the privacy policy. That's right. here. So the privacy page is going to be privacy policy for Robin and Jesper. This one is already set. We have a registration privacy policy. This is your personal data will be used to support your experience throughout the website to manage access to your account and for all their purposes described in our and this is the link to our privacy policy page. So again, you need to make sure that that one is actually waterproof, right? And the same with the check out privacy policies also gonna link to your privacy policy. And then we have personal data retention. And when we haven't actually checked these once in, they're just going to be retaining. But once again, if we need to, we can go ahead and we can erase their information manual. But they're gonna have to contact us for that. And once again, everything says what we'll be doing and how we will be handling their data. Now if we use thes kind of options and they removed their own data is gonna make it much harder for us to optimize others experience. So this is why I prefer to rely on the privacy policies in the terms and conditions and make sure that if they want to have their own personal data removed, they have to come to us personal. And then we'll go from there. So we're gonna scroll down and then hit, save changes and let's head over to e mails up here Now there's not much we need to be doing here in the emails. All of these are templates there, although decreed that they're already done and you can go ahead and customize them as much as you want to say, Here's a new order. If I go ahead and likely can manage, I could be playing around with this. So, for example, we can see that the subject here, this site title New order. Now we could be changing this title to anything we could be. We could broaden it like the order you've been looking for. We could be writing anything here, and then that would be the new subject for the new order. Males right and same goes for email heading. We could be changing the heading, and then we have the email type, but we're not going to be mixing around and playing with those. We're just gonna go ahead and leave these templates as they are now scrolling down. There's a couple of more interesting options here. So we have the from name, which is Robin and Jesper. And then we have the from address, which could be, for example, contact at Robin and jesper dot com like that. And then we have the header image. Now, if we go ahead and we check out the email template that we have right now and we could have gone click here to preview your email templates, we can see that this is the way that the template looks like right now, right? So it doesn't have our collars. Doesn't really have our touch or anything. Now, what we could do here is simply to add in a your L to r logo. Now you're gonna have to play around a little bit with sites in order to feed it properly. And you could go to you could go up here to media, go to library, go ahead and click on your logo, right click on the U R l off the logo and paste it in here. And if it doesn't fit, use I pick you or any of the tools that we've been using in the course to Reese ice it and make the size really good until it fits in here. And then the food it takes, you're not gonna have wanted to say something like built with blue Bombers. You're going to want to change this to something like, Thanks for shopping with us. See you soon love Robin on just for something like that. Now there's gonna be in the food or the very bottom, the very bottom down here. We can also change the colors off course, and we're going to want to use the colors that we have been designing with them for. Austin's going to be that very specific red, and all you need to do is go ahead and grab that red color and paste it in here and you can change the entire template. Right. So let's say, for example, that this red was the color that we were using. I'm just gonna change it by clicking on here and using that color. And now have you been signing with a certain color like we have? You're gonna want to go in elementary. In our case, go ahead and just copy that code pasted in here. And we're going to get the exact same red we're gonna leave these ass we want them to and then click on save changes, and then we can check out the preview. And as you can see, it starts to get a little bit more personal, right? A little bit more off our style. Now, this isn't already, but you already know how to grab and find that code that we've been using and the signing with earlier on in the course from El Aumentar. So we're going to continue up, and we're gonna go over to advanced. Now, we don't have to really touch much about the card page because the carpet is card. You know, that's the benefit of wall commerce that create these pages for you. If you wanted to design your own card page, you could do that and then go in here, Carter Page and just choose that one page check out page similar my account similar. But here it's very important that you add the terms and Conditions page, which you will have if you've been following along with the course. Right. So we're just gonna go ahead and click on terms and condition and added, And just like that, and then we don't need to be playing around with these because all of these are just the extension. So, for example, this is going to be Robin and jesper dot com forward slash borders, Robin Ingested outcome for a size view, dash order. And in my opinion, there's no reason to be changing or doing anything about thes at all. And we're gonna go ahead and click on save changes, and that is all for the settings. Now we're gonna go more in depth about the tax, the shipping and the payments in the upcoming lectures. And guys, as always, if you have any questions whatsoever, this is why we have the Q and A. So don't hesitate on asking them. Go ahead and ask them right now, if not, just enjoy the course, and I'll see you in the next lecture. 114. Add Taxes: All right, my friends, in this lecture, we're going to be going through taxes. I know it's not the most exciting subject in the world, but if you stay with me, there's actually something included at the end of this lecture that's gonna make life so much easier. It is a template, K. So follow along and we're gonna dive straight into taxes and make the best out of this is K . It's not that complicated. All right, so here we are. If you haven't been following along Since the previous lecture, we have gone to newcomers settings. We have gone through most of the settings, and now we have gone into taxes. Okay, so let's start from the top. So the first tax option that we have is prices entered with tax. If we click on yes, then the tax is going to be showing with the price. So in other words, if we go to the shop here right now, these are the prices off the products. But if I click this one into, yes, then the taxes are going to be added onto the total price rights here, and I recommend in general, prefer not to have the taxes on the price. So I will go for no, I will enter prices exclusive off tax came and then we have calculate tax and based on you can decide on customer shipping, address, building address or shop base address. Now I recommend going for shipping address, and it is going to make more sense in just a little bit. But generally I'd recommend going for the shipping address, and then we have shipping tax class. Now, there are different monsters to standard tax. There is the reduced rate. And then there's the syrah rate and what all these rates are there right up here. We're going to be going through them in just a second. But the best option is going to be shipping tax class based on CART items. And this is because all of your items are going to be having different taxes. I'm going to show you what those different taxes are and how you can apply them. So for now, we're just gonna choose this option, and then we have round tax at sub total level instead of rounding per line. Now I recommend using this, and I prefer using this is absolutely not mandatory. But what it does is that if we are at our shop right here and let's say that I add in to progress and gonna add in this one, and I'm going to add in the gaming mouse and then I go to view cart. Now, if I don't have it enabled, we're going to see the taxes being added on to the prices and the total up here. Now, if I do have this activated, then Randt acted sub Total level means that here at the car totals to some total level, we are going to see what the tax are actually doing, right. We're going to be rounding them rights here. So that is why I prefer to be using this one. And if we click it off, then it's going to be rounding per line meaning per item like this. And then next up, we have additional tax classes, right? And here we have reduced rate at zero rate. Okay, if you look up here, there's going to be a standard rate. Then we're going to be filling out this one in a little bit. But there's also going to be reduced rates and see race but these two are added in manually from wu comers there added in here now we're actually going to be adding in additional one by ourselves also, but not yet. Okay, so these air additional tax classes, we will be adding one more, but more on that in a little bit. And then we have display prices in the shop. Now I prefer to have excluding tax. So as we can see, if we go to shop right here that all of these prices will be excluded off the taxes. Now, the difference between this one that display prices in the shop excluding tax and the 1st 1 is that if you click on yes, for this one, that means that when you are setting the prices manually, for example, when I writing that A this one is going to be costing 14 99. Then if I click this one on, Yes. That means that this 14 99 includes the taxes. That means that you have set the tax manually rights. You have set this tax manually from your own calculation of this is the total price. Now, if you click on no, then the price will be entered exclusive off tax, meaning that this price is on Lee for the product. OK, so the difference being that with this one, since we're going to be adding in taxes separately in these sections, that means that different products are gonna have different taxes that will be added once we add them to cart. So if I write in including tax right here, then that means that this type of item will include that tax in here from the tax rate that we have set not from the total sum that we have ridden in, but from the tax rate that we have set once again to clarify further if I click on Yes, here I will enterprises inclusive of tax. That means that you are entering the tax manually. If you could go No, that means that there is going to be taxes reading on the sites that will be added in by this system. And here you decide if you want that system to show the tax on your shop page and I prefer to keep that as excluded, right and then display prices during cart and check out excluding tax. Now, this is where I like to go would, including tax, because you kind of want to see what you're paying for right and how much the total sum is going to be. So I always like to have, including tax here so that there's no tax being showed here. But once you go to view cart, then you get to see what the total is going to be with the taxes. Now that's my preference. And I also think is more transparent for the customers, so they see how much they will be paying now going back. There are some more options. The 1st 1 is priced displaced Suffolk's and basically what this is is if there's going to be some further information at the price tag. So, for example, we could write excluding V 80. Now that's value added tax. If I do that and I click on save changes and I go back here and I go into our shop, then you can see that here would get the price and this is the price Suffolk's and then we can see that it says, excluding V 80. So we're being transparent that Hey, this is not with the V a T included in other words. It's going to be high your price once you added to card. Now I think that this looks terrible. That's just me. So I prefer, actually to not be using a price display subjects at all and then display attacks total. Either you could have it as itemized or s a single total. Now I prefer to be itemized so you can see it on the attempts that has been added. Right? I don't think anything else really is that interesting needed for you or for the customer. So there were going to click on save changes. Now we're going to go up, and we're going to start with the standard rates, and the rate is going to be the tax rate that is for your shop, or rather for your country. So whenever you're selling any products from your shop and you are going to be shipping those products, then you will be taxing V A T taxing war. If you're in the US, you're gonna have other taxes. But you will be taxing from the country that you recite or where you have your store right where you have your business. So for us, that's going to be right now, I'm gonna go ahead and click on insert row, and then I'm gonna make sure that all of the taxes are going to be with the Cyprus values. Right? So in Cyprus, the V A T. The value added tax is 19%. So I'm gonna make sure that the standard rate, the standard tax rate, is going to be 19% regardless, if we're shipping to Franz, if we're shipping to Germany for shipping to Sweden, Norway, you know it doesn't really matter where we are shipping because we will be shipping from Cyprus. That means we will be using the Cyprus the 80 and it's going to be similar for you as well . Now the thing that we're looking at here they are using something called an Asterix. And on Asterix Testes, little star. That means that everything is included, right? So if we have the 1st 1 that's country code. This means that these are all off the counter codes in the entire world. So this is going to apply to all the counters in the world. So if I move over to rate here and I write in 19% and then I click on save changes. This means that there is going to be a 19% tax added to all of the items. Wherever you are from in the world with you are for us where you're from Spain, Portugal doesn't matter. So if I go back now to shop and then I go to the view cart, we can see that we're having some changes going on here, right? So we can see that the sub total right now, including the V A. T is 44 1 writes. So this is the tax estimated for Cyprus because we are in Cyprus right now. And this standard right is going to be applying to all of the other countries, even though it's using geo location right now to see where I am from. Still going to be the same rate. Okay, so this is how that works. And then if we go back, we can actually change this and add new roast and do some customization. So let's say that you want ad in a specific tax for the U. S. You would write us in here, and then we're gonna goes with United States. Now the Asterix means that this is going to include all of the state codes, all of the states, all of the postal cords, all of the cities. And then you could ride in the tax rate and then the tax name. Now, here's where it gets interesting because we have a priority. So what happens when let's say that there is a I don't know. I'm just gonna make something of 12% tax rate here. So what happens when there are two tax rates being applies? The first we have the 19 1 and then we have the 12% 1. Well, this is where we start using the priority So the priority decides which one will be applied . If I write a two on this, that means that this one is going to make sure that it is applied. Firstly. Okay, now, if I used the compound here and I pressed this in, that means that mawr taxes can be added on to the same. So that means that it's going to be adding in the 19 on day, 12 percent taxes because they compound and then we also have the shipping and shipping meaning that the rates are going to be added on to the shipping, including the shipping price, and I prefer to have the shipping price just like that. I'm just gonna go ahead and remove the U. S. You can see that this were selected. I just click on remove selected ropes. So there we go. So that's the 1st 1 we have. And I'm gonna say this now. We can also move over to reduced rates and reduce rates is going to be when there are certain services for your country that has reduced taxes. So, for example, there are two reduced V A T rates in Cyprus, one at 9% for certain services such asked catering such as certain accommodations such as certain mobility's, like taxi services and such. They're only gonna have a 9% tax rate, so I could add him that. But what is more interesting is that selling things such as books is going to be having a 5% reduced rates, so there's 9%. Then there's 5%. So what, I can go ahead and do here is go ahead and make sure that this applies to all the countries and then the rate, and I'm going to add the rate to 5% so they reduce tax rates is going to be 5%. And then I could name this books, for example, and then I could click on save Changes. So what this means, For example, if we go back here now, we know that this is an e book. But if we pretend that this is a physical book, because E books actually have a different tax rate, if we pretend that this is a physical book, what I could do it, that I could go into the product right here, then I could go up, Hayward says. And it product. And now we are at the product page rights, and then I can scroll all the way down until, with Seaward says, tax status and tax class right and tax status. There's, of course, we want everything to be taxable and then the tax class. That means that we could put this at a reduced rate so you would put this to a reduced rate and then we click on update. Then that means that instead off getting the 19% tax is going to be getting the 5% tax instead. So this is a really good thing to do when you know which product that you're selling that haven't which type of tax rate and the way to find that out. It's simply and the best by far by using an accountant, right? That's really gonna help if you don't have an accountant. I mean, there's always Google, and you can find all of the information online, and it's going to be specific to your country where you are from again. We have our business right now here in Cyprus. So that means that we're going to be using the cypress V A T. Now I'm going to put this one back to Standard. I'm not gonna play around with this because I'm gonna show you another example in just a little bit. But that is going to be changing up this product price completely when it comes to the cart in here, because now it has 19%. But if I change that, it would only have 5% meaning that this price would be lower. Okay, Now, if we go back in here, there's also something that zero rate rates. Okay, now that basically is exactly what it sounds. It means no tax and there are certain things in Cyprus. It allows you to be tax exempt, meaning not to be taxed. Such a certain healthcare services, such a surgeon education services. But also this is important to know that when it comes to taxing the standard rates and the reduced rates, this is going to be when you are selling things to customers. But several rates are going to be when you are selling things to companies, because when you are selling things to companies B two B as it's known as when you were selling things to companies, they get to add their old V 80 so they take care off their own V A T. And you Onley used to syrah rates for them so that they do the V A t themselves. So to reiterate, there are two purposes for the serial rates. One is going to be four certain things such as education and surgeon healthcare provider services, and the second is going to be when you were selling to businesses right then you won't be taxing them. They will be taxing themselves with their own tax v a t number. Now what we're gonna go ahead and do is go to tax option and we're going to is what I was talking about in the beginning. Use a template because there's one more thing we want to add in and that is to click in here, hit, enter and right digital products like that and then save changes. Now digital products is a little bit different. Digital products actually make sure that you need to tax people in the country that they are from bright. So all of the products that we are selling to a certain country we will be taxing from Cyprus with Cyprus v 80. But if we're selling to Germany and we're selling a digital product, we're going to need to use Germany's the 80. So this is where it gets a little bit trickier. So we added in digital products here, and if we look to the top, we have digital products rates. If I click in here, we get to add in a certain rate for digital products and as we know, there's a lot of conference using the V A T system note us and does not use to V A T system . So what, we're gonna go ahead and do is actually import a C S v file. And really, really great news, guys. This see SV file is going to be in the resource is that this is what I mean with the template there's gonna make everything so much easier. And then I'm gonna go ahead and choose file. I'm gonna add in this file and then click on upload file and imports. So there it's all done. We're going to click on view tax rates and then we're gonna click on digital product rates . And as you can see here they all are. They've all been added with their specific country code, the European country and their unique tax V a T tax rates. So, looking at Cyprus, for example, it's automatically using the 19% V a t. So this is such a short cut. It's amazing. You can use this. All they need to do is go ahead and download it from the resource is then go to tax options in here and right in the digital products below here. Could it can save changes, is gonna add this new digital product rates. You're gonna click in here, and that's simply import CS. We now note that you're gonna want to name a digital products, right? Because digital product is the value in the C S V file it you're importing. So if you name this one, something else all of these values might end up. So if you name it something else than digital products than all of these values might, for example, end up in standard rates because it can't find the digital products value. So with all of these added, that means that now when I go back to Khartoum, for example, and now I go to this e book, which is a digital product, and then I click on edit product appear and then scroll down. We can change the tax class to digital products, right? And the amazing thing with this is off course that now you're going to be taxed based on which country you are from, Right? So that's really, really great news. And it also changes the entire ballgame because not taxes becomes so much simpler. So to reiterate, the standard taxes when you were selling physical products are gonna be from the country that you have your business in for us. That Cyprus. So that means 19% of the 80 taxes reduced tax rates are for certain things. So for us in Cyprus, that's 5% and 9% on certain items in certain services. So we're gonna help those individually. All of the other items you, Adnan, are gonna have standard rates as a standard. But certain items such as our digital products where we just going to go ahead, go to that item as we're adding it in and add in that tax rates king. Now, if you are from the US, the rules are a little bit different now, if you are using a nexus and you have a high presence in certain states, then you're going to be using different tax values. And they can also compound. So but you're gonna want to do in this case, honestly, is to use an accountant and for the rest of us, when it comes to calculating our taxes would simply need to know which country we are from , or at least where we have our business. Check out what the standard V A T rates are, or if you're from the US, check out those specific taxes that you have. If you have a high presence, you're using the nexus. We want to talk with an accountant or you want to research that information as well. Check out the reduced rates No one to use to Syria race and finally, add in the digital products. And that does it for the taxes section. If you have any questions, guys will be in the Q and A. Now remember, I am not an accountant, and if you're serious about this, I recommend that you do. Go ahead and get an accountant and one last thing. If you're in the US and you have a nexus or high presence or you just need some help, you can go ahead and you can use the tax jar dot com service. No tax jar is amazing because it is a plug in and a service that's gonna check out and calculate all of the different states and all off their different taxes for you. They're also going to be helping you with invoices, which I believe is for an extra fee, but it generates. They're gonna help you Ah, lot when it comes to living in the U. S. And taxing from the us, especially using nexus is. So If you are in the US and you're serious about your business and you are making a good income or you're about to make a good income, go ahead and check out tax George dot com. It's gonna be in the resource is and you wanna use their service, right? Okay, guys, that those that I'll see you in the next lecture. 115. Add Shipping: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to add in different shipping alternatives. So let's get right into it. So if we go to the back end off, our website would go to woo Coomer's settings and then click up here where we have shipping , we're gonna end up in this big, nice area with this all this purple covering the screen. Now, the first thing that we're gonna learn how to do is add a shipping soul. Now, before we do that, I want you to note something. And that is that a shipping Sonus actually already added. And that shipping so is called locations not covered by your other sons. So right now, you actually already have a shipping zone, if you will. Added in that says that there is no method offered to this soul, right? So that means that by default right now, you're not actually shipping anywhere. So what, we're gonna go ahead and do is learn how to add in shipping to specific places in, for example, Europe or in the us, And then I'm gonna show you how to add in shipping for the entire world. For example, if you're drop shipping. So all we're gonna do is click here on Add shipping soon, and then we're going to give this own a name. So let's call this Europe, for example, just like that. And then we can hang, adding, Let's say we're gonna add in Cyprus because that's where we currently are. And because we're using geo location tracking. That's where the website is going to recognize those from so good at in Sweden. We get out in Norway, we could add in, you know, a bunch of different countries. You could just click on them from this list just like this. Now it's completely up to have many one ad for this example. We're just gonna use these two now. The next thing you can do is limit to specific sip zones and post coats. But we're not gonna do that right now. And then we have the shipping methods. So the first thing that would do is just click on add shipping method down here, and there are three different shipping methods and the 1st 1 is flat rate, and the flat rate method is really straightforward. It's a fixed rate for your shipping, so you could go ahead and we add in the shipping method, then we could add in a fixed price. So, for example, we could add in a flat rate shipping off, let's say, $3. So that means that no matter how many products were going to be adding in, our card is still just going to be $3. That's the flat rate. Now what we're gonna go ahead and do is go down here and click on edit. And here we can first of all, give the A name to the method, and this is a name that's gonna show up for them as well. So we could just call this shipping, for example, And then if you want the shipping cost to be taxable now, I'm going to select known and then the cost. So let's say that the shipping cost is $3 then I click on save changes, and then we go back here to our website and I'm just gonna go ahead and update our cart right here, and then we can see that the current shipping is $3 it's shipping to Cyprus, and once again it's recognizing that I am from Cyprus because of the geo location. That's how it knows from my I p address. So writing that we have a flat rate shipping that's just called shipping, that's for $3. Okay, now, you could edit this further. You could be adding in some code. So if you wanna have a flat percentage, for example, let's say that you want the shipping to be five or 10% Let's say 10% Then you would write. First, we're gonna put up a wall like this. And if you're on a Mac computer, that's option eight. I believe if you're in a PC, that's gonna be Ault eight just like this. And then I'm gonna write just like it says down their fee, percent equals. And then I'm going to do a quotation mark 10 quotation mark and then end wall by option nine just like this. So this means that the shipping cost is going to be 10% off whatever is in the card. So now if I go ahead and I saved these changes and we go back to the cart and we update this one, we can see right now shipping is that $3? And if I update it, it's to 20. So now if I had in a bunch of more gaming minds, let's say that I add 20 more and check out the shipping is to 20. And if I update the cart, it's 43 98. Quite a heavy shipping cost, wouldn't you say? So This is another way that you can be adding him for your shipping if you don't want to use a flat rate. But most of the time, the easiest way is just gonna be to add in a flat race. So, for example, you could add in three and then it's going to be for three just like this. Now we could also add in a shipping method, and we could add in free shipping. And free shipping is going to be on either as free shipping by itself or under certain circumstances. So, for example, if I go down and I click on edit once again, then we could use keep the name free shipping because the house is a lovely clean to it, doesn't it? And then the free shipping requires either not available, meaning it's just gonna be free shipping. Hey, great news right or we could have a valid free shipping coupon. So that means that they would need a certain coupon, which we're gonna go through later to get the free shipping or a minimum order amount or a minimum order amount or a coupon or a minimum order amount and a coupon, Right? So I prefer to use this one a minimum order amount. So let's say that there's going to be free shipping for, you know, when they order for $50. So let's go like this. And then we're gonna save changes and then we go back and we can see that right now the sub tonalist 541 because we went a little bit crazy, right? So let's say that I only have one in quantity here, and I update this cart. So now the total cost is $44 meaning that the shipping is at a flat rate of $3 like we just said. But if I go ahead and I had one more gaming myself from one, I added up to to sit, goes over $50 then update the cart. Suddenly I get the option for free shipping and I can just click that one in here, which is awesome, isn't it? So this is how you add in the possibility for free shipping as well. Now there's yet another one. Another shipping method which is probably the same place which is just local pickup. So this has really nothing to it. You just click on add shipping method, you go ahead and click on edit, and then you set a cost, and then you click on save changes, and pretty much that is it. But this is probably the least use one. And, you know, if you're going to be shipping abroad, chances are you're going to be using a UPS service you're going to want to use on free shipping methods. Or maybe you're even going to want to be using flexible shipping. And I'm going to show you what that is in just a little bit. So let's go ahead and delete this one. I'm gonna delete this one as well. I'm just gonna keep the flat rate like this for now. So I'm gonna click on save changes, and then I'm going to go up and move over to shipping options now in here, we have a couple of options, the 1st 1 being enabled the shipping calculator on the card page. Now I don't think that's a good idea. First of all, I don't think it looks good, but also I don't think you want to allow the customers to be playing around with the shipping cost like that. That shouldn't be a concern. The main focus should be on your product, so I prefer to click that one away. And honestly, I also prefer to use this one hide shipping costs until on address is entered. The reason for this is because I also like to change the shipping destination from billing address to shipping address because a lot of the times people are going to be placing orders on your website and they're gonna have a different billing address than shipping address. But the one this really matters is the shipping address, right? So this is why I prefer to use this one, and then we're not going to be enabling in a debug mode. So I'm gonna save the changes, and then we can go back and let's just update here, and then we can see that there are no calculations right for the shipping costs, which I think it's a really, really good idea. But for demonstration purposes, so I can show you how the flexible option works. I'm gonna go ahead and go back, and I'm going to click this one away and click on save changes. But remember, this is what I generally prefer when I'm actually using the shop. But for demonstration purposes, I'm gonna click this one open so it's not checked. Update this page and there will bring the shipping back. All right, so the next thing that we have is shipping classes. No shipping classes isn't very interesting. It allows you to add in search things such as, You know, if you have fragile objects, if you have had the objects, then you can actually go in on your items, and you could be adding in those shipping options for that item. Now, I don't think this is a very good idea because it over complicates it. So what I recommend that we do instead is use something that's known as flexible shipping and flexible shipping can be anything you want it to be. It's good, for example, be that the shipping cost is going to be based on a certain weight. So between this and this way, it's gonna be one cost between another two way. It's gonna be another cost. Or it could be that if you buy for this price to get this shipping Coast, if you buy for this price to get another shipping costs, etcetera, etcetera, and to do this we're gonna need a plug in. So let's go ahead and head over down here to plug ins and then add new and then here at search plug ins. I'm gonna start for flexible shipping just like that. Now there are a bunch of really good plug ins, and I've tried most of them. This is a plug in that I really like. It's rumors, weight based shipping. It's super simple, and it allows you to do wait based calculations for your shipping. Now, for demonstration purposes, we're gonna use another plugging because I want to show you how you can also use the value off price using different price ranges. So we're going to scroll down until we find this one that's known as rumors table Great shipping by G. E. M. Now this one isn't being updated very frequently and actually terribly badly. And it has very few active installs right now. And why, I have no idea. Because for me, this is the one that's been working for a long time, is probably the simplest off the bunch as well. So this is the one that we're going to be using. We're gonna go ahead and click on install now and then click on Activates. All right, there, it's activated. So all we're gonna do now is go back to Wu comers and go back to settings. Go back to shipping appear and then we can go back to your apparent just click on edit. And then I'm gonna click on add shipping method and here we're going to see a new option right now, this called table rate. So we're gonna click there and just click on add shipping method. So there it is, and then we click on edit. So this is where it gets interesting. Now all we need to do is go ahead and click on, add new here at the least of shipping methods. Click on, add new, and then we're gonna enable this shipping method. So the 1st 1 is going to be the method title so we could call it U. P s. No, you piss is probably the biggest parcel, a delivery and tracking network in the entire world. I think it's pretty safe to go by that name since they will be the one delivering in most of the cases and then a handling fee. I'm gonna leave this one blank because we're not gonna charge when handling fee gonna make this not taxable. Now, this is where it gets really interesting. Here, we can see the table rates right so we can make its able based on either the weight or the price. So let's start off with weight. So let's say that anything between the weight off zero and the weight off one in 19 9 kilos noticed that it's a skill O se, or because that's in our settings is gonna have a shipping cost off. You know, let's say $33. Then we get at the new rate as well. So anything between two kilos Onda se 4 99 is gonna have a shipping cost off five and then let's also add one new rate. This is anything between five kilos on, Let's just, you know, as much weight as possible is gonna have a shipping Reiter shipping cost off $10 just like that. So I'm gonna go ahead and I'm going to click on save changes. So now if we go back to cart right here and we update this page, we can see that the UPS option is currently $3. We have shipping. Would have you pissed is currently at $3. We're probably gonna want to disable this one. So for demonstration purposes, I'm going to go back and disabled that one. I'm just going to click on shipping sones. I'm just going to click on Europe and then the shipping here that I've added the flat rate . I'm gonna click on delete, click on save changes, go back and update this page, and they would go. So now we only have the ups. So the UPS is currently at $3 that's because, remember, we actually did set a weight for this mouse or Mize in this case because there's several off them, so it's going to $3. But let's say that I bought 20 off them and I updated this card. Then the UPS cost of $3 would be changing to $5 because now the wait is increased. I don't know how much the way it is, precisely, but it's definitely falls in between 1 99 I think we said it. It's 4 99 right? And now, if I would buy, say, 50 and I update the card, chances are this is gonna wait over five kilos, and the UPS cost here from $5 it's gonna increase to $10. So this is what we call flexible shipping rates. And it allows us to flicks the shipping costs so that you don't have to lose any money on the shipping itself, Right? So you can just make sure that you're selling all of your products, getting the prophet that you're looking for, and it's gonna be easy for you to make your budget with high your accuracy as well. So going back, this is how the table rate works. Okay, Now, the final thing that I wanted to show you in here is if we go back to shipping sons now, remember, I spoke about locations not covered by your other sons. They are currently set to offer no shipping methods. This makes a lot of sense so that you can make sure that you add in your own shipping soon . And you only ship to the places where you can actually shape about your products, and this is worth calculating. How much does it cost? How long does it take? Are there in the available options? Even you're gonna want to do your calculations for this. Obviously, if you're seventies your product, this is not an issue. Then we wouldn't even be in this section. However, if you are drop shipping, meaning you're only the middle hand, you're not actually storing any items. Then you could go ahead and click down here, which has managed shipping methods, and you could actually add in a shipping method here you could add in a flat rate you could add in a table rate, free shipping anything you would want to, and this would cover the rest off the world right, And it's going to cover the rest of the world, assuming off course that you then remove this one and then you could also add in different shipping songs to give them different shipping options. Maybe some sons were gonna be cheaper. Some sounds we're gonna be and more expensive. So, for example, shipping to Asia for us is gonna cost a little bit more. Shipping to Europe is going to cost a little bit less, so you just need to do your calculations. So this is how the shipping rates work and how you add shipping inflexible, chipping to your wu comers, See in the next lecture, guys. 116. Add Payment Methods: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to start sitting up payment gateways for our shop so that we can start receiving money for what we're selling. There's a pretty great idea, isn't it? Let's get started. So we are at the back end for website. We have gone to newcomers settings and then hovered up here to payments. And as we can see, there are a couple of different payment options. We have the direct bank transfer, the chick payments. We could be used in cash on delivery, but most interestingly, we can be using PayPal now. PayPal is so interesting because first and foremost, a lot of people have PayPal and they can't pay through that with their PayPal cash. But also, papal allows you to use your credit card for payment. So this is probably the most versatile and easiest off the options. So we're gonna go ahead and set that one up. So moving to the right, we're gonna click on set up, and then we're simply going to click on enable PayPal standards. So now the option is enabled. Now the title is gonna be the title. This will be displayed. Asked the payment option at the check out. We don't have to touch that. It's PayPal, right? And then the description is gonna show there as well. So it says pay via PayPal. You can pay with your credit card if you don't have a PayPal account, and that is terrific. That is exactly why it's so versatile and great. And then we have the PayPal male. So this is obviously gonna be the mail for your PayPal account. You want to nail this one because this is where you get paid, right? So let's say that it's called payments at Robin and jesper dot com. Just like that scrolling down, we have the papal sandbox option. Now the people sandbox option allows you to create fake accounts so that you can try out the money transfers from the fake account on PayPal to your website and vice versa just to see that everything is working properly. You don't need to use this one, but if you want to air on the safe side, you can go ahead and do that. You can just click and developer account and see how it works, how to set it up, etcetera, and we don't need to worry about logging in a debugging. Don't need to worry about that. We want to have the I p and even notifications. If they are in the refund that in charge backs It said we will be notified and then the receiver email for these. So we're just gonna have payments at Robin and Jesper? Red dots come like that. We don't have to wear about PayPal. Identity Token. Now, the invoice prefix is going to be VC Wish done for woo comers and then the number for the invoices. Now, obviously, if you have multiple stores, you're gonna want to make sure that they are all unique in their invoice prefix. So maybe VC two. Or maybe we could be calling it r N store Juan or in store two or whatever the store would be called to make them unique. If you have multiple stores, multiple woo calmer stores, that is, and then send shipping details to PayPal instead of building that this is a security option , and I recommend that we go ahead and just leave it like this. We don't have to worry about address overriding. We can just skip this one and the payment action. We have two options. They will have the capture or authorized. Now the differences with capture. If someone goes ahead and they pay on your website, then PayPal issue is gonna go ahead and grab the money and all this well in the world with authorized, you're gonna have to authorize that transaction before the transaction actually happens. This is gonna take time for the customer. That's gonna take time for you. I don't recommend this option, So we're gonna go ahead and just use capture instead of authorized. We don't have to wear about the Page Styler image. You are l none of that or the A P I credentials. All we're gonna do is click on save changes. So, guys, if you don't have a PayPal account, I'm gonna put this link in resource that you can go ahead and sign up for one, and you're gonna need to sign up for a business account so that you can receive money if you don't actually have a business or any tax. I d don't worry. There's always an option where you can sign up with your personal I d. So you don't actually need that So all you're going to go ahead and do is sign up for a business account, go through all of that and then right in that business email right here, right, Your PayPal mate. And you're gonna get paid through there. So in order to see if this works, I've actually done a incognito window also knowing it's a private window so they don't recognize that it's me here. And then I'm gonna go ahead and just go to the shop and let's say, Well, I really like this e book and gonna add this to cart the dog color. That's just awesome. Let's do I'm gonna have three off these. I'm going to select the green one, maybe go from medium. Yeah, there's gonna be really good. So they were goes to now we have four items. We have the e book who had the flashing dark color. That's $82 already. Let's go ahead and check out. So here in the check out, we can see that we do have PayPal as an option in order to check out with. So let's say that I feel up all of my information here, and then once you're done you're gonna have to select here. I have read and agree to the website. Terms and conditions thes are the terms of and conditions we have created earlier by right click. And I opened this in a new private tab. We're gonna get linked right to our terms and conditions right here. Right. So this is perfect. We're feel all of this is we also have the ability to ship to a different address Should we want to do that? And there can be ordered notes, but we're gonna go ahead and proceed to people. So now all I would have to do is log in with my PayPal account, and then this amount would be paid to our business, right? And from this PayPal account. So that means that we have a shop that's up and running, and everything is working the way that it should really Well done, guys. So in the next lecture, we're gonna go ahead and learn how to create coupon codes in order for marketing purposes for any promotions that were up to etcetera, etcetera. So see you in the next lecture, guys. 117. Create a Cupon Code: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to create coupon codes. Let's get right into it. So here we are, at the back end of for a website. We're gonna go ahead and go down to woo comers and then coupons, and then we're gonna click on create your first coupon. And the first thing that we can do is to name the coupon for the code itself. So let's say that we're offering a 15% discount. We might want to name something like 15 Discount something like that. So you wanted to be one word, preferably for the coupon, and then we can have a description for it. Get a 15% discount on your order like that. And then the first thing that we can set up is what type of discount do want it to be? Do we have want to have a certain percent discount it fixed carte discount or fix product discount. Now, the 1st 1 is gonna be a percent discount, which is the one we've actually set up here, at least in the description. And then we have a fixed card discount, which is gonna be a discount across the entire card and then a fix product this come which is not going to be by percentage. Okay, so we're gonna go for percentage discount, and then the coupon amount. And we already said it to be 15% right is a really big nice discount, and then allow free shipping. And we can set this one if you want free shipping to be along with the coupon. And now, remember, we had the free shipping option where we were shaking out the shipping options earlier. We could had have a requirement to use a code or a code and a requirement, etcetera, etcetera. So you would have to activate that one and then connected to this code. Now, for these from we're not going to allow any free shipping. All right? And then we could have a coupon expiry date. So let's say that we want to use it for, you know, ah week, we could go. Ah, a week with this one, and then we're gonna go over to use such restrictions. Now, the first restriction is gonna be How much do you need to spend in order to use this? So let's say that you need to spend at least $50 there is no maximum spent. Even though it could be $100 something, there's no reason for that. And then if you wanted to be for individual use Onley meaning that you cannot use thes or match these with some other coupon. So let's say that you have a coupon for, you know, $10 discount and then you have 15% discount as well. With this one, you can Onley use this discount by itself and then the next option is exclude sale items Now remember, were able to put certain items on sale if we could come this one exclude. That means that this coupon is not gonna be available for those items that are on sale. So we're gonna excluded for this example Now, here we could also get really specific so we could make sure, for example, that this discount on Lee works for certain products. So if I search for coaching, for example, we can see that we have our coaching products that we have set up with. The third is 69 220 minutes. So let's set this up for the coaching. 60 minutes meaning that this is going to be able to be used on this product. We can also exclude certain products that we don't want it to be used for, not allow it for it to be used for. So if I start for coaching again, we can exclude, for example, the 30 minute coaching right up here. We could also include all of the coaching as an option there. And then we have the product categories. We could be choosing one of the categories to apply it with. We can exclude an entire category, and then we can also Onley allow certain email. So, for example, if you know certain amount of customers that are big, big shoppers on your website, you could go ahead and so called white list those to make sure that Onley those people are the ones allowed to use this coupon code. Okay, now for this, I'm gonna remove these ones just like that, and then we move over to use such limits. Now, the 1st 1 is usage limits per coupon. A. This is the total amount off times they did scoop on. It's gonna be allowed to be used before it expires. So if I put this to 50 that means that after this coupon code has been used in a total of 50 times, or rather by 50 people, it's no longer going to be available is going to stop working. Then we also have the limits. Use such two X items. How many items are you gonna allow it to be used for? So let's say you know it's gonna be possible to use it for three items on Lee. Now, remember, I wrote for your order, so I'm going to keep this 20 which means that it applies to all of the qualifying items. But you could limit that and then usage limit per user. And I'm gonna write once. So a certain user can only use this coupon code once, right? They would go and then I'm gonna go ahead and publish this code. So now if I move over to the cart in here and I've right in, for example, 15 discount just like this, we can see the total right now is $44 I apply this coupon. We can see that we get a warning. The minimum spend for this coupon is $50 we have only spent 4 to 4, Right? So let's buy one more e book. You know why not? Why not have more e books, update the cart, and then we're gonna write it in again 15 discount and then click on apply coupon. So now we can see that we have gotten a discount for $5.36. And the reason that the discount isn't bigger is because if we open this one the gaming mouse in a new tab, we can actually see that the gaming mouse is on sale. And remember, this is not gonna apply for items on sale. So if I would go ahead and remove the gaming mouse and then I add in, let's say I'm wanted by six of these and then I update the cart and now I reapply 15 discount and then apply coupon. We can see that we're getting a bigger, a nicer discount right now because this is not on. Sales were getting the full discount rather than a selective discount like last time. Because one of the product waas on sale now going back, you can, of course, be creating more as well all you need to do is click here and add coupon in the upper left corner and then create another one. Let's send college 1 $10 get $10 off off coaching like that and then we're gonna have fixed product discount for this one, and we're gonna have it for 10 right? And we're not going to set an expiry date. We're gonna go to use a restriction, we're gonna search for product. And now I'm gonna search for coaching, adding coaching here, which is all of the coach ings just like this. And then I'm gonna go ahead and click on Publish and then go back, and now you can see that if I write in $10 right here and apply the coupon, you can see this coupon is not applicable to selected products. But if I go to the shop and then I go to the coaching and go to select options and let's say that I want to go for a 90 minute coaching session, I'm gonna click on add to cart and then we go back here and we go to view cart. Now, I could actually go ahead and use this $10 coupon, Apply coupon and we can see. Sorry. Coupon discussed. Already been applying cannot be used in conjunction with other coupons. So this is where the magic start happening with the coupons in order to make sure that everything sinks. So all we need to do right now is go back. Two coupons go to the 15 discount go to uses restriction and then individual use Onley, uncheck that one click and update, go back and then writing $10 then click on apply coupon. And now, suddenly we're getting that that big, nice discount going on, which is really, really nice, right? And we can see that the total isn't actually a minus $10 here right now. And that is because the V A T, which we are including here on this page, are being added in and the calculation. So when we're looking at the car totals, we actually end up with a different change from this coupon. Even though the coupon valued self is $10 But the minus $10 along with this 15% change is gonna change up this amount as well. But that is how you said that fixed a month. Now we can also be setting a fixed cart amount, which would be changing the amount for the entire card. So how you decide to use your Cooper's is completely up to you now. Generally, I prefer to be using a percent discount because I just think that most discount works the best in percentages. But this is going to be completely up to you from what's sort off promotions. You're doing what kind of marketing you're doing. And also, of course, you can just have, you know, a free shipping discount enabled as well offer them a code, and then they would have a free shipping options. So this is how you play around and add in discounts. And, of course, if you have any questions will be in the Q and A. Let's move on to the next lecture 118. Add Images to Categories: in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to add images Were pictures to our categories. Let's get started. So here we are at our beautiful shop. Now, if we go ahead and go to customize and then move down to newcomers and then archives remember, this is an archive page clicking archives right there. And then we changed the shop page display would give this in an earlier lecture, and we change it to categories that we can see that this isn't really looking to Good. Now we sit. So what we're gonna do is that we're gonna go ahead and add images toe all off these categories. So let's do that right now. I'm gonna go ahead and go to the back and off the for websites here, and then I'm gonna go down to woo comers, and then I'm gonna go down to products and then categories. Now, this is where you can start adding in all off the images for the category. So all I would need to do for this one. For example, digital products is click on edit, scroll down and they're upload or add image. And then I would go ahead and add in this one, This product we can use image scroll down and click on updates. Now, a really quickly to do this is by going back here two categories. And then if you're on a Mac computer, you can hold down the command key and just click on the edit on all off these sections. So, for example, I would click on command for gaming. I would click on a commanding click on edit for hardware hosting pets and services just like that. So now I have all of these different tabs. You could also just go ahead and right click in, click on open link in New tab on a PC. I'm not sure if it's the shift or all. You can just try that one out for yourself. And now it's gonna be a little bit quicker because here we have the gaming. We go down, click on upload image. Choose the mouse. Use image scroll down, update go to next. It's the hardware Go down, upload image. Used his image, use image, scroll down, update. And now I'm just gonna go ahead and do this and all off the category so they would have hosting. So there we go. I just updated them also. Now, if I go back here to coast customize shop and I just go ahead and I update this page, I'm gonna have to click on leave. Paige will go back to newcomers, go back to archives, show products and click on the show categories once again. Now, all of these products have an image except on categorize. Now, I shouldn't actually have anything linked to uncap. Big arise. That is my bad. So if I go ahead and click on it, we could see no problems were found matching your selection. So that is something that you might actually want to go ahead and go back to product categories, make sure not is linked to it, and then remove it. Now for us, I'm not going to save us from categories because I don't think that looks very nice. But there's an option to actually use and show the categories when you have a lot of items on your shop. And now you know how to add images to them. All right, guys. Great. See, in the next lecture 119. Fulfill Orders: All right, my friends, in this lecture, we're gonna learn how to fulfill the orders that we're getting. So let's get started. So we are at the back end for website. All we're gonna do is go down to Luke Somers and then move over to orders. So this is where all of your orders are going to appear, right? So whenever someone goes to your website, they adding a bunch of stuff in the car to go ahead and they pay for it or they don't pay for it. Even those orders air going to end up here. And as you can see right now, there is one order, and that is from me. And we can see that that one got canceled. Now let's go through what we can do here. Now The 1st 1 is obvious, and that is the bulk actions that we can take by selecting this one. Now, the bulk action we conduce, we can move to trash. We can move to processing, move to on hold and move the starters to complete it. We're gonna go through what all of those means in a little bit now. We can also preview the order by clicking on the eye here. So we get to see all of the information about us. What? We were buying all of the shipping details, etcetera, etcetera. Now we can also go into the orders. Manual is simply by clicking on the order right here. So in here we can see that the order statuses cancel. Well, because the order was never fulfilled, right? We never actually went through with the order. Now there are a couple of different statuses and the 1st 1 canceled being obviously good. Cancel nothing happened. But then we also have pending payment. And whenever there is pending payment, that means that people is working on verifying that the payment has gone through. Now then we also have processing and processing means that the payment has gone through and it's up to you now to go ahead and complete the order. If it is on hold, that is usually going to mean that the payment hasn't gone through yet. And for example, if you choose the authorized option rather than the capture option, you're gonna need to go ahead and change it to processing manually. And that is going to allow the money to come to your PayPal account. Now, I still recommend that you use the capture rather than authorized option when it comes to the payment gates. And then we have completed and you want to set completed on the order when you have completed the order. And, of course, what a completed order means is completely dependent on how you're actually running your shop and what it's for. So, for example, if you're offering a service, you might only want to change it to complete it once you have actually performed the service for the person. If you have a drop shipping business, you probably want to go ahead and make sure that everything is working. The order has been sent from your supplier and to that customer, and then he can change to complete it. Now, if you have supplying all of the items yourself, you want to pack everything you want to make sure that it's actually read and has been sent , and then you can change it to complete it. You see where I'm getting at here that completed. It's going to mean different things for different types off businesses, and then we also have cancelled Well, I think we went through that one. Refund it. Well, if you got refund and then failed if something simply failed so what you want to do once you've actually completed it, let's go ahead and set this to completed just like this. And in here, there are a couple of things we can do. We can check out the status of, For example, if we're sending a night and we can see where we wanted to be shipped to, we could contact the customer through email and even through phone right here. We get to see the items that they bought here. We can actually refund them if that were the case. Now, here are some custom feels and values that we could be adding and should we want to, But we're not going to be playing around with this. This no need for that. And if there's a downloadable product here, we can grant permission. And that is gonna be, for example, the way to fulfill and complete the order. If we're selling the e book, for example. So I would just right e book like this at this one in the link weaken grant access and then this person is gonna have access to download this e book. Right? Get access to this product. Then we can also change em. Play around with notes here. So right now the order notes says unpaid order. Council time limit. Read. Order Status changed from pending payment to canceled. Right now, we can also add in a private note that isn't note for ourselves, you know, whatever. We're working on the order. We're doing something we're preparing it. We're facing into troubles, etcetera. And then we can also change this to note to customers. So, for example, if you get the order in here and you get the tracking I d the shipment, I d whatever that is, you could just copy paste that and then add that one right in here. Now, if you're gonna make a habit off actually standing them the order idea of attracting I d. I recommend that you go ahead and do a template in a text document, and then just copy pays it for your customers, right? And then we also have the order actions in here, and this is gonna be you know, for example, if you want to send order details to a customer, so they make the orders manually from this mail. Now, if they do that, the problem is and they make the payment from there that the stock isn't gonna be reduced through the website. So you have to reduce to stop yourself. So I don't recommend that you use that sort of order action. And finally, I want to say that Luke Somers is extremely, extremely versatile. So it depends completely on what kind of business that you were doing and how you decide to operate it. And, needless to say, whatever issue that you're going to be facing along with rumors, there's probably going to be a plug in for it. You wanna, you know, improve your order fulfillment. You wanna work on drop shipping, you want to improve services, you want to make order management easier. There's going to be a plug in for that, and it's very hard to cover all of the areas because there are so many different types of businesses. But with that said, this is why we're offering the 24 hour Q and A guarantee that's premium coaching, meaning that we're always gonna answer you within 24 hours, guys So go ahead. Used a Q and A and ask any of the questions that you would like to. And we're gonna help you out and then make sure that you put down the time and dedication into this explore, find the plug ins you need, and do the work that needs to be done in order to make your shop successful. Alright, guys, and final note as well. If you really serious about your shop, go ahead and get on. Accountant, that is gonna help you so, so, so much. Trust me on this one. This concludes the e commerce and the Wu comers section off the course again. If you have any questions, will be in the Q and a great job so far. See you guys. 120. Blogging Introduction: hi and welcome to the blogging section off the course. Now you might already know what a block is, which is when you're posting your items on your website. Now, items being it could be post it could be articles. It could be tutorials. It could be how to, you know, whatever it might be posting these sort of items is known as blogging. In this introduction, we're gonna go through some of the many benefits off having and maintaining a blawg, especially if you are a business owner. Besides, it's just being a lot of fun to do off course. So let's get started now the number one and primary reason why most people blawg and probably the biggest benefit as a business owner to blogging, it's going to be the organic traffic that it will be generating right, an organic traffic, meaning the people who are going to be finding you on Google and then clicking and entering your website. The increase in traffic without even paying for ads. Now take This is an example here we've searched for the complete digital marketing guy. You probably know this already. If you've gone through the S e o section right. So here we've searched for the digital marketing guy. Now that's the key word in Here's a long tail keywords. So if you look down, you can see that we are matching with the complete digital marketing guy in the meta description here. The snippet. Right now. The point here is that if you are maintaining a blogger and let's say that you're doing one bloke post a day, you're going to be having, ah, lot off key words being posted onto the Web that this search engines can snap up. And if you start ranking for a lot of these keywords, which you will, considering that you'll have done your ASIO research on them, you'll start gathering. Ah, lot of organic traffic, right? So blogging can be a huge, huge, huge boost to your organic traffic. Now the next benefit is becoming an authority site, and on authority site is basically the go to site the site where people think, Oh, this is the leading expert within the field. So take, for example, Google. If you're going to search for something on the Web, chances are you're gonna go to Google because school is an authority site. When it comes to search engines now. Similarly, if you're going to buy a course, chances are you're going to go to you to me because you didn't Eastern authority. When it comes to courses, you want to be an authority within your niche as well, within whatever business it is that you are in on. One of the best ways to establish yourself as an authority is to creating block content, not Onley. Will you be showing that you know the subject really well? You'll also be all over the Web with your content, meaning people will read one article, maybe 23 maybe 100. And they will come back because of this playoff. Your knowledge, right? So not only you're getting more traffic becoming an authority site. And of course, if you are in authority and you have something that they need product wise, they will be buying from you. Now that's one of the many excellent points off blogging, and next up we have the deepening off relationships. Now it doesn't matter if you are a business owner or if you are a freelancer here. When you are deepening relationships and building networks, you are expanding your business. Even if you're only blogging as a hobby, you are expanding. And whenever you are expanding and deepening your relationship, your opening up new doors, right? So if you're a business owner doing a lot of blogging, you're getting to connect with a lot of new people, new customers and even other companies with your inbound links. Chances are this is not on Lee going to have returning customers, but also an increase in sales because now your customers and visitors can trust you further . They have read your articles. They have seen your tutorials. They have seen your post from behind the scenes, say that you had posted that, and they really trust you have seen the human side off your business, which is one of the huge benefits off actually maintaining and keeping a blawg. Your brand becomes so much more personal, human and in depth for them. There is a face to the business, and this naturally leads to a severe increase in conversions. So just imagine, for example, releasing a new post, and you can see that in let's say, a week. You're having 100 and 66 comments on that. This is an example, from WordPress beginner dot com, just one of their latest entries now 166. Comments. Imagine how many people that's reading and not commenting, but those people that are commenting are not only building a relationship to you, they're also offering you advice. You're thanking you, building a relationship to each other and spending a lot of time on your website. Now the next point is going to be marketing now. Consider why we want to be using social media platforms that to do our marketing. We want to drive people somewhere right, usually to our home base, our own website. And as with all marketing, we want to be giving them something before we can take right, want to give them value, and then they're going to come back for more and they'll be buying your product. You'll be having your conversions. With blogging, you'll be able to do your marketing basically all the time while bringing so much value. Here's another example from wordpress beginner dot com Say here they have posted This is a completely normal post on their blawg, where they're referencing to their own blawg post. You can see that because these are hyphen, so if you click there, you're going to be getting to another section off their website. Now. These links could have been affiliate links. These links could've buildings to your products with someone else's product to another place on your website. It's such an amazing way to do marketing and off course smart marketing where you are marketing in order to bring more value to your visitors. So it's sort of the same purpose. Is having a social media platform writer doing any form of marketing? You want to get them somewhere or drive them around. We have a retention and eventually we're going to be having conversations, which is one off the powerful things with blogging. Now, finally, we're gonna end this with the consideration off, weighing the effort versus the rewards here because the truth is blogging. It's a lot of effort, and it takes a lot of time. Now you have to ask yourself, Is it going to be worth my time and effort? Now say, for example, another way to drive traffic would be through ads. Now, if you don't know what you're doing with ads, this is gonna cost you a bunch of money and you're not going to be getting and the traffic or any conversions. But let's say that you know what you're doing with ads. You're going to be having a lot of traffic instantly. Now, with blogging, this might take a little longer. But not only will you be having a lot of fun while actually blogging these blood force, we're going to stay there forever and start snowballing. And this noble if it's gonna bring you more and more traffic over time, free traffic, but again doing tutorials, articles blogged, post they take time. And I willing to spend this time on blogging and my willing to hire someone else to do the blogging for me. Now, these are the things you're gonna have to consider as a business owner. Now, if you're blogging as a whole, be enjoy yourself and have fun. Okay? Blogging. It's not only a great expression on a great artistic expression, but it is a lot of fun to do. But if you're a business owner, you need to consider this. If you're a freelancer, you need to consider this as well. Is this the most effective way to get more customers to get more work for me. And if you decide that it is, then go for it. Do it smart, adding the CEO. Do your keyword research and finally have fun, because when you get into to get into the flow off writing, this is a lot of fun and trust. May your visitors will love it. They will absolutely lower. It's one of the best ways to make your brand your business more personal, bringing value, bringing in traffic and all for free. Okay, guys, I'll see you in the next lecture. Let's get started. 121. Monetize with Ads: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be tackling the question. Should you been monetizing your website with adds Now, in order to really know if this is appropriate, we're going to have to start off by looking at the purpose off your website. Now, have you built a website in order to bring your business for to reach out to clients to build a home base? Or are you looking to primarily make money off of blogging? Or are you doing blogging as a side hobby? Rasyid kick. Now the purpose of your website is going to be super duper important when it comes to deciding if you should be monetizing with ads because these ads are gonna be someone else's ads. If you were making your own business, selling your own products, your own services, you Onley want to be advertising your own business and services, right, unless you're doing affiliate marketing. But if you're blogging, especially if you're blogging full time or as a hobby, you could go ahead and actually start monetizing with ads because they don't need to make any action on your website in order for you to be making money now If you're looking to do blogging full time, the first thing you're gonna want to do probably is go to the back and off the website, go to settings and then click at reading and then move over where we have said our home page asked our home page. You know the home place that we have been designing right? And you're going to want to change that up to a blawg because if the blood is going to be the primary part of your website, it makes sense that the home page of your website should be your blawg, the first thing they see when they enter because it will be the most important part again. It's going to be super important that you define the purpose off your website. And if you are a business and you bring forth your business, you're gonna want to stick with the homepage that we have created. Otherwise, you might want to be doing some designing for the block and focus on the block. If you're a hobby blogger or you're going for a full time blogger, which brings me to the next point, which is traffic vs converting traffic now. If you are a business and you're selling products and services, and you are using This is your home base, if you will, for all of your sales, all of your profits, then you're going to want to make sure that all of your traffic is converting traffic right , because converting traffic is in the end, was going to be making you money whenever you're selling a product whenever you're selling a service, whatever it might be, even if someone is just clicking on your affiliate link, that is still the conversion, because conversion is when you take a visitor and you have them, do I a desired action, right? That's a conversion. Now, if you're a full time blogger, this is different because if you are using someone else's ads than the only thing that they need to do is actually enter your website, the ads will be visible and you will get money for displaying someone else's ads. In other words, you don't need them to make an actions whatsoever. You're still gonna want them to convert into an email subscriber, for example. But in the beginning you'll be able to get away, making money and actually starting. Maybe quitting your job, doing this full time by just driving traffic, which is very different if you're a business or even a start up business where you're going to want converting traffic from the very beginning. And if you are a blogger full time blogger, you're gonna have a couple of different options to be making money. And two of those options we're gonna be through AdSense and through affiliate marketing now for affiliate marketing. You still need them to make a an action, right? So that's going to be converting traffic. But with AdSense, you're actually using Google AdSense to display someone else's ads. And in the next lecture, we're going to go through in that what Google AdSense is, how it works and should you be using it, right? So all of that in the next lecture. But the primary benefit off Google AdSense is going to be making money from just driving traffic. Now, let's have a look at why it is so important for you to understand the purpose off your website and then make a decision. If you're going to be using such tools such as Google AdSense now, the first thing is to define the purpose. If you're a business, you're always going to want converting traffic always always, always know, converting traffic than no business. And if you are a blogger, you're going to want to have converting traffic and traffic. Right? Traffic is going to be able to make you money because of Google AdSense, but you also want them to be put on your email list so that you can be sending out. You know, your latest blawg articles affiliate links. You can be linking to your website even more to get even more money from Google AdSense, etcetera, etcetera. But if you're just starting out with your blogging, we're hoping Blogger, you're going to be fine starting off with Onley traffic and this is an important notion to make. You can start living off of this through just driving traffic right, And this is again because we'll be using Google AdSense so much more about what Google AdSense is and how it works in the next lecture. Now, the next thing to talk about when it comes to monetizing with ads and its possibilities is the quality over quantity aspect off blogging. Now, guys, there's currently over 500 million blog's on the Internet. And you heard that, right? And there are over four million blawg post being posted every day. You heard that, right? As well. Four million blogged post being posted every day. It goes without saying if you want to be a successful blogger, you're gonna want to make sure that you are focusing on quality. If you're not focusing on quality and giving people a reason to stay, you being an authority within your niche and providing value, they're gonna leave, and they're never going to come back. And you're gonna be lost in this trench off four million posts per day. This is insane. So that brings up the next and final topic when it comes to monetizing with ads and blogging overall, which is the level of commitment that you are willing to put into this Now, if you are a business you can get away with doing maybe blogging once a week or three times a week, that's completely fine, the main point being that you continue blogging. Nothing says in downward spiral business like a block that's never updated anymore. But if you're gonna do blogging full time, it's a good idea to do it at least three times a week and maybe even preferably every single day. Right? So this is gonna allow some time for for you to be recognized by the search engines for you to build up traffic for you to be making sufficient amount of money from possibly Google AdSense. Now I want to end this lecture by saying that if you are a business focus on converting traffic, I don't recommend Google AdSense for you. You're going to want to focus on your products, your services. So for the upcoming lectures, there's going to be about Google AdSense. If you are a business you've been following along in the courts, creating the signing your website, you can escape those lectures. But if you have decided that you want to focus on blogging or you're hoping blogger, then follow along to the upcoming lectures, and I'm gonna show you how you can start making money through blogging without your visitors even needing to take action on your website. So this is an amazing way to get started with monetizing your website. But if you're a business, don't recommend it. If you're full time blogger hoping blogger, let's move on to the next lecture. See your there guys 122. Google AdSense: All right, guys, welcome back in this lecture, we're going to go ahead and go through Google AdSense, right? What it is how it works, the benefits of using it, etcetera, etcetera. Now, feel free to review this lecture as many times as you want. We're gonna go quite in depth here. Okay, Let's get started. First of all, what is Google AdSense? Well, you could say that Google AdSense is a matchmaking program that matches advertisers and publishers with us being the publisher. Right. So let's start this off by looking at from a bird's view. So here we have Anne the advertiser, right? She is a great idea for a product or service, whatever it is that she has. And she wants to be displaying this with an ad. So Anna, the advertiser has an ad that she wants to be showing. So she goes to a place that's called Google ads. Right? So she wants Google ads to be showing this advertised to on a bunch of websites. Right? So that's exposed to a lot of people now. Google Ads has a lot of different services, right. There are a lot of different places and ways for them to be showing as. But one of those ways is through Google AdSense, and this is where we come in. So she's basically putting money into Google ads, and then Google ads are putting money into Google AdSense. Okay, so now there's money in Google AdSense. What we go ahead and do is that we go and we install Google AdSense on our website. And now suddenly we are displaying and its ads, and we're getting money for that, right? Because she is putting her money into Google AdSense and whatever money she's putting into Google AdSense, we are going to get 68% off that now. We're gonna go Maurin death into the calculations as we go. Now here's the interesting thing Google AdSense That is off course, Google, right? And the interesting thing here is that Google becomes the middle hand, so we don't need to contact any advertiser. We don't need to meet or greet. Then we don't need to do any deals with them. Google does all of that. So while Google has to deal with the advertiser, Google also has to deal with the publisher and that's us. And because all of this is compressed into their program. That's called Google AdSense. All that we need to do is go ahead and install Google AdSense get approved for the Google AdSense program, and then we can start making money from other advertisers. Adds. It's a fantastic and super East away right. So once that ad is being displayed on your website and you get to decide where you want to display it, it's gonna look something like this. So this could be one of many, as it could also be an image. It could be. Well, it could also be takes like this is could be most things, and also it could be most categories when it comes to ad placements, that's gonna be up to you if you give it an important place, perhaps is gonna be distracting on your website, but also it might perform better, making you more money. So this is the balance, and we're gonna talk more about that. So let's talk a little bit about getting paid. That's really the interesting part here, isn't it? So there are a couple of different ways to calculate and get paid on, and the 1st 1 is called CPM, which is basically cost per 1000 impressions, and an impression is whenever the ad is being displayed. So let's say that someone is coming to our website and they're clicking on, you know, First they go to the home page and the ad is being displayed, and then they go to the start here. Pasty ad is being displayed now twice thes air to impressions. Then they go to the courses and there's an ad there. That's three impressions, etcetera, etcetera. So on impression is whenever the ad is being displayed and the CPM is gonna be what you get paid whenever there ad has been displayed 1000 times. So the adverse CPM is gonna be about 1 to $1.5 this is fairly standard and fairly stable. It's pretty much going to stay within this range all the time, right? And then we also have another way of getting paid. That's called CPC. In other words, coast per click right. And in this model, you're gonna get paid based two people actually clicking on those ads that are being displayed now the difference with the CPM and the CPC, Easter with a CPC kind of system you need to generate results with the CPM. All you need to do is displayed the ad. Now the really good news is that these two can off course cooperate. Right. So the average CPC is around, you know, syrah $0.25 all the way up to $10. And there are a couple of nations that have over $50 in CPC. So there is really no real standard here. When it comes to the CPC, sums that are being paid per click, different nature's gonna have a higher CPC. So, for example, if you're in business services, if you are are in the attorney kind of niche if you're doing insurance, if you all of these kind of really heavy subjects tend to have a high CPC, and we're gonna go through why that is in a little bit. So let's do a little calculation and see what we need and where we might end up. So let's say that for example, we're having 40,000 page views day right, 40,000 page views a day. Now that's quite a lot. But over time, when you have gathered up and you've done a lot of posts. That's really not gonna be so much when you have about, you know, 5 600 posters lying dormant, filled with great information, lying there on your website. So let's say we have 40,000 page views a day. Now if we estimate that we have a $1 CPM, which is counting it really low, we can just go ahead and we can take those 40,000 page views and we divided with the 1000 impressions. So here per day, we're currently earning $40 right? So let's say that we also have a CPC that's really low. It's $0.25 we get 400 klicks out of these 40,000 page views. Now that's going to give us $100. So if we had ads that combined these two, then we'd have a total of $140 a day, which is really great, right? For just displaying someone else's adds. We're not really doing anything active, and with this we could, of course, they'll be doing affiliate marketing. We could even be still selling our own products, etcetera, etcetera so this could be a side income, which is amazing. So, assuming that we're having 400 clicks from these 40,000 page views now, that's gonna be calculated as something called Click Through Rate or C T. R. Right. And if we're having 40,000 page views and 400 clicks that someone percent ctr a 1% click through rate, which is also quite low now the average click through rates tend to be somewhere between wanted 2%. It can even be up towards five or, if you're really good, 10% right. But the average being usually around 2% anything above 2% is considered a good CT are so what we're looking at here is a total of $140 a day from 40,000 page views a day, calculating and basically the lowest possible at this point, and also Onley calculating the Google AdSense income. So what decides how much money you're going to get from a quick Well, Google's AdSense is basically on auction house, meaning that all of the advertisers are like bidders. So if there is a special nature, especially high performing website or just a really busy niche, they're gonna need to bid higher and higher and higher in order to get to display their ads . And now the higher they need to bid, the more money Google is making and the higher your 68% cut becomes. So this is what decides how much money you will be making from your share from the CPC. Now, once again, generally the impressions, the CPM are gonna be the same. But the CPC can go really high. For example, we can go well above $50 for a single click when it comes to certain John researchers, insurance and mortgages and all of those heavy Gianaris, right? So the take away is that AdSense is an auction house and some genres, some niches are gonna be more expensive than others. But off course, also, when advertisers need to pay more, it's probably gonna be more website mawr competition within AdSense as a publisher as well . But this is generally what decides how much you will be paid. And finally, let's end this by talking about the obvious and very important fact about that. You don't control the ads, right? Sometimes there's going to be things displayed on your website that you might not stand for things that you might consider inappropriate. And this happens now. There are filters that can't be violent. There's also filters were pornographic material, etcetera, etcetera. But there might still be things that might be considered inappropriate. And you're not gonna be able to control these ads, right? Because you will only be a part of the AdSense system where you put the up piece of code up on your website and then basically is gonna be luck of the draw, what is being shown there? And, of course, based on other things which we don't need to go through right now. So if you are starting out, you know it's a hobbyist, and you're one you want to create a blawg or you want to be a full time blogging. I strongly recommended to use AdSense, but if you have your own business you're managing and building up the reputation off your business. Then don't go with Google AdSense because you want to focus on your own, needs your own brand and not bring in some other brands and other businesses that you don't know who they are and distract from your website in the brand that you are trying to build up with your website. So once again, Google AdSense absolutely amazing. Four bloggers and such an easy way over time to be earning a lot off money and very passively asked. Well, so what? We're gonna go ahead and doing the next lecture is actually to start installing AdSense, and then we're gonna learn how to set it up on our website. So, guys, see you in the next lecture. 123. Set Up Google AdSense: All right. Welcome back in this lecture, we're gonna go ahead and set up or Google AdSense account. So what do you need? Well, you need to be 18 years or above. If you're not 18 years or older, you're probably gonna need your parents name or something. You can sold that together. Now let's get started. All right, so here we are at the start page for Google AdSense. Now, I put this in. The resource is so you can just go ahead and access the resource is click on it and then follow along my steps. What we're gonna do is we're gonna go here and click on Sign up now. And next up, you want to write in the URL off your site and the euro for us is gonna be https. And we're gonna right Robin and jesper dot come just like that, and then we're gonna write our email address. We're going to use Robin and jesper at gmail dot com for this one. Since since we already do have on AdSense account scenes before, and I want to show you how to set up a new one, okay. And then we have get helpful AdSense info at that email address, which is basically tips and tricks and signing up to their news letter. Now, generally, I'm not a fan off signing up to others newsletters, but I actually think they do bring quite good contents. I can recommend clicking. Yes, here. Since we already have that, I'm gonna click. No. So we're gonna go ahead and click on save and continue, and here we're just gonna go ahead and sign up with our Gmail account. Now, if you are not using Gmail, there's gonna be some extra steps involved. But if you're using a Gmail in order to sign up here, that's gonna make life a lot easier. So I strongly recommend that you do use your Gmail. So I'm just gonna go ahead and click on next and then next. All right, so here we are. Now, let's move on to the next step. We already have the euro four sites set, right? The next thing we want to do is select our country or territory, and this is very important because this is gonna have a lot to do with how you get paid. Right, So we're gonna make sure that we select the correct country. And for us right now that is going to be Cyprus. There we go. You're gonna want to read through this or at least get a gist of it. I know there's a lot of boring stuff in here, but it is a good idea to keep on eye on the terms and conditions. And then when you have read through it, we're gonna go ahead and check this and click on Create account. All right? And once we have done that, we're gonna get right in here into Google AdSense itself. Now, of course, you can go ahead and click on get started if you wanna have, you know, it tutorial a run through of how it all works. But we're gonna move on and continue setting this up. So there a couple of things that we want to do. The first thing is we're going to create a payment profile right now. The first thing that we're gonna want to do is go ahead and set up some information about us so that we can get paid pretty nice thing. So the first thing that we're gonna want to do is sit up or payment. Address details, right are payment profile because otherwise we can't get paid. And there's no point in showing ads if you're not going to get something for it, right? That's why we're doing this. So we're going to go down, and the first option we have is the account type. Now, if I click on this little pen here, we're going to get a couple of different options either to go by business or individual. Now, if you are a blogger and you're doing it, it's a hobbit or even full time blogging. But you haven't started up your business yet. You're gonna want to go with individual, But we're gonna go with business for now. We're going to write Robin, add Jesper L C D. Okay. And the next thing that we're gonna do is that we're just gonna go ahead and fill up our address, our post code, our town city, and then make sure that everything fits and then click on submit. So I'll see you when everything is filled up. All right, so the next thing we're gonna want to do is connect our site to AdSense, and we're gonna do that through using this code. And don't panic is just a code. I'm gonna walk you through this. So what we're gonna go ahead and do is they were going to select all of this code just like this, and then we're gonna click on Copa here to make sure that we have copied everything. Now we're gonna go to our website to the back end off our website here, and we're gonna go down to appearance and click on theme editor. Now, if you're not used using Ocean WP, it might say editor, some other themes were going to say theme editor, But whichever you're gonna click is gonna be the theme editor or the editor, and then we get in here and you might be getting a warning to to not mess with the code because it can break your site. And that's true, sir, we're not going to be playing around here. We're going to do this very safely and step by step. Now, what we want to do is go to the side here and then we just want to scroll down and look for the header that PHP. And there we have it. We can see this esteem header and below it says Header that PHP. So I'm gonna click here, and then we get all of these pieces of coats. And then if we go back and read the instructions and we can see that it says paste it into the html off Robin and just dot com between the head and the forward slash head tags. Okay, so that's exactly what we're gonna go ahead and do Now. We're gonna check for the head here. We can see that we have the head. We are going to click here. I'm gonna hit enters, I get a new rope, and then I'm just going to paste this in here. So we putting all of this code right in here, right? So we're getting all of this big, nice code sets here just like that. And then I'm going to click down here with says update file, and you'll know that you have done this correctly. If you are at the head of the PHP right, you have located the first head. You have located the second head that has a forward slash before where it's his head. And you put the coat in between those right, and if There is a bunch of other code in between here. Swell. That's completely fine. You just wanna hit, enter, find your own row and paste it in there, that's all. And now let's click on update file. And now we're going to go back here to Google AdSense and we are going to click. I've pasted a code onto my site, and then we're going to click on Dumb. The code was found. Everything is working the way it should. So this means that the activation process has no begun, and that's gonna take 24 to 48 hours generally. Now, in our experience, it's probably just gonna take, like, 24 hours or less. But anyways, you can expect it to take up towards two days. Okay, so then we're just gonna go ahead and click on Got it. And now there's nothing we can really do in here except way to get approved. So we'll see you in the next lecture, and I'll show you where to go once you've been approved for this process. Okay. Seeing the next lecture 124. Set Up Auto Ads: Alright, guys. So we are back. Now, If your account has not been approved yet, you can skip this lecture and move onto the next one in the course and then simply come back to this lecture once you have been approved. But if you've been approved, Awesome, let's continue. Now for this example, I'm going to be using an old AdSense account that we've used in the past. Now, in this AdSense account, it's not active, but were still able to see some analytics. So the first thing we're gonna get when we enter account is going to be our home. It's going to be our dashboard right here. So you're gonna be able to see your estimated earnings that you've earned so far yesterday , last seven days, this month and the current balance that you have now One important thing with Google AdSense is that you're only going to get a payout whenever you reach $100. So if you have haven't reached $100 for that month, you're that money is going to stay in your account all the way until you reach at least $100 then you're gonna get a payout and you're gonna get a payout approximately once a month. Right. But you're gonna need to have at least a balance of $100 before you get any payouts. So the first thing speaking of payouts that we're going to want to do once we go in here is to go ahead and go down here to payments. Right? So we're gonna click there and then we're going to want to move over to the right here where it says how you get paid and clinical managed payment methods. Now, if you don't have a added payment method, you're not going to be getting paid. You're not going to be receiving the money at least. And of course, you want to be receiving the money, right? So all we're gonna do is click on add payment method. You're gonna go ahead and sign up with your back. Now, I don't believe that they have added a papal option. Yet now Google has been talking about adding PayPal. It's an option for many, many, many years, but I don't believe they have done so yet, but they may in the future. But until further notice, we're gonna have to use their bank account, which works completely fine. So click on add payment method right here and then simply add in your bank account and then we move on. So once that it all said and done and you added your payment method, we're gonna go ahead and click on ads. Now, there are many, many different types of ads that you can be putting on your website and also many different placements off adds if you go ahead and you click on add units down here were able to see the option off. Add new unit. Now you don't need to follow these steps. I just want to show you this. If I go ahead and click on add New unit here, we're gonna be able to choose which type off adds that we want to put choose one of these, get a code and then choose a placement on our website and put that ad up there. And this has always been the old way of doing ads. But here's the great news, guys, if I go back and I go up here to something that says also adds, Google AdSense have actually added in a method where all you need to do is add a piece of code on your website, and Google themselves are going to go ahead and optimize the ad placement. The ad this being shown, which is going to be improving your revenue, is going to be improving your conversions, right? Your impressions and very possibly your click through rate Now. Ah, lot of studies have been done on this, and most are showing that especially for beginners, you're going to be seeing an increase in revenue between five and 15% through using also adds, rather than doing it yourself. Now add placement, add sized banner type, etcetera, etcetera that is an art. There are people who are doing this full time, and I really have gotten down into the very fine details and properly optimized it. But for us who want to focus on our blogging and make a good deal amount of money while doing so without having to dive into all of these tricky details and coding, Google has really blessed us with this option off auto add. So for me, it says you've got auto ads and it's looking like this for you. It's going to say something in the terms off star tears. If you go ahead and click on, start here or start now, you're gonna end up in a place that looks like this. So what? These are are you global settings? In other words, the settings in which you decide what type of ads that you want to be displaying. So there are different types of ads, searches, takes and display ads in feed, as in article ads, and all you need to do in order to find out what they are is Go ahead and click on, learn more. You're gonna be shown a perfect example of how they might look on, for example, a cell phone or on a PC just like this. So if there is some certain type of ad that you don't want, for example, you have a photographer site and you don't want to be displaying maybe article ads or in feed, as you only want to be displaying. For example, vinaigrette adds, for whatever reason, then you could go ahead and disable the others. Now, in order to get maximum benefit from your conversion from having as many advertisers as possible, you're probably gonna want to have all of these enabled. So for now, we're going to keep them enabled. And once again, if you're wanting what something is, just click on, learn more and you can see what they look like and how they work. Once you've done that, we can go all the way down to bottom, where you can decide if you want to automatically add the new formats. Now, Google AdSense, of course, comes up with new things all the time or two. As is one of those things that I haven't been around for too long. It's a fantastic feature. So this question is, if there are any new formats coming in, would you like auto ads to add in that format automatically? And we're gonna go ahead and use that and then click on save. Now. Next up, you're going to get an option that says set up all toe ads on your site. Now, we have done something similar before. In the previous lecture. We're gonna get a code, and we're going to be putting it between the headers. Okay, so let's go ahead and do that. Once again, I'm gonna click here. Is this copy code snippet Just like that and then I'm gonna go to the back and off for a website. I'm going to go down to appearance, go down to theme editor, move over to the right move down to when I see header dot PHP and then I'm just gonna go ahead and click here. And now we're going to find our header or head rather. And there we have head the 1st 1 and there we have the forward slash head. Okay, so what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna put my mouse there where it's a script. I'm gonna hit enter to get a new row like that, right? Click and click on paste. Okay, just like this. Now, the idea with auto ads is that for every page that you want auto ads to be showing auto ads being whatever size you know, whatever banner, whatever type of other that Google is optimizing, you're going to want to paste this code into those pages individually. But the great thing with word procedure and using the header is that the header, which is part of our menu, right, is actually following along was on every single page of our website. So just by clicking and adding this code in on our website like this on in North Header that PHP this is going to be applied on every single page off our website. Okay, so this is really handy then. I'm just gonna go ahead and click on update file just like this. So there we go. And now it's all set up and running. And within 10 to 20 minutes, you should have your add up, and it should be all working, and we're gonna go ahead and check that out. So let's go ahead and see how the ads are actually looking on our website. All right, so I've given it some time, is usually gonna take between 10 and 20 minutes, sometimes a little bit more. So let's go ahead and check out and see if the ads are up. And here we can see that they are indeed up sowed. The ads are working. This is awesome. Awesome news. So basically, this means that all you need to do this point is focused on driving traffic. AdSense will focus on putting up the ads on the places on your website that is going to be working the best, right? So The longer that the ads air up, the more AdSense is going to be improving itself by seeing Where are we getting the most clicks? What is working the best, etcetera, etcetera? Because, remember, this is a win win situation. The more clicks that the advertisers get them or result advertisers get, the more payment Google gets anymore payment you get. So it's a triple win situation so scrolling down we can see that there's gonna be completely random. Where there appears another ad and scrolling down here is yet another one. And remember, they're only gonna show the ads that we selected are OK like this one, for example, is a little bit different than this one up here. Now, if we go to other pages on our website, we're probably going to see them being on other positions as well. So we have to start here now. It's still on the top, scrolling down. There's actually no adhere. So let's go ahead and check out the blog's section off the website, and we can see that there have once again placed it on the top and nothing to decide. But it could be appearing on the side here at any time. So the point this guy's it is working. Awesome job. One final note. Don't click on your own ads. If you do, then chances are you're gonna get banned, so this is known as click farming. Now it's highly illegal. If you click on your own ad, you're going to be getting a some revenue for that because it is a quick right. So don't go ahead and click on your own ads. Don't get banned. Don't do anything illegal. You should have read through the terms and conditions already, right? And if you haven't just don't click on your own abs. So awesome job, guys. It's all up and running. Now let's continue on and continue focusing on the blogging K C in the next lecture. 125. Trending vs Evergreen Content: Welcome back, guys. In this lecture, we're going to be talking about trending versus evergreen content, what they are, how they work and the best practices for them Now this is a super important lecture. Chances are that this is going to set the tone for how you think about blogging and your content for the time ahead. So, guys, let's get started first things first. What is trending? What do we define as trending and well, we could say that something that's trending is something that has temporary popularity, right? And you're probably thinking off like the news off celebrity gossip, these sort of things. And that is true. All of those things are trending because they are very popular and a lot of people know off them because they're happening right now. But in the upcoming days, they're completely going to be fading out. Now, for our sake, let's take some more concrete examples off what that could be. So say, for example, that Apple releases a new phone right, and there's gossip about the four phone what the model is gonna look like, what's going to be featured and you decide to make a post about that for example, you're posting your thoughts. You were posting your predictions for this phone. Now this is going to be highly trending for two reasons. One, they are going to be releasing the information off the features off the phone and to once this phone is out, there's going to be another model that's going to be coming in instead, and that one is going to be trending. So this is kind of the way that it worked. Whether it's you know, Samsung or iPhones or, you know, Huawei phones, whatever they are, they're constantly re releasing new models, and the same goes with most technology. So that is where this could be considered trending. If you're deciding to write a blawg post, for example, about the latest phone now, another example could, for example, be the fidget spinner. Now I think this is a great example, because fidget spinners out of nowhere. They became huge, huge, huge. Right now everyone was doing it, and it's just completely blew up. Some people were really quick to start writing about this and guess what? They got a huge traffic boost, and this is the benefit off. Writing about trending material and doing trending blawg post. You can go from a very tiny, very unknown blawg and get a huge amount of traffic out of nowhere because just like a journalist who arrives early at some kind of event and gets the first footage, you are going to be one of the first people to report in. You're going to be one of the first the go to sources for this trending information. And that means that whether you are unknown or not as a blood, you're going to be ranking high because there will be no competition. They will come in a little bit. So this is one of the huge benefits off doing trending blawg posts. Now, if we look at the fidget spinner once again, for example, we can see that this is the interest rate Looking at Google trends off what happened in a three year period. So we can see that between 2000 and 16 and 2000 and 19. I mean, in 2000 and 16 really nothing happened. Then, somewhere in the middle of 2000 and 17 he had a huge spike. I mean, a massive everywhere there would be kids, you know, on the streets using this fidget spinners. They were so incredibly popular. People were writing about that they were in the commercials. Everything. And this lasted for I believe, two or three months, as the chart is suggesting. And after that it completely died down and the popularity faded. Lee, just like a typical trending topic. Now, the thing with this, as you can see, that if you were one off the first ones to go into this kind of trending part, if you're early on to catch this up going wave, you will have had a huge, huge traffic boost. Some people were actually even selling fidget spinners at this point, and they were making millions. But guys, here's the problem. After that, nothing dead. If you would have written a block post about this, you could have had a huge traffic boost. But off the worst in just a couple of months, it would be completely dead and off. No use. No one is going to google it. No one is gonna come. Basically, you will have put work into something that may have or may not have rewarded you with traffic. But it's not going to give you traffic over time, so to summarize trending content, it is a risk. But the reward is you could have a huge traffic boost, but it's not going to serve you over time. Now let's talk about evergreen content. Now. Evergreen content is content that is always going to be relevant. In other words, five years from now, this content, the evergreen content is going to be as relevant today as in those five years, maybe even in 10 and 15 years. And there are a lot of great topics on every green content. For example, you could be writing about the history off something. Now. The history doesn't change, right? No matter if it is, you know, in 50 years ahead or in 100 years ahead. If you write about the history of, for example, a product within your niche, that history is still going to be the same right, and this is what makes it ever again. So people can still be reading about it 10 years from now. Meaning is still going to be bringing you traffic Now, another thing could be, for example, business planning. Now, business planning is a method, and people have been doing it for, you know, 10 2030 years. Gold setting is a classical example. A lot of people are doing the same type of gold setting today as they were doing 30 years ago. So in other words, if you do a post on goal setting that is going to be on every green post because going to be it's relevant today as in 30 years, very probably. And now it doesn't only have to be about the gold setting off the planning. It could also be How do you execute the gold setting itself? How do you take, for example, a business from scratch and build it up all the way to the top? Now there are going to be some basic rules. Some basic principles is going to be as true today as they were 20 years ago. So, for example, this kind of principle, as you know, buy something cheap and sell it for more expensive. That's one of those great principles that are still as relevant today as they were many years ago, and this is what we know as every green content. So what are the benefits of evergreen content? Well, obviously, it never gets outdated. So if it never gets outdated or a T least it takes a very long time for it to get outdated . What does that mean for you? Well, if we do a similar look at Google trends and would do that for Blue Host this time, we can see that over a five year span. This isn't even longer span than fidget spinner. We can see that they are still driving traffic. They're still being searched for. So this means that if you were to write a blood post about blue Host, maybe how you set up a Web hosting or a WORDPRESS account using blue hose, you could be having as much traffic today as seen five years. And maybe even if you had set it up five years ago, you would have been having just is much, much traffic today, probably even more because you would have been had time to be ranking. But this is the point of evergreen content is going to stay relevant. So finally, what do I recommend? Well, I recommend the generally you focus on evergreen content and the reason is simple again, if we look at the chart, we can see that this is going to be bringing you constant traffic. And if you're going to be taking your blogging to the next level, you're going to want constant traffic. Now say, if you have, let's say 1000 posted articles 1000. How'd zoos or, you know, tutorials, whatever it might be. If those 1000 are every green, then you're going to be having a fantastic amount of traffic and a fantastic business. But of all of these are trending and some are working in, some are not. They aren't going to be serving you in the long run, meaning you're going to have to continue to struggle, writing the next, trending the next in the next trending in order to keep your business alive. That's not how you do proper business. And that's not how you make proper revenue online, right? You want to do this? The pieces that are timeless with that said, if you are planning on taking a blogging full time, you can focus on adding a lot of more trending content. The reason is simple. If you can get a huge traffic boost and then they're gonna go from that article to your evergreen content. You have hooked a lot off people. And if you manage to hook a lot of people, congratulations, that is customer attention, and you're gonna have long time readers. So, depending on your dedication to the blogging, if you are running a business, I strongly strongly recommend that you focus on evergreen content, especially if you're planning on blogging one or three times a week. But if you're doing it even as a whole band, you're doing it through your seven times a week, especially seven times a week. Feel free to balance it out with a lot more trending material, right? So hopefully that answers your question about the trending versus evergreen content and what to focus on. Remember, there's no right or wrong here. You can make a really nice living out of both ways. It's justice. I strongly recommend evergreen content to make it more sustainable long term. Okay, now, at the end of this section, you're also going to be getting over 30 blawg post templates that you can be riding from. That's gonna be examples on how to do every going Compton and how to do trending content as well, and it's going to be a perfect reference source. If you ever get a writer's block, which, you know it happens from time to time. So with that in mind, let's move onto the next lecture. 126. Guest Blogging: All right, guys, in this lecture, we're going to be talking about a super effective method that's gonna launch you in your path to become a successful blogger is also going to help you start driving targeted traffic from the very beginning when you don't have any and that method is called guest blogging and gets blogging is exactly what it sounds like to be is when you do your blogging on someone else's website, you're going to be a guest blogger for someone else. Now this is a win win situation. You're going to get a bunch of traffic, and they will be getting content without needing to do anything. Let's dive deeper into this, so we already know that guest blogging is when you write your blood content for another person's blood. That could be one piece of post. It could be 10. It could be 15. That's completely up to you, but this is what's known as guest blogging. Let's go through some of the many benefits and best practices for this. The number one benefit Why I recommend doing this and why it is so effective is because you get an instant exposure to your targeted audience. Now think about these guys. You just started your website. You just started your blog's. It's gonna take a while before the search engine stores to recognize you. It's gonna take a while before someone else besides her family members are reading our blawg one off the most effective ways to get a target. That traffic coming to your blood is to show your competence by doing blogging for someone else with in your niche, showcase your skills, showcase your talent and they are going to want more, which means they're going to want to know more about you. So basically, this is how it looks like you come into someone else's website with your article that you have read and write to your Blawg post, for example, in this case, five reasons why you should buy a boat. And as we can see, there's you. There's your blood post, and there's your blog's audience Right now. This isn't your audience, not yet, but this audience, someone else's audience within your niche is being exposed now to your material to your brand, to your brand's name, to your name, to your content, which is fantastic and, of course, within this is going to be a link to your website where they can find out more about you, your business, your services. If you're offering any or simply more off your content now, the next benefit off guest blogging as if we needed more. This should be plenty, right? But the next benefit off guest blogging is to look like an authority and looking like an authority. We've been through this before. You want to be the go to guy or girl within your niche, right? So that whenever people are looking for information on this, they're gonna come to use. For example, when it comes to a passive income, people are going to head to Pat Flynn right. When it comes to doing a search on the Internet, people are going to head to Google. If they want to buy stuff, chances are they're going to be heading to Amazon, etcetera, etcetera. Now you want to make sure that you are the leader within your field and when it comes to blogging it to look something like this. So let's say that you are an expert dog trainer and your primary expertise is within agility, right? You focus on agility for dogs. Now you might want to go to a dog training blawg and offer your services there and offer your guest blogging there. So this means that they don't have to write in a content. You get to write content for them and get exposed, and you get to look like an authority because the website might be about dog training. But you get to showcase your expertise within dog training, specifically within agility, right? So people interested in agility are going to be very interested in this post all of the audiences, and you're going to solidify your look as an authority across the web. Now, if you spread out your guest blogging and you continue within the showcasing that you are the go to person. When it comes to dog training for agility, people will be ending up on your website and your website. It's going to be the only in foreign source they need when it comes to dog training and agility. Now the next benefit is building back links. And if you've gone through the CEO section, which I really strongly recommend that you do. If you haven't you'll know the importance off back links. Now Back wings is basically showcasing for Google that, hey, this is unimportant website. This is a popular website. You should be ranking this site. This blogged. So when you're guest blogging, chances are that that cited you'll be blogging for will be linking to your side and yours. I will be linking to their site, meaning there's going to be a perfect way to build a bunch off back Ling's, especially as you can see in your guest blogging not only for one person but for multiple authority websites. So chances are that you're seeing the benefits off guest blogging already, especially if you're starting your blogging from scratch. I cannot recommend it highly enough. Now let's go through some of the things to look for when it comes to being a guest blogger , what to look for on other people's website, and then let's find out how you search for proper websites in order to be a guest blogger. Now the first thing you're going to want to look for is for that website. Of course, to be within your niche goes without saying, but also to have an active reader and social media following right, you want to make sure that people on this website are actually actively engaging. There are comments going on. People are commenting within the social media as well, and there actually is a social media. Now. This is super important because if they don't have a social media that's going to be limiting your exposure also possibly the back wings. But if they do have a social media, you're gonna have more exposure. You're gonna have a wider and more active following. That's going to be digging into your blog's content and finally, hopefully ending up on your website, reading your content. And finally, before you start blogging and writing your first guest blogger article, you want to check out the other guest bloggers right or more specific that you want to check out the most popular guest bloggers on that website. The reason for this is if you can find out who is the most popular guest blogger and why they are what they have read in the style that have written any. Did they stole someone's problem within a specific genre, something that you can copy because if you can become the most popular guest blogger on someone's website chances are you're going to be mentioned more. You're going to be welcome back more and you're gonna have more exposure. Not on Lee from that actual traffic, but also from the website owner itself. Who is going to want to expose you more to their traffic? Because you're bringing in traffic to the site owner as well. Remember, this is a win win situation. You're going to get traffic. They're going to get traffic now. You might need traffic more, but they might need content more is the perfect trade off. Alright, guys. So let's learn how to find out where you can be guest blogging. All right, now, the first way to find out where you could be guest blogging is quite simple. And I've added this method in the resource is and it looks like this. Now what you're gonna want to do is go ahead and use your keyword That's going to be your niche and then add in these words into Google. Okay, so it might be, for example, dog training Submit a guest post or opera singing guest post. By now, all of these words are simply for Google to be finding different blog's that is made by a guest blogger. Right. As you can see, all of these suggests that somewhere on the block, somewhere on the site, it needs to be a guest blogger. Now, once you find this site, then you find a good match on Google. You're going to want to go ahead and personally contact this site owner, right? Not always. Will they be, You know, some sort of logging. And you know, you can send in your application, know most of the times you're gonna need to contact them yourself manually. But first of all, you need to make sure that there is an active blood. There is an active readership and off course. You're going to want to make sure that it's worth while and within your niche. That's very specific in your niche. Now, the second way that you can be finding proper blog's to be guest blogging for it's simply to use a website called my blood guest dot com. Now this will be in the resource is as well, and this method is actually super effective and super simple even have provided I example down here. And basically what's going to be happening is that you write a block post and you're gonna find someone within your knees who's gonna like it. Who's then gonna grab that blood post, put it on their website and give you credit for it. Right. So this is how you build back link. This is how you find people and website within your knees in order to start guest blogging really quickly. So I highly recommend it. Designed after this website is completely free, start looking around and also using the key words to start finding good websites where you can start guest blogging. Okay. Now, if you have any questions whatsoever, we're gonna be in the Q and a but once again, especially if you're getting started. I highly recommended you start guest blogging. Okay. See you in the next lecture, guys. 127. SEO Introduction: Are you tired of not getting any traffic? Are you looking to start ranking on Google's first page? If so, then welcome. This is the S e o monster class. And my name is Robin. And my name is Yes, for And we are digital marketing professionals that have been teaching thousands off freelancers, small business owners and everyday people how to use and how to monster search engine optimization in order to start ranking own Google, get more traffic without spending any money, get more clients and grow your business. Did you know that if your website is not optimized, Google will not rank it? In fact, 91% off all websites will never get any organic traffic. That means that if you're not doing S c o on your content and website, no matter how good your content and Web site might be or look, you're not going to get any traffic, which means no business in this course. You learn how to spy on your competitors s CEO, use their keywords and outrank them with it. On Google, you learn how to master the number one ranking factor on Google, which is back links. Where do you want to sell something, expand your brand or grow your website, Asa Hobie. Then discourse is for you. And remember, you're protected by a 100% money back guarantee, which means that there's absolutely no risk in start learning right away. We'll continue updating and expanding. Our course is to make sure that you're up to date with the latest updates and material. We've also included premium coaching in this course, so that means that we will be answering any of your questions in the Q and A section within 24 hours. So what are you waiting for? Get started today and we'll see you inside of this course. 128. What Is SEO?: Now, in this video, guys, we're gonna talk about what s CEO is also known as search engine optimization. So let's dive into it now. What is a CEO? Well, as he always basically the act that we need to perform in order to get free traffic from search engines, search engines such as Google, YouTube, Amazon we having being where having Yahoo and so on. So zero is basically the act itself that we need to perform in order to get traffic floor free from these big websites. So now your question might be, How do I do this? So how do we do this? Well, first of all, we need to make our content more relevant. We need tohave. The answer that people are searching for our job is to find out what people are searching for. And the search engines job is actually 2% the best content for the users on their platform . So this is what we need to do. We need to make our content more relevant for the search engines and also for the people that are searching for it so they find our content. Next step we need to take is to increase our authority. We need to make sure that our content, whether it's a block post, is a YouTube video is a product that we're selling is popular. So if we go to the Internet right now, now, by going to Google searching for the term beard oil, we can scroll down, we can see in the top wearing sponsored content people actually have paid for this. So this is not eso. Then we're having videos here in the top, and then we're having some websites here with some articles. Now, a fun fact is that the top five results on Google is actually getting 75% off all website traffic. How crazy, Right. So that is why you would like to rank your website in the top off Google. Now the same goes for Amazon. For example, If you go to Amazon and you search for beard oil, then these are companies that actually have made their product popular. So the top results here will get the most sales. You can see the results with the most reviews, for example, and the most stars. They are getting the most sales and the ranking in the top because they made their product popular and the used S E o in the right way. Same goes for YouTube. If you go to YouTube and you search for beard oil, you'd make a search for beard oil here. Then you will see that while in the top we're having an ad here, not a CEO. But you can see the top results here has the most views. They're having a lot of use and also a lot of engagement. This heavily depends on what platform that you are on. Do you have your website? You would like to rank it on Google? Or do you have a product to sell like on Amazon, for example? Or do you have and YouTube video that you would like people to see? Now this is different. Eso and we will talk about in Maurin the course. But just know that you need to make your content popular. Then we're having something called technical optimization. This is the entire process that we need to do in the background in order to get seen and get found on Google, YouTube or whichever search and you would like to get traffic from. So that is the technical optimization the entire process that we're going to go through in this course. In the end, it all comes down to if we would like to perform good eso. We need to help search engines to rank us. We need to help them with presenting relevant content, popular content. And we need to do this in the background over website over YouTube channel inside over Amazon account or which ever platform that we're using. So this is basically what eso is and what we need to do. Let's dive in MAWR into depth on how to do as Seo properly. I'll see you in the next lecture. 129. Why 91% Don't Get Traffic: So in this video, you're gonna learn why 91% off all the Web sites on the World Wide Web is not getting any organic traffic, so let's dive into it. The number one reason is because website owners are trying to find shortcuts, shortcuts that will help them get tons and tons and tons of traffic. Now, this is not truth. Trying to use Black hat Seo tactics don't work. Trying to find shortcuts with getting organic traffic don't work. You need to have the mind set off long term success creating valuable content. 40 uses on your website. For them to stay on your website for a long appeared of time is really key, because if you do this, then we're telling Google that you are having and high authority websites which will lead you to long term success. So the mind set off long term success. Let it take time with Seo, and you will eventually win in the long term. The second reason why people don't get organic traffic to their websites. It's because they're repeating the usage off their content on the website, trying to rank for the same kind of keywords and just don't add any more value to their confidence. So if you're already are having a blawg, are having articles on your website by refreshing those articles and block post with more valuable content. You were telling Google that you're having a fresh website. You're having a lot of content with high value, and you will rank even better in Google Search and trying to create new content around the new sub topics within your niche is very key here, so to try to rank your content for a more variety off keywords is really key. But always have in mind to keep adding more value to the content, and you will rank even faster and get more traffic to your website. The third reasons why people don't get traffic to the website organically is because they're using to difficult language. Now, if you're riding in plain English, you're trying to use all kinds of fancy terms within your niche that will only confuse your audience when somebody's coming to your website and looking for information, they're looking for information off words that they can read now have in mind also that 90% of people speaking English are not native speakers. So by writing more like you're speaking, which is copyright, wanna one? This will make whom ever who is visiting your website toe Understand what you're trying to say and people are more likely to spend more time on your website which eventually will lead to higher Google ranking, which eventually will lead to Mawr traffic to your website. So right, more like you're speaking, That's copyright one a one. We will talk more about cooperating in this course later on, but just to be clear, right, more like you're speaking and you will get more traffic to your website. The fort reason why people don't get traffic to the website is because they're not finding the right keywords to rank for now. What do I mean with that? Well, everybody's want to try to rank for getting fit, getting shape, get more money and so on these generic terms. You definitely would like to rank your website for those kind of words, right or any type of generic words within your field. But the problem with that is it's a tone on tone and tone or websites out there today, all of the ranking for dose terms such as high a toy to websites. But the thing that you need to do instead is to focus all your energy on doing keyword research. Smart and I will show you in this course on how to do that. But essentially what it means is you would like to rank for long tail keywords, keywords that people are not trying to rank for but people are still searching for so that you can get traffic to your website. And the fifth and last reason why people don't get traffic to the website is simply because they are trying to do everything on their own. They are not doing any link building and what link building basically is to network with other websites with in your niche trying to create this bond with other people and other websites in order to rank higher up in Google search. Because if a website is linking your website on their website, then this are telling Google that we are off high it or do we are a popular website and you definitely would like to be a popular website and this way you will get a lot off more traffic to your website so This was the five biggest reasons why people don't get organic traffic to their website. And inside of this course, we're going to make sure that you are getting traffic to your website organically, so follow along to the next video and I'll see you there. 130. Before Doing SEO: in this video, guys, we're gonna talk about things to do before we go into a CEO before we trying to search Indian, optimizing any over content on a website on a YouTube channel or wherever we're having our content. So let's dive into it. So before we do any eso to any over content, it's really, really important to consider a few things. And the 1st 1 is, what's your goal with your S E O is to get more traffic to your block post. Is it? To get more traffic to your YouTube channel is to get more traffic to your product pages is to get more leads for your business. What is your goal in this video? I'm going to take one example off hours. So you have a better understanding after this video what you may consider to do before you do any search engine optimization to any of your content. For us in this video, it will be to sell this course. This is our goal, so we want to sell more copies off this course. So by knowing that we would like to sell more copies off this course, the next question is who is your audience now. This is heavily depending on what you're doing. If you're having any business, if you're having type of niche on your maybe blawg content on your YouTube channel or whatever content that you're creating, who is your audience? For this example, Our audience will be marketers, small business owners, freelancers, influencers and social media experts. Knowing this will help us to understand what type of language to speak in text, to get found by a CEO, so knowing your audience is very important. If you don't know who your audience is, you may consider to figure that out. Next step is what type of content is it that you would like to search Indian optimize. Is it a block post? Is it your poor? The cost isn't your YouTube video or any other type of content. You have to figure that out because next up is what medium will use. Now you can either use Google. So if you would like to rank on Google, you're having a website, maybe, and you having blood post on that website off course, you would like to rank on Google, then you know that your medium ISS, Google or else if you're having a YouTube channel on YouTube, is the medium that you would like to use now. As I said, Google is great for website, for example. Now this is our website. If we we have like and block post on this website, then we will definitely go with the medium off Google. But for this we would like to rank video, so our medium will be YouTube. So every search engine works a little bit different, but it's in the end, this same. So there's different types of criteria to Google than it is for YouTube, for example. But the main goal for these big search engines is to rank the best content and to show the best content in the searches for whom ever is searching for whomever who's searching for anything on either Google, Yahoo being YouTube, etcetera. So right now, knowing that our goal is to sell our digital marketing course, then we know that we have started with the fundamentals before doing any Seo to our content . Let's go to YouTube and see how this looks. So here are YouTube video and the title says, digital marketing branding why most businesses fail within the first year. Now, if I scroll down here to the description of the video, you can see here where it says and rolling to our best selling course on digital marketing here, and we have linked it here in our you tube video. So whenever anybody is clicking this link, they're coming directly to our best selling course, and they're able to buy it biased, adding it to cart here. But this is a goal for also always have a goal in mind when doing any optimization to anything on your website. Simply speaking before you doing any Seo to your content. And when you know all of this, it's time to find your keywords. We will talk much more about keywords in an upcoming lecture, so I'll see you in the next one. 131. Keywords: in this video, guys, we're going to talk about what keywords are. And I'm also gonna present to you an example on how to use keywords in wanted to rank on Google YouTube being Yahoo, etcetera. So let's dive into it in this video, guys, we're gonna take these pair of Converse shoes as an example. But first of all, what are keywords? Key words are the words that people are using when they're searching for something on Google. YouTube being yahoo in a search engine. Those are the keywords, and people are mostly searching for keywords to solve our problem. Now we would like to be the solution off their problem. So let's say that they're having white sneakers and they need to wash them. We would like to pop up as the first thing on Google to get all the traffics to our website , because the reason is we are selling these pair of shoes. So you would like to pop up number one in Google search for thes keywords. That is why we're performing something called keyword research because we would like to rank even better in Google search. So if you look on the screen right Now we're having the search term wash white Converse shoes and you can see where the air was pointing at it says Volume zero monthly searches, which is bad guys. So if we were to like creating a block post or a video or some kind of content with the keywords wash white Converse shoes, then nobody would see that content. So we need to twist our keywords around a little bit when we're right in the title for our content. For example, instead of writing wash, for example, we could write clean, and now we can see that we're having 90 monthly searches, which is way better than Ciro. But by just twisting this a little bit more. Look on the screen right now. It says clean, But we're typing dirty. You can see we're having 840 monthly searches. So if we were to rank for this, for example, Number one on Google and people were clicking on a link common to our website, seeing that we're having an article that is very, very helpful on how to wash their dirty Converse shoes, and we're also having a linked or sales page where we having sale on these Converse shoes, we will get traffic to our website, which is the main goal here, guys. So this is the main reason why we're doing keyword research. That is because we would like to rank for the search terms that people are searching for on the biggest search engines. And remember, guys is very important to use relevant keywords now for this example, use Converse shoes. If you would like to rank for Converse shoes, don't use Nike shoes. For example. If you would like to rank for Converse, use if you're selling commercials. Because if somebody is coming to website, maybe let's say that you wrote in clean white Nike shoes. They come to website to see that you're selling Converse shoes, and they would like to buy Nike shoes. Then they will just exit your page and moved back to Google, and this will eventually move down your page in rank because this tells Google that your content on your website is not good enough, then eventually your website William disappear on Page two Patriot page for etcetera, and nobody will find you buy these keywords. That's why we would like to use relevant keywords related to our products, services, articles or YouTube videos or whatever type of content that we're having. So always use relevant keywords when you're doing any type of a CEO on your content. And as you already seen that related keywords works to as you look on the screen right now . In the beginning, we have wash wide Converse shoes, and there was nobody in the entire world that were searching for wash white Converse shoes on Google, so therefore, we wouldn't have any traffic whatsoever. But if you look on the screen right now by yes, typing in dirty white Converse shoes honor article on our YouTube video, etcetera, then we can see that is 840 monthly searches per month, which eventually can come to our website buyer products or services. Signing up for an email list or just reading are blawg, post and connecting with our content and us as content creators. So this is why keywords are so important now. What are keywords? Keywords are basically words that people are typing into a search and in order to find a solution off their problem, you and your content would like to be that solution and We're performing keyword research in order to get better ranking on these search engines in order to get traffic to our website and make sure that you always using relevant keywords because you don't want people to come to your website and then just exit your website so that you eventually lose rank on Google on YouTube, etcetera. And you're telling the surgeon in that your content is not good. You would like to have people on your side on your videos, on your content for as much time as you possibly can. Because then we're telling these search engines that your content is very, very valuable. And also we need to twist around a little bit, sometimes by using related keywords because they work to search engines such as YouTube, Google, Bing, Yahoo, etcetera. They're very, very smart these days. They're having boats that are understanding related keywords to whatever you're searching. So this is basically what keywords are, and they're very, very important, and later in this course, we will go into keyword research and really optimize all of your content guys. So with that said, I'll see you in the next video 132. Black Hat SEO vs White Hat SEO: Hi guys. In this video, we're going to talk about the differences between something called Black Hat Seo and White Hat Seo. So let's dive into it now if you never, ever have heard something called Black Hat is your white hat, Seo. This video will be really, really helpful to you, so let's dive into it. First of all, what is Black Hat? Seo Black Hat Seo is basically when people are trying to treat Google to get bed the ranking for their website. So one tactic could be, for example, keyword stuffing your stuffing a lot of key words. If you look on the screen right now on the right hand side or stuffing a lot of key words that you think people will search for, for example, make money, make money, make money. So when anybody is coming to Google and searching for make money than their website can pop up in search. But it's very, very dangerous to do this, and often there's not good content on that website. They're just keyword stuffing because they want people to calm to that website. Another way that people are doing this is actually spamming blog's with back links there linking their website on another website and back links are very, very helpful and useful when it comes to eso and very powerful because of the reason that by back linking your website on another website then you're telling Google that your content is good because other websites have linked your website on their websites. But spamming blog's with a link off your website is not the way to do it properly. Another way that people are doing this is stealing and re posting others articles. This is just bad. If you look at the screen right now, Robin es but dot com. And then if somebody went into our website and copy the entire article on a website and they put it on there, it will look something like this and this is not good. Don't steal other companies and websites content. Create your own content and why you don't want to do any black hat. Seo is because Google can ban your website so your website won't rank on Google. That is bad. Guys, we do want to do good s CEO in order to rank on Google high up on the page for our keywords . So Please guys, don't do black hat Seo because your website will eventually get banned from Google. So your website, your content, your products, it's so on won't be seen by anybody who's typing in a search on Google because Google have banned your website. So let's have a look at what White Hat Seo is, well, white hat as he always. Basically, when we're having good content on our website and then people are coming to our website looking at that content, people are spending time on a content. Then we're basically just telling Google that, hey, our content is great Rancor content on the first page off Google. So there's basically different ways to do good White Hat a CEO and one example could be creating high quality information. Now, as I already told you by us creating high quality information on your website that makes people spend more time on your website. This will tell Google that hey, I'm having great valuable information for people to read and to watch on my website. So please just rank my page in the top off Google, and not a way to do this is by using relevant keywords for humans don't spam your keywords into your articles or block post on your website. Use relevant keywords four Humans that humans can consume because off the reason that you would like to have people on your website for as long as you possibly can in order to rank better on Google. Another way to do this is by guest posting your posting a valuable article or blood post. Or maybe you're posting a video on another website within your niche, and that person can also guest post at your website so that we're building some back links back and forward. You're sending your traffic to another website and that website, sending traffic to your website. This is a very effective way in order for you to get more traffic to your website and rank higher in Google's search. Another way to do this is by answering post vid value on blocks. Now you can go into any blawg really within your niche and write some valuable information for people who read that post because people also read comments within block posts. So if you have additional information to this block post, then you can write some additional information and then you can type in your website, and then you will have one more back link. But don't spam your website on anybody's website because eventually they will report you and then Google might ban you. And this is not the way you would like to do it. You would like to go into block post and answer with valuable information. So for you to just have the information off what black hat Seo is and what the White Hat Seo is, you definitely want to go with doing White Hat Seo, create valuable information network with people, answer post with in blawg posts. And this will make it so much easier for you to become best friend with Google. Okay, So go with the white hat, Seo, and I'll see you in the next lecture. 133. On Page & Off Page SEO: in this video, we're going to discuss the differences off something called on Page as CEO and off Page Seo . I'm also going to share some tips and tricks on how to do this effectively, so let's dive into it. All right, guys. So first of all, what is on page as CEO on page? Ezio it. What's happening on your website? What you are doing, what's in your control. Things such as creating better content basically on your website, creating and optimizing it for search. And we're gonna go through that later in this course, but basically is create better content. Create longer and more in depth posts on your blog's for example. Another way to do this is by creating better user experience. If you look where the arrow is pointing at right now, a better user experience on your website would be some kind of menus or sub menus that are really pointing people who are on your website to the right page where they would like to end up. So by just creating better user experience, we will have people on our website for a longer period off time, which is great for a CEO and you already know that if you watched some lectures off this course, another way to do this is by improving usage off key words. Now, don't stuff your keywords in here. Yes, use keywords when they are necessary. Next way is to improve page speed. We will have a look at all of these four inside of this course by just improving page speed . So when anybody is coming to our website, our website isn't loading for several seconds. So they are just exiting our website. We would like to have the traffic on our website. We would like to traffic to do whatever our gold with a website is right. So by increasing and improving our page speed, then we will make people to stay longer on our website if we're having good content. So let's talk about off page as CEO. Now what is off Page Seo? Off Page F CEO is mostly out of our control. Some are within our control, but well, let's have a look at different types off off Page Seo first off creating back links now creating back lings like networking with other website back and forth. It's very, very powerful because then we're telling Google Hey, I'm having valuable content because I'm having my website link on other websites. So by back, linking back and forward and networking with other websites, you will create a win win situation for both of your websites and this is great in order to rag on Google and to get more traffic and we will talk much more about back links in an upcoming video. Next thing that you can do is basically to encourage people to do social media shout outs. People can share your website by you mentioned your website in a blawg post in an article in a video etcetera. Now this is not fully inside of your control, but on the other hand, if you're networking with other websites, if you're networking with maybe a youtuber or something like that, you can get social media shout out. So people are mentioning your website and you eventually can get more traffic to your website, which eventually will move your website higher up in Google's ranking system. Another way you can do this is basically by encourage people to do social shares. Now if somebody is on your website there, reading one of your blood post, and they are liking that block post. Now. They can share this with a friend if you're having a share button on your Web site so they can share this with her friend through Facebook messages through what's up and so on. And this will also tell Google that, hey, this is great content with a lot of value for people. People are sharing content all around the Internet from this website. Let's rank this websites so off. Page Seo is not full in your control, but networking with other website with in your niche creating back links encourage people to do shout outs for your website articles and videos, etcetera will move you higher up in Google's ranking and also to encourage people to share your content on social media platforms or yes, through and message because this will also tell Google that you're having valuable content on your website. So please do both on and off page as CEO to rank your website high up in Google. Okay, so by now you know what on Page Seo is and off. Paychex, CEO on Paychex CEO, is fully in your control off. Paychex CEO is not fully in your control by by just networking with other people and websites. Within your niche, you can create better S e O and get mawr traffic to your website. So let's follow along to the next video and I'll see you there. 134. SEO Ranking Factors: in these video guys. We're gonna talk about the top five ranking factors that Google are considering when it comes to your material and your website for any keyword to rank in the top of Google search . So let's dive into it. So you want to rank number one on Google to get targeted traffic to your website to buy products or to you just read your blood post or watch your videos etcetera. Now they're different ranking factors that Google takes in consideration before ranking your page in your websites, and the first and biggest one is actually optimized high quality content. Now to write the blawg post that isjust generic that won't do it to write content that it really, really help for, for whatever targeted audience you have is key here. To write helpful information that is really in depth is key because Google will see that people are spending a lot of time on your website and therefore they will rank your website and the same goes for videos to have videos ranking on Google. It's key to try to make videos on YouTube as well because, as you already know, Google owns YouTube, so to make videos is also great and optimize that quality with great headlines and great meta description. Meta description is the text beneath the headline in Google when anybody is searching for something so by yes, optimizing that content for search, you are on the good hand with Google. The second biggest ranking factor is actually high quality back links. Back links is when you are having a website, you creating content and your networking maybe with another website and you're sending each other's website links back and forward. Then you're telling Google, Hey, there's a great valuable content that are helping people because people are sharing my content on their website so high quality back links you would like to network with big websites. If you look on the screen right now, we just made a random search for drop shipping. Master close And if you look where the arrow is pointing out, this is our course guys. Our course is ranking number one on Google for drop shipping. Master cloths and people are also searching for this. So we are getting traffic to our drop shipping monster close on you to me because we're having our course on their website and this is one type of back link. Actually, we're using their website a high A Tory to website in order to rank number one on Google. Because the web sites on the top, you can see there, it says add and add Those are paid content and actually this is a seo. We have optimized our title and we have also optimized the text beneath. So when anybody is searching for drop shipping, most of clothes, they find our course. The same goes for social media masterclass. We're ranking number one in Google search with S E. O. On this because we're using you to me ass and higher toward the website and you can start doing this as well. But let's go to Google and I will see you how it works. So if I'm here at Google right now and I'm searching for drop ship being Master Kloss and I'm going for the search, you can see actually in the top here you can see way says ad. It says ad. It says at this is paid content. People have paid for this, but actually by us using and high a toy to websites such as you to me, which means a big website, big websites that you, to me, you're having entrepreneur dot com and so on. They have been in the game for a long period of time. They're having a lot off content on the website, which means that Google are ranking them high up as and higher toward the website. So if I click on the first link which not says add here, you can see that we're coming to our course. So we're ranking number one on Google for drop shipping masterclass, which is awesome, and you can do the same if you doing this correctly. So by using higher toward to websites and using and networking with other people and websites within your niche, creating back links back and forward with Onley. Optimize your chances to rank in the top off Google, so use back links and don't spam website with your back links. Use them wisely and use them on Lee for websites within your niche and your field. Next up, we're having something called Google Rank Brain Google Rancor Brain is actually the artificial machine within Google that it's scanning all the Web sites on the Web in order to find help for information for whom ever who is on Google searching for keywords and the Google rank brain is actually just looking at two different factors in order to rank a website and content on their platforms. Number one is SETI A, the click through rate. That is how many percentage people have clicked on your link when they have found you on Google, and the 2nd 1 is dwell time. That is basically how many minutes or hours that people are spending on your websites clicking around, so to take an actual example, if you look on the screen right now and you're searching for, let's say, Robin in Jesper and you having different types of websites or links here to click on and you click on one of them, and that is the click through rate we would like to have as high click through rate as we possibly can. That percentage a good percentage. It's 10 and a bob, but as much percentage as possible is good, but and somebody's clicking onto this website and it come into the website now, it's time for the dwell time. We would like people to spend as much time on their website as they possibly can, by just pointing them in the right direction to the right block, post videos and information. So just by making people click in on a website on Google and come to our website and spend a lot of time on our website were telling that Google rank brain, that our website is great and that they should rank our website in the top, we will talk more about the rank brain in an upcoming lecture, but basically biased with your content on the website. Just improve the user experience. So with a lot of links, though, click on this link or click on this link. If you would like even more information, as you can only see on the screen right now, but just making the use experienced good, you're telling their Google rank brain that your content is awesome and that they should rank your content high on Google and the next CEO ranking factor that Google has in the consideration when the ranking any content or website on their page, it's actually how mobile friendly your page is. Have you optimized your website for mobile search? So today the majority of all Google searches for information on the Web is coming through and mobile phone and that is amazing guy. So by just knowing this, we can optimize our website for mobile traffic and if we do this, Google will notice this and also move us up in the rank. So always optimize your website for mobile traffic. So all the information within the images, videos and text is optimized for mobile search and for mobile use. And the last big ranking factor when it comes to Google is actually to include videos in your content. Yes, you're blawg Post. An article is awesome, but also try to include some videos and bed some videos on your WordPress website or weeks of website or which ever website you're using. Just embed videos on your website, and this is if you're having like a YouTube channel, you can create back links from your website to YouTube and you will telling Google that hate this is valuable information. Let's move it up in rank because creating video content and sharing that on your blog's, for example can make you rank on Google in the top. If you look on the screen right now are you? Search random for their search term. How to make pancakes? Yeah, I love pancakes. Guilty. But as you can see, the top results is actually a video showing me how I can make pancakes. So by just knowing all these ranking factors, we now know much better on where to look when it comes to optimizing everything for good Seo to rank in top in order to get more traffic to a website. So the 1st 1 is create optimized high quality content on your website, such as videos such as bloke post, such as articles and so on, and get into back linking back linking with high it or to websites. Create content for other websites to get backings to your website and also optimizing all your content for Google rank brain, which we'll talk about more in an upcoming lecture, its key also so that Google's artificial robot loves us and then making your website mobile friendly. It's really keep because the majority of all Google searches are coming through mobile phones these days, so this is really key and also include videos in your content. When you creating any content on your website So this is basically the different ranking factors that Google has in mind when they consider to rank your website and or your content on Google in the top. So now it's time to move on to the next video and I'll see you there. 135. Google RankBrain: in this video, we're gonna talk about that Google rank brain and how we can affect it in order to rank better on Google for our keywords. So let's dive into it now. First of all, what is the Google rank brain? The Google rank brain? It's an artificial program at Google has created, in order to scan the entire Web off their useful information. Useful information based on the keywords that anybody's typing into Google. So it's basically an artificial program than runs in the background off Google to try to find the most helpful information for a certain keyword search on Google. So how is it possible for us we'd or a CEO to affect that rank brain? First of all, as we already talked about in the earlier lecture, that click through rate and the 12 time So somebody is going to Google. They're searching for, for example, drop shipping Master close and they're seeing this course here. Now this course is optimized both in the title and in the meta description. So we get found by Google. Now, this is something that you need to do also with your articles, bloke posts or videos you need to optimize both the title and the meta description, you can see where the arrow is pointing out that is called a meta description. So that is basically how how somebody is clicking on anything, really, to get that click through rate through the roof. And then we're having this second factor, which is the 12 time. So if you look at the screen right now, somebody is clicking into our website, for example, and you off course would like the use of to spend as much time as they possibly can on your website Now. They either can go to the blogger here, for example, or they can go and click on the learn more button. You would like to create as good user experience for the end user as you possibly can to have them on your website in order to tell this rank brain that your website and your content is awesome and that the rank rain should rank your content in the top off Google's search. Another way to affect the rank brain. It's to optimize your website and your content for voice search. Now people are coming to Google and they're clicking this voice button every single day, and the voice searches is just increasing for every day that it's going by. So people are on their phone mostly these days, and the most searches on Google actually are through mobile phones. And just by knowing the fact that voice searches are increasing, you would like to optimize your content off their voice searches. So when anybody is going for Google and let's say that they are looking for pizza and you're selling pizza locally and they're grabbing their phone under asking Google, where's the best pizza near me? Off course, you would like to rank for those keywords. What you do is you type that phrase in into your content on your website. If you're selling pizzas, have that phrase in. Think of this, like in conversation when anybody's picking up their phone there conversating with the phone. Ask them at general question with normal speaking language. So optimizing your content for voice search is very important in order to affect the rank brain itself. Another way to affect Google's rank brain is to use keywords often. Don't spam your keywords in your content, but use them quite often. If you look on the screen right now as a busy is almost everywhere here, and this is telling Google that you're having content about this particular topic. Don't spam it Google with detect that you're spamming? Don't do that. Just include your keywords pretty often within your text, but also when you're writing something on your block post or you writing an article, please do it as you're talking to humans and also consider Toe have something in their optimized for voice search and then also to affect the rank brain, we can do something like adjusting existent content content that we already have created. If you're having Google Analytics, for example, installed on your website, you can see what is working house people coming to our website. And what content should I do? Mawr off what is working and what should I not do mawr off, and then you can also go through social media platforms, and you can also look on Google analytics for things that you may have like shared on your social media platforms. So what is working? Is Facebook working? The best is instagram working? The best is YouTube or Twitter working the best in order to drive more traffic through back links so you can actually go intact. Google Analytics and read out this data and see what kind of content is working best for me . And how can I affect this Google rank training order to rank in top off Google Search for whatever key what you would like to ranking. So basically what Google rank brain is it is an artificial program that scans through the entire Web, searching for valuable content that they can percent as the first results when somebody is typing anything to Google, to please the customer that is coming to Google. And how do affect the brain well through click through rate biased, optimizing our title and meta description. So it fits Google for search. So that fits Google for search, and people are clicking on our link once they are on a website. We would like to keep them therefore, as long time as we possibly can, and that is called dwell time. Then we would like to optimize our site for searches. Now we for having a local store. You then definitely would like to stuff in some keywords related to your local area house. People searching with their voice and try to use your keywords often when you're writing and a block post or article, and also actually when you're creating videos, for example, for you to bend your back linking that to your website. Also use phrases and keywords that you would like to rank on Google because Google will detect this and they will rank your website if you're having valuable content for the end user and also try to adjust existing content with Google Analytics, we will dive in more in Google analytics later on in this course on how he can see what type of continis working best for you so that your policing Google's rank brain and become best bodies in order for it to rank your content and your website on top in search for any keywords you would like to rank for. So that is basically it guys. That is what Google rank brain is and how to use and how to affect it. So now you know that Let's move on in the course and I'll see you in the next view 136. Dwell Time: Hi guys. In this video, we're going to talk about something called Dwell time what it is and how you can improve it for better. Seo. So let's dive into it now. The first question to answer is what is Dwell time? Well, well. Time is basically how long time people are spending on your site. So if you look on the screen right now, you can basically go into Google Analytics and see for how long time people are spending on every in each of your pages. In order for you to optimize your content for better a CEO, and not only the time that people are spending on your page the time that people are engaging like scrolling and clicking, that is 12 time. So if you look on the screen once again, if you're having, like an email, opt in like we're having on a website, for example, they are engaging. They're clicking there, scrolling, etcetera, and that is what search engines such as Google or including in their ranking factors when it comes to dwell time, the time people are spending on your site, engaging with your content. Now how can you improve your dwell time well you can go to the resource is that we have been linking Resource is such as answered the public or Basu mo content analyzer and answer questions related to your keywords. You can find a lot of different types of questions that you can answer there. Not only question that you can answer. You can also find content there that people have already created that's getting tons of shares, likes and so on engage ment, which you definitely want to go for when it comes to improving your dwell time and eventually improving your S E O. So use the resource is that we have linked throughout this course and answer questions related to your keywords within your articles and block posts, and then one really important thing that you would like to do once you created an uploaded . That content is also to check in if you have asked questions within that content. Otherwise, go back to that piece of content and ask questions questions such as. After reading this guide, how will you change your attitude to Wards s CEO and then you will get comments, comments within your block post on your website so people are spending a lot of time on your block post and within your articles, commenting, maybe asking you even mawr questions. Or maybe are answering which every question that you are putting out there in your piece of content, which makes your dwell time shot through the roof and your ranking own Google, for example, shocked through the roof as well. And then, once you've asked questions within your content, what would you like to do then? Yeah, you guessed right. You would like toa answer these comments. So by engaging back with your audience answering comments within your blood post, you will eventually get even more questions. And people like to read comments. So let's say that you have, like, 20 different comments within your block post. People will definitely scroll through all the way down, which means that they will engage more with your content. They will read the comments, and maybe they will ask more questions themselves. So this is how you improve Dwell time guys. So first of all, what is it? Well, dwell. Time is basically for how long time people are spending on your site, engaging such a scrolling, clicking, answering questions, etcetera. You would like to use the resource is and answer questions related to your keywords in order to increase the dwell time time spent engaging on your website and then ask questions within your content and answered those comments. That is how you do 12 time the right way in order to rank better in Google's search, eventually with better as CEO, so without further ado, I'll see you in the next video. 137. Keyword Research Explained: in this video, guys, we're gonna talk about something called keyword research on. We also going to talk about things to have in mind before jumping into the real action with keyword research. So let's dive into it. Okay, so what is key would research Well, that is basically the act that we need to perform in order to find keywords, to rank our content off their because there's a lot of content out there on the Web that Google already have detected and ranked. So we need to find keywords that week, A rank our content after. And there's quite a few things to consider before trying to rank for any keyword out there . The 1st 1 is you have competition. Where do you believe it or not? You have competition. Doesn't matter really. Which niece you are within with your content. How special you think your content is. You have competition on the World Wide Web. If you look on the screen right now, you can see there's over three billion searches on Google for this term. Make money every month. The same goes for loose weight. The same goes for get more time. The same goes for long life, so it doesn't really matter which nish you are within. You are having competition, and we need to find ways to get around this. And then we also have different search volume. So if you look on the screen once again, you can see that the search term make money is getting over 300,000 searches every month on Google and search terms like Make Money Drop Shipping has 590 monthly searches. They're drop shipping Master close, for example, or having 110 monthly searches. And people are even searching for Robin and Jesper approximately about 70 times a month. So different keywords and different phrases are having different search volume on Google, and we would like to find low competition keywords. What do I mean with this? While keywords that people are searching for but is not competing heavily for So for example, you can see for Robin and yes, for there is no competition whatsoever to try to rank for these keywords, so people are searching for it. You can see people are searching for 70 times a month. That's why we would like to rank for low competitors Key, which people are searching for it, but it's no real competition for these keywords, and we would like to find those keywords so you would like your keywords to be firstly relevant for your niche. Now let's say that you're writing a bloke poster making a video about pizza, for example, random. But you're making a blood post about pizza than in your title to write something like hamburgers or chicken nuggets that is not relevant for your niche, because maybe you want people to come to your website and read that pizza blawg post. Then when somebody is typing in on Google, they're searching for pizza. Your bloke post won't be found anywhere because you're writing in hamburgers and chicken nuggets into your title, so you would like your keywords to be irrelevant for your niche. And then you would like your keywords to be search for You would like to make sure that the key words that you would like to rank your content for on Google is getting searches every single month so you can get some traffic to your website, reading a bloke post buying our products or watching your videos or whatever gold you might have but make sure that you are having keywords that you would like to rank for. That is that people are already searching for on Google. Next up, we're having low competition. We already talked about this, but make sure that your content and your keywords are off low competition, so people are searching for it. But it's not a competitive keyword to rank for. And then, lastly, conversion keywords. Now, if you're having something on your website like an email list, opt in, you having products to sell your having services to sell and so on. You would like to optimize your content. So people that are searching for something on Google are searching for things that are related to conversions to buying things or signing up to something. So you would like your keywords that you are trying to rank for. On Google is meeting this four different demands, and then we're having different types off key words. So this, for example, is a shorter one. Meditation is getting a lot of monthly searches, 673,000 different monthly searches. Now let's say that you're having a meditation course or something that you would like to sell on your website. Now. Meditation is not as specific as we would like it to be right and trying to rank for meditation when people are maybe searching for how to meditate different types of meditations that so on. Trying to rank your meditation course for a single keyword like meditation is not a good idea. You would like it to be longer. So let's say that you have created a post on your blogger on how to meditate. You would like to rank for that, how to do meditation. You can see that it's still 40,800 monthly searches on this keyword, but in the next lecture, we're going to talk about different types off key word and which ones are the most effective. So follow along to that lecture, and I'll see you there. 138. Different Types Of Keywords: in this video, guys, we're going to talk about different types of key words that you can try to rank for on Google and also going to discuss the number one type of key word that you would like to rank for on Google. So let's dive into it. So we're having different types off key words to rank. For now, there's millions and millions off key words that you can try to rank your content for on Google. But we're having different types of them. First of all, we're having short keywords, mostly containing 1 to 2 words. Words such as pizza, for example. Now Pete's are getting 7.5 million monthly searches Now. If you creating content around pizza, don't try to rank for pizza. There's a lot of content out there high toward the website, such as Pizza Hut and so on, which already are ranking for pizza Now. Then we're having something called middle Keywords, keywords that are containing 2 to 3 different keywords. This starts to become more like a sentence, but this could be words like pizza delivery. For example, pizza delivery is getting over 1/2 of 1,000,000 monthly searches now. If you're having a local pizza shop, for example, you would like to try to go for something like this. For example, a long tail keywords. These are key words that car containing three or more words in them. And these are keywords such as pizza delivery Chicago, for example. You can see that this is getting also monthly searches, 1900 monthly searches. So we're having short keywords were having middle cures, and we're having long take keywords Now. Which one should you bet your time on? Well, focus on long tail keywords, keywords that are longer and more direct, so you would like it to be more relevant to your niche. For example, pizza delivery Chicago. Now, if you're having a pizza shop in Chicago, it's a bad idea trying to rank for either pizza or pizza delivery because people searching for pizza delivery could be in another country or another city, etcetera. So trying to be more relevant to your niche when you're writing this long tail keywords is very important, and you also want to make sure that they're getting search for If you look on the screen right now, we're having 1900 monthly searches for pizza delivery in Chicago. So you now know that this term is getting searched for and then you also would like to make sure that it's low competitors is not high competition for these keywords. And then you would like to make sure that his conversion keywords now, this is if you're having something on your website to sell, for example, pizza. You would like to make sure that whatever your ranking for is having something with conversion in it. For example, delivery. You know that you will get money when people are searching for this, because if people are searching for this, you ranking for this and they see you in the top of Google and click on the link and they find the piece of they would like to buy and you have ranked for pizza delivery. Then you know that if they go into website the bio pizza, you will make money from this, and the same goes if you're having like an email, opt in. If you're having products or services to sell on your website, where if you would like them to go to website and maybe redirect them to YouTube or to instagram or whatever your goal might be. Make sure that your ranking for conversion keywords key words that in the end, meet your goal if it is to make money online or to collect leads for your business. So guys with that said go for long tail keywords. We'll talk more about this, an upcoming lecture. But long tail cures is the type of key words that you would like to rank your content after , to make sure that your ranking on Google and getting traffic to your website So that was is for this video. In the next video, we're gonna talk more about keyword research, so I'll see you there. 139. Find Searched Keywords: in this video, guys, I'm gonna show you how to find keywords that people are already searching for. There's no guest game here whatsoever. People are searching for these keywords, so let's dive into it. So when your own Google and you're trying to figure out what kind of content to create for your blog's article or for your videos, If I'm going for a random search here, for example, on a mad detail ation So I'm having a block, Maybe about meditation. I would like to rank my content in the top search off Google. Now, the only information that I really can extract from this is that there's about 360 million results, so I'm not really sure on how many monthly searches this keyword is getting. So how can I figure this out? Well, I got an idea. There's actually a free extension tool called keywords everywhere that is gonna help us. So what I would like you to do is actually to your typing to Google. Keywords everywhere, and I have the link in. The resource is for this video as well, of course, but you can just click on this one and what this is It's basically an application for your Web browser, and it only works on Chrome and or Firefox. So I actually have chrome installed on this computer. So I'm gonna click on Install for Chrome is actually an application that will extract data like search volumes from Google directly in your Web browser. Very, very handy guys. So then what you would like to do is just click add to chrome here and then add extension. As I said, it's more like an application for your Web browser, and then you would like to put in your email address here. I'm going to do that because we will get an email address and then to install this on your Web browser. They would like you to put in your email address here and then just agreed to terms of service here. And if you would like to have, like, monthly newsletter like tips and tricks for this tool, you can click this box as well. I'm not going to do that, but for this I'm just gonna write in on email address here, and then I'm just gonna agree to terms of service and then I'm going to click on e mailed me the free A p I key. So we will receive an email and we will go into that email. Just copy that little code, and we're gonna put it into our keyword research tool, as you can see here, just open up your email. And here you can see if I click on this one they use basically need to click this link here . I'm going to do that. And then we're having this code here. I'm just gonna copy this code. Or you can just click this box here, actually copies a p I key and then go up to the right corner here where it says keywords everywhere. This is the tool that is installed so you can see that it's basically like an application and top right corner here. I'm gonna click here. I'm gonna go into settings and then the a p I key. I'm just gonna pay set in command V or control V, depending on what kind of computer you're having. And then just click on validate. And now it's done. Now, once you are in here, you can see that if you would like to have information also and you running like abs, for example, and you would like to see the information about how much an ad for, like, Google ads is costing you like cost per click. You can have this like Shaked. I'm not gonna have that checked. And then you can see the competition here a swell. And then you just put in your currency. If you would like to run at this tool works well for that as well. We're just gonna have this volume box here. Check because we would like to see how many monthly searches is a key word getting. Then you can see that this tool supports websites such as Google Search, Google Search digits, Google Analytics, Google Search console also YouTube If you're using Google keyword planner, Amazon, etc. Etcetera. But here's the thing, guys. This is on Lee. The volume shown, for example, on being YouTube, Amazon eBay etcetera off the monthly searches at google dot com. So if you are on YouTube, for example, looking for ideas for your V, just this won't be as accurate because the volume of monthly searches will come from Google . This will also give you a guideline, but it's not accurate before that particular platform. Just have that in mind. So once we are happy with all of our settings, what it would like you to do is just exit out of here. Let's exit, exit, exit and exit. Now we're gonna go to Google. And now is the time to really search for meditation, for example, or you're going with your keyword. If you're going with a shorter keyword, know that a long tail keywords is where we want to go into. But for this I'm just gonna write in meditation here. And what we casino is not only the results off searches here, we can also see the volume. So here we can see that meditation is getting about 673,000 monthly searches. Now, in order for you to rank, for example, a new website for the word meditation and people coming to your website by us clicking in the top here, it's pretty small. That is not likely to happen. So what we would like to do is to twist this around to find, like ideas for our content that we can create and rank for on Google, right? So if you're writing a book post an article or creating a video. You would like to optimize that for Google in order to get traffic to that block, post video or article. For example, What you gonna do? It's used to go to this in the beginning of meditation, click on Dash. As you can see here, we're getting some results now, like meditation benefits, like getting almost 50,000 monthly searches and then meditation techniques for beginners meditation videos, you can see different types of monthly searches here. Now it's hard to rank for this that is, having a lot off monthly searches, so beneath 1000 would be a good guideline to go after. But for this, for example, to get more ideas around meditation. If it's like, totally stop in your brain right now, then you gets click in the beginning of meditation years. Click on Dash, okay, and then you can see that we're getting even more ideas here. Like, for example, guided meditations, sleep, meditation, mindful meditation. You can see that they're having different types of monthly searches here. So this is how you can find out that the key word that you are searching for and would like to rank on Google for its getting searches every month. This is valuable information now. If you would like, for example, to start with meditation in your title for your like video or for your article. What you can do is just click on Dash after this, let's say that you're having like, an application with the meditation music. For example, let's write in music here So meditation music and then click on dash. And here we're getting meditation music, YouTube, meditation, music for kids. You can see that it's decreasing when you're putting in more words into this, and this is called long tail keywords, their arm or words in the search. So this is perfect in water for us to start ranking. Actually, it's over this meditation music up, for example, and here we can see that we're having 6600 monthly searches Now we may have to narrow this down a little bit, but now we're getting some ideas on how to narrow searches down because we won't get the big masses that are searching, for example, on Lee for meditation to our website. And that is not the traffic we would like. Toa have either remember that we would like to have people that it's searching for long tail keyword with some kind of action like, for example, meditation music up in the beginning Off this, we could see if people are searching for, for example, down lo being meditation, music, app. Let's see if somebody searching for this at all. No, currently not so If you were to create an like an article, for example, and your title for that article would be downloading meditation, music, app, Then you can see here there's no monthly searches whatsoever. So let's remove downloading and let's go with this because now we know that people are searching for this right meditation, music, app. Now we're having one to sell, maybe on our website where maybe you're having some other kind of products to sell. Doesn't matter. You would like to make sure that people are searching for whatever type of content that you would like to create on your blog's or for whatever type of product that you're selling so that you get direct traffic to your website traffic that's either going to sign up to an email. Opt in, is gonna buy your product, read your bloke post create a deeper relationship with you and with your brand. So to get more information, you can see on the right hand side here, we're having something called related keywords. Now, these are the words that are basically related to whatever we're searching for. Meditation, APS, yoga music, calm app. And you can see the different type of volume here on the right hand side. We scrolling down a little bit more on the right hand side here we can get a list of people also are searching for, and here we're getting the list. Now, this is really valuable information, and we would like to have all of this information here exported to and see SV file with the CIA's V file. We are able to in the next lecture see what kind off key words that we have the possibility with our website to rank for on Google. So what we're going to do now is we're gonna export this list because this is also key words that people are searching for, right? So I'm going to click on Export to see SV here. And then if I click this little arrow here in the bottom left corner. I'm gonna click on open. And this is basically how to see as v file. Looks like this is just some extracting information with all the key words that are related to the ones that were searching for and also the volume on monthly searches. Now, in the next video, we're gonna take this CIA sweet file and put it into another program and see, what kind of keywords are we able to rank for own Google with our content. So we're not wasting a lot off time and effort and maybe money on what we're doing. So I'll see you in the next video where we're going to make sure that your content is gonna get ranked on Google. See you there, guys. 140. Find Keywords to Rank For: in this video, guys, I'm gonna show you how to find keywords that you can rank your content and website for on Google. So let's dive into it. Okay, guys, we are at the website called Moss, most dot com. Lincoln Resource is click that link and follow along on the screen. This is actually an tool that is costing money, but not for you. For the 1st 30 day. So we're having a 30 day free trial, so let's use it. So go up here where it says free seo tools and click there and then scroll down. And here we can see that we're getting a keyword explorer, Link Explorer and the most bar. We're only gonna use this keyword explorer, actually. So what I would like you to do is click to start my 30 day free trial. Now, in here, you need to put in some information like your email, your display name, and so on. If you're having, like, people on your company here, how many and then put in some credit card details here and then put in the billing address for this card, etcetera. As you can see, this program cost $179 per month. Pretty expensive, But we can use this program for 30 days without any cost, and we can actually cancel the subscription today. So I'm will also put up a link here and how to cancel the subscription today. So you don't have to waste any money of this program. So But if you like this program, you can totally just keep on rolling with your subscription. So for days now, just sign up here and I'll see you inside. Okay? Once you logged in, click on most pro here and then click on Keyword Explorer. And what you can do with this tool is actually to write in any type of word here, and you will get a lot of information about that word. How easy is it to rank for that word? How many monthly searches are there? And so on Most is a very powerful S O toole. In order to find out if you can rank for a certain keyword or more keywords, so what we're gonna do is actually scroll down a little bit, click on, create or upload new list here because we're going to create a new list. So whatever keyword that you would like to rank for or keywords in the last video we actually found out. What kind of keywords can we rank for on, like, meditation, app for music, etcetera. So whatever keyword that you were having and whatever keyword and list see SV file that you were extracting, we're gonna put that in here and we're going to see which one off these keywords are. We have the possibility to rank for on Google, so we know what type of content that we can create and start ranking for on Google. So just create your list name here. I'm going to create meditation app, for example. And you just put in your name there for this list, and then you can either enter key words here manually up to 500 different keywords, or you can upload that C S V file. So I'm gonna click on upload see SV file, and then we have got a click on that sees the file, and in the seas we fight. We're having all kinds off related long tail keywords that we have the possibility to maybe rank for. We're gonna look at a score for this on how the possibility is for us to rank. Now you can put in your country here, for example, and this is the country from which the searches comes from. Now are you having like and certain country? Then just put in that certain country. I'm gonna go with the United States for this and yes, click on save. And now, when I'm clicking into this list here, meditation up, what we're going to see is it's gathering metrics. So this will take a couple of minutes. But on the left hand side here, we can see that there's air 31 different keywords. Now you can see that that is different. A month off, keywords within every keyword. So this is one keyword. This is one keyword. This is one key word and so on. And what you can see also is the rank of that keyword monthly volume. And also remember guys that we put in the United States. So the Monk Linh volume and may not match the keywords everywhere tool that we had in the last video and here again see the difficulty and so on. So we're just gonna let this load for a bit Okay, guys. So it's finished loading your scrolling down. You can see some para matters here, but what's really interesting, actually, when you're scrolling down here, you can see that monthly searches so you can basically us sort them by monthly searches here by clicking on monthly searches. There are no data for this, but here we're having some data. No relaxing games is not relative for us, actually. But call meditation is so here it is it a monthly volume here, But here we can see the difficulty. And this is the most important part off this entire video because we would like to see how difficult is it for us to rank for these keywords? So what I'm going to do is just click on difficulty here and then we can see that calm. Ap Oh, I'm not sure what that means, but here it is a call. Meditation is having a difficulty off 62. Now there's actually an range from Syria. 200 100 is too difficult, and zero is no difficulty whatsoever. So 62 is pretty high. What we would like to go after is the lower amount off difficulty. So I'm going to click this difficulty once again, and here we can see that we're having a nine for this. And here we can also see the monthly volume meaning how many searches Art is getting a month. So O. M. Meditation music, MP three free download. Is this something that we would like to rank for? Actually not nature guided Meditation is getting a score of 19 out of 100 that is still good. So you would like to have this difficulty under 30 sometimes under 40 depending on how much articles and how, like Hyatt toward the website you're having. We have any authority within that subject that you're creating content about. Maybe you're having that. Maybe you can have the difficulty a little bit higher in the score. But if you're like pretty new to this and you may be having just build your website, just go with under 30 when you're creating any type of content. But for this, for example, we can see that we're getting about 11 to 50 monthly searches for nature guided meditation . We could definitely to write an article about this and get approximately a traffic off 50 new people to our website reading are bloke post maybe buying some articles every single month. Now, that is a traffic over 500 people every year, year around the year around. And the more articles you're having on your website, more videos, more confident than more traffic you will gain. So this is how you are extracting data from Moss and seeing what type of content that you actually are able to rank for on Google have the difficulty score beneath 30 at all times in the beginning, off creating a website, I would say. And then just read out if there are any monthly search volume here as well for this word, keywords everywhere is a great tool, but this pay to have more accuracy, actually. So if you like most, just go with pay plan. Otherwise, don't forget to cancel this plan. If you don't want to go four days off to 30 days, you can cancel it today when you're signing up. But this is actually how you find ideas on how to start ranking any content, and this is actually how to find out that the content that you are going to create is actually having a chance to rank on Google. So you're saving time. You're saving effort and so on. So go and sign up for most now and I'll see you in the next lecture. 141. Get Content Ideas: in this video, guys, I'm going to take you step by step on how you can find content, ideas, lead magnet ideas and all kinds of ideas for all the material, all new webs. I didn't order to rank for that material on Google, so let's dive into it. So we're going to start off by going to answer the public dot com you have the link in. The resource is I'm going to scroll up here so you're seeing everything on the screen. So in here we can find content ideas that we can create. This is basically an a website where you're having all kinds of questions that people are asking all around the Internet. So by just typing in your keyword in here, you will get tons of questions that you are able to answer. And what is the best thing with this tool is actually that it works with keywords everywhere. So have a look now on the screen. Let's go to this box here and typing fishing. Let's say that you have created a blawg or you're running an entire business about fishing . Let's see what kind of questions that we can answer because we would like to have the questions for the answers that people are putting into Google in order to get ranked by the search engines and find by people. So we get traffic to our website. So by typing in any search term here we're presenting if I'm scrolling down with tons and tons off content ideas, if you look on the screen right now, you can see where it says are here. You can see different questions within this topic, like our our fishing lights illegal, our fishing rolled tubes, etcetera. And here we also have will and we have wear and so on. You can see why, for example, why fishing is good, why fishing is bad, why fishing is fun and so on. Now it's a pretty hard to read out things from this. So instead of like trying to read like this or trying to read like this, what you can do it actually is. Just click on data here and here you will have all the questions that people are putting into Google, and what is the coolest thing here guys is, Actually we don't have to cook. All of these phrases go to Google and see what keywords everywhere is telling us about the monthly volume searches. What we can do is actually just look beside here on the right hand side off the word on how many monthly searches this term is getting, actually. So this Kurt keyword, for example, are fishing weights made off lead is getting 30 monthly searches. Then we know that, and so on. Here, we can see on the right hand side on how, for example, how fishing networks 110 monthly searches, how fishing roads are made 110 monthly searches and so on. This is an amazing tool in order to figure out what types of content that we can create and then we're gonna justify if this is a good idea or not. If we in the future can get found on Google or not, because we don't want to spend time on like articles and block post and lead magnets etcetera on a website and try to guess if this is a good idea or not, in order to get ranked on Google with good CEO, so what you can do in order to justify if this is good ideas or not? If you found something that Hey, I could write a blood post about this. I could create a lead magnet around this topic. Maybe with a video serious to send out or whatever type of contact did you prefer to do? What you can do is basically, you can just copy all of this text. We actually going to go to Moss most dot com. You remember that we signed up with this program. Once you logged in your interface off the program should look something like this. And then you go up to most pro click on most pro, and then you go to keyword Explorer and then you remember the keyword phrase that we copied . I clicked on command. See, it might be control see on your PC. But you just copy that one and you paste it in here and then make sure that you're picking the right country here for us. It will be United States, actually. And then I go for a search. Now we can do this process with every key word that you would like to, or what you could do is you can actually go here and you can, like, export and see as V file. The problem with just this program is that it will copy all of these terms. It will also copy are can image hide and so on. So I wouldn't prefer to do this, actually. So what you can do is actually you can just go in here and manually pick the ones that you see that they're having decent amount of monthly searches. You would, if you're having an new website, have, like under 1000 monthly searches. And remember that the long tail keywords is the ones that we would like to go for, which are having some kind of questions around it. So you don't want to go for, like, fishing or like pro fishing or so on. You would like to go for, like, sir, terms and key words like how fishing networks, how fishing roads are made and so on, but keep them beneath 1000 monthly searches in the beginning and try to run them by moss. So for this, for example, I would just copy this, and then we can see that information down here. You can see that the monthly searches for this are between 11 and 50 and so on. But this is not the key here. We would like to create that list. So I'm gonna move back here, and then I'm going to create or upload new list. You can go upload sees V. We're gonna enter this in, like, manually one by one. For this, I will years typing this list will call fishing, and then we paste that in with, jumped down a road, and we moved back. And we're just gonna do this a little bit quick, so I'm gonna fast forward a little bit. And once you have your list off key words here, some of them at least you simply just picked the country here and you click on save. Okay. Then we just go into that list here, and we just let it gather the metrics here for all the keywords that we put them, and then we'll see some statistics. Okay, guys. So now it's loaded, and then we just click on difficulty. So we have all statistics here on, like, home. Any monthly volume. This is getting on the left hand side here, and then we're having this line off like difficulty, and then we're having more scores here. But what we're looking for is yesterday. Difficulty one. So I'm gonna click that once again, and then we can see. Actually, this is a really good one. What fishing line to use? Awesome. Now, if you're having, like an e commerce store on your website installed and you're having like fishing lines to sell, this would read a perfect article for you to write. Look at this. What fishing line to use. You can see that there's getting between 102 100 monthly searches, and the difficulty score is not too bad. Actually, what I could do is actually just copied this one, and I can use this as a title for a block post article or also lead magnet. Let's say that you were selling fishing lines, for example, on your website. Then you can create like an opt in, like collecting emails, for example, which is the line that you prefer. And just put in your answer here and put in your email or something like that, something that can collect information about the traffic that's coming to your website or else you can just write a really in depth block post about what fishing line to use and you can see the difficult is under 30 and you can see that the monthly searches are between 102 100 searches, which is really, really good. So first of all, go to this answer the public dot com, and what I would like you to do is whatever keywords that you're having in your mind or whatever, like topic that you're writing blawg post or creating content on your website around. Or if you're having a total new website, what kind of content and what kind of keywords are it that you would like to rank for on Google? Tied those keywords in here now is it meditation, for example, He has Type that in here and click on Get questions. Then you will get a lot of questions. They're off, which that you can answer. You take those questions and you just paste them in. You go to most dot com and you go to keyword Explorer, and either you can paste them in here one by one and click on the search top here. Or else you can create a new list here, and just name it after your keyword. You can download this See SV file, which I showed you. Or else you can just paste them in here one by one at the time, Choose the country here and yes, click on safe and it will generate this data. And you look at the difficulty score. And if the difficulty score is beneath 30 you're good to go and write an article about that topic and keep it in your headline or your lead magnet or which ever content at you're creating so good luck with finding great content ideas now and I'll see you in the next video. 142. Get Video Content Ideas: in this video, guys, I'm going to show you the process that we're taking when we're finding good YouTube video content ideas so you can basically create a YouTube video uploaded to YouTube. You can back link it back and forward between your website and your YouTube channel in order to make it to rank better on both YouTube and on Google. So I will show you the process that we're taking when we're trying to find out good ideas to make content around videos. So follow along for this video, we're gonna take passive income as an example, we're creating bloke post writing articles and we're having things to sell. Maybe in course, on how to create your own passive income streams on line on a website, for example. So we're looking for content ideas or more likely video ideas that we can create around this topic. What do we do? We go to YouTube. You don't have to have a fancy, costly program for to do this. You basically just go to the search bar here and you write in whatever keyword that you were having for us. It will be passive income, and you can see that keywords everywhere. Tool is also working here on YouTube. Now, this is that'll pulled directly from Google. So this is not something that people are directly searching in on YouTube, but people are still searching Comm passive income. You can see that here. The 1st 1 is getting one million views than we're having 274 K views. But the most important thing here is actually to go to filter, and then you can filter out by video channel playlist, film program, etcetera. We're gonna filter this out by channel because model what's working is the best way to go. When it comes to creating any types of content, you don't have to reinvent the wheel. We are going to find out what is already working on YouTube were for videos. So we go into Pat Flynn here in the top. So this guy is very, very cool. He's having like a website called Smart passive income dot com, and he definitely knows on how to create smart, passive income streams. So once you've searched for that keyword and you found an influencer on the YouTube, what I would like you to do is go and click on videos here. And then you click on this little scroll down, body near raises uploads, and then you go to the right up corner and click on Sort By and Daniel click on most popular. And then we're able to see the most popular videos that he is having. So we know that people are looking for this type of content because people are watching this content. Now you can see that this is three years ago that he created this. How to create an awesome slide presentation, the next one Watts one year ago, one year ago, six years ago and eight years ago so his top videos are at least one year old. This doesn't tell us that this type of content is relevant today, So what we can do, actually, is go once again to sort by in the top right corner click on date, added newest, And then we can actually a skin through the latest content. And he have created and see how popular is the latest content Now for this. For example, we having three weeks ago 3.1 case. Not too good. Then we're having like an interview here. It looks like three weeks ago, 2.5 came. Not too impressive, eater. We're looking for videos that are having a high amount off views and also is pretty recently added to YouTube. So just by scrolling down here and skimming through, we can see here that we're having 13 k I was robbed. That is nothing that we can create a video about. If you haven't Bean mugged but scrolling down once again we can see Ah, you're screaming through here. We're trying to look for something with a least 10-K views or right, So I think we're having something here. How to make an extra $500. Awesome. People always want to know how to make those extra dollars right. So here we having one content idea video that we can easily create. Now your video can maybe be how to make an extra $1000 month, how to make an extra $100 a month or 100 a week, etcetera. If you're having knowledge about this subject on how to create a passive income or passive income sources, then you can your scheme through his channel here and look here on the views on which one that is the most popular, actually, but always go by recent one. So go buy, added newest. And then you read through here because just going into, like most popular, that is basically not telling us anything off what is relevant and popular right now. But you can actually go into any of this channels. You can search by the keyword. Here, let's say meditation. For example. You go search for the keyword, and you filter that out by channels, channels that are talking about meditation. Now that could be a person here, for example, or there could be like in channel with animations that so on. But the most important thing here is to really find out which type of content is already popular and relevant today. Which type of content can we also create in order to get views and maybe to get clicks to our website or content that we actually can upload honor blawg on our website Now? You can also use this tab here. So, for example, let's say smart, passive income. Let's say smart, passive income. How many months searches are this getting on a monthly basis on Google, for example, now we can see 9900 monthly searches now How to make money? How to make 500 for example, How to make 500 fast. Then you could see 260 monthly searches. You can also use this top up here, but search for your search term meditation. For example, go into any off this channel, searching by channel, go into any of these channels and just have a look at the videos that is recently added to this channel. And have a look at how many monthly searches are you getting on average? And then the ones that are really standing out we're gonna look for those here is pretty clear. You can see two days ago 30 K and you can see 3.7 k 38 k la, la, la and so on. And here we're having a big one, 206 K So people are obviously searching for this because you can see that this were added more recently than this one for three weeks. So this was two weeks ago and this one was three weeks ago. You can see that this are having more views than you can know. I I can create a video on my blog's or on YouTube and just link it back and forward between my blawg and my YouTube channel in order to rank higher in both YouTube and rank higher on Google for inner peace guided sleep healing while you sleep well. Meditation like guided inner peace meditation, for example. You can use those exact keywords in order to try to rank on YouTube and on Google for this words. So this is a process that we're going through. We're going to the biggest channels and we're sorting them by when the latest updated any material. And we're looking for numbers that are standing out when it comes to views and then re creating content around those topics. So this is the process. Now is your turn. If you are creating videos for a bloke or for YouTube channel etcetera. This is how you find great content ideas for your videos. Good luck, and I'll see you in the next lecture 143. Spy On Competitors SEO: in this video, guys, I'm going to show you how we can spy on competitors. Model what they're working in order to get better as CEO. So let's follow along. So you're on Google. You're trying to find content, ideas, things that you can write about create videos about write articles about what do you do? Well, first of all, let's say that you were too like right, content around, pulled, costing, for example. Then we would like to find and high it toward the website, a popular website that's already ranking on Google, that is, writing or making videos about this topic. Now what I would do is go to Google and would write something like Start are poured cost, for example. So I'm interested in finding content around this topic. Then I will scroll down. Now, will you just skim through these kind of articles? And I was just click into any one of these. Let's say this one, for example, how to start a pod cost in 2000 and 19. Now, if you are on another gear right now, let's say 2000 and 20 or 2021. You can write that as well of course, but we would like to know which keywords are this article. This particular article which ranks number three on Google, which keywords are this ranking for, so that we can also use these keywords and write a better blawg post. Awesome. Right. So what I would suggest you to do is go to this tool I have this in the resource is for this video off course. It's called uber suggest a tool that is created by a guy called Need Patel and is totally for free to use. So what I would suggest you to do is basically just copied this u r l I'll just copy this piece of the girl. I'm gonna copy that to my computer, and I will go to this website uber suggests. And then we just paste that website in the US deplane website and see which keywords are this website ranking for. And then we just click on search here. So the information that we're getting from uber suggests is organic keywords. How many organic keywords are they ranking for? And you can see that smart passive income made my Pat Flynn is ranking for over 45,000 keywords which it's incredible. He's having a lot of articles, a lot of blood posts here on his block. But as against he also he's getting organic traffic a month. About 53,000 people are visiting his website every single month. I mean, that is if my math is pretty correct here, about 2000 day, people who is coming to its website awesome. So here you can see also the visitors over the month and you can see that is increasing every month here. Right now, you are also able to see if you would like to run some kind of advertising paid advertising on your website or for your products and services, etcetera. You can use this tool very handy to see which keywords that he is ranking for trying to rank for with his advertising and also the amount off money that he is paying for his ads cost. Now you can see that he's running, No paid adds to his website. He is purely just going for the organic as CEO traffic, which we are also doing in this course. So if I'm scrolling down here, we're also able to on some websites, see their back links. We will talk later on in this course about back wings were also able to see the domain score for some websites here. Actually, how well they are ranking within their niche and then referring domains. This is more like people who have referred his domain and already has an authority for their website, for example, And then you can see the organic traffic value here. Now this has more to do with advertising, so it's not essential for us right now. But scrolling down here, you can also see over time here s CEO ranking Giggsy that his website is performing even better. So this could be a great website if we were running like an port cost or would like to write articles about pulled costing or passive income or something like that. Something around that topic, this website would be awesome to model. So scrolling down here we are able to actually see which off his blawg posts or article and basically pages on his website is driving the most amount off traffic so we can model what he's doing and also generate more traffic to a website. So you can see that the first article that is really driving the most traffic to its website every single month is smart affiliate marketing strategies for 2000 and 18. Awesome. Then we know that that is great information. You can see that it's out ranking all of the other sites, actually, with 36,000 monthly visitors using great essay. Oh, we could really go into this article to read out a lot off information of this article. And then you can also go to the next one, for example, how to start a podcast. Awesome. We would like to write an article about pulled cost on our block, for example. What do you do then, is you click this view all and you scroll down on the website. Then you're able for this article to see all the keywords that this article is ranking for own Google. How cool, Right? You can also see the position here. So you were able to see how many monthly searches this is getting. Starting a podcast, for example, you can see that the search volume is 8100 then you're able to see how many visitors off this 8100 that this article is getting, which is 2462 value off ranking high own Google. You're also able to see all the object keywords that this article and block post is ranking for on Google by keywords. So you can see polled cost how to start, for example. Now you could definitely create an article around appalled cost, how to start and try to rank for that phrase. But what you would like to do is then go into that article, this particular article. Open it up in a new tab, for example, and then you scan through this article, read it word by word and see, Do you have the knowledge to write the same kind of article? Now, this is a really long article. You can see that is, has a lot of back links, etcetera, basically back linking to maybe other websites, etcetera. But as you can see, this is a really thorough article. But what you can take from this is you can write the same kind of article. Don't just copy and paste the same article on your website. That is Black Hat. Seo doesn't work. Your website will get banned eventually. What you would like to do is take this article, look through it and see how can you write it better? If this article is around two or 3000 words, how could you write three or 4000 word article and make it more engaging and more powerful and more helpful? 40 users who coming to your website so you can definitely go into uber suggests, go into any article just scam through here. What kind of keywords? What kind of long tail keywords or what? Kind of like short tail keywords are this block post ranking for? You can see the position here. You can also see how many monthly searches this term is getting. This keywords is getting by just looking at this column here. And you can also see the estimate visits that any off these keywords is driving from Google directly to this block article. By looking on this column now, we can do this with any off this bloke post, and this will generate some good ideas for you on which keywords that you are able to rank for if you're creating better valuable content for your readers. So what I suggest you to do is. Before you do anything, go to Google. Search for particular keywords that you're interested in and try to find websites with in your niche websites which are already having Hyatt Authority own Google, which are ranking for a lot of key words within your niche, go to those websites Copa the U R L The name of the website pay studying here, for example Apple Don't calm. For example Go for a search scroll down on this website once you've got all the statistics and just go through the top pages here and scroll down all the way to top CEO pages and then you can view all by the page here by clicking view all and then you're able if you're scrolling down a little bit to see which keywords are this page ranking for own Google. Go into that article. Rewrite this article. Make it more powerful. Mawr engaging and longer so that you eventually are able to rank this page on Google. So go and used uber suggest Lincoln Resource is and good luck. Now, guys, I'll see you in the next video 144. On Page SEO That Works: in this video, guys, we're gonna discover five different things that can improve your own Page s CEO. So let's dive into it. Now on Page Seo is the things that we are in control of. The things that we can do in the back and off our website. We can optimize things, and the first thing that we really would like to go in and optimize is the U. R L on our pages and posts. Now, if we're going to our website, for example, and go into robin ESPN dot com for much less block, you can read all over Blawg post there, right? So we're telling Google Yahoo being etcetera that this is Robin in yesterday's block. Now this is one key where we would like to put in more keywords related to which pages and or post that we have written so that every page and post are having our unique you or else . Now, if I go into any off a block post, for example, you can see that it says robin ESPN dot com Forest last digital marketing success in four steps. Now it's pretty clear here for the search engines. What this content and the page is all about. You would like to optimize your your l with keywords that you would like to rank for, to tell the search engines what this content is all about. And you can do that manually by just going in to any page or post on your blog's or any article that you have written. You can go in there and just manually optimize that you are with whichever keywords that you would like to rank for. So that is the first step. Optimizing your you are well, next step is to use related keywords. What do I mean with that wealth? If you look on the screen right now, we go to Google and we do a search for Modern would house design. Now we would like to rank for this because we have created our blawg post about this. Now, What you would like to do within this block post with in this article is to use not only modern Woodhouse. You will also would like to use related keywords when you're writing a post such as would or wouldn't luxury villas so that we're telling Google Yahoo being and other big search and is out there. What topic that this article or block post is all about. So we would like to use related keywords. Now, how do we find related keywords that we can include in a blogger posts an article? Well, simply is go to Google and the bottoms grow all the way down to the bottom and you can see searches related to modern good house design, and you can see modern wood and house interior design. We're having simple wooden house design and so on. So we know what kind of phrases and keywords that we would like to include in our copy in our block post and in our article to easily get found for our keywords on Google, for example. So use related keywords include them in your blood posts and articles, and that it's one way also, that we can optimize our own page s CEO for ranked next up. We're having right long content now. Their studies on this presented that writing long content longer, more in depth content. Not only are we telling Google with our related keywords within our great block posts an article that this topic is around well, the subject these keywords, etcetera, so that it's easier for the search engines to rank are confident? No, there's only studies shown that on the first page of Google articles and Block Post that is included around 2000 words or more, it's ranking better. So if I go to Google, for example, I'm searching for passive income. Then I find this article made by Pat Flynn on smart passive income. And what I can read out of this is that this article, which ranks I think on the third page on Google for passive income, is included. 4000 866 words. And the next article includes 5222 words, which means that every writing longer content with more details, more related keywords. And we're optimizing that four keyword research by writing longer content, we are more likely to rank on Google. Awesome, right? So that is the third tape before Tip is include keywords in the title off course include your targeted keywords. We have used most for this to determine which keywords that we are able to rank for. So by including our keywords, what we're going to see on the screen right now happening is also a pardon off not only including keywords, but also including numbers in the tight, elastic asi on every single one of these that I have marked its including numbers. And I'm searching for passive income on Google and you can see 23 passive income ideas. 10 legit ways to make money and passive income online. You're having make $7200 a month. We're having 10 ways wearing third do one passive income ideas. So you see using numbers within your title for the key words that you would like to rank for its very, very effective when trying to rank on the big search engines. And also, you can also use brackets as you can see on the screen right now in the top right corner. Make money. 24 7 We're having one more here as you can see the middle video off the screen five ways so you can use brackets and use in numbers and make sure that you're including your key words in the title when you're trying to rank for anything on the big search engines and the last one is include internal and external links. What I mean, with that, if you have a look on the screen right now, you can see that this is internal links. We would like to have people on a website for as many minutes or hours as we possibly can. Then we're telling Google, Hey, this is a great website. People are actually spending time on this website, and maybe they're engaging with content as well because they're clicking on links. Internal links toe other block posts. So if you're writing a blogged about, let's say horses and you're writing a block post also about like horse tools to maybe clean horses or something like that in that first block post, you can actually link to the second low post. This is an internal link, and then you might have a chance off. That particular person is coming to your first broke post to click into your second look close, which means that you are more likely to have that person on your blog's in your articles on your website for a longer period off time. So use internal links for this. You will also like to use external links if you look on the screen right now in the bottom of this picture, you can see a light appearing there. This is actually an external link, meaning that we're linking on our block post or in our article to another website with networking with people and websites within our niche, which is awesome to start creating more back Ling's link back and forward between websites and getting better ranking on Google. So this is the way you would like to do on Page Seo to rank even better on Google. Yahoo being etcetera. First of all, optimize your your l actually the name of your pages and name of your posts. Then you would like to use related keywords so that were helping search and use to find you even better. And then we would like to write longer in more in depth content, using related keywords than include the key words in the title and use numbers and brackets to even get better click through rates. So when somebody seeing you on Google, they're seeing that 10 ways to five ways to five things to etcetera, they're more likely to click. I think there's about 36. Or was it 38% better click through rate CTR when somebody is using numbers which is insane , and then lastly include internal and external links within your block posts an article and you will be great. So that is how you do on Page Seo. That really works. So now is your turn to do some on Page Seo, and I'll see you in the next lecture. 145. Page Title SEO: Now when these video guys, we're gonna talk about on how to optimize our page title to get the best s CEO possible, So let's dive into it now. The first question that you might have on your mind is what is the page title? Well, the page title is basically the link that is clickable within the search engines. So why is this so important to optimize? Well, you would like to optimize it because it's appearing not only in the search engines like Google. It's also appearing on your website, as you can see on the screen. It's also appearing in, like social media platforms if you're linking your content to any other places outside off your website. So the three top tips I have for you is basically right maximum 50 to 60 characters. So if you look on the screen right now, you can see a search result for digital marketing courses, and the 1st 1 is okay. You can see the whole page title off. This same goes with the 2nd 1 Same goes with the 3rd 1 But if you look on the 4th 1 you can see that this actually is copping off you can see that this page tighter is more than 60 characters long, which means that I am not sure what I'm getting with clicking on this off course. You can explain in the beginning off what this content is all about, but anyway, this is cutting off. In the end, maybe you're having some, like, silly text there or something like that. So be pretty clear and straightforward and keep it at maximum 50 to 60 characters. When you're writing your page title within any block, post or so, the next step is to give every single page is a unique title. So if you look on the screen right now, this is Pat Flynn's website from Smart Passive Income, an incredible, nice, good looking website. But if you look on the screen right now, where you can see that I have a line on their contact, his page is not on Lee called Contact or Contact page. His pages actually called contact Pat Flynn. Now there's some eso India, because if somebody is searching, for example on Google, contact Pat Flynn, then they can redirect directly to this website. Then Google knows that this website or this page Rather is the page to contact Pat Flynn. The same goes for the next example. If you look on the screen right now, you can see under courses his pages, not on Lee called courses when he clicking into this is called online business courses. And then it's a line and then Pat Flynn. So if somebody goes to Google, then he has also potential optimized this page title for online business coaches. So he eventually or maybe his ranking for online business courses Pat Flynn and they can direct the click on that link and come to this page. So he's not only including in this page title courses or something like that. So this is a small but very handed taped to optimize your page title for best ASIO and then put keywords first. What I mean with this? If you look on the screen right now on this little tab up here above the website, you can see it's a small underlined in black. You can see that there, including some key words here. First saw chest, home decor, ideas, kitchen, the signs and paint colors and also house beautiful. So they have optimized it. This is not really the way you would like to go for, but you can, for example, have home decor ideas for house beautiful, and then you're having the keywords in the beginning. So for your pages on your website, optimized them for eso by explaining what you will get in these pages with your keywords. So right maximum 50 to 60 characters for your page title, which means that all the pages on your page you would like to have them within that span or 50 to 60 characters. Also give every single pages off your website and unique title. Make sure that you have done that so that you are helping big Search and in such as Google to find your pages that you would like people to come to. Okay, and then also put your keywords first in your page title. Now we doing home decoration ideas or doing kitchen the signs. What kind of keywords do you would like to rank for and make sure that you include them in the beginning off your page title? Okay, that said guys, good luck with your page title essay when I'll see you in the next lecture 146. Write Clickable Titles: in this video, guys, we're gonna talk about how to write clickable titles, also called headlines. So we get more traffic to our websites. Let's dive into it. So, guys, in this video, we're gonna talk about how you can write titles that people want to click. So first of all, the first tape I got for you is to right the least title What? I mean with that. Well, look on the screen right now. You can see if I go for a search. Maybe what? I would like to write an article blawg post about ways to make money. I can basically create lists off this, like, 40 easy ways to make money quickly. I would definitely won't like to click that one if I searched for ways to make money online . Right? So, 40 ways to make money quickly. 31 easy ways to make money fast in the current year that you are with in. So this is very, very powerful when it comes to make sure that people want to click on your titles Also called headlines when you're writing an article or block post or etcetera. So then next up, we're having the proven methods title Now Also, a lot of people is out there digging for proven methods that are really, really working. So, for example, if I go for a search on proven methods for weight loss on Google, then this is the top results. 30 easy ways to lose weight, naturally backed by science. Awesome, then I know that this is backed by science. This is a proven method. I would like to click that and read through on how to lose weight. The proven method. Also. How to lose weight fast. Nine Scientific ways to drop fat. Awesome. That's a great title that I would definitely would like to click if I would like to lose some weight and then the last one nine proven ways to lose weight for busy people. Now, every single headline or every single title of this has their own angle on proven methods to loose weight. But this is great tips to take with you in the back pocket when you're writing any titles that you would like people to click into to get more traffic to a website used to proven methods title. And then we're having the mistakes title. No, people don't want to make mistakes, right? We all know that we're learning a lot from making mistakes, but regardless were very, very keen or not making any mistakes. So this will get clicks. So, for example, most common mistakes dog owners make now, if I were a new dog owner or if I would like to, like, write an article or block post about mistakes that dog owners are making, this is on great titles right here. Look at this seven common mistake dog owners make in the winter. Now, if you're having a dog and it's winter currently, this may be something that you would like to click into, right, because you don't want to make any mistake with your dog in the winter. And then we're having 11th time dog owner mistakes to avoid. So if you're a new dog owner, you would definitely would like to read this right because you don't want to make any mistake with your dog. And then we're having the last 17 common mistakes dog owners make. Now we can see that it's a pattern off numbers like we already have talked about in earlier lectures. They're very, very powerful to write a number before your writing Any text. So seven common mistakes. 10 1st time dog owner mistakes, seven common mistakes. You see, this is top results. When I'm searching on Google, most common mistakes dog owners make so list and then miss takes very powerful. Then we're having the secret titles. Now everybody in the entire world would like to have shortcuts and secrets to weight loss, making money and longevity. So look on the screen Right now we're having secrets to living. I'm just making a search for secrets to living now. Just could be secrets to living a long life. This could be secrets to living a happy life, etcetera. But just make a search for its secrets to living. Then we have the top results, like seven secrets to living a long and happy life. I would definitely would like to click that link. If I see seven secrets to living a long and happy life, I would like to have both a long and happy life. I would definitely yes, click into that link and read that block post, but also make sure that when you're writing this catchy titles, there's like list titles proven methods, mistakes, secrets, etcetera. Always backed that up with a great block post with a great article with great information so that you make sure that people are staying on your site for a long period of time because we would like them to read out the block post. We don't want them to go into the block post or the article or whatever content you creating and just click off that page. You would like to have them on your page, so make sure that you always are backing up your titles with good content, great information, guys. And then we're having the secrets to living a longer and better life. Seven Secrets to Living Long and Well, It's set to go with Secret Titles also works very, very good when it comes to click through rate, when it comes to people clicking on your titles and your headlines, and then we're having the hacks title Now. There's also similar to the secrets people are looking for short cuts to small hacks that they can do in their everyday life once it like under computer with your family, with money, with their like fitness, etcetera. But look on the screen right now. Computer hacks. I'm making a search for computer hacks. Maybe you're having a blawg about computer hacks off computer techniques or tactics, etcetera. Then you could write something like this nine simple computer hack that are legitimately useful. Awesome. I could click into that and maybe I can learn good stuff from there 14 times saving computer life hacks We wish we learned sooner. 10 cool tricks and hacks that you can learn from computer geeks. Awesome. Now, if you know nothing about computers, you would definitely would like to click him on any off these and learn a lot. But now we will also go to the Internet and almost show you how to generate clickable titles with in seconds. So follow along to the Internet. Okay, guys, I'm having three different resource is in this lecture at touch Appear so you can just click any link there and follow along. But for now, first of all, we're having the kick as headline generated by sumo. So if you go to suma dot com, just click. The link up in the resource is for this video. Then you come to this website now we can click on about here and you can read out some information here. But what is really interesting? If I'm clicking on number of list and I coming into here, you can just paste in your topic here. Let's say that you are writing a block post about making money online, for example, and then you can simply write your topic here and then you write that this sired I'll come the things that you would like them to learn, and then you write the undesirable outcome here. So this would be feeling broke. People don't want to feel broke. People do want to make money online, and then you can just typing any number here and you will see on the right hand side something like this. So the topic is making money. The undesirable outcome is feeling broke. Now we can see the list headline, for example, here with which we already went through 10 ways to make money online. Awesome. I would definitely click that link that we're having a side note headline 10 ways to make money online. And then you remember in the early lecture we're talking about not only in numbers, but also brackets like you can see here, This is our called brackets. And then we're having the proven methods headline. We're having the mistake headlines or having this secret headlights. So from this, by just writing in your top, begin here to decide outcome that you would like them to do so, for example, start making money. You can twist this around start and instead of start make money, you would like to write to start making money. Then you can see that this are changing up here, some of them 10 ways to start making money online. So instead of making money online, start making money on life. So put in your keywords in the topic field here, and then this will generate this program will generate a lot of different like headlines for you Headlines also known as titles. So this is a numbered list headlines. Then you could go to how to also because all auto people search for how to like how to make pancakes, how to make a cake, how to, I don't know by cycle, how to like nits, how to do all kinds of thing on the Internet, and you can be the person with the great information that has written an article that people would like to click into and read. Right. So here is basically a headline or also a title generator, so you can quickly just add in your topic your keywords in here and you can twist them around a little bit. And the outcome will be that you're having, Ah, lot of examples on how to write your headlines on the right hand side here. Awesome, right? And then we also having an article Big article with 51 headline formulas to skyrocket. Conversion conversion is when somebody's clicking into any off your articles, or is when somebody's clicking on your title. Coming to your website, reading out your content. That is great, says so. If I scroll down here, you can also see like a list off also all kinds of explanations here, so there's a lot to read here, but it's a lot also to learn. Now, if you're scrolling down even further, you can see also examples on were to put this so e mails, for example, in your content in your titles, in your sales pages in your sub headers. This is how you write text that sells pretty much so. You can use all kinds of tactics and techniques that you've learned in this video to generate more sales. Also, if you're having product pages, etcetera and then one last tip and trick I have for you I want to go to Google, for example here. And I'm typing in making money online. Okay, going for random search. What you will see. It's a pattern off. People are on the first page. They're using capital letters for all the words except, like two and so on. So genius ways how to make money online. You can see a capital letter, capital letter, capital letter, a small letter, a capital letter, etcetera. So if I go down and I go back, maybe two, the 10th of page, you can see that some of them are using just small letters like this. Now, by statistic, people are more likely to click anything and headline on title if they're having Mawr Capitals letters within them. So in order for you to might be generate. So let's say that this one you would like to generate capital letters for this one and the correct way, so make money online to brag for example. Okay, so I take this one Copa, this one. So let's say that this is our key words. This is our headline. This is our title for any block post. You don't go to this website and you just simply just paste that in here and you will get the right amount off capital letters because a making money online to brag. Now, this is a small letter. So you know that you are doing everything correctly before you put out your block content your article and so on. But to recap this entire video to make sure that you get clicks to your website for any content eight year creating and ranking on Google for you would like to eat ago with a list title Proven methods title the mistakes Title the Secrets title, the hacks title and example that you can simply go and generate from this kickers headline generator that sumo are providing for us totally for free by just writing in the topic and the keywords in this column here and they will help you to generate a lot of examples here on how to write titles that people will click. Now is your turn to write these kick ass titles and good luck. I'll see you in the next few 147. Meta Description: in this video, guys, we're gonna talk about something called a meta description what it is and also how you can write it so you can eventually get more traffic to a website. So let's dive into it now. First of all, what is the matter? Description? Well, if I go for a search, for example, for best carry on bag here on Google, I scroll down beneath the header or also called the title. As you can see here, we're having that website link here and then we're having this text here. This text is what supposed to describe whatever content I'm having within this link. This website and this is called the meta description. This is something that appears in the search Indians and will explain what type of content that is within this post. Now, if we look on the screen right now on the part where I have marked here, we can easily see Briggs and Riley International carry on Amazon basics. Carry on. This text is terrible. Guys, this text don't want me to click introduced. Well, the headline here or the title here could be very compelling and very, very clickable. But on the other hand, If I'm looking for additional information and I do not want to enter this website without having some more information about this content, this is hideous. This is just too bad because this meta description is on Lee telling me some feature about different types off bags. You do want to write this so people eventually would like to click into your post. Well, if your rank in the top of Google you have written a great clickable headline, which we already went through. You also would like to write a great meta description, also called snippet, to grab their attention and to drag them into your website. So this is a bad example. If I'm scrolling down, we can see some more examples with, like sizes off the bags, etcetera, which are features you would like to write benefits why they should go into this post and read this post at the first. So if I'm scrolling down, it is 21 inches inches and so on. This is just features guys scrolling down a little bit more. We can see here that first of all, editor's choice afford best new carry on luggage 2018 for example. Then we can also read out some good information. Here we put nine new suitcases through Rijs Road test to discover the best carry on luggage . 2000 and 18. Here are the winners and finalists. Awesome! Off course, I do want to click into this. So this is why meta description is so important. Now Google have stated that this is not a ranking factor, but off course is a ranking factor. If people are clicking through on your link because if people are clicking then we're telling Google Hey, hello. My content is valuable. Let's rank it, rank it higher in your search engine. So that is why metta descriptions are so important to write. And if you're having like a wordpress website, for example, you go in, log in to your back and off your WordPress website and you're scrolling down all the way. If you're having Josta installed Josephs S E o Toole, which we already went through in this course as well, Then you can see this little part where it says snippet preview. Now, this is the text that is gonna appear in the search Indians here. So if I'm going here I can just click on this little snippet here. And here is where I'm writing this meta description. So go into any of your blog's posts clicking, edit, scroll down all the way down to the Yost eso click on this or just click on edit snippet. And here's the part where you want to grab the attention from whom ever is seeing your post and your link on Google, for example. So here you right in some text that is really attention grabbing. And that can be text from like if you're having a part in your article that you're really liking and that you feel is really representing and promoting this post in a good way, like in this post we're going to do with this and this and that. What? This is the biggest benefit by clicking into this post or anything like that. What you can do is just copied that piece off texting here. You just copied it and you scroll down all the way down here to the meta description and you paste that in, and then you can see that you have almost filled out. You see the green line here you can see that you almost have field out with all their words . You don't want your meta description to look something like this, for example, like caught off like this. This is not a good matter description. So therefore, you do want to make sure that your Onley writing between 135 till 160 words in your meta description, and you can go in and customize your meta description afterwards. When you have posted like old post, you can go in and just customize them to get a better click through rate people to click on your link to come to website and see what you have written on the website. So meta description. Bad things to write is the features such as like the sizes of everything and scholars, etcetera. What you would like to do is right the benefits. Why should they click right? Some attention grabbing piece of text in your meta description within your post, because people are much more likely to click your link if you're percent in the benefits bill by clicking this link, writing all these kinds of features won't do it. But if you write like this post It's about this and this and that, and we will discover why I, like this post, is all about this and this and that and so on. It's much better to write the benefits than the features. So go into you. If you're having a WORDPRESS website, I assume it looks pretty much the same on it Weeks website or anything else that you might have if you installed just CEO go down, click on edit snippet and then either go into your blood post paste in some kind of peace of texture, which you think that our really presenting this block post or article really, really well for you. And then you just paste it in here in a matter description part and you just click on close snippet editor and you're good to go. Then it will appear in the Google search or in other search Indians like this, for example, and people cannot on Leigh read your clickable title here, and that is from your website. They're also able to get a grasp off what you have written within your article or block post, So now it's your turn. Go into your blood post articles or post on your website and make sure to write attention grabbing meta descriptions. Good luck now, guys, and I'll see you in the next video. 148. Subheadings: in this video, guys, we're gonna talk about what subheadings is and also how to rank better using them the right way on the biggest search and years. So let's dive into it now. Why are we using subheadings when we're writing our block posts and articles? Well, that is firstly to break up the page. If you look on the screen right now, where the arrow is pointing at this is a subheading. This is something that breaks up the text within your article and block post and also summarize a section off the article. Now, if you look on the screen once again, you already know what a subheading is and how it looks within a block post or end an article. But this is what summarized text beneath. So if somebody is coming to website, they are reading your bloke post. They would like to find fast information information that's very, very valuable for them now, this could be a part of your article. Now, if you have used in subheading, that is summarized what all sections off of your article is all about, they can easily a skim through and find that piece of information on your website, and that is why we would like to use subheadings to break up the text and to summarize a section off the article, because the goal is to improve the readability off the user on your website. As I already said, some people use Goto Web pages and try to find one piece of information. Maybe you have written like 2000 or 4000 words. Now, if you're not using sub headers, can you imagine the user experience on your website? I would definitely us bounce back to Google and try to find some article or block post that is using sub headers so that I find information that I am looking for much easier with in another article. Now, when you are writing your blawg post or article, you would like to make sure that you have the differences between a header. I also called a title, which we already went through in earlier lectures and a sub header. So if you look on the screen right now, when you're writing your article, you would like to make sure that the title the header is off h two. That is the format and then you would like to make sure that the subheading is off age to now. Why is this? Because of the reason that Google is skimming through all kinds of articles within the keywords for like any keywords. If you try to rank for, let's say, a horses or something like that, then Google is skimming through all kinds of articles related to that keyword. Now, if you have used subheadings the right way, we're telling Google, Hey, this type of content is very helpful for these keywords, so they are more likely to rank us if we're doing this right. So make sure that the using age to ask the format off your subheading within your block post You can just easily go to your WORDPRESS website, for example, and look for yourself. You're having the option off H two h tree H four h five. I also think that is actually age six as well. But always, always, always for your subheadings used to formatting age to okay, that is good for the ranking and then also include your keywords and related keywords within your copy. Now, if you look on the screen right now, for example, if we were tried to rank for success in four steps than we also would like to make sure that in our subheadings we're having four steps to success. For example, this is related keywords. You see what I mean here. But we also including success in four steps in two different ways. And make sure that you're having both your headings also called titles and your subheadings related to one another so that we're telling the biggest search engines. Hey, this is helpful information and content related to these types off key words. So this is what you would like to do with your subheadings. But let's go to Internet and have a look at one bad and one good example off how to use subheadings So once on Internet, this is the bad example of using sub headers, or this article is not even using somebody's. Actually, if you look on the screen right now, this is an ad like in the middle off. The article just looks terrible. If I'm scrolling down, you can see that we're having nothing that is really breaking off. This text is just a bunch of text. Yes, they're using some kind of spaces here and there. But this is not what I would like to read. Would you like to read this article? You have no sub headers. You have no like context about what anything is really about Here You only have the header here. The title Here You have nothing that really tells me what anything here is all about. So you definitely would like to do something like this. If you go to this block post, for example, I'm scrolling down. You can see seven totally legitimate ways to make passive income for our block. If I'm scrolling down, I will be met by subheading here. As you can see, sell resources in template Then I know what this section is all about. This bloke post also includes good infographics like this is you can see would like some arrows pointing at whatever I'm looking for. And if I'm scrolling down even further, I can see also here's one more subheading and as you can see, these are using the H two formatting that both of them so always go with age to formatting . But this is what you would like to do. You would like to use an age to formatting as a sub header. That explains what kind of content that is coming here. What is this text all about and then scrolling down? If you having another section, you definitely would like to go with an H two formatted sub header for the next one that is explaining what this Skype of content is all about. So this is the good way, guys, which is to break up the text a little bit. So it's more readable for the user on our website. You don't want to just throw in a bunch of text like this, and some ads in between. So really think about this, as from the user's point of view when reading on text. So what we learn about subheading is why we're using it is to break up two pages and to make their page more readable, right and then always use the H two formatting went doing any sub headers because we're telling the search Indians that we're having valuable information. And for some reason, Google tends to rank sites that are using H one and H two in this way included the keywords and related keywords in an upcoming video. We're gonna talk much more about related keywords, so I'll see you there and good luck with your subheadings 149. Related Keywords: in this video, guys, we're gonna talk about something called related keywords where to find them and also how to use them to rank even better in the search. Indians with S CEO. So let's dive into it. All right, so let's dive into related keywords now. Related keywords, also known as L s I keywords. It's actually something that you can find in the bottom off Google. When you're going for a search, for example, for best hotels in Hawaii, you will get a list you can see as it is in blue. Right now, you can see best hotels in our value for honeymoon. Best hotels in her via for couples at cetera. Now, you would like to make sure that you're using key Worst A smart way. Don't do like this. Don't keywords stuff all of your content because he would like to rank for certain key words. Don't use white as many times as this example is doing it. Why it is a word on a white Web page that is white because the background is white. No, you would like to make sure that you are writing in a natural way when you're doing any type off content writing on your block or in your articles, because if you're doing this, you are not only telling that customer the people, the traffic on your website, that this is great content. You also telling Google that this is great content because people are spending, ah, lot of time on your articles because the reason why we would like to use related keywords in our copy is to help search engines find your content easily right. You like to rank on Google, and to do that, we would like to include related keywords, inner copies naturally. So your copies you're writing your content doesn't look spammy to the audience. Who is reading it? Because what's the reason to rank any type of content in Google being Yahoo? YouTube, etcetera? If somebody's just coming to your website and they're clicking off and your search rank is decreasing, you would like to have the best information, the most helpful information within your content. So that is because we would like to help the search engines to find her contents with using related keywords. No, for example, have a look at this best hotels in Have I. If I'm going to Google, and I'm scrolling all the way down. The examples off key words that I would like to include in my articles is how value resorts have. AII Honeymoon Honolulu. How are you for couples? And then also travel? Have I luxury hotels? Have I have eyes for family? So instead of like creating in mind map like this and trying to figure out what is related , then go to Google because if you're going to Google, search for, for example, best hotels in Havana and you're scrolling all the way down here. You can see what types of terms that you would like to include in your articles and block post. They have the answers. They have the answers off what people are also searching for within the same keywords within the same topics of Go to Google. Go for your search for whatever key, which that you would like to rank on Google for and then scrolled away all the way down here. And you can see searches related to dot keyword here, and you will have all the answers here off key words that you would like to include in your articles than Natural way. Don't keyword stuff here, guys, so that we are able to rank even better in the biggest search and use for our keywords. So this is the way you would like to do it so easily. Use related keywords. Smart. Don't keyword stuff. Don't use this on. Naturally. Don't just right and stuff Your keywords in your articles and why we're doing this is to help the biggest search engines out there. 2% our content for the people who is searching for our keywords. So it's easier for the search, and he's he's elitist percent that copy off text and article or blood post four Does. Who is looking for it? So do this the smart and natural way. Now guys use related keywords. Go to Google, type in your keywords, scrolled away all the way down to the bottom and see which your related key, which could be which you can use in your articles and block posts and good luck and I'll see you in the next video 150. Long Content: now in this video, guys, we're going to talk about why you should consider to write longer content. Let's dive into it. Well, The first and foremost biggest reason why you should write longer content is because long content ranks better. If you look on the screen right now, you can see that the average content link for the top 10 results in Google. It has been made studies on this that the fact is that longer content is ranking better on Google. So if you look on the screen right now, that would arrow is pointing out. This is the number 10th result in Google Search, and the 10th result is having an average about 2000 words 2050 words around there somewhere if you look on the screen right now, while the top one result is having approximately about 2000 and 450 or 2500 words, So this is the biggest reason why you should write longer content. That is because long content is ranking better in Google's search engine. The second reason why you would like to write even longer content is because of long content gets Mawr back links. Look on the screen once again, as you can see, the word count versus average linking domains, which means back links, is showing us that longer content. Get Mawr back links from other websites. And, as you already know, back links is a huge factor in ranking any type of content on Google's. This is one way for us to tell Google that we have valuable information. You can see that other websites are actually linking to our website, which means that we're having valuable information. You Google, you would like the rank, our content in the top off Google's search. The number three reason why you would like to write even longer content is because long content gets more social shares. Yes, this is statistics on this as well as you can see on the screen. Right now. Word counts versus average social shares. It's a huge one here as well. It's against C content that is including more than 2500 words is getting Mawr social shares and this is statistics guys statistics don't like. So this is one reason why you also would like to write even longer content because long content equals more social shares on platforms such as Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, etcetera. And the fourth reason why you would like to write even longer content is because it's easier for you to rank for related keywords. So if you go to Google and you go for a search for certain key, would you just scroll down all the way in the bottom? And you can see related keywords in there. And when you're writing about a certain topic, it's more likely that you are including more related keywords long tail keywords in your copy in your text in your article in your blow post. And therefore, it's more likely that you can rank for even Mawr words like related keywords for your copy in Google. So because you're including more words with in your block post an article, you're more likely to include those related keywords so you can rancor, content for different types off keywords on Google. Awesome, right? But when you're sitting there and writing your content, make sure that you cut out all your fillers. Don't just keyword stuff, or just don't stuff your articles with unuseful content because you would like to write your articles longer, make sure that you're having a lot of valuable information because one ranking factor, as you already know, is time spent on a website. So if people are reading your blawg post and they're stopping at like this third sentence, for example, and they're bouncing out of your website and go to Google once again, then you're telling Google or this is telling Google, then this is giving a signal to Google that this is not helpful information. So cut out all your feelers. I just feel your content with valuable information that will help the end user. But you would like to include images and videos within your content because this is much more engaging. If you look on the screen right now, we have ridden and block post here and we have both included actually a YouTube video. You get assembly, embed a video within your blawg post, and this will automatically keep your audience more engaged and actually to stay on your website for a longer period of time, which is a ranking factor as you already know and also includes some images because this also makes it easier for your traffic to get more engaged with your content because some people they are imaginary like they're reading a text and they can come up with some images themselves. But if we helping everybody out here, we would like to include videos and or images. Okay, so why should you write longer content? Well, it's pretty clear right now, right? So long content ranks better on Google. That is a fact. Long content get more back links. That is also a fact. Long content get more social shares. Also a fact easier to rank for related keywords. This is also a fact because if you're including mawr words within your block posting articles, that is more likely for you to rank for related keywords. Long tail keywords. So somebody's going for a search on Google for one word, and another one is going for a related keywords. Now, if you're having that related keywords within your copy, you're more likely to rank on Google for more diversified keywords and make sure that you're cutting out all fillers. Just put invaluable information so that people who is reading your content is staying on your website for longer period of time. Then you will get better a CEO and then include images and videos with in your copy and you're good to go. Now It's your turn to write longer content, better information so that you rank even better on Google and in the bigger search engines for your keywords. Good luck now, and I'll see you in the next lecture. 151. Update Your Content: in this video, guys, I'm going to give you five different reasons on why you would like to have your content up to date at any time. So let's dive into it. So the first reason why you would like to update your content is simply because it's gives you better CT are better click through rate. If you look on the screen right now and you make a searching Google for make pancakes, then you can clearly see that in the top of Google Search were having the latest content up there and in the bottom in the third place, we're having on content that it's more outdated. So if you go to Google and you see that this piece of content is more updates, you're more likely to click that content right. Also, statistics backs this up then Google favors fresh content. If you look on the screen right now, you can see that this content is getting the most clicks. That is one of the reasons why it's ranking in the top results for make pancakes, for example, so Google favors fresh content. That is why you would like to keep your content updated. You also want to keep your content updated because it improves that use their experience. When somebody is clicking on your link on Google, for example, come to your block post and they see that your content it's up to date. They're more likely to engage in that piece of content now. If this would say, for example, 2017 people are actually less likely to read your content. So this is why you would like to have your content up to date, because this improves that user experience. When you're updating your content, you're able to link to new or better. Resource is, for example, to any off your newer blawg post, or maybe to another website that you are networking with ascending back links Back and forward with you are able to go into your content and update your links. You're able actually to go into your piece of content and just update the links within that post to get people to spend more time on your website, and also to send them outside of your website to helpful Resource is so that people known that your website is trust worthy, and then, lastly, this might be the biggest one of the more you would like to update your content because you can optimize your content for the right keywords. Now, if you have written a block post, for example, and you didn't really know when you wrote that bloke post on how to really find good keywords to rank for on Google, for example, and you've written your block post, you can actually go into that block post and you can read. Write some keywords within this. So if you know now which keywords that you would like to target, you just can go in and you can rewrite keywords that you would like to rank for, which is very, very helpful. So the biggest reason why you would like to keep your content updated? It's because it gives you better click through rate. Google favors fresh content. It will also improve the user experience because you can update your content with newer images on also with newer, more helpful content links, etcetera. And then you can go in and you can optimize your content for the right keywords that you would like to rank for in Google search. So now it's your turn. If you're having a lot off old bloke posts and articles. You can now go in and update that piece of content to rank better in Google and to make sure that the users on your website is getting the best possible experience on your website . So without further ado, I'll see you in the next video. 152. Internal Links: in this video, you're gonna learn on how to do internal linking in your website in order to have the traffic on a website for a longer period of time in order to increase our CEO. So let's dive into it. Okay, guys. So first of all, we would like to go to a website that is doing this very, very good smart, passive income patron is doing this very, very good. So if we go to any of his block post here randomly and you start to like scrolling down here, we're looking for links internal links, which means links with in his own website. So this is not back links. He has not back cling to any other website. He has done it. But for this we just looking for internal linking. So for example, as you can see here, you see us plain text here in gray. And then you see something pops up here in red. Now you can decide for yourself on your own website which ever color that you would like to go before with your internal links. Now, if I click this up in a new tab, for example, then we can see that that he's just linking to another Balog post. So if I scroll down here, you can see that this is a old block post from 2000 and 13. This is the value that we already have talked about in earlier lectures that you would like to go in and update your current content with all the links. Are you keeping your website fresh for Google? So when they're crawling your website winners skimming through all the website on the Web there, den finding out that your content in still up to date, it doesn't matter that it is from 2000 and 13 it's still being linked. So if we go into the block post once again, keep on scrolling down a little bit, we can see one more link here, actually. So I opened this up in a new tab also, and you can see that he is linking to an actual freebie on how to email the smart way. But here's the trick. He would like you to get a free copy by clicking this link and then entering your email address. So within his own blawg post, he is collecting email addresses with an internal link. Now you can do the same. You can actually go to your block post and link another page. Maybe a product page. Maybe you're selling like physical products. You can definitely within your own block post. You could definitely us link to another website within your website to keep people to stay on your website for a longer period of time. So we're gonna go to Wordpress right now, and I'm going to show you on how to do this step by step. So now we're inside off the back end off our website. So this is a blood post that we created. And in here we could actually just linked to another bloke post or another page within our own website. And this is because we would like to traffic to stay for a longer period of time in order to maybe buy something from us, maybe to sign up on an email or to read more blawg post and content from us in order to connect on a deeper level. So if I scroll down in this block post, then in the bottom here, you can see if you want a monster Digital marketing Kilic here now Okay, Just click here and just highlight this area here and just click this little chain here. There's little link here, and then I can type in the U R l here. So I'm going to go to another page here. We're gonna go to Robin E. Yes, but dot com Actually, it's gonna click Enter here, and then we're going to click on start here because we would like to redirect from within or block Post. We would like to redirect the traffic to this page so that they are eventually clicking on any off these courses and enrolling in these courses. So I'm gonna take this start here. You were l here, and I'm going to go back to this block post and I'm gonna pay study well in here, and enemy is gonna click this apply and then click on update. So now we're having one internal link that it's not only helping our audience to find better content like our courses, for example, were also possibly making money eventually further down the line with internal linking within our block post. So now it's your turn. Really? To use internal links, you can use it for older articles and block post. You can link to an email list. Often you can link to your product pages, etcetera, but use internal ings. With this way. We're telling Google that we're having helpful content because people are spending more time on their website. So good luck with internal linking and I'll see you in the next lecture. 153. Backlinks Explained: Now in these video guys, we're gonna talk about something called back links. What are they and how can we use them in order to rank higher in Google's search? Let's dive into it where, like some of you may know, back links is one of the most important factors when it comes to ranking on Google. So what are they? Well, first of all, back links is basically when you linking any type of content or website on another website . So, for example, you're having somebody within your niche and you're telling them Well, I have great content on my blawg and I think that I can support your content that you're having on your blog's. So please, can you just link my website to this article on your block post and for example, that website is having an external link on the website from your website and you can do the same back in former. This is what back linking is and before you back, linking to any websites whatsoever on the Web. To do it effectively, you would like to have something called high quality back link. Now, whatever I mean with high quality back Ling's back links, which comes from high a toy to websites. Now. If you're new in the game, you just set up your website. You would like to create back links that comes from websites that are already having some kind of authority and make sure that they are related to your topic. Like, for example, apple. They are a high a Tory to website. They have a lot of back links. They have a lot of customers. They are basically just a huge website and a huge company now well, something that you may think is well. They can basically is back ling to any websites, and that website will move up in rank. That is not totally correct. If you look at this, for example, they could rank to Levi's, for example, right Well, Apple is selling like computer stuff or they're selling cellphones, etcetera like technical stuff. But Levi's they're selling Dean's and shoes, shirts and so on, so this is not a good option. He would always like to have back links from websites that are within the same category, so this wouldn't be much better if Apple would basically send back links back and forward with Samsung now these are two very high it toward the websites. They're having higher toward the on the web, so they are already ranking very, very good. But you would like to have back links from related website websites within the same topic and niche that you are within. Because then we're telling Google that this is great content. So what can back links due to you? Well, they can improve your organic ranking. So let's say that you already are ranking on Google well, with a lot of back links from high a Torito website and websites that are related to whatever topic that you are within. Then you can move up the rank organically and that is exactly what we're off there, right? So this can improve your organic ranking when doing back links the right way. Now you will not only improve organic ranking, you will also get found faster. Now, let's say that this is your website and you're totally alone on the Internet. You creating awesome content that you don't understand. Why am I not ranking Well, if you have a couple of friends that are back linking to your website, you will definitely get found even faster and then with back links, you can also get referral traffic. Let's say that on website within your nation's writing an awesome blawg post. Now, if they're linking back linking to your website, you dent will also get referral traffic. If anybody is clicking on this link within this block post, then you will get referral traffic to your website. Awesome, right? Because this link is a back link to your website, maybe to a block post, maybe to a video or helpful article, and therefore you will get mawr traffic to your website. Awesome. So by networking, in other words, back linking back and forward between website with in your niche create this valuable Hyatt authority back links related back wings. You didn't will have a bigger chance on ranking on Google. So first of all, what is back link back link is when you are linking back and forth between websites. High quality back link is the key here and also related back links within your niche. Find those websites and then what it does is basically improves your organic ranking. You will get found faster on Google and you will get referral traffic If doing this right now. In this entire session, we will young through step by step on how to create valuable Hyatt Authority back links. So follow along to the next lecture and I'll see you there. 154. The Skyscraper Technique: in this video, guys, we're going to talk about something called the Skyscraper Technique, founded by a guy called Brian Deane at Back Link. Oh, this is a technique that will give you better high quality back links, which makes your content rank even better in Google search. So let's dive into the technique. So let's go over this skyscraper technique step by step. First step is find well performing content content that is already getting tons off. Likes shares, comments, back links, etcetera. Let's go to a Web page and find out where you can find content that fits your topic and your keywords. They just simply go to something called Bassam. We have the link in. The resource is for this video click on Content Analyzer. And then here you will type in the keyword that you would like to rank your content after on Google, for example. So let's say poured costing and then go for a search. Then you can see some results here, which is getting ah, lot off. Engagement such as Facebook likes Twitter shares, Pinterest chairs, etcetera. You simply is. Go into any of this posts and your scroll through it. This is the first step. And then once you found well performing content, which is getting tons of likes shares and back links, etcetera on this bus UMA Web page, then the next step is to create better content. What I mean with better content, is read this block post, for example, see what parts of it. It's good and then go more in depth on this topic. And, as you already know by now that longer content tend to perform better in Google search. So just write Maurin depth mawr information content around this topic, and then you would like to design the content even better. If you look on the screen right now, once again, this doesn't look too engaging, does it? Well, it's well written, but it's not the signing wise good. So you would like to design the content even better to keep the traffic on your website and on your block posts an article for as long time as you possibly can. With that said, including images and maybe videos, etcetera will keep the engagement rates higher, and the traffic will spend more time on your block post and then, once you've created better, more in depth information content on your blog's or in your articles, and you have designed it even better to get more engagement with your posts such as shares . Likes etcetera, comments. Then what you would like to do is with that type of content you would like to reach out to high a Tory to websites. What do I mean with that? Well, basically, just send them our e mail. Just open up a new email and send that email to high a toy to websites within your niche that you can network with back and forward in order to send them an email and email. But you have to be human here. You don't want to be like sending emails back and forward to people saying, Hey, please, can you just back link my stuff? I would like to have back links from your website so I can rank better in Google search. No, you have to be a human. But don't forget that the point with reaching out with a email to the Hyatt Torito websites is to make them link your content on their website. So you get those high quality back wings for your website so that we're telling Google that you are having a lot of valuable information on your Web page and that they should rank your website and your content high in Google search. So, for example, an email can look something like this. Hi, Pat. We just read your content about how to start our pod cost. Now you already are telling them that you are engaging in their content which they will like and then and just want to do tuning and say that it was great compliment them on their content is important. We did too in the beginning feel like it was difficult market or pod cost. Luckily, it turned out well for both of us. Just wanted to tell you that we have written a large guide on how to market your podcast. Now we're giving some value. Were telling this website owner that we have something in store for them. Go and check it out and tell us what you thought about it. And then we have linked it down below. Here you can see the blue text with underline. That is the link. But we're not telling them to back link anything. We're telling them to shake this out. And if they like this content, they will definitely back link our content on their block, which is awesome. So this is the right way to use the skyscraper technique that Brian Deane has come up with . I love this technique, and you should definitely go out and use it. So first of all, find well performing content. Go to BA Sumo Link in the resource is then create better content than that type of content that is already getting tons of likes shares and comments and engagement. Then they signed your piece of content even better, using images and if you can, videos very, very important to keep all the traffic on your website mawr engaging and then reach out to the high it toward the websites within your niche. If it don't know who they are, you have to go to Google and search them out and then be a human. When you're writing this email to this websites and write as many as you possibly can and make them personal, pointing out that their content is great and don't forget the angle that is to get high quality back links from these websites. So good luck with skyscraper technique, and I'll see you in the next video